Sample Document

Preface
Fundamental safety
instructions 1
Introduction 2
SINUMERIK
NC variables 3
SINUMERIK 840D sl
NC variables and interface signals
Interface signals - overview 4
Interface signals - detailed
description 5
List Manual
Appendix A A
Valid for
Control system
SINUMERIK 840D sl / 840DE sl
Software
CNC software version 4.8 SP3
08/2018
6FC5397-3CP40-6BA2
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Document order number: 6FC5397-3CP40-6BA2 Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 - 2018.

Ⓟ 08/2018 Subject to change All rights reserved
Preface
SINUMERIK documentation
The SINUMERIK documentation is organized into the following categories:
● General documentation/catalogs
● User documentation
● Manufacturer/service documentation
Additional information
You can find information on the following topics at the following address (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/108464614):
● Ordering documentation/overview of documentation
● Additional links to download documents
● Using documentation online (find and search in manuals/information)
If you have any questions regarding the technical documentation (e.g. suggestions,
corrections), please send an e-mail to the following address
(mailto:docu.motioncontrol@siemens.com).
mySupport/Documentation
At the following address (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation),
you can find information on how to create your own individual documentation based on
Siemens' content, and adapt it for your own machine documentation.
Training
At the following address (http://www.siemens.com/sitrain), you can find information about
SITRAIN (Siemens training on products, systems and solutions for automation and drives).
FAQs
You can find Frequently Asked Questions in the Service&Support pages under Product
Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/ps/faq).
SINUMERIK
You can find information about SINUMERIK at the following address (http://
www.siemens.com/sinumerik).

List Manual, 08/2018, 6FC5397-3CP40-6BA2 3
Preface
Target group
This publication is intended for project engineers, commissioning engineers, machine
operators and service and maintenance personnel.
Benefits
The intended target group can use the Parameter Manual to test and commission the
system or the plant correctly and safely.
Utilization phase: Setup and commissioning phase
Standard scope
This documentation describes the functionality of the standard scope. Extensions or
changes made by the machine manufacturer are documented by the machine manufacturer.
Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the control. This
does not, however, represent an obligation to supply such functions with a new control or
when servicing.
Furthermore, for the sake of clarity, this documentation does not contain all detailed
information about all types of the product and cannot cover every conceivable case of
installation, operation or maintenance.
Technical Support
Country-specific telephone numbers for technical support are provided in the Internet at the
following address (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2090) in the "Contact"
area.

4 List Manual, 08/2018, 6FC5397-3CP40-6BA2
Table of contents
Preface................................................................................................................................................. ........3
1 Fundamental safety instructions.................................................................................................................25
1.1 General safety instructions.....................................................................................................25
1.2 Warranty and liability for application examples................................................................ ......25
1.3 Industrial security............................................................................................................. ......26
2 Introduction.................................................................................................................................................29
2.1 NC variables...........................................................................................................................29
2.2 Interface signals............................................................................................................... ......29
2.3 References.............................................................................................................................30
3 NC variables......................................................................................................................................... ......33
3.1 Explanations on the NC variables.................................................................................... ......33
3.1.1 NC areas.......................................................................................................................... ......33
3.1.2 Data blocks...................................................................................................................... ......33
3.1.3 Variable types.................................................................................................................. ......36
3.1.4 Data types........................................................................................................................ ......38
3.1.5 Structure of the data tables.............................................................................................. ......39
3.2 NC variable descriptions.................................................................................................. ......39
3.2.1 Axis: Axis-Specific Basic Settings.................................................................................... ......39
3.2.1.1 M: Machine data.....................................................................................................................39
3.2.1.2 SE: Setting data............................................................................................................... ......94
3.2.2 Bag: Mode Group Data.................................................................................................... ....101
3.2.2.1 S: State data.................................................................................................................... ....101
3.2.3 Channel: Channel-assigned data.........................................................................................103
3.2.3.1 AUXFU: Active auxiliary functions........................................................................................103
3.2.3.2 CP: Generic coupling....................................................................................................... ....107
3.2.3.3 DIAG: Diagnostics data, available only for internal development purposes.........................120
3.2.3.4 DIAGN: Diagnostic module.............................................................................................. ....126
3.2.3.5 EPSP: Reserved for internal use only (ePS)........................................................................132
3.2.3.6 ETP: Event types............................................................................................................. ....135
3.2.3.7 FA: Active Work Offset.........................................................................................................144
3.2.3.8 FB: Base Frame............................................................................................................... ....146
3.2.3.9 FE: External Work Offset................................................................................................. ....148
3.2.3.10 FG: Frames for grinding applications............................................................................... ....150
3.2.3.11 FS: System Frame........................................................................................................... ....152
3.2.3.12 FU: Settable Work Offset................................................................................................. ....154
3.2.3.13 M: Machine data...................................................................................................................156
3.2.3.14 NIB: Nibbling data............................................................................................................ ....204
3.2.3.15 O: Internal........................................................................................................................ ....206
3.2.3.16 PA: Protection zones............................................................................................................207
3.2.3.17 RP: Arithmetic parameter.....................................................................................................226
3.2.3.18 S: State data.................................................................................................................... ....226

Table of contents
3.2.3.19 SE: Setting data............................................................................................................... ....374

3.2.3.20 SEGA: Extended state in the WCS.................................................................................. ....378
3.2.3.21 SEMA: Extended state data in MCS................................................................................ ....400
3.2.3.22 SGA: State data in the WCS............................................................................................ ....485
3.2.3.23 SINF: Part program-specific state data............................................................................ ....491
3.2.3.24 SMA: State data in the MCS............................................................................................ ....495
3.2.3.25 SNCF: Active G-functions................................................................................................ ....498
3.2.3.26 SPARP: Part program information................................................................................... ....501
3.2.3.27 SPARPF: Search pointer for block search...................................................................... ....516
3.2.3.28 SPARPI: Program pointer at interruption......................................................................... ....521
3.2.3.29 SPARPP: Program pointer in automatic operation mode................................................ ....525
3.2.3.30 SSP: State data spindle................................................................................................... ....533
3.2.3.31 SSP2: Spindle status data for spindle conversion........................................................... ....549
3.2.3.32 SSYNAC: Synchronous actions....................................................................................... ....565
3.2.3.33 SYNACT: Channel-specific synchronous actions............................................................ ....569
3.2.3.34 TO: Tool offsets....................................................................................................................573
3.2.3.35 VSYN: NCK-specific user variable for synchronous actions............................................ ....574
3.2.3.36 WAL: Working area limitation...............................................................................................576
3.2.3.37 Y: System data.....................................................................................................................578
3.2.4 DriveHsa: Main spindle drive data................................................................................... ....590
3.2.4.1 S: State data.................................................................................................................... ....590
3.2.5 Drive: HMI data................................................................................................................ ....591
3.2.5.1 S: State data.................................................................................................................... ....591
3.2.6 Nck: NC data........................................................................................................................592
3.2.6.1 CP: Generic coupling....................................................................................................... ....592
3.2.6.2 DIAG: Diagnostics data, available only for internal development purposes.........................596
3.2.6.3 DIAGN: Diagnostic module.............................................................................................. ....601
3.2.6.4 ETPD: Data list for protocolling........................................................................................ ....637
3.2.6.5 FA: Active Work Offset.........................................................................................................639
3.2.6.6 FB: Base Frame............................................................................................................... ....641
3.2.6.7 FG: Frames for grinding applications............................................................................... ....643
3.2.6.8 FU: Settable Work Offset................................................................................................. ....645
3.2.6.9 M: Machine data...................................................................................................................647
3.2.6.10 O: Internal........................................................................................................................ ....688
3.2.6.11 PA: Protection zones............................................................................................................692
3.2.6.12 RP: Arithmetic parameter.....................................................................................................745
3.2.6.13 S: State data.................................................................................................................... ....745
3.2.6.14 SALA: Alarm list, oldest alarm..............................................................................................866
3.2.6.15 SALAC: Alarm actions, oldest alarm................................................................................ ....869
3.2.6.16 SALAL: Alarm list, most recent alarm.............................................................................. ....873
3.2.6.17 SALAP: Alarm list, highest priority alarm......................................................................... ....876
3.2.6.18 SD: Servo data.....................................................................................................................879
3.2.6.19 SE: Setting data............................................................................................................... ....975
3.2.6.20 SEMA: Extended state data in MCS................................................................................ ....982
3.2.6.21 SMA: State data in the MCS............................................................................................ ..1066
3.2.6.22 SSP: State data spindle................................................................................................... ..1069
3.2.6.23 SSP2: Spindle status data for spindle conversion........................................................... ..1085
3.2.6.24 VSYN: NCK-specific user variable for synchronous actions............................................ ..1100
3.2.6.25 Y: System data...................................................................................................................1100
3.2.6.26 YFAFL: NCK instruction group list (Fanuc)...................................................................... ..1129
3.2.6.27 YNCFL: NCK instruction group list.....................................................................................1130
3.2.7 Tool: Tool Data...................................................................................................................1131

Table of contents
3.2.7.1 AD: Adapter data................................................................................................................1131

3.2.7.2 AEV: Working offsets: Directory.........................................................................................1132
3.2.7.3 MTAD: Application-specific multi-tool data.........................................................................1135
3.2.7.4 MTAP: Application-specific multi-tool place data............................................................. ..1136
3.2.7.5 MTD: Multi-tool data, general data.....................................................................................1136
3.2.7.6 MTP: Multi-tool data, place data...................................................................................... ..1142
3.2.7.7 MTUD: Multi-tool data, user-defined data........................................................................ ..1142
3.2.7.8 MTUP: Multi-tool place user data.......................................................................................1143
3.2.7.9 MTV: Multi-tool data, directory......................................................................................... ..1143
3.2.7.10 TAD: Application-specific data......................................................................................... ..1146
3.2.7.11 TAM: Application-specific magazine data........................................................................ ..1146
3.2.7.12 TAMD: Application-specific magazine data double............................................................1147
3.2.7.13 TAO: Application-specific tool edge data......................................................................... ..1148
3.2.7.14 TAP: Application-specific magazine location data........................................................... ..1149
3.2.7.15 TAPD: Application-specific magazine location data double............................................. ..1150
3.2.7.16 TAS: Application-specific monitoring data..........................................................................1151
3.2.7.17 TC: Toolholder parameters.............................................................................................. ..1152
3.2.7.18 TD: Tool data, general data............................................................................................. ..1170
3.2.7.19 TDC: Tool parameters of the Siemens application.......................................................... ..1178
3.2.7.20 TF: Used as parameter and return value of the PI-Services _N_TMGETT and
_N_TSEARC.................................................................................................................... ..1179
3.2.7.21 TG: Tool data, grinding-specific data............................................................................... ..1193
3.2.7.22 TISO: ISO tool offset data................................................................................................ ..1197
3.2.7.23 TM: Magazine data, general data.................................................................................... ..1197
3.2.7.24 TMC: Magazine data, configuration data......................................................................... ..1204
3.2.7.25 TMV: Magazine data, directory........................................................................................ ..1213
3.2.7.26 TO: Tool offsets..................................................................................................................1214
3.2.7.27 TOE: Edge-related location-dependent coarse total offsets, setup offsets...................... ..1216
3.2.7.28 TOET: Edge-related location-dependent coarse total offsets, transformed setup offsets..1217
3.2.7.29 TOS: Edge-related positional fine total offsets...................................................................1218
3.2.7.30 TOST: Edge-related location-dependent total offsets, transformed...................................1220
3.2.7.31 TOT: Edge data, transformed offset data...........................................................................1221
3.2.7.32 TP: Magazine location data................................................................................................1223
3.2.7.33 TPM: Magazine data, multiple assignment of place data...................................................1226
3.2.7.34 TS: Tool monitoring data....................................................................................................1227
3.2.7.35 TT: Magazine location data................................................................................................1228
3.2.7.36 TU: Tool data for OEM..................................................................................................... ..1229
3.2.7.37 TUE: Tool edge data for OEM............................................................................................1230
3.2.7.38 TUM: Mgazine user data....................................................................................................1231
3.2.7.39 TUMD: User magazine data double...................................................................................1231
3.2.7.40 TUP: Magazine place user data.........................................................................................1232
3.2.7.41 TUPD: User magazine location data double.................................................................... ..1232
3.2.7.42 TUS: User monitoring data.................................................................................................1233
3.2.7.43 TV: Tool data, directory......................................................................................................1234
3.2.8 DriveVsa: Feed drive data..................................................................................................1236
3.2.8.1 M: Machine data.................................................................................................................1236
3.2.8.2 S: State data.................................................................................................................... ..1238
4 Interface signals - overview.................................................................................................................. ..1239
4.1 Overview of the PLC blocks............................................................................................. ..1239
4.1.1 Organization blocks (OBs)............................................................................................... ..1239
4.1.2 Function blocks (FBs)...................................................................................................... ..1239

Table of contents
4.1.3 Function blocks (FCs)...................................................................................................... ..1240

4.1.4 Data blocks (DBs)............................................................................................................ ..1240
4.1.5 Timer block.........................................................................................................................1241
4.2 Signals from/to the machine control panel....................................................................... ..1242
4.2.1 M version, signals from the MCP: Input image................................................................ ..1242
4.2.2 M version, signals to the MCP: Output image....................................................................1242
4.2.3 T version, signals from the MCP: Input image................................................................. ..1243
4.2.4 T version, signals to the MCP: Output image.....................................................................1244
4.2.5 Slimline version, signals from the MCP: Input image.........................................................1244
4.2.6 Slimline version, signals to the MCP: Output image........................................................ ..1245
4.3 Signals from/to the handheld unit HT 2..............................................................................1246
4.3.1 Signals from the handheld unit: Input image......................................................................1246
4.3.2 Signals to the handheld unit: Output image..................................................................... ..1246
4.4 Signals from/to the handheld unit HT 8..............................................................................1248
4.4.1 Signals from the MCP simulation: Input image................................................................ ..1248
4.4.2 Signals to the MCP simulation: Output image....................................................................1248
4.5 PLC alarms/messages..................................................................................................... ..1249
4.5.1 FC 10 alarms in the DB2 (FB1: "ExtendAIMsg" = FALSE).............................................. ..1249
4.5.2 FC 10 alarms in the DB2 (FB1: "ExtendAIMsg" = TRUE)................................................ ..1259
4.6 Signals from/to the NC, PLC and operating software...................................................... ..1272
4.6.1 DB10, onboard inputs and outputs of the NC.................................................................. ..1272
4.6.2 DB10, general signals to the NC........................................................................................1274
4.6.3 DB10, onboard inputs and outputs from the NC/operating software..................................1274
4.6.4 DB10, selection and status signals from the operating software..................................... ..1275
4.6.5 DB10, general signals from the NC....................................................................................1277
4.6.6 DB10, external digital NC inputs...................................................................................... ..1279
4.6.7 DB10, external digital NC outputs.................................................................................... ..1280
4.6.8 DB10, external analog NC inputs.......................................................................................1281
4.6.9 DB10, external analog NC outputs.....................................................................................1282
4.6.10 DB10, external digital NC inputs and outputs.................................................................. ..1283
4.6.11 DB10, analog NC inputs and outputs.................................................................................1283
4.6.12 DB10, collision avoidance: Protection area active........................................................... ..1284
4.6.13 DB10, collision avoidance: Activate protection area........................................................ ..1285
4.6.14 DB10, extension, handwheel signals from the NC.............................................................1286
4.6.15 DB10, interface robot status...............................................................................................1286
4.6.16 DB10, interface robot status...............................................................................................1287
4.7 Mode group-specific signals...............................................................................................1287
4.7.1 DB11, mode signals 1 to the NC........................................................................................1287
4.7.2 DB11, mode signals 1 from the NC....................................................................................1288
4.7.3 DB11, mode signals 2 to the NC........................................................................................1289
4.7.4 DB11, mode signals 2 from NC..........................................................................................1289
4.8 Safety Integrated (SPL)......................................................................................................1290
4.8.1 DB18, parameterization part............................................................................................ ..1290
4.8.2 DB18, data area / errors.....................................................................................................1290
4.8.3 DB18, additional data areas...............................................................................................1292
4.8.4 DB18, F_SENDDP sender............................................................................................... ..1293
4.8.5 DB18, F_SENDDP receiver............................................................................................. ..1293
4.8.6 DB18, SPL user data....................................................................................................... ..1294
4.8.7 DB18, data area / errors: Extended data area................................................................. ..1295

Table of contents
4.8.8 DB18, additional data areas: Extended data area........................................................... ..1297

4.9 Control/status signals to/from operator panel (OP)............................................................1298
4.9.1 DB19, signals to the operator panel (OP)........................................................................ ..1298
4.9.2 DB19, signals from the operator panel (OP).................................................................... ..1299
4.9.3 DB19, sidescreen - interface for the MCP function.......................................................... ..1304
4.9.4 DB19, sidescreen - interface for the MCP function.......................................................... ..1304
4.10 Defining PLC alarms........................................................................................................ ..1305
4.10.1 DB20, NC machine data.................................................................................................. ..1305
4.11 Channel-specific signals.................................................................................................. ..1307
4.11.1 DB21 - DB30, control signals to the channel (1).............................................................. ..1307
4.11.2 DB21 - DB30, control signals to the geometry axes........................................................ ..1309
4.11.3 DB21 - DB30, HMI signals to channel / OEM signals from/to channel............................ ..1311
4.11.4 DB21 - DB30, control signals from the geometry axes.................................................... ..1314
4.11.5 DB21 - DB30, change signals for auxiliary function transfer from the channel ............... ..1316
4.11.6 DB21 - DB30, transferred M and S functions:....................................................................1317
4.11.7 DB21 - DB30, transferred T/D/DL functions.......................................................................1318
4.11.8 DB21 - DB30, transferred H/F functions.......................................................................... ..1319
4.11.9 DB21 - DB30, decoded M signals.................................................................................... ..1320
4.11.10 DB21 - DB30, active G functions..................................................................................... ..1321
4.11.11 DB21 - DB30, protection areas from the channel............................................................ ..1322
4.11.12 DB21 - DB30, synchronous actions, signals from/to the channel.................................... ..1323
4.11.13 DB21 - DB30, control signals from/to the channel........................................................... ..1324
4.11.14 DB21 - DB30, signals to the orientation axes.................................................................. ..1325
4.11.15 DB21 - DB30, signals from the orientation axes.............................................................. ..1327
4.11.16 DB21 - DB30, tool management functions from the channel .......................................... ..1329
4.11.17 DB21 - DB30, control signals from/to the channel (2)........................................................1329
4.12 Axis/spindle signals............................................................................................................1332
4.12.1 DB31 - DB61, signals to the axis/spindle......................................................................... ..1332
4.12.2 DB31 - DB61, signals from the axis/spindle.......................................................................1337
4.13 Safety Integrated................................................................................................................1346
4.13.1 DB31 - DB61, Safety Control Channel (SCC)....................................................................1346
4.13.2 DB31 - DB61, Safety Info Channel (SIC)......................................................................... ..1346
4.14 Tool management............................................................................................................ ..1347
4.14.1 DB71, interface for loading/unloading the magazine....................................................... ..1347
4.14.2 DB72, interface for the spindle as change position............................................................1349
4.14.3 DB73, interface for the turret..............................................................................................1351
4.15 Signals from/to the machine control panel and the handheld unit................................... ..1353
4.15.1 DB77, signals from/to the MCP and the HHU.................................................................. ..1353
4.16 Signals for Ctrl-Energy..................................................................................................... ..1354
4.16.1 DB1000, energy-saving profiles....................................................................................... ..1354
4.17 SENTRON PAC............................................................................................................... ..1356
4.17.1 DB1001, SENTRON PAC................................................................................................ ..1356
4.17.2 DB1001, SENTRON PAC, auxiliary devices......................................................................1358
4.18 Spindle temperature sensor............................................................................................. ..1360
4.18.1 DB1002: spindle temperature sensors...............................................................................1360
4.19 Interface to the tool management, extended area........................................................... ..1362
4.19.1 DB1071, interface for loading/unloading the magazine Multitool..................................... ..1362

Table of contents
4.19.2 DB1072, interface for the spindle: Multitool..................................................................... ..1363

4.19.3 DB1073, interface for the turret: Multitool........................................................................ ..1364
4.20 Access to SINAMICS signals via PLC............................................................................. ..1365
4.20.1 DB1002, Active Line Module (ALM)................................................................................. ..1365
5 Interface signals - detailed description................................................................................................. ..1367
5.1 DB10: NC, PLC and HMI................................................................................................. ..1367
5.1.1 DB10 DBX0.0 - 7 (digital NC inputs 1 - 8: Lock).............................................................. ..1367
5.1.2 DB10 DBX1.0 - 7 (digital NC inputs 1 - 8: Set)................................................................ ..1367
5.1.3 DB10 DBX4.0 - 7 (digital NC outputs 1 - 8: Lock)............................................................ ..1368
5.1.4 DB10 DBX5.0 - 7 (digital NC outputs 1 - 8: Overwrite).................................................... ..1368
5.1.5 DB10 DBX6.0 - 7 (digital NC outputs 1 - 8: Setting value).................................................1369
5.1.6 DB10 DBX7.0 - 7 (digital NC outputs 1 - 8: Target)......................................................... ..1370
5.1.7 DB10 DBX56.1 (Emergency Stop).....................................................................................1370
5.1.8 DB10 DBX56.2 (acknowledge Emergency Stop)...............................................................1371
5.1.9 DB10 DBX56.4 - 7 (key-operated switch position 0 - 3).....................................................1371
5.1.10 DB10 DBX58.0 - 7 (collision avoidance: Deactivate protection area group)......................1372
5.1.11 DB10 DBX60.0 - 7 (digital NC inputs 1 - 8: Actual value)................................................ ..1373
5.1.12 DB10 DBX64.0 - 7 (digital NC outputs 1 - 8: Setpoint).................................................... ..1373
5.1.13 DB10 DBX93.0 ... 7 (collision avoidance: Deactivate protection area group).................. ..1374
5.1.14 DB10 DBX97.0 - 3 (channel number geometry axis handwheel 1)....................................1375
5.1.17 DB10 DBX100.0 - 4 (axis number handwheel 1)............................................................. ..1376
5.1.18 DB10 DBX100.5 (define handwheel 1 as contour handwheel)........................................ ..1376
5.1.19 DB10 DBX100.6 (handwheel 1 selected)...........................................................................1377
5.1.20 DB10 DBX100.7 (machine axis handwheel 1)................................................................. ..1378
5.1.29 DB10 DBX103.0 (remote diagnosis active)........................................................................1380
5.1.30 DB10 DBX103.5 (AT box ready)...................................................................................... ..1380
5.1.31 DB10 DBX103.6 (HMI temperature limit)......................................................................... ..1380
5.1.32 DB10 DBX103.7 (HMI battery alarm).................................................................................1381
5.1.33 DB10 DBX104.7 (NC-CPU ready)................................................................................... ..1381
5.1.34 DB10 DBX106.1 (Emergency Stop active)...................................................................... ..1381
5.1.35 DB10 DBX107.0 - 1 (probe actuated).............................................................................. ..1382
5.1.36 DB10 DBX107.6 (NCU link active).....................................................................................1382
5.1.37 DB10 DBX108.3 (operating software ready)......................................................................1382
5.1.38 DB10 DBX108.5 (drives in cyclic operation).................................................................... ..1383
5.1.39 DB10 DBX108.6 (drive ready)............................................................................................1383
5.1.40 DB10 DBX108.7 (NC ready)............................................................................................ ..1383
5.1.41 DB10 DBX109.0 (NC alarm active)....................................................................................1384
5.1.42 DB10 DBX109.5 (heat sink temperature alarm, NCU).......................................................1385
5.1.43 DB10 DBX109.6 (air temperature alarm)......................................................................... ..1385
5.1.44 DB10 DBX109.7 (NC battery alarm)................................................................................ ..1385
5.1.45 DB10 DBX110.0 - 113.7 (software cams: minus cam signal 1 to 32).............................. ..1386

Table of contents
5.1.46 DB10 DBX114.0 - 117.7 (software cams: plus cam signal 1 to 32)................................. ..1386
5.1.47 DB10 DBX122.0 - 7 (digital NC inputs 9 - 16: Lock)........................................................ ..1387
5.1.48 DB10 DBX123.0 - 7 (digital NC inputs 9 - 16: Set).......................................................... ..1387
5.1.49 DB10 DBX124.0 - 7 (digital NC inputs 17 - 24: Lock)...................................................... ..1388
5.1.50 DB10 DBX125.0 - 7 (digital NC inputs 17 - 24: Set)........................................................ ..1388
5.1.55 DB10 DBX130.0 - 7 (digital NC outputs 9 - 16: Lock)...................................................... ..1391
5.1.56 DB10 DBX131.0 - 7 (digital NC outputs 9 - 16: Overwrite).............................................. ..1391
5.1.57 DB10 DBX132.0 - 7 (digital NC outputs 9 - 16: Setting value)...........................................1392
5.1.58 DB10 DBX133.0 - 7 (digital NC outputs 9 - 16: Target)................................................... ..1393
5.1.59 DB10 DBX134.0 - 7 (digital NC outputs 17 - 24: Lock).................................................... ..1393
5.1.60 DB10 DBX135.0 - 7 (digital NC outputs 17 - 24: Overwrite)............................................ ..1394
5.1.61 DB10 DBX136.0 - 7 (digital NC outputs 17 - 24: Setting value).........................................1394
5.1.62 DB10 DBX137.0 - 7 (digital NC outputs 17 - 24: Target)................................................. ..1395
5.1.71 DB10 DBX146.0 - 7 (analog NC inputs 1 - 8: Lock)...........................................................1401
5.1.72 DB10 DBX147.0 - 7 (analog NC inputs 1 - 8: Target)...................................................... ..1401
5.1.73 DB10 DBW148 - 162 (analog NC outputs 1 - 8: Setting value)....................................... ..1402
5.1.74 DB10 DBX166.0 - 7 (analog NC outputs 1 - 8: Overwrite).................................................1402
5.1.75 DB10 DBX167.0 - 7 (analog NC outputs 1 - 8: Target)......................................................1403
5.1.76 DB10 DBX168.0 - 7 (analog NC outputs 1 - 8: Lock).........................................................1403
5.1.77 DB10 DBW170 - 184 (analog NC outputs 1 - 8: Setting value)....................................... ..1404
5.1.78 DB10 DBX186.0 - 7 (digital NC inputs 9 - 16: Actual value)............................................ ..1405
5.1.79 DB10 DBX187.0 - 7 (digital NC inputs 17 - 24: Actual value).......................................... ..1405
5.1.82 DB10 DBX190.0 - 7 (digital NC outputs 9 - 16: Setpoint)................................................ ..1407
5.1.83 DB10 DBX191.0 - 7 (digital NC outputs 17 - 24: Setpoint).............................................. ..1407
5.1.86 DB10 DBW194 - 208 (analog NC inputs 1 - 8: Actual value).............................................1409
5.1.87 DB10 DBW210 - 224 (analog NC outputs 1 - 8: Setpoint)............................................... ..1409
5.1.88 DB10 DBX226.0 - 233.7 (collision avoidance: Protection area active)............................ ..1410
5.1.89 DB10 DBX234.0 - 241.7 (collision avoidance: Activate protection area)......................... ..1410
5.1.90 DB10 DBX245.0 - 5 (Ethernet handwheel stationary)........................................................1411
5.2 DB11: Mode group........................................................................................................... ..1412
5.2.1 DB11 DBX0.0 (AUTOMATIC mode)................................................................................ ..1412
5.2.2 DB11 DBX0.1 (MDI mode).................................................................................................1412
5.2.3 DB11 DBX0.2 (JOG mode).............................................................................................. ..1412
5.2.4 DB11 DBX0.4 (mode change inhibit)............................................................................... ..1413
5.2.5 DB11 DBX0.5 (mode group stop).................................................................................... ..1413
5.2.6 DB11 DBX0.6 (mode group stop, axes plus spindles)..................................................... ..1414

Table of contents
5.2.7 DB11 DBX0.7 (mode group reset)................................................................................... ..1415

5.2.8 DB11 DBX1.0 (TEACH IN machine function).................................................................. ..1415
5.2.9 DB11 DBX1.1 (REPOS machine function).........................................................................1416
5.2.10 DB11 DBX1.2 (REF machine function)............................................................................ ..1416
5.2.11 DB11 DBX1.6 (single block, type B)................................................................................ ..1416
5.2.12 DB11 DBX1.7 (single block, type A)................................................................................ ..1417
5.2.13 DB11 DBX4.0 (AUTOMATIC mode selected)....................................................................1418
5.2.14 DB11 DBX4.1 (MDI mode selected)................................................................................ ..1418
5.2.15 DB11 DBX4.2 (JOG mode selected)..................................................................................1418
5.2.16 DB11 DBX5.0 (TEACH IN machine function selected).................................................... ..1418
5.2.17 DB11 DBX5.1 (REPOS machine function selected)........................................................ ..1419
5.2.18 DB11 DBX5.2 (REF machine function selected)................................................................1419
5.2.19 DB11 DBX6.0 (AUTOMATIC mode active)........................................................................1419
5.2.20 DB11 DBX6.1 (active MDI mode).................................................................................... ..1420
5.2.21 DB11 DBX6.2 (JOG mode active)......................................................................................1420
5.2.22 DB11 DBX6.3 (mode group ready).................................................................................. ..1420
5.2.23 DB11 DBX6.7 (all channels in the "Reset" state)...............................................................1421
5.2.24 DB11 DBX7.0 (TEACH IN machine function active)........................................................ ..1421
5.2.25 DB11 DBX7.1 (REPOS machine function active)............................................................ ..1421
5.2.26 DB11 DBX7.2 (REF machine function active)....................................................................1422
5.3 DB18: Safety Integrated, SPL.......................................................................................... ..1422
5.3.1 DB18 DBB36.0 (SPL_READY)........................................................................................ ..1422
5.3.2 DB18 DBB36.1 (STOP_E)............................................................................................... ..1422
5.3.3 DB18 DBB38 - 41 (SPL inputs, SPL_DATA.INSEP[1...32])...............................................1423
5.3.4 DB18 DBB42.0 - 45.7 (SPL inputs, SPL_DATA.INSEP[33...64]).......................................1423
5.3.5 DB18 DBB46.0 - 49.7 (SPL outputs, SPL_DATA.OUTSEP[1...32]....................................1424
5.4 DB19: Operator panel...................................................................................................... ..1424
5.4.1 DB19 DBX0.0 (brighten screen).........................................................................................1424
5.4.2 DB19 DBX0.1 (darken screen)...........................................................................................1424
5.4.3 DB19 DBX0.2 (key lock).................................................................................................. ..1425
5.4.4 DB19 DBX0.3 (delete cancel alarms).............................................................................. ..1426
5.4.5 DB19 DBX0.4 (delete recall alarms)................................................................................ ..1426
5.4.6 DB19 DBX0.7 (actual values in the WCS)....................................................................... ..1426
5.4.7 DB19 DBB6 (analog spindle 1, utilization as a percentage)............................................ ..1427
5.4.8 DB19 DBB7 (analog spindle 2, utilization as a percentage)............................................ ..1427
5.4.9 DB19 DBB8 (channel number)...........................................................................................1427
5.4.10 DB19 DBB10 (PLC hardkeys)............................................................................................1427
5.4.11 DB19 DBX13.5 (NC program: unload)............................................................................. ..1427
5.4.12 DB19DBX13.6 (NC program: load).................................................................................. ..1428
5.4.13 DB19 DBX13.7 (NC program: selection)............................................................................1428
5.4.14 DB19 DBX14.0 - 6 (PLC index)..........................................................................................1428
5.4.15 DB19 DBX14.7 (selects the file system).......................................................................... ..1429
5.4.16 DB19 DBB15 (PLC line offset)......................................................................................... ..1429
5.4.17 DB19 DBB16 (program selection from the PLC: Index of the program list)..................... ..1429
5.4.18 DB19 DBB17 (program selection from the PLC: Program index in the program list).........1430
5.4.19 DB19 DBX20.1 (screen is dark)....................................................................................... ..1430
5.4.20 DB19 DBX20.3 (cancel alarms deleted).......................................................................... ..1431
5.4.21 DB19 DBX20.4 (recall alarms deleted)............................................................................ ..1431
5.4.22 DB19 DBX20.6 (simulation active).....................................................................................1431
5.4.23 DB19 DBX20.7 (switch MCS/WCS)................................................................................. ..1432
5.4.24 DB19 DBB22 (actual channel number)............................................................................ ..1432

Table of contents
5.4.25 DB19 DBW24 (current screen number)........................................................................... ..1432

5.4.26 DB19 DBX26.1 (program selection from the PLC: Job completed)................................. ..1432
5.4.27 DB19 DBX26.2 (program selection from the PLC: Error)...................................................1433
5.4.28 DB19 DBX26.3 (program selection from the PLC: Active).................................................1433
5.4.29 DB19 DBX26.5 (program selection from the PLC: Unload)............................................. ..1434
5.4.30 DB19 DBX26.6 (program selection from the PLC: Load)...................................................1434
5.4.31 DB19 DBX26.7 (program selection from the PLC: Selection)............................................1435
5.4.32 DB19 DBB27 (program selection from the PLC: Error detection).................................... ..1435
5.4.33 DB19 DBX32.0 - 5 (function number).............................................................................. ..1436
5.4.34 DB19 DBX32.6 (function request)......................................................................................1437
5.4.35 DB19 DBX32.7 (status)......................................................................................................1437
5.4.36 DB19 DBB33 - 35 (parameter 1 - 3)...................................................................................1437
5.4.37 DB19 DBB36 (error identification)......................................................................................1438
5.5 DB21, ...: Channel..............................................................................................................1438
5.5.1 DB21, ... DBX0.1 (RESU: backward/forward) ................................................................. ..1438
5.5.2 DB21, ... DBX0.2 (RESU: start retrace support).............................................................. ..1439
5.5.3 DB21, ... DBX0.3 (activate handwheel offset (DRF))....................................................... ..1439
5.5.4 DB21, ... DBX0.4 (activate single block).......................................................................... ..1440
5.5.5 DB21, ... DBX0.5 (activate M01)...................................................................................... ..1440
5.5.6 DB21, ... DBX0.6 (activate dry run feedrate)......................................................................1441
5.5.7 DB21, ... DBX1.0 (activate referencing)........................................................................... ..1442
5.5.8 DB21, ... DBX1.3 (time monitoring active)....................................................................... ..1442
5.5.9 DB21, ... DBX1.4 (clearance control (CLC): stop)..............................................................1443
5.5.10 DB21, ... DBX1.5 (clearance control (CLC): Override).......................................................1443
5.5.11 DB21, ... DBX1.6 (PLC action completed)....................................................................... ..1444
5.5.12 DB21, ... DBX1.7 (activate program test (PRT)).............................................................. ..1445
5.5.13 DB21, ... DBX2.0 ... 7 (activate "skip block" (SKP))......................................................... ..1445
5.5.14 DB21, ... DBX3.0 (stroke enable).......................................................................................1446
5.5.15 DB21, ... DBX3.1 (punch interface 1: Manual stroke initiation)........................................ ..1446
5.5.16 DB21, ... DBX3.2 (stroke suppression)............................................................................ ..1447
5.5.17 DB21, ... DBX3.3 (delayed stroke)................................................................................... ..1447
5.5.18 DB21, ... DBX3.4 (stroke inoperative).............................................................................. ..1447
5.5.19 DB21, ... DBX3.5 (punch interface 2: Manual stroke initiation)........................................ ..1448
5.5.20 DB21, ... DBB4 (path feedrate override).......................................................................... ..1448
5.5.21 DB21, ... DBB5 (path rapid traverse override)................................................................. ..1450
5.5.22 DB21, ... DBX6.0 (feedrate disable)...................................................................................1452
5.5.23 DB21, ... DBX6.1 (read-in disable).....................................................................................1453
5.5.24 DB21, ... DBX6.2 (delete distance-to-go, channel-specific)............................................. ..1454
5.5.25 DB21, ... DBX6.4 (program level abort)........................................................................... ..1454
5.5.26 DB21, ... DBX6.6 (path rapid traverse override active).................................................... ..1455
5.5.27 DB21, ... DBX6.7 (path feedrate override active)...............................................................1455
5.5.28 DB21, ... DBX7.0 (NC start disable)...................................................................................1456
5.5.29 DB21, ... DBX7.1 (NC Start)...............................................................................................1456
5.5.30 DB21, ... DBX7.2 (NC Stop at the block limit).................................................................. ..1457
5.5.31 DB21, ... DBX7.3 (NC Stop)...............................................................................................1457
5.5.32 DB21, ... DBX7.4 (NC Stop axes plus spindles).............................................................. ..1458
5.5.33 DB21, ... DBX7.7 (reset).................................................................................................. ..1459
5.5.34 DB21, ... DBX8.0 - 9.1 (activate machine-related protection zone 1 - 10)....................... ..1459
5.5.35 DB21, ... DBX10.0 - 11.1 (activate channel-specific protection zone 1 - 10)................... ..1460
5.5.36 DB21, ... DBX12.0 - 2 (geometry axis 1: activate handwheel)......................................... ..1460
5.5.37 DB21, ... DBX12.3, 16.3, 20.3 (feedrate stop, geometry axes 1 / 2 / 3).............................1461
5.5.38 DB21, ... DBX12.4 (geometry axis 1: traversing key lock)............................................... ..1462

Table of contents
5.5.39 DB21, ... DBX12.5 (geometry axis 1: rapid traverse override)......................................... ..1462
5.5.40 DB21, ... DBX12.6 - 7 (geometry axis 1: traversing keys "Plus" / "Minus")...................... ..1463
5.5.41 DB21, ... DBX13.0 - 6 (geometry axis 1: machine function request)..................................1465
5.5.42 DB21, ... DBX15.0 (geometry axis 1: invert handwheel direction of rotation).................. ..1466
5.5.55 DB21, ... DBX24.3 (handwheel offset (DRF) requested)................................................. ..1469
5.5.56 DB21, ... DBX24.4 (select NC-associated M01).............................................................. ..1469
5.5.57 DB21, ... DBX24.5 (M01 requested)................................................................................ ..1470
5.5.58 DB21, ... DBX24.6 (dry run feedrate selected)...................................................................1471
5.5.59 DB21, ... DBX25.3 (feedrate override selected for rapid traverse).....................................1471
5.5.60 DB21, ... DBX25.7 (program test (PRT) requested)...........................................................1472
5.5.61 DB21, ... DBX26.0 ... 7 ("Skip block" (SKP) selected)..................................................... ..1473
5.5.62 DB21, ... DBX29.0 - 3 (activate fixed feedrate 1 - 4, path/geometry axes)...................... ..1474
5.5.63 DB21, ... DBX29.4 (activate PTP travel).......................................................................... ..1475
5.5.64 DB21, ... DBX29.5 (tool manager: Deactivate workpiece counter).................................. ..1476
5.5.65 DB21, ... DBX29.6 (tool manager: Deactivating wear monitoring)................................... ..1476
5.5.66 DB21, ... DBX29.7 (tool manager: Tool lock not active).....................................................1477
5.5.67 DB21 ... DBX30.0 - 2 (activate contour handwheel)........................................................ ..1477
5.5.68 DB21, ... DBX30.3 (simulation contour handwheel: Activate).......................................... ..1478
5.5.69 DB21, ... DBX30.4 (simulation contour handwheel: Negative direction).......................... ..1479
5.5.70 DB21, ... DBX30.5 (activate M0 / M1 associated with NC).............................................. ..1479
5.5.71 DB21, ... DBX30.6 (JOG circular travel).............................................................................1479
5.5.72 DB21, ... DBX31.0 - 2 (REPOS mode)...............................................................................1480
5.5.73 DB21, ... DBX31.4 (REPOS activation)..............................................................................1481
5.5.74 DB21, ... DBX31.5 (contour handwheel: invert handwheel direction of rotation)............. ..1481
5.5.75 DB21, ... DBX32.1 (RESU: retrace mode active)...............................................................1482
5.5.76 DB21, ... DBX32.2 (retrace support active)........................................................................1482
5.5.77 DB21, ... DBX32.3 (action block active)........................................................................... ..1482
5.5.78 DB21, ... DBX32.4 (approach block active)........................................................................1483
5.5.79 DB21, ... DBX32.5 (M00/M01 active)............................................................................... ..1483
5.5.80 DB21, ... DBX32.6 (last action block active).................................................................... ..1483
5.5.81 DB21, ... DBX33.0 (referencing active)............................................................................ ..1484
5.5.82 DB21, ... DBX33.2 (revolutional feedrate active)............................................................. ..1484
5.5.83 DB21, ... DBX33.3 (handwheel override active).................................................................1485
5.5.84 DB21, ... DBX33.4 (block search active)............................................................................1485
5.5.85 DB21, ... DBX33.5 (M02 / M30 active)............................................................................. ..1485
5.5.86 DB21, … DBX33.6 (transformation active)...................................................................... ..1487
5.5.87 DB21, ... DBX33.7 (program test active)............................................................................1487
5.5.88 DB21, ... DBX35.0 (program state "running").....................................................................1488
5.5.89 DB21, ... DBX35.1 (program state "wait")........................................................................ ..1488
5.5.90 DB21, ... DBX35.2 (program state "stopped")....................................................................1489

Table of contents
5.5.91 DB21, ... DBX35.3 (program state "interrupted")............................................................. ..1490

5.5.92 DB21, ... DBX35.4 (program state "aborted").................................................................. ..1491
5.5.93 DB21, ... DBX35.5 (channel state "active")...................................................................... ..1491
5.5.94 DB21, ... DBX35.6 (channel state "interrupted").............................................................. ..1492
5.5.95 DB21, ... DBX35.7 (channel state "reset")....................................................................... ..1492
5.5.96 DB21, ... DBX36.2 (all axes that have to be referenced have been referenced)............. ..1493
5.5.97 DB21, ... DBX36.3 (all axes stationary)..............................................................................1494
5.5.98 DB21, ... DBX36.4 (interrupt handling active).................................................................. ..1494
5.5.99 DB21, ... DBX36.5 (channel ready)....................................................................................1494
5.5.100 DB21, ... DBX36.6 (channel-specific NC alarm active).................................................... ..1495
5.5.101 DB21, ... DBX36.7 (NC alarm with machining stop active).............................................. ..1495
5.5.102 DB21, ... DBX37.0 - 2 (contour handwheel active).......................................................... ..1495
5.5.103 DB21, ... DBX37.3 (clearance control (CLC): Active).........................................................1496
5.5.104 DB21, ... DBX37.4 (clearance control (CLC): Stop at the lower motion limit).................. ..1497
5.5.105 DB21, ... DBX37.5 (clearance control (CLC): Stop at the upper motion limit)....................1497
5.5.106 DB21, ... DBX37.6 (read-in disable is ignored)................................................................ ..1498
5.5.107 DB21, ... DBX37.7 (stop at block end is ignored during single block (SBL))......................1498
5.5.108 DB21, ... DBX38.0 (stroke initiation active)...................................................................... ..1499
5.5.109 DB21, ... DBX38.1 (manual stroke initiation: Acknowledgment)...................................... ..1499
5.5.110 DB21, ... DBX39.1 (NC alarm with program stop)..............................................................1500
5.5.111 DB21, ... DBX39.5 (Contour handwheel: handwheel direction of rotation inversion
active).................................................................................................................................1500
5.5.112 DB21, ... DBX40.0 - 2 (geometry axis 1: handwheel active)............................................ ..1501
5.5.113 DB21, ... DBX40.4 - 5 (geometry axis 1: traversing request "Plus" / "Minus")................. ..1501
5.5.114 DB21, ... DBX40.6 - 7 (geometry axis 1: traversing command "Plus" / "Minus")................1502
5.5.115 DB21, ... DBX41.0 - 6 (geometry axis 1: active machine function).................................. ..1503
5.5.116 DB21, ... DBX43.0 (geometry axis 1: handwheel direction of rotation inversion active).. ..1504
5.5.127 DB21, ... DBB58, DBB60 - 65 (M-, S-, T-, D-, H-, F fct. change)..................................... ..1506
5.5.128 DB21, ... DBX59.0 - 4 (M fct. 1-5 not decoded)............................................................... ..1506
5.5.129 DB21, ... DBB60 - 64, ... DBB66 - 67 (M-, S-, T-, D-, H-, F fct. Additional quick
information (quick acknowledgment)..................................................................................1507
5.5.130 DB21, ... DBB68 - 97 (M function 1 - 5 and extended address M function 1 - 5 )............ ..1507
5.5.131 DB21, ... DBB98 - 115 (S function 1 - 3 and extended address S function 1 - 3 )........... ..1507
5.5.132 DB21, ... DBB118 (T function 1).........................................................................................1508
5.5.133 DB21, ... DBB129 (D function 1)...................................................................................... ..1508
5.5.134 DB21, ... DBB140 - 157 (H function 1 - 3 and extended address H function 1 - 3 )...........1509
5.5.135 DB21, ... DBB158 - 193 (F function 1 - 6 and extended address F function 1 - 6 )............1509
5.5.136 DB21, ... DBB194 - 206 (dynamic M functions: M0 - M99).............................................. ..1510
5.5.137 DB21, ... DBB208 - 271 (active G command of group 1 to 60)........................................ ..1510
5.5.138 DB21, ... DBX272.0 - 273.1 (machine-related protection zone 1 - 10 preactivated)........ ..1511
5.5.139 DB21, ... DBX274.0 – 275.1 (channel-specific protection zone 1 - 10 preactivated)....... ..1512
5.5.140 DB21, ... DBX276.0 - 277.1 (machine-related protection zone 1 - 10 violated)............... ..1512

Table of contents
5.5.141 DB21, ... DBX278.0 – 279.1 (channel-specific protection zone 1 - 10 violated).................1513

5.5.142 DB21, ... DBB317.1 (workpiece setpoint reached).............................................................1513
5.5.143 DB21, ... DBX317.6 (PTP traversing active).................................................................... ..1514
5.5.144 DB21, ... DBX317.7 (TOOLMAN: Tool missing).............................................................. ..1514
5.5.145 DB21, ... DBX318.0 (ASUB is stopped)........................................................................... ..1514
5.5.146 DB21, ... DBX318.1 (block search via program test is active (SERUPRO)).................... ..1515
5.5.147 DB21, ... DBX318.2 (online tool length compensation (TOFF) active)...............................1515
5.5.148 DB21, ... DBX318.3 (online tool length compensation (TOFF): Compensation motion
active).................................................................................................................................1516
5.5.149 DB21, ... DBX318.5 (associated M0 / M1 active)...............................................................1516
5.5.150 DB21, ... DBX319.0 (REPOS mode change acknowledgment)....................................... ..1517
5.5.151 DB21, ... DBX319.1 - 3 (active REPOS mode)................................................................ ..1517
5.5.152 DB21, ... DBX319.5 (REPOS delay)................................................................................ ..1518
5.5.153 DB21, ... DBX320.0 - 2 (orientation axis 1: activate handwheel)..................................... ..1519
5.5.154 DB21, ... DBX320.4 (orientation axis 1: traversing key lock)........................................... ..1520
5.5.155 DB21, ... DBX320.5 (orientation axis 1: rapid traverse override)..................................... ..1520
5.5.156 DB21, ... DBX320.6 - 7 (Orientierungsachse 1: traversing keys "Plus" / "Minus")........... ..1521
5.5.157 DB21, ... DBX321.0 - 6 (orientation axis 1: machine function request)..............................1523
5.5.158 DB21, … DBX323.0 (orientation axis 1: invert handwheel direction of rotation)................1524
5.5.162 DB21, ... DBX324.6 - 7 (orientation axis 2: traversing keys "Plus" / "Minus").................. ..1525
5.5.168 DB21, ... DBX328.6 - 7 (orientation axis 3: traversing keys "Plus" / "Minus").................. ..1526
5.5.171 DB21, ... DBX332.0 - 2 (orientation axis 1: handwheel active)........................................ ..1526
5.5.172 DB21, ... DBX332.4 - 5 (orientation axis 1: traversing request "Plus" / "Minus")............. ..1527
5.5.173 DB21, ... DBX332.6 - 7 (orientation axis 1: traversing command "Plus" / "Minus"........... ..1528
5.5.174 DB21, ... DBX333.0 - 6 (orientation axis 1: active machine function).............................. ..1529
5.5.183 DB21, ... DBX344.0 (TM: tool prewarning limit reached)................................................. ..1531
5.5.184 DB21, ... DBX344.1 (TM: Tool limit value reached)......................................................... ..1531
5.5.185 DB21, ... DBX344.2 (TM: Transition to new replacement tool)........................................ ..1532
5.5.186 DB21, ... DBX344.3 (TM: Last replacement tool of the tool group)....................................1532
5.5.187 DB21, ... DBB376 (PROG_EVENT trigger event)............................................................ ..1533
5.5.188 DB21, ... DBX377.0 (collision avoidance: stop)............................................................... ..1533
5.5.189 DB21, ... DBX377.4 (JOG retract active)......................................................................... ..1533
5.5.190 DB21, ... DBX377.5 (JOG retract retraction data available)...............................................1534
5.5.191 DB21, ... DBX377.6 (JOG circular travel active).............................................................. ..1534

Table of contents
5.5.192 DB21, … DBX378.0 (ASUB active)....................................................................................1534

5.5.193 DB21, … DBX378.1 (stopped ASUB active)......................................................................1535
5.5.194 DB21, ... DBX384.0 (enable GOTOS)................................................................................1535
5.5.195 DB21, ... DBB392 (selection: Coordinate system for Cartesian manual traversing and
handwheel override in automatic mode in the tool direction (DRF))................................ ..1535
5.6 DB31, ...: Axis/spindle...................................................................................................... ..1536
5.6.1 DB31, ... DBB0 (feedrate override, axis-specific)...............................................................1536
5.6.2 DB31, ... DBX1.0 (drive test travel enable)...................................................................... ..1538
5.6.3 DB31, ... DBX1.1 (acknowledge fixed stop reached)....................................................... ..1539
5.6.4 DB31, ... DBX1.2 (fixed stop sensor)............................................................................... ..1539
5.6.5 DB31, ... DBX1.3 (axis/spindle disable)........................................................................... ..1540
5.6.6 DB31, ... DBX1.4 (follow-up mode).................................................................................. ..1543
5.6.7 DB31, ... DBX1.5 - 6 (position measuring system 1 (PMS1) / position measuring
system 2 (PMS2))............................................................................................................ ..1544
5.6.8 DB31, ... DBX1.7 (override active)................................................................................... ..1546
5.6.9 DB31, ... DBX2.0 (software cams: activation).................................................................. ..1547
5.6.10 DB31, ... DBX2.1 (controller enable)..................................................................................1547
5.6.11 DB31, ... DBX2.2 (spindle reset/delete distance to go)......................................................1549
5.6.12 DB31, ... DBX2.3 (clamping in progress)......................................................................... ..1551
5.6.13 DB31, ... DBX2.4 - 7 (reference point value 1 - 4)........................................................... ..1551
5.6.14 DB31, ... DBX3.0 (accept external work offset)..................................................................1552
5.6.15 DB31, ... DBX3.1 (enable travel to fixed stop)................................................................. ..1552
5.6.16 DB31, ... DBX3.2 - 5 (activate fixed feedrate 1 - 4, machine axes)....................................1553
5.6.17 DB31, ... DBX3.6 (velocity/spindle speed limiting)........................................................... ..1554
5.6.18 DB31, ... DBX4.0 - 2 (activate handwheel)...................................................................... ..1554
5.6.19 DB31, ... DBX4.3 (feedrate/spindle stop, axis-specific)................................................... ..1555
5.6.20 DB31, ... DBX4.4 (traversing key disable)..........................................................................1557
5.6.21 DB31, ... DBX4.5 (rapid traverse override)...................................................................... ..1557
5.6.22 DB31, ... DBX4.6 - 7 ("Plus" / "Minus" traversing keys)................................................... ..1557
5.6.23 DB31, ... DBX5.0 - 6 (machine function request)............................................................. ..1559
5.6.24 DB31, ... DBX7.0 (invert handwheel direction of rotation)..................................................1560
5.6.25 DB31, ... DBB8 (request axis/spindle replacement)...........................................................1560
5.6.26 DB31, ... DBX9.0 - (2 select: position controller parameter set)...................................... ..1561
5.6.27 DB31, ... DBX9.3 (parameter set definitions disabled by NC)............................................1561
5.6.28 DB31, ... DBX10.0 (REPOS delay).................................................................................. ..1562
5.6.29 DB31, ... DBX12.0 (hardware limit switch minus)............................................................ ..1562
5.6.30 DB31, ... DBX12.1 (hardware limit switch plus)............................................................... ..1563
5.6.31 DB31,... DBX12.2 (second software limit switch minus).................................................. ..1563
5.6.32 DB31, ... DBX12.3 (second software limit switch plus).................................................... ..1563
5.6.33 DB31, ... DBX12.4 (modulo rotary axis: activate traversing range limits)........................ ..1563
5.6.34 DB31, ... DBX12.7 (reference point approach deceleration)..............................................1564
5.6.35 DB31, ... DBX13.0 - 2 (JOG approach fixed point).......................................................... ..1564
5.6.36 DB31, ... DBX13.3 (JOG travel to position)........................................................................1565
5.6.37 DB31, ... DBX14.0 (suppress program test).......................................................................1565
5.6.38 DB31, ... DBX14.1 (activate program test).........................................................................1566
5.6.39 DB31, ... DBX16.0 - 2 (actual gear stage)..........................................................................1566
5.6.40 DB31, ... DBX16.3 (gear stage has been changed)...........................................................1567
5.6.41 DB31, ... DBX16.4 (resynchronize spindle, measuring system 1)................................... ..1568
5.6.42 DB31, ... DBX16.5 (resynchronize spindle, measuring system 2)................................... ..1568
5.6.43 DB31, ... DBX16.7 (delete S value)....................................................................................1569
5.6.44 DB31, ... DBX17.4 (resynchronizing the spindle before positioning, measuring system
1)...................................................................................................................................... ..1569

Table of contents
5.6.45 DB31, ... DBX17.5 (resynchronizing the spindle before positioning, measuring system
2)...................................................................................................................................... ..1570
5.6.46 DB31, ... DBX17.6 (invert M3 / M4)....................................................................................1570
5.6.47 DB31, ... DBX18.4 (oscillation controlled by the PLC)..................................................... ..1570
5.6.48 DB31, ... DBX18.5 (oscillation enable)...............................................................................1571
5.6.49 DB31, ... DBX18.6 (oscillation: Clockwise direction of rotation).........................................1572
5.6.50 DB31, ... DBX18.7 (oscillation: Counterclockwise direction of rotation).............................1573
5.6.51 DB31, ... DBB19 (speed override, spindle-specific)......................................................... ..1573
5.6.52 DB31, ... DBX20.1 (ramp-function generator disable)........................................................1575
5.6.53 DB31, ... DBX21.0 - 4 (motor/drive data set: selection)................................................... ..1576
5.6.54 DB31, ... DBX21.5 (motor has been selected)................................................................. ..1577
5.6.55 DB31, ... DBX21.6 (integrator disable, speed controller)................................................. ..1577
5.6.56 DB31, ... DBX21.7 (pulse enable).................................................................................... ..1578
5.6.57 DB31, ... DBB22.0 (SI: SBH/SG deselection).................................................................. ..1578
5.6.58 DB31, ... DBB22.1 (SI: SBH deselection)........................................................................ ..1578
5.6.59 DB31, ... DBB22.3 - 4 (SI: SG selection)......................................................................... ..1579
5.6.60 DB31, ... DBB23.0 - 2 (gear ratio selection).......................................................................1579
5.6.61 DB31, ... DBB23.4 (SI: SE selection)............................................................................... ..1579
5.6.62 DB31, ... DBB24.1 (control axis)...................................................................................... ..1580
5.6.63 DB31, …DBX24.2 (MCS coupling: deactivate or do not permit)........................................1580
5.6.64 DB31, ... DBX24.3 (MCS coupling: activate collision protection)..................................... ..1580
5.6.65 DB31, ... DBX24.4 (master-slave: activate torque compensatory controller).....................1581
5.6.66 DB31, ... DBX24.5 (setpoint switchover: request drive control)....................................... ..1581
5.6.67 DB31, ... DBX24.7 (master-slave: activate coupling)....................................................... ..1582
5.6.68 DB31, ... DBX26.4 (enable following axis override)......................................................... ..1583
5.6.69 DB31, ... DBX28.0 (oscillation reversal from external).......................................................1583
5.6.70 DB31, ... DBX28.1 (PLC-controlled axis: Reset)................................................................1583
5.6.71 DB31, ... DBX28.2 (PLC-controlled axis: Resume)............................................................1584
5.6.72 DB31, ... DBX28.3 (set reversal point)............................................................................. ..1585
5.6.73 DB31, ... DBX28.4 (change reversal point)...................................................................... ..1586
5.6.74 DB31, ... DBX28.5 (PLC-controlled axis: Stop at the next reversal point)....................... ..1586
5.6.75 DB31, ... DBX28.6 (PLC-controlled axis: Stop along braking ramp)................................ ..1586
5.6.76 DB31, ... DBX28.7 (request, PLC-controlled axis)........................................................... ..1587
5.6.77 DB31, ... DBX31.5 (disable synchronization)................................................................... ..1588
5.6.78 DB31, ... DBX34.0 - 1 (setpoint limitation)....................................................................... ..1588
5.6.79 DB31, ... DBX60.0 (spindle / rotary axis)......................................................................... ..1589
5.6.80 DB31, ... DBX60.1 (NCU link axis active)........................................................................ ..1589
5.6.81 DB31, ... DBX60.2 (encoder limit frequency exceeded 1)..................................................1590
5.6.82 DB31, ... DBX60.3 (encoder frequency limit exceeded, measuring system 2)................ ..1590
5.6.83 DB31, ... DBX60.4 (referenced/synchronized 1).............................................................. ..1591
5.6.84 DB31, ... DBX60.5 (referenced/synchronized 2).............................................................. ..1591
5.6.85 DB31,... DBX60.6 (position reached with exact stop coarse).......................................... ..1592
5.6.86 DB31, ... DBX60.7 (position reached with exact stop fine).............................................. ..1593
5.6.87 DB31, ... DBX61.0 (drive test travel request)................................................................... ..1593
5.6.88 DB31, ... DBX61.1 (axis-specific alarm).............................................................................1594
5.6.89 DB31, ... DBX61.2 (axis ready)........................................................................................ ..1594
5.6.90 DB31, ... DBX61.3 (follow-up active)..................................................................................1594
5.6.91 DB31, ... DBX61.4 (axis/spindle stationary (n < nmin))......................................................1595
5.6.92 DB31, ... DBX61.5 (position controller active)....................................................................1596
5.6.93 DB31, ... DBX61.6 (speed controller active).................................................................... ..1597
5.6.94 DB31, ... DBX61.7 (current controller active)................................................................... ..1597
5.6.95 DB31, ... DBX62.0 (software cams active).........................................................................1597

Table of contents
5.6.96 DB31, ... DBX62.1 (handwheel override active).................................................................1598

5.6.97 DB31, ... DBX62.2 (revolutional feedrate active)............................................................. ..1598
5.6.98 DB31, ... DBX62.3 (measurement active)........................................................................ ..1599
5.6.99 DB31, ... DBX62.4 (activate travel to fixed stop)................................................................1599
5.6.100 DB31, ... DBX62.5 (fixed stop reached)........................................................................... ..1599
5.6.101 DB31, ... DBX62.7 (axis container rotation active).............................................................1600
5.6.102 DB31, ... DBX63.0 (reset executed)...................................................................................1600
5.6.103 DB31, ... DBX63.1 (PLC-controlled axis)......................................................................... ..1600
5.6.104 DB31, ... DBX63.2 (axis stop active)..................................................................................1601
5.6.105 DB31, ... DBX63.3 (axis/spindle disable active).................................................................1601
5.6.106 DB31, ... DBX64.0 - 2 (handwheel active)....................................................................... ..1601
5.6.107 DB31, ... DBX64.4 - 5 ("Plus" / "Minus" traversing request)...............................................1602
5.6.108 DB31, ... DBX64.6 - 7 ("Plus" / "Minus" traversing command)......................................... ..1603
5.6.109 DB31, ... DBX65.0 - 6 (active machine function)................................................................1603
5.6.110 DB31, ... DBX66.0 (MCS coupling: collision protection active)........................................ ..1604
5.6.111 DB31, ... DBX67.0 (handwheel direction of rotation inversion active)................................1604
5.6.112 DB31, ... DBB68 (status axis/spindle replacement)......................................................... ..1605
5.6.113 DB31, ... DBX69.0 - 2 (active position controller parameter set)..................................... ..1605
5.6.114 DB31, ... DBX70.0 (REPOS offset).................................................................................. ..1606
5.6.115 DB31, ... DBX70.1 (REPOS offset valid)............................................................................1607
5.6.116 DB31, ... DBX70.2 (REPOS delay acknowledgment)...................................................... ..1607
5.6.117 DB31, ... DBX71.4 (position restored measuring system 1)...............................................1608
5.6.118 DB31, ... DBX71.5 (position restored, measuring system 2)..............................................1608
5.6.119 DB31, ... DBX72.0 (REPOS delay).................................................................................. ..1609
5.6.120 DB31, ... DBX74.4 (modulo rotary axis: traversing range limits active)........................... ..1609
5.6.121 DB31, ... DBX75.0 - 2 (JOG approach fixed point active)................................................ ..1610
5.6.122 DB31, ... DBX75.3 - 5 (JOG approach fixed point reached)............................................ ..1610
5.6.123 DB31, ... DBX75.6 (JOG travel to position active)........................................................... ..1611
5.6.124 DB31, ... DBX75.7 (JOG position reached)........................................................................1611
5.6.125 DB31, ... DBX76.0 (lubrication pulse).............................................................................. ..1611
5.6.126 DB31, ... DBX76.4 (path axis).......................................................................................... ..1612
5.6.127 DB31, ... DBX76.5 (positioning axis)..................................................................................1612
5.6.128 DB31, ... DBX76.6 (indexing axis in position).................................................................. ..1612
5.6.129 DB31, ... DBX77.0 (collision avoidance: Velocity reduction)..............................................1613
5.6.130 DB31, ... DBD78 (feedrate, positioning axis)................................................................... ..1614
5.6.131 DB31, ... DBX82.0 - 2 (set gear stage)............................................................................ ..1614
5.6.132 DB31, ... DBX82.3 (change over gear stage).....................................................................1615
5.6.133 DB31, ... DBX83.0 (speed limit exceeded).........................................................................1615
5.6.134 DB31, ... DBX83.1 (speed setpoint limited)........................................................................1615
5.6.135 DB31, ... DBX83.2 (speed setpoint increased)................................................................ ..1617
5.6.136 DB31, ... DBX83.3 (geometry monitoring)..........................................................................1617
5.6.137 DB31, ... DBX83.5 (spindle in setpoint range)................................................................. ..1618
5.6.138 DB31, ... DBX83.6 (speed monitoring)...............................................................................1618
5.6.139 DB31, ... DBX83.7 (clockwise actual direction of rotation).................................................1618
5.6.140 DB31, ... DBX84.1 (grinding wheel peripheral speed active)........................................... ..1619
5.6.141 DB31, ... DBX84.3 (tapping without compensating check active).................................... ..1619
5.6.142 DB31, ... DBX84.4 (active spindle operating mode: Synchronous operation)....................1620
5.6.143 DB31, ... DBX84.5 (active spindle mode: positioning mode)........................................... ..1620
5.6.144 DB31, ... DBX84.6 (active spindle mode: oscillating mode)...............................................1620
5.6.145 DB31, ... DBX84.7 (active spindle mode: control mode)....................................................1621
5.6.146 DB31, ... DBX85.0 (tool with dynamic response limitation)................................................1621
5.6.147 DB31, ... DBX85.5 (spindle in position)..............................................................................1622

Table of contents
5.6.148 DB31, ... DBW86 (M function for spindle)........................................................................ ..1622

5.6.149 DB31, ... DBD88 (S function for spindle)............................................................................1623
5.6.150 DB31, ... DBX92.1 (ramp-function generator disable active)........................................... ..1623
5.6.151 DB31, ... DBX92.4 (drive-autonomous motion active)..................................................... ..1624
5.6.152 DB31, ... DBX93.0 - 4 (motor/drive data set: display)...................................................... ..1624
5.6.153 DB31, ... DBX93.5 (drive ready).........................................................................................1625
5.6.154 DB31, ... DBX93.6 (integrator disable, speed controller)................................................. ..1626
5.6.155 DB31, ... DBX93.7 (pulses enabled)................................................................................ ..1626
5.6.156 DB31, ... DBX94.0 (motor temperature prewarning)........................................................ ..1626
5.6.157 DB31, ... DBX94.1 (heat sink temperature prewarning).....................................................1627
5.6.158 DB31, ... DBX94.2 (run-up completed)............................................................................ ..1628
5.6.159 DB31, ... DBX94.3 (|Md| < Mdx).........................................................................................1629
5.6.160 DB31, ... DBX94.4 (|nact| < nmin)......................................................................................1629
5.6.161 DB31, ... DBX94.5 (|nact| < nx)..........................................................................................1630
5.6.162 DB31, ... DBX94.6 (nact = nset).........................................................................................1630
5.6.163 DB31, ... DBX94.7 (variable signaling function)............................................................... ..1631
5.6.164 DB31, ... DBX95.1 (ESR: DC link undervoltage)................................................................1631
5.6.165 DB31, ... DBX95.2 (ESR: Response initiated or generator operation active).................. ..1632
5.6.166 DB31, … DBX95.3 (generator operation minimum speed fallen below).......................... ..1632
5.6.167 DB31, ... DBX95.7 (alarm of alarm class C is active).........................................................1632
5.6.168 DB31, ... DBX96.2 (master-slave: fine differential speed)..................................................1633
5.6.169 DB31, ... DBX96.3 (master-slave: coarse speed difference)........................................... ..1633
5.6.170 DB31, ... DBX96.4 (master-slave: compensatory controller active)................................. ..1634
5.6.171 DB31, ... DBX96.5 (setpoint switchover: drive control active)............................................1634
5.6.172 DB31, ... DBX96.7 (master-slave: coupling active).......................................................... ..1634
5.6.173 DB31, ... DBX97.0 (MCS coupling: slave axis)................................................................ ..1635
5.6.174 DB31, … DBX97.1 (MCS coupling: coupling active)..........................................................1635
5.6.175 DB31, ... DBX97.2 (MCS coupling: mirroring active)....................................................... ..1636
5.6.176 DB31, ... DBX97.3 (MCS coupling: offset change).......................................................... ..1636
5.6.177 DB31, ... DBX98.0 (fine synchronous operation)............................................................. ..1637
5.6.178 DB31, ... DBX98.1 (coarse synchronous operation)........................................................ ..1637
5.6.179 DB31, ... DBX98.2 (actual value coupling).........................................................................1638
5.6.180 DB31, ... DBX98.4 (overlaid movement).......................................................................... ..1638
5.6.181 DB31, ... DBX98.5 (speed alarm threshold reached).........................................................1639
5.6.182 DB31, ... DBX98.6 (acceleration alarm threshold reached)............................................. ..1639
5.6.183 DB31, ... DBX99.0 (leading spindle active)...................................................................... ..1639
5.6.184 DB31, ... DBX99.1 (following spindle active)......................................................................1640
5.6.185 DB31, ... DBX99.3 (axis accelerates).................................................................................1640
5.6.186 DB31, ... DBX100.2 (oscillation reversal from external active)........................................ ..1641
5.6.187 DB31, ... DBX100.3 (oscillation cannot be started)............................................................1641
5.6.188 DB31, ... DBX100.4 (error during oscillation)................................................................... ..1641
5.6.189 DB31, …DBX100.5 (sparking-out active)...........................................................................1642
5.6.190 DB31, ... DBX100.6 (oscillation active)............................................................................ ..1642
5.6.191 DB31, ... DBX100.7 (oscillation active)............................................................................ ..1642
5.6.192 DB31, ... DBX102.5 (position measuring system 1 activated)......................................... ..1642
5.6.193 DB31, ... DBX102.6 (position measuring system 2 activated)......................................... ..1643
5.6.194 DB31, ... DBX104.0 - 107.6 (active infeed axes)............................................................. ..1643
5.6.195 DB31, ... DBX128.0 (suppress program test).....................................................................1644
5.6.196 DB31, ... DBX128.1 (activate program test).......................................................................1644
5.6.197 DB31, ... DBX130.0 - 4 (motor/drive data set: formatting)............................................... ..1645
5.6.198 DB31, ... DBX132.0 (sensors available).............................................................................1645
5.6.199 DB31, ... DBX132.1 (sensor S1 available (clamped state))............................................. ..1645

Table of contents
5.6.200 DB31, … DBX132.4 (sensor S4 available (piston end position))..................................... ..1646

5.6.201 DB31, ... DBX132.5 (sensor S5 available (angular position of the motor shaft))............. ..1646
5.6.202 DB31, ... DBX133.2 (state value is generated, speed limitation p5043 is active)............ ..1646
5.6.203 DB31, … DBW134 (state of the clamping system (sensor S1)).........................................1647
5.6.204 DB31, ... DBW136 (analog measured value: of the clamping system)............................ ..1647
5.6.205 DB31, … DBX138.4 (sensor S4, piston end position)........................................................1648
5.6.206 DB31, ... DBX138.5 (sensor S5 angular position of the motor shaft).................................1648
5.7 DB71. Tool management, loading/unloading points........................................................ ..1649
5.7.1 DB71 DBX0.0 - 1.7 (active status of interfaces 1 - 16).................................................... ..1649
5.7.2 DB71 DBX2.0 - 3.7 ("auto" acknowledgment of interfaces 1 - 16).....................................1649
5.7.3 DB71 DBX(n+0).0 (command: Loading).......................................................................... ..1649
5.7.4 DB71 DBX(n+0).1 (command: Unload)..............................................................................1650
5.7.5 DB71 DBX(n+0).2 (command: Relocate)......................................................................... ..1650
5.7.6 DB71 DBX(n+0).3 (command: Position to load point)........................................................1651
5.7.7 DB71 DBX(n+0).4 (command: Job/task comes from the NC program)........................... ..1651
5.7.8 DB71 DBX(n+0).5 (command: Position a multitool)......................................................... ..1652
5.7.9 DB71 DBX(n+1).0 ("auto" acknowledgment negative).......................................................1652
5.7.10 DB71 DBX(n+1).7 (command: data in the extended range)............................................ ..1653
5.7.11 DB71 DBB(n+2) (assigned channel)................................................................................ ..1653
5.7.12 DB71 DBB(n+3) (tool management No.)............................................................................1653
5.7.13 DB71 DBW(n+16) (identifier for loading/unloading point (fixed value 9999)).................. ..1654
5.7.14 DB71 DBW(n+18) (location number of the loading/unloading point)............................... ..1654
5.7.15 DB71 DBW(n+20) (Magazine No. (Source) for unloading/relocating/positioning)........... ..1654
5.7.16 DB71 DBW(n+22) (Location No. (Source) for unloading/relocating/positioning)............. ..1655
5.7.17 DB71 DBW(n+24) (Magazine No. (Target) for unloading/relocating/positioning)............ ..1655
5.7.18 DB71 DBW(n+26) (location No. (Target) for unloading/relocating/positioning)..................1656
5.7.19 DB71 DBX(n+28).0 (loading/unloading without any magazine movement)..................... ..1656
5.8 DB72: Tool management, change in the spindle............................................................. ..1657
5.8.1 DB72 DBX0.0-1.7 (active status of interfaces 1-16)........................................................ ..1657
5.8.2 DB72 DBX2.0-3.7 ("auto" acknowledgment of interfaces 1-16).........................................1657
5.8.3 DB72 DBX(n+0).0 (command code: Obligatory change)................................................. ..1657
5.8.4 DB72 DBX(n+0).1 (command code: Perform change with M06)..................................... ..1658
5.8.5 DB72 DBX(n+0).2 (command code: Prepare change).......................................................1658
5.8.6 DB72 DBX(n+0).3 (command code: T0).......................................................................... ..1659
5.8.7 DB72 DBX(n+0).4 (command code: Old tool in buffer).................................................... ..1659
5.8.8 DB72 DBX(n+0).5 (command code: Load manual tool).....................................................1660
5.8.9 DB72 DBX(n+0).6 (command code: Unload manual tool)............................................... ..1660
5.8.10 DB72 DBX(n+0).7 (command code: Tool remains in spindle)......................................... ..1661
5.8.15 DB72 DBD(n+4) (user-definable parameter 0 (DInt)).........................................................1663
5.8.17 DB72 DBD(n+12) (user-definable parameter 2 (DInt)).......................................................1663
5.8.18 DB72 DBW(n+16) (buffer magazine number (fixed value 9998)).................................... ..1664
5.8.19 DB72 DBW(n+18) (location in the buffer magazine (spindle))......................................... ..1664
5.8.20 DB72 DBW(n+20) (magazine No. (source) for new tool to be loaded)............................ ..1665
5.8.21 DB72 DBW(n+22) (location No. (source) for new tool).................................................... ..1665
5.8.22 DB72 DBW(n+24) (magazine No. (target) for old tool to be removed)............................ ..1665
5.8.23 DB72 DBW(n+26) (location No. (target) for old tool)..........................................................1666

Table of contents
5.8.24 DB72 DBW(n+28) (new tool: Location type).................................................................... ..1666

5.8.25 DB72 DBW(n+30) (new tool: Size left)...............................................................................1666
5.8.26 DB72 DBW(n+32) (new tool: Size right).............................................................................1667
5.8.27 DB72 DBW(n+34) (new tool: Size top)...............................................................................1667
5.8.28 DB72 DBW(n+36) (new tool: Size bottom).........................................................................1667
5.8.29 DB72 DBW(n+38) (tool status for new tool)..................................................................... ..1668
5.8.30 DB72 DBW(n+40) (new tool: internal T number of NC)................................................... ..1668
5.8.31 DB72 DBW(n+42) (buffer location of the old tool)..............................................................1669
5.8.32 DB72 DBW(n+44) (original magazine of the new tool).................................................... ..1669
5.8.33 DB72 DBW(n+46) (original location of the new tool)..........................................................1669
5.9 DB73: Tool management, change in turret...................................................................... ..1670
5.9.1 DB73 DBX0.0 - 1.7 (active status of interfaces 1 - 16).................................................... ..1670
5.9.2 DB73 DBX2.0 - 3.7 ("auto" acknowledgment of interfaces 1 - 16).....................................1670
5.9.3 DB73 DBX(n+0).0 (command code: Obligatory change)................................................. ..1671
5.9.4 DB73 DBX(n+0).1 (command code: Execute change).......................................................1671
5.9.5 DB73 DBX(n+0).3 (T0))......................................................................................................1671
5.9.12 DB73 DBD(n+12) (user-definable parameter 2 (DInt)).......................................................1674
5.9.13 DB73 DBW(n+20) (magazine number of the new tool)......................................................1674
5.9.14 DB73 DBW(n+22) (location number of the new tool to be loaded).................................. ..1675
5.9.15 DB73 DBW(n+24) (magazine No. (target) for old tool to be removed)............................ ..1675
5.9.16 DB73 DBW(n+26) (location number of the old tool to be removed)...................................1675
5.9.17 DB73 DBW(n+28) (new tool: Location type).................................................................... ..1676
5.9.18 DB73 DBW(n+30) (new tool: Size left)...............................................................................1676
5.9.19 DB73 DBW(n+32) (new tool: Size right).............................................................................1676
5.9.20 DB73 DBW(n+34) (new tool: Size top)...............................................................................1677
5.9.21 DB73 DBW(n+36) (new tool: Size bottom).........................................................................1677
5.9.22 DB73 DBW(n+38) (tool status for new tool)..................................................................... ..1677
5.9.23 DB73 DBW(n+40) (new tool: Internal T no. of the NC).................................................... ..1678
5.9.24 DB73 DBW(n+42) (original location of the new tool in this turret magazine)................... ..1678
5.10 DB1071: Tool management, load/unload magazine (multitool)....................................... ..1679
5.10.1 DB1071 DBW(n+0) (distance coding).............................................................................. ..1679
5.10.2 DB1071 DBW(n+2) (multitool location number)............................................................... ..1679
5.10.3 DB1071 DBD(n+4) (multitool location distance).................................................................1680
5.10.4 DB1071 DBW(n+8) (multitool number)............................................................................ ..1680
5.10.5 DB1071 DBW(n+10) (multitool location number)............................................................. ..1680
5.10.6 DB1071 DBW(n+12) (toolholder)..................................................................................... ..1681
5.11 DB1072: Tool management, spindle (multitool)............................................................... ..1681
5.11.3 DB1072 DBW(n+4) (multitool location distance)................................................................1682
5.11.4 DB1072 DBW(n+8) (multitool number (new tool))..............................................................1682
5.11.5 DB1072 DBW(n+10) (multitool location number (new tool))............................................ ..1682
5.11.6 DB1072 DBW(n+12) (multitool number (old tool))........................................................... ..1683
5.11.7 DB1072 DBW(n+14) (multitool location number (old tool)).............................................. ..1683
5.11.8 DB1072 DBW(n+16) (new tool: Location type)................................................................ ..1684

Table of contents
5.11.9 DB1072 DBW(n+18) (new tool: Size left)...........................................................................1684

5.11.10 DB1072 DBW(n+20) (new tool: Size right).........................................................................1684
5.11.11 DB1072 DBW(n+22) (new tool: Size top)...........................................................................1685
5.11.12 DB1072 DBW(n+24) (new tool: Size bottom).....................................................................1685
5.11.13 DB1072 DBW(n+26) (new tool status)............................................................................. ..1685
5.11.14 DB1072 DBW(n+28) (new tool: internal T number of the NC)......................................... ..1686
5.11.15 DB1072 DBW(n+30) (tool holder).................................................................................... ..1687
5.11.16 DB1072 DBW(n+32) (original magazine of the new tool)................................................ ..1687
5.11.17 DB1072 DBW(n+34) (original location of the new tool)......................................................1687
5.12 DB1073: Tool management, turret (multitool).................................................................. ..1688
5.12.3 DB1073 DBW(n+4) (multitool location distance)................................................................1689
5.12.4 DB1073 DBW(n+8) (multitool number (new tool))..............................................................1689
5.12.5 DB1073 DBW(n+10) (multitool location number (new tool))............................................ ..1689
5.12.6 DB1073 DBW(n+12) (multitool number (old tool))........................................................... ..1690
5.12.7 DB1073 DBW(n+14) (multitool location number (old tool)).............................................. ..1690
5.12.8 DB1073 DBW(n+16) (new tool: Location type)................................................................ ..1691
5.12.9 DB1073 DBW(n+18) (new tool: Size left)...........................................................................1691
5.12.10 DB1073 DBW(n+20) (new tool: Size right).........................................................................1691
5.12.11 DB1073 DBW(n+22) (new tool: Size top)...........................................................................1692
5.12.12 DB1073 DBW(n+24) (new tool: Size bottom).....................................................................1692
5.12.13 DB1073 DBW(n+26) (new tool status)............................................................................. ..1692
5.12.14 DB1073 DBW(n+28) (new tool: internal T number of the NC)......................................... ..1693
5.12.15 DB1073 DBW(n+30) (tool holder).................................................................................... ..1694
5.12.16 DB1073 DBW(n+32) (original magazine of the new tool)................................................ ..1694
5.12.17 DB1073 DBW(n+34) (original location of the new tool)......................................................1694
A Appendix A........................................................................................................................................... ..1697
A.1 List of abbreviations......................................................................................................... ..1697
A.2 Documentation overview....................................................................................................1703

Table of contents

Fundamental safety instructions 1
1.1 General safety instructions
WARNING
Danger to life if the safety instructions and residual risks are not observed
If the safety instructions and residual risks in the associated hardware documentation are
not observed, accidents involving severe injuries or death can occur.
● Observe the safety instructions given in the hardware documentation.
● Consider the residual risks for the risk evaluation.
WARNING
Malfunctions of the machine as a result of incorrect or changed parameter settings
As a result of incorrect or changed parameterization, machines can malfunction, which in
turn can lead to injuries or death.
● Protect the parameterization (parameter assignments) against unauthorized access.
● Handle possible malfunctions by taking suitable measures, e.g. emergency stop or
emergency off.
1.2 Warranty and liability for application examples

Application examples are not binding and do not claim to be complete regarding
configuration, equipment or any eventuality which may arise. Application examples do not
represent specific customer solutions, but are only intended to provide support for typical
tasks.
As the user you yourself are responsible for ensuring that the products described are
operated correctly. Application examples do not relieve you of your responsibility for safe
handling when using, installing, operating and maintaining the equipment.

Fundamental safety instructions
1.3 Industrial security
Note
Industrial security
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the Internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit:
Industrial security (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity)
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they
are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are
no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customer’s
exposure to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed at:
Industrial security (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity)
Further information is provided on the Internet:

Industrial Security Configuration Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/
view/108862708)

WARNING
Unsafe operating states resulting from software manipulation
Software manipulations (e.g. viruses, trojans, malware or worms) can cause unsafe
operating states in your system that may lead to death, serious injury, and property
damage.
● Keep the software up to date.
● Incorporate the automation and drive components into a holistic, state-of-the-art
industrial security concept for the installation or machine.
● Make sure that you include all installed products into the holistic industrial security
concept.
● Protect files stored on exchangeable storage media from malicious software by with
suitable protection measures, e.g. virus scanners.
● Protect the drive against unauthorized changes by activating the "know-how protection"
drive function.


Introduction 2
2.1 NC variables
General
The NC variables can be accessed from the user interface or from the PLC via the operator
panel interface (OPI).
The structure of the NC variables and their processing is described in Section Explanations
on the NC variables (Page 33).
The tables of the NC variables contain references to further manuals with detailed
information.
The list of manuals contains the manuals referred to, see Section References (Page 30)
2.2 Interface signals
General
The interface comprises the following parts:
● Data interface
● Function interface
The exchange of signals and data is organized by the basic PLC program and performed
between the following components:
● PLC user program
● NC
● operating software
● Machine control panel
This manual contains an overview of the NC/PLC interface signals, see Chapter Interface
signals - overview (Page 1239).
A detailed description of the NC/PLC interface signals is provided in Chapter: Interface
signals - detailed description (Page 1367)
The interface signal table includes literature references, which refer to the manual with
detailed information on how to use the signal. The manual that is actually being referenced
is contained in the list of manuals: References (Page 30).
Inverse signals
Inverse signals are designated with "*".

Introduction
2.3 References
Example
Signals from the machine control panel, EB n + 2, DBX4: *Spindle stop:
Val‐ Meaning
ue
1 Spindle stop is not requested
0 Spindle stop is requested
Abbreviations
Information about abbreviations and their meaning is provided in Section List of
abbreviations (Page 1697).
2.3 References
A detailed description of the NC variables and interface signals can be found in the following
references.
References
NC variables
The variable table has a dedicated field for references to additional literature. The reference
only comprises an abbreviation of the manual or submanual.
Examples:
W1 Function Manual, Basic Functions; submanual W1: Tool offset

FBWsl Function Manual, Tool Management
Interface signals - overview

References in the signal overview have the following general structure:
/<Manual code>/[<Submanual code>/]
Examples:
/FB2-K3/ Function Manual Expansion Functions; submanual K3: Compensations

/FBSY/ Function Manual, Synchronized Actions

Introduction
2.3 References
List of manuals
Reference is made to the following manuals:
Code Manual Submanuals (code)

FB1 Function Manual, Basic Functions A2, A3, A5, B1, B2, F1, G2, H2, K1, K2,
N2, P1, P3, P4, R1, S1, V1, W1, Z1
FB2 Function Manual, Extended Functions: A4, B3, H1, K3, K5, K10, M1, M5, N3,
N4, P2, P5, R2, S3, S7, T1, W4, Z2
FB3 Function Manual, Special Functions F2, G1, K6, K7, K8, K9, M3, R3, S9, T3,
T4, TE01, TE02, TE1, TE3, TE4, TE6,
TE7, TE8, TE9, V2, W5, W6, Z3
FBSIsl Function Manual, SINUMERIK Safety Integrated
FBSY Function Manual, Synchronized Actions
FBWsl Function Manual, Tool Management
or
FBW
IHsl Base software and operating software commissioning man‐ IM9, BE2, IM7, IM8, IM10
ual
LIS3sl List Manual, System Variables
PGAsl Programming Manual, Job Planning
SCE System Manual, Ctrl-Energy
Additional references
● For SINAMICS drives, also note the following documents:
– SINAMICS S120, Commissioning Manual
– SINAMICS S120/S150, List Manual
● The input and output images of the machine control panel and the handheld units can be
found in the following document:
– Manual, Operator Components and Networking

Introduction
2.3 References

NC variables 3
3.1 Explanations on the NC variables
3.1.1 NC areas
NC areas
The NC variables are organized in data blocks that are assigned to the following NC areas.
Table 3-1 Assignment of the TO areas
Area NC variable
NC (N) Contains all variables that apply to the entire NC, e.g.
● System data (Y)
● Protection areas (PA)
● G groups (YNCFL), etc.
Mode group (B) Contains all variables that apply to the mode group, e.g.
● Status data (S)
Channel (C) Contains all variables that apply to the relevant channel, e.g.
● System data (Y)
● Protection areas (PA)
● Global status data (S)
Tool (T) Contains all variables that apply to the tools on the machine, e.g.
● Tool offset data (TO)
● General tool data (TD)
● Tool monitoring data (TS), etc.
Each tool area (T) is assigned to a channel.
Axis (A) Contains machine and setting data that applies to the relevant axis or spindle.
See List Manual 1, Section: Axis-specific machine data
Feed/main drive (V/ Contains machine data or machine data as service values that apply to the
H) relevant drive.
3.1.2 Data blocks
Overview of the available data blocks

The following table contains an overview of available data blocks for variables of the NC and
their assignment to the individual areas.

NC variables
Only those data blocks whose variables can be read or written with direct access are
represented.
Data blocks whose variables can be freely defined by the programmer (e.g. global user
data) are read from the operating software or PLC using other mechanisms.
Data block Area

A B C H N T V
AD x
MTUD x
TAO x
TDC x
TMV x
TOT x
TUE x
TV x
AEV x
MTUP x
TAP x
TF x
TO x
TP x
TUM x
MTAD x
MTV x
TAPD x
TG x
TOE x
TPM x
TUMD x
MTAP x
TAD x
TAS x
TISO x
TOET x
TS x
TUP x
MTD x
TAM x
TC x
TM x
TOS x
TT x
TUPD x
MTP x

NC variables
Data block Area

A B C H N T V
TAMD x
TD x
TMC x
TOST x
TU x
TUS x
ETP x
ETPD x
DIAGN x
FA x x
FB x x
FE x
FU x x
M x x
NIB x
PA x x
RP x
S x x x x x
SALA x
SALAL x
SALAP x
SE x x x
SEGA x
SEMA x x
SGA x
SINF x
SMA x x
SNCF x
SPARP x
SPARPF x
SPARPI x
SPARPP x
SSP x x
SSP2 x x
SSYNAC x
SYNACT x
VSYN x
Y x x
YNCFL x

NC variables
References
Further information on which data blocks this mechanism is used, can be found in the
following manual: Function Manual, Basic functions; P3: Basic PLC program
3.1.3 Variable types
Access to an NC variable
In general, the NC variables are stored as structures or arrays of structures (tables) in the
areas. This means the following details must be specified in the address for access to an
NC variable:
● Area and area number
● Block
● NC variable name (or column number)
● Line number
NC variable type
Generally, a distinction can be made between three variants for the NC variables:
● NC variables that consist of one line
● NC variables that consist of several lines
● NC variables that consist of several columns and lines
Single-line NC variable
A single-line NC variable consists of just a single value. The following information is required
to access an NC variable of this type:
● Area (and possibly the area number)
● Block
● NC variable name
Table 3-2 Single-line NC variant type
numMachAxes
Number of the highest existing channel axis
- UWord r
Multi-line: No
Example for reading the number of axes in channel 1:
HMI:
/Channel/Configuration/numMachAxes[u1]

NC variables
HMI:
P_C_Y_numMachAxes
PLC with NC variable selector:

Area C[.]
Block Y
NC variable numMachAxes
Area number 1
Multi-line NC variable
This NC variable is generally defined as a one-dimensional array. The following information
is required to access an NC variable of this type:
● Area and possibly the area number
● Block
● Line number
Table 3-3 Multi-line variant type
actFeedRate S5
Actual value axial feedrate if the axis is a positioning axis.
Actual value single axis feedrate if the axis is a special axis.
mm/min, inch/min, userdef Double r
Multi-line: Yes Axis number maxnumGlobMachAxes
Example for reading the current speed of axis 3 in channel 1:
HMI:
/Channel/MachineAxis/actFeedRate[u1, 3]
HMI:
P_C_SEMA_actFeedRate

Area C[.]
Block SEMA
NC variable actFeedRate[.]
Area number 1
Line 3
Multi-line and multi-column NC variable

This NC variable is generally defined as a two-dimensional array. The following information
is required to access an NC variable of this type:
● Area and possibly the area number
● Block

NC variables
● Column number
● Line number
In this example, the complete data block consists only of these two-dimensional NC
variables.
Table 3-4 Multi-line and multi-column variant type
cuttEdgeParam
Parameters of the active tool cutting edge
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: Yes Number of the parameter: 35
(EdgeNo - 1) * numCuttEdgeParams +
ParameterNo
Example of reading and writing the current cutting edge data for cutting edge 3 / parameter
1 of tool 3 in T area 1.
The example assumes that each tool cutting edge is defined with (numCuttEdgeParams =)
35 parameters:
HMI:
/Tool/Compensation/cuttEdgeParam[u1,c3, 51]
HMI:
P_T_TO_cuttEdgeParam
[y,z] array which is queried in SINUMERIK Operate.

Area T[.]
Block TO
NC variable cuttEdgeParam[.]
Area number 1
Column 3
Line 51
3.1.4 Data types

The control provides the following data types that can be used for programming:
Table 3-5 Data types
Data type Range of values

BOOLEAN false, true
BYTE -128 to +127

NC variables
3.2 NC variable descriptions
Data type Range of values

UBYTE 0 to +255
DWORD -2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
UDWORD 0 to +4,294,967,295
DOUBLE -1.7*10308 to +1.7*10308
STRING Sequence of characters (→ UBYTE) with any arbitrary/specified length.
3.1.5 Structure of the data tables
Table fields
Table 3-6 Meaning of table fields
NC variable name (<Range>, Reference to assigned machine data Lit.

<Block>)
<NC variable brief description/ NC variable description>
Units and value ranges
Physical unit: Data type: Initial value: Minimum val‐ Maximum value:
ue:
Addressing
Line index description: Maximum line index:
Read and write access
Lit. Reference according to the list of references

See: Chapter References (Page 30)
Write access Variable may be overwritten
Read access Variable can be read
3.2.1 Axis: Axis-Specific Basic Settings
3.2.1.1 M: Machine data
Axis-specific machine data
AA_OFF_MODE (A, M) MD 36750: $MA_AA_OFF_MODE

MD 36750: $MA_AA_OFF_MODE

NC variables
AA_OFF_MODE (A, M) MD 36750: $MA_AA_OFF_MODE

Physical unit: Data type:
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
ACCEL_REDUCTION_FACTOR (A, M) MD 35230: $MA_ACCEL_REDUC‐

TION_FACTOR
MD 35230: $MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_FACTOR
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
ACCEL_REDUCTION_SPEED_POINT (A, M) MD 35220: $MA_ACCEL_REDUC‐

TION_SPEED_POINT
MD 35220: $MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_SPEED_POINT
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
ACCEL_REDUCTION_TYPE (A, M) MD 35242: $MA_ACCEL_REDUC‐

TION_TYPE
MD 35242: $MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_TYPE
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
ACCEL_TYPE_DRIVE (A, M) MD 35240: $MA_ACCEL_TYPE_DRIVE

MD 35240: $MA_ACCEL_TYPE_DRIVE
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
ACT_POS_ABS (A, M) MD 30250: $MA_ACT_POS_ABS

MD 30250: $MA_ACT_POS_ABS
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Line index: Max. line index:

NC variables
ACT_POS_ABS (A, M) MD 30250: $MA_ACT_POS_ABS

2
Read access
AC_FILTER_TIME (A, M) MD 32920: $MA_AC_FILTER_TIME

MD 32920: $MA_AC_FILTER_TIME
s, user defined TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
LOAD_SMOOTH_FILTER_TIME (A, M) MD 32925: $MA_LOAD_SMOOTH_FIL‐

TER_TIME
MD 32925: $MA_LOAD_SMOOTH_FILTER_TIME
Read access and write access
POWER_SMOOTH_FILTER_TIME (A, M) MD 32926: $MA_POWER_SMOOTH_FIL‐

TER_TIME
MD 32926: $MA_POWER_SMOOTH_FILTER_TIME
AUTO_GET_TYPE (A, M) MD 30552: $MA_AUTO_GET_TYPE

MD 30552: $MA_AUTO_GET_TYPE
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
AXCONF_ASSIGN_MASTER_CHAN (A, M) MD 30550: $MA_AXCONF_AS‐

SIGN_MASTER_CHAN
MD 30550: $MA_AXCONF_ASSIGN_MASTER_CHAN
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
AXIS_DIAGNOSIS (A, M) MD 36690: $MA_AXIS_DIAGNOSIS

MD 36690: $MA_AXIS_DIAGNOSIS

NC variables
AXIS_DIAGNOSIS (A, M) MD 36690: $MA_AXIS_DIAGNOSIS

- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME (A, M) MD 36610: $MA_AX_EMERGEN‐

CY_STOP_TIME
MD 36610: $MA_AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME
Read access
AX_INERTIA (A, M) MD 32650: $MA_AX_INERTIA

MD 32650: $MA_AX_INERTIA
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
AX_JERK_ENABLE (A, M) MD 32400: $MA_AX_JERK_ENABLE

MD 32400: $MA_AX_JERK_ENABLE
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
AX_JERK_TIME (A, M) MD 32410: $MA_AX_JERK_TIME

MD 32410: $MA_AX_JERK_TIME
Read access
AX_MASS (A, M) MD 32652: $MA_AX_MASS

MD 32652: $MA_AX_MASS
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
AX_MOTION_DIR (A, M) MD 32100: $MA_AX_MOTION_DIR

MD 32100: $MA_AX_MOTION_DIR

NC variables
AX_MOTION_DIR (A, M) MD 32100: $MA_AX_MOTION_DIR

- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
AX_VELO_LIMIT (A, M) MD 36200: $MA_AX_VELO_LIMIT

MD 36200: $MA_AX_VELO_LIMIT
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
BACKLASH (A, M) MD 32450: $MA_BACKLASH

MD 32450: $MA_BACKLASH
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
BERO_CYCLE (A, M) MD 31100: $MA_BERO_CYCLE

MD 31100: $MA_BERO_CYCLE
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
2
Read access
BERO_DELAY_TIME_MINUS (A, M) MD 31123: $MA_BERO_DE‐

LAY_TIME_MINUS
MD 31123: $MA_BERO_DELAY_TIME_MINUS
Addressing

NC variables
BERO_DELAY_TIME_MINUS (A, M) MD 31123: $MA_BERO_DE‐

LAY_TIME_MINUS
2
Read access
BERO_DELAY_TIME_PLUS (A, M) MD 31122: $MA_BERO_DE‐

LAY_TIME_PLUS
MD 31122: $MA_BERO_DELAY_TIME_PLUS
Addressing
2
Read access
BERO_EDGE (A, M) MD 31120: $MA_BERO_EDGE

MD 31120: $MA_BERO_EDGE
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Addressing
2
Read access
BERO_EDGE_TOL (A, M) MD 31110: $MA_BERO_EDGE_TOL

MD 31110: $MA_BERO_EDGE_TOL
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
2
Read access
BRAKE_MODE_CHOICE (A, M) MD 36600: $MA_BRAKE_MODE_CHOICE

MD 36600: $MA_BRAKE_MODE_CHOICE
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access

NC variables
CEC_ENABLE (A, M) MD 32710: $MA_CEC_ENABLE

MD 32710: $MA_CEC_ENABLE
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
CEC_MAX_SUM (A, M) MD 32720: $MA_CEC_MAX_SUM

MD 32720: $MA_CEC_MAX_SUM
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
CEC_MAX_VELO (A, M) MD 32730: $MA_CEC_MAX_VELO

MD 32730: $MA_CEC_MAX_VELO
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
CLAMP_POS_TOL (A, M) MD 36050: $MA_CLAMP_POS_TOL

MD 36050: $MA_CLAMP_POS_TOL
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
COMPRESS_POS_TOL (A, M) MD 33100: $MA_COMPRESS_POS_TOL

MD 33100: $MA_COMPRESS_POS_TOL
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
COMP_ADD_VELO_FACTOR (A, M) MD 32760: $MA_COMP_ADD_VE‐

LO_FACTOR
MD 32760: $MA_COMP_ADD_VELO_FACTOR
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access

NC variables
CONTOUR_TOL (A, M) MD 36400: $MA_CONTOUR_TOL

MD 36400: $MA_CONTOUR_TOL
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
CORR_VELO (A, M) MD 32070: $MA_CORR_VELO

MD 32070: $MA_CORR_VELO
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
COUPLE_POS_TOL_COARSE (A, M) MD 37200: $MA_COU‐

PLE_POS_TOL_COARSE
MD 37200: $MA_COUPLE_POS_TOL_COARSE
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
COUPLE_POS_TOL_FINE (A, M) MD 37210: $MA_COU‐

PLE_POS_TOL_FINE
MD 37210: $MA_COUPLE_POS_TOL_FINE
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
COUPLE_VELO_TOL_COARSE (A, M) MD 37220: $MA_COUPLE_VE‐

LO_TOL_COARSE
MD 37220: $MA_COUPLE_VELO_TOL_COARSE
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
COUPLE_VELO_TOL_FINE (A, M) MD 37230: $MA_COUPLE_VE‐

LO_TOL_FINE
MD 37230: $MA_COUPLE_VELO_TOL_FINE

NC variables
COUPLE_VELO_TOL_FINE (A, M) MD 37230: $MA_COUPLE_VE‐

LO_TOL_FINE
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
CTRLOUT_LIMIT (A, M) MD 36210: $MA_CTRLOUT_LIMIT

MD 36210: $MA_CTRLOUT_LIMIT
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
CTRLOUT_LIMIT_TIME (A, M) MD 36220: $MA_CTRLOUT_LIMIT_TIME

MD 36220: $MA_CTRLOUT_LIMIT_TIME
Read access
CTRLOUT_NR (A, M) MD 30120: $MA_CTRLOUT_NR

MD 30120: $MA_CTRLOUT_NR
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
CTRLOUT_SEGMENT_NR (A, M) MD 30100: $MA_CTRLOUT_SEG‐

MENT_NR
MD 30100: $MA_CTRLOUT_SEGMENT_NR
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
DES_VELO_LIMIT (A, M) MD 36520: $MA_DES_VELO_LIMIT

MD 36520: $MA_DES_VELO_LIMIT
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
DIG_P_MAX (A, M) MD 37310: $MA_DIG_P_MAX

MD 37310: $MA_DIG_P_MAX

NC variables
DIG_P_MAX (A, M) MD 37310: $MA_DIG_P_MAX

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
DIG_P_MIN (A, M) MD 37300: $MA_DIG_P_MIN

MD 37300: $MA_DIG_P_MIN
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
DIG_V_MAX (A, M) MD 37320: $MA_DIG_V_MAX

MD 37320: $MA_DIG_V_MAX
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
DISPLAY_IS_MODULO (A, M) MD 30320: $MA_DISPLAY_IS_MODULO

MD 30320: $MA_DISPLAY_IS_MODULO
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
DRIFT_ENABLE (A, M) MD 36700: $MA_DRIFT_ENABLE

MD 36700: $MA_DRIFT_ENABLE
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
DRIFT_LIMIT (A, M) MD 36710: $MA_DRIFT_LIMIT

MD 36710: $MA_DRIFT_LIMIT
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
DRIFT_VALUE (A, M) MD 36720: $MA_DRIFT_VALUE

MD 36720: $MA_DRIFT_VALUE

NC variables
DRIFT_VALUE (A, M) MD 36720: $MA_DRIFT_VALUE

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM (A, M) MD 31050: $MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DE‐

NOM
MD 31050: $MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
2
Read access
DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA (A, M) MD 31060: $MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NU‐

MERA
MD 31060: $MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
2
Read access
DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_DENOM (A, M) MD 31070: $MA_DRIVE_ENC_RA‐

TIO_DENOM
MD 31070: $MA_DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_DENOM
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
2
Read access
DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_NUMERA (A, M) MD 31080: $MA_DRIVE_ENC_RA‐

TIO_NUMERA
MD 31080: $MA_DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_NUMERA
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing

NC variables
DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_NUMERA (A, M) MD 31080: $MA_DRIVE_ENC_RA‐

TIO_NUMERA
2
Read access
DRIVE_SIGNAL_TRACKING (A, M) MD 36730: $MA_DRIVE_SIG‐

NAL_TRACKING
MD 36730: $MA_DRIVE_SIGNAL_TRACKING
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
DYN_MATCH_ENABLE (A, M) MD 32900: $MA_DYN_MATCH_ENABLE

MD 32900: $MA_DYN_MATCH_ENABLE
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
DYN_MATCH_TIME (A, M) MD 32910: $MA_DYN_MATCH_TIME

MD 32910: $MA_DYN_MATCH_TIME
Addressing
2
Read access
ENC_ABS_TURNS_MODULO (A, M) MD 34220:

$MA_ENC_ABS_TURNS_MODULO
MD 34220: $MA_ENC_ABS_TURNS_MODULO
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
2
Read access
ENC_CHANGE_TOL (A, M) MD 36500: $MA_ENC_CHANGE_TOL

MD 36500: $MA_ENC_CHANGE_TOL

NC variables
ENC_CHANGE_TOL (A, M) MD 36500: $MA_ENC_CHANGE_TOL

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
ENC_COMP_ENABLE (A, M) MD 32700: $MA_ENC_COMP_ENABLE

MD 32700: $MA_ENC_COMP_ENABLE
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Addressing
2
Read access
ENC_DIFF_TOL (A, M) MD 36510: $MA_ENC_DIFF_TOL

MD 36510: $MA_ENC_DIFF_TOL
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
ENC_FEEDBACK_POL (A, M) MD 32110: $MA_ENC_FEEDBACK_POL

MD 32110: $MA_ENC_FEEDBACK_POL
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
2
Read access
ENC_FREQ_LIMIT (A, M) MD 36300: $MA_ENC_FREQ_LIMIT

MD 36300: $MA_ENC_FREQ_LIMIT
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW (A, M) MD 36302: $MA_ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW

MD 36302: $MA_ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW

NC variables
ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW (A, M) MD 36302: $MA_ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
ENC_GRID_POINT_DIST (A, M) MD 31010:

$MA_ENC_GRID_POINT_DIST
MD 31010: $MA_ENC_GRID_POINT_DIST
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
ENC_INPUT_NR (A, M) MD 30230: $MA_ENC_INPUT_NR

MD 30230: $MA_ENC_INPUT_NR
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access
ENC_INVERS (A, M) MD 34320: $MA_ENC_INVERS

MD 34320: $MA_ENC_INVERS
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Addressing
2
Read access
ENC_IS_DIRECT (A, M) MD 31040: $MA_ENC_IS_DIRECT

MD 31040: $MA_ENC_IS_DIRECT

NC variables
ENC_IS_DIRECT (A, M) MD 31040: $MA_ENC_IS_DIRECT

- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Addressing
2
Read access
ENC_IS_INDEPENDENT (A, M) MD 30242: $MA_ENC_IS_INDEPENDENT

MD 30242: $MA_ENC_IS_INDEPENDENT
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Addressing
2
Read access
ENC_IS_LINEAR (A, M) MD 31000: $MA_ENC_IS_LINEAR

MD 31000: $MA_ENC_IS_LINEAR
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Addressing
2
Read access
ENC_MARKER_INC (A, M) MD 34310: $MA_ENC_MARKER_INC

MD 34310: $MA_ENC_MARKER_INC
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
ENC_REFP_MARKER_DIST (A, M) MD 34300: $MA_ENC_REFP_MARK‐

ER_DIST
MD 34300: $MA_ENC_REFP_MARKER_DIST
- TYPE_DOUBLE

NC variables
ENC_REFP_MARKER_DIST (A, M) MD 34300: $MA_ENC_REFP_MARK‐

ER_DIST
Addressing
2
Read access
ENC_REFP_MODE (A, M) MD 34200: $MA_ENC_REFP_MODE

MD 34200: $MA_ENC_REFP_MODE
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access
ENC_REFP_STATE (A, M) MD 34210: $MA_ENC_REFP_STATE

MD 34210: $MA_ENC_REFP_STATE
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access
ENC_RESOL (A, M) MD 31020: $MA_ENC_RESOL

MD 31020: $MA_ENC_RESOL
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
2
Read access
ENC_SEGMENT_NR (A, M) MD 30210: $MA_ENC_SEGMENT_NR

MD 30210: $MA_ENC_SEGMENT_NR
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing

NC variables
ENC_SEGMENT_NR (A, M) MD 30210: $MA_ENC_SEGMENT_NR

2
Read access
ENC_SSI_MESSAGE_FORMAT (A, M) MD 34420: $MA_ENC_SSI_MES‐

SAGE_FORMAT
MD 34420: $MA_ENC_SSI_MESSAGE_FORMAT
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access
ENC_SSI_MESSAGE_LENGTH (A, M) MD 34410: $MA_ENC_SSI_MES‐

SAGE_LENGTH
MD 34410: $MA_ENC_SSI_MESSAGE_LENGTH
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access
ENC_SSI_STATUS (A, M) MD 34400: $MA_ENC_SSI_STATUS

MD 34400: $MA_ENC_SSI_STATUS
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access
ENC_ZERO_MONITORING (A, M) MD 36310: $MA_ENC_ZERO_MONITOR‐

ING
MD 36310: $MA_ENC_ZERO_MONITORING
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing

NC variables
ENC_ZERO_MONITORING (A, M) MD 36310: $MA_ENC_ZERO_MONITOR‐

ING
2
Read access
EPS_TLIFT_TANG_STEP (A, M) MD 37400:

$MA_EPS_TLIFT_TANG_STEP
MD 37400: $MA_EPS_TLIFT_TANG_STEP
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
EQUIV_CURRCTRL_TIME (A, M) MD 32800:

$MA_EQUIV_CURRCTRL_TIME
MD 32800: $MA_EQUIV_CURRCTRL_TIME
Addressing
2
Read access
EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME (A, M) MD 32810:

$MA_EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME
MD 32810: $MA_EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME
Addressing
2
Read access
FFW_ACTIVATION_MODE (A, M) MD 32630: $MA_FFW_ACTIVA‐

TION_MODE
MD 32630: $MA_FFW_ACTIVATION_MODE
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
FFW_MODE (A, M) MD 32620: $MA_FFW_MODE

MD 32620: $MA_FFW_MODE

NC variables
FFW_MODE (A, M) MD 32620: $MA_FFW_MODE

- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
FIPO_TYPE (A, M) MD 33000: $MA_FIPO_TYPE

MD 33000: $MA_FIPO_TYPE
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
FIXED_STOP_ACKN_MASK (A, M) MD 37060:

$MA_FIXED_STOP_ACKN_MASK
MD 37060: $MA_FIXED_STOP_ACKN_MASK
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
FIXED_STOP_ALARM_MASK (A, M) MD 37050:

$MA_FIXED_STOP_ALARM_MASK
MD 37050: $MA_FIXED_STOP_ALARM_MASK
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
FIXED_STOP_ANA_TORQUE (A, M) MD 37070:

$MA_FIXED_STOP_ANA_TORQUE
MD 37070: $MA_FIXED_STOP_ANA_TORQUE
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
FIXED_STOP_BY_SENSOR (A, M) MD 37040: $MA_FIXED_STOP_BY_SEN‐

SOR
MD 37040: $MA_FIXED_STOP_BY_SENSOR
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access

NC variables
FIXED_STOP_MODE (A, M) MD 37000: $MA_FIXED_STOP_MODE

MD 37000: $MA_FIXED_STOP_MODE
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
FIXED_STOP_THRESHOLD (A, M) MD 37030: $MA_FIXED_STOP_THRESH‐

OLD
MD 37030: $MA_FIXED_STOP_THRESHOLD
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
FIXED_STOP_TORQUE_DEF (A, M) MD 37010: $MA_FIXED_STOP_TOR‐

QUE_DEF
MD 37010: $MA_FIXED_STOP_TORQUE_DEF
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
FIXED_STOP_WINDOW_DEF (A, M) MD 37020: $MA_FIXED_STOP_WIN‐

DOW_DEF
MD 37020: $MA_FIXED_STOP_WINDOW_DEF
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
FIX_POINT_POS (A, M) MD 30600: $MA_FIX_POINT_POS

MD 30600: $MA_FIX_POINT_POS
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
FRAME_OR_CORRPOS_NOTALLOWED (A, M) MD 32074: $MA_FRAME_OR_CORR‐

POS_NOTALLOWED
MD 32074: $MA_FRAME_OR_CORRPOS_NOTALLOWED

NC variables
FRAME_OR_CORRPOS_NOTALLOWED (A, M) MD 32074: $MA_FRAME_OR_CORR‐

POS_NOTALLOWED
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
FREQUENCY1 (A, M) MD 31310: $MA_FREQUENCY1

MD 31310: $MA_FREQUENCY1
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
FREQUENCY2 (A, M) MD 31320: $MA_FREQUENCY2

MD 31320: $MA_FREQUENCY2
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
FREQ_REDUCTION_POINT1 (A, M) MD 31330: $MA_FREQ_REDUC‐

TION_POINT1
MD 31330: $MA_FREQ_REDUCTION_POINT1
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
FREQ_REDUCTION_POINT2 (A, M) MD 31340: $MA_FREQ_REDUC‐

TION_POINT2
MD 31340: $MA_FREQ_REDUCTION_POINT2
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
FREQ_STEP_LIMIT (A, M) MD 31350: $MA_FREQ_STEP_LIMIT

MD 31350: $MA_FREQ_STEP_LIMIT
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access

NC variables
FRICT_COMP_ACCEL1 (A, M) MD 32550: $MA_FRICT_COMP_ACCEL1

MD 32550: $MA_FRICT_COMP_ACCEL1
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
FRICT_COMP_ADAPT_ENABLE (A, M) MD 32510:

$MA_FRICT_COMP_ADAPT_ENABLE
MD 32510: $MA_FRICT_COMP_ADAPT_ENABLE
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
FRICT_COMP_CONST_MAX (A, M) MD 32520:

$MA_FRICT_COMP_CONST_MAX
MD 32520: $MA_FRICT_COMP_CONST_MAX
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
FRICT_COMP_CONST_MIN (A, M) MD 32530:

$MA_FRICT_COMP_CONST_MIN
MD 32530: $MA_FRICT_COMP_CONST_MIN
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access

NC variables
FRICT_COMP_ENABLE (A, M) MD 32500: $MA_FRICT_COMP_ENABLE

MD 32500: $MA_FRICT_COMP_ENABLE
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
FRICT_COMP_INC_FACTOR (A, M) MD 32580:

$MA_FRICT_COMP_INC_FACTOR
MD 32580: $MA_FRICT_COMP_INC_FACTOR
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
FRICT_COMP_MODE (A, M) MD 32490: $MA_FRICT_COMP_MODE

MD 32490: $MA_FRICT_COMP_MODE
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
FRICT_COMP_TIME (A, M) MD 32540: $MA_FRICT_COMP_TIME

MD 32540: $MA_FRICT_COMP_TIME
Read access
GANTRY_AXIS_TYPE (A, M) MD 37100: $MA_GANTRY_AXIS_TYPE

MD 37100: $MA_GANTRY_AXIS_TYPE
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
GANTRY_BREAK_UP (A, M) MD 37140: $MA_GANTRY_BREAK_UP

MD 37140: $MA_GANTRY_BREAK_UP
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access

NC variables
GANTRY_POS_TOL_ERROR (A, M) MD 37120: $MA_GAN‐

TRY_POS_TOL_ERROR
MD 37120: $MA_GANTRY_POS_TOL_ERROR
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
GANTRY_POS_TOL_REF (A, M) MD 37130: $MA_GAN‐

TRY_POS_TOL_REF
MD 37130: $MA_GANTRY_POS_TOL_REF
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
GANTRY_POS_TOL_WARNING (A, M) MD 37110: $MA_GAN‐

TRY_POS_TOL_WARNING
MD 37110: $MA_GANTRY_POS_TOL_WARNING
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE (A, M) MD 35010:

$MA_GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE
MD 35010: $MA_GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO (A, M) MD 35110: $MA_GEAR_STEP_MAX_VE‐

LO
MD 35110: $MA_GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access

NC variables
GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT (A, M) MD 35130: $MA_GEAR_STEP_MAX_VE‐

LO_LIMIT
MD 35130: $MA_GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO (A, M) MD 35120: $MA_GEAR_STEP_MIN_VE‐

LO
MD 35120: $MA_GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT (A, M) MD 35140: $MA_GEAR_STEP_MIN_VE‐

LO_LIMIT
MD 35140: $MA_GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL (A, M) MD 35210:

$MA_GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL
MD 35210: $MA_GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access

NC variables
GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL (A, M) MD 35200:

$MA_GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL
MD 35200: $MA_GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
HANDWH_MAX_INCR_SIZE (A, M) MD 32080:

$MA_HANDWH_MAX_INCR_SIZE
MD 32080: $MA_HANDWH_MAX_INCR_SIZE
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
HANDWH_MAX_INCR_VELO_SIZE (A, M) MD 32082:

$MA_HANDWH_MAX_INCR_VELO_SIZE
MD 32082: $MA_HANDWH_MAX_INCR_VELO_SIZE
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
HANDWH_STOP_COND (A, M) MD 32084: $MA_HANDWH_STOP_COND

MD 32084: $MA_HANDWH_STOP_COND
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
HANDWH_VELO_OVERLAY_FACTOR (A, M) MD 32090: $MA_HANDWH_VE‐

LO_OVERLAY_FACTOR
MD 32090: $MA_HANDWH_VELO_OVERLAY_FACTOR
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
HIRTH_IS_ACTIVE (A, M) MD 30505: $MA_HIRTH_IS_ACTIVE

MD 30505: $MA_HIRTH_IS_ACTIVE

NC variables
HIRTH_IS_ACTIVE (A, M) MD 30505: $MA_HIRTH_IS_ACTIVE

- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB (A, M) MD 30500: $MA_INDEX_AX_AS‐

SIGN_POS_TAB
MD 30500: $MA_INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
INDEX_AX_DENOMINATOR (A, M) MD 30502: $MA_INDEX_AX_DENOMINA‐

TOR
MD 30502: $MA_INDEX_AX_DENOMINATOR
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
INDEX_AX_NUMERATOR (A, M) MD 30501: $MA_INDEX_AX_NUMERA‐

TOR
MD 30501: $MA_INDEX_AX_NUMERATOR
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
INDEX_AX_OFFSET (A, M) MD 30503: $MA_INDEX_AX_OFFSET

MD 30503: $MA_INDEX_AX_OFFSET
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
IS_CC_AX (A, M) MD 30400: $MA_IS_CC_AX

MD 30400: $MA_IS_CC_AX
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access

NC variables
IS_CONCURRENT_POS_AX (A, M) MD 30450: $MA_IS_CONCUR‐

RENT_POS_AX
MD 30450: $MA_IS_CONCURRENT_POS_AX
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
IS_ROT_AX (A, M) MD 30300: $MA_IS_ROT_AX

MD 30300: $MA_IS_ROT_AX
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
IS_VIRTUAL_AX (A, M) MD 30132: $MA_IS_VIRTUAL_AX

MD 30132: $MA_IS_VIRTUAL_AX
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
JOG_AND_POS_JERK_ENABLE (A, M) MD 32420:

$MA_JOG_AND_POS_JERK_ENABLE
MD 32420: $MA_JOG_AND_POS_JERK_ENABLE
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
JOG_AND_POS_MAX_JERK (A, M) MD 32430:

$MA_JOG_AND_POS_MAX_JERK
MD 32430: $MA_JOG_AND_POS_MAX_JERK
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
JOG_INCR_WEIGHT (A, M) MD 31090: $MA_JOG_INCR_WEIGHT

MD 31090: $MA_JOG_INCR_WEIGHT
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access

NC variables
JOG_REV_VELO (A, M) MD 32050: $MA_JOG_REV_VELO

MD 32050: $MA_JOG_REV_VELO
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
JOG_REV_VELO_RAPID (A, M) MD 32040: $MA_JOG_REV_VELO_RAP‐

ID
MD 32040: $MA_JOG_REV_VELO_RAPID
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
JOG_VELO (A, M) MD 32020: $MA_JOG_VELO

MD 32020: $MA_JOG_VELO
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
JOG_VELO_RAPID (A, M) MD 32010: $MA_JOG_VELO_RAPID

MD 32010: $MA_JOG_VELO_RAPID
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
LEADSCREW_PITCH (A, M) MD 31030: $MA_LEADSCREW_PITCH

MD 31030: $MA_LEADSCREW_PITCH
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
LUBRICATION_DIST (A, M) MD 33050: $MA_LUBRICATION_DIST

MD 33050: $MA_LUBRICATION_DIST
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access

NC variables
MAX_ACCEL_OVL_FACTOR (A, M) MD 32310: $MA_MAX_AC‐

CEL_OVL_FACTOR
MD 32310: $MA_MAX_ACCEL_OVL_FACTOR
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
MAX_AX_ACCEL (A, M) MD 32300: $MA_MAX_AX_ACCEL

MD 32300: $MA_MAX_AX_ACCEL
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
MAX_AX_VELO (A, M) MD 32000: $MA_MAX_AX_VELO

MD 32000: $MA_MAX_AX_VELO
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
MDCA_CTRLOUT_MODULE_NR (A, M) MD 30110: CTRLOUT_MODULE_NR

Alternative name: CTRLOUT_MODULE_NR
Setpoint assignment
Setpoint assignment: Drive number / module number
Physical unit: Data type: Minimum value: Maximum value:
- TYPE_CHAR 1 15
Addressing
1
Validity: From NCK version 3.6 Read access and write access
MDCA_CTRLOUT_TYPE (A, M) MD 30130: CTRLOUT_TYPE

Alternative name: CTRLOUT_TYPE
Type of setpoint output
- TYPE_CHAR 0 1
Addressing

NC variables
MDCA_CTRLOUT_TYPE (A, M) MD 30130: CTRLOUT_TYPE

1
MDCA_ENC_MODULE_NR (A, M) MD 30220: ENC_MODULE_NR[x] x =

PlugplaceNo
Alternative name: ENC_MODULE_NR
Actual value assignment
Actual value assignment: Drive number / measuring circuit number
- TYPE_CHAR 1 15
Addressing
2
MDCA_ENC_TYPE (A, M) MD 30240: ENC_TYPE[x] x = Plugplace‐

No
Alternative name: ENC_TYPE
Type of actual value sensing
Type of actual value sensing (actual position value)
Return value Encoder type:
0: Simulation
1: Raw signal generator (high resolution)
2: Square wave generator - only with available onboard hardware
3: Encoder for semi-servo - only with available onboard hardware
4: Absolute encoder, gen. (e.g. with EnDat interface)
5: reserved
- TYPE_CHAR 0 5
Addressing
2
MM_ENC_COMP_MAX_POINTS (A, M) MD 38000:

$MA_MM_ENC_COMP_MAX_POINTS
MD 38000: $MA_MM_ENC_COMP_MAX_POINTS
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing

NC variables
MM_ENC_COMP_MAX_POINTS (A, M) MD 38000:

$MA_MM_ENC_COMP_MAX_POINTS
2
Read access
MM_QEC_MAX_POINTS (A, M) MD 38010: $MA_MM_QEC_MAX_POINTS

MD 38010: $MA_MM_QEC_MAX_POINTS
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MODULO_RANGE (A, M) MD 30330: $MA_MODULO_RANGE

MD 30330: $MA_MODULO_RANGE
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
NUM_ENCS (A, M) MD 30200: $MA_NUM_ENCS

MD 30200: $MA_NUM_ENCS
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
PARAMSET_CHANGE_ENABLE (A, M) MD 35590: $MA_PARA‐

MSET_CHANGE_ENABLE
MD 35590: $MA_PARAMSET_CHANGE_ENABLE
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
PATH_TRANS_JERK_LIM (A, M) MD 32432:

$MA_PATH_TRANS_JERK_LIM
MD 32432: $MA_PATH_TRANS_JERK_LIM
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
POSCTRL_DAMPING (A, M) MD 32950: $MA_POSCTRL_DAMPING

MD 32950: $MA_POSCTRL_DAMPING

NC variables
POSCTRL_DAMPING (A, M) MD 32950: $MA_POSCTRL_DAMPING

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
POSCTRL_GAIN (A, M) MD 32200: $MA_POSCTRL_GAIN

MD 32200: $MA_POSCTRL_GAIN
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
POSITIONING_TIME (A, M) MD 36020: $MA_POSITIONING_TIME

MD 36020: $MA_POSITIONING_TIME
Read access
POS_AX_VELO (A, M) MD 32060: $MA_POS_AX_VELO

MD 32060: $MA_POS_AX_VELO
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
POS_LIMIT_MINUS2 (A, M) MD 36120: $MA_POS_LIMIT_MINUS2

MD 36120: $MA_POS_LIMIT_MINUS2
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
POS_LIMIT_MINUS (A, M) MD 36100: $MA_POS_LIMIT_MINUS

MD 36100: $MA_POS_LIMIT_MINUS
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access

NC variables
POS_LIMIT_PLUS2 (A, M) MD 36130: $MA_POS_LIMIT_PLUS2

MD 36130: $MA_POS_LIMIT_PLUS2
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
POS_LIMIT_PLUS (A, M) MD 36110: $MA_POS_LIMIT_PLUS

MD 36110: $MA_POS_LIMIT_PLUS
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
RATED_OUTVAL (A, M) MD 32250: $MA_RATED_OUTVAL

MD 32250: $MA_RATED_OUTVAL
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
RATED_VELO (A, M) MD 32260: $MA_RATED_VELO

MD 32260: $MA_RATED_VELO
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MINUS (A, M) MD 34010: $MA_REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MI‐

NUS
MD 34010: $MA_REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MINUS
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
REFP_CAM_IS_ACTIVE (A, M) MD 34000: $MA_REFP_CAM_IS_ACTIVE

MD 34000: $MA_REFP_CAM_IS_ACTIVE
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access

NC variables
REFP_CAM_SHIFT (A, M) MD 34092: $MA_REFP_CAM_SHIFT

MD 34092: $MA_REFP_CAM_SHIFT
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
REFP_CYCLE_NR (A, M) MD 34110: $MA_REFP_CYCLE_NR

MD 34110: $MA_REFP_CYCLE_NR
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
REFP_MAX_CAM_DIST (A, M) MD 34030: $MA_REFP_MAX_CAM_DIST

MD 34030: $MA_REFP_MAX_CAM_DIST
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
REFP_MAX_MARKER_DIST (A, M) MD 34060: $MA_REFP_MAX_MARK‐

ER_DIST
MD 34060: $MA_REFP_MAX_MARKER_DIST
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
REFP_MOVE_DIST (A, M) MD 34080: $MA_REFP_MOVE_DIST

MD 34080: $MA_REFP_MOVE_DIST
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing

NC variables
REFP_MOVE_DIST (A, M) MD 34080: $MA_REFP_MOVE_DIST

2
Read access
REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR (A, M) MD 34090:

$MA_REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR
MD 34090: $MA_REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
REFP_SEARCH_MARKER_REVERSE (A, M) MD 34050: $MA_REFP_SEARCH_MARK‐

ER_REVERSE
MD 34050: $MA_REFP_SEARCH_MARKER_REVERSE
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Addressing
2
Read access
REFP_SET_POS (A, M) MD 34100: $MA_REFP_SET_POS

MD 34100: $MA_REFP_SET_POS
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
REFP_STOP_AT_ABS_MARKER (A, M) MD 34330:

$MA_REFP_STOP_AT_ABS_MARKER
MD 34330: $MA_REFP_STOP_AT_ABS_MARKER
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Addressing

NC variables
REFP_STOP_AT_ABS_MARKER (A, M) MD 34330:

$MA_REFP_STOP_AT_ABS_MARKER
2
Read access
REFP_SYNC_ENCS (A, M) MD 34102: $MA_REFP_SYNC_ENCS

MD 34102: $MA_REFP_SYNC_ENCS
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
REFP_VELO_POS (A, M) MD 34070: $MA_REFP_VELO_POS

MD 34070: $MA_REFP_VELO_POS
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
REFP_VELO_SEARCH_CAM (A, M) MD 34020: $MA_REFP_VE‐

LO_SEARCH_CAM
MD 34020: $MA_REFP_VELO_SEARCH_CAM
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER (A, M) MD 34040: $MA_REFP_VE‐

LO_SEARCH_MARKER
MD 34040: $MA_REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
ROT_IS_MODULO (A, M) MD 30310: $MA_ROT_IS_MODULO

MD 30310: $MA_ROT_IS_MODULO
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access

NC variables
SAFE_ACKN (A, M) MD 36997: $MA_SAFE_ACKN

MD 36997: $MA_SAFE_ACKN
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
SAFE_ACT_CHECKSUM (A, M) MD 36998: $MA_SAFE_ACT_CHECK‐

SUM
MD 36998: $MA_SAFE_ACT_CHECKSUM
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
SAFE_ACT_STOP_OUTPUT (A, M) MD 36990: $MA_SAFE_ACT_STOP_OUT‐

PUT
MD 36990: $MA_SAFE_ACT_STOP_OUTPUT
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
2
Read access
SAFE_CAM_MINUS_OUTPUT (A, M) MD 36989: $MA_SAFE_CAM_MI‐

NUS_OUTPUT
MD 36989: $MA_SAFE_CAM_MINUS_OUTPUT
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
2
Read access
SAFE_CAM_PLUS_OUTPUT (A, M) MD 36988:

$MA_SAFE_CAM_PLUS_OUTPUT
MD 36988: $MA_SAFE_CAM_PLUS_OUTPUT
- TYPE_DWORD

NC variables
SAFE_CAM_PLUS_OUTPUT (A, M) MD 36988:

$MA_SAFE_CAM_PLUS_OUTPUT
Addressing
2
Read access
SAFE_CAM_POS_MINUS (A, M) MD 36937: $MA_SAFE_CAM_POS_MI‐

NUS
MD 36937: $MA_SAFE_CAM_POS_MINUS
mm, inch, degree, user de‐ TYPE_DOUBLE
fined
Addressing
2
Read access
SAFE_CAM_POS_PLUS (A, M) MD 36936: $MA_SAFE_CAM_POS_PLUS

MD 36936: $MA_SAFE_CAM_POS_PLUS
fined
Addressing
2
Read access
SAFE_CAM_TOL (A, M) MD 36940: $MA_SAFE_CAM_TOL

MD 36940: $MA_SAFE_CAM_TOL
fined
Read access
SAFE_DES_CHECKSUM (A, M) MD 36999: $MA_SAFE_DES_CHECK‐

SUM
MD 36999: $MA_SAFE_DES_CHECKSUM
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access

NC variables
SAFE_DES_VELO_LIMIT (A, M) MD 36933: $MA_SAFE_DES_VELO_LIM‐

IT
MD 36933: $MA_SAFE_DES_VELO_LIMIT
% TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
SAFE_ENC_GEAR_DENOM (A, M) MD 36921: $MA_SAFE_ENC_GEAR_DE‐

NOM
MD 36921: $MA_SAFE_ENC_GEAR_DENOM
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
2
Read access
SAFE_ENC_GEAR_NUMERA (A, M) MD 36922: $MA_SAFE_ENC_GEAR_NU‐

MERA
MD 36922: $MA_SAFE_ENC_GEAR_NUMERA
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
2
Read access
SAFE_ENC_GEAR_PITCH (A, M) MD 36920:

$MA_SAFE_ENC_GEAR_PITCH
MD 36920: $MA_SAFE_ENC_GEAR_PITCH
mm, inch, user defined TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
SAFE_ENC_GRID_POINT_DIST (A, M) MD 36917:

$MA_SAFE_ENC_GRID_POINT_DIST
MD 36917: $MA_SAFE_ENC_GRID_POINT_DIST

NC variables
SAFE_ENC_GRID_POINT_DIST (A, M) MD 36917:

$MA_SAFE_ENC_GRID_POINT_DIST
Read access
SAFE_ENC_INPUT_NR (A, M) MD 36912: $MA_SAFE_ENC_INPUT_NR

MD 36912: $MA_SAFE_ENC_INPUT_NR
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
SAFE_ENC_IS_LINEAR (A, M) MD 36916: $MA_SAFE_ENC_IS_LINEAR

MD 36916: $MA_SAFE_ENC_IS_LINEAR
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
SAFE_ENC_MODULE_NR (A, M) MD 36911: $MA_SAFE_ENC_MOD‐

ULE_NR
MD 36911: $MA_SAFE_ENC_MODULE_NR
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
SAFE_ENC_POLARITY (A, M) MD 36925: $MA_SAFE_ENC_POLARITY

MD 36925: $MA_SAFE_ENC_POLARITY
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
SAFE_ENC_RESOL (A, M) MD 36918: $MA_SAFE_ENC_RESOL

MD 36918: $MA_SAFE_ENC_RESOL
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
SAFE_ENC_SEGMENT_NR (A, M) MD 36910: $MA_SAFE_ENC_SEG‐

MENT_NR
MD 36910: $MA_SAFE_ENC_SEGMENT_NR

NC variables
SAFE_ENC_SEGMENT_NR (A, M) MD 36910: $MA_SAFE_ENC_SEG‐

MENT_NR
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
SAFE_ENC_TYPE (A, M) MD 36915: $MA_SAFE_ENC_TYPE

MD 36915: $MA_SAFE_ENC_TYPE
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
SAFE_EXT_STOP_INPUT (A, M) MD 36977: $MA_SAFE_EXT_STOP_IN‐

PUT
MD 36977: $MA_SAFE_EXT_STOP_INPUT
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
2
Read access
SAFE_FUNCTION_ENABLE (A, M) MD 36901: $MA_SAFE_FUNCTION_ENA‐

BLE
MD 36901: $MA_SAFE_FUNCTION_ENABLE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
SAFE_CAM_ENABLE (A, M) MD 36903: $MA_SAFE_CAM_ENABLE

MD 36903: $MA_SAFE_CAM_ENABLE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
SAFE_GEAR_SELECT_INPUT (A, M) MD 36974: $MA_SAFE_GEAR_SE‐

LECT_INPUT
MD 36974: $MA_SAFE_GEAR_SELECT_INPUT

NC variables
SAFE_GEAR_SELECT_INPUT (A, M) MD 36974: $MA_SAFE_GEAR_SE‐

LECT_INPUT
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
2
Read access
SAFE_IS_ROT_AX (A, M) MD 36902: $MA_SAFE_IS_ROT_AX

MD 36902: $MA_SAFE_IS_ROT_AX
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
SAFE_MODE_SWITCH_TIME (A, M) MD 36950:

$MA_SAFE_MODE_SWITCH_TIME
MD 36950: $MA_SAFE_MODE_SWITCH_TIME
Read access
SAFE_MODULO_RANGE (A, M) MD 36905: $MA_SAFE_MODU‐

LO_RANGE
MD 36905: $MA_SAFE_MODULO_RANGE
Degree, user defined TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
SAFE_OVR_INPUT (A, M) MD 36978: $MA_SAFE_OVR_INPUT

MD 36978: $MA_SAFE_OVR_INPUT
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
2
Read access
SAFE_POS_LIMIT_MINUS (A, M) MD 36935: $MA_SAFE_POS_LIMIT_MI‐

NUS
MD 36935: $MA_SAFE_POS_LIMIT_MINUS

NC variables
SAFE_POS_LIMIT_MINUS (A, M) MD 36935: $MA_SAFE_POS_LIMIT_MI‐

NUS
fined
Addressing
2
Read access
SAFE_POS_LIMIT_PLUS (A, M) MD 36934: $MA_SAFE_POS_LIM‐

IT_PLUS
MD 36934: $MA_SAFE_POS_LIMIT_PLUS
fined
Addressing
2
Read access
SAFE_POS_SELECT_INPUT (A, M) MD 36973: $MA_SAFE_POS_SE‐

LECT_INPUT
MD 36973: $MA_SAFE_POS_SELECT_INPUT
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
SAFE_POS_STOP_MODE (A, M) MD 36962:

$MA_SAFE_POS_STOP_MODE
MD 36962: $MA_SAFE_POS_STOP_MODE
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
SAFE_POS_TOL (A, M) MD 36942: $MA_SAFE_POS_TOL

MD 36942: $MA_SAFE_POS_TOL

NC variables
SAFE_POS_TOL (A, M) MD 36942: $MA_SAFE_POS_TOL

fined
Read access
SAFE_PULSE_DISABLE_DELAY (A, M) MD 36956: $MA_SAFE_PULSE_DISA‐

BLE_DELAY
MD 36956: $MA_SAFE_PULSE_DISABLE_DELAY
Read access
SAFE_PULSE_DIS_CHECK_TIME (A, M) MD 36957:

$MA_SAFE_PULSE_DIS_CHECK_TIME
MD 36957: $MA_SAFE_PULSE_DIS_CHECK_TIME
Read access
SAFE_PULSE_ENABLE_OUTPUT (A, M) MD 36986: $MA_SAFE_PULSE_ENA‐

BLE_OUTPUT
MD 36986: $MA_SAFE_PULSE_ENABLE_OUTPUT
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
SAFE_PULSE_STATUS_INPUT (A, M) MD 36976: $MA_SAFE_PULSE_STA‐

TUS_INPUT
MD 36976: $MA_SAFE_PULSE_STATUS_INPUT
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
SAFE_REFP_POS_TOL (A, M) MD 36944: $MA_SAFE_REFP_POS_TOL

MD 36944: $MA_SAFE_REFP_POS_TOL
fined
Read access

NC variables
SAFE_REFP_STATUS_OUTPUT (A, M) MD 36987: $MA_SAFE_REFP_STA‐

TUS_OUTPUT
MD 36987: $MA_SAFE_REFP_STATUS_OUTPUT
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
SAFE_SS_DISABLE_INPUT (A, M) MD 36971: $MA_SAFE_SS_DISABLE_IN‐

PUT
MD 36971: $MA_SAFE_SS_DISABLE_INPUT
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
SAFE_SS_STATUS_OUTPUT (A, M) MD 36981: $MA_SAFE_SS_STA‐

TUS_OUTPUT
MD 36981: $MA_SAFE_SS_STATUS_OUTPUT
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
SAFE_STANDSTILL_POS (A, M) MD 36995: $MA_SAFE_STAND‐

STILL_POS
MD 36995: $MA_SAFE_STANDSTILL_POS
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
SAFE_STANDSTILL_TOL (A, M) MD 36930: $MA_SAFE_STAND‐

STILL_TOL
MD 36930: $MA_SAFE_STANDSTILL_TOL
fined
Read access
SAFE_STANDSTILL_VELO_TOL (A, M) MD 36960: $MA_SAFE_STAND‐

STILL_VELO_TOL
MD 36960: $MA_SAFE_STANDSTILL_VELO_TOL

NC variables
SAFE_STANDSTILL_VELO_TOL (A, M) MD 36960: $MA_SAFE_STAND‐

STILL_VELO_TOL
mm/min, inch/min, user de‐ TYPE_DOUBLE
fined
Read access
SAFE_STOP_REQUEST_INPUT (A, M) MD 36975: $MA_SAFE_STOP_RE‐

QUEST_INPUT
MD 36975: $MA_SAFE_STOP_REQUEST_INPUT
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
SAFE_STOP_SWITCH_TIME_C (A, M) MD 36952:

$MA_SAFE_STOP_SWITCH_TIME_C
MD 36952: $MA_SAFE_STOP_SWITCH_TIME_C
Read access
SAFE_STOP_SWITCH_TIME_D (A, M) MD 36953:

$MA_SAFE_STOP_SWITCH_TIME_D
MD 36953: $MA_SAFE_STOP_SWITCH_TIME_D
Read access
SAFE_STOP_SWITCH_TIME_E (A, M) MD 36954:

$MA_SAFE_STOP_SWITCH_TIME_E
MD 36954: $MA_SAFE_STOP_SWITCH_TIME_E
Read access
SAFE_STOP_VELO_TOL (A, M) MD 36948: $MA_SAFE_STOP_VE‐

LO_TOL
MD 36948: $MA_SAFE_STOP_VELO_TOL

NC variables
SAFE_STOP_VELO_TOL (A, M) MD 36948: $MA_SAFE_STOP_VE‐

LO_TOL
fined
Read access
SAFE_SVSS_DISABLE_INPUT (A, M) MD 36970: $MA_SAFE_SVSS_DISA‐

BLE_INPUT
MD 36970: $MA_SAFE_SVSS_DISABLE_INPUT
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
SAFE_SVSS_STATUS_OUTPUT (A, M) MD 36980: $MA_SAFE_SVSS_STA‐

TUS_OUTPUT
MD 36980: $MA_SAFE_SVSS_STATUS_OUTPUT
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
SAFE_VELO_LIMIT (A, M) MD 36931: $MA_SAFE_VELO_LIMIT

MD 36931: $MA_SAFE_VELO_LIMIT
fined
Addressing
2
Read access
SAFE_VELO_OVR_FACTOR (A, M) MD 36932: $MA_SAFE_VELO_OVR_FAC‐

TOR
MD 36932: $MA_SAFE_VELO_OVR_FACTOR
% TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access

NC variables
SAFE_VELO_SELECT_INPUT (A, M) MD 36972: $MA_SAFE_VELO_SE‐

LECT_INPUT
MD 36972: $MA_SAFE_VELO_SELECT_INPUT
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
2
Read access
SAFE_VELO_STATUS_OUTPUT (A, M) MD 36982: $MA_SAFE_VELO_STA‐

TUS_OUTPUT
MD 36982: $MA_SAFE_VELO_STATUS_OUTPUT
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
2
Read access
SAFE_VELO_STOP_MODE (A, M) MD 36961: $MA_SAFE_VE‐

LO_STOP_MODE
MD 36961: $MA_SAFE_VELO_STOP_MODE
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
SAFE_VELO_STOP_REACTION (A, M) MD 36963: $MA_SAFE_VELO_STOP_RE‐

ACTION
MD 36963: $MA_SAFE_VELO_STOP_REACTION
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access
SAFE_VELO_SWITCH_DELAY (A, M) MD 36951: $MA_SAFE_VE‐

LO_SWITCH_DELAY
MD 36951: $MA_SAFE_VELO_SWITCH_DELAY

NC variables
SAFE_VELO_SWITCH_DELAY (A, M) MD 36951: $MA_SAFE_VE‐

LO_SWITCH_DELAY
Read access
SAFE_VELO_X (A, M) MD 36946: $MA_SAFE_VELO_X

MD 36946: $MA_SAFE_VELO_X
fined
Read access
SAFE_VELO_X_STATUS_OUTPUT (A, M) MD 36985: $MA_SAFE_VELO_X_STA‐

TUS_OUTPUT
MD 36985: $MA_SAFE_VELO_X_STATUS_OUTPUT
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
SCALING_FACTOR_G70_G71 (A, M) MD 31200: $MA_SCALING_FAC‐

TOR_G70_G71
MD 31200: $MA_SCALING_FACTOR_G70_G71
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
SERVO_DISABLE_DELAY_TIME (A, M) MD 36620: $MA_SERVO_DISABLE_DE‐

LAY_TIME
MD 36620: $MA_SERVO_DISABLE_DELAY_TIME
Read access
SIMU_AX_VDI_OUTPUT (A, M) MD 30350: $MA_SIMU_AX_VDI_OUTPUT

MD 30350: $MA_SIMU_AX_VDI_OUTPUT
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access

NC variables
SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET (A, M) MD 35040: $MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AF‐

TER_RESET
MD 35040: $MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX (A, M) MD 35000: $MA_SPIND_AS‐

SIGN_TO_MACHAX
MD 35000: $MA_SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
SPIND_DEFAULT_ACT_MASK (A, M) MD 35030: $MA_SPIND_DE‐

FAULT_ACT_MASK
MD 35030: $MA_SPIND_DEFAULT_ACT_MASK
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
SPIND_DEFAULT_MODE (A, M) MD 35020: $MA_SPIND_DE‐

FAULT_MODE
MD 35020: $MA_SPIND_DEFAULT_MODE
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL (A, M) MD 35150: $MA_SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL

MD 35150: $MA_SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
SPIND_EXTERN_VELO_LIMIT (A, M) MD 35160: $MA_SPIND_EXTERN_VE‐

LO_LIMIT
MD 35160: $MA_SPIND_EXTERN_VELO_LIMIT

NC variables
SPIND_EXTERN_VELO_LIMIT (A, M) MD 35160: $MA_SPIND_EXTERN_VE‐

LO_LIMIT
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
SPIND_FUNC_RESET_MODE (A, M) MD 35032: $MA_SPIND_FUNC_RE‐

SET_MODE
MD 35032: $MA_SPIND_FUNC_RESET_MODE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
SPIND_ON_SPEED_AT_IPO_START (A, M) MD 35500:

$MA_SPIND_ON_SPEED_AT_IPO_STAR
T
MD 35500: $MA_SPIND_ON_SPEED_AT_IPO_START
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
SPIND_OSCILL_ACCEL (A, M) MD 35410: $MA_SPIND_OSCILL_ACCEL

MD 35410: $MA_SPIND_OSCILL_ACCEL
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
SPIND_OSCILL_DES_VELO (A, M) MD 35400: $MA_SPIND_OS‐

CILL_DES_VELO
MD 35400: $MA_SPIND_OSCILL_DES_VELO
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
SPIND_OSCILL_START_DIR (A, M) MD 35430: $MA_SPIND_OS‐

CILL_START_DIR
MD 35430: $MA_SPIND_OSCILL_START_DIR
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access

NC variables
SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CCW (A, M) MD 35450: $MA_SPIND_OS‐

CILL_TIME_CCW
MD 35450: $MA_SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CCW
Read access
SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CW (A, M) MD 35440: $MA_SPIND_OS‐

CILL_TIME_CW
MD 35440: $MA_SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CW
Read access
SPIND_POSCTRL_VELO (A, M) MD 35300: $MA_SPIND_POSCTRL_VE‐

LO
MD 35300: $MA_SPIND_POSCTRL_VELO
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
SPIND_POSITIONING_DIR (A, M) MD 35350: $MA_SPIND_POSITION‐

ING_DIR
MD 35350: $MA_SPIND_POSITIONING_DIR
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
SPIND_STOPPED_AT_IPO_START (A, M) MD 35510: $MA_SPIND_STOP‐

PED_AT_IPO_START
MD 35510: $MA_SPIND_STOPPED_AT_IPO_START
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
SPIND_VELO_LIMIT (A, M) MD 35100: $MA_SPIND_VELO_LIMIT

MD 35100: $MA_SPIND_VELO_LIMIT

NC variables
SPIND_VELO_LIMIT (A, M) MD 35100: $MA_SPIND_VELO_LIMIT

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
STANDSTILL_DELAY_TIME (A, M) MD 36040: $MA_STANDSTILL_DE‐

LAY_TIME
MD 36040: $MA_STANDSTILL_DELAY_TIME
Read access
STANDSTILL_POS_TOL (A, M) MD 36030: $MA_STANDSTILL_POS_TOL

MD 36030: $MA_STANDSTILL_POS_TOL
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
STANDSTILL_VELO_TOL (A, M) MD 36060: $MA_STANDSTILL_VE‐

LO_TOL
MD 36060: $MA_STANDSTILL_VELO_TOL
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
START_STOP_FREQUENCY (A, M) MD 31300: $MA_START_STOP_FRE‐

QUENCY
MD 31300: $MA_START_STOP_FREQUENCY
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
STIFFNESS_CONTROL_ENABLE (A, M) MD 32640: $MA_STIFFNESS_CON‐

TROL_ENABLE
MD 32640: $MA_STIFFNESS_CONTROL_ENABLE
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
STOP_LIMIT_COARSE (A, M) MD 36000: $MA_STOP_LIMIT_COARSE

MD 36000: $MA_STOP_LIMIT_COARSE

NC variables
STOP_LIMIT_COARSE (A, M) MD 36000: $MA_STOP_LIMIT_COARSE

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
STOP_LIMIT_FINE (A, M) MD 36010: $MA_STOP_LIMIT_FINE

MD 36010: $MA_STOP_LIMIT_FINE
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
TANG_OFFSET (A, M) MD 37402: $MA_TANG_OFFSET

MD 37402: $MA_TANG_OFFSET
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
TEMP_COMP_TYPE (A, M) MD 32750: $MA_TEMP_COMP_TYPE

MD 32750: $MA_TEMP_COMP_TYPE
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
TORQUE_OFFSET (A, M) MD 32460: $MA_TORQUE_OFFSET

MD 32460: $MA_TORQUE_OFFSET
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
VCO100_WEIGHT (A, M) MD 31160: $MA_VCO100_WEIGHT

MD 31160: $MA_VCO100_WEIGHT
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access


NC variables

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
VELO_FFW_WEIGHT (A, M) MD 32610: $MA_VELO_FFW_WEIGHT

MD 32610: $MA_VELO_FFW_WEIGHT
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
3.2.1.2 SE: Setting data
This block contains the axis-specific setting data
AA_OFF_LIMIT (A, SE) SD 43350: $SA_AA_OFF_LIMIT

Compensation value upper limit $AA_OFF with clear
Upper limit of compensation value which can be preset by means of synchronized actions via the system variable
$AA_OFF.
This limit value acts on the absolutely effective compensation value via $AA_OFF.
It is possible to interrogate the compensation value for limit-range violation via the system variable $AA_OFF_LIMIT.
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access

NC variables
ASSIGN_FEED_PER_REV_SOURCE (A, SE) SD 43300: $SA_AS‐

SIGN_FEED_PER_REV_SOURCE
SD 43300: $SA_ASSIGN_FEED_PER_REV_SOURCE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
FIXED_STOP_SWITCH (A, SE) SD 43500: $SA_FIXED_STOP_SWITCH

SD 43500: $SA_FIXED_STOP_SWITCH
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
FIXED_STOP_TORQUE (A, SE) SD 43510: $SA_FIXED_STOP_TORQUE

SD 43510: $SA_FIXED_STOP_TORQUE
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
FIXED_STOP_WINDOW (A, SE) SD 43520: $SA_FIXED_STOP_WINDOW

SD 43520: $SA_FIXED_STOP_WINDOW
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
LEAD_OFFSET_IN_POS (A, SE) SD 43102: $SA_LEAD_OFFSET_IN_POS

SD 43102: $SA_LEAD_OFFSET_IN_POS
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
LEAD_OFFSET_OUT_POS (A, SE) SD 43106: $SA_LEAD_OFF‐

SET_OUT_POS
SD 43106: $SA_LEAD_OFFSET_OUT_POS
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access

NC variables
LEAD_SCALE_IN_POS (A, SE) SD 43104: $SA_LEAD_SCALE_IN_POS

SD 43104: $SA_LEAD_SCALE_IN_POS
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
LEAD_SCALE_OUT_POS (A, SE) SD 43108: $SA_LEAD_SCALE_OUT_POS

SD 43108: $SA_LEAD_SCALE_OUT_POS
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
LEAD_TYPE (A, SE) SD 43100: $SA_LEAD_TYPE

SD 43100: $SA_LEAD_TYPE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MDB_WORKAREA_MINUS_ENABLE (A, SE) SD 43410: $SA_MDB_WORKAREA_MI‐

NUS_ENABLE
Alternative name: WORKAREA_MINUS_ENABLE
Working area limitation active in the negative dir
Working area limitation active in the negative direction
Return value 0 = inactive
1 = active
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
1
MDB_WORKAREA_PLUS_ENABLE (A, SE) SD 43400: $SA_MDB_WORKAR‐

EA_PLUS_ENABLE
Alternative name: WORKAREA_PLUS_ENABLE
Working area limitation active in the positive dir
Working area limitation active in the positive direction
1 = active

NC variables
MDB_WORKAREA_PLUS_ENABLE (A, SE) SD 43400: $SA_MDB_WORKAR‐

EA_PLUS_ENABLE
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
1
MDD_SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26 (A, SE) SD 43220: $SA_MDD_SPIND_MAX_VE‐

LO_G26
Alternative name: SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26
Maximum spindle speed at G26
Maximum spindle speed at G26 (master spindle)
rev/min, user defined TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1
MDD_SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS (A, SE) SD 43230: $SA_MDD_SPIND_MAX_VE‐

LO_LIMS
Alternative name: SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS
Spindle speed limitation
Spindle speed limitation (master spindle)
Addressing
1
MDD_SPIND_MIN_VELO_G25 (A, SE) SD 43210: $SA_MDD_SPIND_MIN_VE‐

LO_G25
Alternative name: SPIND_MIN_VELO_G25
Minimum spindle speed at G25
Minimum spindle speed at G25 (master spindle)

NC variables
MDD_SPIND_MIN_VELO_G25 (A, SE) SD 43210: $SA_MDD_SPIND_MIN_VE‐

LO_G25
Addressing
1
MDD_WORKAREA_LIMIT_MINUS (A, SE) SD 43430: $SA_MDD_WORKAREA_LIM‐

IT_MINUS
Alternative name: WORKAREA_LIMIT_MINUS
Working area limitation in the negative direction
Addressing
1
MDD_WORKAREA_LIMIT_PLUS (A, SE) SD 43420: $SA_MDD_WORKAREA_LIM‐

IT_PLUS
Alternative name: WORKAREA_LIMIT_PLUS
Working area limitation in the positive direction
Addressing
1
OSCILL_CTRL_MASK (A, SE) SD 43770: $SA_OSCILL_CTRL_MASK

SD 43770: $SA_OSCILL_CTRL_MASK
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
OSCILL_DWELL_TIME1 (A, SE) SD 43720: $SA_OSCILL_DWELL_TIME1

SD 43720: $SA_OSCILL_DWELL_TIME1
Read access

NC variables
OSCILL_DWELL_TIME2 (A, SE) SD 43730: $SA_OSCILL_DWELL_TIME2

SD 43730: $SA_OSCILL_DWELL_TIME2
Read access
OSCILL_END_POS (A, SE) SD 43760: $SA_OSCILL_END_POS

SD 43760: $SA_OSCILL_END_POS
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
OSCILL_IS_ACTIVE (A, SE) SD 43780: $SA_OSCILL_IS_ACTIVE

SD 43780: $SA_OSCILL_IS_ACTIVE
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
OSCILL_NUM_SPARK_CYCLES (A, SE) SD 43750: $SA_OS‐

CILL_NUM_SPARK_CYCLES
SD 43750: $SA_OSCILL_NUM_SPARK_CYCLES
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
OSCILL_REVERSE_POS1 (A, SE) SD 43700: $SA_OSCILL_RE‐

VERSE_POS1
SD 43700: $SA_OSCILL_REVERSE_POS1
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
OSCILL_REVERSE_POS2 (A, SE) SD 43710: $SA_OSCILL_RE‐

VERSE_POS2
SD 43710: $SA_OSCILL_REVERSE_POS2
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access

NC variables
OSCILL_VELO (A, SE) SD 43740: $SA_OSCILL_VELO

SD 43740: $SA_OSCILL_VELO
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
TEMP_COMP_ABS_VALUE (A, SE) SD 43900: $SA_TEMP_COMP_ABS_VAL‐

UE
SD 43900: $SA_TEMP_COMP_ABS_VALUE
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
TEMP_COMP_REF_POSITION (A, SE) SD 43920: $SA_TEMP_COMP_REF_PO‐

SITION
SD 43920: $SA_TEMP_COMP_REF_POSITION
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
TEMP_COMP_SLOPE (A, SE) SD 43910: $SA_TEMP_COMP_SLOPE

SD 43910: $SA_TEMP_COMP_SLOPE
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access

NC variables
3.2.2 Bag: Mode Group Data
3.2.2.1 S: State data
During NC operation different internal states occur and system-specific data may change during operation. To
distinguish those from system variables, they are classified as state data.
A distinction is made between:

- NCK-specific state data
- Mode-group-specific state data
- Channel-specific state data
- Drive-specific state data (FDD)
- Drive-specific state data (MSD)
ncAutoCounter (B, S)
Counter for Auto key
Counter which is incremented with each 0->edge of
the Auto key
Physical unit: Data type: Initial value Minimum value:
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numBAGs
Read access
ncJogCounter (B, S)
Counter for Jog key
the Jog key
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numBAGs
Read access
ncMDACounter (B, S)
Counter for MDI key
the MDI key

NC variables
ncMDACounter (B, S)
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numBAGs
Read access
opMode (B, S) DB11, DBXn6.0-n6.2 (n=0,2,4,6, ...)

Active mode
Return value 0 = JOG
1 = MDI
2 = AUTO
- TYPE_UWORD
Validity: From NCK version 3.6 Read access
readyActive (B, S) DB11, DBX6.3, DBX26.3, DBX46.3, ...

Mode group ready
Code whether mode group is ready
Return value 0 = not ready
1 = ready
- TYPE_UWORD
resetActive (B, S) DB11, DBX6.7, DBX26.7, DBX46.7, ...

All channels of mode group in Reset
Code whether all channels in mode group are in Reset
Return value 0 = not all channels in reset
1 = all channels in reset
- TYPE_UWORD

NC variables
autoJogState (B, S) $AC_AUTO_JOG_STATE

Status of Automatic+JOG mode
Return value 1: Automatic is selected, $MN_JOG_MODE_MASK is set, and the mode group (BAG) is in
"Reset".
A JOG motion can then be initiated by pressing the +/- buttons or turning the hand wheel
in Auto.
2: This mode group has been switched internally to JOG on account of a JOG motion.
VDI and OPI still show Automatic.
0: In all other cases
Physical unit: Data type: Initial value Minimum value: Maximum value:
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 2
Addressing
$$numBAGs
Read access
3.2.3 Channel: Channel-assigned data
3.2.3.1 AUXFU: Active auxiliary functions
The module includes the active auxiliary functions for each group.
In the line, the auxiliary function group (64 groups) and the
desired view are addressed:
Line 1001-1064: Active auxiliary function from the point of view of the NCK
Line 2001-2064: Collected auxiliary function (after search run) from the point of view of the NCK
Line 3001-3064: Active auxiliary function from the point of view of the PLC
Line 1-64: Summary of the above views
Only the values of lines 3001-3064 can be written.

When writing individual values, it must be taken care
that the status variable is written last.
The entire data block of an auxiliary function will not be
accepted before this variable is written.
extension (C, AUXFU) $AC_AUXFU_EXT[groupIndex]

Extension of the auxiliary function
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0

NC variables
extension (C, AUXFU) $AC_AUXFU_EXT[groupIndex]

Addressing
3128
status (C, AUXFU)

Status of the auxiliary function
Return value Bit0 = 1: Auxiliary function has been collected (NCK view)
Bit1 = 1: Auxiliary function has been output to PLC (NCK view)
Bit2 = 1: Auxiliary function has been acknowledged by PLC (NCK view)
Bit3 = 1: Auxiliary function has been acknowledged by PLC (PLC view)
Bit4 = 1: Auxiliary function has been functionally completed (PLC view)
Bit14 = 1: Value type is LONG

Bit15 = 1: Value type is DOUBLE
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
3128
type (C, AUXFU) $AC_AUXFU_TYPE[groupIndex]

Type of the auxiliary function
Type of the auxiliary function, e.g. "M", "S", "T", "D", "F", "H", "L".
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
3128
valueDo (C, AUXFU) $AC_AUXFU_VALUE[groupIndex]

Double value of the auxiliary function
Value of the auxiliary function.
This value will be supplied, if "status" Bit15 = 1
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing

NC variables
valueDo (C, AUXFU) $AC_AUXFU_VALUE[groupIndex]

3128
valueLo (C, AUXFU) $AC_AUXFU_M_VALUE[groupIndex]

Long value of the auxiliary function
Value of the auxiliary function.
This value will be supplied, if "status" Bit14 = 1
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
3128
acAuxfuMTick (C, AUXFU) $AC_AUXFU_M_TICK[groupIndex]

Time stamp of the active auxiliary M function
The variable is used to read the time stamp of the last auxiliary function group
collected (search function) or output for an auxiliary function group.
If no auxiliary function has been output for a specified group yet,
the variable provides value -1.
- TYPE_DWORD -1 INT_MIN INT_MAX
Addressing
3128
acAuxfuPredefIndex (C, AUXFU) $AC_AUXFU_PREDEF_INDEX[groupIn‐

dex]
Pre-defined index of the active auxiliary function
The variable is used to read the pre-defined index of the last auxiliary function group
- TYPE_DWORD -1 -1 INT_MAX
Addressing
3064

NC variables
acAuxfuSpec (C, AUXFU) $AC_AUXFU_SPEC[groupIndex]

Output specif. of the active auxiliary function
The variable is used to read the output specification of the last auxiliary function group
The output specification is bit-coded:

Bit 0 = 1 Acknowledgment "normal" after an OB1 cycle
Bit 1 = 1 Acknowledgment "quick" with OB40
Bit 2 = 1 No pre-defined auxiliary function
Bit 3 = 1 No output to the PLC
Bit 4 = 1 Spindle reaction after acknowledgment by the PLC
Bit 5 = 1 Output before movement
Bit 6 = 1 Output during movement
Bit 7 = 1 Output at block end
Bit 8 = 1 No output after block search type 1,2,4
Bit 9 = 1 Collection during block search type 5 (SERUPRO)
Bit 10 = 1 No output during block search type 5 (SERUPRO)
Bit 11 = 1 Cross-channel auxiliary function (SERUPRO)
Bit 12 = 1 Output made through synchronized action
Bit 13 = 1 Implicit auxiliary function
Bit 14 = 1 Active M01
Bit 15 = 1 No output during travel-in test run
Bit 16 = 1 Nibbling OFF
Bit 17 = 1 Nibbling ON
Bit 18 = 1 Nibbling
- TYPE_DWORD -1 INT_MIN INT_MAX
Addressing
3064
acAuxfuTickSeq (C, AUXFU) $AC_AUXFU_TICK[groupIndex,0]

Sequence counter of the active auxiliary function
The variable is used to read the output sequence counter (all outputs within an IPO cycle)
of the last auxiliary function group
- TYPE_DWORD 0 INT_MIN INT_MAX

NC variables
acAuxfuTickSeq (C, AUXFU) $AC_AUXFU_TICK[groupIndex,0]

Addressing
3064
acAuxfuTickPack (C, AUXFU) $AC_AUXFU_TICK[groupIndex,1]

Package counter of the active auxiliary function
The variable is used to read the package counter per sequence
Addressing
3064
acAuxfuTickHifu (C, AUXFU) $AC_AUXFU_TICK[groupIndex,2]

Auxil. funct. counter of the act. auxil. function
The variable is used to read the auxiliary function counter per package
Addressing
3064
3.2.3.2 CP: Generic coupling
This block contains the data of the generic coupling.
aaCpNumDefLa (C, CP) $AA_CPNDEFLA[a]

Number of defined leading axes
The number of leading axes which have been defined for the specified following axis
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0

NC variables
aaCpNumDefLa (C, CP) $AA_CPNDEFLA[a]

Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaCpDefLa (C, CP) $AA_CPDEFLA[ax,n]

Defined leading axis of the following axis
The axis index of the nth leading axis which has been defined for the specified following axis
Return value -1 = the specified coupling is not defined
or n == 0
or n > $$aaCpNumDefLa (= number of defined leading axes of the following axis)
- TYPE_UWORD -1 -1
Addressing
Read access
aaCpNumActLa (C, CP) $AA_CPNACTLA[a]

Number of active leading axes
The number of leading axes which are active for the specified following axis
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaCpActLa (C, CP) $AA_CPACTLA[ax,n]

Active leading axis of the following axis
The axis index of the nth leading axis which is active for the specified following axis
Return value -1 = the specified coupling is not active
or n == 0
or n > $$aaCpNumActLa (= number of active leading axes of the following axis)
- TYPE_UWORD -1 -1
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
aaCpNumActFa (C, CP) $AA_CPNACTFA[ax]

Number of active following axes
Number of couplings (following axes), in which the specified axis LAx is active as leading axis
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaCpActFa (C, CP) $AA_CPACTFA[ax,n]

Active following axis of the leading axis
The axis index of the following axis of the nth coupling, in which the specified axis LAx is active as leading axis
Return value -1 = the following axis found is unknown in the channel
or n == 0
or n > $$aaCpNumActFa (= number of active couplings of the axis as leading axis)
- TYPE_UWORD -1 -1
Addressing
Read access
aaCpBlockChg (C, CP) $AA_CPBC[a]

Block change criterion for the following axis
The block change criterion indicates the condition that has to be fulfilled
before one can continue with the next block of the NC program
if a coupling has been activated for the stated following axis, FAx
Return value NONE - Block change is performed immediately
FINE - Block change is performed with "Synchronism fine"
COARSE - Block change is performed with "Synchronism coarse"
IPOSTOP - Block change is performed with "Setpoint synchronism"
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
aaCpfModeOff (C, CP) $AA_CPFMOF[a]

Coupling deactivation mode
Identifies the behavior of the following axis if the coupling is deactivated
Return value STOP - Stop following axis/spindle
CON - Continue movement with the current velocity
ADD
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaCpfActive (C, CP) $AA_CPFACT[a]

Types of active coupling
Bit-coded for identifying all types of coupling which are active for the stated following axis, FAx
Return value 0 = NONE - No active coupling to the following axis
Bit 0 (0x0001) - TRAIL - Uses a coupling factor
Bit 1 (0x0002) - LEAD - Uses a curve table
Bit 2 (0x0004) - ELG - An electronic gearbox link
Bit 3 (0x0008) - Reserved
Bit 4 (0x0010) - COUP - Spindle/partial spindle coupling
Bit 5 (0x0020) - GANTRY - Coupling of the split axes (axes mechanically bound)
Bit 6 (0x0040) - TANG - Tangential coupling using a curve table
Bit 7 (0x0080) - GEN_CP - Generic coupling
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaCpfRS (C, CP) $AA_CPFRS[a]

Reference system for the following axis
The reference system indicates the point at which the coupling process is applied
Return value BCS - Basic coordinate system
MCS - Machine coordinate system
- TYPE_STRING

NC variables
aaCpfRS (C, CP) $AA_CPFRS[a]

Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaCpfCmdPosTotal (C, CP) $AA_CPFCMDPT[a]

Sum of all position commands of all leading axes
Proportion of the axis position command due to the coupled axes.
The sum of the dependent proportion of the position command
for all leading axes for the stated following axis, FAx.
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaCpfCmdVelTotal (C, CP) $AA_CPFCMDVT[a]

Sum of all velocity commands of all leading axes
Proportion of the axis position command due to
the coupled axes. The sum of the dependent proportion of the velocity command
for all leading axes for the specified following axis.
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaCpfReqVelocity (C, CP) $AA_CPFREQV[a]

Required coupling velocity
Returns the speed requested by the active following axes/spindles.
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
aaCplType (C, CP) $AA_CPLTYPE[a,b]

Type of coupling
Indicates the process that is used with the coupling of the stated following axis with the stated leading axis.
Return value 0 = NONE - No defined coupling with these axes
Bit 0 (0x0001) - TRAIL - Uses a coupling factor
Bit 1 (0x0002) - LEAD - Uses a curve table
Bit 2 (0x0004) - ELG - An electronic gearbox link
Bit 3 (0x0008) - Reserved
Bit 4 (0x0010) - COUP - Spindle/partial spindle coupling
Bit 5 (0x0020) - GANTRY - Coupling of the split axes (axes mechanically bound)
Bit 6 (0x0040) - TANG - Tangential coupling with the aid of a curve table
Bit 7 (0x0080) - GEN_CP - Generic coupling
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes * $$numMachAxes
Read access
aaCplState (C, CP) $AA_CPLSTATE[a,b]

The status of the coupling
A string which describes the actual status of the coupling
Return value DEF = Defined (but not yet activated)
ON = Active
OF = Deactivated
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
Read access
aaCplCTabId (C, CP) $AA_CPLCTID[a,b]

The ID of the active curve table
ID number of the curve table which is used with the coupling of the stated axes.
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables
aaCplCTabId (C, CP) $AA_CPLCTID[a,b]

Read access
aaCplNumerator (C, CP) $AA_CPLNUM[a,b]

Counter of coupling factor
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
aaCplDenominator (C, CP) $AA_CPLDEN[a,b]

Denominator of coupling factor
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
aaCplCmdPos (C, CP) $AA_CPLCMDP[a,b]

Position command of the stated coupling
The proportion of the axis position command assigned to the stated coupling.
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
aaCplCmdVel (C, CP) $AA_CPLCMDV[a,b]

Velocity command of the stated coupling
The proportion of the axis acceration command assigned to the stated coupling.
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing

NC variables
aaCplCmdVel (C, CP) $AA_CPLCMDV[a,b]

Read access
aaCplRS (C, CP) $AA_CPLRS[a,b]

Reference system for the stated coupling
Reference system for the specified coupling
Return value Reference system for the specified coupling DescriptionValue range:
BCS - Basic coordinate system
MCS - Machine coordinate system
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
Read access
aaCpfAccelTotal (C, CP) $AA_CPFACCT[a]

Proportion of axis acceleration of all couplings
Proportion of axis acceleration due to the coupled axes.
The sum of the dependent proportion of the acceleration
of all leading axes for the stated following axis, FAx.
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaCplAccel (C, CP) $AA_CPLACC[a,b]

Acceleration proportion of the leading axis
Acceleration proportion of the following axis caused by an active coupling to the specified leading axis
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
aaCplSetVal (C, CP) $AA_CPLSETVAL[a,b]

Type of defined value for the coupling
Indicates the type of defined value used for the coupling
Return value ACTPOS = Actual position
CMDPOS = Setpoint position
CMDVEL = Setpoint velocity
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
Read access
aaCpfModeOn (C, CP) $AA_CPFMON[a]

Coupling activation mode
Indicates the behavior of the following axis, FAx, when the coupling is activated.
Return value STOP - Stop following axis/spindle
CON - Continue motion of the FAx with the current velocity
ADD
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaCpfMSOn (C, CP) $AA_CPFMSON[a]

Following axis mode On strategy
Indicates the activation strategy of the following axis
Return value CNONE
CFAST
COARSE
NTG
ACN
ACP
DCT
NTGP
DCP
- TYPE_STRING

NC variables
aaCpfMSOn (C, CP) $AA_CPFMSON[a]

Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaCpMReset (C, CP) $AA_CPMRESET[a]

Coupling mode through RESET
Return value NONE
ON
OFF
DEL
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaCpMStart (C, CP) $AA_CPMSTART[a]

Coupling mode through program start
Return value NONE
ON
OFF
DEL
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaCpMStartPrt (C, CP) $AA_CPMSTARTPRT[a]

Coupling mode through SERUPRO start
Return value NONE
ON
OFF
DEL
- TYPE_STRING

NC variables
aaCpMStartPrt (C, CP) $AA_CPMSTARTPRT[a]

Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaCpSetType (C, CP) $AA_CPSETTYPE[a]

Coupling set coupling type
Return value NONE
TRAIL
LEAD
EG
COUP
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaCplInTrans (C, CP) $AA_CPLINTR[a,b]

Input transmission correction of coupling factor
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
aaCplInScale (C, CP) $AA_CPLINSC[a,b]

Input scaling factor of coupling factor
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
aaCplOutTrans (C, CP) $AA_CPLOUTTR[a,b]

Output transmission correction of coupling factor

NC variables
aaCplOutTrans (C, CP) $AA_CPLOUTTR[a,b]

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
aaCplOutScale (C, CP) $AA_CPLOUTSC[a,b]

Output scaling factor of coupling factor
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
aaCpSynCoPos (C, CP) $AA_CPSYNCOP[a]

Synchronization coarse positioning tolerance
Coarse positioning tolerance for coupling synchronization
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaCpSynFiPos (C, CP) $AA_CPSYNFIP[a]

Synchronization fine positioning tolerance
Fine positioning tolerance for coupling synchronization
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaCpSynCoVel (C, CP) $AA_CPSYNCOV[a]

Synchronization coarse velocity tolerance
Coarse velocity tolerance for coupling synchronization

NC variables
aaCpSynCoVel (C, CP) $AA_CPSYNCOV[a]

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaCpSynFiVel (C, CP) $AA_CPSYNFIV[a]

Synchronization fine velocity tolerance
Fine velocity tolerance for coupling synchronization
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaCpMVdi (C, CP) $AA_CPMVDI[a]

Behavior of the coupl. module regard. VDI signals
Behavior of the coupling module regarding VDI signals
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaCpSynCoPos2 (C, CP) $AA_CPSYNCOP2[a]

Threshold value second synchr. monitoring coarse
Second synchronism monitoring of the following axis / spindle: threshold value coarse
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
aaCpSynFiPos2 (C, CP) $AA_CPSYNFIP2[a]

Threshold value second synchr. monitoring fine
Second synchronism monitoring of the following axis / spindle: threshold value fine
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaCpMAlarm (C, CP) $AA_CPMALARM[a]

Behavior of coupling module re handling of alarms
Behavior of coupling module regarding suppression of alarms
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
3.2.3.3 DIAG: Diagnostics data, available only for internal development purposes
This block contains channel-specific diagnostic data.
actCycleTimeNet (C, DIAG)

actCycleTimeNet
ms TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
minCycleTimeNet (C, DIAG)

minCycleTimeNet
ms TYPE_DOUBLE
maxCycleTimeNet (C, DIAG)

maxCycleTimeNet

NC variables
maxCycleTimeNet (C, DIAG)

ms TYPE_DOUBLE
actCycleTimeBrut (C, DIAG)

actCycleTimeBrut
Read access
minCycleTimeBrut (C, DIAG)

minCycleTimeBrut
ms TYPE_DOUBLE
maxCycleTimeBrut (C, DIAG)

maxCycleTimeBrut
ms TYPE_DOUBLE
availableBodies (C, DIAG)

availableBodies
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access
numConfigBodies (C, DIAG)

numConfigBodies
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access
maxAllocBodies (C, DIAG)

maxAllocBodies

NC variables
maxAllocBodies (C, DIAG)

- TYPE_UWORD
bodySize (C, DIAG)

bodySize
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access
ipoBufLevel (C, DIAG)

ipoBufLevel
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access
handleDebugFlags (C, DIAG)

handleDebugFlags
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access
internalBlockNumber (C, DIAG)

internalBlockNumber
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
resetCounter (C, DIAG)

resetCounter
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access
reposCounter (C, DIAG)

reposCounter

NC variables
reposCounter (C, DIAG)

- TYPE_UWORD
Read access
fifoFileActNetData (C, DIAG)

fifoFileActNetData
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
countOfFreeByteBrut (C, DIAG)

countOfFreeByteBrut
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
ncscTraceCounter (C, DIAG)

ncscTraceCounter
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access
varAccessError (C, DIAG)

varAccessError
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access
theErrorObjOK (C, DIAG)

theErrorObjOK
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access
testReqVarServerSuppr (C, DIAG)

testReqVarServerSuppr

NC variables
testReqVarServerSuppr (C, DIAG)

- TYPE_UWORD
testInchMetr (C, DIAG)

testInchMetr
- TYPE_UWORD
stackSizeUsed (C, DIAG)

stackSizeUsed
- TYPE_STRING
Read access
nextSLSubtype (C, DIAG)

nextSLSubtype
- TYPE_STRING
COTraceFlags (C, DIAG)

COTraceFlags
- TYPE_DWORD
coCliStiCounterMax (C, DIAG)

coCliStiCounterMax
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
coCliTimestampMax (C, DIAG)

coCliTimestampMax

NC variables
coCliTimestampMax (C, DIAG)

ms TYPE_DWORD
Read access
coCliTimestampMaxStartup (C, DIAG)

coCliTimestampMaxStartup
s, user defined TYPE_DWORD
Read access
protocVLTime (C, DIAG)

protocVLTime
Read access
interferenceCheckOn (C, DIAG)

interferenceCheckOn
- TYPE_DWORD
ipoCounter (C, DIAG)

ipoCounter
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
stopCondSet (C, DIAG)

stopCondSet
- TYPE_UWORD
taskRuntimeInProg (C, DIAG)

taskRuntimeInProg

NC variables
taskRuntimeInProg (C, DIAG)

- TYPE_STRING
Read access
asyncOrderForWaitTime (C, DIAG)

Asynchronous order in the EES subtask
Asynchronous order for a wait time that is executed in the EES subtask.
Use: Simulation of slow external drives.
- TYPE_DOUBLE
3.2.3.4 DIAGN: Diagnostic module
This module contains information about channel-specific NC diagnostic data.

Net times: Time without interrupts by higher priority time levels.
Gross times: Time with interrupts by higher priority time levels.
Time levels in order of their priority: position controller, interpolator, block preparation.
acIpoBuf (C, DIAGN) $AC_IPO_BUF

Level of IPO buffer
Level of IPO buffer (number of blocks)
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
actCycleTimeBrut (C, DIAGN)

Current gross cycle time
Current gross run time in ms.
ms TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
13
Read access

NC variables
actCycleTimeNet (C, DIAGN)

Current net cycle time
Current net run time in ms.
ms TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
13
Read access
cuttingTime (C, DIAGN) $AC_CUTTING_TIME

Tool operating time ( in seconds ).
Tool operating time ( in seconds ):
The operating time of the path axes excluding active
rapid traverse is measured in all NC programs between
NC Start and Program End/NC Reset.
The measurement is also interrupted during an active
dwell time. The timer is automatically set to zero
every time the control boots on default values.
Physical unit: Data type: Initial value
s, user defined TYPE_DOUBLE 0.0
Addressing
1
cycleTime (C, DIAGN) $AC_CYCLE_TIME

Runtime of selected NC program
Runtime of selected NC program ( in seconds ):
The runtime between NC Start and Program End / NC
Reset is measured in the selected NC program.
The timer is cleared when a new NC program is
started.
Addressing
1

NC variables
ipoBufLevel (C, DIAGN)

Fill level of the IPO buffer (integer value in %)
% TYPE_UWORD 0 100
Addressing
1
Read access
maxCycleTimeBrut (C, DIAGN)

Maximum gross cycle time
Maximum gross run time in ms.
ms TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
100
maxCycleTimeBrutPo (C, DIAGN)

Maximum gross run time
Maximum gross run time since cold restart in ms.
ms TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
100
maxCycleTimeNet (C, DIAGN)

Maximum net cycle time
Maximum net run time in ms.
ms TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
100

NC variables
maxCycleTimeNetPo (C, DIAGN)

Maximum net run time
Maximum net run time since cold restart in ms.
ms TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
100
minCycleTimeBrut (C, DIAGN)

minimum gross cycle time
Minimum gross run time in ms.
ms TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
100
minCycleTimeBrutPo (C, DIAGN)

Minimum gross run time
Minimum gross run time since cold restart in ms.
ms TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
100
minCycleTimeNet (C, DIAGN)

Minimum net cycle time
Minimum net run time in ms.
ms TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
100

NC variables
minCycleTimeNetPo (C, DIAGN)

Minimum net run time
Minimum net run time since cold restart in ms.
ms TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
100
operatingTime (C, DIAGN) $AC_OPERATING_TIME

Total runtime NC programs
Total runtime of NC programs in Automatic mode
( in seconds ):
The runtimes of all programs are summed between
NC Start and Program End/NC Reset.
The timer is set to zero on every control boot.
Addressing
1
aveCycleTimeNet (C, DIAGN)

Average net run time
Average net run time in s
ms TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
13
Read access
sumCycleTimeNet (C, DIAGN)

Sum of net run times
Sum of net run times in ms
ms TYPE_DOUBLE

NC variables
sumCycleTimeNet (C, DIAGN)

Addressing
13
Read access
taskName (C, DIAGN)

Name of task
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
13
Read access
taskAvailable (C, DIAGN)

Task is present
Return value The reasons are bit-coded.
0: Task not present
1: Task present
Physical unit: Data type: Minimum value:
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
13
Read access

NC variables
3.2.3.5 EPSP: Reserved for internal use only (ePS).
Parameters reserved for internal use only (ePS).
There is one EPSP module in each active channel. Each EPSP module holds six modifiable parameter arrays
of different data types.
The dimension of each parameter array is given by MD 18840: $MN_MM_EPSPARAM_DIMENSION. There is

only one EPSPARAM_DIMENSION value for the system. Every EPSP array in every EPSP module has this
dimension. The value can range from 0 (= no parameters) to 100. The default dimension is 10.
Each EPSP parameter array occupies one column of an EPSP module. In each column, array elements [0],
[1], [2], etc. are in module rows 1, 2, 3, etc. Module row 0 is not present in EPSP.
The parameter names, module columns, and types of the modifiable data are:
- $EPS_R[ n ] - Column 2 - Real
- $EPS_I[ n ] - Column 3 - Integer
- $EPS_B[ n ] - Column 4 - Boolean
- $EPS_A[ n ] - Column 5 - Axis
- $EPS_C[ n ] - Column 6 - Character
- $EPS_S[ n ] - Column 7 - String[32] (32 characters including terminator)
In addition, column 1 row 1 of an EPSP module contains a copy of the value of $MN_MM_EPSPARAM_DIMEN‐
SION. This value is read-only. When it is greater than zero, it is the largest row number that is present for the
other columns. When it is equal to zero, none of the other columns is present, but this column 1 row 1 value is
always present.
mmEpsParamDimension (C, EPSP) $MM_EPSPARAM_DIMENSION EPS

The machine data $MN_MM_EPSPARAM_DIMENSION
Reserved for internal use only (ePS).
- TYPE_WORD
Read access
epsR (C, EPSP) $EPS_R[x] x = ParameterNo EPS

ePS parameter of type REAL
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing

NC variables
epsR (C, EPSP) $EPS_R[x] x = ParameterNo EPS

$MM_EPSPARAM_DIMENSION + 1
epsI (C, EPSP) $EPS_I[x] x = ParameterNo EPS

ePS parameter of type INT
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
epsB (C, EPSP) $EPS_B[x] x = ParameterNo EPS

ePS parameter of type BOOL
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Addressing
epsA (C, EPSP) $EPS_A[x] x = ParameterNo EPS

ePS parameter of type AXIS
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
epsC (C, EPSP) $EPS_C[x] x = ParameterNo EPS

ePS parameter of type CHAR
- TYPE_CHAR

NC variables
epsC (C, EPSP) $EPS_C[x] x = ParameterNo EPS

Addressing
epsS (C, EPSP) $EPS_S[x] x = ParameterNo EPS

ePS parameter of type STRING
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing

NC variables
3.2.3.6 ETP: Event types
Description of logging event types.

It is permissible to access this module via several lines and columns.
The line index identifies a specific event.

Standard events: line index <= 10000:
OEM events: line index > 10000:
User index: is determined by the 1000s digit of the line index
Event type: is determined by the last three digits of the line index
Examples of the line index:

00001: Standard event of user 0 with the number 1 (IPO)
00006: Standard event of user 0 with the number 6 (NC start)
10001: OEM event of user 0 with the number 1
13002: OEM event of user 3 with the number 2
Standard event types:
Cyclic events:
1 = IPO and IPO cycle
15 = IPO2
47 = IPO3 (from SW $[[SW510400]])
48 = IPO4 (from SW $[[SW510400]])
Acyclic events related to axis motions:

2 = GEO_AXIS_START and Geo axis starts or changes the direction
18 = GEO_AXIS_STARTa see VDI interface NCK->PLC channel specific
DBB40 Bit6 and Bit7 (Bit6 = motion command+, Bit7 = motion command-)
Event occurs when a bit is reset.
3 = GEO_AXIS_STOP and Geo axis stops
19 = GEO_AXIS_STOPa, see VDI interface NCK->PLC channel specific
DBB40 Bit6 and Bit7 (Bit6 = motion command-, Bit7 = motion command+)
Event occurs when both bits are set to 0 and one of them was previously active.
4 = MA_AXIS_START, One machine axis of the channel starts or changes the direction
see VDI interface NCK->PLC axis-specific
Event occurs when a bit is reset.
5 = MA_AXIS_STOP, One machine axis stops
see VDI interface NCK->PLC axis-specific

NC variables
Event occurs if both bits are set to 0 and one of them was previously active.
Acyclic events related to channel influence:

6 = NC_START NC start (if detected in NC)
7 = NC_STOP NC stop (if detected in NC, axes may still be traversed)
60 = CHAN_STATE The channel state changes (from SW $[[SW991806]])
61 = PROG_STATE The program state changes (from SW $[[SW991806]])
Acyclic events related to part program processing:

8 = BLOCK_BEG_1 and Block start (first IPO cycle of a block) without intermediate blocks, all
program levels
52 = BLOCK_BEG_1a
9 = BLOCK_BEG_2 and Block start (first IPO cycle of a block) with intermediate blocks, all
program levels
20 = BLOCK_BEG_2a
56 = BLOCK_BEG_2b
57 = BLOCK_BEG_2c
10 = BLOCK_BEG_3 Block start (first IPO cycle of a block) without intermediate blocks, only
main program level and MDI level
16 = BLOCK_BEG_S1 and Block start (search run with computation) with intermediate blocks,
all program levels
22 = BLOCK_BEG_S1a
11 = BLOCK_END_1 Block end (first IPO cycle of a block) without intermediate blocks, all
program levels
12 = BLOCK_END_2 and Block end (first IPO cycle of a block) with intermediate blocks, all
program levels
21 = BLOCK_END_2a
13 = BLOCK_END_3 Block end (first IPO cycle of a block) without intermediate blocks, only
main program level and MDI level
17 = BLOCK_END_S1 Block end (search run with computation) with intermediate blocks, all
program levels
31 = BLOCK_END_P1 Block end (run in) (from SW $[[SW530000]])

32 = BLOCK_END_P1a Block end (run in) (from SW $[[SW530000]])
44 = BLOCK_END_I1 Block end (interpreter) (from SW $[[SW510300]])
43 = NC_LEVEL_CHG Level change during part program processing (from SW $[[SW510300]])

NC variables
Acyclic events triggered by part program command WRTPR

23 = PROT_TXT_REQ Logging a WRTPR text
24 = PROT_TXT_REQ_S1 Logging a WRTPR text (search run with computation)
33 = PROT_TXT_REQ_P1 Logging a WRTPR text (run in) (from SW $[[SW510300]])
Acyclic events triggered by the logging process itself

14 = PROT_FILE_BEG Start logging related to a log file.
29 = PROT_START_TRIG Start trigger has triggered (from SW $[[SW510300]])
30 = PROT_STOP_TRIG Stop trigger has triggered (from SW $[[SW510300]])
46 = PROT_START Start logging (from SW $[[SW510300]])
45 = PROT_STOP Stop logging (from SW $[[SW510300]])
Acyclic events triggered by buttons

42 = CANCEL_BUTTON The Cancel button was pressed (from SW $[[SW510300]])
Acyclic events triggered by alarms

41 = ALARM_REPORTED An alarm has occurred (from SW $[[SW510300]])
Acyclic events triggered by synchronized action

36 = SYNC_ACT_ACTIV Activating synchronized action (from SW $[[SW510300]])
37 = SYNC_ACT_DEACT Deactivating synchronized action (from SW $[[SW510300]])
38 = SYNC_ACT_FIRE Synchronized action triggers (from SW $[[SW510300]])
Acyclic events triggered by tool

25 = TOOL_CHANGE tool change (from SW $[[SW420000]])
27 = TOOL_CHANGE_S1 tool change (search run with computation) (from SW $[[SW440000]])
34 = TOOL_CHANGE_P1 tool change (run in) (from SW $[[SW510300]])
26 = CUTTEDGE_CHANGE cutting edge change (from SW $[[SW420000]])
28 = CUTTEDGE_CHANGE_S1 cutting edge change (search run with computation) (from SW $
[[SW440000]])
35 = CUTTEDGE_CHANGE_P1 cutting edge change (run in) (from SW $[[SW510300]])
Acyclic events triggered by PLC

39 = PLC_OB_1 PLC OB1 started (from SW $[[SW510300]])
40 = PLC_OB40 PLC OB40 started (from SW $[[SW510300]])¶

NC variables
asciiMode (C, ETP)

Data logging format
Return value 0: Data recorded in binary format with fixed alignment to 8 bytes
1: Data recorded in ASCII format
2: Data recorded in binary format with variable alignment
3: Data recorded in binary format with variable alignment and optimization of two consecu‐
tive data records of the same event. In this case, only the header is logged, not the actual
data.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 3
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
countActivated (C, ETP)

Number of occurrences of event
Number of times the event has occurred
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Read access
countActivatedL (C, ETP)

Number of times the event has occurred.
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access
dataListIndex (C, ETP)

Index of data list
Index of data list to be used
Return value All valid columns in module ETPD - 1)
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing

NC variables
dataListIndex (C, ETP)

siehe Bausteinkopf
dataProtok (C, ETP)

Bytes written to the Fifo file
Number of bytes entered in the Fifo file
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Read access
dataUploaded (C, ETP)

Bytes read to the Fifo file
Number of bytes already uploaded from the Fifo file
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Read access
eventActive (C, ETP)

Event state
Return value 0: Not active
1: Active
2: Deactivate and release data set
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 2
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
eventActiveStatus (C, ETP)

State
For diagnosis: Event state
Return value 0: Activated
1: Not activated
2: Cannot be activated because the sum of the variable lengths is too large
3: Cannot be activated because the internal resources are not sufficient
4: Cannot be activated because the protocol file cannot be created
100-...- cannot be activated because the variable specification with the index (value - 100)
is wrong

NC variables
eventActiveStatus (C, ETP)

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access
headerType (C, ETP)

Type of header in the data record
Return value 0: No header
1: Short header with the following structure:
UDword dataStamp; // Data record identified by a consecutive number
UWord event; // Enter type of event that occurred
UWord protCount; // The number of times the event has been logged
2: Long header with the following structure:
UByte chan; // Channel in which the event occurred
UByte dummy1; // Still free
UDword protCount; // The number of times the event has been logged
UDword dummy2; // Still free
3: Mid-length header, non-aligned with the following structure:
UByte chan; // Channel in which the event occurred
UByte dummy1; // Still free
UDword protCount; // The number of times the event has been logged
- TYPE_UWORD 1 0 3
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
maxElementsFastFifoUsed (C, ETP)

Maximum Fifo buffer fill level reached
For diagnosis: Maximum number of entries in the FIFO buffer
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0

NC variables
maxElementsFastFifoUsed (C, ETP)

Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access
maxFileLength (C, ETP)

Maximum length of log file
Maximum length of the log file.
Values less than 1024 are interpreted as KB, larger values as bytes.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
maxGrossFileLengthUsed (C, ETP)

Maximum log file size
For diagnosis: Maximum gross size of log file
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access
maxNetFileLengthTooSmall (C, ETP)

Number of bytes log file undersized
For diagnosis: Number of (net) bytes by which log file is undersized
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access
numElementsFastFifoTooSmall (C, ETP)

Number of entries Fifo buffer undersized
For diagnosis: Number of entries by which the Fifo buffer is undersized

NC variables
numElementsFastFifoTooSmall (C, ETP)

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access
protocolFilename (C, ETP)

Log file name
Name of the log file including the path
- TYPE_STRING 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
resultPar1 (C, ETP)

General result value
General result value, the significance is a function of the event.
SYNC_ACT_ACTIVATE, SYNC_ACT_DEACTIVATE, and SYNC_ACT_FIRE: ID of the synchronous action.
All non-stated events do not supply this result value.
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access
skip (C, ETP)

Number of events to be skipped
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf

NC variables
startTriggerLock (C, ETP)

Processing block for the start trigger
Setting, whether the start trigger is not to be processed during this event.
Return value 0: Trigger is processed
1: Trigger is not processed
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
stopTriggerLock (C, ETP)

Processing block for the stop trigger
Setting, whether the stop trigger is not to be processed during this event.
Return value 0: Trigger is processed
1: Trigger is not processed
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
suppressProtLock (C, ETP)

$$traceProtocolLock is inactive
Clears the effect of $$traceProtocolLock
Return value 0: The disable is active
1: The disable is canceled for this event
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
1
timePeriod (C, ETP)

Time base
Time base for cyclic event only
ms TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

NC variables
3.2.3.7 FA: Active Work Offset
The following frame indices are available:
0: $P_ACTFRAME = current resulting work offset

1: $P_IFRAME = current settable work offset
2: $P_PFRAME = current programmable work offset
3: EXTFRAME = current external work offset
4: TOTFRAME = current total work offset = sum of ACTFRAME and EXTFRAME
5: $P_ACTBFRAME = current total base frame
6: $P_SETFRAME = current 1st system frame (set actual value, scratching)
7: $P_EXTSFRAME = current 2nd system frame (set actual value, scratching)
8: $P_PARTFRAME = current 3rd system frame (TCARR and PAROT with orientable tool carrier)
9: $P_TOOLFRAME = current 4th system frame (TOROT and TOFRAME)
10: $AC_MEASFRAME = result frame for workpiece and tool measurement
11: $P_WPFRAME = current 5th system frame (workpiece reference points) as from SW $[[SW440000]]
12: $P_CYCFRAME = current 6th system frame (cycles) as from SW $[[SW440000]]
13: $P_TRAFRAME = current 7th system frame (transformation) as from SW $[[SW520000]]
14: $P_ISO1FRAME = current ISO system frame for G51.1 mirroring as from SW $[[SW660000]]
15: $P_ISO2FRAME = current ISO system frame for G68 2DROT as from SW $[[SW660000]]
16: $P_ISO3FRAME = current ISO system frame for G68 3DROT as from SW $[[SW660000]]
17: $P_ISO4FRAME = current ISO system frame for G51 scale as from SW $[[SW660000]]
18: $P_ACSFRAME = current resulting frame for the SZS (ACS) as from SW $[[SW660000]]
19: $P_RELFRAME = current 12th system frame for relative coordinate systems as from SW $[[SW700000]]
20: $P_TRAFRAME_P = current frame of the workpiece component of an active kinematic (orientation) transfor‐
mation as from SW $[[SW900000]]
21: $P_TRAFRAME_T = current frame of the tool component of an active kinematic (orientation) transformation
as from SW $[[SW900000]]
The maximum frame index is 21.
linShift (C, FA) diverse, siehe Bausteinbescheibung PA

Translation of an active frame
Translation of an active work offset (the physical unit is defined in basicLengthUnit in module Y in area N).
Addressing
20 * $$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
linShiftFine (C, FA) diverse, siehe Bausteinbescheibung

Fine offset of an active frame
Addressing
20 * $$numMachAxes
mirrorImgActive (C, FA) diverse, siehe Bausteinbescheibung PA

Mirroring enabled in an active frame
Mirroring enabled in an active work offset
Return value 0 = mirroring not active
1 = mirroring active
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
20 * $$numMachAxes
Read access
rotation (C, FA) diverse, siehe Bausteinbescheibung PA

Rotation of an active frame
Rotation of an active work offset
Degree TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
20 * $$numMachAxes
Read access
rotationCoordinate (C, FA)

Coordinate rotation of active frames
Rotation around a coordinate of an active work offset
1: Rotation around the first non-existing geometry axis.
Degree TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing

NC variables
rotationCoordinate (C, FA)

20 * $$numMachAxes
Read access
scaleFact (C, FA) diverse, siehe Bausteinbescheibung PA

Scaling factor of an active frame
Scaling factor of an active work offset
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
20 * $$numMachAxes
Read access
3.2.3.8 FB: Base Frame
This only applies if $MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES > 0.
The maximum frame index is: $MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES - 1
linShift (C, FB) $P_CHBFR[x,y,TR] x=FrameNo, y=Axis PA

Translation of a settable frame
Translation of settable work offset (the physical unit is defined in basicLengthUnit in module Y in area N).
Addressing
$MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES * ($$num‐
GeoAxes + $$numAuxAxes)
linShiftFine (C, FB) $P_CHBFR[x,y,SI] x=FrameNo, y=Axis

Fine offset for frames
Fine offset with frames, expansion of basic frames and settable frames
Addressing

NC variables
linShiftFine (C, FB) $P_CHBFR[x,y,SI] x=FrameNo, y=Axis

mirrorImgActive (C, FB) $P_CHBFR[x,y,MI] x=FrameNo, y=Axis PA

Mirroring enabled in a settable frame
Mirroring enabled in a settable work offset
Return value 0: Mirroring not active
1: Mirroring active
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
rotation (C, FB) $P_CHBFR[x,y,RT] x=FrameNo, y=Axis PA

Rotation of a settable frame
Rotation of a settable work offset
Degree TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
rotationCoordinate (C, FB)

Coordinate rotation of settable frames
Rotation around coordinate of a channel base frame
1: Rotation around first non-existing geometry axis.
Degree TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing

NC variables
scaleFact (C, FB) $P_CHBFR[x,y,SC] x=FrameNo, y=Axis PA

Scaling factor of a settable frame
Scaling factor of a settable work offset
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
3.2.3.9 FE: External Work Offset
There is exactly one external frame defined by the PLC.
The maximum frame index is: 0
linShift (C, FE) $AA_ETRANS[x] x = FrameNo PA

Translation of an external frame
Translation of external work offset (the physical unit is defined in basicLengthUnit in module Y in area N).
Addressing
$$numGeoAxes
linShiftFine (C, FE) diverse, siehe Bausteinbescheibung

Fine offset of external frame
Fine offset of external work offset
Addressing
$$numGeoAxes

NC variables
mirrorImgActive (C, FE) diverse, siehe Bausteinbescheibung PA

Mirroring of an external frame
Mirroring of an external work offset
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
20 * $$numMachAxes
Read access
rotation (C, FE) diverse, siehe Bausteinbescheibung PA

Rotation of an external frame
Rotation of an external work offset
Degree TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
20 * $$numMachAxes
Read access
rotationCoordinate (C, FE)

Coordinate rotation external work offset
Rotation around coordinate of an external work offset
Degree TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
20 * $$numMachAxes
Read access
scaleFact (C, FE) diverse, siehe Bausteinbescheibung PA

Scaling factor of external frame
Scaling factor of an external work offset
- TYPE_DOUBLE

NC variables
scaleFact (C, FE) diverse, siehe Bausteinbescheibung PA

Addressing
20 * $$numMachAxes
Read access
3.2.3.10 FG: Frames for grinding applications
These occur only if $MC_MM_NUM_G_FRAMES > 0 and $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_G_FRAMES = 0, other‐

wise all grinding frames are configured globally for the NCU.
The following frame indices are possible:

0: GRAME1
1: GRAME2
2: GRAME3
3: GRAME4
...
n: GRAMEn
...
99: GRAME100
The maximum frame index is: $MC_MM_NUM_G_FRAMES - 1
The PI service SETUFR has to be called to activate the grinding frames.
linShift (C, FG) $P_GFR[x,y,TR] x=FrameNo,y=Axis PA

Translation of grinding frame
Translation of grinding frame (the physical unit is defined in basicLengthUnit in block Y in area N).
Addressing
$MC_MM_NUM_G_FRAMES * ($$numGeoAx‐
es + $$numAuxAxes)
linShiftFine (C, FG) $P_GFR[x,y,SI] x=FrameNo,y=Axis


NC variables
linShiftFine (C, FG) $P_GFR[x,y,SI] x=FrameNo,y=Axis

Addressing
es + $$numAuxAxes)
mirrorImgActive (C, FG) $P_GFR[x,y,MI] x = FrameNo,y=Axis PA

Mirroring of grinding frame
Mirroring
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
es + $$numAuxAxes)
rotation (C, FG) $P_GFR[x,y,RT] x = FrameNo,y=Axis PA

Rotation of grinding frame
Rotation
Degree TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
es + $$numAuxAxes)
rotationCoordinate (C, FG)

Rotation of grinding frame coordinate
Rotation around a coordinate.
1: Rotation around the first non-existent geometry axis.

Degree TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing

NC variables
rotationCoordinate (C, FG)

es + $$numAuxAxes)
scaleFact (C, FG) $P_GFR[x,y,SC] x = FrameNo,y=Axis PA

Scaling factor of grinding frame
Scaling factor
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
es + $$numAuxAxes)
3.2.3.11 FS: System Frame
Those that exist are set by the bits in $MC_MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK.

Consequently, there may be gaps between the active system frames.
The maximum frame index is:

3 up to but excluding SW $[[SW440000]].
5 from and including SW $[[SW440000]].
11 as from and including SW $[[SW660000]].
12 as from and including SW $[[SW700000]].
linShift (C, FS) $P_SETFR[Achse, TR]

Translation
mm, inch, user defined TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
12 * ($$numGeoAxes+$$numAuxAxes)
linShiftFine (C, FS) $P_SETFR[Achse, SI]

Fine offset of a system frame
Fine offset

NC variables
linShiftFine (C, FS) $P_SETFR[Achse, SI]

Addressing
mirrorImgActive (C, FS) $P_SETFR[Achse, MI]

Mirroring a system frame
Mirroring
1: Mirroring active
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
rotation (C, FS) $P_SETFR[Achse, RT]

Rotation of a system frame
Rotation
Degree TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
rotationCoordinate (C, FS)

Coordinate rotation of a system frame
Rotation around a coordinate of a system frame
Addressing

NC variables
scaleFact (C, FS) $P_SETFR[Achse, SC]

Scaling factor of a system frame
Scaling factor
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
3.2.3.12 FU: Settable Work Offset
This only applies if $MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES > 0 and $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES = 0,

otherwise all settable frames have an NCU-global configuration.

0 = G500
1 = G54
2 = G55
3 = G56
4 = G57
5 = G505
6 = G506
:
n = G5n
:
99 = G599
The maximum frame index is: $MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES - 1
The PI service SETUFR has to be called in order to activate the settable frames.
linShift (C, FU) $P_UIFR[x,y,TR] x=FrameNo,y=Axis PA

Addressing

NC variables
linShift (C, FU) $P_UIFR[x,y,TR] x=FrameNo,y=Axis PA

$MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES * ($$num‐
linShiftFine (C, FU) $P_UIFR[x,y,SI] x=FrameNo,y=Axis

Addressing
mirrorImgActive (C, FU) $P_UIFR[x,y,MI] x = FrameNo,y=Axis PA

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
rotation (C, FU) $P_UIFR[x,y,RT] x = FrameNo,y=Axis PA

Degree TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing

NC variables
rotationCoordinate (C, FU)

Rotation around a coordinate of a settable work offset

Degree TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
scaleFact (C, FU) $P_UIFR[x,y,SC] x = FrameNo,y=Axis PA

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Channel-specific machine data
ADD_MOVE_ACCEL_RESERVE (C, M) MD 20610: $MC_ADD_MOVE_AC‐

CEL_RESERVE
MD 20610: $MC_ADD_MOVE_ACCEL_RESERVE
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
ALLOW_G0_IN_G96 (C, M) MD 20750: $MC_ALLOW_G0_IN_G96

MD 20750: $MC_ALLOW_G0_IN_G96

NC variables
ALLOW_G0_IN_G96 (C, M) MD 20750: $MC_ALLOW_G0_IN_G96

- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
AUXFU_ASSIGN_EXTENSION (C, M) MD 22020: $MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_EX‐

TENSION
MD 22020: $MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_EXTENSION
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access
AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP (C, M) MD 22000: $MC_AUXFU_AS‐

SIGN_GROUP
MD 22000: $MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access
AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE (C, M) MD 22010: $MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE

MD 22010: $MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
2
Read access
AUXFU_ASSIGN_VALUE (C, M) MD 22030: $MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_VAL‐

UE
MD 22030: $MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_VALUE
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing

NC variables
AUXFU_ASSIGN_VALUE (C, M) MD 22030: $MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_VAL‐

UE
2
Read access
AUXFU_AT_BLOCK_SEARCH_END (C, M) MD 22300: $MC_AUX‐

FU_AT_BLOCK_SEARCH_END
MD 22300: $MC_AUXFU_AT_BLOCK_SEARCH_END
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
AUXFU_D_SYNC_TYPE (C, M) MD 22250: $MC_AUXFU_D_SYNC_TYPE

MD 22250: $MC_AUXFU_D_SYNC_TYPE
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
AUXFU_E_SYNC_TYPE (C, M) MD 22260: $MC_AUXFU_E_SYNC_TYPE

MD 22260: $MC_AUXFU_E_SYNC_TYPE
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
AUXFU_F_SYNC_TYPE (C, M) MD 22240: $MC_AUXFU_F_SYNC_TYPE

MD 22240: $MC_AUXFU_F_SYNC_TYPE
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
AUXFU_H_SYNC_TYPE (C, M) MD 22230: $MC_AUXFU_H_SYNC_TYPE

MD 22230: $MC_AUXFU_H_SYNC_TYPE
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
AUXFU_M_SYNC_TYPE (C, M) MD 22200: $MC_AUXFU_M_SYNC_TYPE

MD 22200: $MC_AUXFU_M_SYNC_TYPE

NC variables
AUXFU_M_SYNC_TYPE (C, M) MD 22200: $MC_AUXFU_M_SYNC_TYPE

- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
AUXFU_S_SYNC_TYPE (C, M) MD 22210: $MC_AUXFU_S_SYNC_TYPE

MD 22210: $MC_AUXFU_S_SYNC_TYPE
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
AUXFU_T_SYNC_TYPE (C, M) MD 22220: $MC_AUXFU_T_SYNC_TYPE

MD 22220: $MC_AUXFU_T_SYNC_TYPE
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB (C, M) MD 20080: $MC_AXCONF_CHA‐

NAX_NAME_TAB
MD 20080: $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
2
Read access
AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB (C, M) MD 20050: $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_AS‐

SIGN_TAB
MD 20050: $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access
AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB (C, M) MD 20060: $MC_AXCONF_GEO‐

AX_NAME_TAB
MD 20060: $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB

NC variables
AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB (C, M) MD 20060: $MC_AXCONF_GEO‐

AX_NAME_TAB
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
2
Read access
AXCONF_MACHAX_USED (C, M) MD 20070: $MC_AXCONF_MA‐

CHAX_USED
MD 20070: $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access
CIRCLE_ERROR_CONST (C, M) MD 21000: $MC_CIRCLE_ER‐

ROR_CONST
MD 21000: $MC_CIRCLE_ERROR_CONST
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
CIRCLE_ERROR_FACTOR (C, M) MD 21010: $MC_CIRCLE_ERROR_FAC‐

TOR
MD 21010: $MC_CIRCLE_ERROR_FACTOR
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
COLLECT_TOOL_CHANGE (C, M) MD 20128: $MC_COL‐

LECT_TOOL_CHANGE
MD 20128: $MC_COLLECT_TOOL_CHANGE
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access

NC variables
COMPRESS_BLOCK_PATH_LIMIT (C, M) MD 20170: $MC_COM‐

PRESS_BLOCK_PATH_LIMIT
MD 20170: $MC_COMPRESS_BLOCK_PATH_LIMIT
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
COMPRESS_VELO_TOL (C, M) MD 20172: $MC_COMPRESS_VE‐

LO_TOL
MD 20172: $MC_COMPRESS_VELO_TOL
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
CONST_VELO_MIN_TIME (C, M) MD 20500: $MC_CONST_VE‐

LO_MIN_TIME
MD 20500: $MC_CONST_VELO_MIN_TIME
Read access
CONTOUR_ASSIGN_FASTOUT (C, M) MD 21070: $MC_CONTOUR_AS‐

SIGN_FASTOUT
MD 21070: $MC_CONTOUR_ASSIGN_FASTOUT
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
CONTOUR_TUNNEL_REACTION (C, M) MD 21060: $MC_CONTOUR_TUN‐

NEL_REACTION
MD 21060: $MC_CONTOUR_TUNNEL_REACTION
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
CONTOUR_TUNNEL_TOL (C, M) MD 21050: $MC_CONTOUR_TUN‐

NEL_TOL
MD 21050: $MC_CONTOUR_TUNNEL_TOL

NC variables
CONTOUR_TUNNEL_TOL (C, M) MD 21050: $MC_CONTOUR_TUN‐

NEL_TOL
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
COUPLE_AXIS_1 (C, M) MD 21300: $MC_COUPLE_AXIS_1

MD 21300: $MC_COUPLE_AXIS_1
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access
COUPLE_BLOCK_CHANGE_CTRL_1 (C, M) MD 21320: $MC_COU‐

PLE_BLOCK_CHANGE_CTRL_1
MD 21320: $MC_COUPLE_BLOCK_CHANGE_CTRL_1
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
COUPLE_IS_WRITE_PROT_1 (C, M) MD 21340: $MC_COU‐

PLE_IS_WRITE_PROT_1
MD 21340: $MC_COUPLE_IS_WRITE_PROT_1
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
COUPLE_RESET_MODE_1 (C, M) MD 21330: $MC_COUPLE_RE‐

SET_MODE_1
MD 21330: $MC_COUPLE_RESET_MODE_1
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
COUPLING_MODE_1 (C, M) MD 21310: $MC_COUPLING_MODE_1

MD 21310: $MC_COUPLING_MODE_1
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access

NC variables
CPREC_WITH_FFW (C, M) MD 20470: $MC_CPREC_WITH_FFW

MD 20470: $MC_CPREC_WITH_FFW
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
CUBIC_SPLINE_BLOCKS (C, M) MD 20160: $MC_CU‐

BIC_SPLINE_BLOCKS
MD 20160: $MC_CUBIC_SPLINE_BLOCKS
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
CUTCOM_CORNER_LIMIT (C, M) MD 20210: $MC_CUTCOM_COR‐

NER_LIMIT
MD 20210: $MC_CUTCOM_CORNER_LIMIT
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
CUTCOM_CURVE_INSERT_LIMIT (C, M) MD 20230: $MC_CUTCOM_CURVE_IN‐

SERT_LIMIT
MD 20230: $MC_CUTCOM_CURVE_INSERT_LIMIT
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
CUTCOM_INTERS_POLY_ENABLE (C, M) MD 20256: $MC_CUTCOM_IN‐

TERS_POLY_ENABLE
MD 20256: $MC_CUTCOM_INTERS_POLY_ENABLE
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
CUTCOM_MAXNUM_CHECK_BLOCKS (C, M) MD 20240: $MC_CUTCOM_MAX‐

NUM_CHECK_BLOCKS
MD 20240: $MC_CUTCOM_MAXNUM_CHECK_BLOCKS

NC variables
CUTCOM_MAXNUM_CHECK_BLOCKS (C, M) MD 20240: $MC_CUTCOM_MAX‐

NUM_CHECK_BLOCKS
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
CUTCOM_MAXNUM_SUPPR_BLOCKS (C, M) MD 20252: $MC_CUTCOM_MAX‐

NUM_SUPPR_BLOCKS
MD 20252: $MC_CUTCOM_MAXNUM_SUPPR_BLOCKS
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
CUTCOM_MAX_DISC (C, M) MD 20220: $MC_CUTCOM_MAX_DISC

MD 20220: $MC_CUTCOM_MAX_DISC
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
CUTCOM_PARALLEL_ORI_LIMIT (C, M) MD 21080: $MC_CUTCOM_PARAL‐

LEL_ORI_LIMIT
MD 21080: $MC_CUTCOM_PARALLEL_ORI_LIMIT
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
CUTCOM_PLANE_ORI_LIMIT (C, M) MD 21082: $MC_CUT‐

COM_PLANE_ORI_LIMIT
MD 21082: $MC_CUTCOM_PLANE_ORI_LIMIT
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
CUTCOM_PLANE_PATH_LIMIT (C, M) MD 21084: $MC_CUT‐

COM_PLANE_PATH_LIMIT
MD 21084: $MC_CUTCOM_PLANE_PATH_LIMIT
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access

NC variables
CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT (C, M) MD 20270: $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DE‐

FAULT
MD 20270: $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE (C, M) MD 20130: $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_RE‐

SET_VALUE
MD 20130: $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
DIAMETER_AX_DEF (C, M) MD 20100: $MC_DIAMETER_AX_DEF

MD 20100: $MC_DIAMETER_AX_DEF
- TYPE_STRING
Read access
DIG_A_MAX (C, M) MD 21460: $MC_DIG_A_MAX

MD 21460: $MC_DIG_A_MAX
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
DIG_A_MAX_MOVE (C, M) MD 21462: $MC_DIG_A_MAX_MOVE

MD 21462: $MC_DIG_A_MAX_MOVE
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
DIG_A_MAX_SCAN (C, M) MD 21464: $MC_DIG_A_MAX_SCAN

MD 21464: $MC_DIG_A_MAX_SCAN
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access

NC variables
DIG_DELTAPOS (C, M) MD 21440: $MC_DIG_DELTAPOS

MD 21440: $MC_DIG_DELTAPOS
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
DIG_L_INKR (C, M) MD 21424: $MC_DIG_L_INKR

MD 21424: $MC_DIG_L_INKR
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
DIG_L_MIN (C, M) MD 21430: $MC_DIG_L_MIN

MD 21430: $MC_DIG_L_MIN
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
DIG_L_NORMAL (C, M) MD 21432: $MC_DIG_L_NORMAL

MD 21432: $MC_DIG_L_NORMAL
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
DIG_L_NOTAUS (C, M) MD 21434: $MC_DIG_L_NOTAUS

MD 21434: $MC_DIG_L_NOTAUS
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
DIG_L_NOTAUS_EXT (C, M) MD 21436: $MC_DIG_L_NOTAUS_EXT

MD 21436: $MC_DIG_L_NOTAUS_EXT

NC variables
DIG_L_NOTAUS_EXT (C, M) MD 21436: $MC_DIG_L_NOTAUS_EXT

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
DIG_L_OFF_Z (C, M) MD 21422: $MC_DIG_L_OFF_Z

MD 21422: $MC_DIG_L_OFF_Z
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
DIG_L_ORDER (C, M) MD 21420: $MC_DIG_L_ORDER

MD 21420: $MC_DIG_L_ORDER
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
DIG_PROT_VERSION (C, M) MD 21400: $MC_DIG_PROT_VERSION

MD 21400: $MC_DIG_PROT_VERSION
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
DIG_P_HAND (C, M) MD 21470: $MC_DIG_P_HAND

MD 21470: $MC_DIG_P_HAND
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
DIG_P_SCAN (C, M) MD 21472: $MC_DIG_P_SCAN

MD 21472: $MC_DIG_P_SCAN
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
DIG_T_SCAN (C, M) MD 21474: $MC_DIG_T_SCAN

MD 21474: $MC_DIG_T_SCAN

NC variables
DIG_T_SCAN (C, M) MD 21474: $MC_DIG_T_SCAN

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
DIG_V_EILGANG (C, M) MD 21450: $MC_DIG_V_EILGANG

MD 21450: $MC_DIG_V_EILGANG
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
F_VALUES_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET (C, M) MD 22410: $MC_F_VALUES_AC‐

TIVE_AFTER_RESET
MD 22410: $MC_F_VALUES_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
GCODE_GROUPS_TO_PLC (C, M) MD 22510:

$MC_GCODE_GROUPS_TO_PLC
MD 22510: $MC_GCODE_GROUPS_TO_PLC
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access
GCODE_RESET_VALUES (C, M) MD 20150: $MC_GCODE_RESET_VAL‐

UES
MD 20150: $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access
GEOAX_CHANGE_M_CODE (C, M) MD 22532: $MC_GEO‐

AX_CHANGE_M_CODE
MD 22532: $MC_GEOAX_CHANGE_M_CODE

NC variables
GEOAX_CHANGE_M_CODE (C, M) MD 22532: $MC_GEO‐

AX_CHANGE_M_CODE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
GEOAX_CHANGE_RESET (C, M) MD 20118: $MC_GEOAX_CHANGE_RE‐

SET
MD 20118: $MC_GEOAX_CHANGE_RESET
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
HANDWH_CHAN_STOP_COND (C, M) MD 20624:

$MC_HANDWH_CHAN_STOP_COND
MD 20624: $MC_HANDWH_CHAN_STOP_COND
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
HANDWH_GEOAX_MAX_INCR_SIZE (C, M) MD 20620: $MC_HANDWH_GEO‐

AX_MAX_INCR_SIZE
MD 20620: $MC_HANDWH_GEOAX_MAX_INCR_SIZE
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
HANDWH_GEOAX_MAX_INCR_VSIZE (C, M) MD 20622: $MC_HANDWH_GEO‐

AX_MAX_INCR_VSIZE
MD 20622: $MC_HANDWH_GEOAX_MAX_INCR_VSIZE
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
IGNORE_INHIBIT_ASUP (C, M) MD 20116: $MC_IGNORE_INHIBIT_ASUP

MD 20116: $MC_IGNORE_INHIBIT_ASUP
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access

NC variables
IGNORE_SINGLEBLOCK_ASUP (C, M) MD 20117: $MC_IGNORE_SINGLE‐

BLOCK_ASUP
MD 20117: $MC_IGNORE_SINGLEBLOCK_ASUP
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
LEN_AC_FIFO (C, M) MD 28264: $MC_LEN_AC_FIFO

MD 28264: $MC_LEN_AC_FIFO
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
LIFTFAST_DIST (C, M) MD 21200: $MC_LIFTFAST_DIST

MD 21200: $MC_LIFTFAST_DIST
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
LOOKAH_NUM_OVR_POINTS (C, M) MD 20430: $MC_LOO‐

KAH_NUM_OVR_POINTS
MD 20430: $MC_LOOKAH_NUM_OVR_POINTS
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
LOOKAH_OVR_POINTS (C, M) MD 20440: $MC_LOOKAH_OVR_POINTS

MD 20440: $MC_LOOKAH_OVR_POINTS
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
LOOKAH_RELIEVE_BLOCK_CYCLE (C, M) MD 20450: $MC_LOOKAH_RE‐

LIEVE_BLOCK_CYCLE
MD 20450: $MC_LOOKAH_RELIEVE_BLOCK_CYCLE

NC variables
LOOKAH_RELIEVE_BLOCK_CYCLE (C, M) MD 20450: $MC_LOOKAH_RE‐

LIEVE_BLOCK_CYCLE
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
LOOKAH_USE_VELO_NEXT_BLOCK (C, M) MD 20400: $MC_LOOKAH_USE_VE‐

LO_NEXT_BLOCK
MD 20400: $MC_LOOKAH_USE_VELO_NEXT_BLOCK
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
MAX_LEAD_ANGLE (C, M) MD 21090: $MC_MAX_LEAD_ANGLE

MD 21090: $MC_MAX_LEAD_ANGLE
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
MAX_PATH_JERK (C, M) MD 20600: $MC_MAX_PATH_JERK

MD 20600: $MC_MAX_PATH_JERK
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
MAX_TILT_ANGLE (C, M) MD 21092: $MC_MAX_TILT_ANGLE

MD 21092: $MC_MAX_TILT_ANGLE
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
MDC_TECHNOLOGY_MODE (C, M) MD 27800: $MC_MDC_TECHNOLO‐

GY_MODE
Alternative name: TECHNOLOGY_MODE
MD 27800: $MC_MDC_TECHNOLOGY_MODE
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing

NC variables
MDC_TECHNOLOGY_MODE (C, M) MD 27800: $MC_MDC_TECHNOLO‐

GY_MODE
1
Read access
MDS_CHAN_NAME (C, M) MD 20000: $MC_MDS_CHAN_NAME

Alternative name: CHAN_NAME
MD 20000: $MC_MDS_CHAN_NAME
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
1
Read access
MM_IPO_BUFFER_SIZE (C, M) MD 28060: $MC_MM_IPO_BUFFER_SIZE

MD 28060: $MC_MM_IPO_BUFFER_SIZE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_IPO_TASK_STACK_SIZE (C, M) MD 28510:

$MC_MM_IPO_TASK_STACK_SIZE
MD 28510: $MC_MM_IPO_TASK_STACK_SIZE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT (C, M) MD 28085: $MC_MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT

MD 28085: $MC_MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_LUD_VALUES_MEM (C, M) MD 28040: $MC_MM_LUD_VAL‐

UES_MEM
MD 28040: $MC_MM_LUD_VALUES_MEM
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access

NC variables
MM_MAX_TRACE_DATAPOINTS (C, M) MD 28180: $MC_MM_MAX_TRACE_DA‐

TAPOINTS
MD 28180: $MC_MM_MAX_TRACE_DATAPOINTS
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_AC_MARKER (C, M) MD 28256: $MC_MM_NUM_AC_MARKER

MD 28256: $MC_MM_NUM_AC_MARKER
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_AC_PARAM (C, M) MD 28254: $MC_MM_NUM_AC_PARAM

MD 28254: $MC_MM_NUM_AC_PARAM
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_AC_TIMER (C, M) MD 28258: $MC_MM_NUM_AC_TIMER

MD 28258: $MC_MM_NUM_AC_TIMER
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_BLOCKS_IN_PREP (C, M) MD 28070:

$MC_MM_NUM_BLOCKS_IN_PREP
MD 28070: $MC_MM_NUM_BLOCKS_IN_PREP
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_CC_BLOCK_ELEMENTS (C, M) MD 28090:

$MC_MM_NUM_CC_BLOCK_ELEMENTS
MD 28090: $MC_MM_NUM_CC_BLOCK_ELEMENTS
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access

NC variables
MM_NUM_CC_BLOCK_USER_MEM (C, M) MD 28100:

$MC_MM_NUM_CC_BLOCK_USER_MEM
MD 28100: $MC_MM_NUM_CC_BLOCK_USER_MEM
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_FCTDEF_ELEMENTS (C, M) MD 28252: $MC_MM_NUM_FCTDEF_EL‐

EMENTS
MD 28252: $MC_MM_NUM_FCTDEF_ELEMENTS
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_LUD_NAMES_TOTAL (C, M) MD 28020:

$MC_MM_NUM_LUD_NAMES_TOTAL
MD 28020: $MC_MM_NUM_LUD_NAMES_TOTAL
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_ACTIVE (C, M) MD 28210: $MC_MM_NUM_PRO‐

TECT_AREA_ACTIVE
MD 28210: $MC_MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_ACTIVE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_CHAN (C, M) MD 28200: $MC_MM_NUM_PRO‐

TECT_AREA_CHAN
MD 28200: $MC_MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_CHAN
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_REORG_LUD_MODULES (C, M) MD 28010: $MC_MM_NUM_RE‐

ORG_LUD_MODULES
MD 28010: $MC_MM_NUM_REORG_LUD_MODULES

NC variables
MM_NUM_REORG_LUD_MODULES (C, M) MD 28010: $MC_MM_NUM_RE‐

ORG_LUD_MODULES
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_R_PARAM (C, M) MD 28050: $MC_MM_NUM_R_PARAM

MD 28050: $MC_MM_NUM_R_PARAM
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_SYNC_ELEMENTS (C, M) MD 28250: $MC_MM_NUM_SYNC_ELE‐

MENTS
MD 28250: $MC_MM_NUM_SYNC_ELEMENTS
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES (C, M) MD 28080:

$MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES
MD 28080: $MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_VDIVAR_ELEMENTS (C, M) MD 28150: $MC_MM_NUM_VDIVAR_EL‐

EMENTS
MD 28150: $MC_MM_NUM_VDIVAR_ELEMENTS
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_PREP_TASK_STACK_SIZE (C, M) MD 28500:

$MC_MM_PREP_TASK_STACK_SIZE
MD 28500: $MC_MM_PREP_TASK_STACK_SIZE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access

NC variables
MM_REORG_LOG_FILE_MEM (C, M) MD 28000: $MC_MM_RE‐

ORG_LOG_FILE_MEM
MD 28000: $MC_MM_REORG_LOG_FILE_MEM
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_TRACE_DATA_FUNCTION (C, M) MD 22714: $MC_MM_TRACE_DA‐

TA_FUNCTION
MD 22714: $MC_MM_TRACE_DATA_FUNCTION
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MODESWITCH_MASK (C, M) MD 20114: $MC_MODESWITCH_MASK

MD 20114: $MC_MODESWITCH_MASK
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MODE_AC_FIFO (C, M) MD 28266: $MC_MODE_AC_FIFO

MD 28266: $MC_MODE_AC_FIFO
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
MULTFEED_ASSIGN_FASTIN (C, M) MD 21220: $MC_MULTFEED_AS‐

SIGN_FASTIN
MD 21220: $MC_MULTFEED_ASSIGN_FASTIN
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MULTFEED_STORE_MASK (C, M) MD 21230: $MC_MULT‐

FEED_STORE_MASK
MD 21230: $MC_MULTFEED_STORE_MASK

NC variables
MULTFEED_STORE_MASK (C, M) MD 21230: $MC_MULT‐

FEED_STORE_MASK
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
NIBBLE_PRE_START_TIME (C, M) MD 26018: $MC_NIB‐

BLE_PRE_START_TIME
MD 26018: $MC_NIBBLE_PRE_START_TIME
Read access
NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE (C, M) MD 26008: $MC_NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE

MD 26008: $MC_NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
2
Read access
NIBBLE_PUNCH_INMASK (C, M) MD 26006: $MC_NIBBLE_PUNCH_IN‐

MASK
MD 26006: $MC_NIBBLE_PUNCH_INMASK
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access
NIBBLE_PUNCH_OUTMASK (C, M) MD 26004: $MC_NIBBLE_PUNCH_OUT‐

MASK
MD 26004: $MC_NIBBLE_PUNCH_OUTMASK
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access

NC variables
NIBBLE_SIGNAL_CHECK (C, M) MD 26020: $MC_NIBBLE_SIG‐

NAL_CHECK
MD 26020: $MC_NIBBLE_SIGNAL_CHECK
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
NUM_AC_FIFO (C, M) MD 28260: $MC_NUM_AC_FIFO

MD 28260: $MC_NUM_AC_FIFO
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
ONLINE_CUTCOM_ENABLE (C, M) MD 20254: $MC_ONLINE_CUTCOM_EN‐

ABLE
MD 20254: $MC_ONLINE_CUTCOM_ENABLE
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
ORIENTATION_IS_EULER (C, M) MD 21100: $MC_ORIENTATION_IS_EU‐

LER
MD 21100: $MC_ORIENTATION_IS_EULER
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
PATH_IPO_IS_ON_TCP (C, M) MD 20260: $MC_PATH_IPO_IS_ON_TCP

MD 20260: $MC_PATH_IPO_IS_ON_TCP
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
PUNCHNIB_ACTIVATION (C, M) MD 26012: $MC_PUNCHNIB_ACTIVA‐

TION
MD 26012: $MC_PUNCHNIB_ACTIVATION

NC variables
PUNCHNIB_ACTIVATION (C, M) MD 26012: $MC_PUNCHNIB_ACTIVA‐

TION
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
PUNCHNIB_ASSIGN_FASTIN (C, M) MD 26000: $MC_PUNCHNIB_AS‐

SIGN_FASTIN
MD 26000: $MC_PUNCHNIB_ASSIGN_FASTIN
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
PUNCHNIB_ASSIGN_FASTOUT (C, M) MD 26002: $MC_PUNCHNIB_AS‐

SIGN_FASTOUT
MD 26002: $MC_PUNCHNIB_ASSIGN_FASTOUT
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
PUNCHNIB_AXIS_MASK (C, M) MD 26010: $MC_PUNCHNIB_AX‐

IS_MASK
MD 26010: $MC_PUNCHNIB_AXIS_MASK
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
PUNCH_PARTITION_TYPE (C, M) MD 26016: $MC_PUNCH_PARTI‐

TION_TYPE
MD 26016: $MC_PUNCH_PARTITION_TYPE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
PUNCH_PATH_SPLITTING (C, M) MD 26014: $MC_PUNCH_PATH_SPLIT‐

TING
MD 26014: $MC_PUNCH_PATH_SPLITTING
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access

NC variables
REFP_NC_START_LOCK (C, M) MD 20700:

$MC_REFP_NC_START_LOCK
MD 20700: $MC_REFP_NC_START_LOCK
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
REORG_LOG_LIMIT (C, M) MD 27900: $MC_REORG_LOG_LIMIT

MD 27900: $MC_REORG_LOG_LIMIT
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
RESET_MODE_MASK (C, M) MD 20110: $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK

MD 20110: $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
SETINT_ASSIGN_FASTIN (C, M) MD 21210: $MC_SETINT_ASSIGN_FAS‐

TIN
MD 21210: $MC_SETINT_ASSIGN_FASTIN
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
SPF_END_TO_VDI (C, M) MD 20800: $MC_SPF_END_TO_VDI

MD 20800: $MC_SPF_END_TO_VDI
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
SPIND_ASSIGN_TAB_ENABLE (C, M) MD 20092: $MC_SPIND_AS‐

SIGN_TAB_ENABLE
MD 20092: $MC_SPIND_ASSIGN_TAB_ENABLE
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access

NC variables
SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND (C, M) MD 20090: $MC_SPIND_DEF_MAS‐

TER_SPIND
MD 20090: $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
SPLINE_FEED_PRECISION (C, M) MD 20262: $MC_SPLINE_FEED_PRECI‐

SION
MD 20262: $MC_SPLINE_FEED_PRECISION
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
START_AC_FIFO (C, M) MD 28262: $MC_START_AC_FIFO

MD 28262: $MC_START_AC_FIFO
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
START_MODE_MASK (C, M) MD 20112: $MC_START_MODE_MASK

MD 20112: $MC_START_MODE_MASK
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
S_VALUES_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET (C, M) MD 22400: $MC_S_VALUES_AC‐

TIVE_AFTER_RESET
MD 22400: $MC_S_VALUES_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
THREAD_AUTO_LIFTFASTANGLE (C, M) MD 20660: $MC_THREAD_AUTO_LIFT‐

FASTANGLE
MD 20660: $MC_THREAD_AUTO_LIFTFASTANGLE

NC variables
THREAD_AUTO_LIFTFASTANGLE (C, M) MD 20660: $MC_THREAD_AUTO_LIFT‐

FASTANGLE
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
THREAD_START_IS_HARD (C, M) MD 20650:

$MC_THREAD_START_IS_HARD
MD 20650: $MC_THREAD_START_IS_HARD
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
TOCARR_CHANGE_M_CODE (C, M) MD 22530: $MC_TO‐

CARR_CHANGE_M_CODE
MD 22530: $MC_TOCARR_CHANGE_M_CODE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
TOOL_CARRIER_RESET_VALUE (C, M) MD 20126: $MC_TOOL_CARRIER_RE‐

SET_VALUE
MD 20126: $MC_TOOL_CARRIER_RESET_VALUE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
TOOL_CHANGE_MODE (C, M) MD 22550: $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE

MD 22550: $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE (C, M) MD 22560:

$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE
MD 22560: $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access

NC variables
TOOL_GRIND_AUTO_TMON (C, M) MD 20350: $MC_TOOL_GRIND_AU‐

TO_TMON
MD 20350: $MC_TOOL_GRIND_AUTO_TMON
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK (C, M) MD 20310: $MC_TOOL_MANAGE‐

MENT_MASK
MD 20310: $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER (C, M) MD 20124: $MC_TOOL_MANAGE‐

MENT_TOOLHOLDER
MD 20124: $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
TOOL_PARAMETER_DEF_MASK (C, M) MD 20360: $MC_TOOL_PARAME‐

TER_DEF_MASK
MD 20360: $MC_TOOL_PARAMETER_DEF_MASK
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
TOOL_PRESEL_RESET_VALUE (C, M) MD 20121: $MC_TOOL_PRESEL_RE‐

SET_VALUE
MD 20121: $MC_TOOL_PRESEL_RESET_VALUE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
TOOL_RESET_NAME (C, M) MD 20122: $MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME

MD 20122: $MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME

NC variables
TOOL_RESET_NAME (C, M) MD 20122: $MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME

- TYPE_STRING
Read access
TOOL_RESET_VALUE (C, M) MD 20120: $MC_TOOL_RESET_VALUE

MD 20120: $MC_TOOL_RESET_VALUE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK (C, M) MD 20320: $MC_TOOL_TIME_MONI‐

TOR_MASK
MD 20320: $MC_TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
TRAANG_ANGLE_1 (C, M) MD 24700: $MC_TRAANG_ANGLE_1

MD 24700: $MC_TRAANG_ANGLE_1
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
TRAANG_ANGLE_2 (C, M) MD 24750: $MC_TRAANG_ANGLE_2

MD 24750: $MC_TRAANG_ANGLE_2
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
TRAANG_BASE_TOOL_1 (C, M) MD 24710:

$MC_TRAANG_BASE_TOOL_1
MD 24710: $MC_TRAANG_BASE_TOOL_1
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access

NC variables
TRAANG_BASE_TOOL_2 (C, M) MD 24760:

$MC_TRAANG_BASE_TOOL_2
MD 24760: $MC_TRAANG_BASE_TOOL_2
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
TRAANG_PARALLEL_ACCEL_RES_1 (C, M) MD 24721: $MC_TRAANG_PARAL‐

LEL_ACCEL_RES_1
MD 24721: $MC_TRAANG_PARALLEL_ACCEL_RES_1
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
TRAANG_PARALLEL_ACCEL_RES_2 (C, M) MD 24771: $MC_TRAANG_PARAL‐

LEL_ACCEL_RES_2
MD 24771: $MC_TRAANG_PARALLEL_ACCEL_RES_2
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
TRAANG_PARALLEL_VELO_RES_1 (C, M) MD 24720: $MC_TRAANG_PARAL‐

LEL_VELO_RES_1
MD 24720: $MC_TRAANG_PARALLEL_VELO_RES_1
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
TRAANG_PARALLEL_VELO_RES_2 (C, M) MD 24770: $MC_TRAANG_PARAL‐

LEL_VELO_RES_2
MD 24770: $MC_TRAANG_PARALLEL_VELO_RES_2
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access

NC variables
TRACE_SCOPE_MASK (C, M) MD 22708: $MC_TRACE_SCOPE_MASK

MD 22708: $MC_TRACE_SCOPE_MASK
- TYPE_STRING
Read access
TRACE_STARTTRACE_EVENT (C, M) MD 22700: $MC_TRACE_START‐

TRACE_EVENT
MD 22700: $MC_TRACE_STARTTRACE_EVENT
- TYPE_STRING
Read access
TRACE_STARTTRACE_STEP (C, M) MD 22702: $MC_TRACE_START‐

TRACE_STEP
MD 22702: $MC_TRACE_STARTTRACE_STEP
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
2
Read access
TRACE_STOPTRACE_EVENT (C, M) MD 22704: $MC_TRACE_STOP‐

TRACE_EVENT
MD 22704: $MC_TRACE_STOPTRACE_EVENT
- TYPE_STRING
Read access
TRACE_STOPTRACE_STEP (C, M) MD 22706: $MC_TRACE_STOP‐

TRACE_STEP
MD 22706: $MC_TRACE_STOPTRACE_STEP
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
2
Read access

NC variables
TRACE_VARIABLE_INDEX (C, M) MD 22712: $MC_TRACE_VARIABLE_IN‐

DEX
MD 22712: $MC_TRACE_VARIABLE_INDEX
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
2
Read access
TRACE_VARIABLE_NAME (C, M) MD 22710: $MC_TRACE_VARIA‐

BLE_NAME
MD 22710: $MC_TRACE_VARIABLE_NAME
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
2
Read access
TRACLG_CONTACT_LOWER_LIMIT (C, M) MD 21520: $MC_TRACLG_CON‐

TACT_LOWER_LIMIT
MD 21520: $MC_TRACLG_CONTACT_LOWER_LIMIT
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
TRACLG_CONTACT_UPPER_LIMIT (C, M) MD 21518: $MC_TRACLG_CON‐

TACT_UPPER_LIMIT
MD 21518: $MC_TRACLG_CONTACT_UPPER_LIMIT
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
TRACLG_CTRLSPI_NR (C, M) MD 21524: $MC_TRACLG_CTRLSPI_NR

MD 21524: $MC_TRACLG_CTRLSPI_NR
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access

NC variables
TRACLG_CTRLSPI_VERT_OFFSET (C, M) MD 21502:

$MC_TRACLG_CTRLSPI_VERT_OFFSET
MD 21502: $MC_TRACLG_CTRLSPI_VERT_OFFSET
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
TRACLG_G0_IS_SPECIAL (C, M) MD 21526: $MC_TRACLG_G0_IS_SPE‐

CIAL
MD 21526: $MC_TRACLG_G0_IS_SPECIAL
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
TRACLG_GRINDSPI_HOR_OFFSET (C, M) MD 21501: $MC_TRACLG_GRIND‐

SPI_HOR_OFFSET
MD 21501: $MC_TRACLG_GRINDSPI_HOR_OFFSET
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
TRACLG_GRINDSPI_NR (C, M) MD 21522: $MC_TRACLG_GRIND‐

SPI_NR
MD 21522: $MC_TRACLG_GRINDSPI_NR
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
TRACLG_GRINDSPI_VERT_OFFSET (C, M) MD 21500: $MC_TRACLG_GRIND‐

SPI_VERT_OFFSET
MD 21500: $MC_TRACLG_GRINDSPI_VERT_OFFSET
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
TRACLG_HOR_DIR_SUPPORTAX_1 (C, M) MD 21510:

$MC_TRACLG_HOR_DIR_SUPPOR‐
TAX_1
MD 21510: $MC_TRACLG_HOR_DIR_SUPPORTAX_1

NC variables

TAX_1
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access

TAX_2
MD 21514: $MC_TRACLG_HOR_DIR_SUPPORTAX_2
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
TRACLG_SUPPORT_HOR_OFFSET (C, M) MD 21506: $MC_TRACLG_SUP‐

PORT_HOR_OFFSET
MD 21506: $MC_TRACLG_SUPPORT_HOR_OFFSET
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
TRACLG_SUPPORT_LEAD_ANGLE (C, M) MD 21516: $MC_TRACLG_SUP‐

PORT_LEAD_ANGLE
MD 21516: $MC_TRACLG_SUPPORT_LEAD_ANGLE
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
TRACLG_SUPPORT_VERT_OFFSET (C, M) MD 21504: $MC_TRACLG_SUP‐

PORT_VERT_OFFSET
MD 21504: $MC_TRACLG_SUPPORT_VERT_OFFSET
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
TRACLG_VERT_DIR_SUPPORTAX_1 (C, M) MD 21508:

$MC_TRACLG_VERT_DIR_SUPPOR‐
TAX_1
MD 21508: $MC_TRACLG_VERT_DIR_SUPPORTAX_1

NC variables

TAX_1
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access

TAX_2
MD 21512: $MC_TRACLG_VERT_DIR_SUPPORTAX_2
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_1 (C, M) MD 24820: $MC_TRAC‐

YL_BASE_TOOL_1
MD 24820: $MC_TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_1
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_2 (C, M) MD 24870: $MC_TRAC‐

YL_BASE_TOOL_2
MD 24870: $MC_TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_2
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 (C, M) MD 24800: $MC_TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFF‐

SET_1
MD 24800: $MC_TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1

NC variables

SET_1
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access

SET_2
MD 24850: $MC_TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 (C, M) MD 24810: $MC_TRAC‐

YL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1
MD 24810: $MC_TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2 (C, M) MD 24860: $MC_TRAC‐

YL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2
MD 24860: $MC_TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
TRAFO5_BASE_TOOL_1 (C, M) MD 24550: $MC_TRA‐

FO5_BASE_TOOL_1
MD 24550: $MC_TRAFO5_BASE_TOOL_1
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access

FO5_BASE_TOOL_2
MD 24650: $MC_TRAFO5_BASE_TOOL_2

NC variables

FO5_BASE_TOOL_2
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_1 (C, M) MD 24560: $MC_TRAFO5_JOINT_OFF‐

SET_1
MD 24560: $MC_TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_1
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_2 (C, M) MD 24660: $MC_TRAFO5_JOINT_OFF‐

SET_2
MD 24660: $MC_TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_2
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
TRAFO5_NON_POLE_LIMIT_1 (C, M) MD 24530: $MC_TRA‐

FO5_NON_POLE_LIMIT_1
MD 24530: $MC_TRAFO5_NON_POLE_LIMIT_1
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
TRAFO5_NON_POLE_LIMIT_2 (C, M) MD 24630: $MC_TRA‐

FO5_NON_POLE_LIMIT_2
MD 24630: $MC_TRAFO5_NON_POLE_LIMIT_2
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access

NC variables
TRAFO5_NUTATOR_AX_ANGLE_1 (C, M) MD 24564: $MC_TRAFO5_NUTA‐

TOR_AX_ANGLE_1
MD 24564: $MC_TRAFO5_NUTATOR_AX_ANGLE_1
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
TRAFO5_NUTATOR_AX_ANGLE_2 (C, M) MD 24664: $MC_TRAFO5_NUTA‐

TOR_AX_ANGLE_2
MD 24664: $MC_TRAFO5_NUTATOR_AX_ANGLE_2
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
TRAFO5_PART_OFFSET_1 (C, M) MD 24500: $MC_TRAFO5_PART_OFF‐

SET_1
MD 24500: $MC_TRAFO5_PART_OFFSET_1
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
TRAFO5_PART_OFFSET_2 (C, M) MD 24600: $MC_TRAFO5_PART_OFF‐

SET_2
MD 24600: $MC_TRAFO5_PART_OFFSET_2
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT_1 (C, M) MD 24540: $MC_TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT_1

MD 24540: $MC_TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT_1
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access

NC variables
TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT_2 (C, M) MD 24640: $MC_TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT_2

MD 24640: $MC_TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT_2
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
TRAFO5_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 (C, M) MD 24510: $MC_TRAFO5_ROT_AX_OFF‐

SET_1
MD 24510: $MC_TRAFO5_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
TRAFO5_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2 (C, M) MD 24610: $MC_TRAFO5_ROT_AX_OFF‐

SET_2
MD 24610: $MC_TRAFO5_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
TRAFO5_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 (C, M) MD 24520: $MC_TRA‐

FO5_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1
MD 24520: $MC_TRAFO5_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Addressing
2
Read access

MD 24620: $MC_TRAFO5_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2

NC variables

- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Addressing
2
Read access
TRAFO5_TOOL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 (C, M) MD 24562: $MC_TRA‐

FO5_TOOL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1
MD 24562: $MC_TRAFO5_TOOL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
TRAFO5_TOOL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2 (C, M) MD 24662: $MC_TRA‐

FO5_TOOL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2
MD 24662: $MC_TRAFO5_TOOL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 (C, M) MD 24110: $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1

MD 24110: $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access


NC variables

- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access

- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access

- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access

- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access

- TYPE_CHAR

NC variables

Addressing
2
Read access

- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access

- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access
TRAFO_CHANGE_M_CODE (C, M) MD 22534: $MC_TRA‐

FO_CHANGE_M_CODE
MD 22534: $MC_TRAFO_CHANGE_M_CODE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1 (C, M) MD 24120: $MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_AS‐

SIGN_TAB_1
MD 24120: $MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access

NC variables

SIGN_TAB_2
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access

SIGN_TAB_3
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access

SIGN_TAB_4
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access

SIGN_TAB_5
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access

NC variables

SIGN_TAB_6
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access

SIGN_TAB_7
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access

SIGN_TAB_8
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access
TRAFO_RESET_VALUE (C, M) MD 20140: $MC_TRAFO_RESET_VALUE

MD 20140: $MC_TRAFO_RESET_VALUE
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
TRAFO_TYPE_1 (C, M) MD 24100: $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1

MD 24100: $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1

NC variables

- TYPE_DWORD
Read access

- TYPE_DWORD
Read access

- TYPE_DWORD
Read access

- TYPE_DWORD
Read access

- TYPE_DWORD
Read access

- TYPE_DWORD
Read access


NC variables

- TYPE_DWORD
Read access

- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_1 (C, M) MD 24920: $MC_TRANS‐

MIT_BASE_TOOL_1
MD 24920: $MC_TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_1
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_2 (C, M) MD 24970: $MC_TRANS‐

MIT_BASE_TOOL_2
MD 24970: $MC_TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_2
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
TRANSMIT_POLE_SIDE_FIX_1 (C, M) MD 24911: $MC_TRANS‐

MIT_POLE_SIDE_FIX_1
MD 24911: $MC_TRANSMIT_POLE_SIDE_FIX_1
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access

MIT_POLE_SIDE_FIX_2
MD 24961: $MC_TRANSMIT_POLE_SIDE_FIX_2

NC variables

MIT_POLE_SIDE_FIX_2
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 (C, M) MD 24900: $MC_TRANS‐

MIT_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1
MD 24900: $MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2 (C, M) MD 24950: $MC_TRANS‐

MIT_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2
MD 24950: $MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
TRANSMIT_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 (C, M) MD 24910: $MC_TRANS‐

MIT_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1
MD 24910: $MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
TRANSMIT_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2 (C, M) MD 24960: $MC_TRANS‐

MIT_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2
MD 24960: $MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
WORKAREA_WITH_TOOL_RADIUS (C, M) MD 21020: $MC_WORKAR‐

EA_WITH_TOOL_RADIUS
MD 21020: $MC_WORKAREA_WITH_TOOL_RADIUS

NC variables
WORKAREA_WITH_TOOL_RADIUS (C, M) MD 21020: $MC_WORKAR‐

EA_WITH_TOOL_RADIUS
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
X_AXIS_IN_OLD_X_Z_PLANE (C, M) MD 21110: $MC_X_AX‐

IS_IN_OLD_X_Z_PLANE
MD 21110: $MC_X_AXIS_IN_OLD_X_Z_PLANE
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
MM_ABSBLOCK (C, M) MD 28400: $MC_MM_ABSBLOCK

MD 28400: $MC_MM_ABSBLOCK
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
AUXFU_ASSOC_M1_VALUE (C, M) MD 22256: $MC_AUXFU_AS‐

SOC_M1_VALUE
MD 22256: $MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M1_VALUE
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
1
MM_SYSTEM_DATAFRAME_MASK (C, M) MD 28083: $MC_MM_SYSTEM_DATA‐

FRAME_MASK
MD 28083: $MC_MM_SYSTEM_DATAFRAME_MASK
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
MM_PROTOC_NUM_ETP_STD_TYP (C, M) MD 28302: $MC_MM_PRO‐

TOC_NUM_ETP_STD_TYP
MD 28302: $MC_MM_PROTOC_NUM_ETP_STD_TYP
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
10
3.2.3.14 NIB: Nibbling data
The module NIB contains technology-specific data for nibbling.
actPunchRate (C, NIB) N4

Strokes per minute
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
automCutSegment (C, NIB) N4

Automatic block division
Identifier that indicates which type of automatic block division is active. The division is specified by the commands 'SPP'
and 'SPN' in the part program.
Return value 0 = no block division
1 = number of segments per block ('SNP')
2 = segments of fixed length ('SPP')
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
numStrokes (C, NIB) N4

Number of strokes
Number of strokes when the instruction 'SPN' divides the block into segments (variable 'automCutSegment' = 1).

NC variables
numStrokes (C, NIB) N4

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
partDistance (C, NIB) N4

Length of the path between punches
If the block has been divided in segments with the instruction 'SPP' (variable 'automCutSegment' = 2) the variable speci‐
fies the length of the path between the punches.
Addressing
1
punchActive (C, NIB) N4

Punching or nibbling active
Identification of punching or nibbling active. The part program turns off/on punching and nibbling with 'SPOF', 'SON' and
'PON'.
Rapid punching and nibbling are turned on/off with 'SONS' and 'PONS'.
The variable 'punchActive' specified the present state.

1 = punching active
2 = nibbling active
3 = rapid punching active
4 = rapid nibbling active
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1

NC variables
punchDelayActive (C, NIB) N4

Punching with delay active
Identifier that indicates whether punching with delay is active. The part program can turn on/off the delay with the instruc‐
tions 'PDELAYON' and 'PDELAYOF'. The variable 'PunchDelayActive' indicates the present state.
1 = active
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
punchDelayTime (C, NIB) SD 42400: PUNCH_DWELL_TIME N4

Punching delay time
ms TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1
strokeNr (C, NIB)

Current stroke number
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
3.2.3.15 O: Internal
C-O
LOOKAH_NUM_CHECKED_BLOCKS (C, O) MD 29000: $OC_LOO‐

KAH_NUM_CHECKED_BLOCKS
MD 29000: $OC_LOOKAH_NUM_CHECKED_BLOCKS

NC variables
LOOKAH_NUM_CHECKED_BLOCKS (C, O) MD 29000: $OC_LOO‐

KAH_NUM_CHECKED_BLOCKS
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
3.2.3.16 PA: Protection zones
Up to 10 protection zones can be defined. Each protection zone is described by a polygon function consisting
of up to 10 elements. The maximum permissible number of protection zones is specified in "$$numProtArea" in
the module Y in area C. The maximum permissible number of polygon definition elements is specified in "$
$numContourInProtArea" in module Y in area C. Module PA contains the individual coordinates of the polygon
elements. The protection zones are addressed via the variable indices.
The classification as NCK or channel-specific protection zone does not affect the protection zone monitoring
function but simply indicates the area in which the protection zone is registered.
The physical unit actually used for length quantities is defined in "$$/C/SGA/extUnit" in module SGA in area C.
MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_0 (C, PA) $SC_PA_CENT_ABS[x,0] x = Number A3

protection zone
Abscissa arc centre of 1st contour element
Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 1st contour element
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Abscissa arc centre of 2nd contour element
Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 2nd contour element
Addressing
$$numProtArea

NC variables

protection zone
Abscissa arc centre of 3rd contour element
Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 3rd contour element
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Abscissa arc centre of 4th contour element
Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 4th contour element
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone

NC variables

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

NC variables

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea
MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_0 (C, PA) $SC_PA_CENT_ORD[x,0] x = Number A3

protection zone
Ordinate arc centre of 1st contour element
Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 1st contour element
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Ordinate arc centre of 2nd contour element
Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 2nd contour element
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Odinate arc centre of 3rd contour element
Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 3rd contour element

NC variables

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Ordinate arc centre of 4th contour element
Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 4th contour element
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

NC variables

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone

NC variables

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea
MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_0 (C, PA) $SC_PA_CONT_ABS[x,0] x = Number A3

protection zone
Abscissa end point of 1st contour element
Absolute abscissa value of end point of 1st contour element
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Abscissa end point of 2nd contour element
Absolute abscissa value of end point of 2nd contour element
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Abscissa end point of 3rd contour element
Absolute abscissa value of end point of 3rd contour element
Addressing
$$numProtArea

NC variables

protection zone
Abscissa end point of 4th contour element
Absolute abscissa value of end point of 4th contour element
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone

NC variables

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

NC variables
MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_0 (C, PA) $SC_PA_CONT_ORD[x,0] x = Number A3

protection zone
Ordinate end point of 1st contour element
Absolute ordinate value of end point of 1st contour element
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Ordinate end point of 2nd contour element
Absolute ordinate value of end point of 2nd contour element
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Odinate end point of 3rd contour element
Absolute ordinate value of end point of 3rd contour element
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Ordinate end point of 4th contour element
Absolute ordinate value of end point of 4th contour element

NC variables

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

NC variables

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea
MDD_PA_MINUS_LIM (C, PA) $SC_PA_MINUS_LIM[x] x = Number pro‐ A3

tection zone
Lower limit of protection zone, applicate
Limitation in the minus direction of the protection zone in the axis that is perpendicular to the polygon definition (applicate)

NC variables
MDD_PA_MINUS_LIM (C, PA) $SC_PA_MINUS_LIM[x] x = Number pro‐ A3

tection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea
MDD_PA_PLUS_LIM (C, PA) $SC_PA_PLUS_LIM[x] x = Number pro‐ A3

tection zone
Upper boundary of protection zone, applicate
Limitation of the protection zone in the plus direction of the axis that is perpendicular to the polygon definition (applicate)
Addressing
$$numProtArea
MDU_PA_ACTIV_IMMED (C, PA) $SC_PA_ACTIV_IMMED[x] x = Number A3

protection zone
Active immediately after referencing
Code for "active immediately after referencing", i.e. the protection zone is active as soon as the control has been started
up and the axes have been referenced
Return value 0 = protection zone is not active immediately
1 = protection zone is active immediately
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numProtArea
MDU_PA_CONT_NUM (C, PA) $SC_PA_CONT_NUM[x] x = Number pro‐ A3

tection zone
Number of valid contour elements
- TYPE_UWORD 0 $$numContourInProtAr‐
ea
Addressing
$$numProtArea

NC variables
MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_0 (C, PA) $SC_PA_CONT_TYP[x,0] x = Number A3

protection zone
Contour type of 1st contour element
Return value 0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Contour type of 2nd contour element
Return value 0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Contour type of 3rd contour element
Return value 0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numProtArea

NC variables

protection zone
Contour type of 4th contour element
Return value 0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Return value 0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Return value 0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numProtArea

NC variables

protection zone
Return value 0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Return value 0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Return value 0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numProtArea

NC variables

protection zone
Return value 0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numProtArea
MDU_PA_LIM_3DIM (C, PA) $SC_PA_LIM_3DIM[x] x = Number pro‐ A3

tection zone
Limitation of protection zone applicate
Code for limitation of protection zone in the axis that is perpendicular to polygon definition (applicate)
Return value 0 = no limitation
1 = limitation in positive direction
2 = limitation in negative direction
3 = limitation in both directions
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numProtArea
MDU_PA_ORI (C, PA) $SC_PA_ORI[x] x = Number protection A3

zone
Plane assignment of protection zone
Code for plane assignment of protection zone
Return value 0 = G17
1 = G18
2 = G19
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numProtArea

NC variables
MDU_PA_TW (C, PA) $SC_PA_T_W[x] x = Number protection A3

zone
Workpiece or tool-related protection zone
Code for workpiece or tool-oriented protection zone
Return value 0 = workpiece-related
1 = reserved
2 = reserved
3 = tool-related
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numProtArea
collisionAlarm (C, PA) OD19830 $ON_COLLISION_MASK

Collision of two protection zones
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
3
Read access
acCollPos (C, PA)

Collision position in world coordinates
Contact point between two collision bodies during a collision alarm.
Corresponds with system variable $AC_COLLPOS
Addressing
3
Read access
declarProtObject (C, PA)

Declaration of a variable protection zone
Return value 0=No object
1=WORKPIECE
2=FIXTURE

NC variables
declarProtObject (C, PA)

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
declarProtObjectString (C, PA)

String parameter(s) of a protection zone
String parameter(s) of the declaration of a variable protection zone
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
4
Read access
declarProtObjectReal (C, PA)

Real parameter(s) of a protection zone
Real parameters of the declaration of a variable protection zone
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
10
Read access
workpieceStatus (C, PA)

Error status after calling the procedure WORKPIECE
Error status after calling the procedure WORKPIECE
Corresponds to the system variable $P_WP_STAT
- TYPE_WORD
Read access
fixtureStatus (C, PA)

Error status after calling the procedure FIXTURE
Error status after calling the procedure FIXTURE
Corresponds to the system variable $P_FIX_STAT

NC variables
fixtureStatus (C, PA)

- TYPE_WORD
Read access
3.2.3.17 RP: Arithmetic parameter
Arithmetic parameters are special predefined variables which are addressed with the letter R followed by a num‐
ber. The contents and meaning of an arithmetic parameter are defined by the programmer of a part program.
100 R variables are defined by default. The number of R variables can be set via machine data 28050
(MM_NUM_R_PARAM).
rpa (C, RP) $R[x] x = ParameterNo PA

Alternative name: R
R variables
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
MM_NUM_R_PARAM + 1

G0Mode (C, S) $AC_G0MODE

G00: Path axes traverse as pos. axes
G00 is active and $MC_G0_LINEAR_MODE is FALSE (Siemens mode) or $MC_EXTERN_G0_LINEAR_MODE is FALSE
(ISO mode) and therefore non-linear interpolation is active with G0, i.e. the path axes are traversed as positioning axes.
Return value 0: G00 not active
1: G00 and linear interpolation active
2: G00 and non-linear interpolation active

NC variables
G0Mode (C, S) $AC_G0MODE

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 2
Addressing
1
Read access
aGG (C, S) $A_GG

active G function in synchronized action
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$/N/YNCFL/Gruppe_NUM
Read access
aLinkTransRate (C, S) $A_LINK_TRANS_RATE

Link transfer rate
Link transfer rate
Number of link variables that can still be transferred in the
current IPO cycle via the NCU link communication.
If this variable is read in the context of the lead, it always
outputs the maximum available bandwidth.
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
aMonifact (C, S) $A_MONIFACT

Factor for tool life monitoring
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
aTcAckC (C, S) $AC_TC_ACKC

Acknowledgment counter variable
Counter variable: aTcAckC (AcknowledgeCounter) is incremented by 1
every time the PLC acknowledges a tool management command.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
aTcCmdC (C, S) $AC_TC_CMDC

Command counter variable
Counter variable: aTcCmdC (CoMmandCounter) is incremented by
1 every time the tool management outputs a command to the PLC.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
aTcFct (C, S) $AC_TC_FCT

Command number
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
aTcLfn (C, S) $AC_TC_LFN

Source location number new tool
Source location number of new tool
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables
aTcLfn (C, S) $AC_TC_LFN

1
Read access
aTcLfo (C, S) $AC_TC_LFO

Source location number old tool
Source location number of old tool
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
aTcLmyn (C, S) $AC_TC_LMYN

Location number of the new tool
Owner location number of the new tool
- TYPE_UWORD -1 32000
Addressing
1
Read access
aTcLtn (C, S) $AC_TC_LTN

Target location number new tool
Target location number of new tool
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
aTcLto (C, S) $AC_TC_LTO

Target location number old tool
Target location number of old tool
- TYPE_UWORD

NC variables
aTcLto (C, S) $AC_TC_LTO

Addressing
1
Read access
aTcMfn (C, S) $AC_TC_MFN

Source magazine new tool
Source magazine of new tool
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
aTcMfo (C, S) $AC_TC_MFO

Source magazine old tool
Source magazine number of old tool
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
aTcMmyn (C, S) $AC_TC_MMYN

Magazine of the new tool
Owner magazine number of the new tool
- TYPE_UWORD -1 32000
Addressing
1
Read access
aTcMtn (C, S) $AC_TC_MTN

Target magazine new tool
Target magazine number of new tool

NC variables
aTcMtn (C, S) $AC_TC_MTN

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
aTcMto (C, S) $AC_TC_MTO

Target magazine old tool
Target magazine number of old tool
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
aTcStatus (C, S) $AC_TC_STATUS

Command status
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
aTcThno (C, S) $AC_TC_THNO

Number of toolholder
Number of toolholder for new tool
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
aTcTno (C, S) $AC_TC_TNO

T number
T number of new tool

NC variables
aTcTno (C, S) $AC_TC_TNO

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
aTcToolIs (C, S) $AC_TC_TOOLIS

Type of distance coding for the multi-tool
0 = Tool, 1,2,3 = Type of distance coding for the multi-tool
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
aTcDistance (C, S) $AC_TC_DISTANCE

Distance of the MT place of the loaded tool
Distance of the multi-tool place of the loaded tool to the reference point
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1
Read access
aTcMttn (C, S) $AC_TC_MTTN

Number of the multi-tool of the tool
Number of the multi-tool of the loaded tool
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
aTcMtptn (C, S) $AC_TC_MTLTN

Number of the multi-tool place of the tool
Number of the multi-tool place of the loaded tool

NC variables
aTcMtptn (C, S) $AC_TC_MTLTN

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
aTcNumPlaces (C, S) $AC_TC_MTNLOC

Number of defined places in the multi-tool
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
aaAccLim (C, S)
Axial acceleration override (ACC)
Display of the axial acceleration override programmed by ACC.
Depending on $MA_DYN_LIMIT_RESET_MASK, the value can remain active after Reset.
The variable always shows the programmed acceleration override and not the currently active acceleration limit.

- TYPE_UWORD 100 1 200
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaAccLimA (C, S) $AA_ACCLIMA[a]

Axial acceleration overr. main run
Axial acceleration override in main run
Return value 1-200
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
aaJerkLim (C, S)
Axial jerk override (JERKLIM)
Display of the axial jerk override programmed by JERKLIM.
The variable always shows the programmed jerk override and not the currently active jerk limit.

Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaVeloLim (C, S)
Axial velocity override (VELOLIM)
Display of the axial velocity override programmed by VELOLIM.
The variable always shows the programmed velocity override and not the currently active velocity limit.

Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
actCollPosMcsPacked (C, S)
Collision position in MCS
Position of a channel axis with a collision in the MCS.
The positions can be read for all configured channel axes.
Row index corresponds to

1 1st configured channel axis
2 2nd configured channel axis
..
20 20th configured channel axis
mm, inch, degree, user de‐ TYPE_DOUBLE 0
fined

NC variables
actCollPosMcsPacked (C, S)
Addressing
MAXNUM_AXES_PER_CHAN
Read access
aaEgActive (C, S) $AA_EG_ACTIVE[a,b]

EG link active
Electronic gear:
Link to the specified master axis is operative, i.e. activated.
Return value 0: Deactivated
1: Activated
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
Read access
aaEgAx (C, S) $AA_EG_AX[n,a]

EG axis number master axis
Electronic gear:
Axis number of nth master axis (1-n).
(Axis index = axis number - 1)
Return value 1-numMachAxes
- TYPE_UWORD 0 1 $$numMachAxes
Addressing
$$numMachAxes * 5
Read access
aaEgDenom (C, S) $AA_EG_DENOM[a,b]

EG denominator link factor
Electronic gear:
Denominator of link factor for the specified master axis.
The link factor of the gear is the result of $AA_EG_NUMERA[a,b]/$AA_EG_DENOM[a,b].
- TYPE_DOUBLE 1
Addressing

NC variables
aaEgDenom (C, S) $AA_EG_DENOM[a,b]

Read access
aaEgNumLa (C, S) $AA_EG_NUM_LA[a]

EG number of master axes
Electronic gear:
Number of master axes specified with EGDEF.
If the axis has not been specified with EGDEF as slave axis,
the value is 0.
Return value 0-5
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 5
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaEgNumera (C, S) $AA_EG_NUMERA[a,b]

EG numerator link factor
Electronic gear:
Numerator of link factor for the specified master axis.
The link factor of the gear is the result of $AA_EG_NUMERA[a,b]/$AA_EG_DENOM[a,b].
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Read access
aaEgSyn (C, S) $AA_EG_SYN[a,b]

EG synchronous position of master axis
Electronic gear:
Synchronous position for the specified master axis.
fined
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
aaEgSynFa (C, S) $AA_EG_SYNFA[a]

EG synchronous position of slave axis
Electronic gear:
Synchronous position for the slave axis.
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaEgType (C, S) $AA_EG_TYPE[a,b]

EG link type
Electronic gear:
Type of link for the specified master axis
Return value 0: Actual-value linkage
1: Setpoint linkage
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
Read access
aaJerkLimA (C, S) $AA_JERKLIMA[a]

Axial jerk override main run
Axial jerk override in run in
Return value 1-200
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
aaMeasP1Valid (C, S) $AA_MEAS_P1_VALID

Save axial measuring point 1
Save axial measuring point P1 for workpiece and
tool measurement
Return value 0: Clear axial measuring point
1: Write actual axial values to axial measuring point
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$numMachAxes

tool measurement
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$numMachAxes

tool measurement
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$numMachAxes

NC variables

tool measurement
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
aaMeasPoint1 (C, S) $AA_MEAS_POINT1

1st measuring point
1st measuring point for workpiece and tool measurement
Addressing
$$numMachAxes

2nd measuring point
2nd measuring point for workpiece and tool measurement
Addressing
$$numMachAxes

3rd measuring point
3rd measuring point for workpiece and tool measurement

NC variables

Addressing
$$numMachAxes

4th measuring point
4th measuring point for workpiece and tool measurement
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
aaMeasSetangle (C, S) $AA_MEAS_SETANGLE

Measurement setpoint angle
Setpoint angle of an axis
aaMeasSetpoint (C, S) $AA_MEAS_SETPOINT

Measurement setpoint position
Setpoint position of edge, corner or hole
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
aaMeasSpValid (C, S) $AA_MEAS_SP_VALID

Save axial setpoint
Save axial setpoint for workpiece and
tool measurement
Return value 0: Clear axial setpoint
1: Validate axial setpoint

NC variables
aaMeasSpValid (C, S) $AA_MEAS_SP_VALID

- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
aaVeloLimA (C, S) $AA_VELOLIMA[a]

Axial velocity overr. main run
Axial velocity override in main run
Return value 1-200
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
acAlarmStat (C, S) $AC_ALARM_STAT

ESR alarm status
!=0: Alarms are pending, the appropriate coded alarm reactions can be used as source for
"Extended stop and retract".
Return value The data is bit-coded. Individual states can therefore be masked or
evaluated separately if necessary (bits excluded below produce a value of 0)
Bit2 = 1: NOREADY (active rapid deceleration + cancellation of servo enable)
Bit6 = 1: STOPBYALARM (ramp stop of all channel axes)
Bit9 = 1: SETVDI (VDI interface signal alarm setting)
Bit13 = 1: FOLLOWUPBYALARM (follow-up)
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
acAsup (C, S) $AC_ASUP

Reason for the activation of an ASUB
Code number for the cause of activation of an ASUB
Return value The reasons are bit-coded.
BIT0: Activation because of: User interrupt "ASUB with Blsync".
BIT1: Activation because of: User interrupt "ASUB".
BIT2: Activation because of: User interrupt "ASUB from channel state Ready".
BIT3: Activation because of: User interrupt "ASUB in manual mode".
BIT4: Activation because of: Activation because of: User interrupt "ASUB".
BIT5: Activation because of: Abort of the subroutine repetition.
BIT6: Activation because of: Activation of decoding single block.
BIT7: Activation because of: Activation of DDTG.
BIT8: Activation because of: Activation of axis synchronization.
BIT9: Activation because of: Change of operating mode.
BIT10: Activation because of: Program continuation under TeachIn or after TeachIn deacti‐
vation.
BIT11: Activation because of: Selection overstore.
BIT12: Activation because of: Alarm with reaction compensation block with REPOS ( COMP‐
BLOCKWITHREORG).
BIT13: Activation because of: Retraction motion with G33 and Stop.
BIT14: Activation because of: Activation of dry run feed.
BIT15: Activation because of: Deactivation of dry run feed.
BIT16: Activation because of: Activation of skip block.
BIT17: Activation because of: Deactivation of skip block.
BIT18: Activation because of: Activate machine data.
BIT19: Activation because of: Activate tool offset.
BIT20: Activation because of: System ASUB after search type SERUPRO has reached the
search target.
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
acAxCtSwA (C, S) $AC_AXCTSWA[CTn]

Status of axis container
Channel status of axis container rotation
Return value TRUE: The channel has enabled rotation for the axis container
and rotation is still in progress.
FALSE: Axis container rotation is already finished

NC variables
acAxCtSwA (C, S) $AC_AXCTSWA[CTn]

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$numContainer
Read access
acConeAngle (C, S) $AC_CONE_ANGLE

Taper angle
Currently effective taper angle for taper turning.
The taper angle is specified by the setting data $SC_CONE_ANGLE and is
effective in the operating mode JOG only.
Degree TYPE_DOUBLE 0 -90 90
Addressing
1
Read access
acDelt (C, S) $AC_DELT

Stored distance-to-go of the path in the WCS
Stored distance-to-go of the path in the WCS after delete-distance-to-go of the path DELDTG for synchronous action
(Note: for SYNACT only)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1
Read access
acDtbb (C, S) $AC_DTBB

Distance from beginning of the block in the BCS
Distance from the beginning of the block in the BCS (Note: SYNACT only)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
acDtbw (C, S) $AC_DTBW

Distance from the beginning of block in the WCS
Distance from the beginning of the block in the WCS
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1
Read access
acDteb (C, S) $AC_DTEB

Distance to the end of the block in the BCS
Distance to the end of the block in the BCS (Note: for SYNACT only)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1
Read access
acLookahTest (C, S) $AC_LOOKAH_TEST[n]

Test variable for LookAhead
- TYPE_DOUBLE
acSimMode (C, S)
Simulation mode
Variable $AC_SIM_MODE determines the simulation mode. The following values are possible:
0: Simulation not active.
1: Simulation mode active.
- TYPE_DWORD 0 1
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
acSimTimeBlock (C, S)
Block processing time in the simulation
For the simulation: block processing time in seconds
Addressing
1
Read access
acSimTimeStep (C, S)
Time step in the simulation
For the simulation: time step in seconds
Addressing
1
Read access
acTrafoPar (C, S) $AC_TRAFO_PAR[n]

Parameter(s) of the current transformation
Supplies the value of parameter 'n' of the current transformation, e.g. the cylinder diameter in the case of TRACYL
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
8
Read access

NC variables
actToolDataBeforeSearch (C, S) $P_....._BEFORE_SEARCH_RUN

Active tool offset data before the search
Data for determining the active tool offset before the search, that is in reset status before the start of the search.
After reaching the search target, the value is set to the current value for each programming of master tool holder, spindle,
D no or DL no.
-P1: Master tool holder or spindle before the search ($AC_MTHNUM_BEFORE_SEARCH)

Programming "MTH(no)" or "MS(no)" after reaching the search target, this variable then returns the same value as
acMthNum.
-P2: Active D no. before the search (see $P_D_BEFORE_SEARCH)
Programming "D" after reaching the search target, this variable then returns the same value as actDNumber.
-P3: Active DL no. before the search (see $P_DL_BEFORE_SEARCH)
Programming "DL" after reaching the search target, this variable then returns the same value as actDLNumber.

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numSearchRunToolParams
Read access

NC variables
acsAxFrame (C, S)
Current axial ACS frame
The variable acsAxFrame returns the axial frames of the active ACS (SZS) frames.
The variable has the following structure:

Row index Description
1- 2 Frame for the 1st channel axis
3- 4 Frame for the 2nd channel axis
5- 6 Frame for the 3rd channel axis
7-8 Frame for the 4th channel axis
9 - 10 Frame for the 5th channel axis
...
39 - 40 Frame for the 20th channel axis
The axial frame consists of two values:

Double axSumTrans
Double axScale
For example, to read the first five channel axes, the row index must be entered as = 1 and the maximum row index as 10
( 5 * 2 ).
The axial frames are returned for all configured channel axes without any axis gaps.
Note:
axSumTrans: Total translation
axScale: Scaling. In the event of a negative value, the axis is mirrored.

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
40
Read access

NC variables
acsGeoFrame (C, S)
Current ACS contour frame
The variable acsGeoFrame returns the current ACS contour frame.

Row index Description
1- 3 Double geoSumTrans[GEODIM]
4- 6 Double geoScale[GEODIM]
7-9 Double geoRot[GEODIM]
10 - 12 Double geoShear[GEODIM]
The maximum row index entered specifies how many values are to be read at any one time.
Example: Row index = 1 and the maximum index = 12: This enables the complete contour frame to be read (12 values).
Note:
GEODIM: 3 (number of geometry axes)
geoSumTrans: Total translation of the 1st to the 3rd geometry axis
geoScale: Scaling of the 1st to the 3rd geometry axis. In the event of a negative value, the axis is mirrored.
geoRot: Rotation around the 1st to the 3rd geometry axis. The MD has to determine whether the notation is RPY or
Euler.
geoShear: Shear angle of the 1st to the 3rd geometry axis (the shear angle is 90 degrees in orthonormal coordinate
systems)

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
12
Read access
actOriToolLengthENS (C, S)
X, Y, Z tool components in the SZS
X, Y, Z components in the SZS of the active tool length, taking into account the tool orientation, including adapter data,
mirrorings and TCARR
(orientable tool carrier).
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
3
Read access

NC variables
actToolBasePosMcsPacked (C, S)
Position of the tool holder in the MCS
Position of a channel axis in the MCS with reference to the tool holder.
The positions can be read for all configured channel axes without any axis gaps.
Row index Corresponds to
..

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Read access
actToolEdgeCenterPosBcsPacked (C, S)
Position of the edge center in the BCS
Position of a channel axis in the BCS with reference to the edge center.
..

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
actToolEdgeCenterPosEnsPacked (C, S)
Position of the edge center in the SZS
Position of a channel axis in the SZS coordinate system with reference to the edge center.
..

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Read access
actToolEdgeCenterPosEnsPathn1 (C, S)
Position of the TCP in the SZS
SZS positions of the TCP with path parameter = 1 packed for all channel axes (without gaps).
..

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
auxfu (C, S)
Current auxiliary function
The variable is only used to read the auxiliary function during the output to the PLC.
This variable may only be used with the event AUXFU.

Double auxFuType;
Double extension;
Double value;
auxFuType is an integer value and can return the following values:

0: GARBAGE
1: M
2: M (generated by system)
3: H
4: S
5: S (generated by system)
6: T
7: D
8: DL
9: F
Value : floating point with S / F / H ($MC_AUXFU_H_TYPE_INT = 0)
Integer value with M / T / D / DL / H ($MC_AUXFU_H_TYPE_INT = 1)

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
3
Read access

NC variables
axesActiveInChan (C, S)
Bit mask of all active axes in the channel
Bit mask of all active axes in the channel.
There are many types of axes, e.g. geometry axis, positioning axis, command axis, PLC axis etc. In this mask, only those
axes are marked which, in principle, can be interpolated by an interpolator in this channel.
Bit Description
0 1. Channel axis
1 2. Channel axis
...
20 20. Channel axis

- TYPE_UDWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
blockProgInfo (C, S) $AC_BLOCK_PROGSTATE

Information of active block in the interpolator
Returns the information of a main run block.
Return value Bit-coded:
Bit 0: Block is end of main program ( M02, M17, M30 or RET(ASUB) )
Bit 1: Block is end of subprogram
Bit 2: Block is last initializing block

- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
chanAxesIpoAtEnd (C, S)
Channel axis has reached the end of its movement
Bit field of channel axes have reached their end of movement.
- TYPE_UDWORD 0

NC variables
chanAxesIpoAtEnd (C, S)
Addressing
1
Read access
cmdTrafoParS (C, S) $P_TRAFO_PAR[n]

Parameter(s) of the programmed transformation
Supplies the value of parameter 'n' of the programmed transformation, e.g. the cylinder diameter in the case of TRACYL

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
8
Read access
acDtew (C, S) $AC_DTEW

Distance to the end of the block in the WCS
Distance to the end of the block in the WCS
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1
Read access
acEsrTrigger (C, S) $AC_ESR_TRIGGER

Activation of ESR
Activation of "NC-controlled ESR"
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
1
Read access
acFGo (C, S) $AC_F_G0

Max. rapid traverse rate in the block

NC variables
acFGo (C, S) $AC_F_G0

mm/min, inch/min, user de‐ TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
fined
Addressing
1
Read access
acFct0 (C, S) $AC_FCT0[x] x = PolynomNo

a0-coeff. nth polynominal for synchonous action
a0-coefficient of the nth polynominal for the synchronous action SYNFCT / function FCTDEF n
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$MC_MM_NUM_FCTDEF_ELEMENTS
Read access

a1-coefficient of the nth polynominal for the synchronous action SYNFCT / function FCTDEF n
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access

a2-coefficient of the nth polynominal for the synchronous action
SYNFCT / function FCTDEF n
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing

NC variables

Read access

a3-coefficient of the nth polynominal for the synchronous action
SYNFCT / function FCTDEF n
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
acFctll (C, S) $AC_FCTLL[x] x = PolynomNo

Lower limit nth polynominal for synchronous action
Lower limit of the nth polynominal for the synchronous action SYNFCT / function FCTDEF n
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
acFctul (C, S) $AC_FCTUL[x] x = PolynomNo

Upper limit nth polynominal for synchronous action
Upper limit of the nth polynominal for the synchronous action SYNFCT / function FCTDEF n
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
acIwStat (C, S) $AC_IW_STAT

Current position of machine
Bit 0: Tool inv. position
Bit 1: Axis 2/3 position
Bit 2: Axis 5 position
Bit 3-31: Not yet assigned
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
acIwTu (C, S) $AC_IW_TU

Current position of channel axes
Bit 0: Channel axis 1 position
...
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
acJogCoord (C, S) $AC_JOG_COORD

Coordinate system manual travel
Setting the coordinate system for the manual travel
Return value 0: Work
1: SZS
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 1

NC variables
acLiftFast (C, S) $AC_LIFTFAST

Information about LIFTFAST
Information about the execution of LIFTFAST.
At the start of the LIFTFAST operation, the variable
is set internally by the NC to the value "1".
The variable must be reset to the initial state ($AC_LIFTFAST=0)
by the evaluating program (if available), in order to be able to
detect a subsequent LIFTFAST.
Return value 0: Initial state
1: LIFTFAST has been executed
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
1
Read access
acMea (C, S) $AC_MEA

Touch probe has switched
Return value No. of touch probe
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
2
Read access
acMeasActPlane (C, S) $AC_MEAS_ACT_PLANE

Plane setting
Plane setting for measurement calculation
Return value 0: G17, 1: G18, 2: G19
- TYPE_DWORD 0 2
Addressing
1

NC variables
acMeasChbfr (C, S) $AC_MEAS_CHBFR

Channel basic frame screen form
Channel basic frame screen form for setting up the new frame
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
acMeasChsfr (C, S) $AC_MEAS_CHSFR

System frame bit screen form
System frame bit screen form for setting up the new frame
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
acMeasCornerAngle (C, S) $AC_MEAS_CORNER_ANGLE

Corner cutting angle
Calculated cutting angle of corner
Addressing
1
Read access
acMeasCornerSetangle (C, S) $AC_MEAS_CORNER_SETANGLE

Setpoint cutting angle
User-selectable setpoint cutting angle of corner
Return value Permissible input range between 0 and 180 degrees
Degree, user defined TYPE_DOUBLE 0 180.0
Addressing
1
acMeasDNumber (C, S) $AC_MEAS_D_NUMBER

Tool edge number
Selected tool edge number

NC variables
acMeasDNumber (C, S) $AC_MEAS_D_NUMBER

- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
acMeasDiameter (C, S) $AC_MEAS_DIAMETER

Diameter
Calculated diameter
Addressing
1
Read access
acMeasDirApproach (C, S) $AC_MEAS_DIR_APPROACH

Approach direction
Approach direction towards workpiece
Return value 0: +x 1: -x 2: +y 3: -y 4: +z 5: -z
- TYPE_DWORD 0 5
Addressing
1
acMeasFineTrans (C, S) $AC_MEAS_FINE_TRANS

Fine offset
Correction in fine offset
Return value 0: Correction in coarse translation
1: Correction in fine translation
- TYPE_DWORD 0 1
Addressing
1

NC variables
acMeasFrameSelect (C, S) $AC_MEAS_FRAME_SELECT

Frame selection
The frame calculated during workpiece measurement is
entered in the selected frame.
Return value 0: $P_SETFR
10.. 25: $P_CHBFR[0..15]
50.. 65: $P_NCBFR[0..15]
100.. 199: $P_UIFR[0..99]
1010..1025: $P_CHBFR[0..15]
1050..1065: $P_NCBFR[0..15]
- TYPE_DWORD 0 1065
Addressing
1
acMeasInput (C, S) $AC_MEAS_INPUT[n]

Data for measurement
Data for the workpiece and tool measurement
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
10
acMeasLatch (C, S) $AC_MEAS_LATCH

Save measuring point
Save measuring points for workpiece and tool measurement
Return value 0: Clear measuring point

1: Write current axial values to measuring point
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
4

NC variables
acMeasNcbfr (C, S) $AC_MEAS_NCBFR

Global basic frame screen form
Global basic frame screen form for setting up the new frame
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
acMeasP1Coord (C, S) $AC_MEAS_P1_COORD

Coordinate system of the 1st measuring point
Return value 0: Work 1: BCS 2: MCS
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0

Coordinate system of the 2nd measuring point
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0

Coordinate system of the 3rd measuring point
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0

Coordinate system of the 4th measuring point
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
acMeasPframe (C, S) $AC_MEAS_PFRAME

Programmable frame
Programmable frame is not included

NC variables
acMeasPframe (C, S) $AC_MEAS_PFRAME

- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 1
acMeasResults (C, S) $AC_MEAS_RESULTS[n]

Measurement results
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
10
Read access
acMeasScaleunit (C, S) $AC_MEAS_SCALEUNIT

Unit of measurement
Unit of measurement for input and output values
Return value 0: Unit of measurement as configured
1: Unit of measurement in relation to active G code G70/G700/G71/G710
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
acMeasSema (C, S) $AC_MEAS_SEMA

Workpiece measurement semaphore
Variable for disabling and enabling the measurement interface
Return value 0: Not assigned
1: Assigned
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
1

NC variables
acMeasSetCoord (C, S) $AC_MEAS_SET_COORD

Coordinate system of the set point
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
acMeasTNumber (C, S) $AC_MEAS_T_NUMBER

Tool number
Selected tool number
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
acMeasToolLength (C, S) $AC_MEAS_TOOL_LENGTH

Tool length
Calculated tool length
Addressing
1
Read access
acMeasToolMask (C, S) $AC_MEAS_TOOL_MASK

Tool setting
Tool setting for the measurement calculation
Return value Bit 0: Tool radius is not included in the calculation
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0

NC variables
acMeasType (C, S) $AC_MEAS_TYPE

Measurement type
Measurement type specification
Return value 0: Default
1: x edge
2: y edge
3: z edge
4: Corner 1
5: Corner 2,
6: Corner 3
7: Corner 4
8: Hole
9: Shaft
10: Tool length
11: Tool diameter
12: Groove
13: Web
14: Actual value setting for geo and special axes
15: Actual value setting for special axes only
16: Edge_2P
17: Plane_Angles
18: Plane_Normal
19: Dimension_1
20: Dimension_2
21: Dimension_3
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 21
Addressing
1
acMeasUifr (C, S) $AC_MEAS_UIFR

Settable data management frame
Settable data management frame for setting up the new frame
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 99

NC variables
acMeasValid (C, S) $AC_MEAS_VALID

Validity bits
Validity bits for measurement input values
Return value Bit 0: $AA_MEAS_POINT1[axis]
Bit 1: $AA_MEAS_POINT2[axis]
Bit 4: $AA_MEAS_SETPOINT[axis]
Bit 5: $AC_MEAS_WP_SETANGLE
Bit 6: $AC_MEAS_CORNER_SETANGLE
Bit 7: $AC_MEAS_T_NUMBER
Bit 8: $AC_MEAS_D_NUMBER
Bit 9: $AC_MEAS_DIR_APPROACH
Bit 10: $AC_MEAS_ACT_PLANE
Bit 11: $AC_MEAS_FRAME_SELECT
Bit 12: $AC_MEAS_TYPE
Bit 13: $AC_MEAS_FINE_TRANS
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
acMeasWpAngle (C, S) $AC_MEAS_WP_ANGLE

Workpiece position angle
Calculated workpiece position angle
Addressing
1
Read access
acMeasWpSetangle (C, S) $AC_MEAS_WP_SETANGLE

Setpoint workpiece position angle
User-selectable setpoint workpiece position angle
Return value Permissible input range less than +/- 90 degrees
Degree, user defined TYPE_DOUBLE -90.0 90.0

NC variables
acMeasWpSetangle (C, S) $AC_MEAS_WP_SETANGLE

Addressing
1
acMonMin (C, S) $AC_MONMIN

Actual tool monitoring value to the setpoint
Ratio of the actual tool monitoring value to the setpoint
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
acMsNum (C, S) $AC_MSNUM

Number of the master spindle
Return value 0: No spindle available
1..n: Number of the master spindle
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
acMthNum (C, S) $AC_MTHNUM

Number of the current master tool holder
Number of the current master tool holder.
Is only meaningful with active magazine management.
Return value 0: No master tool holder available
1..n: Number of the master tool holder
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
acOvr (C, S) $AC_OVR

Path override for synchronous actions
Path override for synchronous actions (Note: for SYNACT only)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1
Read access
acPRTimeA (C, S)
Estimation of program runtime - downtime
For simulation: Estimation of program runtime in seconds - downtime
Addressing
1
acPRTimeM (C, S)
Estimation of program runtime - machining time
For simulation: Estimation of program runtime in seconds - machining time
Addressing
1
acPRTimeB (C, S)
Estimation of program runtime - block-by-block
For simulation: Estimation of program runtime in seconds - block-by-block
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
acPathAcc (C, S) $AC_PATHACC

Path acceleration for real-time events
m/s2, 1000 inch/ s2, user TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
defined
Addressing
1
Read access
acPathJerk (C, S) $AC_PATHJERK

Path jerk for real-time events
mm/s3, 1000 inch / s3, TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
user defined
Addressing
1
Read access
acPathn (C, S) $AC_PATHN

Normalized path parameter
Normalized path parameter (Note: for SYNACT only)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1
Read access
acPlcOvr (C, S) $AC_PLC_OVR

PLC override for synchronized actions
Path override for synchronized actions specified by the PLC
- TYPE_DOUBLE 100 0
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
acPltbb (C, S) $AC_PLTBB

Path from beginning of the block in the BCS
Path length from the beginning of the block in the BCS (Note: for SYNACT only)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1
Read access
acPlteb (C, S) $AC_PLTEB

Path to the end of the block in the BCS
Path length to the end of the block in the BCS (Note: for SYNACT only)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1
Read access
acProg (C, S) $AC_PROG

Program status according to $AC_PROG
Program status
(identical to progStatus but with coding that corresponds to $AC_PROG)
Return value 0: aborted (reset)
1: halted (stop)
2: running (active)
3: waiting
4: interrupted
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
acPtpSup (C, S)
Cart. PTP travel is supported
Cartesian point-to-point travel (PTP) is supported by transformation
Return value 0: Cart. PTP travel is not supported
1: Cart. PTP travel is supported
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
1
Read access
acStat (C, S) $AC_STAT

Channel status according to $AC_STAT
Channel status
(identical to chanStatus but with coding that corresponds to $AC_STAT)
Return value 0: reset
1: interrupted
2: active
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
acSynaMem (C, S) $AC_SYNA_MEM

Free memory for synchronous actions
Free memory for synchronous actions: Shows how many elements of the memory set with $MC_MM_NUM_SYNC_ELE‐
MENTS are still free.
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
acSyncActLoad (C, S) $AC_SYNC_ACT_LOAD

Current runtime for synchronized actions
Current runtime for synchronized actions of the last IPO cycle in the channel

NC variables
acSyncActLoad (C, S) $AC_SYNC_ACT_LOAD

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
acSyncAverageLoad (C, S) $AC_SYNC_AVERAGE_LOAD

Average runtime for synchronized actions
Average runtime for synchronized actions of an IPO cycle in the channel
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
acSyncMaxLoad (C, S) $AC_SYNC_MAX_LOAD

Longest runtime for synchronized actions
Longest runtime for synchronized actions of an IPO cycle in the channel
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
acTaneb (C, S) $AC_TANEB

Tangent angle at the block end point
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
acTc (C, S) $AC_TC

Active tool carrier

NC variables
acTc (C, S) $AC_TC

- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
acTcAckt (C, S) $AC_TC_ACKT

Trigger variable ACKnowledgeTrigger
Trigger variable ACKnowledgeTrigger always assumes a value of 1
for an IPO cycle when the PLC acknowledges a command of the tool management.
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
acTcCmdt (C, S) $AC_TC_CMDT

Trigger variable: CoMmadTrigger
Trigger variable: CoMmadTrigger always assumes a value of 1 for an
IPO cycle when a new command of the magazine management is output to the PLC.
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
acThreadPitch (C, S) $AC_THREAD_PITCH

Programmed lead
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
acThreadPitchAct (C, S) $AC_THREAD_PITCH_ACT

Current lead
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
1
Read access
acThreadPitchInc (C, S) $AC_THREAD_PITCH_INC

Current lead change
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
1
Read access
acTime (C, S) $AC_TIME

Time from the beginning of the block in seconds
Time from the beginning of the block in seconds (Note: for SYNACT only)
s TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1
Read access
acTimec (C, S) $AC_TIMEC

Time from begin. of block in interpolation cycles
Time from the beginning of the block in interpolation cycles (Note: for SYNACT only)
IPO cycle TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
acTimer (C, S) $AC_TIMER[x] x = TimerNo

Time variable in seconds
Time variable in seconds (Note: for SYNACT only)
s TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$MN_MM_NUM_AC_TIMER
Read access
acTotalOvr (C, S) $AC_TOTAL_OVR

Total path override for synchronized actions
- TYPE_DOUBLE 100 0
Addressing
1
Read access
acTrafo (C, S) $AC_TRAFO

Code number of the active transformation
Code number of the active transformation (encoded as for $AC_TRAFO)
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
acTrafoChain (C, S) $AC_TRAFO_CHAIN

Active chained transformation
Active chained transformation
Code numbers of the chained transformations of the active TRACON corresponding
to machine data $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_m.
Return value 0: No master tool holder available
1..n: Number of the master tool holder
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0

NC variables
acTrafoChain (C, S) $AC_TRAFO_CHAIN

Addressing
4
Read access
acTrafoParSet (C, S) $AC_TRAFO_PARSET

Number of current transformer data record
The variable is '0' if no transformation is active.
If a conventionally defined (i.e. not by kinematic chains) transformation is active, the variable contains the number of the
current transformation data record.
If a transformation defined by kinematic chains is active, the variable contains the number of the $NT data record with an
offset of 1000, i.e. the first transformation returns the value 1001.
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
acVactB (C, S) $AC_VACTB

Path veloc. in basic coordinate system
Path velocity in basic coordinate system
mm/min, inch/min, user de‐ TYPE_DOUBLE 0
fined
Addressing
1
Read access
acVactBf (C, S) $AC_VACTBF

Path velocity in the BCS
Path velocity in the BCS.
FGroup and FGREF are taken into account.
fined
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
acVactWf (C, S) $AC_VACTWF

Path velocity in the workpiece coordinate system
Path velocity in the workpiece coordinate system.
FGroup and FGREF are taken into account.
fined
Addressing
1
Read access
acVactw (C, S) $AC_VACTW

Path velocity in the WCS (SYNACT)
Path velocity in the work piece coordinate system (Note: for SYNACT only)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1
Read access
acVc (C, S) $AC_VC

Add. path feed correction for synchronous actions
Additive path feedrate correction value for synchronous actions (Note: for SYNACT only)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1
Read access
actDLNumber (C, S) $P_DLNO

Active total offset
Number of active total offset DL
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access

NC variables
actDNumber (C, S) $P_TOOL

Number of active tool edge
- TYPE_UWORD 0 9
actDNumberFanuc (C, S)
Replaced by actDNumberFanuc32
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
actDNumberFanuc32 (C, S)
Offset memory number radius (ISO Dialect))
With programming in ISO Dialect mode:
Offset memory number radius.
Assigned only in conjunction with ISO Dialect M external language.
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
actDNumberS (C, S)
Corresp. to actNumber for block search with calc.
Corresponds to actNumber for block search with calculation
Attention: This variable is available for protocolling block search events only, not for the Variable Service!

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1

NC variables
actDuploNumber (C, S)
Duplo number of active tool
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
1
actFeedRateIpo (C, S)
Actual value of the interpolation feedrate
Actual value of the interpolation feedrate. The actual value is the feed actually moved with. (depends on the acceleration
profiles, LookAhead, velocity limits etc. ) The variable 'feedRateIpoUnit' defines the physical unit.
fined
actFeedRateTechIpo (C, S)
Interpolation feed extended, actual value
Interpolation feed extended, actual value. The actual value is the actually traversed feed rate (depends on the accelera‐
tion profiles, LookAhead, velocity limits etc.). The variable 'feedRateIpoUnit' defines the physical unit (mm/min, mm/rev or
mm/tooth).
fined
Read access
actFrameIndex (C, S) $P_UIFRNUM

Index of the active set frame
Index of the active set frame (index in G group 8 "Settable work offset"). Frames 0 - 4 (corresponds to G500 ... G57) can
be set in the standard version. The number of frames can be changed via machine data MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES.
Return value 0 = no frame selected
1 = G54
2 = G55
3 = G56
4 = G57
5 = G505
to
99 = G599

NC variables
actFrameIndex (C, S) $P_UIFRNUM

- TYPE_UWORD
actHNumberFanuc (C, S)
Replaced by actHNumberFanuc32
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
actHNumberFanuc32 (C, S)
Offset memory number length (Fanuc)
With programming in ISO Dialect mode:
Offset memory number length.
Assigned only in conjunction with ISO Dialect M external language.
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
actIpoType (C, S)
Active interpolation mode search run
Active interpolation mode used for the path motion. This date corresponds to a large degree to the SNCF:ncFktBin for the
first G-group.
The value differs for automatically generated intermediate blocks only. This is e.g. the case if two lines are connected with
an arc by the command RND. The value is the index of the active G-code (analog with SNCF:ncFktBin)
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
actIpoTypeS (C, S)
Active interpolation mode
Active mode of interpolation applied during block searches.
This data is very similar to SNCF:ncFktBinS for the 1st G group.
Its value is different only in the case of automatically generated intermediate blocks,
such as when, for example, two straight lines are connected to an arc
by means of command RND.
The value is the index of the active G function (analogous to SNCF:ncFktBinS).
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
actMasterToolHolderNo (C, S)
Active no. of the master tool holder
Active number of the master tool holder.
Especially for $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK, Bit0=0, this is the value of
SETMS or SETMTH last programmed in the RESET status of the NCK.
Especially for $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK, Bit0=1, this is the value in the RESET status of the NCK for
$MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND (if $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER=0);
or $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER (if $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER > 0)
- TYPE_UWORD 1 max. Anzahl der Kana‐
lachsen
Addressing
1
Read access
actOriToolLength1 (C, S)
X component of tool in WCS
X component in workpiece coordinate system (WCS) of active tool length,
taking into account the tool orientation, incl. adapter data, mirroring and TCARR
(orientable toolholder).
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing

NC variables
1
Read access
Y component of tool in WCS
Y component in workpiece coordinate system (WCS) of active tool length,
(orientation-capable toolholder).
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
1
Read access
Z component of tool in WCS
Z component in workpiece coordinate system (WCS) of active tool length,
(orientation-capable toolholder).
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
1
Read access
actParts (C, S) $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS

Number of workpieces machined in current run
Total number of workpieces machined in current run:
This counter registers the number of workpieces
machined since it started.
When the required number is reached, the counter is set
to zero automatically.
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0

NC variables
actProgNetTime (C, S) $AC_ACT_PROG_NET_TIME

Net runtime for current program
The current net runtime of the current program, in other words the time during which the program was stopped has been
deducted. If a part program is restarted in automatic mode from the channel status RESET, actProgNetTime is automati‐
cally reset to zero. actProgNetTime is reset to zero when M30 is reached. The net runtime does not include the time dur‐
ing which the program stops because Override=0.
actProgNetTime can be further manipulated with $$progNetTimeTrigger.
Note: The RESET key does not reset actProgNetTime to zero, it merely stops actProgNet-Time. actProgNetTime is not
reset by default with GOTOs (except with the 828D). If GOTOs is to behave like program end M30, bit 0 of machine data
$MC_PROG_NET_TIMER_MODE must be set.
When an ASUB is started from RESET, actProgNetTime is set to zero, and then counts the runtime of the ASUB. actProg‐
NetTime is not reset when ProgEvent is started. actProgNetTime is additionally increased only with a start event, M30
ProgEvent and search run ProgEvent. At the end of an ASUB, actProgNetTime behaves the same as the RESET button.
This means that actProgNetTime is only stopped, it is not set to 0.
Return value Seconds
s, user defined TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
actMTNumber (C, S)
Number of the multi-tool with active tool
Number of the multi-tool in which the active tool is contained. The value is zero if the active tool is not contained in a multi-
tool.
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
actMTPlaceNumber (C, S) $AC_TC_

Number of the MT place with active tool
Number of the multi-tool place in which the active tool is contained. The value is zero if the active tool is not contained in a
multi-tool.
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables
actMTPlaceNumber (C, S) $AC_TC_

1
Read access
actTNumber (C, S) $P_TOOLNO W1

Number of active tool
- TYPE_UWORD 0 32000
actTNumberLong (C, S)
No. of active tool for flat D-no. max 8 digits
Number of the active tool using flat D-numbers with up to 8 digits
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
actTNumberS (C, S)
corr. to actTNumber for block search without calc.
Corresponds to actTNumber for block search with calculation.
Attention: This variable is available for protocolling the block search events only, not for the Variable Service!

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
actToolEdgeCenterPosEns (C, S)
composite variable
Corresponds to $$/C/SEGA/actToolEdgeCenterPosEns in the SEGA block
for the 3 geometry axes
The variable consists of three values of the DOUBLE type, i.e. is 24 bytes long.
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0

NC variables
actToolEdgeCenterPosEns (C, S)
Addressing
1
Read access
actToolIdent (C, S) W1
Identifier of active tool
- TYPE_STRING "\0"
Addressing
1
actToolLength1 (C, S) $P_TOOLL[1] W1

Active tool length 1
actToolLength2 (C, S) $P_TOOLL[2] W!

actToolLength3 (C, S) $P_TOOLL[3] W1

actToolRadius (C, S) $P_TOOLR W1

Active tool radius

NC variables
actTransform (C, S)
Active transformation
- TYPE_STRING \0
Addressing
1
Read access
actWaCSCoordSys (C, S) $AC_WORKAREA_CS_COORD_SYSTEM

Coordinate system for working area limitation
Coordinate system of the active coordinate system-specific working area limitation
Return value Identifier for the coordinate system in which the working area limitation is to apply.
The following are valid:
0: Working area limitation in the WCS
3: Working area limitation in the SZS
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
actWaCSLimitMinus (C, S) $AC_WORKAREA_CS_LIMIT_MINUS

Coord.-specific working area limitation, negative
Position of the coordinate system-specific working area limitation in the negative direction for the addressed axis and work‐
ing area group.
Return value Position of the working area limitation in the negative direction
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
actWaCSLimitPlus (C, S) $AC_WORKAREA_CS_LIMIT_PLUS

Coord.-specific working area limitation positive
Position of the coordinate system-specific working area limitation in the positive direction for the addressed axis and work‐
ing area group
Return value Position of the working area limitation in the positive direction

NC variables
actWaCSLimitPlus (C, S) $AC_WORKAREA_CS_LIMIT_PLUS

fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
actWaCSMinusEnable (C, S) $AC_WORKAREA_CS_MINUS_ENABLE

Coord.-spec. work. area limitation, negative valid
The coordinate-specific working area limitation in the negative direction of $$actWaCSLimitMinus is valid.
Return value TRUE: The value in the variable $$actWaCSLimitMinus is valid for the axis.
FALSE: There is no limitation in the coordinate-specific working area in the negative direc‐
tion for this axis.
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
actWaCSPlusEnable (C, S) $AC_WORKAREA_CS_PLUS_ENABLE

Coord.-spec. work. area limitation, positive valid
The coordinate system-specific working area limitation in the positive direction of $$actWaCSLimitPlus is valid.
Return value TRUE: The value in the variable $$actWaCSLimitPlus is valid for the axis.
FALSE: There is no limitation for this axis in the positive direction in the coordinate-specific
working area.
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
allAxesRefActive (C, S) DB21-30, DBX36.2

All axes referenced
Code specifying whether all axes are referenced
Return value 1 = all axes referenced
0 = at least 1 axis not referenced

NC variables
allAxesRefActive (C, S) DB21-30, DBX36.2

- TYPE_UWORD
allAxesStopped (C, S)
Axes in exact stop
Code specifying whether axes are in exact stop
Return value 0 = at least one axis is not in exact stop
1 = All axes in exact stop
- TYPE_UWORD
basisFrameMask (C, S) $P_CHBFRMASK

Active channel-specific basic frames
Display indicating which channel-specific basic frames are active
Return value Every bit in the mask indicates whether the appropriate basic frame
is active. Bit0 = 1st basic frame, Bit1 = 2nd basic frame, etc.
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
blockType (C, S) $AC_BLOCKTYPE

Type of the active block in the interpolator
Identifies the type of a block (programmed or generated internally)
Return value 0: No internally generated block
1: Internally generated block, but cannot be specified in detail
2: Block was generated on chamfering/rounding
3: Smooth approach and retraction (SAR)
4: Block was generated during tool offset
5: Block was generated on smoothing
6: Block was generated by TLIFT (tangential correction)
7: Block was generated during path segmentation
8: Block was generated by compile cycles
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 8
Addressing

NC variables
blockType (C, S) $AC_BLOCKTYPE

1
Read access

NC variables
blockTypeInfo (C, S) $AC_BLOCKTYPEINFO

Information on block type
Detailed information on block type

NC variables

Return value The value range and the meaning of this variable depend on the current
value of system variable $$blockType
System variable $$blockTypeInfo can be used to request additional

information on variable $$blockType.
Depending on the value of system variable $$blockType, various values are then possible:
1. General internally generated block: $$blockType = 1

$$blockTypeInfo = 1000 and does not include any additional information.
2. Chamfer/round: $$blockType = 2
2001: straight
2002: circle
3. SAR: $$blockType = 3
3001: Approach with straight
3002: Approach with quadrant
3003: Approach with semicircle
4. Tool offset: $$blockType = 4

4001: Approach block after STOPRE
4002: Link blocks if intersection not found
4003: Point circle on inside corners (only with TRACYL)
4004: Bypass circle (or conic) on outside corners
4005: Approach blocks for offset suppression
4006: Approach blocks for reactivation of TRC
4007: Blocks are split because curvature is too high
4008: Compensation blocks for 3D front milling (tool vector || plane vector)
5. Corner rounding: $$blockType = 5

5001: Rounding contour through G641
6. TLIFT: $$blockType = 6
6001: TLIFT block with linear movement of the tangential axis but without retraction move‐
ment.
6002: TLIFT block with non-linear movement of the tangential axis (polynomial)
but without retraction movement.
6003: TLIFT block with retraction movement.
Tangential axis movement and retraction movement start simultaneously.

NC variables

6004: TLIFT block with retraction movement.
Tangential axis does not start until a specific retraction position is reached.
7. Path segmentation: $$blockType = 7

7001: Programmed path segmentation without punching or nibbling active.
7002: Programmed path segmentation with punching or nibbling active.
7003: Automatically generated path segmentation.
8. Compile cycles: $$blockType = 8

In this case, system variable $AC_BLOCKTYPEINFO includes the
ID of the compile cycles application that generated the block.
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
cIn (C, S) $C_IN[n]

Signal from PLC to cycle
Signal from PLC to cycle (reserved for
SIEMENS application, e.g. ShopMill/ManualTurn)
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
16
Read access
cOut (C, S) $C_OUT[n]

Signal from cycle to PLC
Signal from cycle to PLC (reserved for
SIEMENS application, e.g. ShopMill/ManualTurn)
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
16
Read access

NC variables
chanAlarm (C, S) DB21-30, DBX36.6 und DBX36.7 A2

NCK alarm pending
Code whether NCK alarm pending.
Return value 0 = no alarm in this channel
1 = alarm without stop
2 = alarm with stop
- TYPE_UWORD
chanAxisNoGap (C, S)
Alternative name: axisActivInChan
Display of existing axes.
Display of existing axes, i.e. no axis gap in channel.
Return value Bits 0-31 represent the axes of the channel.
Bitn = 0: Axis does not exist.
Bitn = 1: Axis does exist.
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
chanStatus (C, S) DB21-30, DBX35.5 - DBX35.7 K1

Channel status (1=active)
Channel status
Return value 0 = RESET
1 = active
2 = interrupted
- TYPE_UWORD
changeAxConfCounter (C, S)
Counter indicating changes of axes configuration
A counter which is incremented if the axes configuration has changed. This is the case, if e.g. geometry axes are switched
or axes have been changed between channels. The counter is set to 0 at PowerOn and it might overflow. You cannot be
sure, that the axes configuration actually has changed when the counter is incremented.

NC variables
changeAxConfCounter (C, S)
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
cmdDwellTime (C, S)
Programmed dwell time
Return value See $$timeOrRevolDwell
Addressing
1
Read access
cmdFeedRateIpo (C, S) $AC_F

Desired value of the interpolation feedrate
Desired feedrate of the interpolation feedrate. The physical unit is defined in the variable 'feedRateIpoUnit'
fined
cmdFeedRateIpoS (C, S)
Interpolation feed during search
Interpolation feed during search.
The physical unit is in the variable $$feedRateIpoUnitS
fined
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
cmdTrafoParSetS (C, S) $P_TRAFO_PARSET

No. prog. transformation data record block search
If a conventionally defined (i.e. not by kinematic chains) transformation is active, the variable contains the number of the
current transformation data record during block search.
If a transformation defined by kinematic chains is active, the variable contains the number of the $NT data record with an
offset of 1000, i.e. the first transformation returns the value 1001 (during block search).
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
cmdTrafoS (C, S) $P_TRAFO

Prog. transformation block search
Code number of programmed transformation for block search
Return value Coding as for variable $AC_TRAFO
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
contourDev (C, S)
Contour deviation
corrBlActive (C, S)
Incorrect block occurred
Incorrect block has occurred (correction block)
Return value 0 = no incorrect block
1 = incorrect block
- TYPE_UWORD

NC variables
cycServRestricted (C, S)
Restricted cyclic variable service
Identifier, whether there is restricted, cyclic variable service.
This is a privileged variable: cyclic result acknowledgments of this variable are also returned when the cyclic services are
no longer served by the NCK because of block change time problems.
Notice: The privileged variables lose his property if they are mixed with non-privileged variables in one order. -> Do not
integrate the variable cycServRestricted in a cluster with other variables!
Return value 0 = normal cycl. service
1 = no cyclic service (but acknowledgment)
- TYPE_UWORD
delObjState (C, S)
Error status of PI _N_DELOBJ
Using PI _N_DELOBJ protection areas are deleted analogous to the language command DELOBJ(...).
This OPI variable shows the status of the PI .
0 = PI successfully executed.
-2 = Name of the object to be deleted not known.
-3 = Index -1 not permitted
-4 = Start index too large
-5 = Illegal index when deleting a group (only -1 permitted)
-6 = Start index smaller than end index
-7 = End index too large
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
delayFSt (C, S)
Stop in curr.progr.area is effect.after a delay
Delay Feed Stop, Stop is delayed in the current program area
Return value 0: Stop in the current program area is effective immediately
1: Stop in the current program area is effective after a delay
2: Stop in the current program area is effective immediately (same as 0), although
a stop delay area was programmed in the parts program.
(This means that the NCK could not switch on the stop delay area.)

NC variables
delayFSt (C, S)
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 2
Addressing
1
Read access
direction (C, S)
Traversing direction
Return value 0 = normal travel
1 = forward travel
2 = reverse travel
3 = reference point cycle
4 = stop state
- TYPE_UWORD
ensRotTrans (C, S)
ensRotTrans
SZS offset of the rotary axis with TRANSMIT and TRACYL
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
extProgActive (C, S) DB21-30, DBX32.0

Program execution from external active
Flag indicating whether program execution from external is active.
1 = active
- TYPE_UWORD
feedRateIpoOvr (C, S)
Interpolation feedrate, override

NC variables
feedRateIpoOvr (C, S)
% TYPE_DOUBLE
feedRateIpoUnit (C, S)
Interpolation feedrate, units
Return value 0 = mm/min
1 = mm/rev
2 = inch/min
3 = inch/rev
- TYPE_UWORD
feedRateIpoUnitS (C, S)
Interpolation feedrate, units (search)
Interpolation feed, units during search
1 = mm/rev
2 = inch/min
3 = inch/rev
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
findBlActive (C, S) DB21-30, DBX33.4 K1

Block search active
Code whether block search is active.
Return value 0 = not active
1 = active
- TYPE_UWORD

NC variables
geoAxesInChan (C, S)
Assignment of geometry axes to channel axes
Determines the geometry axis assignment of the channel axes.
Row index 1: Channel axis index of the 1st geometry axis

Row index 2: Channel axis index of the 2nd geometry axis
Row index 3: Channel axis index of the 3rd geometry axis
In the event of a non-existent geometry axis the channel axis index is -1.
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
3
Read access
ludAccCounter (C, S)
Counter indicating that a new LUD ACC is available
Counter indicating that a new LUD ACC is available. If subprograms are called during an automatic program execution, a
new set of LUDs becomes valid. In order to indicate to the HMI that it has to modify the display of the LUDs, respectively
that the validity of the LUDs has changed, the variable 'ludAccCounter' is incremented. It is only necessary for the HMI to
inquire a change of the variable's value, the value itself is of no importance.
- TYPE_UWORD
machFunc (C, S) DB11, DBXn.0 - DBXn.2

(n=7,27,47,67, ...)
Active channel machine function
Return value 0 = none
1 = REPOS
2 = TEACH IN
3 = REF
4 = TEACH-REPOS
5 = TEACH-REF
- TYPE_UWORD

NC variables
markActiveList (C, S)
Status array for the wait marker
Status array for the active marker in channel m.
The first element (markActiveList[1] ) of the array specifies the currently active marker number of this channel (channel m).
The second element ( markActiveList[2] ) specifies bit-coded whether channel m is still waiting for the mark to
be reached in the other channels (channel n), in short "waiting status".
markActiveList[2] Bit-n == 1 Channel m is waiting for mark markActiveList[1] in channel n

markActiveList[2] Bit-n == 0 Channel n has already reached mark markActiveList[1], or channel m is not
waiting for mark markActiveList[1] at all
Return value markActiveList[1] == 0 Current channel m does not edit any wait marker
markActiveList[1] == 1..99 Current channel m is positioned on the wait marker with mar‐
kActiveList[1]
markActiveList[2] Bit-n == 1 Channel m is waiting for mark markActiveList[1] in channel n

markActiveList[2] Bit-n == 0 Channel n has already reached mark markActiveList[1], or
channel m is not
waiting for mark markActiveList[1] at all
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 99
Addressing
2
Read access
nameIndex (C, S)
Index of the found string
Using PI _N_NAMINT (NAMETOINT) string is searched in a 1-dimensional string field.
In this OPI variable, the index of the found strings is returned to the string field.
If the string is not found, the OPI variable is -1.

- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
ncProgEndCounter (C, S)
Counter for end of program
Counter which is incremented
as soon as the NCK has processed an end of program.

NC variables
ncProgEndCounter (C, S)
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
ncResetCounter (C, S)
Counter for Reset key
the Reset key
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
ncStartCounter (C, S)
Counter for NC-start key
Counter for the NC-start key. Pressing this key increments the variable 'ncStartCounter'. The value of the variable can be
ignored, the HMI must just inquire the change of the variable to see whether the start-key has been pressed.
- TYPE_UWORD
ncStartSignalCounter (C, S)
Counter for NC start signal
Counter that is incremented
as soon as the channel-specific NC start signal has been activated in the VDI interface.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
numChanAlarms (C, S)
Number of present channel-specific alarms

NC variables
numChanAlarms (C, S)
- TYPE_UWORD
numToolHolders (C, S) $P_MAGNS

Number of tool holders in the TOA of the channel
Number of tool holders/ spindles (buffer locations of the location type = spindle) from the magazine configuration of the
TOA which are allocated to the channel. The number of tool holders / spindles is solely a function of the magazine configu‐
ration and does not change during an NC program execution.
Value = 0, if there is no magazine configuration or the TMMG (tool management magazines) is not present in the NC.
Addressing
1
Read access
numTraceProtocEventType (C, S)
Logging: Standard event types
Logging: Number of standard event types
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
10
Read access
numTraceProtocOemEventType (C, S) $MM_PROTOC_NUM_ETP_OEM_TYP

Logging: OEM event types
Logging: Number of OEM event types
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
10
Read access

NC variables
oldProgNetTime (C, S) $AC_OLD_PROG_NET_TIME

Net runtime for terminated program
oldProgNetTime is the net runtime of the program that has just finished correctly, in other words, the program was not
canceled with RESET, it was ended normally with M30. If a new program is started, oldProgNetTime remains unaffected
until M30 is reached again.
The implicit copying process from $$actProgNetTime to oldProgNetTime takes place only if $$progNetTimeTrigger is not
written.
Note: oldProgNetTime is reset to zero by PI "Select program". oldProgNetTime is set to zero if the currently selected pro‐
gram is edited. oldProgNetTime is not changed at the end of an ASUB or a ProgEvent. oldProgNetTime can only be reset
to zero by explicit writing of 0.0, writing other values is not permitted.
Return value Seconds
Addressing
1
oldProgNetTimeCounter (C, S) $AC_OLD_PROG_NET_TIME_COUNT

Modification counter for oldProgNetTime
oldProgNetTimeCounter is zero in the Power ON status. oldProgNetTimeCounter is always increased when $$oldProgNet‐
Time has been newly written. This enables the user to ensure that $$oldProgNetTime has been written. This means that,
if the user cancels the current program with reset, $$oldProgNetTime and ldProgNetTimeCounter remain unchanged.
Note: Two programs running consecutively can have identical runtimes and be correctly terminated. The user can then
only detect this by the changed oldProgNetTimeCounter.
Return value Modification counter
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
pCutInv (C, S) $AC_CUT_INV

Invert direction of spindle rotation tool
States that a turning tool is rotated against the machining plane
(typically through 180 degrees around the C axis with G18) such that the
direction of spindle rotation has to be inverted.
Return value FALSE, TRUE
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1

NC variables
pCutInv (C, S) $AC_CUT_INV

Addressing
1
Read access
pCutInvS (C, S)
Invert dir. of spindle rot. tool (block search)
States that a turning tool is rotated against the machining plane
(typically through 180 degrees around the C axis with G18) such that the
direction of spindle rotation has to be inverted.
For block search.
Return value FALSE, TRUE
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
1
Read access
pCutMod (C, S) $AC_CUTMOD

Last programmed value of CUTMOD
Reads the current valid value that was last programmed with the language command CUTMOD
(number of the tool carrier for which the cutting edge data modification is to be activated).
If the last programmed value was CUTMOD = -2 (activation with the currently active tool carrier with orientation capability),
the value -2 is not returned but the number of the active tool carrier with orientation capability at the time of programming.
Return value -2, 999999
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
1
Read access
pCutModS (C, S)
Last programmed value of CUTMOD (block search)
Reads the current valid value that was last programmed with the language command CUTMOD
(number of the tool carrier for which the cutting edge data modification is to be activated).
If the last programmed value was CUTMOD = -2 (activation with the currently active tool carrier with orientation capability),
the value -2 is not returned but the number of the active tool carrier with orientation capability at the time of programming.
For block search
Return value -2, 999999

NC variables
pCutModS (C, S)
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
1
Read access
pEgBc (C, S) $P_EG_BC[a]

EG block change criterion
Electronic gear:
Block change criterion. Important for EGON, EGONSYN
Return value 0: NOC Block change is performed immediately
1: IPOSTOP Block change is performed with setpoint side
synchronism
2: COARSE Block change is performed with "Synchronism coarse"
3: FINE Block change is performed with "Synchronism fine"
- TYPE_UWORD 3 0 3
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
pMthSDC (C, S) $P_MTHSDC

Master tool holder for cutting edge selection
Master tool holder no. or master spindle no. is determined with reference to the active tool for the next D offset selection.
This is important if the master spindle changes after the last tool change.
Return value >0 Successful read access
0 No master tool holder or no master spindle available.
The next D offset works with T0.
-1 TMMG not available
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 $$numMachAxes
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
pOffn (C, S) $P_OFFN

Offset normal
Last programmed offset normal
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Read access
pTCutMod (C, S) $P_AD[2]

Angle of rotation for edge position
Angle of rotation for modification of edge position and cutting direction
Return value Angle between 0 and 360 degrees
Degree TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0 360
Addressing
1
Read access
pTCutModS (C, S)
Angle of rotation for block search edge position
Angle of rotation for edge position and
cutting direction for block search
Return value Angle between 0 and 360 degrees
Addressing
1
Read access
pTc (C, S) $P_TC

Active tool carrier with orientation capability
The active orientatable toolholder
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
pTcAng (C, S) $P_TCANG[n]

Angles of axes for toolholders
The current angles of the two axes of an orientation-capable toolholder
Addressing
2
Read access
pTcDiff (C, S) $P_TCDIFF[n]

Angular difference between toolholder axes
The difference between the exact and the actually used
angles of the two axes of
an orientation-capable toolholder
Addressing
2
Read access
pTcNum (C, S) $P_TCNUM

Number of available tool carriers
Number of available orientable tool carriers in the channel
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
pTcSol (C, S) $P_TCSOL

Toolholder number of solutions
Number of solutions (configuration options for rotary
axes) on selection of an orientatable toolholder. The variable
value can be between 0 and 2, where 0 to 2 means either none,
1 solution or 2 solutions.

NC variables
pTcSol (C, S) $P_TCSOL

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
pTcStat (C, S) $P_TCSTAT

Tool carrier status
Specifies the status of an orientable tool carrier.
Return value The variable is bit-coded with the following meanings:
0x0001 The first rotary axis is available
0x0002 The second rotary axis is available
0x0004 The angles used for the calculation come from an orientation in the frame
direction
0x0008 The angles used for the calculation have been absolutely defined
0x0010 The polar axis angle is not defined in the case of orientation in the frame
direction
0x1000 Only the tool can be rotated (kinematic type T)

0x2000 Only the workpiece can be rotated (kinematic type P)
0x4000 Tool and workpiece can be rotated (kinematic type M)
The bits stated here are not currently assigned.

- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
pToolO (C, S) $P_TOOL_O

Tool orientation
Supplies the current tool orientation
in various coordinate systems:
Possible values of the line index:

1, 2, 3: Components of the vector in BCS
4, 5, 6: Components of the vector in PCS/WCS
7, 8, 9: Components of the vector in ENS
The orientation vector is normalized, i.e. it has the value 1.


NC variables
pToolO (C, S) $P_TOOL_O

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 -1 1
Addressing
9
Read access
paAccLimA (C, S) $PA_ACCLIMA[a]

Axial acceleration override: run in
Axial acceleration override in run in
Return value 1-200
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
paJerkLimA (C, S) $PA_JERKLIMA[a]

Axial jerk override: run in
Axial jerk override in run in
Return value 1-200
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
paVeloLimA (C, S) $PA_VELOLIMA[a]

Axial velocity override: run in
Axial velocity override in run in
Return value 1-200
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
actDLNumberS (C, S)
Alternative name: progDLNumberS
Active total offset for block search
Corresponds to actDLNumber for block search with calculation
Caution: This variable is not available for the Variable Service,
but only for logging in the case of block search events!.
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access
gccState (C, S) $PC_GCC_STATE

Status of the G code converter
The variable shows the internal status of the G code converter.
Status = 0 -> The G code converter is not selected.
Status = 1 -> The G code converter is selected by HMI, but a trace has not yet been generated.
Status = 2 -> The G code converter is active (after NC START), the trace is being output.
Status = 3 -> The G code converter is active but interrupted by the language command GCCDISABLE, there is no output
into the trace file.
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 3
Addressing
1
Read access
progDuploNumber (C, S)
Duplo number of programmed tool)
Duplo number of programmed tool (does not yet have to be active)
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
1

NC variables
progNetTimeTrigger (C, S) $AC_PROG_NET_TIME_TRIGGER

Trigger for time measurement
progNetTimeTrigger is used to selectively measure program sections. This means that writing progNetTimeTrigger ena‐
bles the program to switch time measurement on and off.
In order to exploit all trigger possibilities, certain values for progNetTimeTrigger are assigned a special function:
0 = Neutral: The trigger is not active, the value is taken from Reset with the Start key.
1 = Exit: Exits the measurement and copies $$actProgNetTime to $$oldProgNetTime. $$actProgNetTime is set to zero,
and then starts running again.
2 = Start: Starts the measurement and sets $$actProgNetTime to zero. $$oldProgNetTime is not changed.
3 = Stop: Stops the measurement, does not change $$oldProgNetTime, and holds $$actProgNetTime constant until con‐
tinue.
4 = Continue: Continuation of the measurement. This means that a measurement that has been stopped is resumed. $
$actProgNetTime continues to run. $$oldProgNetTime is not changed.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 4
Addressing
1
Read access
progStatus (C, S) DB21-30, DBX35.0 - DBX35.4 K1

Program status
Return value 1 = interrupted
2 = stopped
3 = in progress
4 = waiting
5 = aborted
- TYPE_UWORD
progTNumber (C, S)
Number of programmed tool
- TYPE_UWORD
progTNumberLong (C, S)
No. progr. tool for flat D-no. with max. 8 digits
Number of the programmed tool using flat D-numbers with up to 8 digits

NC variables
progTNumberLong (C, S)
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
progToolIdent (C, S)
Identifier programmed tool
Identifier of programmed tool (does not yet have to be active)
- TYPE_STRING "\0"
Addressing
1
progWaitForEditUnlock (C, S)
NCK is waiting for the release of an NC program
The variable is used for two possible applications:
1. Notification to HMI that an NC program is to be processed for which a program execution delay was activated by means
of the
PI service _N_F_MODE. This is only possible for files of the passive file system of the NCK.
2. Notification to HMI that an NC program is to be processed for which a WRITE lock was set.
This is only possible for files that are available on the CF, network drive or USB device and are processed in EES mode.
The variable contains the complete path name in both cases.

- TYPE_STRING 0
Addressing
1
Read access
protAreaCounter (C, S)
Protection zone modification counter
Counter is incremented by 1 every time a
protection zone (block PA) is modified

NC variables
protAreaCounter (C, S)
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
protocHmiEvent (C, S)
Activate event in preprocessing
Logging: When writing, the defined event is activated during preprocessing.
Return value 49: HMI_TRIG_1
50: HMI_TRIG_2
51: HMI_TRIG_3
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
1
protocUserActive (C, S) $MM_PROTOC_USER_ACTIVE

Logging: Active users
Logging: Displays active users
Return value 0: User inactive
1: User active
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
10
Read access
rapFeedRateOvr (C, S)
Rapid traverse override
% TYPE_DOUBLE

NC variables
remainDwellTime (C, S)
Remaining dwell time
Return value See $$timeOrRevolDwell
Addressing
1
Read access
reqParts (C, S) $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS

Workpiece requirement
Number of required workpieces (workpiece requirement):
The workpiece count at which the number of current
workpieces $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS is set to zero can be
defined in this counter.
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
rotSys (C, S) $AC_ROT_SYS

Orientation reference system
Reference system for orientation movements with cartesian manual traversal
Return value 0: Axis-specific manual traversal active
1: Cartesian manual traversal in basic coordinate system active
2: Cartesian manual traversal in workpiece coordinate system active
3: Cartesian manual traversal in tool coordinate system active
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 3
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
seruproMasterChanNo (C, S)
Block search waits for partner channel
The search type SERUPRO (search via program testing) may be
started simultaneously in several channels in order to start a channel grouping
correctly. A search target must be specified in one channel (master channel) in the grouping.
The other channels do not need a search target, they wait until they have reached a
stop condition and the master channel has reached the search target. These channels generally
stop at WAIT marks. The variable seruproMasterChanNo defines the master channel.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 $$numChannels
Addressing
1
seruproMasterNcuNo (C, S)
Partner channel NCU, block search waits
The search type SERUPRO (search via program testing) may be
started simultaneously in several channels in order to start a channel grouping
correctly. A search target must be specified in one channel (master channel) in the grouping.
The other channels do not need a search target, they wait until they have reached a
stop condition and the master channel has reached the search target. These channels generally
stop at WAIT marks. The variable seruproMasterChanNo defines the master channel.
seruproMasterNcuNo specifies the master channel in more detail if it is not on the active NCU.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 $MN_MM_LINK_NUM_O
F_MODULES
Addressing
1
simSpiDat (C, S)
Spindle data
The variable simSpiDat is a double array of data with the following structure:
Double spino ; Number of the spindle for which the event was triggered
Double masterSpiNo ; Number of the leading spindle
Double pSMode ; Programmed spindle mode
Double turnState ; Rotation state of the spindle: 0 = right, 1 = left, 2 = stop
Double coupPosOffset ; Position offset of an axis to the leading axis / leading spindle (actual value)

NC variables
simSpiDat (C, S)
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
5
Read access
simulationSupport (C, S)
simulationSupport
Block information for the support of the JobShop simulation
Return value Bit0: Change of the transformation in the curr. block
Bit1: Change of the frame in the curr. block
Bit2: Curr. block in an action block
Bit3: Curr. block in the last action block
Bit4: Curr. block has PTP active (as of 510600)

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
simulationSupportS (C, S)
Support of the JobShop simulation during search
Block information for the support of the JobShop simulation during search
Return value Bit0: -
Bit1: -
Bit2: -
Bit3: -
Bit4: Curr. block has PTP active
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
specParts (C, S) $AC_SPECIAL_PARTS

Number of special workpieces (user-defined)
Number of current workpieces as defined by user:
This counter enables the user to define his own
workpiece count. The counter is reset to zero automatically
only when the control system boots on defaults.

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
splitBlock (C, S) $AC_SPLITBLOCK

Identifies splitted blocks
Identifier of internally splitted blocks
Return value 0: A BLOCK programmed unchanged
(a BLOCK generated by the compressor is regarded as programmed BLOCK):
<>0: BLOCK was shortened or is an internally generated BLOCK; the following values are
possible:
1: It is an internally generated BLOCK or a shortened original BLOCK
3: It is the last block in a chain of internally generated
blocks or shortened original blocks.
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 2
Addressing
1
Read access
startLockState (C, S)
Status of the global start disable
Status of the global start disable.
Also see PI _N_STRTLK and _N_STRTUL.
Return value 0: No start disable
1: Start disable is switched on and program is not running
2: Start disable is switched on and program is running nevertheless
The NCK changes from 2->1 as soon as the program is stopped.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 2
Addressing

NC variables
startLockState (C, S)
1
Read access
startRejectCounter (C, S)
Counter for rejected NC starts
as soon as an NC start is rejected due to a global start disable (see _N_STRTLK),
program-specific start disable (see _N_F_STLO), or channel-specific
start disable (see _N_STRTLK).
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
stopCond (C, S)
Replaced by stopCondNew
Replaced by $$stopCondNew
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
stopCondNew (C, S)
Number of the stop state of the NC
Number of the NC stop state
More than one stop state can be active simultaneously.
The highest priority stop state appears below the first line, this is followed by those with lower priorities.
The documentation explains the meanings of the individual stop states.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$stopCondNum
Read access

NC variables
stopCondPar (C, S)
Replaced by stopCondParNew
Replaced by $$stopCondParNew
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access
stopCondParNew (C, S)
Stop state parameter(s)
Stop state parameter(s).
More than one stop state can be active simultaneously. The highest priority
stop state appears below the first line, this is followed by those with lower priorities.
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access
stopCondNum (C, S)
Number of active stop states
Number of active stop states.
Specifies the number of occupied lines in $$stopCond
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
stopCondChangeCounter (C, S)
Modification counter for stop states.
Modification counter for stop states.
Is incremented as soon as one of the stop states has changed.
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
stopCondTime (C, S)
Time stamp BCD for stop state
BCD time stamp for stop state.

- TYPE_DATETIME
Addressing
$$stopCondNum
Read access
stopCondParA (C, S)
ASCII stop state parameter(s)
Stop state parameter(s).
- TYPE_STRING
Read access
stopRunActive (C, S)
Stop run active
1 = active
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
stopRunCounter (C, S)
Modification counter for stop run
Modification counter for stop run.
This is always incremented when the NCK has stopped at a stop block.

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
suppProgFunc (C, S)
Suppression of language commands
Disabling of language commands
Return value Bit0 = 0: SBLOF command is active
Bit0 = 1: SBLOF command is disabled
- TYPE_UWORD Bit0 = 0
Addressing
1
syntaxCheckAlarmNo (C, S)
Alarm number during the syntax check
Alarm number in the case of a syntax error during the syntax check
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
syntaxCheckAlarmPara1 (C, S)
Parameter 1 for an alarm during the syntax check
Parameter 1 for an alarm in the case of a syntax error during the syntax check
- TYPE_STRING 0 0

NC variables
Addressing
1
Read access
- TYPE_STRING 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
- TYPE_STRING 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
- TYPE_STRING 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
syntaxCheckSeek (C, S)
Faulty line in the syntax check
Line number of the faulty line in the syntax check

NC variables
syntaxCheckSeek (C, S)
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
syntaxCheckStatus (C, S)
Status of the "Syntax check" function
Return value 0: Syntax check not active (initialization status)
1: Syntax check selected
2: Syntax check active
3: Syntax check stopped with alarm on account of system error
4: Syntax check terminated
5: Syntax check canceled
6: Syntax check canceled on account of errors
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 6
Addressing
1
Read access
threadPitch (C, S)
Current lead
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
threadPitchS (C, S)
Current lead during search run
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
timeOrRevolDwell (C, S)
Dwell time unit
Dwell time unit in seconds or spindle revolutions
Return value 0: $$cmdDwellTime and $$remainDwellTime in seconds
1: $$cmdDwellTime and $$remainDwellTime in spindle revolutions
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
1
Read access
timeS (C, S) $AC_TIMES

Time after a block change in seconds
Time after a block change between programmed blocks in seconds
Return value Each programmed block can be divided up into a chain of part blocks that are
processed one after the other.
O n l y with the 1st cycle of the 1st block of the chain, timeS is set to zero and
then counted up in seconds. Therefore, the variable enables time measurements
throughout the entire block chain.
Addressing
1
Read access
timeSC (C, S) $AC_TIMESC

Time after a block change in IPO cycles
Time after a block change between programmed blocks in IPO cycles
Return value Each programmed block can be divided up into a chain of part blocks that are
processed one after the other.
Only (!) with the 1st cycle of the 1st block of the chain, timeSC is set to zero and
then counted up in seconds. Therefore, the variable enables time measurements
throughout the entire block chain.
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing

NC variables
timeSC (C, S) $AC_TIMESC

1
Read access
toolCounter (C, S)
Change counter of the tool data in a channel
Counter of the changes of the tool data assigned to a channel.
The counter is incremented each time a tool data is changed.
All changes of tool data made by BTSS, part programs, INI files and by the Tool Management software are considered.
Tool data are tool compensations, grinding-specific tool parameters, OEM tool parameters and Tool Managment data in‐
cluding magazine data.
There is one exception: the present tool-in-use-time, since it is changed in each IPO cycle.

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
toolCounterC (C, S)
Modification counter for tool offsets
Counter for modifications to tool offset data assigned to the channel
(analog toolCounter).
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
toolCounterM (C, S)
Modification counter for magazine data
Counter for modifications to magazine data assigned to the channel
(analog toolCounter).
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables
toolCounterM (C, S)
1
Read access
toolHolderData (C, S) GETSELT, GETEXET

Current tool holder data
Data for each tool holder/spindle from the magazine configuration of the TOA which is assigned to the channel.
There is a set of numToolHolderParams parameters for each tool holder.

Currently there are the 3 parameters P1, P2 and P3.
There are numToolHolders tool holders. The number of tool holders in this list is solely a function of the
magazine configuration, and it does not change while an NC program runs.
- P1: THNo ToolHolderNumber / SpindleNumber
(In the language commands of the NC program, corresponds
to the address extension <n> from T<n>=... or M<n>=6 with explicit
notation; in the magazine configuration, corresponds to the
location type index of the associated buffer location of the
location type = spindle.)
- P2: SelTno T number of the selected tool with
reference to the tool holder / spindle with the number of THNo
(The same TNo would also return the language command GETSELT.)
The value 0 indicates that no tool is selected with
reference to the tool holder. For further behavior see the description of GETSELT.
- P3: ExeTno TNumber of the tool to be loaded / loaded with
reference to the tool holder / the spindle with the number THNo from
the point of view of the NC program.
When working without M6, the same TNumber is in SelTno and ExeTno.
(The same TNumber would also return the language command GETEXET.)
The value 0 indicates that no tool is to be loaded / is loaded
with reference to the tool holder. For further behavior see the description of GETEXET.
- P4: SelTNoBeforeSearchRun
During the search: TNummer of the selected tool with reference to the tool holder / spindle before the search,
after reaching the search target and a T programming for this tool holder: the same value from P2.
- P5: ExeTNoBeforeSearchRun
During the search: TNummer of the tool loaded with reference to the tool holder / spindle before the search,
after reaching the search target and a tool change for this tool holder: the same value from P3.
An array access is possible to toolHolderData, with which the data of all numToolHolders tool holders can be read at one
time.
If the flat D number is active, the value =0 is returned for all parameters.

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0

NC variables
toolHolderData (C, S) GETSELT, GETEXET

Addressing
$$numToolHolderParams * $$numToolHolders
Read access
toolholderOfDNo (C, S) $P_TH_OF_D

Spindle or tool number of the active D
Number of the tool holder or spindle on which the active tool is mounted, which contains the active D no.

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
totalParts (C, S) $AC_TOTAL_PARTS

Total of all machined workpieces
Total number of all machined workpieces:
This counter specifies the number of workpieces machined
since it was started. The counter is automatically
set to zero only if the control system boots on defaults.

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
transSys (C, S) $AC_TRANS_SYS

Translation reference system
Reference system for translation with cartesian manual traversal
Return value 0: Axis-specific manual traversal active
1: Cartesian manual traversal in basic coordinate system active
2: Cartesian manual traversal in workpiece coordinate system active
3: Cartesian manual traversal in tool coordinate system active
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 3
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
transfActive (C, S) DB21-30, DBX33.6 K1, M1

Transformation active
1 = active
- TYPE_UWORD
vaCcCompVal (C, S) $VA_CC_COMP_VAL[a,b]

OA compensation value
OA compensation value of the corresponding compile cycle
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaEgSyncDiff (C, S) $VA_EG_SYNCDIFF[a]

EG synchronism deviation
Electronic gear:
Synchronism deviation (actual values). The comparison between this value
and $MA_COUPLE_POS_TOL_... determines whether the appropriate
"Synchronism" VDI signal is set.
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaEgSyncDiffS (C, S) $VA_EG_SYNCDIFF_S[a]

Synchronous run difference with sign
Electronic gear:
Synchronous run difference (actual values) with sign.
Whether the corresponding VDI signal "synchronous run" is set depends upon the comparison of this value with
$MA_COUPLE_POS_TOL_....

NC variables
vaEgSyncDiffS (C, S) $VA_EG_SYNCDIFF_S[a]

fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
workPnameSubstitution (C, S)
External path for selected program
Path name defined by HMI on selection of a program or workpiece in /_N_EXT_DIR.
It is only used for execute from external, and then denotes the data source of the download.
HMI uses this path name in order to restore the program selection for execute from external after PowerOff.
The string must be terminated with "\0".
NCK does not use this path name. workPnameSubstitution is deleted on program selection in the passive file system
or on an EES drive.
Handling: workPnameSubstitution is written by the HMI on program selection for
execute from external. NCK stores this information persistently.
After PowerOff, the NCK deletes the reload buffer for execute from external, and selects _N_MPF0.
HMI restores on the basis of the information:
- _N_MPF0 is selected
- workPnameSubstitution is set
the selection for execute from external. With this program selection, the NCK
does not remove the SPARPI interrupt pointer.
- TYPE_STRING 0 0
Addressing
Read access
progDNumber (C, S)
Dummy - do not use!
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access
progDLNumber (C, S)
Dummy - do not use!

NC variables
progDLNumber (C, S)
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access
seruproActive (C, S)
Block search via program test is active
Block search via program test is active. That means that the NCK executes the
part of the program before the search target in program test mode.
Return value Bit0 = 1: Block search via program test is active
Bit1-n: Reserved for later expansions
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Read access
progUsekt (C, S)
Programmed value of the command $P_USEKT
Programmed value of the command $P_USEKT.
Bit-coded data for the programmed tool subgroup
available for the tool change.
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 0xF
Read access
acToolOAct (C, S) $AC_TOOL_O_ACT

Setpoint of the tool orientation
Supplies the setpoint of the current tool orientation
in various coordinate systems.


Addressing

NC variables
acToolOAct (C, S) $AC_TOOL_O_ACT

9
Read access
acToolOEnd (C, S) $AC_TOOL_O_END

End orientation
Supplies the end orientation of the current block


Addressing
9
Read access
acToolODiff (C, S) $AC_TOOL_O_DIFF

Remaining tool orientation angle
Supplies the remaining angle between the current vector and end vectors of the tool orientation block

1: Angle in BCS
2: Angle in PCS/WCS
3: Angle in ENS
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0 180
Addressing
3
Read access

NC variables
vcToolO (C, S) $VC_TOOL_O

Actual value of the tool orientation
Supplies the actual value of the current tool orientation


Addressing
9
Read access
vcToolODiff (C, S) $VC_TOOL_O_DIFF

Angle between setpoint and actual orientation
Supplies the angle between the setpoint vector and actual vector of the tool orientation in various coordinate systems:

1: Angle in BCS
2: Angle in PCS/WCS
3: Angle in ENS
Addressing
3
Read access
vcToolOStat (C, S) $VC_TOOLO_STAT

Status of the actual orientation
Supplies the status of the computation of the actual orientation
- TYPE_DWORD 0 -1 0
Read access

NC variables
vaSyncDiff (C, S) $VA_SYNCDIFF[]

Actual value synchronism difference
Actual value synchronism difference for all types of coupling
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaSyncDiff (C, S) $AA_SYNCDIFF[]

Setpoint synchronism difference
Setpoint synchronism difference for all types of coupling
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaSyncDiffStat (C, S) $VA_SYNCDIFF_STAT[]

Status of the actual value synchronism difference
Return value -4: Reserved
-3: No valid value in $VA_SYNCDIFF, tangential control
-2: No valid value in $VA_SYNCDIFF, master value coupling and simulated master value
-1: No valid value in $VA_SYNCDIFF
0: No valid value in $VA_SYNCDIFF, coupling not active
1: Valid value in $VA_SYNCDIFF
- TYPE_DWORD 0 -4 1
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
aaSyncDiffStat (C, S) $AA_SYNCDIFF_STAT[]

Status of setpoint synchronism difference
Return value -4: No valid value in $AA_SYNCDIFF, coupled motion from part program
-3: Reserved
-2: Reserved
-1: No valid value in $AA_SYNCDIFF
0: No valid value in $AA_SYNCDIFF, coupling not active
1: Valid value in $AA_SYNCDIFF
- TYPE_DWORD 0 -4 1
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
acToolRAct (C, S) $AC_TOOL_R_ACT

Setpoint of the tool rotation.
Setpoint of the tool rotation


Addressing
9
Read access

NC variables
acToolREnd (C, S) $AC_TOOL_R_END

End rotation vector of the current block
End rotation vector of the current block

The orientation vector is normalized, i.e. it has the absolute value 1.

Addressing
9
Read access
acToolRDiff (C, S) $AC_TOOL_R_DIFF

Remaining tool rotation angle
Angle remaining between the current and end rotation vectors of the tool orientation block in various coordinate systems:

1: Angle in BCS
2: Angle in PCS/WCS
3: Angle in ENS
Addressing
3
Read access

NC variables
vcToolR (C, S) $VC_TOOL_R

Actual value of tool rotation
Actual value of the tool rotation

The rotation vector is normalized, i.e. it has the value 1.

Addressing
9
Read access
vcToolRDiff (C, S) $VC_TOOL_R_DIFF

Angle bet. setpoint & actual tool rotation vectors
Angle between setpoint and actual tool rotation vectors in different coordinate systems:

1: Angle in BCS
2: Angle in PCS/WCS
3: Angle in ENS
Addressing
3
Read access
vcToolRStat (C, S) $VC_TOOLR_STAT

Status of the computation of the actual rotation
- TYPE_DWORD 0 -1 0
Addressing

NC variables
vcToolRStat (C, S) $VC_TOOLR_STAT

1
Read access
pToolRot (C, S) $P_TOOL_O_R

Current tool rotation
Current tool rotation

The rotation vector is normalized, i.e. it has the absolute value 1.

Addressing
9
Read access
searchRunMode (C, S)
Function with search run
Type of function in which search run has been integrated
Return value 1: Search run is used directly
2: Simulation search run
3: Execute program area
The user can preselect a program area via HMI with "Execute program area",
which he/she would like to execute "real" on the machine.
To do this, the NCK uses an internal block search to approach the start of the
program area (abbreviation: APb) correctly. Internal cancellation at the end of the program
area
(abbreviation: EPb) via reset.
0: Otherwise
- TYPE_UWORD 0 1 3
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
searchRunStatus (C, S)
Status of the search run
Return value 1: activeSearchRun
Simulation active, that is the NCK simulates the part program from the start
to the agreed search target (or APb) in order to find, among other things, the correct start‐
ing
position of the search target block.
2: targetFound
The search target has been found and the NCK is waiting for the Start button.
Simulation has finished.
3: activeAdaption
After the start, the NCK outputs action blocks which set the machine to
the search target (M± function output, spindle speeds) and, if applicable,
starts an ASUB in which the user uses the ASUB program to adapt the machine
to the part program situation in the target block.
(For example, a programmed tool is read and a tool-changing cycle
exchanges it with the current tool.) The NCK stops automatically after the
action blocks or after the ASUB with alarm 10208.
4: finishedAdaption
The NCK waits for the start.
5: activeStopRun
After the adaptation, the REPOS function goes to the target block, and then
the execution of the program is resumed. The NCK executes the program
area after the target block, but is still within the function Execute program area.
The blocks are scanned to see whether the end of the program area (EPb) could
already have been reached. The program is cancelled at EPb with reset
and searchRunStatus is cleared.
0: Otherwise
- TYPE_UWORD 0 1 5
Addressing
1
Read access
enableOvrRapidFactor (C, S)
Activate additional rapid traverse override
Activate additional rapid traverse override $SC_OVR_RAPID_FACTOR
Return value 0: not activated
1: activated
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1

NC variables
enableOvrRapidFactor (C, S)
Addressing
1
actWalimGroupNo (C, S) $AC_WORKAREA_CS_GROUP

Active working area group in the IPO
Active working area group in the IPO
Writing is only possible if the channel has been aborted or stopped
Return value 0: Not activated
n: $MC_MM_NUM_WORKAREA_CS_GROUPS
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 10
Addressing
1
acSafeSynaMem (C, S) $AC_SAFE_SYNA_MEM

Free Safety synchronized action elements
Free Safety synchronized action elements
The maximum number of elements is configured in $MC_MM_NUM_SAFE_SYNC_ELEMENTS
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
tOffL1L2L3 (C, S) $AC_TOFFL

Tool length offset TOFFL
Tool length offset programmed in coordinates of the tool length components L1/L2/L3.
fined
Addressing
3
Read access

NC variables
tOffLXYZ (C, S) $AC_TOFF

Tool length offset TOFFL in the WCS
Tool length offset TOFFL programmed in coordinates of the WCS.
fined
Addressing
3
Read access
acJogCircleSelected (C, S) $AC_JOG_CIRCLE_SELECTED

JOG in circles has been selected
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
1
Read access
tOffR (C, S) $AC_TOFFR

Tool radius offset TOFFR
Programmed tool radius offset.
fined
Addressing
1
Read access
simTolerance (C, S) keine

Simulation tolerance
The NCK simulation can run part programs at a higher speed (see PI _N_NCKMOD).
Only then is simTolerance evaluated and it ONLY affects geometry blocks that have not been programmed as circles or
straight lines.
These blocks are slowed down so that two successive interpolation points can be connected by a straight line.
This straight line deviates from the programmed contour by not more than 'simTolerance'.

NC variables
simTolerance (C, S) keine

incoapSize (C, S) $P_INCOAP_SIZE[]

Array size of the cutting generator parameters
Array size of the supply and return parameters of the COA application cutting generator
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
7
incoapB (C, S) $P_INCOAP_B

Boolean parameter(s) of the cutting generator
Boolean supply and return parameter(s) of the COA application cutting generator
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$incoapSize[1]
incoapC (C, S) $P_INCOAP_C

CHAR parameter(s) of the cutting generator
CHAR supply and return parameter(s) of the COA application cutting generator
Addressing
$$incoapSize[2]
incoapI (C, S) $P_INCOAP_I

INT parameter(s) of the cutting generator
INT supply and return parameter(s) of the COA application cutting generator
- TYPE_UDWORD 0

NC variables
incoapI (C, S) $P_INCOAP_I

Addressing
$$incoapSize[3]
incoapR (C, S) $P_INCOAP_R

DOUBLE parameter(s) of the cutting generator
DOUBLE supply and return parameter(s) of the COA application cutting generator
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$incoapSize[4]
incoapS16 (C, S) $P_INCOAP_S16[]

CHAR16 parameter(s) of the cutting generator
CHAR16 supply and return parameter(s) of the COA application cutting generator
- TYPE_STRING 0
Addressing
$$incoapSize[5]

- TYPE_STRING 0
Addressing
$$incoapSize[6]


NC variables

- TYPE_STRING 0
Addressing
$$incoapSize[6]
isoActHDNo (C, S) $P_ISO2_HNO[n],$P_ISO2_DNO,

$P_ISO3_NO
Active tool offset number in ISO mode
The following applies to rows 1- 4:
This value is only practical if ISO2 mode is permissible.
This value contains the H number of the tool length offsets in the 3 geometry dimensions in rows 1 - 3 and the D number
of the tool radius offset.
If H99 is programmed, then
all 3 geometry dimensions (=rows 1-3) have the value "-1"
the radius (= row 4) has the value "-1"
If H=D ($MN_EXTERN_TOOLPROG_MODE,Bit6=0), then these variables contain the last programmed D or H.
If an offset D > 1 is selected in Siemens mode, all rows have the value "-2".
If ISO2 mode cannot be activated ($MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM != 4), the variable has the value=-3.
The following applies to row 5:
This value is only practicable if ISO3 mode is permissible.
This value contains the current number of tool offsets in ISO3 mode.
If an offset D > 1 is selected in Siemens mode, the value "-2" is returned.
If ISO3 mode cannot be activated ($MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM != 5), the variable value =-3.
Return value -3: ISO2 or ISO3 mode inactive
-2: Siemens offset selected with D > 1.
-1: H99 programmed in ISO mode, Siemens offset D1 active
- TYPE_WORD 0
Addressing
5
Read access
toolCounterIso (C, S) keine

Modification counter for ISO tool offset data
Each change of a tool offset value for ISO2.2 and ISO3.2 modes is counted.
This is to enable the HMI to record data changes.
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing

NC variables
toolCounterIso (C, S) keine

1
Read access
actLanguage (C, S)
Active language mode
Return value 0: Siemens
1: ISO mode
2: Reserviert for later language expansions
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access
acPrepActLoad (C, S) $AC_PREP_ACT_LOAD

Current preprocessing run time
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
acPrepMaxLoad (C, S) $AC_PREP_MAX_LOAD

Longest preprocessing run time
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
acPrepMinLoad (C, S) $AC_PREP_MIN_LOAD

Shortest preprocessing run time
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
acPrepActLoadGross (C, S) $AC_PREP_ACT_LOAD_GROSS

Current preprocessing gross run time
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
acPrepMaxLoadGross (C, S) $AC_PREP_MAX_LOAD_GROSS

Longest preprocessing gross run time
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
acPrepMinLoadGross (C, S) $AC_PREP_MIN_LOAD_GROSS

Shortest preprocessing gross run time
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
acCTol (C, S) $AC_CTOL

Active contour tolerance
acCTol provides the contour tolerance for compressor and smoothing which was used to preprocess the current main run
block.
mm, inch, user defined TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
acOTol (C, S) $AC_OTOL

Active orientation tolerance
acOTol provides the orientation tolerance for compressor and smoothing which was used to preprocess the current main
run block.
Degree, user defined TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
acSTolF (C, S) $AC_STOLF

Active G00 tolerance factor
acSToIF indicates the G00 tolerance factor for compressor and smoothing with which the current main run block was pre‐
pared.
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
aaATol (C, S) $AA_ATOL

Active axis tolerance
aaATol provides the axis tolerance for compressor and smoothing, which was effective during preprocessing of the cur‐
rent main run block.
mm, inch, degree, user de‐ TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaFgref (C, S) $AA_FGREF

Active factor for rotary axis path
The variable provides the radius used by a rotary axis to contribute to the path travel. The default value is 180 mm/PI =
57,296 mm, which corresponds to a contribution of 1mm per degree.
For linear axes the variable always provides 1.

NC variables
aaFgref (C, S) $AA_FGREF

Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaFgroup (C, S) $AA_FGROUP

Influence of an axis on the path velocity
If the travel of an axis influences the path velocity in the current main run block (FGROUP), the variable provides value 1,
otherwise 0.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
acFgroupMask (C, S) $AC_FGROUP_MASK

Key of the path velocity axes
acFgroupMask bit-coded provides the channel axes which are to contribute to the path velocity
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 0xFFFF
Addressing
1
Read access
acIpoState (C, S) $AC_IPO_STATE

Active functions identification status
The variable provides selected information about whether certain
functions are active:
Bit 0: Free-form surface mode is active

Bit 1: Compressor active

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 0x0003

NC variables
acIpoState (C, S) $AC_IPO_STATE

Addressing
1
Read access
acFZ (C, S) $AC_FZ

Tooth feedrate, setpoint
Tooth feedrate, setpoint. The physical unit is defined in variable 'feedRateIpoUnit'.
fined
Read access
pOriSol (C, S) $P_ORI_SOL

Angle calc. status during orientation programming
Contains the number of solutions and additional status information for orientation programming. See also the documenta‐
tion for the corresponding system variables.
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Read access
pOriStat (C, S) $P_ORI_STAT

Status of orientation axes during orientation prog
Contains the status of the orientation axes during orientation programming. See also the documentation for the corre‐
sponding system variables.
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
2
Read access
pOriPos0 (C, S) $P_ORI_POS[0,n]

Angle of orientation axes (1st solution)
The angle of the orientation axes of the first (or single) solution during orientation programming.
Addressing

NC variables

2
Read access

Angle of orientation axes (2nd solution)
The angle of the orientation axes of the second solution during orientation programming.
Addressing
2
Read access
pOriDiff0 (C, S) $P_ORI_DIFF[0,n]

Angle diff. of orientation axes (1st solution)
The angle difference between the exact angles and those available in $P_ORI_ANG for the orientation axes of the first (or
single) solution during orientation programming.
The content of these variables can only be unequal to zero if the positions of the orientation axes are incremental (Hirth
coupling).
Addressing
2
Read access
pOriDiff1 (C, S) $P_ORI_DIFF[1,n]

Angle diff. of orientation axes (2nd solution)
The angle difference between the exact angles and those available in $P_ORI_ANG for the orientation axes of the second
solution during orientation programming.
The content of these variables can only be unequal to zero if the positions of the orientation axes are incremental (Hirth
coupling).
Addressing
2
Read access

NC variables
toolFrameState (C, S)
Info about tool orientation in the work
toolFrameState provides bit-coded information about whether the PI service _N_SETUDT with the function designations
12 and 13 can be activated in its current state and also specifies any parameters that may be required:
Bit 0 provides information about whether the NCK can generate a tool frame with PI service _N_SETUDT and function
designation 12 in its current state. Once the bit is set, the NCK receives information about the current tool orientation, i.e.
either a tool holder that can be oriented or an orientation transformation is active and the tool frame can be generated.
Bit 1 provides information about whether, in its current state, the NCK has stored data for the restoration of the program
environment (bit 1 = 1), which can be restored using PI service _N_SETUDT and function designation 13.
When bit 0 is set, bit 2 provides information about whether the tool axis corresponds to a geometry axis of the current
WCS:
Bit 2 = 0: The tool axis does not correspond to any geometry axes of the current WCS. In this case, bit 3 / bit 4 provide the
number of the geometry axis next to the tool axis. Bit 5 provides the retraction direction of this axis (plus/minus). This
information can be displayed by the HMI as a suggestion or default setting for the retraction axis.
Bit 2 = 1: The tool axis corresponds to a geometry axis of the current work. In this case bit 3 / bit 4 provide the number of
this geometry axis, and bit 5 provides its retraction direction (plus/minus).
Return value Bit 0: 0: PI service _N_SETUDT with function designation 12 disabled
1: PI service _N_SETUDT with function designation 12 enabled
Bit 1: 0: PI service _N_SETUDT with function designation 13 disabled
1: PI service _N_SETUDT with function designation 13 enabled
Bit 2 0: Tool axis does not correspond to any geometry axes
1: Tool axis corresponds to a geometry axis
Bit 3 / Bit 4:0: Function not active
1: Tool axis in the 1st geometry axis
2: Tool axis in the 2nd geometry axis
3: Tool axis in the 3rd geometry axis
Bit 5: 0: Retraction direction plus
1: Retraction direction minus
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 63
Addressing
1
Read access
pcTrafoRotChainIndex (C, S) $PC_TRAFO_ROT_CHAIN_INDEX

Index of the orientation axis in the kin. chain.
Images the indices of the orientation axes in the array $NT_ROT_AX_NAME onto the internal orientation axis sequence.
See also documentation of the associated system variables.

NC variables
pcTrafoRotChainIndex (C, S) $PC_TRAFO_ROT_CHAIN_INDEX

- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
2
Read access
pcTrafoRotChanAxIn (C, S) $PC_TRAFO_ROT_CHAN_AX_IN

Channel axis index of an orientation axis (int.).
Determines the channel axis index of the i-th orientation axis, where i is the index of this axis in the internal representation
of the kinematic chain.
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
2
Read access
pcTrafoRotChanAxEx (C, S) $PC_TRAFO_ROT_CHAN_AX_EX

Channel axis index of an orientation axis (ext.).
Determines the channel axis index of the i-th orientation axis, where i is the index of this axis in the external representa‐
tion of the kinematic chain (index of the entry in the array$NT_ROT_AX_NAME[n, i]).
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
2
Read access

NC variables
retractState (C, S)
Status information on JOG retract
Status information on the submode JOG retract
Return value Bit 0: 0: No retract data available; JOG retract cannot be activated
1: Retract data available; JOG retract can be activated with PI _N_RETRAC
Bit 1: 0: JOG retract submode is not active
1: JOG retract submode is active
Bit 3/2: 0: Function is not active
1: Retraction axis is 1st geometry axis according to $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_AS‐
SIGN_TAB
2: Retraction axis is 2nd geometry axis according to $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_AS‐
SIGN_TAB
3: Retraction axis is 3rd geometry axis according to $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_AS‐
SIGN_TAB
Bit 4/5: 0: Default tool (milling cutter)
1: Tap (tapping with G33/G331/G332 is active)
2: Drilling tool from the 200 group
Bit 6/7: Reserved
Bit 8/11: 0: No problem known
1: No tool selected
2: No retract tool selected (turning or grinding tool)
3: Tool offset is not active
4: Retraction axis does not exist
5: G63 block
6: Path motion not in direction of tool axis
7: Retract data not persistent due to $MN_MM_ACTFILESYS_LOG_FILE_MEM[1]=0
8: Retract data are not consistent
Bit 12/15: Reserved
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
pCutModK (C, S) $AC_CUTMODK

Last programmed value CUTMODK
Reads the currently valid value last programmed with the language command CUTMODK.
(Name of the orientation transformation defined by kinematic chains for which the edge data modification is to be activa‐
ted).
- TYPE_STRING "\0"

NC variables
pCutModK (C, S) $AC_CUTMODK

Addressing
1
Read access
pCutModKS (C, S)
Last programmed value CUTMODK (block search)
Reads the currently valid value last programmed with the language command CUTMODK.
(Name of the orientation transformation defined by kinematic chains for which the edge data modification is to be activa‐
ted).
- TYPE_STRING "\0"
Addressing
1
Read access
acTrafoName (C, S) $AC_TRAFO_NAME

Name of an active kinematic transformation
Reads the name of a currently active kinematic transformation.
If no transformation is active or if one transformation is active that has not been defined with kinematic chains, then this
variable receives a zero string.
- TYPE_STRING "\0"
Addressing
1
Read access
actToolGeoLength (C, S)
Geometry component of the active tool
Returns the length components of the geometry component of the active tool, that is the contribution of the components
$TC_DP3[..] - $TC_DP5[..] in different coordinate systems.
Both the component and the coordinate system are selected from the line index.
Three indices are required for each coordinate system (lengths L1, L2, L3).
The following assignment applies:
Line indices 1 - 3: Components in the workpiece coordinate system (PCS).
Line indices 4 - 6: Components in the basic coordinate system (BCS).
Line indices 7 - 9: Components in the machine coordinate system (MCS).
Line indices 10 - 12: Components in the tool coordinate system (TCS).
Line indices 13 - 15: Components in the settable zero system (SZS).

NC variables
actToolGeoLength (C, S)
Addressing
15
Read access
actToolGeoLengthWear (C, S)
Wear component of the active tool
Returns the components of the wear component of the tool length of the active tool, that is the contribution of the compo‐
nents $TC_DP12[..] - $TC_DP14[..] in different coordinate systems.
Addressing
15
Read access
actToolSumCorrLength (C, S)
Total offset of the active tool
Returns the components of the total offset of the active tool, that is the contribution of the components $TC_SCPx3[..] -
$TC_SCPx5[..] in different coordinate systems. The letter "x" in the components $TC_SCPx3[..] etc. stands for the DL
number.

NC variables
actToolSumCorrLength (C, S)
Addressing
15
Read access
actToolAdapterBaseLength (C, S)
Adapter or base dimension of the active tool.
Returns the components of the adapter or base dimension of the active tool, that is the contribution of the components
$TC_ADPT1[..] - $TC_ADPT3[..] or $TC_DP21[..] - $TC_DP233[..] in different coordinate systems.
The adapter and base dimension are mutually exclusive. This means that only one of these two components can contrib‐
ute a value unequal to zero to the tool length.
Addressing
15
Read access
actToolEntryCorrLength (C, S)
Setup offset of the active tool
Returns the components of the total offset of the active tool, that is the contribution of the components $TC_ECPx3[..] -
$TC_ECPx5[..] in different coordinate systems. The letter "x" in the components $TC_SCPx3[..] etc. stands for the DL
number.

NC variables
actToolEntryCorrLength (C, S)
Addressing
15
Read access
actToolToolCarrierLength (C, S)
Contribution of tool carrier to the tool length
Returns the components of the contribution of the orientable tool carrier (ToolCarrier) to the length of the active tool in
different coordinate systems.
Addressing
15
Read access
actToolTotalLength (C, S)
Total length of the active tool
Returns the components of the total effective length of the active tool in different coordinate systems.
Addressing
15
Read access

NC variables
acToolOCorr (C, S) $AC_TOOL_O_CORR

Setpoint of the orientation with overlays
Supplies the setpoint of the current tool orientation incl. overlays


Addressing
9
Read access
acToolRCorr (C, S) $AC_TOOL_R_CORR

Setpoint of rotation with overlays
Supplies the setpoint of the current rotation vector of the tool orientation incl. overlays


Addressing
9
Read access

NC variables
acToolOCorrD (C, S) $AC_TOOL_O_CORRD

Overlaid orientation
Supplies the setpoint of the current overlay of the tool orientation

This vector represents the difference between the two vectors acToolOCorr and acToolOAct
Addressing
9
Read access
acToolRCorrD (C, S) $AC_TOOL_R_CORRD

Overlaid rotation of the orientation
Supplies the setpoint of the current overlay of the rotation of the tool

This vector represents the difference between the two vectors acToolRCorr and acToolRAct
Addressing
9
Read access
startLockCounter (C, S)
Start counter for channel-specific start disable
as soon as an NC start is activated with a set channel-specific start disable
(see _N_STRTLK).

NC variables
startLockCounter (C, S)
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
pCutModKA (C, S) $AC_CUTMODKA

CUTMODK active
Cutter position modification for a transformation defined with kinematic chains is active.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
1
Read access
pCutModKAS (C, S) $P_CUTMODKA

CUTMODK active (block search)
Cutter position modification for a transformation defined with kinematic chains is active.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
1
Read access
acMToolLengthIndex (C, S) $AC_M_TOOL_LENGTH_INDEX

Assign. tool length components for milling tools
The variable returns the number of the tool length components (1, 2 or 3 corresponding to the length components L1, L2,
L3) for milling tools, which is assigned to the geometry axis that was transferred as an index.
In this context, milling tools are all tools with a tool type that does not lie between 400 and 599.
The assignment does not take into account any rotations (e.g. by kinematic transformations) or frames. It depends on the
active plane and the setting data SD42950 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE and SD42940 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_CONST.
If the tool length component is active with a negative sign, the index is output with a negative sign. This can be the case if
the hundreds digit of setting data SD42940 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_CONST equals 1.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 -3 3
Addressing

NC variables
acMToolLengthIndex (C, S) $AC_M_TOOL_LENGTH_INDEX

3
Read access
acMToolLengthIndexS (C, S) $P_M_TOOL_LENGTH_INDEX

Assign. lngth comps f. milling tool (block search)
L3) for milling tools, which is assigned to the geometry axis that was transferred as an index.
In this context, milling tools are all tools with a tool type that does not lie between 400 and 599.
active plane and the setting data SD42950 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE and SD42940 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_CONST.
the hundreds digit of setting data SD42940 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_CONST equals 1.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 -3 3
Addressing
3
Read access
acTToolLengthIndex (C, S) $AC_T_TOOL_LENGTH_INDEX

Assign. tool length components for turning tools
L3) for turning and grinding tools, which is assigned to the geometry axis that was transferred as an index.
In this context, turning and grinding tools are all tools with a tool type that lies between 400 and 599.
active plane and the setting data SD42950 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE, SD42940 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_CONST and
SD42942 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_CONST_T.
the hundreds digit of setting data SD42940 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_CONST or the hundreds digit of setting data
SD42942 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_CONST_T equals 1.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 -3 3
Addressing
3
Read access

NC variables
acTToolLengthIndexS (C, S) $P_T_TOOL_LENGTH_INDEX

Assign. lngth comps f. turning tool (block search)
L3) for turning and grinding tools, which is assigned to the geometry axis that was transferred as an index.
In this context, turning and grinding tools are all tools with a tool type that lies between 400 and 599.
active plane and the setting data SD42950 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE, SD42940 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_CONST and
SD42942 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_CONST_T.
SD42942 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_CONST_T equals 1.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 -3 3
Addressing
3
Read access
acActToolLengthIndex (C, S) $AC_ACT_TOOL_LENGTH_INDEX

Assignment of length components for active tool
L3) of the active tool, which is assigned to the geometry axis that was transferred as an index.
type of active tool, the active plane, any active adapter transformation and the setting data
SD42950 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE, SD42940 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_CONST and
SD42942 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_CONST_T. Active mirrorings of a frame can influence the output value if setting data
SD42900 $SC_MIRROR_TOOL_LENGTH, is set, see below.
SD42942 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_CONST_T equals 1, or if a mirroring of the relevant axis is active on account of setting
data $SC_MIRROR_TOOL_LENGTH. If both causes are active simultaneously, the resulting sign is positive once more.
If no tool is active, the value 0 is returned.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 -3 3
Addressing
3
Read access

NC variables
acActToolLengthIndexS (C, S) $P_ACT_TOOL_LENGTH_INDEX

Length component assignment for active tool (SSL)
L3) of the active tool, which is assigned to the geometry axis that was transferred as an index.
type of active tool, the active plane, any active adapter transformation and the setting data
SD42950 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE, SD42940 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_CONST and
SD42942 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_CONST_T. Active mirrorings of a frame can influence the output value if setting data
SD42900 $SC_MIRROR_TOOL_LENGTH, is set, see below.
SD42942 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_CONST_T equals 1, or if a mirroring of the relevant axis is active on account of setting
data $SC_MIRROR_TOOL_LENGTH. If both causes are active simultaneously, the resulting sign is positive once more.
If no tool is active, the value 0 is returned.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 -3 3
Addressing
3
Read access
acInKeyG (C, S)
Read grinding input (PLC->NCK)
Grinding: returns the current value of the relevant grinding input.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
8
Read access
acInKeyGEnable (C, S)
Activate grinding input
Grinding: indicates whether the relevant grinding input has been activated.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
8
Read access

NC variables
acInKeyGIsEnable (C, S)
Is the grinding input active?
Grinding: indicates whether the relevant grinding input is active.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
8
Read access
acInKeyGRunIn (C, S)
Read grinding input (PLC->NCK)
Grinding: returns the current value of the relevant grinding input (PLC)
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
8
Read access
acInKeyGRunOut (C, S)
Read grinding input (NCK->PLC)
Grinding: returns the current value of the relevant grinding input (NCK)
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
8
Read access
chanStartLockState (C, S)
Status of the channel-specific start disable
Status of the channel-specific start disable.
Also see PI _N_STRTLK and _N_STRTUL.
Return value 0: No start disable
1: Start disable is activated
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1

NC variables
chanStartLockState (C, S)
Addressing
1
Read access
acTrafoCorrElemP0 (C, S) $AC_TRAFO_CORR_ELEM_P[0,n]

Correction element with index 0 in the part chain.
Correction element in the section including the index 0 in the part chain of an active orientation transformation.
Addressing
3
Read access

Addressing
3
Read access

Addressing
3
Read access


NC variables

Addressing
3
Read access
acTrafoCorrElemT0 (C, S) $AC_TRAFO_CORR_ELEM_T[0,n]

Correction element with index 0 in the tool chain.
Correction element in the section with the index 0 in the tool chain of an active orientation transformation.
Addressing
3
Read access

Addressing
3
Read access

Addressing
3
Read access


NC variables

Addressing
3
Read access
acTrafoOriaxDirP0 (C, S) $AC_TRAFO_ORIAX_DIR_P[0,n]

Orient. axis direction with index 0 in part chain.
Direction vector of the orientation axis with the index 0 in the part chain of an active orientation transformation.
Addressing
3
Read access

Addressing
3
Read access

Addressing
3
Read access

NC variables
acTrafoOriaxDirT0 (C, S) $AC_TRAFO_ORIAX_DIR_T[0,n]

Orientation direction index 0 in tool chain.
Direction vector of the orientation axis with the index 0 in the tool chain of an active orientation transformation.
Addressing
3
Read access

Addressing
3
Read access

Addressing
3
Read access
acTrafoOriaxLoc (C, S) $AC_TRAFO_ORIAX_LOC

Position of an orientation axis in the kin. chain.
The variable supplies the decimal-coded index of an orientation axis in the kinematic chain of an orientation transforma‐
tion. The ten's place designates the part chain in which the orientation axis is included (0: Part chain; 1: Tool chain) and
the unit's place the axis index when counting from the start to the end of the chain.
- TYPE_DWORD -1 -3 12
Addressing

NC variables
acTrafoOriaxLoc (C, S) $AC_TRAFO_ORIAX_LOC

$$numMachAxes
Read access
acTrafoSectionP0 (C, S) $AC_TRAFO_SECTION_P[0,n]

Section with the index 0 in the part chain.
Section with the index 0 in the part chain of an active orientation transformation.
Addressing
3
Read access

Addressing
3
Read access

Addressing
3
Read access


NC variables

Addressing
3
Read access
acTrafoSectionT0 (C, S) $AC_TRAFO_SECTION_T[0,n]

Section with the index 0 in the tool chain.
Section with the index 0 in the tool chain of an active orientation transformation.
Addressing
3
Read access

Addressing
3
Read access

Addressing
3
Read access


NC variables

Addressing
3
Read access
actGrindingFrameIndex (C, S) $P_GFRNUM

Index of the actively set grinding frame
Index of the actively set grinding frame. A grinding data management frame becomes an active grinding frame when exe‐
cuting GFRAME0 to GFRAME100.
Return value 0 = GFRAME0 = No frame selected
1 = GFRAME1
to
100 = GFRAME100
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access
progEvent (C, S)
Active prog. events
Return value The data is bit-coded, so that when required, also individual states
can be masked or evaluated separately (bits that are not listed supply a value of 0)
Bit0 = 1: start
Bit1 = 1: M30
Bit2 = 1: Reset
Bit3 = 1: Power-On
Bit4 = 1: Search
Bit5 = 1: Safety
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access

NC variables
acSynaState (C, S) $AC_SYNA_STATE

Status of a synchronized action
The status of a synchronized action can be read using the variable. The line index is the ID of the modal or static
synchronized action, for which the status should be read.
Return value The data is bit-coded, so that when required, also individual states can be
masked or separately evaluated (bits that are not listed supply a value of 0)
Bit 0 = 0: No lock
Bit 0 = 1: PLC or synchronize actions are locked
Bit 1 = 0: PLC is not locked
Bit 1 = 1: PLC is locked
Bit 2 = 0: Synchronized action is not locked
Bit 2 = 1: Synchronized action is locked
- TYPE_UDWORD
Read access
acMeasOriwks (C, S) $AC_MEAS_ORIWKS

Transformation behavior of the measuring interface
The variable serves to define the frame transformation behavior of the measuring interface in respect of orientation axis
coordinates.
Return value 0: Orientation axis coordinates are transformed like ORIMKS
1: Orientation axis coordinates are transformed like ORIWKS
2: The frame transformation of the orientation axis coordinates depends on the active G
code ORIMKS or ORIWKS.
- TYPE_DWORD 0 2
Addressing
1
pcTcarrOffset (C, S) $PC_TCARR_OFFSET

An offset vector of the active tool carrier
A maximum of 4 offset vectors (l1 to l4) are defined for an active tool carrier. With this OPI variable, the vector compo‐
nents of the vector can be read out.
If no tool carrier is active, each read access returns the value 0.
mm, inch, degree, user de‐ TYPE_DOUBLE 0 -DBL_MAX DBL_MAX
fined
Addressing

NC variables
pcTcarrOffset (C, S) $PC_TCARR_OFFSET

12
Read access
pcTcarrAxVect (C, S) $PC_TCARR_AX_VECT

An axis vector of the active tool carrier
A maximum of 2 axis vectors (v1 to v2) are defined for an active tool carrier. With this OPI variable, the vector compo‐
nents of the vector can be read out.
fined
Addressing
6
Read access
pcTcarrAxOffset (C, S) $PC_TCARR_AX_OFFSET

One axis offset of the active tool carrier
A maximum of 2 axis offsets are defined for an active tool carrier. With this OPI variable, the rotary axis positions can be
read out with initial setting.
fined
Addressing
2
Read access
drawPosTriggerTime (C, S) keine

Time window for logging event DRAW_POS
For very long movements or with stopped axes, the logging event DRAW_POS should nevertheless trigger now and again
A specification of 0[s] deactivates the function.
After control power on, a trigger time of 0.3[s] is preset.
drawPosTriggerTime replaces the machine data 10690 DRAW_POS_TRIGGER_TIME
(Reserved for the SIEMENS application Simultaneous recording)

NC variables
drawPosTriggerPath (C, S) keine

Path length for logging event DRAW_POS
For very long movements, the logging event DRAW_POS should trigger at the latest after this specified path length
A specification of 0.0[mm] deactivates the function.
After control power on, a path length of 0.0[mm] is preset.
newMotSeqLength (C, S) keine

Path length for logging event NEW_MOT_SEQ
For path lengths less than or equal to newMotSeqLength, the logging event NEW_MOT_SEQ
triggers instead of the possible events NEW_MOT_LIN, NEW_MOT_CIRCLE or NEW_MOT_COMPLEX.
A specification of 0.0[mm] deactivates the function.
After control power on, a path length of 0.0[mm] is preset.
pcTrafoNum (C, S) $PC_TRAFO_NUM

Transformation number
If a conventionally defined transformation is active (in other words, not defined with kinematic chains), the variable con‐
tains the number of the actual transformation data record (the number n in the machine data $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_n).
If a transformation defined with kinematic chains is active, the variable contains the number of the $NT data record with an
offset of 1000, this means that the first transformation returns the value 1001.
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
acToolOCorrDir (C, S) $AC_TOOL_O_CORR_DIR

Overlay of the tool orientation
Returns the direction vector of the plane between the programmed setpoint orientation and the current orientation with
overlays.

1, 2, 3: Components of the vector in the BCS
4, 5, 6: Components of the vector in the PCS/WCS
7, 8, 9: Components of the vector in the ENS
This direction vector is scaled, this means it has the value 1.

Addressing
9
Read access
acToolOCorrAngle (C, S) $AC_TOOL_O_CORR_ANGLE

Overlay of the tool orientation (angle).
Returns the angle in degrees between the programmed setpoint orientation and the current orientation with overlays.
Addressing
1
Read access
acToolRCorrDir (C, S) $AC_TOOL_R_CORR_DIR

Overlay of the tool rotation
Returns the direction vector of the plane between the programmed rotation of the orientation and the current rotation of
the orientation with overlays.
in various coordinate systems (only relevant with 6-axis kinematics).

1, 2, 3: Components of the vector in the BCS
4, 5, 6: Components of the vector in the PCS/WCS
7, 8, 9: Components of the vector in the ENS
This direction vector is scaled, this means it has the value 1.

NC variables
acToolRCorrDir (C, S) $AC_TOOL_R_CORR_DIR

Addressing
9
Read access
acToolRCorrAngle (C, S) $AC_TOOL_R_CORR_ANGLE

Overlay of the tool rotation (angle).
Returns the angle in degrees between the programmed rotation of the orientation and the current rotation of the orienta‐
tion with overlays.
Addressing
1
Read access
selectedAsup (C, S)
Assignment of NC program to interrupt channel
Returns the assigned NC program (interrupt routine or ASUB) as complete path name for an interrupt channel via PI
_N_ASUP__ or via part program command SETINT
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
32
Read access
Channel-specific setting data
CONTPREC (C, SE) SD 42450: $SC_CONTPREC

SD 42450: $SC_CONTPREC
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access

NC variables
COUPLE_RATIO_1 (C, SE) SD 42300: $SC_COUPLE_RATIO_1

SD 42300: $SC_COUPLE_RATIO_1
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
CRIT_SPLINE_ANGLE (C, SE) SD 42470: $SC_CRIT_SPLINE_ANGLE

SD 42470: $SC_CRIT_SPLINE_ANGLE
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
CUTCOM_G40_STOPRE (C, SE) SD 42490: $SC_CUTCOM_G40_STOPRE

SD 42490: $SC_CUTCOM_G40_STOPRE
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
EXT_PROG_PATH (C, SE) SD 42700: $SC_EXT_PROG_PATH

SD 42700: $SC_EXT_PROG_PATH
- TYPE_STRING
Read access
FRAME_OFFSET_INCR_PROG (C, SE) SD 42440: $SC_FRAME_OFF‐

SET_INCR_PROG
SD 42440: $SC_FRAME_OFFSET_INCR_PROG
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
IS_SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL (C, SE) SD 42502: $SC_IS_SD_MAX_PATH_AC‐

CEL
SD 42502: $SC_IS_SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL

NC variables
IS_SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL (C, SE) SD 42502: $SC_IS_SD_MAX_PATH_AC‐

CEL
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
IS_SD_MAX_PATH_JERK (C, SE) SD 42512:

$SC_IS_SD_MAX_PATH_JERK
SD 42512: $SC_IS_SD_MAX_PATH_JERK
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
JOG_FEED_PER_REV_SOURCE (C, SE) SD 42600:

$SC_JOG_FEED_PER_REV_SOURCE
SD 42600: $SC_JOG_FEED_PER_REV_SOURCE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MDD_DRY_RUN_FEED (C, SE) SD 42100: $SC_MDD_DRY_RUN_FEED

Alternative name: DRY_RUN_FEED
Dry run feedrate
fined
MDD_THREAD_START_ANGLE (C, SE) SD 42000:

$SC_MDD_THREAD_START_ANGLE
Alternative name: THREAD_START_ANGLE
Starting angle for thread
Degree TYPE_DOUBLE
MINFEED (C, SE) SD 42460: $SC_MINFEED

SD 42460: $SC_MINFEED
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access

NC variables
NIBPUNCH_PRE_START_TIME (C, SE) SD 42402: $SC_NIB‐

PUNCH_PRE_START_TIME
SD 42402: $SC_NIBPUNCH_PRE_START_TIME
Read access
PUNCH_DWELLTIME (C, SE) SD 42400: $SC_PUNCH_DWELLTIME

SD 42400: $SC_PUNCH_DWELLTIME
Read access
SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL (C, SE) SD 42500: $SC_SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL

SD 42500: $SC_SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
SD_MAX_PATH_JERK (C, SE) SD 42510: $SC_SD_MAX_PATH_JERK

SD 42510: $SC_SD_MAX_PATH_JERK
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
SPIND_ASSIGN_TAB (C, SE) SD 42800: $SC_SPIND_ASSIGN_TAB

SD 42800: $SC_SPIND_ASSIGN_TAB
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access
STOP_CUTCOM_STOPRE (C, SE) SD 42480: $SC_STOP_CUT‐

COM_STOPRE
SD 42480: $SC_STOP_CUTCOM_STOPRE

NC variables
STOP_CUTCOM_STOPRE (C, SE) SD 42480: $SC_STOP_CUT‐

COM_STOPRE
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
TOOL_OFFSET_INCR_PROG (C, SE) SD 42442: $SC_TOOL_OFF‐

SET_INCR_PROG
SD 42442: $SC_TOOL_OFFSET_INCR_PROG
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
3.2.3.20 SEGA: Extended state in the WCS
All status data that are dependent on machine movement and specified in the workpiece coordinate system are
combined in module SGA. Supplementary information can be found in module SEGA. The individual variables
are defined as arrays where the line index is the number of the axis (assigned to the current channel).The varia‐
ble "name" in module SGA with the line index in question identifies the axis.
The assignment of the line indices in modules SGA and SEGA is identical.
With SW 5.2 and later, OPI modules SGA and SEGA can be addressed via the geo-axis no. instead of via the
channel axis no.:
Line index 1001: 1st geo-axis
Line index 1002: 2nd geo-axis
Line index 1003: 3rd geo-axis
The number of channel axes (geometry, special axes and spindles) can be found in "$$numMachAxes" in mod‐
ule Y in area C.
aaDelt (C, SEGA) $AA_DELT[x] x = Axis

Stored axial dist.-to-go in WCS after DELDTG
Stored axial distance-to-go in the WCS after axial delete-distance-to-go DELDTG(axis) for synchronous actions
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
aaDtbw (C, SEGA) $AA_DTBW[x] x = Aaxis

Axial distance from beginning of block in the WCS
Axial distance from the beginning of the block in the WCS for positioning and synchronous axes for synchronous motion
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaDtepw (C, SEGA) $AA_DTEPW[x] x = Axis

Axial dist.-to-go for infeed during oscill. in WCS
Axial distance-to-go for infeed during oscillation in the WCS (Note: for SYNACT only)
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaDtew (C, SEGA) $AA_DTEW[x] x = Axis

Axial distance to the end of block in the WCS
Axial distance to the end of the block in the WCS for positioning and synchronous axes for synchronous actions
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaDtsb (C, SEGA) $AA_DTSB

Path from the motion starting point in the BCS
fined

NC variables
aaDtsb (C, SEGA) $AA_DTSB

Addressing
numMachAxes
Read access
aaDtsw (C, SEGA) $AA_DTSW

Path from the motion starting point in the WCS
fined
Addressing
numMachAxes
Read access
aaIb (C, SEGA) $AA_IB

BCS setpoint
Current BCS setpoint of an axis
fined
Addressing
numMachAxes
Read access
aaIbCorr (C, SEGA) $AA_IB_CORR

BCS setpoint value including override components
Current BCS setpoint value of an axis including override components
fined
Addressing
numMachAxes
Read access
aaIwCorr (C, SEGA) $AA_IW_CORR

WCS setpoint value including override components
Current WCS setpoint value of an axis including override components

NC variables
aaIwCorr (C, SEGA) $AA_IW_CORR

fined
Addressing
numMachAxes
Read access
aaMw1 (C, SEGA) $AA_MW1[Achse]

Access meas. result trigger event 1 in WCS
Access to measurement result of trigger event 1 in the WCS
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes

fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes

fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes

NC variables

fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
aaMw (C, SEGA) $AA_MW[x] x = Axis

Latched probe position retransformed in the WCS
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
aaTOff (C, SEGA) $AA_TOFF[ ]

Value of tthe superimposition in the tool directio
Value of the superimposed motions which have been retracted in the individual tool directions via $AA_TOFF[ ]

Addressing
1000 + $$numGeoAxes
aaTOffLimit (C, SEGA) $AA_TOFF_LIMIT[ ]

Limiting value achieved via $AA_TOFF[ ]
Limiting value of the superimposed motion has been achieved in the tool direction via $AA_TOFF[ ]
Return value 0 : Limiting value not achieved

1 : Limiting value achieved in positive direction
11 : Limiting value achieved in negative direction

NC variables
aaTOffLimit (C, SEGA) $AA_TOFF_LIMIT[ ]

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 11
Addressing
1000 + $$numGeoAxes
Read access
aaTOffPrepDiff (C, SEGA) $AA_TOFF_PREP_DIFF[ ]

Difference value main run to run in of $AA_TOFF[ ]
Difference between the current value of $AA_TOFF[] and the value as the current block was prepared.

Addressing
1000 + $$numGeoAxes
Read access
aaTOffVal (C, SEGA) $AA_TOFF_VAL[ ]

Cumulative value of superimposition in the tool di
Integrated value of the superimposed motions which have been retracted in the individual tool directions via $AA_TOFF[ ]

Addressing
1000 + $$numGeoAxes
Read access
aaVactW (C, SEGA) $AA_VACTW[X]

Axis veloc. in workpiece coordinates
Axis velocity in workpiece coordinate system
mm/min, inch/min, user de‐ TYPE_DOUBLE 0.0
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
acRetpoint (C, SEGA) $AC_RETPOINT[x] x = Axis

Return point on the contour for repositioning
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
actDistToGoEns (C, SEGA)

Distance-to-go in the SZS
Distance-to-go in the SZS based on the programmed position
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
actFeedRate (C, SEGA) S5

Actual value of axis-specific feedrate
Actual value of axis-specific feedrate, if the axis is a positioning axis.
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
actFeedRateIpo (C, SEGA)

$$/C/SEGA/actFeedRate with revolutional feedrate
Corresponds to $$/C/SEGA/actFeedRate taking into account the
revolutional feedrate.
For geometry axes the value is reported in the MCS, i.e. related to the geometry axis and not to the machine axis.
Associated unit see: $$axisFeedRateIpoUnit
fined

NC variables
actFeedRateIpo (C, SEGA)

Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
actProgPosBKS (C, SEGA)

Actual value in basic coordinate system
Actual value of geometry and orientation axes in basic coordinate system
mm, inch, degree, user de‐ TYPE_DOUBLE 0.0
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
actToolBasPosBN (C, SEGA) $AA_IBN[x] x=Axis

Actual tool base position
Actual tool base position in relation to basic zero point
(SGA:$$/C/SGA/actToolBasePos without progr. frame and without settable frames)
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
actToolBasPosBNDiam (C, SEGA)

$$actToolBasPosBN with diameter conv.
Corresponds to $$actToolBasPosBN with diameter conversion
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
actToolBasPosEN (C, SEGA) $AA_IEN[x] x = Axis

Base position of the active tool rel. to workpiece
Base position of the active tool relative to the workpiece zero point
(SGA:$$/C/SGA/actToolBasePos without programmed frame)
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
actToolBasPosENitc (C, SEGA)

corresponds to $$actToolBasPosEN Mode=1
corresponds to $$actToolBasPosEN with $DISPLAY_MODE_POSITION=1
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
actToolBasPosENjmp (C, SEGA)

corresponds to $$actToolBasPosEN Mode=0
corresponds to $$actToolBasPosEN with $DISPLAY_MODE_POSITION=0
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
actToolBasePosBasic (C, SEGA)

Base position of the active tool
Base position of the active tool in the base system (inch/metrical)
fined

NC variables
actToolBasePosBasic (C, SEGA)

Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
actToolBasePosBasicDiam (C, SEGA)

$$actToolBasePosBasic with diameter conv.
Corresponds to $$actToolBasePosBasic with diameter conversion
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
actToolBasePosDiam (C, SEGA)

$$/C/SGA/actToolBasePos with diameter conv.
Corresponds to $$/C/SGA/actToolBasePos with diameter conversion
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
actToolEdgeCenterPosEns (C, SEGA)

Actual position value in relation to WOS frame
Actual position value in relation to the WOS frame as center-point path, i.e. with tool length but without tool radius
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
axisActiveInChan (C, SEGA)

Axis active
Flag indicating whether axis is active in this channel
1 = active
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
axisFeedRateIpoUnit (C, SEGA)

$$/C/SEGA/axisFeedRateUnit with revolut. feedrate
Corresponds to $$/C/SEGA/axisFeedRateUnit with revolutional feedrate
1 = mm/rev.
2 = inch/min
3 = inch/rev.
4 = deg./min
5 = deg./rev.
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
axisFeedRateUnit (C, SEGA)

Unit of axial feedrate
1 = inch/min
2 = degree/min
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes

NC variables
cmdFeedRate (C, SEGA)

Desired value of axis-specific feedrate
Desired value of axis-specific feedrate for a positioning axis.
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
cmdFeedRateIpo (C, SEGA)

$$/C/SEGA/cmdFeedRate with revolutional feedrate
Corresponds to $$/C/SEGA/cmdFeedRate taking into account the revolutional feedrate.
Associated unit see: $$axisFeedRateIpoUnit
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
cmdToolBasPosENS (C, SEGA)

Workpiece coordinate system without progr. frame
Workpiece coordinate system without programmable frame and cycles frame (see also MD24030 MC_FRAME_ACS_SET)
Caution: If block search is active, only valid in a block search event of the logging function.
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
cmdToolEdgeCenterPosEnsS (C, SEGA)

Programmed SZS position for block search
Programmed SZS position for block search with calculation
in relation to the WOS frame as center-point path, i.e. with tool length
but without tool radius
Notice! This variable is not available for the variable service,
but only for logging in connection with block search events!

NC variables
cmdToolEdgeCenterPosEnsS (C, SEGA)

fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
cmdToolEdgeCenterPosEns (C, SEGA)

Programmed SZS position
Programmed SZS position
in relation to the WOS frame as center-point path, i.e. with tool length
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
diamonInfo (C, SEGA)

Position as diameter or radius
Information whether position values are shown as diameter or radius values.
This information is relevant for the following variables of the blocks SGA/SEGA:
- $$/C/SGA/cmdToolBasePos
- $$/C/SGA/toolBaseDistToGo
- $$/C/SGA/toolBaseREPOS
- $$cmdToolEdgeCenterPos
- $$actToolEdgeCenterPos
- $$toolEdgeCenterDistToGo
- $$toolEdgeCenterREPOS
- $$cmdProgPos
- $$actProgPos
- $$progDistToGo
- $$progREPOS
- $$actToolBasPosEN
- $$cmdToolEdgeCenterPosEnsS
- $$/C/SEGA/actToolEdgeCenterPosEns
- $$actToolBasPosBN
- $$cmdToolBasPosENS
- $$actProgPosBKS
- $$actToolBasePosDiam
- $$actToolBasePosBasicDiam
- $$actToolBasPosBNDiam
Return value 0: Diameter programming inactive
1: Diameter programming active
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
displayAxis (C, SEGA) $MC_DISPLAY_AXIS Bit0-15

Identifier for geometry/auxiliary axis
Identifier indicating whether the axis is displayed by the HMI as a geometry or auxiliary axis.
Return value 0= Do not display at all
0xFFFF = Always display everything
bit 0 = Display in actual-value window
bit 1 = Display in reference point window
bit 2 = Display in Preset / Basic offset / Scratching
bit 3 = Display in handwheel selection

NC variables
displayAxis (C, SEGA) $MC_DISPLAY_AXIS Bit0-15

- TYPE_UWORD 0xFFFF 0 0xFFFF
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
drfVal (C, SEGA) $AC_DRF[x] x = Axis

DRF value
DRF value. The physical unit is defined in $$/C/SGA/extUnit (in module SGA).
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
effComp (C, SEGA)

effComp
Sum of all length radius compensations. The physical unit is defined in $$/C/SGA/extUnit (in the SGA block).
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
feedRateOvr (C, SEGA)

Feedrate override
Feedrate override if axis is a positioning axis. Multiplying override component which is active in addition to the override
factors programmed, set via handwheel or via PLC.
% TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numMachAxes

NC variables
geoAxisNr (C, SEGA)

Number of the geometry axis
Return value If the axis is a geometry axis: 1-3
If the axis is not a geometry axis: 0
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
handwheelAss (C, SEGA)

Number of assigned handwheel
Number of handwheel assigned to axis
Return value 0 = no handwheel assigned
1 to 3 = handwheel number
- TYPE_UWORD 0 3
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
index (C, SEGA)

Absolute axis index
Absolute axis index referred to MD
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes

NC variables
motEnd (C, SEGA) $AA_MOTEND

Motion end criterion for single-axis interpolation
Current motion end criterion for single-axis interpolation
Return value 1 = Motion end with exact stop FINE
2 = Motion end with exact stop COARSE
3 = Motion end with exact stop IPO Stop
4 = Block change in braking ramp of axis motion
5 = Block change in braking ramp of axis motion with tolerance window with reference to
setpoint
6 = Block change in braking ramp of axis motion with tolerance window with reference to
actual value
- TYPE_UWORD 1 1 6
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
spec (C, SEGA)

Axis specification
Return value 0 = path axis
1 = positioning axis
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
subSpec (C, SEGA) MD 30500: INDEX_AX_AS‐ T1

SIGN_POS_TAB
Subspecification
Subspecification, identifies whether an axis is an indexing axis
Return value 0 = normal axis
1 = indexing axis
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes

NC variables
type (C, SEGA)

Axis type
Return value 1 = linear axis
2 = rotary axis
3 = spindle
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
aaDiamStat (C, SEGA) $AA_DIAM_STAT[]

Status of the diameter programming
Status of the diameter programming as a function of configuration and programming
Return value Bit 0=0: Diameter programming inactive
Bit 0=1: Diameter programming active
Bit 1=0: Channel-specific diameter programming
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 15
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaSccStat (C, SEGA) $AA_SCC_STAT[]

Status of the G96/G961/G962 assignment
Status of the G96/G961/G962 assignment as a function of configuration and programming
Return value Bit 0=0: Axis is not assigned to G96/G961/G962
Bit 0=1: Axis is assigned to G96/G961/G962
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
aaPcsRel (C, SEGA) $AA_PCS_REL[Achse]

Current relative WCS setpoint of an axis
The axial variable $AA_PCS_REL[ax] determines the current relative setpoint of the corresponding axis in the workpiece
coordinate system (WCS). The setpoint corresponds to $AA_IW[ax], which is transformed by the current relative system
frame $P_RELFRAME. The axial positions lie in the relative workpiece coordinate system.
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaAcsRel (C, SEGA) $AA_ACS_REL[Achse]

Current relative SZS setpoint of an axis
The axial variable $AA_ACS_REL[ax] determines the current relative setpoint in the settable zero coordinate system
(SZS) for the corresponding axis. The setpoint corresponds to $AA_IEN[ax], which is transformed by the current relative
system frame $P_RELFRAME. The axial positions lie in the relative settable zero system.
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaIbc (C, SEGA) $AA_IBC[Achse]

Current setpoint of a Cartesian axis
The axial variable $AA_IBC[ax] determines the setpoint of a Cartesian axis lying between BCS and MCS. Cartesian
means that the axis is a linear axis, and it lies plane parallel to a coordinate axis in a clockwise coordinate system.
If a geometry axis is still Cartesian at the output of the nth transformation, then this value is returned.
The axis identifier used must represent a geometry axis in the BCS, otherwise the variable returns the value 0.
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
vaIw (C, SEGA) $VA_IW[Achse]

Current WCS actual value of an axis
The variable $VA_IW[ ax ] determines the encoder position of an axis retransformed into BCS. The BCS value contains all
the axial override components (DRF, AA_OFF, external work offset, etc.) and compensation values (CEC, etc.). The posi‐
tions are only computed once per IPO cycle for performance reasons. When a variable is read within one IPO cycle, the
value of the variable does not change, although the actual value could have changed.
If transformations are active, it must be taken into account that transforming the actual values into the BCS in the IPO
cycle can be very time-consuming. In this case, an adequate IPO cycle must be set.
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaIb (C, SEGA) $VA_IB[Achse]

Current BCS encoder position of an axis
The variable $VA_IB[ ax ] determines the encoder position of an axis retransformed into BCS. The BCS value contains all
the axial override components (DRF, AA_OFF, external work offset, etc.) and compensation values (CEC, etc.). The posi‐
tions are only computed once per IPO cycle for performance reasons. When a variable is read within one IPO cycle, the
value of the variable does not change, although the actual value could have changed.
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaIbc (C, SEGA) $VA_IBC[Achse]

Cartesian BCS encoder position of an axis
The variable $VA_IBC[ geo axis ] determines the encoder position of a Cartesian axis lying between BCS and MCS. Carte‐
sian means that the axis is a linear axis and lies plane parallel to a coordinate axis in a clockwise coordinate system. The
axis identifier used can be a geometry, channel or machine axis identifier. This identifier must represent a geometry axis
in the BCS, otherwise the variable returns the value 0.0. The positions are only computed once per IPO cycle for perform‐
ance reasons. When a variable is read within one IPO cycle, the value of the variable does not change, although the ac‐
tual value could have changed.

NC variables
vaIbc (C, SEGA) $VA_IBC[Achse]

fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaItr1 (C, SEGA) $AA_ITR[Achse, 1]

Current setpoint after the first transformation
The axial variable determines the current setpoint of an axis at the output of the 1st chained transformation.
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

Current setpoint after the second transformation
The axial variable determines the current setpoint of an axis at the output of the 2nd chained transformation.
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

Current setpoint after the third transformation
The axial variable determines the current setpoint of an axis at the output of the 3rd chained transformation.
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
vaItr1 (C, SEGA) $VA_ITR[Achse, 1]

Actual value at the output of first transformation
The axial variable determines the current encoder position of an axis at the output of the 1st chained transformation.
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

Actual value at output of second transformation
The axial variable determines the current encoder position of an axis at the output of the 2nd chained transformation.
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

Actual value at the output of third transformation
The axial variable determines the current encoder position of an axis at the output of the 3rd chained transformation.
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
3.2.3.21 SEMA: Extended state data in MCS
All state data that are dependent on machine movement and are defined specifically for machine axes (geome‐
try and special axes) are combined in module SMA. Supplementary information is to be found in module
SEMA. The individual variables are defined as fields where the line index is the number of the machine axis
(assigned to the current channel). The variable "name" in module SMA with the line index in question identifies
the axis.
The assignment of the line indices in modules SMA and SEMA is identical.
PRESETActive (C, SEMA)

Preset state
Return value 0 = no preset active
1 = preset active
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
PRESETVal (C, SEMA) $AC_PRESET[x] x = Axis

PRESET
The function PRESETON (...) programs a work offset for an axis. The value of the offset is stored in the variable 'PRE‐
SETVal'. The variable can be overwritten by the part program and by the HMI.
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
aaAccPercent (C, SEMA) $AA_ACC_PERCENT[Achse]

Current acceleration value in percent
Current acceleration value for single-axis interpolation in percent
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
aaActIndexAxPosNo (C, SEMA) $AA_ACT_INDEX_AX_POS_NO[<Achse>]

Current indexing position
Current indexing position; the display depends on
$MN_INDEX_AX_NO_MODE and the division (via table or equidistant)
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaAlarmStat (C, SEMA) $AA_ALARM_STAT

Display of active alarms
Display indicating whether alarms are active for a PLC-controlled axis.
The relevant coded alarm reactions can be used as a source for
the "Extended Stop and Retract" function.
Return value The data is bit-coded, allowing, where necessary, individual states to be
masked or evaluated separately (bits not listed supply a value of 0)
Bit2 = 1: NOREADY (active rapid deceleration + cancelation of servo enable)
Bit6 = 1: STOPBYALARM (rampm stop in all channel axes)
Bit9 = 1: SETVDI (VDI interface signal "Setting alarm")
Bit13 = 1: FOLLOWUPBYALARM (Follow-up)
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaAxChangeStat (C, SEMA) $AA_AXCHANGE_STAT[Achse]

Axis status with respect to axis replacement
Return value 0: Axis can be replaced
1: Axis is linked to the channel, but can become the PLC, command or reciprocating axis
2: Axis cannot be replaced
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 2
Addressing

NC variables
aaAxChangeStat (C, SEMA) $AA_AXCHANGE_STAT[Achse]

$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaAxChangeTyp (C, SEMA) $AA_AXCHANGE_TYP[Achse]

Axis type with respect to axis replacement
Return value 0: Axis assigned to the NC program
1: Axis assigned to the PLC or active as command axis or reciprocating axis
2: Other channel has interpolation right
3: Neutral axis
4: Neutral axis controlled from the PLC
5: Other channel has interpolation right; axis is requested for the NC program
6: Other channel has interpolation right; axis is requested as neutral axis
7: Axis is PLC axis or is active as command axis or reciprocating axis; axis is requested for
the
NC program
8: Axis is PLC axis or is active as command axis or reciprocating axis; axis is requested as
neutral axis
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 8
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaAxDisable (C, SEMA) $AA_AX_DISABLE[<Achse>]

Status of axis/spindle disable
Resulting status of axis/spindle disable.
Return value 0: Axis/spindle disable not active.
1: Axis/spindle disable active.
- TYPE_UDWORD 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
aaAxDisableSrc (C, SEMA) $AA_AX_DISABLE_SRC[<Achse>]

Source of axis/spindle disable
Bitmask which provides the status and source of the currently active axis/spindle disable.
If bit 0 has been set, the axis/spindle disable is active.
Return value The data is bit-coded. Individual states can therefore be masked or evaluated separately if
necessary:
Bit0 = 1: Resulting state from all sources: axis/spindle disable active.
Bit1 = 1: Axial signal 'Axis/spindle disable triggered by PLC' is active.
Bit2 = 1: Channel-specific program test is active.
Bit3 = 1: Axial suppression of 'Program test triggered by the PLC' is active.
Bit4 = 1: Axial signal 'Program test (energy saving mode)' is active.
Bit5 = 1: SERUPRO is active.
Bit6 = 1: Coupling object 'Total state is axis/spindle disable' is active.
Bit7 = 1: Coupling object 'Total state is real traveling' is active.
- TYPE_UDWORD 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaBcsOffset (C, SEMA) $AA_BCS_OFFSET[Achse]

Axial offsets of an axis
Sum of all axial offsets of an axis,
such as DRF, online tool offset, $AA_OFF and ext. WO.
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
aaBrakeCondB (C, SEMA) $AA_BRAKE_CONDB[axis]

Conditions for interpolator stop in the BCS
Shows the pending braking requests (conditions) for the interpolator stop of the axis / spindle.
A braking request consists of a collision direction relating to a coordinate axis in the BCS and a braking priority relating to
the machining step.
If the axis / spindle receives a current braking request on account of these requirement(s), bit 0 is set in
$AA_BRAKE_STATE[X] (in the next IPO cycle).\
Return value The highest deceleration priority in positive direction is shown in bits 0 to 3:
0x0: No pending deceleration request
0x1: Priority 1 covers all positioning actions (G0, POS, SPOS)
0x2: Priority 2 covers DYNNORM and all priority 1 motions
0x3: Priority 3 covers DYNPOS and all priority 1 to 2 motions
0x4: Priority 4 covers DYNROUGH and all priority 1 to 3 motions
0x5: Priority 5 covers DYNSEMIFIN and all priority 1 to 4 motions
0x6: Priority 6 covers all motions (including DYNFINISH). The request could also have
been triggered by a CP SW limit stop.
0x7: Priority 7 covers all motions. The request was triggered by the VDI interface signal
DB31,..DBX4.3 "Feed stop / Spindle stop".
Deceleration always takes place, irrespective of the direction of motion.
0xD: Priority 13 covers all motions. Axial deceleration takes place with an emergency stop
deceleration ramp.
The highest deceleration priority in negative direction is shown in bits 16 to 19:

0x0 to 0xD: Same meaning as bits 0 to 3
All other bits are reserved and not set.

If the value of the variable is shown in hexadecimal format, the fifth character from the right
shows the deceleration priority
in negative direction while the first number from the right shows the deceleration priority in
positive direction.
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0 0xD000D
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
aaBrakeCondM (C, SEMA) $AA_BRAKE_CONDM[axis]

Conditions for interpolator stop in the MCS
A braking request consists of a collision direction relating to a coordinate axis in the MCS and a braking priority relating to
the machining step.
deceleration ramp.


positive direction.
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0 0xD000D
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaBrakeState (C, SEMA) $AA_BRAKE_STATE[axis]

Current braking status
Returns for the axis / spindle whether an active deceleration request has been set on account of the request of aaBrake‐
CondB or a CP SW limit stop or a VDI interface signal DB31,..DBX4.3 "Feed stop / Spindle stop".
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0 1
Addressing

NC variables
aaBrakeState (C, SEMA) $AA_BRAKE_STATE[axis]

$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaChanNo (C, SEMA) $AA_CHANNO[Achse]

Axis in the channel
The variable supplies the number of the channel in which the axis
is currently being interpolated.
With value 0, the axis could not be assigned to any channel.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaCoupAct (C, SEMA) $AA_COUP_ACT[x] x = Spindle following

Current coupling state of the slave spindle
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaCoupOffs (C, SEMA) $AA_COUP_OFFS[x] x = Spindle

Pos. offset of the synchr. spindle desired value
Position offset of the synchronous spindle desired value
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaCurr (C, SEMA) $AA_CURR[x] x = Axis

Actual value of the axis/spindle current in A
Actual value of the axis/spindle current in A (only available for PROFIdrive drives)
A TYPE_DOUBLE

NC variables
aaCurr (C, SEMA) $AA_CURR[x] x = Axis

Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaDepAxO (C, SEMA) $AA_DEPAXO[Achse]

Dependence on other axes
Dependency on other axes.
Returns an axis code for the defined axis AX containing all the machine axes that have a mechanical dependency on the
defined axis.
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaDtbb (C, SEMA) $AA_DTBB[x] x = Axis

Axis distance from beginning of the block in BCS
Axis-specific distance from the beginning of the block in the BCS for positioning and synchronous axes used in synchro‐
nous actions
(note: SYNACT only)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaDtbreb (C, SEMA) $AA_DTBREB[axis]

Total decelaration distance, BCS
The estimated total distance until the end of deceleration is reached, BCS
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
aaDtbrebCmd (C, SEMA) $AA_DTBREB_CMD[axis]

Command share of decel. dist. of axis ax in BCS
Command share of the overall deceleration distance of axis ax in the BCS.
The value is the estimated deceleration distance of the axis up to standstill.
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaDtbrebCorr (C, SEMA) $AA_DTBREB_CORR[axis]

Offset section of the deceleration distance, BCS
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaDtbrebDep (C, SEMA) $AA_DTBREB_DEP[axis]

Dependent section of the decelaration dist., BCS
Dependent section of the decelaration distance, BCS
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaDtbrem (C, SEMA) $AA_DTBREM[axis]

Total decelaration distance, MCS
The estimated total distance until the end of deceleration is reached, MCS
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
aaDtbremCmd (C, SEMA) $AA_DTBREM_CMD[axis]

Spec. section of the decelaration distance, MCS
Specified section of the decelaration distance, MCS
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaDtbremCorr (C, SEMA) $AA_DTBREM_CORR[axis]

Offset section of the deceleration distance, MCS
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaDtbremDep (C, SEMA) $AA_DTBREM_DEP[axis]

Dependent section of the decelaration dist., MCS
Dependent section of the decelaration distance, MCS
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaDteb (C, SEMA) $AA_DTEB[x] x = Axis

Axis distance to the end of the block in the BCS
Axis-specific distance to the end of the block in the BCS for positioning and synchronous axes used in synchronous ac‐
tions
(note: SYNACT only)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing

NC variables
aaDteb (C, SEMA) $AA_DTEB[x] x = Axis

$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaDtepb (C, SEMA) $AA_DTEPB[x] x = Axis

Axis dist-to-go of infeed during oscill. in BCS
Axis-specific distance-to-go of infeed during oscillation in the BCS
(note: SYNACT only)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaEnc1Active (C, SEMA) $AA_ENC1_ACTIVE[Achse]

First measuring system is active
Return value 0: Measuring system is not active
1: Measuring system is active
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaEnc2Active (C, SEMA) $AA_ENC2_ACTIVE[Achse]

Second measuring system is active
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaEncActive (C, SEMA) $AA_ENC_ACTIVE[Achse]

Measuring system is active

NC variables
aaEncActive (C, SEMA) $AA_ENC_ACTIVE[Achse]

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaEsrEnable (C, SEMA) $AA_ESR_ENABLE[Achse]

ESR axis enable
(Axial) enabling of reactions of "Extended Stop and Retract" function.
The selected axial ESR reaction must be parameterized in MD $MA_ESR_REACTION.
beforehand. The corresponding Stop or Retract reactions can be activated via
$AN_ESR_TRIGGER (or for individual drives in the event of communications failure/
DC-link undervoltage), generator-mode operation is automatically activated in response to
undervoltage conditions.
Return value 0: FALSE
1: TRUE
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaEsrStat (C, SEMA) $AA_ESR_STAT[Achse]

ESR axis status
(Axial) status checkback signals of "Extended Stop and Retract" function,
which can be applied as input signals for the gating logic of the ESR (synchronous actions).
evaluated separately if necessary:
Bit0 = 1: Generator mode is activated
Bit1 = 1: Retract operation is activated
Bit2 = 1: Stop operation is activated
Bit3 = 1: Risk of undervoltage (DC-link voltage monitoring,
voltage has dropped below warning threshold)
Bit4 = 1: Speed has dropped below minimum generator mode threshold (i.e. no more
regenerative rotation energy is available).
- TYPE_UWORD 0

NC variables
aaEsrStat (C, SEMA) $AA_ESR_STAT[Achse]

Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaEsrTrigger (C, SEMA) $AA_ESR_TRIGGER

Activation of ESR
Activation of "NC-controlled ESR" for PLC-controlled axis
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaFixPointSelected (C, SEMA) $AA_FIX_POINT_SELECTED[<Achse>]

Selected fixed point
Selected fixed point: Number of the fixed point that is to be approached
- TYPE_UDWORD 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaIbnCorr (C, SEMA) $AA_IBN_CORR[<Achse>]

BZS setpoint value (C) incl. override components
Current BZS setpoint value of an axis including override components
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaIenCorr (C, SEMA) $AA_IEN_CORR[<Achse>]

SZS setpoint value (C) incl. override components
Current SZS setpoint value of an axis including override components

NC variables
aaIenCorr (C, SEMA) $AA_IEN_CORR[<Achse>]

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaInSync (C, SEMA) $AA_IN_SYNC[Achse]

Synchronization status of the following axis
Synchronization status of the following axis with master value coupling and ELG
Return value 0: Synchronization is not running
1: Synchronization is running, i.e. following axis is being synchronized
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaInposStat (C, SEMA) $AA_INPOS_STAT[Achse]

Status for the programmed position
Return value 0: No status available (axis/spindle is outside of the programmed position)
1: Travel motion pending
2: Position setpoint reached
3: Position reached with 'exact stop coarse'
4: Position reached with 'exact stop fine'
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 4
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaJerkCount (C, SEMA) $AA_JERK_COUNT[Achse]

Total traverse processes of an axis with jerk
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
aaJerkTime (C, SEMA) $AA_JERK_TIME[Achse]

Total traverse time of an axis with jerk
s, user defined TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaJerkTotal (C, SEMA) $AA_JERK_TOT[Achse]

Overall total jerk of an axis
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaLeadP (C, SEMA) $AA_LEAD_P[x] x = Axis

Actual lead value position
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaLeadPTurn (C, SEMA) $AA_LEAD_P_TURN

Current master value
Current master value - position component lost
as a result of modulo reduction
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
aaLeadSp (C, SEMA) $AA_LEAD_SP[x] x = Axis

Simulated lead value - position
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaLeadSv (C, SEMA) $AA_LEAD_SV[x] x = Axis

Simulated leading value velocity
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaLeadV (C, SEMA) $AA_LEAD_V[x] x = Axis

Actual lead value velocity
Actual lead value - velocity
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaLoad (C, SEMA) $AA_LOAD[x] x = Axis

Drive load in %
Drive load in % (only available for PROFIdrive drives)
% TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
aaMaslState (C, SEMA) $AA_MASL_STAT

Current status of the master-slave coupling
Each slave axis currently coupled via master-slave delivers the machine axis number of the corresponding master axis.
Zero is displayed as default for inactive coupling.
A master axis also shows default value zero.
Return value 0: No coupling for this axis configured, or axis is master axis, or no coupling active
>0: Machine axis number of the master axis with which the slave axis is currently coupled
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaMeaAct (C, SEMA) $AA_MEAACT[Achse]

Axial measuring active
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaMm1 (C, SEMA) $AA_MM1[x] x = Axis

Access meas. result trigger event 1 in MCS
Access to measurement result of trigger event 1 in the MCS
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes


NC variables

fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes

fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes

fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
aaMm (C, SEMA) $AA_MM[x] x = Axis

Latched probe position in the MCS
Latched probe position in the machine coordinate system
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes

NC variables
aaOff (C, SEMA) $AA_OFF[x] x = Axis

Position offset from synchronous actions
Superimposed position offset from synchronous actions
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaOffLimit (C, SEMA) $AA_OFF_LIMIT[x] x = Axis

Limit for axial correction $AA_OFF reached
Limit for axial correction $AA_OFF reached (Note: for SYNACT only)
Return value 0: Limit value not reached
1: Limit value reached in positive axis direction
11: Limit value reached in negative axis direction
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaOffVal (C, SEMA) $AA_OFF_VAL[x]

Total value of overlaid motion
Integrated value of overlaid motion for an axis.
The negative value of this variable can be used to cancel an overlaid motion.
e.g. $AA_OFF[axis] = -$AA_OFF_VAL[axis]

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaOnFixPoint (C, SEMA) $AA_FIX_ON_POINT[<Achse>]

Fixed point reached
Number of the fixed point at which the axis stands

NC variables
aaOnFixPoint (C, SEMA) $AA_FIX_ON_POINT[<Achse>]

- TYPE_UDWORD 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaOscillBreakPos1 (C, SEMA) $AA_OSCILL_BREAK_POS1[<Achse>]

Oscillation interrupt position 1
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaOscillBreakPos2 (C, SEMA) $AA_OSCILL_BREAK_POS2[<Achse>]

fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaOscillReversePos1 (C, SEMA) $AA_OSCILL_REVERSE_POS1[x] x =

Axis
Current reverse position 1 for oscill. in the BCS
Current reverse position 1 for oscillation in the BCS. For synchronous actions the value of the setting data $SA_OS‐
CILL_REVERSE_POS1 is evaluated online; (note: SYNACT only)
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
aaOscillReversePos2 (C, SEMA) $AA_OSCILL_REVERSE_POS2[x] x =

Axis
Current reverse position 2 for oscillation in the BCS; For synchronous actions the value of the setting data $SA_OS‐
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaOvr (C, SEMA) $AA_OVR[x] x = Axis

Axial override for synchronous actions
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaPlcOvr (C, SEMA) $AA_PLC_OVR[Achse]

PLC override for motion-synchronous actions
Axial override specified by PLC for motion-synchronous actions
- TYPE_DOUBLE 100 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaPolfa (C, SEMA) $AA_POLFA

Retraction position of the single axis
The programmed retraction position of the single axis
fined
Addressing

NC variables
aaPolfa (C, SEMA) $AA_POLFA

$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaPolfaValid (C, SEMA) $AA_POLFA_VALID

Retraction of the single axis is programmed
States whether the retraction of the single axis is programmed
Return value 0: No retraction programmed for the single axis
1: Retraction programmed as position
2: Retraction programmed as distance
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 2
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaPower (C, SEMA) $AA_POWER[x] x = Axis

Drive power in W (611D only)
Drive power in W (only available for PROFIdrive drives)
W TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaProgIndexAxPosNo (C, SEMA) $AA_PROG_INDEX_AX_POS_NO[Achse]

Programmed indexing position
Return value 0: No indexing axis, therefore no indexing position available
>0: Number of the programmed indexing position
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
aaRef (C, SEMA) $AA_REF[Achse]

Axis is referenced
Return value 0: Axis is not referenced
1: Axis is referenced
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaReposDelay (C, SEMA) $AA_REPOS_DELAY[Achse]

REPOS suppression active
Return value 0: REPOS suppression is currently not active for this axis
1: REPOS suppression is currently active for this axis
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaScPar (C, SEMA) $AA_SCPAR[Achse]

Current setpoint parameter set
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaSnglAxStat (C, SEMA) $AA_SNGLAX_STAT

Single axis status
Display status of a PLC-controlled axis
Return value 0: Not a single axis
1: Reset
2: Ended
3: Interrupted
4: Active
5: Alarm

NC variables
aaSnglAxStat (C, SEMA) $AA_SNGLAX_STAT

- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaSoftendn (C, SEMA) $AA_SOFTENDN[x] x = Axis

Software end position, negative direction
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaSoftendp (C, SEMA) $AA_SOFTENDP[x] x = Axis

Software end position, positive direction
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaStat (C, SEMA) $AA_STAT[]

Axis status
Axis state
0: no axis state available
1: travel command is active
2: axis has reached the IPO end. only for channel axes
3: axis in position (exact stop coarse) for all axes
4: axis in position (exact stop fine) for all axes
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
aaSync (C, SEMA) $AA_SYNC[x] x = Axis

Status slave axis with lead value coupling
Coupling status of the following axis with master value coupling
Return value 0: No synchronism
1: Synchronism coarse
2: Synchronism fine
3: Synchronism coarse and fine
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaSyncDiffStat (C, SEMA) $AA_SYNCDIFF_STAT[Achse]

Status of the synchronism difference
Status of the setpoint synchronism difference
Return value -4: No valid value in $$aaSyncDiff, coupled motion from part program
-3: Reserved
-2: Reserved
-1: No valid value in $$aaSyncDiff
0: No valid value in $$aaSyncDiff, coupling not active
1: Valid value in $$aaSyncDiff
- TYPE_DWORD 0 -4 1
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaTorque (C, SEMA) $AA_TORQUE[x] x = Axis

Desired torque value in Nm
Drive torque setpoint in Nm (only available for PROFIdrive drives)
Nm TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
aaTotalOvr (C, SEMA) $AA_TOTAL_OVR[Achse]

Total axial override f. motion-synchronous actions
The total axial override for motion-synchronous actions
- TYPE_DOUBLE 100 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaTravelCount (C, SEMA) $AA_TRAVEL_COUNT[Achse]

Total traverse processes of an axis
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaTravelCountHS (C, SEMA) $AA_TRAVEL_COUNT_HS[Achse]

Total traverse processes of an axis at high speed
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaTravelDist (C, SEMA) $AA_TRAVEL_DIST[Achse]

Total travel path of an axis
Total travel path of an axis in mm or degrees
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
aaTravelDistHS (C, SEMA) $AA_TRAVEL_DIST_HS[Achse]

Total travel path of an axis at high speed
Total travel path of an axis at high speed in mm or degrees

fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaTravelTime (C, SEMA) $AA_TRAVEL_TIME[Achse]

Total traverse time of an axis
Total traverse time of an axis in seconds
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaTravelTimeHS (C, SEMA) $AA_TRAVEL_TIME_HS[Achse]

Total traverse time of an axis at high speed
Total traverse time of an axis at high speed in seconds
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
aaTyp (C, SEMA) $AA_TYP[x] x = Axis

Axis type according to $AA_TYP
Axis type
Return value 0: axis in other channel
1: channel axis of same channel
2: neutral axis
3: PLC axis
4: reciprocating axis
5: neutral axis, currently traversing in JOG
6: slave axis coupled via master value
7: coupled motion slave axis
8: command axis
9: compile cycle axis
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaType (C, SEMA) $AA_TYPE[Achse]

Cross-channel axis type
Return value 0: Axis type cannot be determined
1: NC program axis
2: Neutral axis
3: PLC axis
4: Reciprocating axis
5: Neutral axis that is currently executing a JOG or homing motion
6: Following axis coupled to the master value
7: Coupled motion of the following axis, activated in a synchronized action
8: Command axis
9: Compile Cycle axis
10: Coupled slave axis (master-slave function.)
11: Program axis that is currently executing a JOG or homing motion
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 11
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
aaVactB (C, SEMA) $AA_VACTB[X]

Axis veloc. in basic coordinates
Axis velocity in basic coordinate system
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaVactM (C, SEMA) $AA_VACTM[X]

Axis veloc. in machine coordinates
Axis velocity in machine coordinate system
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaVc (C, SEMA) $AA_VC[x] x = Axis

Add. correction value for path feed or axial feed
Additive correction value for path feed or axial feed
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
acRpValid (C, SEMA) $AC_RPVALID[Achse]

Reapproach position valid
Return value 0: Reapproach position not valid
1: Reapproach position valid
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1

NC variables
acRpValid (C, SEMA) $AC_RPVALID[Achse]

Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
ackSafeMeasPos (C, SEMA)

Confirmation of SI actual position
Return value 0 = not confirmed
0x00AC = confirmed
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
actCouppPosOffset (C, SEMA) $VA_COUP_OFFS[x] x = Axis S3

Offset to leading axis/spindle, actual value
Position offset of an axis to a leading axis / leading spindle (actual value)
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
actFeedRate (C, SEMA) S5

fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes

NC variables
actIndexAxPosNo (C, SEMA)

Current indexing position number
0 = no indexing position
>0 = indexing position number
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
actSpeedRel (C, SEMA)

Actual value of rotary speed
Actual value of rotary speed (referring to the maximum speed in %), for linear drives actual value of the velocity.
% TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
actValResol (C, SEMA)

Actual value of the resolution
Actual value resolution. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module)
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes

NC variables
amSetupState (C, SEMA)

State var. PI Service auto. set-up of asyn. motor
State variable of the PI Service Automatic set-up of an asynchronous motor
1 = wait for PLC enable
2 = wait for key NC-start
3 = active
4 = stopped by Servo + fine code in the upper byte
5 = stopped by 611D + fine code in the upper byte
6 = stopped by NCK + fine code in the upper byte
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 0xff06
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
axComp (C, SEMA)

Sum of compensation values
Sum of axis-specific compensation values (CEC Cross Error compensation and temperature compensation). The physical
unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
axisActiveInChan (C, SEMA)

Axis active
1 = active
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes

NC variables
axisFeedRateUnit (C, SEMA)

1 = inch/min
2 = degree/min
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
chanAxisNoGap (C, SEMA)

Axis exists
Display of existing axis, i.e. no axis gap in channel.
Return value 0: Axis does not exist
1: Axis does exist
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
chanNoAxisIsActive (C, SEMA)

Channel number of axis
Channel number in which the channel axis is currently active
Return value 0 = axis is not assigned to any channel
1 to $$maxnumChannels (Area.:N / Module:Y) = channel number
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
cmdContrPos (C, SEMA)

Desired value of position after fine interpolation

NC variables
cmdContrPos (C, SEMA)

fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
cmdCouppPosOffset (C, SEMA) $AA_COUP_OFFS[x] x = Axis S3

Position offset referring to leading axis/spindle
Position offset of an axis referring to the leading axis / leading spindle (desired value)
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
cmdFeedRate (C, SEMA)

fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
cmdSpeedRel (C, SEMA)

Desired value of rotary speed.
Speed setpoint (as % of the maximum speed), velocity setpoint in the case of linear motors.
% TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numMachAxes

NC variables
contrConfirmActive (C, SEMA)

Controller enable
Return value 0 = no controller enable
1 = controller enable
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
contrMode (C, SEMA)

Controller mode servo
Identifier for controller mode servo
Return value 0 = position control
1 = speed control
2 = stop
3 = park
4 = follow-up
(set the mode through VDI interface and partly through part program)
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
displayAxis (C, SEMA) $MC_DISPLAY_AXIS Bit16-31

Machine axis identifier
Identifier indicating whether axis is displayed by HMI as a machine axis.
Addressing

NC variables
displayAxis (C, SEMA) $MC_DISPLAY_AXIS Bit16-31

$$numMachAxes
Read access
distPerDriveRevol (C, SEMA)

Distance per revolution of the drive
Rotary drive: Load-side path corresponding to one revolution of the drive.
Is returned in the unit of the internal computational resolution INT_INCR_PER_MM (for linear axes) or
INT_INCR_PER_DEG (for rotary axes / spindles) taking into account gear ratios etc.
In the case of linear axes, the pitch of the ball screw is also included in the calculation.
In the case of linear motors, a fixed value of "1mm" is used for the ball screw pitch instead of the non-existent ball screw.
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
drfVal (C, SEMA)

DRF value
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
drive2ndTorqueLimit (C, SEMA)

2nd torque limit
2nd torque limit. With linear motors: 2nd force limit
1 = active
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes

NC variables
driveActMotorSwitch (C, SEMA)

Actual motor wiring
Actual motor wiring (star/delta)
Return value 0 = star
1 = delta
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
driveActParamSet (C, SEMA)

Number of the actual drive parameter set
- TYPE_UWORD 1 8
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
driveClass1Alarm (C, SEMA)

Message ZK1 drive alarm
Return value 0 = no alarm set
1= alarm set (fatal error occured)
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
driveContrMode (C, SEMA)

Control mode of drive
Return value 0 = current control
1 = speed control
- TYPE_UWORD

NC variables
driveContrMode (C, SEMA)

Addressing
$$numMachAxes
driveCoolerTempWarn (C, SEMA)

Heatsink temperature monitoring
Return value 0 = temperature OK
1 = overtemperature
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
driveDesMotorSwitch (C, SEMA)

Motor wiring selection (star/delta)
1 = delta
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
driveDesParamSet (C, SEMA)

Desired parameter set of the drive
- TYPE_UWORD 1 8
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
driveFastStop (C, SEMA)

Ramp-function generator rapid stop
Return value 0 = not stopped
1 = stopped

NC variables
driveFastStop (C, SEMA)

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
driveFreqMode (C, SEMA)

I/F mode
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
driveImpulseEnabled (C, SEMA)

Enable inverter impulse
Enable inverter impulse (checkback signal to impulseEnable)
Return value 0 = not enabled
1 = enabled
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
driveIndex (C, SEMA)

Drive assignment (driveIndex)
Drive assignment (logical drive number)
Return value 0 = drive does not exist
1 to 15 = logical drive number
- TYPE_UWORD 0 15
Addressing
$$numMachAxes

NC variables
driveIntegDisable (C, SEMA)

Integrator disable
Return value 0 = not disabled
1 = disabled
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
driveLinkVoltageOk (C, SEMA)

State of the DC link voltage
Return value 0 = OK
1 = not OK
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
driveMotorTempWarn (C, SEMA)

Motor temperature warning
1 = overtemperature
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
driveNumCrcErrors (C, SEMA)

CRC errors on the drive bus
(Transmission errors when writing data to the drive; values may range up to FFFFH)
Return value 0 = no error

NC variables
driveNumCrcErrors (C, SEMA)

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
driveParked (C, SEMA)

Parking axis
Return value 0 = no parking axis
1 = parking axis
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
drivePowerOn (C, SEMA)

Drive switched on
Return value 0 = drive not switched on
1 = drive switched on
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
driveProgMessages (C, SEMA)

Configurable messages
Configurable messages (via machine data)
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes

NC variables
driveReady (C, SEMA)

Drive ready
Return value 0 = drive not ready
1 = drive ready
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
driveRunLevel (C, SEMA)

Current state reached during the boot process
(range: coarse state (0 to 5) * 100 + fine state (up to 22)
Return value Booting the firmware ---> 0 XX
entering the configuration ---> 1XX
hardware-init, communication-init
loading, converting data ---> 2XX
changing bus addressing ---> 3XX
preparing synchronization ---> 4XX
activating interrupt ---> 519
XX ==> fine state

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
driveSetupMode (C, SEMA)

Set-up mode
1 = active
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables
driveSetupMode (C, SEMA)

$$numMachAxes
driveSpeedSmoothing (C, SEMA)

Smoothing the desired value of the rotary speed
Smoothing the desired value of the rotary speed, for linear drives: smoothing the desired value of the velocity
Return value 0 = no smoothing
1 = smoothing
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
effComp1 (C, SEMA)

Sum of the compensation values for encoder 1
Sum of the compensation values for encoder 1. The value results from: temperature compensation, backlash compensa‐
tion, quadrant error compensation, beam sag compensation, leadscrew error compensation. The physical unit is defined
in measUnit (in this module).
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
effComp2 (C, SEMA)

Sum of the compensation values for encoder 2. The value results from: temperature compensation, backlash compensa‐
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes

NC variables
encChoice (C, SEMA)

Active encoder
Return value 0 = does not exist
1 = encoder 1
2 = encoder 2
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
fctGenState (C, SEMA)

State of the function generator
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
feedRateOvr (C, SEMA)

Feedrate override
Feedrate override (only if axis is a positioning axis)
% TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
focStat (C, SEMA) $AA_FOC[x]

Status of ForceControl function
Current status of "Travel with limited torque" function
Return value 0-2
0: FOC not active
1: FOC modal active (programming of FOCON[])
2: FOC non-modal active (programming of FOC[])

NC variables
focStat (C, SEMA) $AA_FOC[x]

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 2
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
fxsInfo (C, SEMA) $VA_FXS_INFO[Achse]

Additional info on travel to fixed stop
Additional information on travel to fixed stop if
$VA_FXS[]=2, or OPI variable $$/C/SEMA/fxsStat=2.
Return value 0 No additional information available
1 No approach motion programmed
2 Programmed end position reached, movement ended
3 Abort by NC RESET (Reset key)
4 Fixed stop window exited
5 Torque reduction was rejected by drive
6 PLC has canceled enable signals
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 6
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
fxsStat (C, SEMA) $AA_FXS[x] x = Axis

State after travelling to fixed stop
Return value 0 = normal control
1 = fixed stop reached
2 = selection failed
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
handwheelAss (C, SEMA)


NC variables
handwheelAss (C, SEMA)

- TYPE_UWORD 0 3
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
impulseEnable (C, SEMA)

Impulse enable for drive
1 = enabled
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
index (C, SEMA)

Absolute axis index
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
isDriveUsed (C, SEMA)

Machine axis has control over the drive
One or more machine axes are assigned to each drive.
The drive can only be controlled at any one time by one of these machine axes.
The machine manufacturer makes the selection.
The status of the drive control changes dynamically.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing

NC variables
isDriveUsed (C, SEMA)

$$numMachAxes
Read access
kVFactor (C, SEMA)

position control gain factor
16.667 1/s TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
lag (C, SEMA)

Following error
Following error = desired value of position after fine interpolation - actual value of position. The physical unit is defined in
measUnit (in this module).
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
logDriveNo (C, SEMA)

Drive assignment (logDriveNo)
Return value 0 = not available
1 to 15 = drive number
- TYPE_UWORD 0 15
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
measFctState (C, SEMA)

State of the probing function

NC variables
measFctState (C, SEMA)

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
measPos1 (C, SEMA)

Actual value of position, encoder 1
Actual value of position for encoder 1. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
measPos2 (C, SEMA)

fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
measPosDev (C, SEMA)

Actual position difference between 2 encoders
Actual position difference between the two encoders. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes

NC variables
measUnit (C, SEMA)

Unit for service values of the drives
Return value 0 = mm
1 = inch
2 = grd
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
paramSetNo (C, SEMA)

Number of parameter set
- TYPE_UWORD 1 8
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
preContrFactTorque (C, SEMA)

Feed forward control factor torque
Nm TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
preContrFactVel (C, SEMA)

Feed forward control factor velocity
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numMachAxes

NC variables
preContrMode (C, SEMA)

Feed forward control mode
1 = velocity feed forward
2 = torque feed forward
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
progIndexAxPosNo (C, SEMA)

Indexing number
Programmed indexing position number
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
qecLrnIsOn (C, SEMA)

Quadrant error compensation learning active
1 = Neuronal-QEC learning active
2 = Standard-QEC active
3 = Standard-QEC with adaptation of correction value active
4 = Neuronal-QEC active
5 = Neuronal-QEC with adaptation of measuring time active
6 = Neuronal-QEC with adaptation of decay time of correction value active
7 = Neuronal-QEC with adaptation of measuring time and decay time of correction value ac‐
tive
- TYPE_UWORD 0 7
Addressing

NC variables
qecLrnIsOn (C, SEMA)

$$numMachAxes
refPtBusy (C, SEMA)

Axis is being referenced
Return value 0 = axis is not being referenced
1 = axis is being referenced
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
refPtCamNo (C, SEMA)

Reference point cam
Return value 0 = no cam approached
1 = cam 1
2 = cam 2
3 = cam 3
4 = cam 4
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
refPtPhase (C, SEMA)

Referencing phases
Return value 0 = False
1 = Phase 1
2 = Phase 2
3 = Phase 3
4 = Phase 4
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables
refPtPhase (C, SEMA)

$$numMachAxes
refPtStatus (C, SEMA)

Axis must be referenced and is referenced
Identifier indicating whether an axis requires referencing and is referenced.
Note regarding exchange axes:

An exchange axis need only ever be referenced in the channel to which it is currently assigned. A referenced exchange
axis is thus logged onto the channel in which it is traversing with value "3" (requires referencing and referenced) and in
other channels with value "1" (does not require referencing, but referenced).
Return value Set bits have the following meanings:
Bit0: current measuring system has been referenced

Bit1: current measuring system requires referencing
(A busy signal affects the state)
- TYPE_UWORD Achsindex
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
resolvStatus1 (C, SEMA)

Encoder status for measuring system 1
Return value 0 = Undefined
1 = Referenced
2 = Activated
3 = Limit frequency exceeded
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes

1 = Referenced
2 = Activated

NC variables

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
safeAcceptCheckPhase (C, SEMA)

Flag for NCK-side acceptance test phase
Flag for NCK-side acceptance test phase, the human-machine interface can determine which acceptance test phase is
present on the NCK.
Return value 0: NCK has acceptance test phase inactive = 0

0ACH: NCK has acceptance test phase active
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 0ACH
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
safeAcceptTestMode (C, SEMA)

SI PowerOn alarms can be acknowledged by Reset
SI PowerOn alarms can be acknowledged by Reset in acceptance test mode
Return value 0: Acceptance test mode: SI PowerOn alarms cannot be acknowledged by Reset
0ACH: Acceptance test mode: SI PowerOn alarms can be acknowledged by Reset
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 0FFH
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
safeAcceptTestPhase (C, SEMA)

Flag for acceptance test phase
Return value 0: Acceptance test Wizard not selected, activate NCK-side alarm suppression
0ACH: Dialogs for acceptance test support selected, deactivate NCK-side alarm suppression

NC variables
safeAcceptTestPhase (C, SEMA)

Addressing
$$numMachAxes
safeAcceptTestSE (C, SEMA)

Flag for NCK-side SE acceptance test
Flag for NCK-side SE acceptance test. The human-machine interface starts checking the safe limit positions during the
acceptance test
Return value 0: NCK has SE acceptance test inactive = 0. The single channel SW limit positions are
activated.
0ACH: NCK is to activate SE acceptance test. The single channel SW limit positions are de‐
activated in this way.
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
safeAcceptTestState (C, SEMA)

Flag for acceptance test status
Flag for acceptance test status, the human-machine interface can determine which acceptance test mode is present on
the NCK.
Return value 0: NCK has acceptance test mode inactive
0CH: Acceptance test mode not activated because SI PowerOn alarms already present.
The causes of the SI PowerOn alarms must be eliminated first.
0DH: Acceptance test mode not activated, the HMI writes invalid values in $$/C/SEMA/safe‐
AcceptTestMode to the NCK.
0ACH: NCK has acceptance test mode active
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
safeActPosDiff (C, SEMA)

Curr. safety actual value difference NCK - drive
Current actual value difference betw. NCK and drive monitoring channels

NC variables
safeActPosDiff (C, SEMA)

fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
safeActVeloDiff (C, SEMA)

Curr. safety speed difference NCK - drive
Current speed difference between NCK and drive monitoring channels
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
safeActVeloLimit (C, SEMA)

Safe limit of actual speed
Return value -1 => no actual speed limit active
>= 0 => limit of actual speed is active
mm/min, inch/min, user de‐ TYPE_DOUBLE -1
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
safeDesVeloLimit (C, SEMA)

Safe limit of desired speed
Return value -1 => no desired speed limit active
>= 0 => desired speed limit is active
fined
Addressing

NC variables
safeDesVeloLimit (C, SEMA)

$$numMachAxes
Read access
safeFctEnable (C, SEMA)

Safe operation active
Safe operation active (Safety Integrated / SPL)
>0 = active
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
safeInputSig2 (C, SEMA)

Safe input signals part 2
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0xffff
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
safeInputSig (C, SEMA)

Safe input signals of the axis
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
safeInputSigDrive2 (C, SEMA)

Safe input signals of the drive part 2
Addressing

NC variables
safeInputSigDrive2 (C, SEMA)

$$numMachAxes
Read access
safeInputSigDrive (C, SEMA)

Safe input signals of the drive
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
safeMaxVeloDiff (C, SEMA)

Max. safety speed difference NCK - drive
Maximum speed difference between NCK and drive monitoring channels since last NCK Reset
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
safeMeasPos (C, SEMA) $VA_IS[x] x = Axis

Safe actual position of axis
Safe actual position of the axis. The physical unit is defined in the variable measUnit (in this module).
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
safeMeasPosDrive (C, SEMA)

Safe actual position of the drive
Safe actual position of drive. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
fined

NC variables
safeMeasPosDrive (C, SEMA)

Addressing
$$numMachAxes
safeOutputSig2 (C, SEMA)

Safe output signals part 2
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
safeOutputSig (C, SEMA)

Safe output signals of the axis
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
safeOutputSigCam (C, SEMA)

NCK SI cam signals
Results of the NCK safe cam evaluation
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 3FFFFFFF
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
safeOutputSigCamDrive (C, SEMA)

Drive SI cam signals
Results of the drive safe cam evaluation

NC variables
safeOutputSigCamDrive (C, SEMA)

Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
safeOutputSigDrive2 (C, SEMA)

Safe output signals of the drive part 2
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
safeOutputSigDrive (C, SEMA)

Safe output signals of the drive
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
safeActiveCamTrack (C, SEMA)

Status Safe cam track
Status Safe cam track (active/inactive)
Return value Bit 0 = 1/0: Safe cam track 1 active/inactive
Bit 1 = 1/0: Safe cam track 2 active/inactive
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 0xF
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
safePosCtrlActive (C, SEMA)

Axis monitors absolute position
Return value 0 = Axis does not monitor absolute position (no SE/SN)
1 = Axis monitors absolute position
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
safeStopOtherAxis (C, SEMA)

Stop on another axis
Return value 0: No stop on another axis
1: Stop on another axis
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
spec (C, SEMA)

Axis specification
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
stateContrActive (C, SEMA)

State controller
State controller (not available)
Return value 1 = TRUE
0 = FALSE

NC variables
stateContrActive (C, SEMA)

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
subSpec (C, SEMA) T1

Subspecification
1 = indexing axis
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
torqLimit (C, SEMA)

Torque limitation value
Torque limitation value (referring to the nominal value of the drive). For linear motors: force limitation value.
% TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
traceState1 (C, SEMA)

State of trace channel 1
Return value 0 = idle state
1 = recording started
2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
4 = recording aborted
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes

NC variables

2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes

2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes

2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables

$$numMachAxes
trackErrContr (C, SEMA) $VA_TRACK_ERR_CONTR[Achse]

Position controller difference
Position controller difference (actual value / desired value of position)
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
trackErrDiff (C, SEMA)

Contour deviation
Contour deviation (difference actual value of position and calculated dynamical model)
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
type (C, SEMA)

Axis type
1 = rotary axis
2 = spindle
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
vaAbsoluteEnc1ErrCnt (C, SEMA) $VA_ABSO‐

LUTE_ENC_ERR_CNT[1,Achse]
1st meas. system: Error counter for abs. encoder
Enc 1: Error counter for absolute encoder

NC variables

- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaAbsoluteEnc1State (C, SEMA) $VA_ABSOLUTE_ENC_STATE[1,Achse]

1st meas. system: Status of abs. encoder interface
Enc1: Status of absolute encoder interface
Return value Bit0: Interface is active
Bit1: Error during parity check
Bit2: Error bit alarm
Bit3: Error bit CRC error
Bit4: Start bit missing with EnDat transfer
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

2nd meas. system: Error counter for abs. encoder
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
vaAbsoluteEnc2State (C, SEMA) $VA_ABSOLUTE_ENC_STATE[2,Achse]

2nd meas. system: Status of abs. encoder interface
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaCcCompValTotal (C, SEMA) $VA_CC_COMP_VAL_TOTAL[Achse]

Axial OA total compensation value
Axial OA total compensation value via compile cycles
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaCecCompVal (C, SEMA) $VA_CEC_COMP_VAL[Achse]

Axial sag compensation value
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaCurr (C, SEMA) $VA_CURR[Achse]

Drive actual current value
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0

NC variables
vaCurr (C, SEMA) $VA_CURR[Achse]

Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaDistTorque (C, SEMA) $VA_DIST_TORQUE[Achse]

Disturbing torque/max. torque (motor end)
Disturbing torque/max. torque (motor end, York)
% TYPE_DOUBLE 0 -100 100
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaDpe (C, SEMA) $VA_DPE[x1]

Status of power enable
Status of power enable of a machine axis
Return value 0-1
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaEnc1CompVal (C, SEMA) $VA_ENC1_COMP_VAL[Achse]

Leadscrew error compensation (LEC) value encoder 1
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaEnc1ZeroMonErrCnt (C, SEMA) $VA_ENC_ZERO_MON_ERR_CNT[1,Ach

se]
1st meas. system: Error counter for zero mark mon.
Enc 1: Error counter for zero mark monitoring

NC variables

se]
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaEnc2CompVal (C, SEMA) $VA_ENC2_COMP_VAL[Achse]

fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

se]
2nd meas. system: Error counter for zero mark mon.
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaFoc (C, SEMA) $VA_FOC[Achse]

Actual status of "ForceControl"
Return value 0: ForceControl not active
1: Modal ForceControl active
2: Non-modal ForceControl active
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 2
Addressing

NC variables
vaFoc (C, SEMA) $VA_FOC[Achse]

$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaFxs (C, SEMA) $VA_FXS[Achse]

Actual status of "Travel to fixed stop"
Return value 0: Axis not at fixed stop
1: Successful travel to fixed stop
2: Unsuccessful travel to fixed stop
3: Travel to fixed stop selection active
4: Fixed stop has been detected
5: Travel to fixed stop deselection active
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 5
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaIm1 (C, SEMA) $VA_IM1[x]

Alternative name: aaIm1
Actual value encoder 1
Actual value in the machine coordinate system (measured encoder 1)
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

fined
Addressing

NC variables

$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaIm (C, SEMA) $VA_IM[x]

Alternative name: aaIm
Encoder master value
Encoder actual value in the machine coordinate system (measured
active measuring system)
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaLagError (C, SEMA) $VA_LAG_ERROR[Achse]

Axis following error
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaLoad (C, SEMA) $VA_LOAD[Achse]

Drive utilization in %
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
vaPosctrlMode (C, SEMA) $VA_POSCTRL_MODE[Achse]

Position controller mode
Return value 0: Position control
1: Speed control
2: Holding
3: Parking
4: Tracking
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 4
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaPower (C, SEMA) $VA_POWER[Achse]

Active drive power
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaPressureA (C, SEMA) $VA_PRESSURE_A[Achse]

Pressure on A end of the cylinder
Pressure on A end of the cylinder in bar (only for Hydraulic)
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaPressureB (C, SEMA) $VA_PRESSURE_B[Achse]

Pressure on B end of the cylinder
Pressure on B end of the cylinder in bar (only for Hydraulic)
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0

NC variables
vaPressureB (C, SEMA) $VA_PRESSURE_B[Achse]

Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaSce (C, SEMA) $VA_SCE[Achse]

Status of speed controller enable
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaStopSi (C, SEMA) $VA_STOPSI[Achse]

Stop from Safety Integrated
Return value -1: No stop
0: Stop A
1: Stop B
2: Stop C
3: Stop D
4: Stop E
5: Stop F
10: Test stop of NC
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaSyncDiff (C, SEMA)

fined
Addressing

NC variables
vaSyncDiff (C, SEMA)

$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaSyncDiffStat (C, SEMA) $VA_SYNCDIFF_STAT[Achse]

- TYPE_DWORD 0 -4 1
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaTempCompVal (C, SEMA) $VA_TEMP_COMP_VAL[Achse]

Axial temperature compensation value
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaTorque (C, SEMA) $VA_TORQUE[Achse]

Drive torque setpoint
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
vaTorqueAtLimit (C, SEMA) $VA_TORQUE_AT_LIMIT[Achse]

Status information torque limitation
Status "effective torque equals specified torque limit"
Return value 0: Effective torque lower than torque limit

1: Effective torque has reached torque limit
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaVactm (C, SEMA) $VA_VACTM[x] x = Axis

Axis velocity actual value load side in the MCS
Axis velocity actual value on the load side in the MCS
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaValveLift (C, SEMA) $VA_VALVELIFT[Achse]

Actual valve lift
Actual valve lift in mm (only for Hydraulic)
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaXfaultSi (C, SEMA) $VA_XFAULTSI[Achse]

Stop F through cross-checking error active
Return value Bit 0 set: An actual value error has been discovered in the cross-check between NCK and
drive
Bit 1 set: Some error has been discovered in the cross-check between NCK and drive
and the waiting time until Stop B ($MA_SAFE_STOP_SWITCH_TIME_F) is running or has
expired

NC variables
vaXfaultSi (C, SEMA) $VA_XFAULTSI[Achse]

- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
activeSvOverride (C, SEMA)

SG override factor
Currently active SG override factor in the NCK
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaAcc (C, SEMA) $AA_ACC[Achse]

Current axial acceleration value
m/s2, 1000 inch/ s2, rev/ TYPE_DOUBLE 0
s2, user defined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaSyncDiff (C, SEMA) $AA_SYNCDIFF[Achse]

fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
aaJogPosSelected (C, SEMA) $AA_JOG_POS_SELECTED[Achse]

JOG to position is active
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$maxnumGlobMachAxes
Read access
aaJogPosAct (C, SEMA) $AA_JOG_POS_ACT[Achse]

Position reached for JOG to position
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
Read access
vaEnc1ZeroMonAccessCnt (C, SEMA) $VA_ENC_ZERO_MON_AC‐

CESS_CNT[1,Achse]
Enc1:Update counter zero monitoring accesses
Enc1: Update counter
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaEnc2ZeroMonAccessCnt (C, SEMA) $VA_ENC_ZERO_MON_AC‐

CESS_CNT[2,Achse]
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
vaAbsoluteEnc1DeltaInit (C, SEMA) $VA_ABSOLUTE_ENC_DELTA_IN‐

IT[1,Achse]
Enc 1: Initial difference with absolute encoder
Enc1: Initial difference
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaAbsoluteEnc2DeltaInit (C, SEMA) $VA_ABSOLUTE_ENC_DELTA_IN‐

IT[2,Achse]
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaEnc1ZeroMonAct (C, SEMA) $VA_ENC_ZERO_MON_ACT[1,Achse]

Enc1: Current internal zero monitoring values
Enc1: Zero monitoring values
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing

NC variables

$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaAbsoluteEnc1ZeroMonMax (C, SEMA) $VA_ABSO‐

LUTE_ENC_ZERO_MON_MAX[1,Achse]
Enc1:Maximum of $$vaEnc1ZeroMonAct w. abs. encoder
Enc1:Maximum of $$vaEnc1ZeroMonAct with absolute encoder
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaAbsoluteEnc2ZeroMonMax (C, SEMA) $VA_ABSO‐

LUTE_ENC_ZERO_MON_MAX[2,Achse]
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaCoupCorr (C, SEMA) $AA_COUP_CORR[Achse]

Gen. coupling: comp. value of synchronism diff.
This variable is used to execute the function "Correct synchronism error".
It returns the compensation value for the position offset for the generic coupling with CPFRS = "MCS".
The actual values of this spindle are compared with the setpoints for the duration (MD 30455 MISC_FUNCTION_MASK,
bit 7) of the activation of the VDI interface signal
DB31...,DBX31.6 'Correct synchronism' for the following spindle with coupling active.
The difference is the compensation value, which can be read with this variable.

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
aaCoupCorrDist (C, SEMA) $AA_COUP_CORR_DIST[Achse]

Generic coupling: path for $$aaCoupCorr
Generic coupling: path still to be retracted for $$aaCoupCorr
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaEnc1ZeroMonInit (C, SEMA) $VA_ENC_ZERO_MON_INIT[1,Achse]

Enc1:Hardware counter value of basic zero mark
Enc1:Hardware counter value of the basic zero mark
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaEnc2ZeroMonInit (C, SEMA) $VA_ENC_ZERO_MON_INIT[2,Achse]

- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
safeDesChecksum1 (C, SEMA)

Setpoint hardware checksum
Setpoint checksum of the current values of the safety-relevant machine data dependent on hardware parameterization
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing

NC variables
aaMaslDef (C, SEMA) $AA_MASL_DEF

Current status of master-slave configuration
Zero is displayed as default if the coupling is not configured.
A master axis also shows default value zero.
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
clampStatus (C, SEMA)

Axis is connected (VDI input signal)
Return value Bit 0 = 1: Axis is connected
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaMachax (C, SEMA) $AA_MACHAX

Assignment of physical axis
The NCU and machine axis are output for an axis, representing the physical image of the axis.
The machine axis must be assigned to at least one channel on this NCU, otherwise 0 will be returned.
Without an NCU link, i.e. if there is only one NCU, only the number of the machine axis will be output. In this case, the
NCU ID is equal to zero.
Return value The NCU ID is output as from position 100, e.g. 20005: NCU 2 axis 5.
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
aaIpoNcChanax (C, SEMA) $AA_IPO_NC_CHANAX

NC, channel and channel axis no. of interpolator.
If the axis is currently interpolated to this NCU, the channel and channel axis number which define the interpolator of the
axis are output.
If the axis is currently interpolated to a different NCU, the NCU identifier of the interpolated NCU and the global axis num‐
ber of the machine axis are output.
This global axis number can then be used to transfer the interpolated channel and the channel axis number to the other
NCU, with NCU ID 2, with anlpoChanAx[203].
The axis must be assigned to at least one channel on this NCU, otherwise 0 will be returned.
Return value The channel is output as from position 100, and the channel axis number is output as from
position 1, e.g. 1005 - channel 10 channel axis 5. These values are always lower than
10000.
The NCU is output as from position 10000, e.g. 20203: NCU 2 and the global axis number is
203.
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaIpoNcChanax (C, SEMA) $VA_IPO_NC_CHANAX

Machine axis to interpolator.
If the machine axis is currently interpolated to this NCU, the channel and channel number which define the interpolator of
the axis are output.
If the machine axis is currently interpolated to a different NCU, the NCU identifier of the interpolated NCU and the global
axis number of the machine axis are output.
NCU, with NCU ID 2, with anIpoChanAx[203].
10000.
203.
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
vaMotSensorDigi (C, SEMA) $VA_MOT_SENSOR_DIGI

Digital sensors on the motor
This variable determines the states of the digital sensors S4 and S5.
The variable is bit-coded, and has the following meanings:
Bit0 = 0:
Bit1 = 0:
Bit2 = 0:
Bit3 = 0:
Bit4 = 1: Sensor S4 piston end position
Bit5 = 1: Sensor S5 angular position of the shaft
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaMotSensorAna (C, SEMA) $VA_MOT_SENSOR_ANA

Analog sensor on the motor
This variable determines the analog measured value of sensor S1.
At a resolution of 1 mV, the analog value 0 - 10 V is mapped by a maximum of +10000 increments.

- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaMotSensorConf (C, SEMA) $VA_MOT_SENSOR_CONF

Configuration of motor sensors
The configuration of the motor sensors can be queried with this variable.
Bit0 = 1: Sensor system present.
Bit1 = 1: Sensor S1 present. Analog measured value for position of the draw-bar.
Bit2 = 0:
Bit3 = 0:
Bit4 = 1: Sensor S4 present. Digital value for the piston end position
Bit5 = 1: Sensor S5 present. Digital value for the angular position of the shaft.

NC variables
vaMotSensorConf (C, SEMA) $VA_MOT_SENSOR_CONF

- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaMotClampingState (C, SEMA) $VA_MOT_CLAMPING_STATE

State of the clamping system
Starting from the position of the draw-bar (value of the S1), this variable determines the clamping state.
A maximum speed is assigned to each state. These are stored in the drive parameters p5043[0..6].
The following values are possible:
0: Sensor not present
1: Initial state, speed limit 0 rpm
2: Alarm, speed limit 0 rpm
3: Tool released / ejected, speed limit see drive parameter p5043[0]
4: Clamping (by spring force), speed limit see drive parameter p5043[1]
5: Releasing (by compressed air), speed limit see drive parameter p5043[2]
7: Clamped with tool, speed limit see drive parameter p5043[4]
9: Further clamping (by spring force), speed limit see drive parameter p5043[5]
10: Clamped without tool, speed limit see drive parameter p5043[6]
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaCpSync2 (C, SEMA) $VA_CPSYNC2[a]

Status synchronism(2) of the foll. axis / spindle
Second synchronism monitoring of the following axis / spindle
Return value 0: Monitoring not active
Bit 0 = 1: Monitoring 'Synchronism(2) coarse' active
Bit 1 = 1: Synchronism(2) coarse available
Bit 2 = 1: Monitoring 'Synchronism(2) fine' active
Bit 3 = 1: Synchronism(2) fine available

NC variables
vaCpSync2 (C, SEMA) $VA_CPSYNC2[a]

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaPosRes (C, SEMA) $AA_POSRES

Axis status "Position restored"
Axis status "Position restored".
The value TRUE shows that the position of the axis has been restored after the voltage breakdown.
($MA_ENC_REFP_STATE[] = 3). After referencing of the axis, the value goes to FALSE.
Return value 1 = TRUE: Axis position not restored
0 = FALSE: Axis position restored
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaCollPos (C, SEMA) $AA_COLLPOS[Achse]

Collision position
Position of a machine axis with risk of collision
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
driveDdsPerMds (C, SEMA)

Number of drive data sets
Number of drive data sets assigned to a motor data set.
Refer to the SINAMICS S120 Function Manual for more information about drive and motor data sets.
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables
driveDdsPerMds (C, SEMA)

$$numMachAxes
Read access
spindleModePiState (C, SEMA)

Status of the spindle mode switchover
Status of the spindle mode switchover for this machine axis by PI service _N_SPIMOD
Return value 0 = PI service not selected
10 = PI service active
50 = PI service ended successfully
101 = PI service rejected because axis/spindle is not known in the channel
102 = PI service rejected because axis/spindle is not available in the channel
104 = PI service rejected because axis/spindle is not defined as a spindle.
105 = PI service rejected because axis/spindle is a permanently assigned PLC axis/spindle
106 = PI service rejected because axis/spindle is an active following axis/spindle
107 = PI service rejected because axis/spindle is a transformed spindle/axis
108 = PI service rejected because axis/spindle is not available as a command axis
200 = PI service rejected because of an internal error
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
aaLoadSmooth (C, SEMA) $AA_LOAD_SMOOTH[Achse]

Smoothed drive load
Smoothed drive load in %
% TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
aaPowerSmooth (C, SEMA) $AA_POWER_SMOOTH[Achse]

Smoothed drive power
Smoothed drive power in W (only available for PROFIdrive drives)
W TYPE_DOUBLE

NC variables
aaPowerSmooth (C, SEMA) $AA_POWER_SMOOTH[Achse]

Addressing
Read access
safeAxisType (C, SEMA)

Safety axis mode
Type of axial safety monitoring
0 = No SINUMERIK Safety Integrated active
1 = SINUMERIK Safety Integrated (SPL) active
2 = SINUMERIK Safety Integrated plus (F-PLC) active
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
enc1IsOn (C, SEMA)

Position measuring system 1 is enabled
Operating status of position measuring system 1
Return value 0 = Position measuring system 1 parked (or is not configured), may be removed
1 = Position measuring system 1 is passive
2 = Position measuring system 1 is active (e.g. position control)
- TYPE_UWORD 0 2
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
enc2IsOn (C, SEMA)

- TYPE_UWORD 0 2

NC variables
enc2IsOn (C, SEMA)

Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
vaAxForce (C, SEMA) $VA_AX_FORCE[x] x = Axis

Feedrate force
N TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
3.2.3.22 SGA: State data in the WCS
All status data that are dependent on machine movement and specified in the workpiece coordinate system are
included in module SGA. Supplementary information can be found in module SEGA. The individual variables
are defined as arrays where the line index is the number of the axis (assigned to the current channel).The varia‐
ble "name" in module SGA with the line index in question identifies the axis.
The assignment of the line indices in modules SGA and SEGA is identical.
With SW 5.2 and later, OPI modules SGA and SEGA can be addressed via the geo-axis no. instead of via the
channel axis no.:
Line index 1001: 1st geo-axis
Line index 1002: 2nd geo-axis
Line index 1003: 3rd geo-axis
The number of channel axes (geometry, special axes and spindles) can be found in "$$numMachAxes" in mod‐
ule Y in area C.
actIncrVal (C, SGA) DB31-61, DBB5

Active INC weighting of the axis
Return value 0 = INC_10000
1 = INC_1000
2 = INC_100
3 = INC_10
4 = INC_1
5 = INC_VAR
6 = INC_JOG_CONT
7 = no increment mode has been set

NC variables
actIncrVal (C, SGA) DB31-61, DBB5

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
actProgPos (C, SGA)

Programmed position, actual value
Programmed position, actual value. The physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module)
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
actToolBasePos (C, SGA)

Tool base position
Tool base position. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (from this module)
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
actToolEdgeCenterPos (C, SGA) $AA_IW[x] x = Axis

Center point of a cutting edge
Center point of a cutting edge. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (from this module)
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes

NC variables
cmdProgPos (C, SGA)

Programmed position, desired value
Programmed position, desired value. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module)
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
cmdToolBasePos (C, SGA)

Position of tool base, desired value
Tool base position, desired value . Physical unit is defined in variable extUnit (in this module).
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
cmdToolEdgeCenterPos (C, SGA)

Position of the cutting edge center point.
Position of the cutting edge center point. Physical unit is defined in variable extUnit (in this module).
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
extUnit (C, SGA)

Current physical unit
Current physical unit of the related geometry axis or auxiliary axis
Return value 0 = mm
1 = inch
2 = degree
3 = indexing position
4 = userdef

NC variables
extUnit (C, SGA)

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
name (C, SGA)

Axis name
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
progDistToGo (C, SGA)

Programmed position, distance-to-go
Programmed position, distance-to-go. The physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
progREPOS (C, SGA)

Programmed position, REPOS
Programmed position, REPOS. The physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes

NC variables
status (C, SGA)

Axis status
Return value 0 = travel command in plus direction
1 = travel command in minus direction
2 = exact position coarse reached
3 = exact position fine reached
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
subType (C, SGA)

Geometry or auxiliary axis
Axis type geometry or auxiliary axis
Return value 0 = auxiliary axis
1 = geometry axis
2 = orientation axis
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
toolBaseDistToGo (C, SGA)

Tool base distance-to-go
Tool base distance-to-go. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module)
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
toolBaseREPOS (C, SGA)

Tool base REPOS
Tool base REPOS. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).

NC variables
toolBaseREPOS (C, SGA)

fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
toolEdgeCenterDistToGo (C, SGA)

Center point of cutting edge distance-to-go
Center point of cutting edge distance-to-go. Physical unit results from the variable extUnit (in this module)
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
toolEdgeCenterREPOS (C, SGA)

Center point of the cutting edge REPOS
Center point of the cutting edge REPOS. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
varIncrVal (C, SGA)

Settable value for INC_VAR
Setable value for INC_VAR. The physical unit depends on whether the axis is rotary or linear. Linear axes: 1mm rotary
axes: 1/1000 degrees
fined
Addressing

NC variables
varIncrVal (C, SGA)

$$numMachAxes
3.2.3.23 SINF: Part program-specific state data
During automatic execution of a part program different parameters can influence the type of machining. The
current status data for the selected part program are combined in module SINF. The status data must only be
changed via the PLC. interface.
DRFActive (C, SINF)

DRF active
Return value 0 = not active
1 = active
- TYPE_UWORD
feedStopActive (C, SINF)

Feed disable
1 = active
- TYPE_UWORD
ipoBlocksOnly (C, SINF)

Display traversing blocks
Return value 0 = normal block transfer
1 = exclusively traversing blocks
- TYPE_UWORD
optAssStopActive (C, SINF)

Associated M01 selected
Return value 0: Not selected
1: Selected
- TYPE_UWORD 0

NC variables
optAssStopActive (C, SINF)

Addressing
1
Read access
optStopActive (C, SINF)

M01 selected
Return value 0 = not selected
1 = selected
- TYPE_UWORD
progTestActive (C, SINF) DB21-30, DBX1.7 K1

Program test
1 = active
- TYPE_UWORD
rapFeedRateOvrActive (C, SINF)

ROV rapid traverse override
1 = active
- TYPE_UWORD
singleBlockActive (C, SINF)

Single block
Single block, SBL
Return value 0 = no single block
1 = SBL 1
2 = SBL 2
- TYPE_UWORD

NC variables
singleBlockType (C, SINF)

Single block mode
Return value 1 = interpolation single block
2 = decoder single block
- TYPE_UWORD
skipLevel0Active (C, SINF)

Skip level /0
Info whether skip level /0 is activated.
Return value 0: Skip level /0 not active
1: Skip level /0 active
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1

Skip level /1
Info whether skip level /1 is activated
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1

Skip level /2
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1

Skip level /3

NC variables

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1

Skip level /4
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1

Skip level /5
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1

Skip level /6
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1

Skip level /7

NC variables

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1

Skip level /8
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Read access

Skip level /9
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Read access
trialRunActive (C, SINF) DB21-30, DBX0.6 V1

Dry run feedrate
1 = active
- TYPE_UWORD
3.2.3.24 SMA: State data in the MCS
the axis.

NC variables
actIncrVal (C, SMA) DB31-61, DBB5 H1

1 = INC_1000
2 = INC_100
3 = INC_10
4 = INC_1
5 = INC_VAR
6 = INC_JOG_CONT
7 = no incremental mode set
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
actToolBasePos (C, SMA) $AA_IM[x] x = Ax is

Act tool base position
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
cmdToolBasePos (C, SMA)

fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes

NC variables
extUnit (C, SMA)

Current physical unit of the axis position
Return value 0 = mm
1 = inch
2 = degree
4 = userdef
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
name (C, SMA)

Axis name
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
status (C, SMA)

Axis status
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
toolBaseDistToGo (C, SMA)

Tool base distance-to-go. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).

NC variables
toolBaseDistToGo (C, SMA)

fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
toolBaseREPOS (C, SMA)

Tool base REPOS
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
varIncrVal (C, SMA)

Settable value for INC_VAR. The physical value depends on whether the axis is linear or rotary.
Linear axis: unit is 1 mm
Rotary axis: unit is 1/1000 degrees
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
3.2.3.25 SNCF: Active G-functions
All G functions are organized in G groups. Only one function of each G group can be active at a time.
The module SNCF consists of a single variable that is organized as an array. The row index corresponds to the
G group number.

NC variables
ncFkt (C, SNCF)

Active G function
Active G-function of relevant group
G <No>.
If there is no function active within the corresponding G-group, the variable returns an empty string "\0".
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
$$numGCodeGroups
ncFktAct (C, SNCF)

Active G function (current language)
Active G function of relevant current group in current
language mode.
Depending on whether function has been programmed in Siemens or
ISO Dialect mode, this is identical to $$ncFkt or $$ncFktFanuc.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
$$numGCodeGroups bzw. $$numGCode‐
GroupsFanuc
Read access
ncFktBin (C, SNCF)

Active G-function of the correponding group
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numGCodeGroups
Read access

NC variables
ncFktBinAct (C, SNCF)

Index act. G function (current language)
Active G function of relevant current group in current
language mode.
Depending on whether function has been programmed in Siemens or
ISO Dialect mode, this is identical to $$ncFktBin or $$ncFktBinFanuc.
(The value is the index of the active G function within the group)
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numGCodeGroups bzw. $$numGCode‐
GroupsFanuc
Read access
ncFktBinFanuc (C, SNCF)

Index of active G function (ISO Dialect)
Active G function of relevant ISO Dialect group
(the value is the index of the active G function within the group)
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numGCodeGroupsFanuc
Read access
ncFktBinS (C, SNCF)

Index of the active G function for block search
Index of the active G function of the corresponding group for block search with calculation
Notice: This variable is available only for logging block search events,
but not for the Variable Service.
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numGCodeGroups
Read access

NC variables
ncFktFanuc (C, SNCF)

Active G function (ISO Dialect)
Active G function of relevant ISO Dialect group
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
$$numGCodeGroupsFanuc
Read access
ncFktS (C, SNCF)

Name of the active G function for block search
Name of the active G function of the corresponding group for block search with calculation
Notice: This variable is available only for logging block search events,
but not for the Variable Service.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
$$numGCodeGroups
Read access
3.2.3.26 SPARP: Part program information
This module contains information on the currently active part programm in the respective channel.
absoluteBlockBufferName (C, SPARP)

Upload buffer for display blocks
File name with path of upload buffer in which display blocks are stored
Return value Empty string: Function is deactivated

- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
absoluteBlockBufferPreview (C, SPARP)

Part of $$absoluteBlockBufferName
Part of content of file $$absoluteBlockBufferName.
The desired content of the variables is set by $MC_MM_ABSBLOCK_BUFFER_CONF.
In principle, only complete parts program blocks are entered.

If the desired number of previous blocks are not present, then an empty block ("LF") is entered in that place.
If there is insufficient space for all parts program blocks, then the previous blocks are first replaced by empty blocks ("LF"),
if this is still insufficient, the blocks at the end are also omitted.

- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
1
Read access
absoluteBlockCounter (C, SPARP)

Modification counter for upload buffer
Modification counter for display information in the upload buffer
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
actBlock (C, SPARP)

Current block (DISPLOF active)
Current part program block.
With DISPLOF the subroutine call is displayed.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
actBlockA (C, SPARP)

Current block (DISPLOF inactive)
Current part program block.
If search run is active, then search run block is displayed.
Display is always made irrespective of DISPLOF.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
1
Read access
actBlockI (C, SPARP)

Current interpreter block
Current part program in the interpreter.
Display is always made irrespective of DISPLOF.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
1
Read access
actLineNumber (C, SPARP)

Line number of current NC instruction (start:1)
Line number of the current NC instruction (starting at 1)
0: before program start
-1: not available due to an error
-2: not available because of DISPLOF
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
actPartProgram (C, SPARP)

Content of the current part program
Content of the current part program starting with the previous block.
Blocks may be cut off at the end of the string.
The line index determines the section within the program.
An efficient current block display can be achieved with the aid of a cyclic variable service.
If multiple lines are required, then it must be ensured that the client reads line 1 first, so that an NCK internal buffer is
filled, which ensures that the following lines are returned accordingly.
Note: In EES mode, only the current part program block is ever returned!
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
3
Read access
block (C, SPARP)

Part program blocks from the current operation
To display the currently active part program, NCK supplies up to 3 blocks of the part program in one single variable job
(last, current and next block).
Line index 1: string of the last block

Line index 2: string of the current block
Line index 3: string of the next block
To gain consistent information, all 3 array elements must be processed in one variable request. This is why the maximum
string length of each array element is limited to 66 characters.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
3
blockNoStr (C, SPARP)

Block number
- TYPE_STRING
Read access

NC variables
circleCenter (C, SPARP)

Center of the circle
Center of the circle (WCS)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
3
Read access
circleCenterS (C, SPARP)

Corr. to circleCenter for block search with calc.
Corresponds to circleCenter for search with calculation
Attention: This variable is available for protocolling the block search events only, not for the Variable Service!
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
3
Read access
circlePlane (C, SPARP)

Vector of circular plane
The vector perpendicular to the circular plane (axial) is output
to enable identification of the position of a circle in space
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
3
Read access
circlePlaneData (C, SPARP)

circlePlaneData
To identify the position of a circle in space, the vector
which is vertical to the plane of the circle is output (vector)
- TYPE_DOUBLE

NC variables
circlePlaneData (C, SPARP)

Addressing
1
Read access
circlePlaneDataNorm (C, SPARP)

circlePlaneDataNorm
To identify the position of a circle in space,
the vector which is vertical to the plane of the circle is output
(normalized vector)
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
circlePlaneDataNormS (C, SPARP)

circlePlaneDataNormS
To identify the position of a circle in space during the search,
the vector which is vertical to the plane of the circle is output
(normalized vector)
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
circlePlaneS (C, SPARP)

Vector circular plane block search
The vector perpendicular to the circular plane (axial) is output
to enable identification of the position of a circle in space
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
3
Read access

NC variables
circleRadius (C, SPARP)

Radius of the circle (only effective for G02/G03)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
circleRadiusS (C, SPARP)

circleRadius for block search.
Corresponds to $$circleRadius for block search with calculation.
Note: This variable is not available for the variable service, but only for logging in connection with block search events!
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
circleTurn (C, SPARP)

Programmed circular passes
Progr. number of additional circular passes with
helical interpolation in curr. program
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
circleTurnS (C, SPARP)

Programmed circular passes search
Programmed number of additional circular passes with
helical interpolation in the current program for search with calculation.
Note: This variable is not available for the Variable Service, but only for
logging of block search events
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleCenterEns (C, SPARP)

Arc center in relation to WOS frame
Arc center in relation to WOS frame, i.e. with tool length but
without tool radius
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
3
Read access
cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleCenterEnsS (C,
SPARP)
Corresponds to circleCenterWos
Corresponds to circleCenterWos for block search with calculation
in relation to the WOS frame, i.e. with tool length but without tool radius
Note: This variable is not available for the variable service, but only for
logging in connection with block search events!
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
3
Read access
cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleDataEns (C, SPARP)

cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleDataEns
Corresponds to $$cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleCenterEns for the 3 geometry axes
as well as $$cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleRadiusEns
The variable consists of four values of the DOUBLE type, i.e. is 32 bytes long.
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleRadiusEns (C, SPARP)

Arc radius in relation to WOS frame
Arc radius in relation to WOS frame as center-point path, i.e. with tool
length but without tool radius
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
1
Read access
cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleRadiusEnsS (C,
SPARP)
Corresponds to circleRadiusWos
Corresponds to circleRadiusWos for block search with calculation
in relation to WOS frame as center-point path. i.e. with tool length
Note: This variable is not available for the variable service, but only for
logging in connection with block search events!
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
1
Read access
lastBlockNoStr (C, SPARP)

Last programmed block number
Indicates the last programmed block number, if $MN_DISPLAY_FUNCTION_MASK bit 0 is set.
A block number is shown until either a new block number is programmed or the subroutine level which generated the
block number has been left.
Block numbers of masked blocks are not displayed.

There is also no display if DISPLOF is active.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing

NC variables
lastBlockNoStr (C, SPARP)

1
Read access
msg (C, SPARP) PG

Message from the part program
Messages from a part program can be programmed with the instruction 'MSG (...)'. The variable 'msg' contains the text of
the current 'MSG(...)'-instruction until a new instrucion is processed or until the message is deleted with the instruction
'MSG ()'.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
1
progName (C, SPARP)

Program name
Progam name of the currently active program (or subroutine)
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
1
seekOffset (C, SPARP)

Line number of current NC block
Line number of the current NC block in the program $$/C/SPARP/workPandProgName
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
seekw (C, SPARP)

Line enabled for modification
First line enabled for modification in part program

NC variables
seekw (C, SPARP)

- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
selectedWorkPProg (C, SPARP)

Currently selected program
Currently selected program, i.e. the program that has been selected
with "Select".
The variable also displays the program in the JOG and MDI modes.
During the simulation, the simulation search temporarily deselects
the selected program and selects the program to be simulated.
This is hidden by selectedWorkPProg, i.e. during the simulation search,
selectedWorkPProg remains unchanged.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
1
Read access
singleBlock (C, SPARP)

Single block read in quasi-stop state
In most cases the variable 'block' is used to read the currently active blocks of the part program. Because this variable is
limited to 66 characters per string, it might be necessary (for long blocks) to read longer strings. The variable 'singleBlock'
can read complete blocks (up to strings with 198 charecters) . 3 lines can be addressed:
Line index 1: last block

Line index 2: current block
Line index 3: next block
It is not guaranteed for rapid block changes, that the information of 3 successive blocks is always consistent, because
each block is read with a single variable request. This method is only safe, if the part program has stopped.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
3

NC variables
stepEditorFormName (C, SPARP)

Current module name for step editor
Current module name for step editor is stored

- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
1
Read access
workPName (C, SPARP)

Workpiece name abbreviated
Name of the active workpiece
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
1
workPNameLong (C, SPARP)

Workpiece name
Name of the active workpiece
- TYPE_STRING
Read access
workPandProgName (C, SPARP)

Workpiece and program name
Workpiece name and name of current program.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
byteOffset (C, SPARP)

Byte offset of the current NC block
Byte offset of the current NC block in the program $$/C/SPARP/workPandProgName
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
extProgFlag (C, SPARP)

External execution
Indicates whether programs are being executed externally
Return value 0: Program is being processed from NCK program memory
1: Program is being executed externally
2: Program is being executed in EES mode
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
displProgLevel (C, SPARP)

Program level to be displayed.
Lowest program level to be displayed.
The value 1 corresponds to the main program level.
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
displProgLevelVL (C, SPARP)

Program level in the VL, which shall be displayed.
Lowest preprocessing program level that shall be displayed.

NC variables
displProgLevelVL (C, SPARP)

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
workPandProgNameVL (C, SPARP)

Workpiece name and program name VL
Workpiece name and program name of the current program in the preprocessing.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
1
Read access
byteOffsetVL (C, SPARP)

Byte offset of NC block VL
Byte offset of the current NC block in the preprocessing
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
eesBufferStart (C, SPARP)

Byte offset of the first block in the EES buffer
The value is only relevant with EES, when the part program is partially loaded into a buffer NCK.
It indicates wthich NC block is entered first in the buffer.
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
eesBufferEnd (C, SPARP)

Byte offset following the last block in the buffer
The value is only relevant with EED, when the part program is partially loaded into a buffer of the NCK.
It indicates which NC block has been entered last in the buffer.
The comparison with the value $$byteOffsetVL shows whether the reloading process is performed quickly enough in order
to perform the preprocessing run without delay.
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
eesBufferFilling (C, SPARP)

Number of bytes for interpreter
The value is only relevant with EES, when the part program is partially loaded into a buffer of the NCK.
It indicates who many bytes are provided to the interpreter for processing in a the buffer ($$eesBufferEnd - $$byteOff‐
setVL).
If the value approaches 0, this indicates that the reloading process is not performed quickly enough in order to supply the
interpreter quickly enough with NC blocks.
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
eesBufferStatus (C, SPARP)

Status of the EES buffer
- TYPE_STRING
Read access
eesProgLevel (C, SPARP)

Program level in the EES to be displayed.
Lowest program level of the EES reloading mode, which shall be displayed.
- TYPE_UWORD

NC variables
eesProgLevel (C, SPARP)

Addressing
1
Read access
3.2.3.27 SPARPF: Search pointer for block search
To look for a particular block within a parts program the user can enter search criteria and start a block search.
The variables to be entered are combined in the module SPARPF and must be written by the HMI (or another
component on the MPI bus).
One main program level and 11 subroutine levels can be processed. These levels are the row indices of the
individual variables. The search targets (seek pointer and search string) can only be used mutually exclusively
in one level. If a collision occurs, a negative acknowledgment results when the block search is started.
Depending on the search type, the search string is either a block label, block number or any string.
If no path name is specified, the default search strategy for subroutine calls is used. The main program entered
in the first program level must be selected for the block search; otherwise the search request is acknowledged
negatively.
The array indices (row indices) mean:
1 = main program level for search run

2-18 = subroutine levels for search run
101 = main program level for stop run

102-118 = subroutine levels for stop run
forward (C, SPARPF)

Search direction
Search direction
Search direction "backwards" is only possible in the mode without calculation
Return value 1 = backwards (without calculation)
2 = forwards
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
18

NC variables
invocCount (C, SPARPF)

Actual value of subroutine call counter.
Actual value of the subroutine call counter. Is always 1 for the main program.
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
18
plcStartReason (C, SPARPF)

Specification of channel for SERUPRO
Specifies for the SERUPRO function which channel has to be started by the PLC so that the current channel starts.

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
112
progName (C, SPARPF)

Program name
Program name. The main program that is used in the first main program level must be selected for the block search, other‐
wise the search request will be acknowledged negatively.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
18
searchString (C, SPARPF)

Search string
Search string (the first 64 characters of the NC block - corresponding to search pointer). Contents of the search string
depends on the search type and are either:
block label
block number
any string

NC variables
searchString (C, SPARPF)

- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
18
searchType (C, SPARPF)

Search type
Return value 1 = block number
2 = label
3 = string
4 = program level
5 = search pointer line-oriented (searching for line feeds)
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
18
seekOffset (C, SPARPF)

Search pointer
Search pointer (line-oriented, searching for line feeds). If the search pointer is used, a program name (progName) must
always have been defined. The search pointer refers to this program.
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
18
status (C, SPARPF)

Without function
This variable is without function in block SPARPF.
It has only been introduced to achieve the same structure of SPARPI and SPARPF.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 0

NC variables
status (C, SPARPF)

Addressing
1
workPName (C, SPARPF)

Workpiece name = path name in the NC file structure. If no path name is specified, the default search strategy for subrou‐
tine calls is used.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
18
workPNameLong (C, SPARPF)

Workpiece name
Workpiece name = path name in the NCK file structure. If no path name is specified, the default search strategy for sub‐
routine calls is used.
Note: This variable is ignored when lines are accessed!
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
18
workPNameL (C, SPARPF)

Workpiece name
Workpiece name = path name in the NCK file structure. If no path name is specified, the default search strategy for sub‐
routine calls is used.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
18

NC variables
haltBlock (C, SPARPF)

Hold block
The following applies to the SPARPI: The interrupt pointer does not mark the block
where the program was cancelled but a previous block (hold block), which enables a better resumption.
The hold block is explicitly set with the part program commands IPTRLOCK and IPTRUNLOCK,
or implicitly manipulated via $MC_AUTO_IPTR_LOCK.
The following applies to the SPARPF: If SPARPI is copied completely,
the value of the hold block which was set by the NCK is retained.
This enables the NCK to recognize the situation, and it responds with the suppressed message alarm 16950.
NOTE: For SPARPI and SPARPF this value is ONLY defined for program level 0.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
1
Read access
displayState (C, SPARPF)

Display status for block display.
Display state for block display.
(Blocks should not be displayed automatically for program levels for which DISPLAY OFF has been programmed in the
PROC instruction. This is valid also for the subroutine levels below).
Return value Value Meaning
0= DISPLAY OFF for the program level
1= DISPLAY ON for the program level
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
18
Read access
byteOffset (C, SPARPF)

Search pointer (byte-oriented)
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
18
Read access

NC variables
3.2.3.28 SPARPI: Program pointer at interruption
In order to be able to continue at the point of interruption in a program, the current states of the main program
and any subroutines must be stored. On a program interrupt the information is immediately updated in the NCK
and reamins valid even after RESET.
This makes it possible to read the states of the main program level and the 11 subroutine levels (incl. ASUB
levels).
1 = main program level

2-18 = subroutine levels
forward (C, SPARPI)

Search direction
Return value 2 = forwards
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
18
invocCount (C, SPARPI)

Actual value of the subroutine call counter. Is always 1 for the main program.
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
18
plcStartReason (C, SPARPI)

Specification of channel for SERUPRO
Specifies for the SERUPRO function which channel has to be started by the PLC so that the current channel starts.

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0

NC variables
plcStartReason (C, SPARPI)

Addressing
18
Read access
progName (C, SPARPI)

Program name
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
18
searchString (C, SPARPI)

Search string
Search string (the first 64 characters of the NC block - corresponding to the search pointer)
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
18
searchType (C, SPARPI)

Search type
Return value 5 = search pointer line-oriented (searching for line feed characters)
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
18
seekOffset (C, SPARPI)

Search pointer
Search pointer (line-oriented, searching for linefeed characters)
1fffffff HEX is returned if the value is invalid.

NC variables
seekOffset (C, SPARPI)

- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
18
status (C, SPARPI)

Status of block SPARPI
Informs about whether block SPARPI includes currently
valid values, and provides the reason for the last update of the
block, if available.
Note: If an interruption occurs in a program range between the command
IPTRLOCK and IPTRUNLOCK, the first block after IPTRLOCK will be provided
in the SPARPI instead of the current block.
The first interruption between IPTRLOCK and IPTRUNLOCK will set "status"
and any additional interruption prior to IPTRUNLOCK will neither change "status" nor SPARPI.
Return value 0: Program is running, i.e. SPARPI variables are not up-to-date
1: Program selection, i.e. SPARPI has been reset
2: Block selection through PI service _N_SEL_BL
3: Reset (program abort)
4: Stop after program instruction, e.g. M0
5: Stop with STOP key
6: Stop caused by alarm
- TYPE_UWORD 1 0 6
Addressing
1
Read access
workPName (C, SPARPI)

Workpiece name = path name in the NC file structure
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
18

NC variables
workPNameLong (C, SPARPI)

Workpiece name
Workpiece name = path name in the NCK file structure
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
18
Read access
workPNameL (C, SPARPI)

Workpiece name
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
18
Read access
haltBlock (C, SPARPI)

Hold block
The following applies to the SPARPI: The interrupt pointer does not mark the block
where the program was cancelled but a previous block (hold block), which enables a better resumption.
The hold block is explicitly set with the part program commands IPTRLOCK and IPTRUNLOCK,
or implicitly manipulated via $MC_AUTO_IPTR_LOCK.
The following applies to the SPARPF: If SPARPI is copied completely,
the value of the hold block which was set by the NCK is retained.
This enables the NCK to recognize the situation, and it responds with the suppressed message alarm 16950.
NOTE: For SPARPI and SPARPF this value is ONLY defined for program level 0.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
displayState (C, SPARPI)

Display status for block display.
PROC instruction. This is valid also for the subroutine levels below).
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
18
Read access
byteOffset (C, SPARPI)

Search pointer (byte-oriented)
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
18
Read access
3.2.3.29 SPARPP: Program pointer in automatic operation mode
In automatic mode it is possible to branch to several subroutine levels from the main program level. The state
of the program can be determined for every program level. Each variable of the module consists of 18 rows.
This makes it possible to address the main program level and 17 subroutine levels (incl. ASUB levels).
1 = main program level

2-18 = subroutine levels
actInvocCount (C, SPARPP)

Subroutine call counter, actual value. Specifies the number of subroutine passes. Is always set 1 for the main program
and for asynchronous subroutines.

NC variables
actInvocCount (C, SPARPP)

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
18
blockLabel (C, SPARPP)

Block label
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
18
blockNoStr (C, SPARPP)

Block number
Return value [:][N]<No>
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
18
cmdInvocCount (C, SPARPP)

Subroutine call counter, desired value
Subroutine call counter, desired value. Specifies the number of subroutine passes. Is always set to 1 for the main program
and for asynchronous subroutines.
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
18

NC variables
displayState (C, SPARPP)

Display state for block display
PROC instruction.
This is valid also for the subroutine levels below).
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
18
Read access
extProgBufferName (C, SPARPP)

FIFO buffer for execution from external source
Name of FIFO buffer for execution from external source
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
18
extProgFlag (C, SPARPP)

External execution
Indicates whether programs are being executed externally
Return value 0: Program is being processed from NCK program memory
1: Program is being executed externally
2: Program is being executed in EES mode
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
18
Read access

NC variables
lastBlockNoStr (C, SPARPP)

Last programmed block number
Returns the last programmed block number for each program level when $MN_DISPLAY_FUNCTION_MASK bit 0 is set.
A block number is shown until either a new block number is programmed or the subroutine level which generated the
block number has been left.
Block numbers of masked blocks are not displayed.

There is also no display if DISPLOF is active.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
18
Read access
progName (C, SPARPP)

Program name
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
18
seekOffset (C, SPARPP)

Search pointer
Search pointer (block offset, each block consists of a string that ends with a line feed)
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
18
seekw (C, SPARPP)

Line enabled for modification
First line enabled for modification in part program

NC variables
seekw (C, SPARPP)

- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
18
Read access
workPName (C, SPARPP)

Workpiece name = path name in the NC file structure
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
18
workPNameLong (C, SPARPP)

Workpiece name
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
18
Read access
workPandProgName (C, SPARPP)

Workpiece and program name
Workpiece name and name of current program.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
18
Read access

NC variables
byteOffset (C, SPARPP)

Byte offset of NC block
Byte offset of the current NC block
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
18
Read access
progNameVL (C, SPARPP)

Program name VL
Program name in the preprocessing
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
18
Read access
workPandProgNameVL (C, SPARPP)

Workpiece name and program name VL
Workpiece name and program name of the current program in the preprocessing.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
18
Read access
blockNoStrVL (C, SPARPP)

Block number VL
Block number in the preprocessing
Return value [:][N]<No>
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing

NC variables
blockNoStrVL (C, SPARPP)

18
Read access
seekOffsetVL (C, SPARPP)

Search pointer VL
Search pointer in the preprocessing (block offset, each block consists of a string that ends with a line feed)
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
18
Read access
byteOffsetVL (C, SPARPP)

Byte offset of NC block VL
Byte offset of the current NC block in the preprocessing
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
18
Read access
actInvocCountVL (C, SPARPP)

Subroutine call counter, actual value VL
Subroutine call counter, actual value in the preprocessing. Specifies the number of subroutine passes. It is always set to 1
for the main program and for asynchronous subroutines.
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
18
Read access
programAsciiBlock (C, SPARPP)

getProgramAsciiBlock
Value of the CC binding getProgramAsciiBlock.
Use released only for internal development test purposes!

NC variables
programAsciiBlock (C, SPARPP)

- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
18
Read access
eesBufferStart (C, SPARPP)

Byte offset of the first block in the EES buffer
The value is only relevant with EES, when the part program is partially loaded into a buffer NCK.
It indicates wthich NC block is entered first in the buffer.
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
18
Read access
eesBufferEnd (C, SPARPP)

Byte offset following the last block in the buffer
The value is only relevant with EED, when the part program is partially loaded into a buffer of the NCK.
It indicates which NC block has been entered last in the buffer.
The comparison with the value $$byteOffsetVL shows whether the reloading process is performed quickly enough in order
to perform the preprocessing run without delay.
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
18
Read access
eesBufferFilling (C, SPARPP)

Number of bytes for interpreter
The value is only relevant with EES, when the part program is partially loaded into a buffer of the NCK.
It indicates who many bytes are provided to the interpreter for processing in a the buffer ($$eesBufferEnd - $$byteOff‐
setVL).
If the value approaches 0, this indicates that the reloading process is not performed quickly enough in order to supply the
interpreter quickly enough with NC blocks.
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing

NC variables
eesBufferFilling (C, SPARPP)

18
Read access
eesBufferStatus (C, SPARPP)

Status of the EES buffer
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
18
Read access
3.2.3.30 SSP: State data spindle
All status data that refer to the spindle are combined in the module SSP. The individual variables are defined as
arrays where the row index is the number of the spindle (assigned to the current channel). The spindle can be
identified by reading the variables "name" or "index" in the same module with the respective row index.
The number of spindles can be read from "$$numSpindles" in the module Y in the area C.
acConstCutS (C, SSP) $AC_CONSTCUT_S[n]

Current const. cutting rate
Current constant cutting rate
m/min, ft/min, user defined TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$numSpindles
Read access
acSMode (C, SSP) $AC_SMODE[x]

Mode according to $AC_SMODE
Spindle mode
Return value 0: No spindle present in channel or spindle is active in another channel or
is being used by PLC (FC18) or by synchronized actions.
1: Open-loop speed control mode
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode

NC variables
acSMode (C, SSP) $AC_SMODE[x]

- TYPE_UWORD 1 0 4
Addressing
$$numSpindles
Read access
actGearStage (C, SSP)

Actual gear stage of spindle
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numSpindles
actSpeed (C, SSP) $AA_S[x] x = SpindleNo

Spindle speed, actual value
Spindle speed actual value
Addressing
$$numSpindles
channelNo (C, SSP)

Channel number of spindle
Number of channel in which spindle is configured
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numSpindles
Read access
cmdAngPos (C, SSP)

Spindle position
Spindle position (SPOS)

NC variables
cmdAngPos (C, SSP)

Addressing
$$numSpindles
cmdConstCutSpeed (C, SSP)

Constant cutting speed of the master spindle
Constant cutting rate of the master spindle. The requested value for the master spindle differs from SSP:cmdSpeed only if
G96 is active.
(For a certain OEM customer this variable is now available retroactively in software version 3.2)
fined
Addressing
$$numSpindles
Read access
cmdGearStage (C, SSP)

Requested gear stage
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numSpindles
cmdGwps (C, SSP)

Programmed SUG desired value
Programmed SUG desired value (SUG is the function "constant perimeter speed of grinding wheel")
m/s, ft/s TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numSpindles

NC variables
cmdSpeed (C, SSP) $P_S[x] x = SpindleNo

Spindle speed, desired value
Spindle speed desired value
rev/min , m/min TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numSpindles
driveLoad (C, SSP)

Load
% TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numSpindles
gwpsActive (C, SSP) {$GWPS}

SUG programming active
SUG programming active (SUG is the function "constant perimeter speed of grinding wheel)
1 = active
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numSpindles
index (C, SSP)

Absolute axis index
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables
index (C, SSP)

$$numSpindles
name (C, SSP)

Spindle name
Spindle name
Note: If several logical spindles are referred to one physical spindle with active spindle conversion and access is made via
area N of module SSP2, then the name of the first suitable logical spindle is output.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
$$numSpindles
namePhys (C, SSP)

Name of physical spindle.
Name of assigned physical spindle, identical to "name" variable.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
$$numSpindles
Read access
opMode (C, SSP)

Spindle mode
Return value 0 = spindle mode
1 = oscillation mode (gear step changeover)
2 = positioning mode
3 = synchronous mode
4 = axis mode
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numSpindles

NC variables
pSMode (C, SSP) $P_SMODE

Prog. spindle mode
Last programmed spindle mode
Return value 0: No spindle configured in channel or spindle is active in another channel
or in use by the PLC (FC18) or by synchronized actions.
1: Speed control mode
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- TYPE_UWORD 0 4
Addressing
$$numSpindles
Read access
pSModeS (C, SSP)

Prog. spindle mode block search
Last programmed spindle mode with block search
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- TYPE_UWORD 0 4
Addressing
$$numSpindles
Read access
psModePos (C, SSP)

Corresponds to $$/C/SEGA/actToolEdgeCenterPosEns
If the spindle is in positioning mode ($$pSMode = 2) or axis mode
($$pSMode = 4), the value $$/C/SEGA/actToolEdgeCenterPosEns is returned, otherwise 0.
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing

NC variables
psModePos (C, SSP)

$$numSpindles
Read access
psModePosBKS (C, SSP)

Corresponds to $$/C/SEGA/actProgPosBKS
($$pSMode = 4), the value $$/C/SEGA/actProgPosBKS is returned, otherwise 0.
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$numSpindles
Read access
psModePosS (C, SSP)

Corresponds to $$cmdToolEdgeCenterPosEnsS
($$pSMode = 4), the value $$cmdToolEdgeCenterPosEnsS is returned, otherwise 0.
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$numSpindles
Read access
speedLimit (C, SSP)

Current speed limitation for spindle
Addressing
$$numSpindles
speedOvr (C, SSP)

Spindle override
% TYPE_DOUBLE

NC variables
speedOvr (C, SSP)

Addressing
$$numSpindles
spindleType (C, SSP)

Spindle type
Return value 0 = master spindle
1 = no master spindle
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numSpindles
status (C, SSP)

Spindle state
Spindle status
Bit0 = following spindle
Bit1 = leading spindle
Bit2 = master spindle
Bit3 = constant cutting rate (G96) active
Return value Bit0 = following spindle
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numSpindles

NC variables
turnState (C, SSP)

State of spindle rotation
Return value value range to be read via BTSS variable
0 = clockwise
1 = counter-clockwise
2 = stop
value range to be read via $ variable
3 = clockwise
5 = stop
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numSpindles
acSDir (C, SSP) $AC_SDIR[x] x = SpindleNo

Current dir. of spindle rot. in sense of M3/M4/M5
Current direction of spindle rotation in the sense of M3/M4/M5 in the part program, synchronized actions, PLC FC18, PLC
DBB30.
3: Clockwise spindle rotation, 4: Counterclockwise spindle rotation, 5: Spindle stop
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numSpindles
Read access
acSmaxVelo (C, SSP) $AC_SMAXVELO[]

Maximum spindle speed
This variable returns the maximum spindle speed for spindle mode.
This is formed from the smallest active speed limitation, and cannot be exceeded by speed programming or
override > 100%.
A speed limitation is indicated by the VDI interface signal DB31..,DBX83.1 'Setpoint speed limited'
and by $AC_SPIND_STATE, bit 10 (setpoint speed limited).
The cause of the speed limitation (machine, setting data, G code, VDI interface signal etc.) can also
be determined with the system variable $AC_SMAXVELO_INFO.
If the spindle is in axis mode, then the speed is not limited by $AC_SMAXVELO but instead the machine data
(MAX_AX_VELO, ...) typical for axis mode are active.

NC variables
acSmaxVelo (C, SSP) $AC_SMAXVELO[]

Addressing
$$numSpindles
Read access

NC variables
acSmaxVeloInfo (C, SSP) $AC_SMAXVELO_INFO[]

Max. identifier for speed-limiting data
Identifier (index) for the speed-limiting data (machine/setting data, etc.)
The system variable provides additional information about $AC_SMAXVELO and returns the definitive data
(machine, setting data, G code, VDI interface etc.) as identifier/index. The index can be used to determine the speed-limit‐
ing data
on the basis of the following table of existing spindle speed limitations.
0 No limitation (SERUPRO)
1 Maximum speed (chuck speed) of spindle MD 35100 SPIND_VELO_LIMIT
2 Speed limited to maximum speed in the current gear stage MD 35130 GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT
3 Speed limited due to position control to 90% of the minimum from MD 35100 and MD 35130 (SPCON, SPOS, poss.
with COUPON,..)
4 Speed limited due to position control to MD 35132 GEAR_STEP_PC_MAX_VELO_LIMIT
5 Speed limited to SD 43220 SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26 (G26 S.. or specification from HMI)
6 Speed limited to MD 35160 SPIND_EXTERN_VELO_LIMIT based on the set VDI interface signal DB31,...DBX3.6
7 Speed limited to SD 43230 SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS at constant cutting speed (G96, G961, G962, G97, LIMS)
8 Speed limited to safe speed (SG) by Safety Integrated
9 Speed limited by preparation calculations
10 Limitation by drive parameter SINAMICS p1082 to maximum speed of the drive
11 Speed limitation to MD 36300 ENC_FREQ_LIMIT with functions that require a functioning measuring system, e.g. posi‐
tion control and G95, G96, G97, G973, G33, G34, G35 for the master spindle. The limitation takes into account the encod‐
er speed, the MS arrangement (direct/indirect), MS limiting frequency and the current parameter set
12 Speed limited by axis mode. In the case of a synchronous spindle, axis mode is enforced by the leading spindle.
13 Speed of the superimposed motion of the following spindle limited to the residual dynamics remaining following the
coupling. A larger proportion of the superimposed motion can be achieved by reducing the speed of the leading spindle,
e.g. by programming G26 S, VELOLIM for the leading spindle or VELOLIMA for the following spindle. The coupling factor
must be taken into account.
14 Speed of the leading spindle limited due to missing following spindle dynamics or a high transformation ratio
15 Speed of the master spindle limited to MD 35550 DRILL_VELO_LIMIT in the case of tapping with G331, G332
16 Speed limitation due to the programming of VELOLIM
17 Speed limitation by tool parameter $TC_TP_MAX_VELO
18 Not used
19 Not used
20 Speed limited due to NCU link
21 Speed limited by SD43235 SD_SPIND_USER_VELO_LIMIT, user-controlled speed limitation, e.g. tensioning device,
chuck speed
22 Speed limited by the programming of VELOLIMA
23 Speed limited by the clamping state of the tool. In the case of a Weiss spindle, the clamping state can be read from
$VA_MOT_CLAMPING_STATE[axn].
In oscillation mode (gear stage change), the variable returns the value for spindle mode (speed control mode).

- TYPE_DWORD

NC variables
acSmaxVeloInfo (C, SSP) $AC_SMAXVELO_INFO[]

Addressing
$$numSpindles
Read access
acSminVelo (C, SSP) $AC_SMINVELO[]

Minimum spindle speed
This variable returns the minimum spindle speed for speed control mode.
This is formed from the highest active speed increase, and cannot be undershot by speed programming
or override < 100%.
A speed increase is indicated by the VDI interface signal DB31..,DBX83.2 'Setpoint speed increased'
and by $AC_SPIND_STATE, bit 11 (setpoint speed increased).
The cause of the speed increase (machine, setting data, G code, VDI interface signal etc.)
can also be determined with the system variable $AC_SMINVELO_INFO.
If the spindle is in axis or positioning mode, then the speed is not increased by $AC_SMINVELO.
Addressing
$$numSpindles
Read access
acSminVeloInfo (C, SSP) $AC_SMINVELO_INFO[]

Min. identifier for speed-limiting data
The system variable provides additional information about $AC_SMAXVELO, and returns the definitive data
(machine, setting data, G code, VDI interface, etc.) as identifier/index.
The speed-limiting data can be determined with the index from the following table of existing
spindle speed limitations.
The system variable provides additional information about $AC_SMINVELO, and returns the speed increasing data
(machine, setting data) as identifier/index. The speed-increasing data can be determined with the index from the following
table of existing spindle speed increases.
0 Not used
1 Not used
2 Lower speed limit (minimum speed) of the current gear stage MD 35140 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT
3 Not used
4 Not used
5 Lower speed limit (minimum speed) from SD 43210 SPIND_MIN_VELO_G25 (G25 S.. or specification from HMI)
In oscillation mode (gear stage change) and axis mode, the variable returns the values from spindle mode.

NC variables
acSminVeloInfo (C, SSP) $AC_SMINVELO_INFO[]

- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
$$numSpindles
Read access
acSmaxAcc (C, SSP) $AC_SMAXACC[]

Active acceleration of the spindle
This variable returns the active acceleration of the spindle for spindle mode.
Bit 14 of $AC_SPIND_STATE (spindle accelerating) is set
for the duration of the acceleration to the defined setpoint speed.
Bit 15 of $AC_SPIND_STATE (spindle braking) is set
for the duration of the braking to the defined setpoint speed.
Apart from that, the acceleration-determining machine and setting data
can be determined with the system variable $AC_SMAXACC_INFO.
If the spindle is in axis mode, then $AC_SMAXACC does not return the current acceleration,
instead the machine data (MAX_AX_VELO, MAX_AX_ACCEL, ...) typical for axis mode are active.
Rev/s2, user defined TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numSpindles
Read access

NC variables
acSmaxAccInfo (C, SSP) $AC_SMAXACC_INFO[]

Identifier for active spindle acceleration data
Identifier for the active spindle acceleration data
The system variable provides additional information about $AC_SMAXACC and returns the
definitive machine data as identifier/index. The index can be used to determine
the active acceleration data on the basis of the following table of existing spindle accelerations.
The number range is oriented to the system variable $AC_SMAXVELO_INFO:
0 No acceleration limitation (SERUPRO)

1 Not used
2 Acceleration in speed control mode without position control in the current gear stage MD 35200
GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL
3 Not used
4 Acceleration in the current gear stage based on position control MD 35210 GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL
(SPCON, SPOS, poss. with COUPON,..)
5 Not used
6 Not used
7 Not used
8 Not used
9 Acceleration limited by preparation calculations
10 Not used
11 Not used
12 Acceleration limited by axis mode. In the case of a synchronous spindle, the axis mode is enforced by the leading
spindle.
13 Acceleration of the superimposed motion of the following spindle limited to the residual dynamics remaining following
the coupling
14 Acceleration of the leading spindle due to missing following spindle dynamics or a high transformation ratio
15 Acceleration of the master spindle MD 35212 GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL2 in the case of tapping with G331,
G332 (only when the second data set is configured accordingly)
16 Acceleration limited by the configuration of ACC or ACCFXS (synchronized action)
17 Acceleration limited by tool parameter $TC_TP_MAX_ACCEL
18 Not used
19 Acceleration limited in JOG mode by MD 32301 MA_JOG_MAX_ACCEL
20 Acceleration limited due to NCU link
21 Not used
22 Acceleration limited by programming ACCLIMA
23 Not used

- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing

NC variables
acSmaxAccInfo (C, SSP) $AC_SMAXACC_INFO[]

$$numSpindles
Read access
acSpindState (C, SSP) $AC_SPIND_STATE[]

Spindle status in speed control mode
This variable returns the selected states of the spindle. For positioning and axis modes, the variable $AA_IN‐
POS_STATE[Sn] can also be read.
Bit 0: "Constant cutting speed active" (VDI interface signal DB31..,DBX84.0)
Bit 1: "SUG active" (VDI interface signal DB31..,DBX84.1)
Bit 2: "CLGON active" (VDI interface signal DB31..,DBX84.2)
Bit 3: "Tapping without compensating chuck" (VDI interface signal DB31..,DBX84.3)
Bit 4: "Synchronous mode" (following spindle with synchronous spindle coupling) (VDI interface signal DB31..,DBX84.4)
Bit 5: "Positioning mode" (VDI interface signal DB31..,DBX84.5)
Bit 6: "Oscillating mode" (gear stage change) (VDI interface signal DB31..,DBX84.6)
Bit 7: "Speed control mode" (VDI interface signal DB31..,DBX84.7)
Bit 8: "Spindle programmed" (e.g. M3, M4 S.., FC18, ..) (VDI interface signal DB31..,DBX64.4/5 or 6/7)
Bit 9: "Speed limit exceeded" (VDI interface signal DB31..,DBX83.0)
Bit 10: "Setpoint speed limited" (VDI interface signal DB31..,DBX83.1), active if the speed would be greater than the maxi‐
mum speed as a result of programming or override ($AC_SMAXVELO)
Bit 11: "Setpoint speed increased" (VDI interface signal DB31..,DBX83.2) active if the speed would be less than the mini‐
mum speed as a result of programming or override (system variable $AC_SMINVELO)
Bit 12: "Spindle in setpoint range" (VDI interface signal DB31..,DBX83.5)
Bit 13: "Actual direction of rotation right" (VDI interface signal DB31..,DBX83.7)
Bit 14: "Spindle accelerating" remains active as long as the spindle is accelerating to the defined setpoint speed on the
setpoint side.
Bit 15: "Spindle braking" remains active as long as the spindle is braking to the defined setpoint speed or comes to a
standstill on the setpoint side.
Bit 16: "Spindle stopped" (VDI interface signal DB31..,DBX61.4)
Bit 17: "Tool with dynamic limitation active" (VDI interface signal DB31..,DBX85.0)
Bit 18: Reserved
Bit 19: "Spindle in position" (VDI interface signal DB31..,DBX85.5)
Bit 20: "Position control active" (VDI interface signal DB31..,DBX61.5)
Bit 21: "Referenced/synchronized 1" (VDI interface signal DB31..,DBX60.4)
Bit 23: Direction of spindle rotation inverted by interface signal "Invert M3/M4" (DB31..,DBX17.6)
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
$$numSpindles
Read access

NC variables
acSVC (C, SSP) $AC_SVC[x]

Programmed, active cutting rate
fined
Read access
acSType (C, SSP) $AC_S_TYPE[x]

Type of spindle programming
Spindle programmed as:
0 Spindle not programmed
1 Spindle speed, S in rev/min
2 Cutting rate, SVC in m/min or ft/min
3 Constant cutting rate, S in m/min or ft/min
4 Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed, S in m/s or ft/s
fined
Read access
vcSGear (C, SSP) $VC_SGEAR[spino]

Currently active spindle gear stage
Variable $VC_SGEAR[spino] determines the currently active spindle gear stage. $AC_SGEAR[spino] determines the de‐
fined gear stage in the main run. During search the actual gear stage may differ from the defined gear stage, because
during search the gear stages are not changed. Using $VC_SGEAR[spino] and $AC_SGEAR[spino] it can be checked
whether a gear stage change is to be performed after a search.
1: 1st gear stage active
....
5: 5th gear stage active
Return value 1: 1st gear stage active
....
- TYPE_WORD 0 0 5
Read access

NC variables
acSGear (C, SSP) $AC_SGEAR[spino]

Active spindle gear stage
....
....
- TYPE_WORD 0 0 5
Read access
3.2.3.31 SSP2: Spindle status data for spindle conversion
All state data that refer to a spindle, if a spindle converter (logical spindles) is active
acConstCutS (C, SSP2)

Addressing
$$numSpindlesLog
Read access
acSMode (C, SSP2)

Spindle mode
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode

NC variables
acSMode (C, SSP2)

- TYPE_UWORD 1 0 4
Addressing
$$numSpindlesLog
Read access
actGearStage (C, SSP2)

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numSpindlesLog
actSpeed (C, SSP2)

Addressing
$$numSpindlesLog
channelNo (C, SSP2)

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numSpindlesLog
Read access
cmdAngPos (C, SSP2)

Spindle position

NC variables
cmdAngPos (C, SSP2)

Addressing
$$numSpindlesLog
cmdConstCutSpeed (C, SSP2)

G96 is active.
fined
Addressing
$$numSpindlesLog
Read access
cmdGearStage (C, SSP2)

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numSpindlesLog
cmdGwps (C, SSP2)

Addressing
$$numSpindlesLog

NC variables
cmdSpeed (C, SSP2)

Addressing
$$numSpindlesLog
driveLoad (C, SSP2)

Load
% TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numSpindlesLog
gwpsActive (C, SSP2)

1 = active
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numSpindlesLog
index (C, SSP2)

Absolute axis index
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables
index (C, SSP2)

$$numSpindlesLog
name (C, SSP2)

Spindle name
Spindle name
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
$$numSpindlesLog
namePhys (C, SSP2)

Physical spindle name
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
$$numSpindlesLog
Read access
opMode (C, SSP2)

Spindle mode
4 = axis mode
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numSpindlesLog

NC variables
pSMode (C, SSP2)

Prog. spindle mode
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- TYPE_UWORD 0 4
Addressing
$$numSpindlesLog
Read access
pSModeS (C, SSP2)

Prog. spindle mode block search
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- TYPE_UWORD 0 4
Addressing
$$numSpindlesLog
Read access
psModePos (C, SSP2)

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing

NC variables
psModePos (C, SSP2)

$$numSpindlesLog
Read access
psModePosBKS (C, SSP2)

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$numSpindlesLog
Read access
psModePosS (C, SSP2)

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$numSpindlesLog
Read access
speedLimit (C, SSP2)

Addressing
$$numSpindlesLog
speedOvr (C, SSP2)

Spindle override
% TYPE_DOUBLE

NC variables
speedOvr (C, SSP2)

Addressing
$$numSpindlesLog
spindleType (C, SSP2)

Spindle type
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numSpindlesLog
status (C, SSP2)

Spindle state
Spindle status
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numSpindlesLog

NC variables
turnState (C, SSP2)

0 = clockwise
2 = stop
3 = clockwise
5 = stop
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numSpindlesLog
acSDir (C, SSP2)

Programmed direction of spindle rotation
Programmed direction of spindle rotation in part program, synchronized actions, PLC FC18, PLC DBB30.
3: Clockwise spindle rotation, 4: Counterclockwise spindle rotation, 5: Spindle stop
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numSpindlesLog
Read access
acSmaxVelo (C, SSP2)

override > 100%.

NC variables
acSmaxVelo (C, SSP2)

Addressing
$$numSpindlesLog
Read access

NC variables
acSmaxVeloInfo (C, SSP2)

ing data
with COUPON,..)
18 Not used
19 Not used
chuck speed

- TYPE_DWORD

NC variables
acSmaxVeloInfo (C, SSP2)

Addressing
$$numSpindlesLog
Read access
acSminVelo (C, SSP2)

or override < 100%.
Addressing
$$numSpindlesLog
Read access
acSminVeloInfo (C, SSP2)

0 Not used
1 Not used
3 Not used
4 Not used

NC variables
acSminVeloInfo (C, SSP2)

- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
$$numSpindlesLog
Read access
acSmaxAcc (C, SSP2)

Addressing
$$numSpindlesLog
Read access

NC variables
acSmaxAccInfo (C, SSP2)

The number range is oriented to the system variable $AC_SMAXVELO_IDX:

1 Not used
3 Not used
5 Not used
6 Not used
7 Not used
8 Not used
10 Not used
11 Not used
spindle.
the coupling
18 Not used
21 Not used
23 Not used

- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing

NC variables
acSmaxAccInfo (C, SSP2)

$$numSpindlesLog
Read access
acSpindState (C, SSP2)

setpoint side.
Bit 18: Reserved
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
$$numSpindlesLog
Read access

NC variables
acSVC (C, SSP2)

fined
Read access
acSType (C, SSP2)

fined
Read access
vcSGear (C, SSP2) $VC_SGEAR[spino]

....
....
- TYPE_WORD 0 0 5
Read access

NC variables
acSGear (C, SSP2) $AC_SGEAR[spino]

....
....
- TYPE_WORD 0 0 5
Read access
3.2.3.32 SSYNAC: Synchronous actions
Several synchronous actions (M, H, S, E, F, T, D) can be active simultaneously in one channel. The module
SSYNAC contains a list of all the synchronous actions programmed in the current block. This module consists
of arrays of varying length because some types of synchronous actions might be programmed several times in
a block. A synchronous action that is not assigned produces a negative number for the respecitive index.
For each synchronous action there is an address variable and a variable in which the value of the address is
entered.
5 M functions
3 S functions
3 H functions
1 T function
1 D function
6 F functions
1 E function
can be programmed in each part program block, but no more than 10 synchronous actions must be program‐
med in a single block.
Dadr (C, SSYNAC)

D-number
D-number. There is only one active D-number per channel.

NC variables
Dadr (C, SSYNAC)

- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
1
Dval (C, SSYNAC)

Value of the current D-number
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
1
Eadr (C, SSYNAC) S5

Number of active E-function
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Eval (C, SSYNAC) S5

Value of the E-function
fined
Addressing
1
Hadr (C, SSYNAC) S5

Number of active auxiliary functions( H-functions)
Number of active auxiliary functions (H-functions). Up to three H-functions can be active simultaneously.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 99

NC variables
Hadr (C, SSYNAC) S5

Addressing
3
Hval (C, SSYNAC) S5

Value of the H-function
- TYPE_DOUBLE -99999,9999 99999,9999
Addressing
3
Madr (C, SSYNAC) S5

Number of the active M-function
Number of the active M-function. Up to 5 M-functions can be active simultaneously.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 99
Addressing
5
Mval (C, SSYNAC) S5

Value of the M-function
- TYPE_DWORD 0 99999999
Addressing
5
Sadr (C, SSYNAC) S5

Number of active S-functions
Number of active S-functions. Up to three S-functions can be active simultaneously.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 6

NC variables
Sadr (C, SSYNAC) S5

Addressing
3
Sval (C, SSYNAC) S5

Value of the S-function.
Value of the S-function. Specifies the spindle speed.
rev/min , m/min TYPE_DOUBLE 0 999999,999
Addressing
3
TPreSelAdr (C, SSYNAC)

Number of the preselected T-function
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
TPreSelVal (C, SSYNAC)

Value of the preselected T-function
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
1
Tadr (C, SSYNAC)

Active T-number
Active T-number. Only one T-number can be active at any a time.
- TYPE_UWORD

NC variables
Tadr (C, SSYNAC)

Addressing
1
Tval (C, SSYNAC)

T-function value
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
1
3.2.3.33 SYNACT: Channel-specific synchronous actions
This module contains information on the synchronous actions. The 1000 digit of the cell contains the user pro‐
tection level (0-7) needed for displaying the corresponding synchronous action.
blockNoStrAct (C, SYNACT)

For active tech.cycle: block no. of current action
If a technology cycle is active: block number of the current action
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
7 * 1000 + $$/C/SYNACT/numSynAct
Read access
blockNoStrProg (C, SYNACT)

Block no. where the syn. act. is programmed
Number of the block where the synchronous action has been programmed
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
id (C, SYNACT)
ID of the synchronous action
ID of the synchronous action; value 0 means that there is no ID defined (block-by-block)
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
Read access
numSynAct (C, SYNACT)

Number of synchronous actions
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
7 * 1000 + 1
Read access
typStatus (C, SYNACT)

Type and state of the synchronous action
Type and status of the synchronized action
Bit 0-7 describe the status:
Bit 0: Active, i.e. condition fulfilled, action is being executed
Bit 1: Lock, i.e. action is locked by PLC or Synact
Bit 2: Lock nc, i.e. locked by another Synact
Bit 3: Lock plc, i.e. locked by PLC
Bit 4: Fire, i.e. condition is fulfilled
Bit 5: Check condition, i.e. condition is checked
Bit 6: Waiting, i.e. action is waiting to be executed
Bit 7: Done, i.e. synchronized action has been completed
Bit 8-15 describe the type:
Bit 8: Static
Bit 9: Modal
Bit 10: Group-by-group (recognized by id=0)
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables
typStatus (C, SYNACT)

Read access
synactBlock (C, SYNACT)

Current synchronized action block (short)
- TYPE_STRING
Read access
synactBlockL (C, SYNACT)

Current synchronized action block (long)
- TYPE_STRING
Read access
progPathName (C, SYNACT)

Synchronized action file
- TYPE_STRING
Read access
progLineOffset (C, SYNACT)

SYNACT offset
SYNACT offset within the $$progPathName file
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
numElem (C, SYNACT)

Number of occupied SYNACT elements
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access

NC variables
synActInfo (C, SYNACT)

Classification of the SYNACT
Information on classification of the SYNACT
Return value Bit0: Area: User
Bit1: Area: Manufacturer
Bit2: Area: System
Bit3: Area: Safety
Bit8: Type: Static
Bit9: Type: Modal
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access
selectIndex (C, SYNACT)

Consistent backup of a line
The HMI writes the corresponding ID of the synchronized action into lines 8000 or 10000. The variables are then read
from this synchronized action and can be viewed via line 8000 in the case of a modal/static synchronized action or line
10000.
- TYPE_UWORD
synActCounter (C, SYNACT)

Modification counter of the SYNACTs
Modification counter for the SYNACT entries in the relevant list.
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access
selectMask (C, SYNACT)

Masking of the SYNACTs
Masks some of the entries in the relevant SYNACT list.
Only those SYNACTS are entered in the lists for which
(selectMask-lowByte AND synActInfo-lowByte) AND (selectMask-higByte AND synActInfo-highByte) apply.
The default value 0xFFFF generates completely unfiltered lists.
Return value Bit0: Area: User
Bit1: Area: Manufacturer
Bit2: Area: System
Bit3: Area: Safety
Bit8: Type: Static
Bit9: Type: Modal

NC variables
selectMask (C, SYNACT)

- TYPE_UWORD
numVars (C, SYNACT)

Number of SYNACT variables
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access
varName (C, SYNACT)

Name of SYNACT variable
- TYPE_STRING
Read access
varTyp (C, SYNACT)

Data type
Data type of SYNACT variable. Coding according to ACX.
Return value 0: BOOL (2 bytes)
3: LONG
10: DOUBLE
12: CHAR[32]
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access
varValue (C, SYNACT)

Variable value
Value of SYNACT variable
- TYPE_STRING
Read access
3.2.3.34 TO: Tool offsets
Tool data of the active tool

NC variables
cuttEdgeParam (C, TO)

Parameter of the active tool
Parameter of the active tool cutting edge
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
24
Read access
cuttEdgeParamMod (C, TO)

Modified parameter of the active tool
Modified parameter of the active tool cutting edge.
The rotation has been included in the calculation, so the value may not correspond with the original tool data.
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
24
Read access
3.2.3.35 VSYN: NCK-specific user variable for synchronous actions
This module contains channel-specific user variables for synchronous actions
acFifoN (C, VSYN) $AC_FIFOx[y] , x = FIFONo (1-10) y =

ParameterNo
FIFO variable for synchronous actions
FIFO variable for synchronous actions (Note: SYNACT only)
The number of columns depends on the number of FIFOs
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
MD $MC_MM_LEN_AC_FIFO+6
Read access

NC variables
acMarker (C, VSYN)

replaced by acMarkerL
replaced by $$acMarkerL)
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
MD $MC_MM_NUM_AC_MARKER
Read access
acMarkerL (C, VSYN) $AC_MARKER[n]

Counter for motion synchronous actions 32 bit
Flag variable, counter for synchronous actions
(Note: SYNACT only)
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
acParam (C, VSYN) $AC_PARAM[x] x = ParameterNo

Dynamic parameters for motion-synchronous actions
(Note: only with SYNACT)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
MD $MC_MM_NUM_AC_PARAM
acSystemMarkerL (C, VSYN)

Counter for motion-synch. actions. 32-bit (system)
Flag variable, counter for motion-synchronous actions
Reserved for system.
- TYPE_DWORD

NC variables
acSystemMarkerL (C, VSYN)

Addressing
acSystemParam (C, VSYN)

Dyn. parameters for motion-synch. actions (system)
Reserved for system.
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
MD $MC_MM_NUM_AC_PARAM
3.2.3.36 WAL: Working area limitation
This block contains the working area limitation data.
waCSCoordSys (C, WAL) $P_WORKAREA_CS_COORD_SYSTEM

Coordinate system for working area limitation
Return value Identifier for the coordinate system in which the working area limitation is to apply.
The following are valid:
0: Working area limitation in the WCS
3: Working area limitation in the SZS
Special feature of line addressing: Any channel axis index can be selected as the channel
axis index.
Within a working area limitation group, the values are identical.

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 3
Addressing
$$numMachAxes * $MC_MM_NUM_WORKAR‐
EA_CS_GROUPS

NC variables
waCSPlusEnable (C, WAL) $P_WORKAREA_CS_PLUS_ENABLE

TRUE: The limitation $$waCSLimitPlus is valid.
Coord.-specific working area limitation, positive valid
Return value TRUE: The limitation of $$waCSLimitPlus is valid.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
EA_CS_GROUPS
waCSMinusEnable (C, WAL) $P_WORKAREA_CS_MINUS_ENABLE

TRUE: The limitation $$waCSLimitMinus is valid.
Coord.-specific working area limitation, negative valid
Return value TRUE: The limitation of $$waCSLimitMinus is valid.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
EA_CS_GROUPS
waCSLimitPlus (C, WAL) $P_WORKAREA_CS_LIMIT_PLUS

Coord.-specific working area limitation, positive
Position of the coordinate system-specific working area limitation
in the positive direction for the addressed axis and working area group.
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
EA_CS_GROUPS
waCSLimitMinus (C, WAL) $P_WORKAREA_CS_LIMIT_MINUS

Coord.-specific working area limitation, negative
Position of the coordinate system-specific working area limitation
in the negative direction for the addressed axis and working area group.

NC variables
waCSLimitMinus (C, WAL) $P_WORKAREA_CS_LIMIT_MINUS

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
EA_CS_GROUPS
3.2.3.37 Y: System data
The machine tool builder or user configures the control with the help of the machine data. Configuration can
only be performed with certain access rights. The configuration of the NC can be read in the system data re‐
gardless of current access rights.
channelName (C, Y) MD 20000: CHAN_NAME K1

Channel name
- TYPE_STRING

NC variables
maskToolManagement (C, Y) $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK

Channel-specific setting for tool management
Channel-specific settings for NCK tool management function
Activation of TM memory by "0" means: The set tool management data do not use any memory space.
Value=0: TM deactivated
Bit 0=1: TM active: The tool management functions are enabled for the current channel.
Bit 1=1: TM monitoring function active: Functions required to monitor tools (tool life and number of workpieces) are
enabled.
Bit 2=1: OEM functions active: The memory for user data can be utilized.
Bit 3=1: Consideration of adjacent location active
Bits 0 to 3 must be set identically to machine data MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK (18080).
Bit 4=1: The PLC has the possibility of issuing another request for tool change preparation with modified parameters.
Part program is halted in response to T selection or M06 until it has been acknowledged by the PLC program.
Bit 5=1: The main run/PLC synchronization in response to a tool change for the main spindle is executed simultaneous‐
ly with the transport acknowledgment.
Bit 6=1: The main run/PLC synchronization in response to a tool change for the auxiliary spindle is executed simultane‐
ously with the transport acknowledgment.
Bit 7=1: The main run/PLC synchronization in response to a tool change for the main spindle is not executed until the
PLC acknowledgment confirms that the tool change is complete.
Bit 8=1: The main run/PLC synchronization in response to a tool change for the auxiliary spindle is not executed until
the PLC acknowledgment confirms that the tool change is complete..
Bit 9: Reserved
Bit 10=1: M06 is delayed until the preparation acknowledgment has been output by the PLC. The change signal (e.g.
M06 ) is not output until the tool selection ( DBX [ n+0 ].2 ) has been acknowledged. The part program is halted in re‐
sponse to M06 until the T selection has been acknowledged.
Bit 11=1: The preparation command is output even if a preparation command has already been output for the same tool.
This setting is useful, for example, if the chain is to be positioned when "Tx" is first called and if the second call is to ini‐
tiate a check as to whether the tool is in the correct location for a tool change (e.g. in front of tool-change station).
Bit 12=1: The preparation command is executed even if the tool is already loaded in the spindle, i.e. the T selection
signal (DB72.DBXn.2) is set even if it has already been set for the same tool. (Tx...Tx)
Bit 13=1: Only on systems with sufficient memory space (NCU572, NCU573): Recording of tool sequences in a diagnos‐
tics buffer. The commands are fetched from the diagnostics buffer in response to Reset and stored in a file in the passive
file system, NCATR xx.MPF under part program. The trace file is useful for the Hotline in the event of errors and is not
described in detail here.
Bit 14=1: Automatic tool change in response to Reset and Start according to machine data MD20120 TOOL_RE‐
SET_NAME MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK MD20124 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER. If machine data RE‐
SET_MODE_MASK is in use, then this bit must be set as well. If RESET_MODE_MASK is set such that the tool stored in
TOOL_RESET_NAME must be loaded in response to RESET, then the select and change command is output to the user
interface (DB 72) in response to RESET or Start. If machine data RESET_MODE_MASK is set such that the active tool
must remain active after M30 or RESET and if the active tool is disabled in the spindle (by user), then a change command
for a replacement tool is output to the user interface in response to RESET. If no replacement tool is available, then an
error message is output.
Bit 15=1: No return transport of tool when several preparation commands are output. (Tx->Tx)
Bit 16=1: T location number is active
Bit 17=1: Tool life decrementation can be started/stopped via the PLC.

NC variables
maskToolManagement (C, Y) $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK

- TYPE_DWORD 0
Read access
mmcCmd (C, Y)
Command from NCK to HMI
Command from NCK to HMI
The string is made up of the following characters:
1st Character acknowledgment mode:
"N" no acknowledgment
"S" synchronous acknowledgment
"A" asynchronous acknowledgment
2. - 6th character: five-digit sequence number in ASCII that is generated by the NCK
7. - 207th character: Command string which ends with "\0"
- TYPE_STRING
mmcCmdPrep (C, Y)
Command from NCK-preparation to the HMI
Command from the NCK-preparation task to the HMI (e.g. for calling external subprograms)
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
1
Read access
mmcCmdQuit (C, Y)
Acknowl. from HMI for command from NCK to HMI
acknowledgment from HMI for command from NCK to HMI
The string is made up of the following characters:
1st Character acknowledgment code:
"P" programmed
"B" busy
"F" failed
"E" executed
2. - 6th character: five-digit sequence number in ASCII for acknowledgment code "B", "F" or "E", generated by NCK
7. - 201th character: additional communication-specific information for acknowledgment code "B", "F" or "E", ends with "\0"

NC variables
mmcCmdQuit (C, Y)
- TYPE_STRING
Validity: From NCK version 3.6 Write access
mmcCmdQuitPrep (C, Y)
Ackn. by HMI for NCK-preparation command
Acknowledgemnt by HMI for an NCK-preparation command to the HMI (e.g. for calling external subprograms)
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
1
numActAxes (C, Y)
Number of axes in channel.
Number of active tools in channel.
Channel axis gaps are not included in count which means that value might be lower than numMachAxes.
The following applies:
$$numMachAxes >= $$numGeoAxes + $$numAuxAxes
$$numActAxes = $$numGeoAxes + $$numAuxAxes
Addressing
1
Read access
numAuxAxes (C, Y)
Number of auxiliary axes
- TYPE_UWORD
numBasisFrames (C, Y) $MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES

Number of basic frames in channel
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing

NC variables
numBasisFrames (C, Y) $MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES

1
Read access
numContourInProtArea (C, Y)
Number of polygon elements / protection zone
Maximum number of polygon elements per protection zone
- TYPE_UWORD
numGFrames (C, Y) MD 28080: MM_NUM_G_FRAMES

Number of G frames
Number of G frames in this channel
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access
numGeoAxes (C, Y)
Number of geometry axes
Number of geometry axes and orientation axes
- TYPE_UWORD
numMachAxes (C, Y)
Number of highest channel axis.
No. of highest channel axis.
This also corresponds to the number of axes in the
channel provided there are no gaps in the axis sequence.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 1
Addressing
1
numOriAxes (C, Y)
Number of orientation axes in channel

NC variables
numOriAxes (C, Y)
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
numProtArea (C, Y) MD 28200: MM_NUM_PRO‐ S7

TECT_AREA_CHAN
Maximum number of protection zones
- TYPE_UWORD
numRParams (C, Y) MD 28050: MM_NUM_R_PARAM S7

Number of channel-specific R variables
- TYPE_UWORD
numSpindles (C, Y)
Number of spindles
- TYPE_UWORD
numSpindlesLog (C, Y)
Number of log. spindles
Number of logical spindles.
Specifies the number of lines in module SSP2.
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
numToolEdges (C, Y) MD 18100: MM_NUM_CUT‐ S7

TING_EDGES_IN_TOA
Number of cutting edges
Number of tool edges in this channel
- TYPE_UWORD
numUserFrames (C, Y) MD 28080: MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES S7

Number of user frames
Number of user frames in this channel
- TYPE_UWORD
oemProtText (C, Y)
OEM text for logging buffer
OEM text to be entered next in the logging buffer.

- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
1
Read access
progProtText (C, Y)
Text for logging buffer
Programmable text to be entered next in the logging buffer

- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
punchNibActivation (C, Y) MD 26012: PUNCHNIB_ACTIVATION N4

Activation of punching and nibbling functions
Return value 0 = option not available
1 = option available
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
systemFrameMask (C, Y) $MC_MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK

Screenform for system frames
Configuring screenform for channel-specific system frames
Indicates in bit-coded form which system frames are available
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
toNo (C, Y) MD 28085: MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT W1

Number of T area
Number of T area that is assigned to the channel
- TYPE_UWORD
toolDataChangeBufferSize (C, Y) $MC_MM_TOOL_DATA_CHANGE_BUF‐

FER_SIZE
Size of the tool data modification memory
Size of the effective ring buffer for the tool data modifications in the OPI block TDC (0x56).
This value is the maximum column number in the OPI block TDC.
If a number of channels works with a TO unit, the setting with the lowest channel number applies.
The value = 0 is returned if the the ring buffer is not active ($MN_TOOL_DATA_CHANGE_COUNTER, Bit2=0 and Bit3=0).
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0

NC variables
toolDataChangeBufferSize (C, Y) $MC_MM_TOOL_DATA_CHANGE_BUF‐

FER_SIZE
Addressing
1
Read access
stringIsMeaning (C, Y)
Meaning of the string
As soon as PI _N_STRGIS is executed, the result from interpretation of the transferred string
is stored as a code in this variable. For example, the code for $P_TOOL is value 207.
Also refer to NC command STRINGIS.
Return value 000 = itemName string is unknown in the NCK
100 = itemName string is a language construct, but is not programmable (option/function is
not active)
2xx = itemName string is a permissible language construct (option/function is active)
2xx = is defined by:
200 = no interpretation possible
201 = DIN address / NC address (e.g. MEAS)
202 = G code (e.g. G04, INVCW)
203 = NC language function (= command with return value, parameter Passing) (e.g. GETM‐
DACT)
204 = NC language procedure (= command without return value, with parameter Passing)
(e.g. SBLOF)
205 = NC key word (e.g. DEFINE)
206 = machine/setting/option data (= parameter starting with $M / $S / $O)
207 = NC system parameter (= parameter starting with R and $)
208 = cycle name (name created by cycle)
209 = GUD variable (name created by GUD definitions
210 = macro name (name created by macro definition file)
211 = LUD variable (name created by active program)
212 = no Siemens G code, but an ISO G code
400 = NC address, which is not xx=01 or xx=10, and which is also not: G or R (e.g. T, D, F,
H, L, M)
Read access

NC variables
stringIsFileId (C, Y)
Numerical file ID for the string
is stored as file ID in this variable. moduleId may be used instead of fileId.
Also refer to NC command STRINGIS.

NC variables
Return value Meaning Name of OPI area OPI modules
definition file in NCK (domain name)
(explanation)
0 String is unknown
1 GCODE (G code - Siemens and/or ISO )
2 NCADDRES (NCK NC address character)
3 NCADDRES_CHAN (channel NC address character)
4 NCNAM (named NCK NC address)
5 NCNAM_CHAN (named channel NC address)
6 FRAME (frame variable)
7 TOOLCORR (tool parameter) TO (=4)
8 MACHDAT_NCK (machine data) NCK (=0) M (= 0x1A)
9 MACHDAT_CHAN (machine data) CHAN (=2) M (=-0x1A)
10 MACHDAT_AXIS (machine data) AXIS (=3) M (=-0x1A)
11 R_PARAM (R variable) CHAN (=2) RP (= 0x15)
12 AC_MARKER (synchronized action marker)
13 AC_PARAM (synchronized action parameter)
14 PRED_FUNC (NC language function)
15 SYSDAT_NCK (status variable)
16 SYSDAT_CHAN (status variable)
17 SYSDAT_AXIS (status variable)
18 USER_NCK _N_SGUD_DEF NCK (=0) GD1 (= 0x36)
19 USER_CHAN _N_SGUD_DEF CHAN (=2) GD1 (= 0x36)
20 USER_AXIS _N_SGUD_DEF AXIS (=3) GD1 (= 0x36)
21 USERMACRO _N_SMAC_DEF
_N_MMAC_DEF
_N_UMAC_DEF
22 EEC (leadscrew parameter)
23 QEC (quadrant error parameter)
24 CEC (cross error compensation parameter)
25 TOOLMAGAZINE (magazine parameter) TO (=4)
26 PROTAREA (protection area parameter)
27 PROTAREA_CHAN (protection area parameter)
28 USER_NCK2 _N_MGUD_DEF NCK (=0) GD2 (= 0x2D)
29 USER_NCK3 _N_UGUD_DEF NCK (=0) GD3 (= 0x2E)
30 USER_NCK4 _N_GUD4_DEF NCK (=0) GD4 (= 0x2F)
31 USER_NCK5 _N_GUD5_DEF NCK (=0) GD5 (= 0x30)
36 USER_CHAN2 _N_MGUD_DEF CHAN (=2) GD2 (= 0x2D)
37 USER_CHAN3 _N_UGUD_DEF CHAN (=2) GD3 (= 0x2E)
38 USER_CHAN4 _N_GUD4_DEF CHAN (=2) GD4 (= 0x2F)

NC variables
39 USER_CHAN5 _N_GUD5_DEF CHAN (=2) GD5 (= 0x30)
44 reserved
45 reserved
46 reserved
47 reserved
48 reserved
49 reserved
50 reserved
51 reserved
52 TOOLCARRIER (orientable tool carrier parameter TO (=4)
53 GCODESEXT (G code) NCK (=0) (G codes FANUC)
54 FRAME_NCK (frame) NCK (=0)
55 CYC_PARAM_CHAN (global cycle transfer parameter)r
56 TOOLENVMOD (tool environment parameter)
57 SYNAGUD_CHAN (synchronized action capable GUD CHAN (=2) GD1 (= 0x36)
58 SYNAGUD_CHAN2 (synchronized action capable GUD CHAN (=2) GD2 (= 0x2D)
59 SYNAGUD_CHAN3 (synchronized action capable GUD CHAN (=2) GD3 (= 0x2E)
60 SYNAGUD_CHAN4 (synchronized action capable GUD CHAN (=2) GD4 (= 0x2F)
61 SYNAGUD_CHAN5 (synchronized action capable GUD CHAN (=2) GD5 (= 0x30)
66 NKIN (kinematic chain parameter)
67 NPA (3D protection area parameter)
68 WAL_CS (work area in specific coordinate system)
69 TOOLISO22CORR (tool correction parameter with ISO2.2)
70 TOOLISO32CORR (tool correction parameter with ISO3.2)
71 EPS_PARAM (ePS services parameters (reserved for ePS use only !!)
>= 200 LUD (LUD / PUD - program local variable)
Note: via OPI normally only a subset of the NCK data blocks is made known.
Note: missing column entries means that no definition file has been defined for this line,
or that in OPI no domain name has been defined. Various NCK data may be accessed
through
OPI variable blocks instead of through domain names. Example: tool data, frame data, etc.
It is possible that several OPI variable blocks exist for a value of stringIsFileId.
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access

NC variables
stringIsSymbolId (C, Y)
Numerical symbol ID
is stored as symbol ID in this variable. The symbol ID is found in the NCK module, which is
specified in variable $$stringIsFileId.
This value can be found also in the corresponding ACC and ACX file.
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access
3.2.4 DriveHsa: Main spindle drive data

Attention: The HS module cannot be addressed with MMC100/EBF/OP030
load611U (H, S)
Load 611U
- TYPE_FLOAT

NC variables
3.2.5 Drive: HMI data
Some internal status data of the HMI can be accessed via this module.
_Nck_Nck_ActApplication (M, S)
Current application
Current application for display in HMI
- TYPE_STRING
_Nck_Nck_ActBag (M, S)
Current operating mode HMI
Current operating mode for display in HMI
- TYPE_CHAR
_Nck_Nck_Channel (M, S)
Current channel
Current channel for display in HMI
- TYPE_CHAR
_Nck_Nck_CoordSystem (M, S)
Coordinate system
Coordinate system for display in HMI
- TYPE_CHAR

NC variables
3.2.6 Nck: NC data
3.2.6.1 CP: Generic coupling
The CP block contains the status data for the generic coupling.
The status of the axis couplings is structured in an NCK-specific and channel-specific area.
cpCtabExists (N, CP)

Status of the specified curve table
Not zero, if the specified curve table exists
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
Read access
cpCtabId (N, CP)

ID of the nth curve table in the specif. mem. type
ID no. of the nth curve table in the specified memory type
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
Read access
cpCtabIdNumLinSegDef (N, CP)

Number of linear segments in the curve table
Number of the linear segments defined for the specified curve table
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
Read access
cpCtabIdNumPolDef (N, CP)

Number of polynomials for the spec. curve table
Number of the polynomials defined for the specified curve table

NC variables
cpCtabIdNumPolDef (N, CP)

- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
Read access
cpCtabIdNumPolySegDef (N, CP)

Number of polynomial segments in the curve table
Number of the polynomial segments defined for the specified curve table
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
Read access
cpCtabIdNumSegDef (N, CP)

Number of segments for the specified curve table
Number of segments defined for the specified curve table
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
Read access
cpCtabLocked (N, CP)

Locking status of the specified curve table
Locking status, value > 0, if curve table is locked
- TYPE_DWORD -1 3
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
cpCtabMemType (N, CP)

Memory type of the curve table
Memory type in which the curve table is stored
- TYPE_DWORD -1 2
Addressing
Read access
cpCtabNumDef (N, CP)

Number of defined curve tables
Total number of curve tables defined for the specified memory type
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
3
Read access
cpCtabNumFree (N, CP)

Number of available curve tables
Number of additional curve tables which can be defined in the specified memory type
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
3
Read access
cpCtabNumPolDef (N, CP)

Number of defined curve table polynomials
Total number of curve table polynomials defined in the specified memory type
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
3
Read access

NC variables
cpCtabNumPolFree (N, CP)

Number of available curve table polynomials
Number of additional curve table polynomials which can be defined in the specified memory type
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
3
Read access
cpCtabNumPolMax (N, CP)

Max. number of permissible curve table polynomials
Maximum number of curve table polynomials permissible in the specified memory type
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
3
Read access
cpCtabNumSegDef (N, CP)

Number of defined curve table segments
Total number of curve table segments of the specified segment type defined in the specified memory type
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
23
Read access
cpCtabNumSegFree (N, CP)

Number of available curve table segments
Number of additional curve table segments of the specified segment type which can be defined in the specified memory
type
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing

NC variables
cpCtabNumSegFree (N, CP)

23
Read access
cpCtabNumSegMax (N, CP)

Maximum number of permissible curve table segments
Maximum number of curve table segments of the specified segment type permissible in the specified memory type
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
23
Read access
cpCtabPeriodic (N, CP)

Periodicity of the specified curve table
Periodicity, value > 0, if curve table is periodic
- TYPE_DWORD -1 2
Addressing
Read access
3.2.6.2 DIAG: Diagnostics data, available only for internal development purposes
This block contains NCK-specific diagnostic data.
ipoClockNr (N, DIAG)

Number of the IPO cycle
Number of the IPO cycle since system ramp-up.
This value may only be read out on the target in the IPO time level
(via logging function).
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
ipoRemainTime (N, DIAG)

Remaining IPO time
Returns the remaining IPO time in ms.
This value may only be read out on the target in the IPO time level
(via logging function).
ms TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
1
Read access
nckAliveAndWellAddr (N, DIAG)

Address of $$nckAliveAndWell
Memory address of $$nckAliveAndWell
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
nckAliveAndWellAddrPtr (N, DIAG)

References to $$nckAliveAndWell
Memory address of a variable that contains the address of
$$nckAliveAndWell
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
protocTimeMeasurement (N, DIAG)

Parameterization of the time measurement
Parameterization of the logging time measurement
Return value O: Delivery version
1: Test version

NC variables
protocTimeMeasurement (N, DIAG)

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
1
createFile (N, DIAG)

Serves for creating internal NCK files
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 0
Addressing
5
Read access
bootStatus (N, DIAG)

Boot status
Return value = 0: No active boot
Bit0: actTime < rebootTime, that is boot has been initiated
Bit1: actTime < rebootTimeout, that is no timeout yet
Bit2: File system is currently inconsistent - boot delayed
Bit3: Backup on CF card is active - boot delayed
Bit5: Only with 840D-powerline: FFS is currently inconsistent - boot delayed
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
exTime (N, DIAG)

System time in seconds since power up
System time in seconds since power up
The time is advanced in the IPO cycle by software.
This time is used to control the variable service cycle and the delayed boot, among other things.
Addressing

NC variables
exTime (N, DIAG)

1
Read access
asyncFlushDelayTime (N, DIAG)

Flush delay time
Number of seconds delay of the asynchronous flush processes in the file system.
Negative values result in a synchronous instead of an asynchronous flush.
Addressing
2
systemTime (N, DIAG)

System time
- TYPE_STRING
lastTimeSeqSi (N, DIAG)

Time measurement of the last variable access
Time measurement of the last read/write variable via BTSS
Addressing
1
Read access
maxPduLength (N, DIAG)

Length of a PDU
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
eesParameter (N, DIAG)

Parameterization of EES
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
4
eesSimulateFileAccessProblem (N, DIAG)

Simulate file access problem with EES
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
1
plcVersCount (N, DIAG)

Number of PLC components
Number of PLC components returned when calling BSVdiPlcVersionData::getPlcVersCount().
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
btrace (N, DIAG)

Text for BTrace
Text to be accepted into the BTrace.
- TYPE_STRING
createMaxPfsPath (N, DIAG)

Generate a maximum path in the PFS
A path is being generated with maximum length in the PFS

NC variables
createMaxPfsPath (N, DIAG)

- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
nckFreezeMode (N, DIAG)

Freeze mode
Information about whether the NCK is in freeze mode state.
Value 0 : NCK runs normally.
Value 1 : NCK has stopped (this means program execution and communication with PLC have stopped). Only OPI com‐
munication is possible (for diagnostics).
- TYPE_UWORD 0 1
Addressing
1
Read access
3.2.6.3 DIAGN: Diagnostic module
This module contains information about global NC diagnostic data.

Net times: Time without interrupts by higher priority time levels.
Gross times: Time with interrupts by higher priority time levels.
Time levels in order of their priority: position controller, interpolator, block preparation.
actCycleTimeBrut (N, DIAGN)

Sum of current gross runtime
Total of the current gross run times of all channels in ms.
ms TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
13
Read access

NC variables
actCycleTimeNet (N, DIAGN)

Sum of current net runtime
Total of the current net run times of all channels in ms.
ms TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
13
Read access
nckCapabilities (N, DIAGN)

Alternative name: compressAbility
Compressed data transfer
Describes the NCK functionality
Return value Bit0=1: With Huffman algorithm compressed files can be transferred
(this corresponds to instruction ";$COMPR=HUFFMAN1" during download)
Bit1=1: The protocol of optimized upload is supported
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
dp611USpecAccChangeCnt (N, DIAGN)

Modification counter for ACC information
The counter is incremented if the NCK changes the
available ACC information
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
dp611USpecAccKey (N, DIAGN)

Info about available ACC contents
Version and type information about available ACC contents

NC variables
dp611USpecAccKey (N, DIAGN)

- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
$$maxnumDrives
Read access
dp611USpecAccMask (N, DIAGN)

Screenform: ACC files available
Bit-coded screenform indicating the drives for which special ACC files are available
Return value Bit 0 == 1 -> A special ACC is available

for drive with log. drive number 1.
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
dp611USpecAccPath (N, DIAGN)

Path for ACC files in the NCK file system
Path in which the ACC files are stored in the NCK file system.
This path might be empty later on if the files are to
be supplied from the active file system.
Current equivalent value: /_N_VS_DIR
- TYPE_STRING 0
Addressing
1
Read access
dpAxisCfgMachAxisNr (N, DIAGN)

Machine axis !!CAUTION NCU LINK!!
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 INT32_MAX
Addressing
$$dpAxisCfgNumAxes
Read access

NC variables
dpAxisCfgNumAxes (N, DIAGN)

Number of axis entries
Number of axes entered in the system
Addressing
1
Read access
dpAxisCfgValid (N, DIAGN)

Axis info is available
Return value 0=Information is not available
1=Information is available
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
1
Read access
dpAxisStateCtrlout (N, DIAGN)

Status of output drivers.
Return value 0=no axis status assigned
1=axis status assigned
2=axis status is cyclical
3=axis status assigned and cyclical
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 3
Addressing
$$dpAxisCfgNumAxes
Read access
dpAxisStateEnc1 (N, DIAGN)

Status encoder 1 driver

NC variables

- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
$$dpAxisCfgNumAxes
Read access

Status encoder 2 driver
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
$$dpAxisCfgNumAxes
Read access
dpAxisStateLifeCntErrCtrlout (N, DIAGN)

Sign-of-life error counter output
This data counts the number of position control cycles
since failure of the sign-of-life signal
Return value 0 to n= number of position control cycles since
failure of the sign-of-life signal
Addressing
$$dpAxisCfgNumAxes
Read access
dpAxisStateLifeCntErrEnc1 (N, DIAGN)

Sign-of-life error counter encoder 1

NC variables

- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
$$dpAxisCfgNumAxes
Read access

Sign-of-life error counter encoder 2
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
$$dpAxisCfgNumAxes
Read access
dpBusCfgBaudrate (N, DIAGN)

Baud rate on DP bus (bit/s)
Return value The permissible baud rates are determined by
the Profibus standard (DIN19245 EN50170)
Hz TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$dpBusCfgNumBuses
Read access
dpBusCfgBusNo (N, DIAGN)

Bus number of the bus
Bus number of the bus; used for conversion of "Bus index"=1...$$dpBusCfgNumBuses to "Bus number"
Return value All permissible bus numbers are possible:
1 = 1.DP bus on the PLC
2 = 2.DP / MPI bus on the PLC
3 = Virtual PROFIBUS
4 = Isochronous real-time Ethernet (reserved)

NC variables
dpBusCfgBusNo (N, DIAGN)

- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 4
Addressing
1
Read access
dpBusCfgCycleTime (N, DIAGN)

DP cycle time in [s,s,userdef]
The time required by the master to scan all
slaves once (request, response), until the
cycle starts from the beginning again.
s, user defined TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0 DOUBLE_MAX
Addressing
$$dpBusCfgNumBuses
Read access
dpBusCfgDataExTime (N, DIAGN)

Data exchange time in [s,s,userdef]
s, user defined TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0 DOUBLE_MAX
Addressing
$$dpBusCfgNumBuses
Read access
dpBusCfgNumBuses (N, DIAGN)

Number of DP buses
Return value Currently only one bus standardized acc. to Profibus DP standard
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
dpBusCfgValid (N, DIAGN)

Bus configuration data are available
Return value TRUE= data exist and are initialized
FALSE= no data exist
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
1
Read access
dpBusStateAccessDurationAct (N, DIAGN)

Current access time to bus
Current access time to communications buffer for DP master
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
$$dpBusCfgNumBuses
Read access
dpBusStateAccessDurationMax (N, DIAGN)

Maximum access time to bus
Maximum access time to communications buffer for DP master
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
$$dpBusCfgNumBuses
Read access
dpBusStateAccessDurationMin (N, DIAGN)

Minimum access time to bus
Minimum access time to communications buffer for DP master
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing

NC variables
dpBusStateAccessDurationMin (N, DIAGN)

$$dpBusCfgNumBuses
Read access
dpBusStateAccessErrCnt1 (N, DIAGN)

Number of bus access errors type 1
Number of bus access errors of type 1 since NCK Start
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
$$dpBusCfgNumBuses
Read access
dpBusStateAccessErrCnt2 (N, DIAGN)

Number of bus access errors type 2
Number of bus access errors of type 2 since NCK Start
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
$$dpBusCfgNumBuses
Read access
dpBusStateAvgCycleBetweenErr1 (N, DIAGN)

Cycles between bus access errors type 1
Average number of cycles between two
bus access errors of type 1
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
$$dpBusCfgNumBuses
Read access

Cycles between bus access errors type 2
Average number of cycles between two
bus access errors of type 2

NC variables

- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
$$dpBusCfgNumBuses
Read access
dpBusStateCycleCnt (N, DIAGN)

Number of bus cycles
Number of bus cycles since NCK Start
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
$$dpBusCfgNumBuses
Read access
dpBusStateDpmAction (N, DIAGN)

Indic. for operating progr. of DP M
Indicator for operating progress of DP M
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
$$dpBusCfgNumBuses
Read access
dpBusStateDpmActual (N, DIAGN)

Curr. stat. of DP M bus - DP M contr.
Current status of DP M bus - controlled by DP M
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
$$dpBusCfgNumBuses
Read access
dpBusStateDpmCtrl (N, DIAGN)

Boot. stat. proc. f. DP Master
Booting status of processor for DP Master dpcadmin

NC variables
dpBusStateDpmCtrl (N, DIAGN)

- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
$$dpBusCfgNumBuses
Read access
dpBusStateDpmError (N, DIAGN)

Error on status transitions
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
$$dpBusCfgNumBuses
Read access
dpBusStateDpmPrjCnt (N, DIAGN)

Modification counter for new CP configs.
Modification counter for new DP configurations.
Suggested use:
*) Read modification counter (1)
*) Read out configuring data
*) Read modification counter (2)
*) If the modification counters in (1) and (2) are identical
and both display "valid", the data read from HW-Config
will be consistent.
Return value even values -> configuration invalid
uneven values -> configuration valid
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
$$dpBusCfgNumBuses
Read access
dpBusStateDpmRequest (N, DIAGN)

Des. status of DP M bus - HOST req.
Desired status of DP M bus - request from HOST

NC variables
dpBusStateDpmRequest (N, DIAGN)

- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
$$dpBusCfgNumBuses
Read access
dpBusStateNumActiveSlaves (N, DIAGN)

Number of slaves connected to bus
This data indicates how many slaves can currently be
accessed via the bus. This value is updated in online operation.
Return value The number of slaves on the bus is determined

by the Profibus standard (DIN19245 EN50170)
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 125
Addressing
$$dpBusCfgNumBuses
Read access
dpClientCfgId (N, DIAGN)

Identification client NCK/PLC/3RD
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
$$dpClientCfgNumClnt
Read access
dpClientCfgNumClnt (N, DIAGN)

Number of clients
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
dpClientCfgValid (N, DIAGN)

Client information is available
Return value 0=no client information available
1=client information is available
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
1
Read access
dpClientStateComm (N, DIAGN)

Client status incl. output release
Return value 0=None output enable
1=Client state output enable
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
$$dpClientCfgNumClnt
Read access
dpSlaveCfgAssignBus (N, DIAGN)

Bus number of the slave
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
$$dpSlaveCfgNumSlaves
Read access
dpSlaveCfgBusAddr (N, DIAGN)

Broadcast bus address of slave
The address of the slave on the bus.
In addition to its own address, every slave has a
broadcast address via which all salves can be
addressed.
Return value The broadcast address is not available for individually
addressing a single slave.
127: Broadcast address

NC variables
dpSlaveCfgBusAddr (N, DIAGN)

Addressing
Read access
dpSlaveCfgDataExchangeTime (N, DIAGN)

Tdx [s,s,userdef]
Time for the end of cyclical data transfer
Return value See $$dpSlaveCfgMasterAppCycTime
Addressing
Read access
dpSlaveCfgInputTime (N, DIAGN)

Ti [s,s,userdef]
Time for actual-value sensing
Addressing
Read access
dpSlaveCfgIsochronModeSupport (N, DIAGN)

Isochronous mode configured for slave
Gives information whether the slave has been configured for isochronous mode on the PROFIBUS.
Return value 0: Isochronous mode not configured
1: Isochronous mode configured
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing

NC variables
dpSlaveCfgIsochronModeSupport (N, DIAGN)

Read access
dpSlaveCfgMasterAppCycTime (N, DIAGN)

T_mapc [s,s,userdef]
Position controller cycle.
For a detailed description, please refer to
PROFIDRIVE PROFIL ANTRIEBSTECHNIK
(Edition: V1.2 Draft, April 1999) Section 7
Return value See PROFIDRIVE PROFIL ANTRIEBSTECHNIK
(Edition: V1.2 Draft, April 1999) Section 7
Addressing
Read access
dpSlaveCfgNumSlaves (N, DIAGN)

Number of configured slaves
Number of slaves configured in SDB1xxx.
This value may not match the actual number of slaves
connected to the bus.
Return value The number of slaves which can be configured for bus connection
is determined by Profibus standard (DIN19245 EN50170).
Addressing
1
Read access
dpSlaveCfgProfibusCycleTime (N, DIAGN)

Tdp [s,s,userdef]
Bus cycle time
Addressing

NC variables
dpSlaveCfgProfibusCycleTime (N, DIAGN)

Read access
dpSlaveCfgOutputTime (N, DIAGN)

To [s,s,userdef]
Time for setpoint acceptance
Addressing
Read access
dpSlaveCfgValid (N, DIAGN)

Slave data are available
This data indicates whether the slave data structure
has already been initialized. The structure is initialized
when a slave configuration or status data is accessed.
Scanning dpSlaveCfgValid also activates initialization
of the structure.
Return value True: Slave data are available

False: Slave data are not available
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
1
Read access
dpSlaveIdentNo (N, DIAGN)

Ident number of the slave
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
dpSlaveIdentNoEx (N, DIAGN)

Extended ID no. of the slave
The extended ID no. of the PROFIBUS slave
helps to identify the PROFIBUS slaves not officially classified
as such and therefore lack specificiation $$dpSlaveIdentNo.
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
Read access
dpSlaveStateComm (N, DIAGN)

Slave active on bus or not (LED green)
The slave is active on the bus once the drive assigned to
the slave has successfully logged on to the bus.
Return value True: Slave on bus
False: Slave not on bus
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
Read access
dpSlaveStateIncCnt (N, DIAGN)

Incarnation counter
The incarnation counter of the slave
is increased by one each time the slave is included in the bus.
If the slave drops out of the bus, this counter is not changed.
After the first time it has gone into the bus
(that is the first operational status of the slave),
the value is 1.
In case of an area overflow, the count restarts at 0.
This only functions with slaves which contain at least one assigned NC axis.
In the case of other slaves (pure I/O slaves, or axes controlled by the PLC),
this values remains at 0.
Return value From 0 (starting value after Restart) to a maximum of 2147483647 (2^31-1).
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 2147483647

NC variables
dpSlaveStateIncCnt (N, DIAGN)

Addressing
Read access
dpSlaveStateSync (N, DIAGN)

DpSync
The drive linked to this slave is operating in cyclic mode.
Slaves without a drive are defined as "non-cyclical".
Return value True: Cyclical
False: Non-cyclical
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
Read access
dpSlaveVendorId (N, DIAGN)

Manufacturer's number of the device
PROFIBUS: Always returns 0
PROFINET: Manufacturer's number of the device
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
Read access
dpSlotCfgAssignAxis (N, DIAGN)

Assignment [axis]
This data supplies the axis indices of the drive, encoder 1 and encoder 2
for access in the Axis-Assign-Table.
Return value The 32-bit value consists of 4 bytes with the following meaning:
Byte0(bits 0-7) = axis index of axis
Byte1(bits 8-15) = axis index, encoder 1
Byte2(bits 16-23)= axis index, encoder 2
Byte3(bits 24-31)= provided for future extensions.
A byte with the value 0xFF indicates that no axis index
is defined for the relevant slot.

NC variables
dpSlotCfgAssignAxis (N, DIAGN)

Addressing
$$dpSlotCfgNumSlots
Read access
dpSlotCfgAssignBus (N, DIAGN)

Assignment [bus]
Bus number assigned to this slot
Return value Since only one bus is currently supported by Profibus DP,
there is only one bus to which all slots are assigned.
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$dpSlotCfgNumSlots
Read access
dpSlotCfgAssignClient (N, DIAGN)

Assignment [client]
This data supplies the clientIndex for accessing the
Client Assign table.
Return value 0=no assignment possible (this applies to diagnostic and PKW slots)
>0 assignment exists
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 2
Addressing
$$dpSlotCfgNumSlots
Read access
dpSlotCfgAssignMaster (N, DIAGN)

Assignment [master]
Number of master to which this slot is assigned
Return value Since only one bus is currently supported by
Profibus DP and only one Class 1 Master exists
per bus, there is only one master to which all slots
are assigned.

NC variables
dpSlotCfgAssignMaster (N, DIAGN)

- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$dpSlotCfgNumSlots
Read access
dpSlotCfgAssignSlave (N, DIAGN)

Assignment [slave]
This data contains the bus address of the slave
belonging to the nth slot.
Return value All legal slave addresses can be specified
Addressing
$$dpSlotCfgNumSlots
Read access
dpSlotCfgIoType (N, DIAGN)

I/O identifier
Return value 0 = input slot
1 = output slot
2 = diagnosis slot
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 2
Addressing
$$dpSlotCfgNumSlots
Read access
dpSlotCfgLength (N, DIAGN)

Length in number of bytes
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 32
Addressing
$$dpSlotCfgNumSlots
Read access

NC variables
dpSlotCfgLogBaseAddress (N, DIAGN)

Log. basic address of slot
The logical basic address of the slot is assigned
during configuration. Although it is not needed on the
bus for data transfer purposes, this address is the only
means by which a unique link can be created between the
NCK and bus nodes.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 UINT16_MAX
Addressing
$$dpSlotCfgNumSlots
Read access
dpSlotCfgNumSlots (N, DIAGN)

Number of slots
The total number of all slots configured in the system is
stored in this data.
Return value 0 (lower limit) up to INT32_MAX(upper limit);
Note that a slave cannot support more than
256 slots.
Addressing
1
Read access
dpSlotCfgPNSlotNr (N, DIAGN)

PROFINET: Slot number within the IO device
PROFIBUS: Not used
PROFINET: Slot number within the IO device
Addressing
$$dpSlotCfgNumSlots
Read access

NC variables
dpSlotCfgSlaveAddress (N, DIAGN)

Bus address of slave
This data contains the bus address of the slave to which this slot is assigned.
Several slots may have the same slave address.

Return value The number of available addresses on the bus is determined
by the Profibus standard (DIN19245 EN50170).
Addressing
$$dpSlotCfgNumSlots
Read access
dpSlotCfgSlotNr (N, DIAGN)

(Sub-)slot number within the slave
PROFIBUS: Slot number within the slave
PROFINET: Subslot number within the IO device
Return value A maximum total of 256 slots can be assigned to each slave.
0: Diagnostic slot
2: Diagnostic slot
4: 1st data slot
Addressing
$$dpSlotCfgNumSlots
Read access
dpSlotCfgValid (N, DIAGN)

Slot information is available
The slot data structure (CcIdent) exists and is initialized.
Return value True: Data are valid
False: Data are invalid or not initialized
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
dpSlotStateComm (N, DIAGN)

Status of slots
Status of slots (ok, failed, not processed by the NCK)
Return value 0= no sign of life
1= sign of life
2= not processed by NCK
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$dpSlotCfgNumSlots
Read access
dpSlotStateRecvTelegram (N, DIAGN)

Received message frame
Bit pattern of this slot received by the master
in the form of a hexadecimal string
- TYPE_STRING 0
Addressing
$$dpSlotCfgNumSlots
Read access
dpSlotStateSendTelegram (N, DIAGN)

Transmitted message frame
Bit pattern of this slot sent to the slave in
the form of a hexadecimal string
Return value Transmitted message frame
- TYPE_STRING 0
Addressing
$$dpSlotCfgNumSlots
Read access
dpSlotStateTelegramType (N, DIAGN)

Message frame type
Message frame type of slot
Return value 0 = Message frame type unknown

NC variables
dpSlotStateTelegramType (N, DIAGN)

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 UINT16_MAX
Addressing
$$dpSlotCfgNumSlots
Read access
dpSysCfgAvailable (N, DIAGN)

DPA/DPM available
This data specifies whether the system has been generated
with DP Adapter and/or DP Master
Return value 0= Neither DPA nor DPM available
1= DPA available
2= DPM available
3= DPA and DPM available
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 3
Addressing
1
Read access
dpSysCfgNumMaster (N, DIAGN)

Number of masters
Return value There is only one master per bus with DP.
Since only 1 bus is currently permitted by the
bus standard, there can only be a maximum
of one master.
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
1
Read access
dpSysCfgValid (N, DIAGN)

DP system configuration data are valid
This data indicates whether the configuration data are valid and
initialized.
Return value TRUE or FALSE

NC variables
dpSysCfgValid (N, DIAGN)

- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
1
Read access
dpSysCfgVersionDpm (N, DIAGN)

Version of DP Master software
Version number of DP M SW as numerical value
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$dpSysCfgNumMaster
Read access
dpSysCfgVersionDpr (N, DIAGN)

Actual version Dpr
Actual version Dpr (inaccessible in earlier SW)
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$dpSysCfgNumMaster
Read access
dpSysCfgVersionDprEx (N, DIAGN)

Expected Dpr version from DPR_SS_VERSION
DPR_SS_VERSION is a version number stored in the NCK which
can be read out via this variable.
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$dpSysCfgNumMaster
Read access

NC variables
dpSysCfgVersionHost (N, DIAGN)

Host SW version
This data contains the version number of the host SW as a numerical value
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0 UINT16_MAX
Addressing
$$dpSysCfgNumMaster
Read access
dpSysStateDpmInit (N, DIAGN)

Startup synchronization status
There are three different initialization states:
REQUEST, ACKNOWLEDGE and ERROR
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
$$dpSysCfgNumMaster
Read access
errCodeSetNrGen (N, DIAGN)

Error code set for communication errors
Selection of error code set to be used in the case of communication
errors. The selection is client-specific, the client is identified by the sender
address.
Return value 1: P1-compatible codes (default)
0-4: As 1
5: P5-compatible codes
6: Current codes (from P6)
7-100: Reserved
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1

NC variables
errCodeSetNrPi (N, DIAGN)

Error code set P1 for comm. errors
Selection of error code set to be used by PI Services in the case of communication errors.
The selection is client-specific, the client is identified by the sender address.
Return value 0: P1-compatible code

5: P5-compatible code
6: P6-compatible code
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
maxCycleTimeBrut (N, DIAGN)

Sum of maximum gross runtime
Total of the maximum gross run times of all channels in ms.
ms TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
13
Read access
maxCycleTimeNet (N, DIAGN)

Sum of maximum net runtime
Total of the maximum net run times of all channels in ms.
ms TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
13
Read access
minCycleTimeBrut (N, DIAGN)

Sum of minimum gross runtime
Total of the minimum gross run times of all channels in ms.

NC variables
minCycleTimeBrut (N, DIAGN)

ms TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
13
Read access
minCycleTimeNet (N, DIAGN)

Sum of minimum net runtimes
Total of the minimum net run times of all channels in ms.
ms TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
13
Read access
nckCompileSwitches (N, DIAGN)

NCK compiler switch
Selected NCK compiler switches
Return value Bit0 (0x1): NDEBUG
Bit1 (0x2): NOTRACES
Bit2 (0x4): EMBARGO
Bit3 (0x8): TARGET
Bit4 (0x10): HOST_SIMULATION
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
poweronTime (N, DIAGN) $AN_POWERON_TIME

Time since normal boot
Time since last normal boot ( in minutes )
Addressing
1

NC variables
setupTime (N, DIAGN) $AN_SETUP_TIME

Time since default boot
Time since last "control system boot on default
values" ( in minutes ).
The timer is automatically set to zero on every
"control system boot on default values".
Addressing
1
noOfPersistencyReq (N, DIAGN) $AN_PERSDIAG[row-1,0]

Number of persistence operations
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
34
Read access
noOfPersistencyReqFailed (N, DIAGN) $AN_PERSDIAG[row-1,1]

Number of failed persistence operations
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
34
Read access
totalPersistencyTime (N, DIAGN) $AN_PERSDIAG[row-1,2]

Summated time for persistence
Summated time for making data persistent
Addressing

NC variables
totalPersistencyTime (N, DIAGN) $AN_PERSDIAG[row-1,2]

34
Read access
persistencyTimeMinimal (N, DIAGN) $AN_PERSDIAG[row-1,3]

Minimum time for persistence
Minimum time for making data persistent
Addressing
34
Read access
persistencyTimeAverage (N, DIAGN) $AN_PERSDIAG[row-1,4]

Average time for persistence
Average time for making data persistent
Addressing
34
Read access
persistencyTimeMaximal (N, DIAGN) $AN_PERSDIAG[row-1,5]

Maximum time for persistence
Maximum time for making data persistent
Addressing
34
Read access
optUploadDiag (N, DIAGN)

Optimized upload test parameterization
- TYPE_UWORD 0

NC variables
maxLockTimeDomSubtask (N, DIAGN)

Max. lock time of the subtask EXCOM
Max. net lock time of the subtask EXCOM (domain services)
ms TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
2
Read access
noOfPersistencyOverflowPrep (N, DIAGN) $AN_PERSDIAG[row-1,6]

No. overflows of preprocessing power-fail buffer
Number of overflows of the power-fail buffer in the preprocessing
(Value > 0 indicates that the buffer is too small ->
increase $MN_MM_ACTFILESYS_LOG_FILE_MEM[0] if possible)
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
noOfPersistencyOverflowToolChange (N, DIAGN) $AN_PERSDIAG[row-1,7]

No. overflows of the tool change power-fail buffer
Number of overflows of the power-fail buffer for the tool change data changes
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
noOfPersistencyOverflowIpo (N, DIAGN) $AN_PERSDIAG[row-1,8]

No. overflows of synchro. action power-fail buffer
Number of overflows of the power-fail buffer for the changes to persistent data in synchronous actions

NC variables
noOfPersistencyOverflowIpo (N, DIAGN) $AN_PERSDIAG[row-1,8]

- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
isPersistencyOverflowPrep (N, DIAGN) $AN_PERSDIAG[row-1,9]

Overflow of prepr. power-fail buffer at power-fail
Value=1: At the time of power-fail/power off, overflow of the power-fail buffer was pending in the preprocessing.
The last data change before power-fail/power off has been lost.
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
isPersistencyOverflowToolChange (N, DIAGN) $AN_PERSDIAG[row-1,10]

Overfl. of tool ch. power-fail buff. at power-fail
Value=1: At the time of power-fail/power off, overflow of the power-fail buffer was pending in the preprocessing.
The last tool/magazine data change before power-fail/power off has been lost.
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
isPersistencyOverflowIpo (N, DIAGN) $AN_PERSDIAG[row-1,11]

Overflow of synchro. action power-fail buffer at p
Value=1: At the time of power-fail/power off, overflow of the power-fail
buffer for changes of persistent data in synchronous actions was pending.
The last data change before power-fail/power off has been lost.
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing

NC variables
isPersistencyOverflowIpo (N, DIAGN) $AN_PERSDIAG[row-1,11]

1
Read access
noOfPersistencyEntriesPrep (N, DIAGN) $AN_PERSDIAG[row-1,12]

No. data entries in preprocess. power-fail buffer
Number of data entries in the power-fail buffer in the preprocessing
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
noOfPersistencyEntriesToolChange (N, DIAGN) $AN_PERSDIAG[row-1,13]

No. data entries in tool change power-fail buffer
Number of data entries in the power-fail buffer for the tool change data changes in IPO
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
noOfPersistencyEntriesIpo (N, DIAGN) $AN_PERSDIAG[row-1,14]

No. data entries in synchronous actions pf buffer
Number of data entries in the power-fail buffer for changes to persistent data in synchronous actions
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
aveCycleTimeNet (N, DIAGN)

Average net run time
Average net run time in ms
ms TYPE_DOUBLE

NC variables
aveCycleTimeNet (N, DIAGN)

Addressing
13
Read access
sumCycleTimeNet (N, DIAGN)

Sum of net run times
Sum of net run times in s
s TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
13
Read access
noOfPersistencyCollisions (N, DIAGN)

Number of collisions during previous async flush
If a persistence operation (= flush) is triggered, although an asynchronous persistence operation
with the same ID has not yet been executed, then the value of this variable is incremented.
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
actNckLoad (N, DIAGN)

Actual utilization of the NC in %.
NC load imposed by cyclic tasks (position controller, interpolator and possibly soft PLC).
The load must not be too high, so that even low priority tasks, such as communication of the data for the display, can be
performed.
The value is based on $$actCycleTimeNet with line=CYCLE and brings this in relation to the $$taskCycleTime with
line=CYCLE.
Continues to take into account that only part of the cycle is actually available to the NCK, corresponds to
$NCK_PCOS_TIME_RATIO.
% TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
minNckLoad (N, DIAGN)

Minimum utilization of the NC in %
Minimum NC load imposed by cyclic tasks (position controller, interpolator and possibly soft PLC).
The value is based on $$minCycleTimeNet with line=CYCLE and brings this in relation to the $$taskCycleTime with
line=CYCLE.
% TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1
Read access
maxNckLoad (N, DIAGN)

Maximum utilization of the NC in %
Maximum NC load imposed by cyclic tasks (position controller, interpolator and possibly soft PLC).
The value is based on $$maxCycleTimeNet with line=CYCLE and brings this in relation to the $$taskCycleTime with
line=CYCLE.
% TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1
Read access
aveNckLoad (N, DIAGN)

Average utilization of the NC in %
Average NC load imposed by cyclic tasks (position controller, interpolator and possibly soft PLC).
The value is based on $$aveCycleTimeNet with line=CYCLE and brings this in relation to the $$taskCycleTime with
line=CYCLE.
% TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
taskCycleTime (N, DIAGN)

Cycle time
Cycle time of the task in ms
ms TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
12
Read access
mdChangeCounter (N, DIAGN)

Modification counter for machine data
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
4
Read access
taskName (N, DIAGN)

Name of task
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
13
Read access
taskAvailable (N, DIAGN)

Task is present
Return value 0: Task not present
1: Task present
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
13
Read access

NC variables
numCores (N, DIAGN)

Number of cores used by the NCK
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
3.2.6.4 ETPD: Data list for protocolling
Data lists for protocolling.This module allows to access several lines or rows at a time.
area (N, ETPD)

nth data in list: area
Variable specification of nth OPI data in the list:
area
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
2 + 5 * ($$numData- 1)
col (N, ETPD)

nth data in list: col
Variable specification of nth OPI data in list:
col
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
4 + 5 * ($$numData- 1)
numData (N, ETPD)

Number of data in the list
Number of data in the list.
Return value <= maxnumTraceProtData

NC variables
numData (N, ETPD)

- TYPE_UWORD 0 $$maxnumTraceProtDa‐
ta
Addressing
1
varSpecs (N, ETPD)

Do not use this variable any more.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 $$maxnumTraceProtDa‐
ta
Addressing
1
row (N, ETPD)

nth data in list: row
row
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
5 + 5 * ($$numData- 1)
type (N, ETPD)

nth data in list: type
Low byte:Variable specification of nth OPI data in list:
type (module type)
High byte: Should be read more than a line so that the number of lines can be given here.
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables
type (N, ETPD)

6 + 5 * ($$numData- 1)
unit (N, ETPD)

nth data in list: unit
unit
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
3 + 5 * ($$numData- 1)
3.2.6.5 FA: Active Work Offset
There are the following frame indices:

2: IFRAME current settable work offset (only if $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES > 0)
6: ACTBFRAME current total of base frames (only if $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES = 0)
The maximum frame index is: 6
linShift (N, FA) diverse, siehe Bausteinbescheibung PA

Translation of an active frame
Translation of an active work offset (the physical unit is defined in basicLengthUnit in module Y in area N).
Addressing
20 * $$maxnumGlobMachAxes
Read access
linShiftFine (N, FA)

Fine offset for frames, extension of the basic frames and the settable frames.
Addressing

NC variables
linShiftFine (N, FA)

mirrorImgActive (N, FA) diverse, siehe Bausteinbescheibung PA

Mirroring enabled in an active frame
Mirroring enabled in an active work offset
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
Read access
rotation (N, FA) diverse, siehe Bausteinbescheibung PA

Rotation of an active frame
Rotation of an active work offset
Degree TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
rotationCoordinate (N, FA) diverse, siehe Bausteinbescheibung

Coordinate rotation of active frames
Rotation around a coordinate of an active work offset
Degree TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
scaleFact (N, FA) diverse, siehe Bausteinbescheibung PA

Scaling factor of an active frame
Scaling factor of an active work offset

NC variables
scaleFact (N, FA) diverse, siehe Bausteinbescheibung PA

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
3.2.6.6 FB: Base Frame
This only applies if $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES > 0.
The maximum frame index is: $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES - 1
linShift (N, FB) $P_NCBFR[x,TR] x=FrameNo, y=Axis PA

Addressing
$MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES * $
$maxnumGlobMachAxes
linShiftFine (N, FB) $P_NCBFR[x,SI] x=FrameNo, y=Axis

Addressing
$maxnumGlobMachAxes

NC variables
mirrorImgActive (N, FB) $P_NCBFR[x ,MI] x=FrameNo, y=Axis PA

1: Mirroring active
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$maxnumGlobMachAxes
rotation (N, FB) $P_NCBFR[x,y,RT] x=FrameNo, y=Axis PA

Degree TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$maxnumGlobMachAxes
rotationCoordinate (N, FB) $P_NCBFR[x,y,RT] x=FrameNo, y=1

Rotation around a coordinate of a settable work offset
Degree TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$maxnumGlobMachAxes
scaleFact (N, FB) $P_NCBFR[x,SC] x=FrameNo, y=Axis PA


NC variables
scaleFact (N, FB) $P_NCBFR[x,SC] x=FrameNo, y=Axis PA

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$maxnumGlobMachAxes
3.2.6.7 FG: Frames for grinding applications
These occur only if $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_G_FRAMES > 0.

0: GRAME1
1: GRAME2
2: GRAME3
3: GRAME4
...
n: GRAMEn
...
99: GRAME100
The maximum frame index is: $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_G_FRAMES - 1
The PI service SETUFR has to be called to activate the grinding frames.
linShift (N, FG) PA

Translation of grinding frame
Translation (the physical unit is defined in basicLengthUnit in block Y in area N).
Addressing
$MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_G_FRAMES * $
$maxnumGlobMachAxes
linShiftFine (N, FG)


NC variables
linShiftFine (N, FG)

Addressing
$maxnumGlobMachAxes
mirrorImgActive (N, FG) PA

Mirroring of grinding frame
Mirroring
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$maxnumGlobMachAxes
rotationCoordinate (N, FG)

Rotations of grinding frame
Dummy variable, do not use
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$maxnumGlobMachAxes
Read access
scaleFact (N, FG) PA

Scaling factor of grinding frame
Scaling factor
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$maxnumGlobMachAxes

NC variables
rotation (N, FG)

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
3.2.6.8 FU: Settable Work Offset
This only applies if $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES > 0.

0 = G500
1 = G54
2 = G55
3 = G56
4 = G57
5 = G505
6 = G506
:
n = G5n
:
99 = G599
The maximum frame index is: $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES - 1
The PI service SETUFR has to be called in order to activate the settable frames.
linShift (N, FU) PA

Addressing
$MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES * $
$maxnumGlobMachAxes

NC variables
linShiftFine (N, FU)

Addressing
$maxnumGlobMachAxes
mirrorImgActive (N, FU) PA

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$maxnumGlobMachAxes
rotationCoordinate (N, FU)

Coordinate rotation of a settable frame
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$maxnumGlobMachAxes
Read access
scaleFact (N, FU) PA

- TYPE_DOUBLE

NC variables
scaleFact (N, FU) PA

Addressing
$maxnumGlobMachAxes
rotation (N, FU)

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
Global machine data
ALARM_PAR_DISPLAY_TEXT (N, M) MD 11413: $MN_ALARM_PAR_DIS‐

PLAY_TEXT
MD 11413: $MN_ALARM_PAR_DISPLAY_TEXT
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
ALARM_REACTION_CHAN_NOREADY (N, M) MD 11412: $MN_ALARM_REAC‐

TION_CHAN_NOREADY
MD 11412: $MN_ALARM_REACTION_CHAN_NOREADY
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
ASSIGN_CHAN_TO_MODE_GROUP (N, M) MD 10010: $MN_AS‐

SIGN_CHAN_TO_MODE_GROUP
MD 10010: $MN_ASSIGN_CHAN_TO_MODE_GROUP
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
ASUP_EDITABLE (N, M) MD 11610: $MN_ASUP_EDITABLE

MD 11610: $MN_ASUP_EDITABLE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
ASUP_EDIT_PROTECTION_LEVEL (N, M) MD 11612: $MN_ASUP_EDIT_PROTEC‐

TION_LEVEL
MD 11612: $MN_ASUP_EDIT_PROTECTION_LEVEL
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
ASUP_START_MASK (N, M) MD 11602: $MN_ASUP_START_MASK

MD 11602: $MN_ASUP_START_MASK
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
ASUP_START_PRIO_LEVEL (N, M) MD 11604: $MN_AS‐

UP_START_PRIO_LEVEL
MD 11604: $MN_ASUP_START_PRIO_LEVEL
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
AUXFU_GROUP_SPEC (N, M) MD 11110: $MN_AUXFU_GROUP_SPEC

MD 11110: $MN_AUXFU_GROUP_SPEC
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access
AUXFU_MAXNUM_GROUP_ASSIGN (N, M) MD 11100: $MN_AUXFU_MAX‐

NUM_GROUP_ASSIGN
MD 11100: $MN_AUXFU_MAXNUM_GROUP_ASSIGN

NC variables
AUXFU_MAXNUM_GROUP_ASSIGN (N, M) MD 11100: $MN_AUXFU_MAX‐

NUM_GROUP_ASSIGN
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
BAG_MASK (N, M) MD 11600: $MN_BAG_MASK

MD 11600: $MN_BAG_MASK
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
CC_ASSIGN_FASTOUT_MASK (N, M) MD 10420: $MN_CC_ASSIGN_FAST‐

OUT_MASK
MD 10420: $MN_CC_ASSIGN_FASTOUT_MASK
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
CC_HW_DEBUG_MASK (N, M) MD 10430: $MN_CC_HW_DEBUG_MASK

MD 10430: $MN_CC_HW_DEBUG_MASK
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
CC_VDI_IN_DATA (N, M) MD 10400: $MN_CC_VDI_IN_DATA

MD 10400: $MN_CC_VDI_IN_DATA
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
CC_VDI_OUT_DATA (N, M) MD 10410: $MN_CC_VDI_OUT_DATA

MD 10410: $MN_CC_VDI_OUT_DATA
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
CHECK_DISABLE_TIME (N, M) MD 10085: $MN_CHECK_DISABLE_TIME

MD 10085: $MN_CHECK_DISABLE_TIME

NC variables
CHECK_DISABLE_TIME (N, M) MD 10085: $MN_CHECK_DISABLE_TIME

- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
COMPAR_ASSIGN_ANA_INPUT_1 (N, M) MD 10530: $MN_COMPAR_AS‐

SIGN_ANA_INPUT_1
MD 10530: $MN_COMPAR_ASSIGN_ANA_INPUT_1
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access
COMPAR_ASSIGN_ANA_INPUT_2 (N, M) MD 10531: $MN_COMPAR_AS‐

SIGN_ANA_INPUT_2
MD 10531: $MN_COMPAR_ASSIGN_ANA_INPUT_2
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access
COMPAR_TYPE_1 (N, M) MD 10540: $MN_COMPAR_TYPE_1

MD 10540: $MN_COMPAR_TYPE_1
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
COMPAR_TYPE_2 (N, M) MD 10541: $MN_COMPAR_TYPE_2

MD 10541: $MN_COMPAR_TYPE_2
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
COM_IPO_TIME_RATIO (N, M) MD 10072: $MN_COM_IPO_TIME_RATIO

MD 10072: $MN_COM_IPO_TIME_RATIO

NC variables
COM_IPO_TIME_RATIO (N, M) MD 10072: $MN_COM_IPO_TIME_RATIO

- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
CTRLOUT_LEAD_TIME (N, M) MD 10082: $MN_CTRLOUT_LEAD_TIME

MD 10082: $MN_CTRLOUT_LEAD_TIME
% TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
CTRLOUT_LEAD_TIME_MAX (N, M) MD 10083:

$MN_CTRLOUT_LEAD_TIME_MAX
MD 10083: $MN_CTRLOUT_LEAD_TIME_MAX
% TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
DIG_ASSIGN_DIGITIZE_TO_CHAN (N, M) MD 11430: $MN_DIG_ASSIGN_DIGI‐

TIZE_TO_CHAN
MD 11430: $MN_DIG_ASSIGN_DIGITIZE_TO_CHAN
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
DIR_VECTOR_NAME_TAB (N, M) MD 10640: $MN_DIR_VEC‐

TOR_NAME_TAB
MD 10640: $MN_DIR_VECTOR_NAME_TAB
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
2
Read access
DRIVE_DIAGNOSIS (N, M) MD 13100: $MN_DRIVE_DIAGNOSIS

MD 13100: $MN_DRIVE_DIAGNOSIS
- TYPE_DWORD

NC variables
DRIVE_DIAGNOSIS (N, M) MD 13100: $MN_DRIVE_DIAGNOSIS

Addressing
2
Read access
DRYRUN_MASK (N, M) MD 10704: $MN_DRYRUN_MASK

MD 10704: $MN_DRYRUN_MASK
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
ENABLE_ALARM_MASK (N, M) MD 11411: $MN_ENABLE_ALARM_MASK

MD 11411: $MN_ENABLE_ALARM_MASK
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
ENC_HANDWHEEL_INPUT_NR (N, M) MD 11344: $MN_ENC_HANDWHEEL_IN‐

PUT_NR
MD 11344: $MN_ENC_HANDWHEEL_INPUT_NR
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
ENC_HANDWHEEL_MODULE_NR (N, M) MD 11342: $MN_ENC_HAND‐

WHEEL_MODULE_NR
MD 11342: $MN_ENC_HANDWHEEL_MODULE_NR
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
ENC_HANDWHEEL_SEGMENT_NR (N, M) MD 11340: $MN_ENC_HAND‐

WHEEL_SEGMENT_NR
MD 11340: $MN_ENC_HANDWHEEL_SEGMENT_NR
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access

NC variables
ENC_SSI_BAUD_RATE (N, M) MD 14000: $MN_ENC_SSI_BAUD_RATE

MD 14000: $MN_ENC_SSI_BAUD_RATE
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
EULER_ANGLE_NAME_TAB (N, M) MD 10620: $MN_EULER_AN‐

GLE_NAME_TAB
MD 10620: $MN_EULER_ANGLE_NAME_TAB
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
2
Read access
FASTIO_ANA_INPUT_WEIGHT (N, M) MD 10320: $MN_FASTIO_ANA_IN‐

PUT_WEIGHT
MD 10320: $MN_FASTIO_ANA_INPUT_WEIGHT
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
2
Read access
FASTIO_ANA_NUM_INPUTS (N, M) MD 10300: $MN_FASTIO_ANA_NUM_IN‐

PUTS
MD 10300: $MN_FASTIO_ANA_NUM_INPUTS
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
FASTIO_ANA_NUM_OUTPUTS (N, M) MD 10310: $MN_FAS‐

TIO_ANA_NUM_OUTPUTS
MD 10310: $MN_FASTIO_ANA_NUM_OUTPUTS
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access

NC variables
FASTIO_ANA_OUTPUT_WEIGHT (N, M) MD 10330: $MN_FASTIO_ANA_OUT‐

PUT_WEIGHT
MD 10330: $MN_FASTIO_ANA_OUTPUT_WEIGHT
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
2
Read access
FASTIO_DIG_NUM_INPUTS (N, M) MD 10350: $MN_FASTIO_DIG_NUM_IN‐

PUTS
MD 10350: $MN_FASTIO_DIG_NUM_INPUTS
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
FASTIO_DIG_NUM_OUTPUTS (N, M) MD 10360: $MN_FAS‐

TIO_DIG_NUM_OUTPUTS
MD 10360: $MN_FASTIO_DIG_NUM_OUTPUTS
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
FASTIO_DIG_SHORT_CIRCUIT (N, M) MD 10361: $MN_FAS‐

TIO_DIG_SHORT_CIRCUIT
MD 10361: $MN_FASTIO_DIG_SHORT_CIRCUIT
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
2
Read access
FPU_CTRLWORD_INIT (N, M) MD 18910: $MN_FPU_CTRLWORD_INIT

MD 18910: $MN_FPU_CTRLWORD_INIT
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access

NC variables
FPU_ERROR_MODE (N, M) MD 18900: $MN_FPU_ERROR_MODE

MD 18900: $MN_FPU_ERROR_MODE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
FPU_EXEPTION_MASK (N, M) MD 18920: $MN_FPU_EXEPTION_MASK

MD 18920: $MN_FPU_EXEPTION_MASK
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
FRAME_ANGLE_INPUT_MODE (N, M) MD 10600: $MN_FRAME_ANGLE_IN‐

PUT_MODE
MD 10600: $MN_FRAME_ANGLE_INPUT_MODE
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
HANDWH_IMP_PER_LATCH (N, M) MD 11320:

$MN_HANDWH_IMP_PER_LATCH
MD 11320: $MN_HANDWH_IMP_PER_LATCH
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
HANDWH_REVERSE (N, M) MD 11310: $MN_HANDWH_REVERSE

MD 11310: $MN_HANDWH_REVERSE
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
HANDWH_TRUE_DISTANCE (N, M) MD 11346: $MN_HANDWH_TRUE_DIS‐

TANCE
MD 11346: $MN_HANDWH_TRUE_DISTANCE

NC variables
HANDWH_TRUE_DISTANCE (N, M) MD 11346: $MN_HANDWH_TRUE_DIS‐

TANCE
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
HW_ASSIGN_ANA_FASTIN (N, M) MD 10362: $MN_HW_AS‐

SIGN_ANA_FASTIN
MD 10362: $MN_HW_ASSIGN_ANA_FASTIN
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
2
Read access
HW_ASSIGN_ANA_FASTOUT (N, M) MD 10364: $MN_HW_AS‐

SIGN_ANA_FASTOUT
MD 10364: $MN_HW_ASSIGN_ANA_FASTOUT
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
2
Read access
HW_ASSIGN_DIG_FASTIN (N, M) MD 10366: $MN_HW_ASSIGN_DIG_FAS‐

TIN
MD 10366: $MN_HW_ASSIGN_DIG_FASTIN
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
2
Read access
HW_ASSIGN_DIG_FASTOUT (N, M) MD 10368: $MN_HW_AS‐

SIGN_DIG_FASTOUT
MD 10368: $MN_HW_ASSIGN_DIG_FASTOUT

NC variables
HW_ASSIGN_DIG_FASTOUT (N, M) MD 10368: $MN_HW_AS‐

SIGN_DIG_FASTOUT
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
2
Read access
HW_CLOCKED_MODULE_MASK (N, M) MD 10384: $MN_HW_CLOCKED_MOD‐

ULE_MASK
MD 10384: $MN_HW_CLOCKED_MODULE_MASK
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access
HW_LEAD_TIME_FASTIO (N, M) MD 10382: $MN_HW_LEAD_TIME_FAS‐

TIO
MD 10382: $MN_HW_LEAD_TIME_FASTIO
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
2
Read access
HW_UPDATE_RATE_FASTIO (N, M) MD 10380: $MN_HW_UP‐

DATE_RATE_FASTIO
MD 10380: $MN_HW_UPDATE_RATE_FASTIO
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access
IGNORE_SINGLEBLOCK_MASK (N, M) MD 10702: $MN_IGNORE_SINGLE‐

BLOCK_MASK
MD 10702: $MN_IGNORE_SINGLEBLOCK_MASK

NC variables
IGNORE_SINGLEBLOCK_MASK (N, M) MD 10702: $MN_IGNORE_SINGLE‐

BLOCK_MASK
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_1 (N, M) MD 10900: $MN_IN‐

DEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_1
MD 10900: $MN_INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_1
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_2 (N, M) MD 10920: $MN_IN‐

DEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_2
MD 10920: $MN_INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_2
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
INDEX_AX_POS_TAB_1 (N, M) MD 10910: $MN_INDEX_AX_POS_TAB_1

MD 10910: $MN_INDEX_AX_POS_TAB_1
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
INDEX_AX_POS_TAB_2 (N, M) MD 10930: $MN_INDEX_AX_POS_TAB_2

MD 10930: $MN_INDEX_AX_POS_TAB_2
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access

NC variables
INFO_CROSSCHECK_CYCLE_TIME (N, M) MD 10092: $MN_INFO_CROSS‐

CHECK_CYCLE_TIME
MD 10092: $MN_INFO_CROSSCHECK_CYCLE_TIME
Read access
INFO_FREE_MEM_DPR (N, M) MD 18070: $MN_INFO_FREE_MEM_DPR

MD 18070: $MN_INFO_FREE_MEM_DPR
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
INFO_FREE_MEM_DYNAMIC (N, M) MD 18050: $MN_INFO_FREE_MEM_DY‐

NAMIC
MD 18050: $MN_INFO_FREE_MEM_DYNAMIC
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
INFO_FREE_MEM_STATIC (N, M) MD 18060: $MN_IN‐

FO_FREE_MEM_STATIC
MD 18060: $MN_INFO_FREE_MEM_STATIC
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
INFO_SAFETY_CYCLE_TIME (N, M) MD 10091: $MN_INFO_SAFETY_CY‐

CLE_TIME
MD 10091: $MN_INFO_SAFETY_CYCLE_TIME
Read access
INIT_MD (N, M) MD 11200: $MN_INIT_MD

MD 11200: $MN_INIT_MD

NC variables
INIT_MD (N, M) MD 11200: $MN_INIT_MD

- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
INI_FILE_MODE (N, M) MD 11220: $MN_INI_FILE_MODE

MD 11220: $MN_INI_FILE_MODE
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
INTCY_DELAY_TIME (N, M) MD 14020: $MN_INTCY_DELAY_TIME

MD 14020: $MN_INTCY_DELAY_TIME
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
INTERMEDIATE_POINT_NAME_TAB (N, M) MD 10660: $MN_INTERMEDI‐

ATE_POINT_NAME_TAB
MD 10660: $MN_INTERMEDIATE_POINT_NAME_TAB
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
2
Read access
IPO_PARAM_NAME_TAB (N, M) MD 10650: $MN_IPO_PAR‐

AM_NAME_TAB
MD 10650: $MN_IPO_PARAM_NAME_TAB
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
2
Read access
IPO_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO (N, M) MD 10070: $MN_IPO_SYS‐

CLOCK_TIME_RATIO
MD 10070: $MN_IPO_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO

NC variables
IPO_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO (N, M) MD 10070: $MN_IPO_SYS‐

CLOCK_TIME_RATIO
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
IPUCR_DELAY_TIME (N, M) MD 14010: $MN_IPUCR_DELAY_TIME

MD 14010: $MN_IPUCR_DELAY_TIME
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
JOG_INCR_SIZE_TAB (N, M) MD 11330: $MN_JOG_INCR_SIZE_TAB

MD 11330: $MN_JOG_INCR_SIZE_TAB
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
JOG_INC_MODE_LEVELTRIGGRD (N, M) MD 11300: $MN_JOG_INC_MODE_LEV‐

ELTRIGGRD
MD 11300: $MN_JOG_INC_MODE_LEVELTRIGGRD
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
JOG_MODE_KEYS_EDGETRIGGRD (N, M) MD 10731:

$MN_JOG_MODE_KEYS_EDGE‐
TRIGGRD
MD 10731: $MN_JOG_MODE_KEYS_EDGETRIGGRD
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
JOG_MODE_KEYS_LEVELTRIGGRD (N, M) MD 10730:

$MN_JOG_MODE_KEYS_LEVEL‐
TRIGGRD
MD 10730: $MN_JOG_MODE_KEYS_LEVELTRIGGRD

NC variables
JOG_MODE_KEYS_LEVELTRIGGRD (N, M) MD 10730:

$MN_JOG_MODE_KEYS_LEVEL‐
TRIGGRD
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
LEN_PROTOCOL_FILE (N, M) MD 11420: $MN_LEN_PROTOCOL_FILE

MD 11420: $MN_LEN_PROTOCOL_FILE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MAXNUM_USER_DATA_FLOAT (N, M) MD 14508: $MN_MAXNUM_USER_DA‐

TA_FLOAT
MD 14508: $MN_MAXNUM_USER_DATA_FLOAT
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MAXNUM_USER_DATA_HEX (N, M) MD 14506: $MN_MAXNUM_USER_DA‐

TA_HEX
MD 14506: $MN_MAXNUM_USER_DATA_HEX
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MAXNUM_USER_DATA_INT (N, M) MD 14504: $MN_MAXNUM_USER_DA‐

TA_INT
MD 14504: $MN_MAXNUM_USER_DATA_INT
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MDCA_DRIVE_LOGIC_NR (N, M) MD 13010: DRIVE_LOGIC_NR[x] x =

PlugplaceNo
Alternative name: DRIVE_LOGIC_NR
Logical drive number
- TYPE_CHAR 0 30

NC variables
MDCA_DRIVE_LOGIC_NR (N, M) MD 13010: DRIVE_LOGIC_NR[x] x =

PlugplaceNo
Addressing
14
MDCA_DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE (N, M) MD 13030: DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE[x] x

= PlugplaceNo
Alternative name: DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE
Module identifier
Module identifier of relevant drive bus slot
Return value 1 = single-axis module
2 = two-axis module
9 = terminal block for dig. I/Os
10 = bit bus interface
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
14
MDCA_DRIVE_TYPE (N, M) MD 13040: DRIVE_TYPE[x] x = Plugpla‐

ceNo
Alternative name: DRIVE_TYPE
Drive type
Drive type identifier for each drive bus slot
Return value 1 = FDD
2 = MSD
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
14
MDD_INT_INCR_PER_DEG (N, M) MD 10210: INT_INCR_PER_DEG

Alternative name: INT_INCR_PER_DEG
Calculation resolution for angular position
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0,000001 1000

NC variables
MDD_INT_INCR_PER_DEG (N, M) MD 10210: INT_INCR_PER_DEG

Addressing
1
MDD_INT_INCR_PER_MM (N, M) MD 10200: INT_INCR_PER_MM

Alternative name: INT_INCR_PER_MM
Calculation resolution for linear positions
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0,000001 1000
Addressing
1
MDD_SYSCLOCK_CYCLE_TIME (N, M) MD 10050: SYSCLOCK_CYCLE_TIME

Alternative name: SYSCLOCK_CYCLE_TIME
Basic system clock cycle
Basic system clock cycle. For possible assignment of values, see description of machine data SYSCLOCK_CYCLE_TIME.
s TYPE_DOUBLE 0,000125 s 0,032 s
Addressing
1
MDLA_DRIVE_INVERTER_CODE (N, M) MD 13020: DRIVE_INVER‐

TER_CODE[x] x = PlugplaceNo
Alternative name: DRIVE_INVERTER_CODE
Power section code of drive module
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
14

NC variables
MDL_POSCTRL_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO (N, MD 10060: POSCTRL_SYS‐

M) CLOCK_TIME_RATIO
Alternative name: POSCTRL_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO
Position control cycle factor
- TYPE_DWORD 1 100
Addressing
1
MDSA_AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB (N, M) MD 10000: AXCONF_MA‐

CHAX_NAME_TAB[x] x = Axis
Alternative name: AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB
Machine axis name
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
7
MD_FILE_STYLE (N, M) MD 11230: $MN_MD_FILE_STYLE

MD 11230: $MN_MD_FILE_STYLE
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
MEAS_PROBE_LOW_ACTIVE (N, M) MD 13200:

$MN_MEAS_PROBE_LOW_ACTIVE
MD 13200: $MN_MEAS_PROBE_LOW_ACTIVE
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Addressing
2
Read access
MIRROR_REF_AX (N, M) MD 10610: $MN_MIRROR_REF_AX

MD 10610: $MN_MIRROR_REF_AX

NC variables
MIRROR_REF_AX (N, M) MD 10610: $MN_MIRROR_REF_AX

- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
MMC_CMD_TIMEOUT (N, M) MD 10132: $MN_MMC_CMD_TIMEOUT

MD 10132: $MN_MMC_CMD_TIMEOUT
Read access
MM_CEC_MAX_POINTS (N, M) MD 18342: $MN_MM_CEC_MAX_POINTS

MD 18342: $MN_MM_CEC_MAX_POINTS
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
2
Read access
MM_CHAN_HASH_TABLE_SIZE (N, M) MD 18250: $MN_MM_CHAN_HASH_TA‐

BLE_SIZE
MD 18250: $MN_MM_CHAN_HASH_TABLE_SIZE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_CHAR_LENGTH_OF_BLOCK (N, M) MD 18330:

$MN_MM_CHAR_LENGTH_OF_BLOCK
MD 18330: $MN_MM_CHAR_LENGTH_OF_BLOCK
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_COM_TASK_STACK_SIZE (N, M) MD 18502:

$MN_MM_COM_TASK_STACK_SIZE
MD 18502: $MN_MM_COM_TASK_STACK_SIZE

NC variables
MM_COM_TASK_STACK_SIZE (N, M) MD 18502:

$MN_MM_COM_TASK_STACK_SIZE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_DIR_HASH_TABLE_SIZE (N, M) MD 18300: $MN_MM_DIR_HASH_TA‐

BLE_SIZE
MD 18300: $MN_MM_DIR_HASH_TABLE_SIZE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_DRIVE_TASK_STACK_SIZE (N, M) MD 18520:

$MN_MM_DRIVE_TASK_STACK_SIZE
MD 18520: $MN_MM_DRIVE_TASK_STACK_SIZE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_EXTCOM_TASK_STACK_SIZE (N, M) MD 18500: $MN_MM_EX‐

TCOM_TASK_STACK_SIZE
MD 18500: $MN_MM_EXTCOM_TASK_STACK_SIZE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_EXT_PROG_BUFFER_SIZE (N, M) MD 18360: $MN_MM_EXT_PROG_BUF‐

FER_SIZE
MD 18360: $MN_MM_EXT_PROG_BUFFER_SIZE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_EXT_PROG_NUM (N, M) MD 18362: $MN_MM_EXT_PROG_NUM

MD 18362: $MN_MM_EXT_PROG_NUM
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access

NC variables
MM_FILE_HASH_TABLE_SIZE (N, M) MD 18290: $MN_MM_FILE_HASH_TA‐

BLE_SIZE
MD 18290: $MN_MM_FILE_HASH_TABLE_SIZE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_FRAME_FINE_TRANS (N, M) MD 18600:

$MN_MM_FRAME_FINE_TRANS
MD 18600: $MN_MM_FRAME_FINE_TRANS
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM (N, M) MD 18150: $MN_MM_GUD_VAL‐

UES_MEM
MD 18150: $MN_MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_LUD_HASH_TABLE_SIZE (N, M) MD 18240: $MN_MM_LUD_HASH_TA‐

BLE_SIZE
MD 18240: $MN_MM_LUD_HASH_TABLE_SIZE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_MAX_SIZE_OF_LUD_VALUE (N, M) MD 18242:

$MN_MM_MAX_SIZE_OF_LUD_VALUE
MD 18242: $MN_MM_MAX_SIZE_OF_LUD_VALUE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NCK_HASH_TABLE_SIZE (N, M) MD 18260: $MN_MM_NCK_HASH_TA‐

BLE_SIZE
MD 18260: $MN_MM_NCK_HASH_TABLE_SIZE

NC variables
MM_NCK_HASH_TABLE_SIZE (N, M) MD 18260: $MN_MM_NCK_HASH_TA‐

BLE_SIZE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM (N, M) MD 18090: $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGA‐

ZINE_PARAM
MD 18090: $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM (N, M) MD 18092: $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MA‐

GLOC_PARAM
MD 18092: $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM (N, M) MD 18098:

$MN_MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM
MD 18098: $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_CC_TDA_PARAM (N, M) MD 18094:

$MN_MM_NUM_CC_TDA_PARAM
MD 18094: $MN_MM_NUM_CC_TDA_PARAM
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_CC_TOA_PARAM (N, M) MD 18096:

$MN_MM_NUM_CC_TOA_PARAM
MD 18096: $MN_MM_NUM_CC_TOA_PARAM
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access

NC variables
MM_NUM_CURVE_POLYNOMS (N, M) MD 18404:

$MN_MM_NUM_CURVE_POLYNOMS
MD 18404: $MN_MM_NUM_CURVE_POLYNOMS
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_CURVE_SEGMENTS (N, M) MD 18402:

$MN_MM_NUM_CURVE_SEGMENTS
MD 18402: $MN_MM_NUM_CURVE_SEGMENTS
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_CURVE_TABS (N, M) MD 18400:

$MN_MM_NUM_CURVE_TABS
MD 18400: $MN_MM_NUM_CURVE_TABS
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA (N, M) MD 18100: $MN_MM_NUM_CUT‐

TING_EDGES_IN_TOA
MD 18100: $MN_MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_DIR_IN_FILESYSTEM (N, M) MD 18310: $MN_MM_NUM_DIR_IN_FILE‐

SYSTEM
MD 18310: $MN_MM_NUM_DIR_IN_FILESYSTEM
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_FILES_IN_FILESYSTEM (N, M) MD 18320:

$MN_MM_NUM_FILES_IN_FILESYSTEM
MD 18320: $MN_MM_NUM_FILES_IN_FILESYSTEM

NC variables
MM_NUM_FILES_IN_FILESYSTEM (N, M) MD 18320:

$MN_MM_NUM_FILES_IN_FILESYSTEM
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_FILES_PER_DIR (N, M) MD 18280:

$MN_MM_NUM_FILES_PER_DIR
MD 18280: $MN_MM_NUM_FILES_PER_DIR
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_GUD_MODULES (N, M) MD 18118: $MN_MM_NUM_GUD_MOD‐

ULES
MD 18118: $MN_MM_NUM_GUD_MODULES
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_AXIS (N, M) MD 18140:

$MN_MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_AXIS
MD 18140: $MN_MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_AXIS
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_CHAN (N, M) MD 18130:

$MN_MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_CHAN
MD 18130: $MN_MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_CHAN
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_NCK (N, M) MD 18120:

$MN_MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_NCK
MD 18120: $MN_MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_NCK
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access

NC variables
MM_NUM_MAGAZINE (N, M) MD 18084: $MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE

MD 18084: $MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION (N, M) MD 18086: $MN_MM_NUM_MAGA‐

ZINE_LOCATION
MD 18086: $MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_MAX_FUNC_NAMES (N, M) MD 18170:

$MN_MM_NUM_MAX_FUNC_NAMES
MD 18170: $MN_MM_NUM_MAX_FUNC_NAMES
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_MAX_FUNC_PARAM (N, M) MD 18180:

$MN_MM_NUM_MAX_FUNC_PARAM
MD 18180: $MN_MM_NUM_MAX_FUNC_PARAM
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_MMC_UNITS (N, M) MD 10134: $MN_MM_NUM_MMC_UNITS

MD 10134: $MN_MM_NUM_MMC_UNITS
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_NCK (N, M) MD 18190: $MN_MM_NUM_PRO‐

TECT_AREA_NCK
MD 18190: $MN_MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_NCK

NC variables
MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_NCK (N, M) MD 18190: $MN_MM_NUM_PRO‐

TECT_AREA_NCK
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_SUBDIR_PER_DIR (N, M) MD 18270: $MN_MM_NUM_SUB‐

DIR_PER_DIR
MD 18270: $MN_MM_NUM_SUBDIR_PER_DIR
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_TOOL (N, M) MD 18082: $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL

MD 18082: $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER (N, M) MD 18088: $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CAR‐

RIER
MD 18088: $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_NUM_USER_MACROS (N, M) MD 18160: $MN_MM_NUM_USER_MAC‐

ROS
MD 18160: $MN_MM_NUM_USER_MACROS
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_SERVO_TASK_STACK_SIZE (N, M) MD 18510: $MN_MM_SER‐

VO_TASK_STACK_SIZE
MD 18510: $MN_MM_SERVO_TASK_STACK_SIZE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access

NC variables
MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK (N, M) MD 18080: $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGE‐

MENT_MASK
MD 18080: $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_TYPE_OF_CUTTING_EDGE (N, M) MD 18102: $MN_MM_TYPE_OF_CUT‐

TING_EDGE
MD 18102: $MN_MM_TYPE_OF_CUTTING_EDGE
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_USER_FILE_MEM_MINIMUM (N, M) MD 18350:

$MN_MM_USER_FILE_MEM_MINIMUM
MD 18350: $MN_MM_USER_FILE_MEM_MINIMUM
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_USER_MEM_BUFFERED (N, M) MD 18230: $MN_MM_USER_MEM_BUF‐

FERED
MD 18230: $MN_MM_USER_MEM_BUFFERED
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_USER_MEM_DPR (N, M) MD 18220: $MN_MM_USER_MEM_DPR

MD 18220: $MN_MM_USER_MEM_DPR
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MM_USER_MEM_DYNAMIC (N, M) MD 18210: $MN_MM_USER_MEM_DY‐

NAMIC
MD 18210: $MN_MM_USER_MEM_DYNAMIC

NC variables
MM_USER_MEM_DYNAMIC (N, M) MD 18210: $MN_MM_USER_MEM_DY‐

NAMIC
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MONITOR_ADDRESS (N, M) MD 11380: $MN_MONITOR_ADDRESS

MD 11380: $MN_MONITOR_ADDRESS
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MONITOR_DISPLAY_INT (N, M) MD 11382: $MN_MONITOR_DIS‐

PLAY_INT
MD 11382: $MN_MONITOR_DISPLAY_INT
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MONITOR_DISPLAY_REAL (N, M) MD 11384: $MN_MONITOR_DIS‐

PLAY_REAL
MD 11384: $MN_MONITOR_DISPLAY_REAL
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
MONITOR_INPUT_INT (N, M) MD 11386: $MN_MONITOR_INPUT_INT

MD 11386: $MN_MONITOR_INPUT_INT
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
MONITOR_INPUT_REAL (N, M) MD 11388: $MN_MONITOR_INPUT_RE‐

AL
MD 11388: $MN_MONITOR_INPUT_REAL
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access

NC variables
MONITOR_INPUT_STROBE (N, M) MD 11390: $MN_MONITOR_IN‐

PUT_STROBE
MD 11390: $MN_MONITOR_INPUT_STROBE
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
NC_USER_CODE_CONF_NAME_TAB (N, M) MD 10712:

$MN_NC_USER_CODE_CONF_NAME_T
AB
MD 10712: $MN_NC_USER_CODE_CONF_NAME_TAB
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
2
Read access
NORMAL_VECTOR_NAME_TAB (N, M) MD 10630: $MN_NORMAL_VEC‐

TOR_NAME_TAB
MD 10630: $MN_NORMAL_VECTOR_NAME_TAB
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
2
Read access
OPERATING_MODE_DEFAULT (N, M) MD 10720: $MN_OPERAT‐

ING_MODE_DEFAULT
MD 10720: $MN_OPERATING_MODE_DEFAULT
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
OSCILL_MODE_MASK (N, M) MD 11460: $MN_OSCILL_MODE_MASK

MD 11460: $MN_OSCILL_MODE_MASK

NC variables
OSCILL_MODE_MASK (N, M) MD 11460: $MN_OSCILL_MODE_MASK

- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
OVR_AX_IS_GRAY_CODE (N, M) MD 12000:

$MN_OVR_AX_IS_GRAY_CODE
MD 12000: $MN_OVR_AX_IS_GRAY_CODE
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
OVR_FACTOR_AX_SPEED (N, M) MD 12010: $MN_OVR_FAC‐

TOR_AX_SPEED
MD 12010: $MN_OVR_FACTOR_AX_SPEED
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
OVR_FACTOR_FEEDRATE (N, M) MD 12030: $MN_OVR_FACTOR_FEE‐

DRATE
MD 12030: $MN_OVR_FACTOR_FEEDRATE
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
OVR_FACTOR_LIMIT_BIN (N, M) MD 12100: $MN_OVR_FACTOR_LIM‐

IT_BIN
MD 12100: $MN_OVR_FACTOR_LIMIT_BIN
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
OVR_FACTOR_RAPID_TRA (N, M) MD 12050: $MN_OVR_FACTOR_RAP‐

ID_TRA
MD 12050: $MN_OVR_FACTOR_RAPID_TRA

NC variables
OVR_FACTOR_RAPID_TRA (N, M) MD 12050: $MN_OVR_FACTOR_RAP‐

ID_TRA
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
OVR_FACTOR_SPIND_SPEED (N, M) MD 12070: $MN_OVR_FAC‐

TOR_SPIND_SPEED
MD 12070: $MN_OVR_FACTOR_SPIND_SPEED
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
OVR_FEED_IS_GRAY_CODE (N, M) MD 12020:

$MN_OVR_FEED_IS_GRAY_CODE
MD 12020: $MN_OVR_FEED_IS_GRAY_CODE
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
OVR_RAPID_IS_GRAY_CODE (N, M) MD 12040: $MN_OVR_RAP‐

ID_IS_GRAY_CODE
MD 12040: $MN_OVR_RAPID_IS_GRAY_CODE
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
OVR_REFERENCE_IS_MIN_FEED (N, M) MD 12082: $MN_OVR_REFER‐

ENCE_IS_MIN_FEED
MD 12082: $MN_OVR_REFERENCE_IS_MIN_FEED
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access

NC variables
OVR_REFERENCE_IS_PROG_FEED (N, M) MD 12080: $MN_OVR_REFER‐

ENCE_IS_PROG_FEED
MD 12080: $MN_OVR_REFERENCE_IS_PROG_FEED
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
OVR_SPIND_IS_GRAY_CODE (N, M) MD 12060:

$MN_OVR_SPIND_IS_GRAY_CODE
MD 12060: $MN_OVR_SPIND_IS_GRAY_CODE
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
PERMANENT_FEED (N, M) MD 12202: $MN_PERMANENT_FEED

MD 12202: $MN_PERMANENT_FEED
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
PERMANENT_ROT_AX_FEED (N, M) MD 12204: $MN_PERMA‐

NENT_ROT_AX_FEED
MD 12204: $MN_PERMANENT_ROT_AX_FEED
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
PLC_CYCLE_TIME_AVERAGE (N, M) MD 10110: $MN_PLC_CY‐

CLE_TIME_AVERAGE
MD 10110: $MN_PLC_CYCLE_TIME_AVERAGE
Read access

NC variables
PLC_CYCLIC_TIMEOUT (N, M) MD 10100: $MN_PLC_CYCLIC_TIMEOUT

MD 10100: $MN_PLC_CYCLIC_TIMEOUT
Read access
PLC_RUNNINGUP_TIMEOUT (N, M) MD 10120: $MN_PLC_RUNNI‐

NGUP_TIMEOUT
MD 10120: $MN_PLC_RUNNINGUP_TIMEOUT
Read access
PREPROCESSING_LEVEL (N, M) MD 10700: $MN_PREPROCESS‐

ING_LEVEL
MD 10700: $MN_PREPROCESSING_LEVEL
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
PREP_COM_TASK_CYCLE_RATIO (N, M) MD 10160: $MN_PREP_COM_TASK_CY‐

CLE_RATIO
MD 10160: $MN_PREP_COM_TASK_CYCLE_RATIO
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
PREP_DRIVE_TASK_CYCLE_RATIO (N, M) MD 10150:

$MN_PREP_DRIVE_TASK_CYCLE_RA‐
TIO
MD 10150: $MN_PREP_DRIVE_TASK_CYCLE_RATIO
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
PREVENT_SYNACT_LOCK (N, M) MD 11500: $MN_PREVENT_SYN‐

ACT_LOCK
MD 11500: $MN_PREVENT_SYNACT_LOCK

NC variables
PREVENT_SYNACT_LOCK (N, M) MD 11500: $MN_PREVENT_SYN‐

ACT_LOCK
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
2
Read access
PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB (N, M) MD 10710: $MN_PROG_SD_RE‐

SET_SAVE_TAB
MD 10710: $MN_PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
2
Read access
RUN_OVERRIDE_0 (N, M) MD 12200: $MN_RUN_OVERRIDE_0

MD 12200: $MN_RUN_OVERRIDE_0
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
SAFETY_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO (N, M) MD 10090: $MN_SAFETY_SYS‐

CLOCK_TIME_RATIO
MD 10090: $MN_SAFETY_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
SCALING_FACTORS_USER_DEF (N, M) MD 10230: $MN_SCALING_FAC‐

TORS_USER_DEF
MD 10230: $MN_SCALING_FACTORS_USER_DEF
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access

NC variables
SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC (N, M) MD 10240: $MN_SCALING_SYS‐

TEM_IS_METRIC
MD 10240: $MN_SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
SCALING_USER_DEF_MASK (N, M) MD 10220: $MN_SCAL‐

ING_USER_DEF_MASK
MD 10220: $MN_SCALING_USER_DEF_MASK
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
SCALING_VALUE_INCH (N, M) MD 10250: $MN_SCALING_VALUE_INCH

MD 10250: $MN_SCALING_VALUE_INCH
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
SEARCH_RUN_MODE (N, M) MD 11450: $MN_SEARCH_RUN_MODE

MD 11450: $MN_SEARCH_RUN_MODE
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK (N, M) MD 11410: $MN_SUP‐

PRESS_ALARM_MASK
MD 11410: $MN_SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
SW_CAM_ASSIGN_FASTOUT_1 (N, M) MD 10470: $MN_SW_CAM_AS‐

SIGN_FASTOUT_1
MD 10470: $MN_SW_CAM_ASSIGN_FASTOUT_1

NC variables

SIGN_FASTOUT_1
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access

SIGN_FASTOUT_2
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access

SIGN_FASTOUT_3
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access

SIGN_FASTOUT_4
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
SW_CAM_ASSIGN_TAB (N, M) MD 10450: $MN_SW_CAM_ASSIGN_TAB

MD 10450: $MN_SW_CAM_ASSIGN_TAB
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access
SW_CAM_MINUS_LEAD_TIME (N, M) MD 10460: $MN_SW_CAM_MI‐

NUS_LEAD_TIME
MD 10460: $MN_SW_CAM_MINUS_LEAD_TIME

NC variables
SW_CAM_MINUS_LEAD_TIME (N, M) MD 10460: $MN_SW_CAM_MI‐

NUS_LEAD_TIME
Addressing
2
Read access
SW_CAM_PLUS_LEAD_TIME (N, M) MD 10461:

$MN_SW_CAM_PLUS_LEAD_TIME
MD 10461: $MN_SW_CAM_PLUS_LEAD_TIME
Addressing
2
Read access
SW_CAM_TIMER_FASTOUT_MASK (N, M) MD 10480: $MN_SW_CAM_TIM‐

ER_FASTOUT_MASK
MD 10480: $MN_SW_CAM_TIMER_FASTOUT_MASK
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
SYSCLOCK_SAMPL_TIME_RATIO (N, M) MD 10080: $MN_SYS‐

CLOCK_SAMPL_TIME_RATIO
MD 10080: $MN_SYSCLOCK_SAMPL_TIME_RATIO
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
TIME_LIMIT_NETTO_COM_TASK (N, M) MD 10130: $MN_TIME_LIMIT_NET‐

TO_COM_TASK
MD 10130: $MN_TIME_LIMIT_NETTO_COM_TASK
Read access
TIME_LIMIT_NETTO_DRIVE_TASK (N, M) MD 10140: $MN_TIME_LIMIT_NET‐

TO_DRIVE_TASK
MD 10140: $MN_TIME_LIMIT_NETTO_DRIVE_TASK

NC variables
TIME_LIMIT_NETTO_DRIVE_TASK (N, M) MD 10140: $MN_TIME_LIMIT_NET‐

TO_DRIVE_TASK
Read access
TOOL_CHANGE_TIME (N, M) MD 10190: $MN_TOOL_CHANGE_TIME

MD 10190: $MN_TOOL_CHANGE_TIME
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
TRACE_SELECT (N, M) MD 11400: $MN_TRACE_SELECT

MD 11400: $MN_TRACE_SELECT
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
UPLOAD_MD_CHANGES_ONLY (N, M) MD 11210: $MN_UP‐

LOAD_MD_CHANGES_ONLY
MD 11210: $MN_UPLOAD_MD_CHANGES_ONLY
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
USER_DATA_FLOAT (N, M) MD 14514: $MN_USER_DATA_FLOAT

MD 14514: $MN_USER_DATA_FLOAT
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
USER_DATA_HEX (N, M) MD 14512: $MN_USER_DATA_HEX

MD 14512: $MN_USER_DATA_HEX
- TYPE_DWORD

NC variables
USER_DATA_HEX (N, M) MD 14512: $MN_USER_DATA_HEX

Addressing
2
Read access
USER_DATA_INT (N, M) MD 14510: $MN_USER_DATA_INT

MD 14510: $MN_USER_DATA_INT
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
2
Read access
USER_DATA_PLC_ALARM (N, M) MD 14516: $MN_USER_DA‐

TA_PLC_ALARM
MD 14516: $MN_USER_DATA_PLC_ALARM
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
2
Read access
VDI_UPDATE_IN_ONE_IPO_CYCLE (N, M) MD 18000: $MN_VDI_UP‐

DATE_IN_ONE_IPO_CYCLE
MD 18000: $MN_VDI_UPDATE_IN_ONE_IPO_CYCLE
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
VERSION_INFO (N, M) MD 18040: $MN_VERSION_INFO

MD 18040: $MN_VERSION_INFO
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
2
Read access

NC variables
DRIVE_LOGIC_ADDRESS (N, M) MD 13050: $MN_DRIVE_LOGIC_AD‐

DRESS
MD 13050: $MN_DRIVE_LOGIC_ADDRESS
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
PROFIBUS_ALARM_ACCESS (N, M) MD 13140: $MN_PROFI‐

BUS_ALARM_ACCESS
MD 13140: $MN_PROFIBUS_ALARM_ACCESS
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
CONVERT_SCALING_SYSTEM (N, M) MD 10260: $MN_CONVERT_SCAL‐

ING_SYSTEM
MD 10260: $MN_CONVERT_SCALING_SYSTEM
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Addressing
1
Read access
GMMC_INFO_NO_UNIT (N, M) MD 17200: $MN_GMMC_INFO_NO_UNIT

MD 17200: $MN_GMMC_INFO_NO_UNIT
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
STAT_NAME (N, M) MD 10670: $MN_STAT_NAME

MD 10670: $MN_STAT_NAME
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
1
Read access
TU_NAME (N, M) MD 10672: $MN_TU_NAME

MD 10672: $MN_TU_NAME
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
1
Read access
3.2.6.10 O: Internal
N-O
ASUP_MASK (N, O) MD 19500: $ON_ASUP_MASK

MD 19500: $ON_ASUP_MASK
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
AXIS_FUNCTION_MASK (N, O) MD 19310: $ON_AXIS_FUNCTION_MASK

MD 19310: $ON_AXIS_FUNCTION_MASK
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
CC_EVENT_MASK (N, O) MD 19600: $ON_CC_EVENT_MASK

MD 19600: $ON_CC_EVENT_MASK

NC variables
CC_EVENT_MASK (N, O) MD 19600: $ON_CC_EVENT_MASK

- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
2
Read access
COMP_MASK (N, O) MD 19300: $ON_COMP_MASK

MD 19300: $ON_COMP_MASK
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
FFW_MODE_MASK (N, O) MD 19400: $ON_FFW_MODE_MASK

MD 19400: $ON_FFW_MODE_MASK
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
IPO_FUNCTION_MASK (N, O) MD 19330: $ON_IPO_FUNCTION_MASK

MD 19330: $ON_IPO_FUNCTION_MASK
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
NUM_ABS_INC_REFP_AXES (N, O) MD 19130:

$ON_NUM_ABS_INC_REFP_AXES
MD 19130: $ON_NUM_ABS_INC_REFP_AXES
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
NUM_AXES_IN_SYSTEM (N, O) MD 19100: $ON_NUM_AXES_IN_SYS‐

TEM
MD 19100: $ON_NUM_AXES_IN_SYSTEM
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access

NC variables
NUM_CHANNELS (N, O) MD 19200: $ON_NUM_CHANNELS

MD 19200: $ON_NUM_CHANNELS
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
NUM_IPO_AXES (N, O) MD 19110: $ON_NUM_IPO_AXES

MD 19110: $ON_NUM_IPO_AXES
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
NUM_MODE_GROUPS (N, O) MD 19220: $ON_NUM_MODE_GROUPS

MD 19220: $ON_NUM_MODE_GROUPS
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
NUM_SAFE_AXES (N, O) MD 19120: $ON_NUM_SAFE_AXES

MD 19120: $ON_NUM_SAFE_AXES
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
PLC_C_USER_MEM_SIZE (N, O) MD 19280:

$ON_PLC_C_USER_MEM_SIZE
MD 19280: $ON_PLC_C_USER_MEM_SIZE
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
PLC_USER_MEM_SIZE (N, O) MD 19270: $ON_PLC_USER_MEM_SIZE

MD 19270: $ON_PLC_USER_MEM_SIZE
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access

NC variables
PROFIBUS (N, O) MD 19290: $ON_PROFIBUS

MD 19290: $ON_PROFIBUS
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Read access
PROG_MASK (N, O) MD 19340: $ON_PROG_MASK

MD 19340: $ON_PROG_MASK
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
TECHNO_FUNCTION_MASK (N, O) MD 19320: $ON_TECHNO_FUNC‐

TION_MASK
MD 19320: $ON_TECHNO_FUNCTION_MASK
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
TRAFO_TYPE_MASK (N, O) MD 19410: $ON_TRAFO_TYPE_MASK

MD 19410: $ON_TRAFO_TYPE_MASK
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access
USER_MEM_BUFFERED (N, O) MD 19250: $ON_USER_MEM_BUF‐

FERED
MD 19250: $ON_USER_MEM_BUFFERED
- TYPE_CHAR
Read access

NC variables
3.2.6.11 PA: Protection zones
Up to 10 protection zones can be defined. Each protection zone is described by a polygon function consisting
of up to 10 elements. The module PA contains the individual coordinates of the polygon elements. The protec‐
tion zones are addressed via the variable indices. The physical unit of the parameters can be read from the
variable "$$basicLengthUnit" in the module Y in area N.
The classification as NCK or channel-specific protection zones does not affect the protection zone monitoring
function, but indicates the area in which the protection zone is registered.
MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_0 (N, PA) $SN_PA_CENT_ABS[x,0] x = Number A3

protection zone
Abscissa arc centre of 1st contour element
Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 1st contour element
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Abscissa arc centre of 2nd contour element
Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 2nd contour element
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Abscissa arc centre of 3rd contour element
Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 3rd contour element
Addressing
$$numProtArea

NC variables

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone

NC variables

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

NC variables
MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_0 (N, PA) $SN_PA_CENT_ORD[x,0] x = Number A3

protection zone
Ordinate arc centre of 1st contour element
Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 1st contour element
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Ordinate arc centre of 2nd contour element
Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 2nd contour element
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Odinate arc centre of 3rd contour element
Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 3rd contour element
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone

NC variables

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

NC variables

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea
MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_0 (N, PA) $SN_PA_CONT_ABS[x,0] x = Number A3

protection zone
Abscissa end point of 1st contour element
Absolute abscissa value of end point of 1st contour element

NC variables

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Abscissa end point of 2nd contour element
Absolute abscissa value of end point of 2nd contour element
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Abscissa end point of 3rd contour element
Absolute abscissa value of end point of 3rd contour element
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

NC variables

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone

NC variables

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea
MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_0 (N, PA) $SN_PA_CONT_ORD[x,0] x = Number A3

protection zone
Ordinate end point of 1st contour element
Absolute ordinate value of end point of 1st contour element
Addressing
$$numProtArea

NC variables

protection zone
Ordinate end point of 2nd contour element
Absolute ordinate value of end point of 2nd contour element
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Odinate end point of 3rd contour element
Absolute ordinate value of end point of 3rd contour element
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone

NC variables

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

NC variables

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea
MDD_PA_MINUS_LIM (N, PA) $SN_PA_MINUS_LIM[x] x = Number pro‐ A3

tection zone
Lower limit of protection zone, applicate
Limitation in the minus direction of the protection zone in the axis that is perpendicular to the polygon definition (applicate)
Addressing
$$numProtArea
MDD_PA_PLUS_LIM (N, PA) $SN_PA_PLUS_LIM[x] x = Number pro‐ A3

tection zone
Upper boundary of protection zone, applicate
Limitation in the plus direction of the protection zone in the axis that is perpendicular to the polygon definition (applicate)

NC variables
MDD_PA_PLUS_LIM (N, PA) $SN_PA_PLUS_LIM[x] x = Number pro‐ A3

tection zone
Addressing
$$numProtArea
MDU_PA_ACTIV_IMMED (N, PA) $SN_PA_ACTIV_IMMED[x] x = Number A3

protection zone
Active immediately after referencing
Code for "active immediately after referencing", i.e. the protection zone is active as soon as the control has been started
up and the axes have been referenced
Return value 0 = protection zone is not active immediately
1 = protection zone is active immediately
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numProtArea
MDU_PA_CONT_NUM (N, PA) $SN_PA_CONT_NUM[x] x = Number pro‐ A3

tection zone
Number of valid contour elements
- TYPE_UWORD 0 $$numContourInProtAr‐
ea
Addressing
$$numProtArea
MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_0 (N, PA) $SN_PA_CONT_TYP[x,0] x = Number A3

protection zone
Contour type of 1st contour element
Return value 0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables

protection zone
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Contour type of 2nd contour element
Return value 0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Contour type of 3rd contour element
Return value 0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Return value 0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables

protection zone
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Return value 0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Return value 0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Return value 0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables

protection zone
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Return value 0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Return value 0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numProtArea

protection zone
Return value 0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables

protection zone
$$numProtArea
MDU_PA_LIM_3DIM (N, PA) $SN_PA_LIM_3DIM[x] x = Number pro‐ A3

tection zone
Limitation of protection zone applicate
Code for limitation of protection zone in the axis that is perpendicular to polygon definition (applicate)
Return value 0 = no limitation
1 = limitation in positive direction
2 = limitation in negative direction
3 = limitation in both directions
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numProtArea
MDU_PA_ORI (N, PA) $SN_PA_ORI[x] x = Number protection A3

zone
Plane assignment of protection zone
Code for plane assignment of protection zone
1 = G18
2 = G19
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numProtArea
MDU_PA_TW (N, PA) $SN_PA_T_W[x] x = Number protection A3

zone
Workpiece or tool-related protection zone
Code for workpiece or tool-oriented protection zone
Return value 0 = workpiece-related
1 = reserved
2 = reserved
3 = tool-related

NC variables
MDU_PA_TW (N, PA) $SN_PA_T_W[x] x = Number protection A3

zone
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numProtArea
modelChangeCounter (N, PA)

Modification counter of the machine model
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
8
Read access
pa3DState (N, PA)

Activation state of a protection zone
- TYPE_CHAR 0 0 3
Addressing
$MN_MM_MAXNUM_3D_PROT_AREAS
Read access
pa3DProtDState (N, PA)

Status of the PI service _N_PROT_D
Status of the PI service _N_PROT_D. The line index has the following meaning:
1: Counter for PI calls
2: Current status (0=not calculated, 1=running calculation, 2=ready)
3: Number of a potentially occuring alarm during calculation (0=no alarm)
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
3
Read access

NC variables
pa3DProtDistance (N, PA)

Distance vector of the PI service _N_PROT_D
Distance vector of the PI service _N_PROT_D. The line index has the following meaning:
1: X component
2: Y component
3: Z component
4. Absolute value of the vector
Addressing
4
Read access
kinChainName (N, PA) $NK_CHAIN_NAME

Name of the kinematic chain
Name of the kinematic chain
This variable no longer exists in versions higher than NCK.P7_92.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
$MN_MM_MAXNUM_KIN_CHAINS
kinChain1stElem (N, PA) $NK_1ST_ELEM

First element of the kinematic chain
First element of the kinematic chain
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
$MN_MM_MAXNUM_KIN_CHAINS
kinElemName (N, PA) $NK_NAME

Name of a kinematic element

NC variables
kinElemName (N, PA) $NK_NAME

- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
$MN_MM_MAXNUM_KIN_CHAIN_ELEM
kinElemNext (N, PA) $NK_NEXT

Reference to the next kinematic element
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
kinElemParallel (N, PA) $NK_PARALLEL

Reference to 1st element of a diverging chain
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
kinElemNextP (N, PA) $NK_NEXTP

Reference to a branching kinematic chain
Reference to a branching kinematic chain
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
kinElemSwitchIndex (N, PA) $NK_SWITCH_INDEX

Index of a switch
Index of a switch in the kinematic chain.

NC variables
kinElemSwitchIndex (N, PA) $NK_SWITCH_INDEX

- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
kinElemSwitchPos (N, PA) $NK_SWITCH_POS

Position of a switch
Position of a switch in a kinematic chain.
- TYPE_UDWORD
Addressing
kinElemType (N, PA) $NK_TYPE

Type of kinematic element
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
kinElemNameOld (N, PA)

Name of a kinematic element (old)
Name of a kinematic element (old). Using this variable, you can access the same data as with kinElemName (column
index 1030). On the one hand, the variable is necessary due to an address shift compared with software version 83, and,
on the other hand, to lock the (old) column index 1040 for other applications.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing

NC variables
kinElemNextOld (N, PA)

Reference to next kinematic element (old)
Reference to next kinematic element (old). Using this variable, you can access the same data as with kinElemNameNext
(column index 1032). On the one hand, the variable is necessary due to an address shift compared with software version
83, and, on the other hand, to lock the (old) column index 1041 for other applications.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
kinElemOffDir0 (N, PA) $NK_OFF_DIR[0]

Offset or direction component in the X direction
Addressing

Offset or direction component in the Y direction
Addressing

Offset or direction component in the Z direction
Addressing

NC variables
kinElemOffDirFine0 (N, PA)

Fine offset of direction component in X direction
dummy, formerly: Fine offset of direction component in X direction
No access

Fine offset of direction component in Y direction
dummy, formerly: Fine offset of direction component in Y direction
No access

Fine offset of direction component in Z direction
dummy, formerly: Fine offset of direction component in Z direction
No access
kinElemOffDirFineLim (N, PA)

Input limit for the fine offset of the offset
dummy, formerly: Input limit for the fine offset of the offset
fined
No access
kinElemAxis (N, PA) $NK_AXIS

Machine axis or OEM object name
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing

NC variables
kinElemAxisOffset (N, PA) $NK_A_OFF

Axis offset
fined
Addressing
kinElemAxisOffsetFine (N, PA)

Fine offset of axis offset
dummy, formerly: Fine offset of axis offset
fined
No access
kinElemAxisOffsetFineLim (N, PA)

Input limit for the fine offset of the axis offset
dummy, formerly: Input limit for the fine offset of the axis offset
fined
No access
kinSwitch (N, PA) $NK_SWITCH

Switch position
Position of a switch in a kinematic chain.
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
$MN_MM_MAXNUM_KIN_SWITCHES
pa3DProtName (N, PA) $NP_PROT_NAME

Name of a protection zone

NC variables
pa3DProtName (N, PA) $NP_PROT_NAME

- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
MN_MM_MAXNUM_3D_PROT_AREAS
pa3DChainName (N, PA) $NP_CHAIN_NAME

Name of chain carrying the protection zone
Name of the kinematic chain carrying the protection area
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
pa3DChainElem (N, PA) $NP_CHAIN_ELEM

Name of element carrying the protection zone
Name of the kinematic element carrying the protection zone
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
pa3DProtType (N, PA) $NP_PROT_TYPE

Type of protection area
Type of protection area. Valid are the values "MACHINE" or "TOOL". No difference made between lower and upper cases.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
pa3D1stProt (N, PA) $NP_1ST_PROT

Name of the first element of the protection zone

NC variables
pa3D1stProt (N, PA) $NP_1ST_PROT

- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
pa3DProtColor (N, PA) $NP_PROT_COLOR

Color and transparency of the protection area
Color and transparency of the protection area in QT format (HighByte: Transparency. Bytes 0 - 2: RGB
- TYPE_UDWORD
Addressing
pa3DBitIndex (N, PA) $NP_BIT_NO

Index bit on the VDI interface
Index of the bits assigned on the VDI interface
- TYPE_UDWORD
Addressing
pa3DInitStat (N, PA) $NP_INIT_STAT

Initialization status of the protection zone
Return value ASCII code of one of the following letters: 'A', 'a', 'I', 'i', 'P', 'p'
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing

NC variables
pa3DAuxIndex0 (N, PA) $NP_INDEX[0]

1st index for definition of var. protection zones
1st index for definition of variable protection zones
- TYPE_UDWORD
Addressing

2nd index for definition of var. protection zones
2nd index for definition of variable protection zones
- TYPE_UDWORD
Addressing

3rd index to define variable protection areas
3rd index for definition of variable protection zones
- TYPE_UDWORD
Addressing
pa3DProtDLevel (N, PA) $NP_PROT_D_LEVEL

Detailing level of a protection area
- TYPE_UDWORD
Addressing

NC variables
pa3DElemName (N, PA) $NP_NAME

Name of the protection zone element
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
$MN_MM_MAXNUM_3D_PROT_AREA_ELEM
pa3DElemNext (N, PA) $NP_NEXT

Name of the next protection zone element
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
pa3DElemNextP (N, PA) $NP_NEXTP

Name of next parallel protection area element
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
pa3DElemAdd (N, PA) $NP_ADD

Name of a protection zone to be inserted
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
pa3DElemColor (N, PA) $NP_COLOR

Color and transparency of a prot. area element
Color and transparency of a protection area element in QT format (HighByte: Transparency. Bytes 0 - 2: RGB

NC variables
pa3DElemColor (N, PA) $NP_COLOR

- TYPE_UDWORD
Addressing
MN_MM_MAXNUM_3D_PROT_AREA_ELEM
pa3DElemUsage (N, PA) $NP_USAGE

Use of a protection area element
Use of the protection area element to visualize ('V' or 'v"), to avoid collisions ('C' or 'c') or both ('A' or 'a').
Return value ASCII code of one of the following letters: 'A' 'a', 'C', 'c', 'V', 'v'
- TYPE_CHAR
Addressing
MN_MM_MAXNUM_3D_PROT_AREA_ELEM
pa3DElemType (N, PA) $NP_TYPE

Type of the protection zone element
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
pa3DElemFileName (N, PA) $NP_FILENAME

File name of a prot. area elem. of the "FILE" type
Name of file containing the description of a protection area element of the "FILE" type.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
pa3DElemDLevel (N, PA) $NP_D_LEVEL

Detailing level of a protection area element

NC variables
pa3DElemDLevel (N, PA) $NP_D_LEVEL

- TYPE_UDWORD
Addressing
pa3DElemPara0 (N, PA) $NP_PARA[0]

1st geometry parameter of protection zone element
Addressing

2nd geometry parameter of protection zone element
Addressing

3rd geometry parameter of protection zone element
Addressing
pa3DElemOffset0 (N, PA) $NP_OFF[0]

X components of the offset

NC variables

Addressing

Y components of the offset
Addressing

Z components of the offset
Addressing
pa3DElemDir0 (N, PA) $NP_DIR[0]

X components of rotary axis
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing

Y components of rotary axis
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing

NC variables


Z components of rotary axis
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
pa3DElemAngle (N, PA) $NP_ANG

Turning angle
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
pa3DTElemName (N, PA) $NP_T_NAME

Name of the tool protection area element
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
$MN_MM_MAXNUM_3D_T_PROT_ELEM
Read access
pa3DTElemType (N, PA) $NP_T_TYPE

Type of the tool protection area element
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
pa3DTElemFileName (N, PA) $NP_T_FILENAME

File name tool protec area elem of the "FILE" type
Name of file containing the description of the tool protection area element of the "FILE" type.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
Read access
pa3DTElemPara0 (N, PA) $NP_T_PARA[0]

1st geometry param. of the tool prot. area element
1st geometry parameter of the tool protection area element
Addressing
Read access

2nd geometry param. of the tool prot. area element
2nd geometry parameter of the tool protection area element
Addressing
Read access

3rd geometry param. of the tool prot. area element
3rd geometry parameter of the tool protection area element
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
pa3DTElemOffset0 (N, PA) $NP_T_OFF[0]

X component of the offset
X components of the offset
Addressing
Read access

Y component of the offset
Y components of the offset
Addressing
Read access

Z component of the offset
Z components of the offset
Addressing
Read access
pa3DTElemDir0 (N, PA) $NP_T_DIR[0]

X component of the axis of rotation
X components of rotary axis
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access

NC variables

Y component of the axis of rotation
Y components of rotary axis
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access

Z component of the axis of rotation
Z components of rotary axis
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
pa3DTElemAngle (N, PA) $NP_T_ANG

Rotation angle
Turning angle
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
pa3DCollPair0 (N, PA) $NP_COLL_PAIR[n, 0]

1. Name of a protection area of a collision pair
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
MM_MAXNUM_3D_PROT_AREAS *
(MM_MAXNUM_3D_PROT_AREAS - 1) / 2

NC variables
pa3DCollPair1 (N, PA) $NP_COLL_PAIR[n, 1]

2. Name of a protection area of a collision pair
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
pa3DCollPairSafetyDist (N, PA) $NP_SAFETY_DIST

Safety distance of a collision pair
Addressing
trafoDatBaseTool0 (N, PA) $NT_BASE_TOOL[n,0]

X components of the base tool.
X components of the base tool
Addressing
$MN_MM_NUM_TRAFO_DATA_SETS
Read access

Y components of the base tool.
Y components of the base tool
Addressing
Read access

NC variables

Z components of the base tool.
Z components of the base tool
Addressing
Read access
trafoDatName (N, PA) $NT_NAME[n]

Name of transformer data records
Name of transformer data record
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
Read access
trafoDatPChainFirstElem (N, PA) $NT_P_CHAIN_FIRST_ELEM[n]

Name of first element of kin. chain for workpiece
Name of first element of kinetic chain for workpiece
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
Read access
trafoDatTChainFirstElem (N, PA) $NT_T_CHAIN_FIRST_ELEM[n]

Name of first element of kinetic chain for tool
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
trafoDatTrafoType (N, PA) $NT_TRAFO_TYPE

Transformer type
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
Read access
trafoDatTChainName (N, PA) $NT_T_CHAIN_NAME[n]

Name of kin. chain for tool
Name of kin. chain for tool
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
Read access
trafoDatTChainLastElem (N, PA) $NT_T_CHAIN_LAST_ELEM[n]

Name of last element of kin. chain for tool
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
Read access
trafoDatPChainName (N, PA) $NT_P_CHAIN_NAME[n]

Name of kin. chain for workpiece
Name of kin. chain for workpiece
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
trafoDatPChainLastElem (N, PA) $NT_P_CHAIN_LAST_ELEM[n]

Name of last element of kin. chain for workpiece
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
Read access
trafoDatTRefElem (N, PA) $NT_T_REF_ELEM[n]

Reference point for tool length calculation
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
Read access
trafoDatGeoAxName0 (N, PA) $NT_GEO_AX_NAME[n, 0]

Name of first geometry axis
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
Read access

Name of second geometry axis
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
Read access

Name of third geometry axis

NC variables

- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
Read access
trafoDatRotAxName0 (N, PA) $NT_ROT_AX_NAME[n, 0]

Name of first rotary axis
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
Read access

Name of second rotary axis
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
Read access

Name of third rotary axis
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
Read access
trafoDatCloseChainT (N, PA) $NT_CLOSE_CHAIN_T[n]

Reference point for closing the tool chain
Element whose end point is used as a reference point for closing the tool chain.

NC variables
trafoDatCloseChainT (N, PA) $NT_CLOSE_CHAIN_T[n]

- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
Read access
trafoDatCloseChainP (N, PA) $NT_CLOSE_CHAIN_P[n]

Reference point for closing the part chain
Element whose end point is used as a reference point for closing the part chain.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
Read access
trafoDatRotAxPos0 (N, PA) $NT_ROT_AX_POS[n, 0]

Position of the 1st manual rotary axis
Addressing
Read access

Position of the 2nd manual rotary axis
Addressing
Read access

Position of the 3rd manual rotary axis

NC variables

Addressing
Read access
trafoDatCorrElemT0 (N, PA) $NT_CORR_ELEM_T[n, 0]

Alternative name: trafoDatCorrElem0
Name of 1st correction element in the tool chain
Name of the 1st correction element in the tool chain
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
Read access

Name of 2nd correction element in the tool chain
Name of the 2nd correction element in the tool chain
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
Read access

Name of 3rd correction element in the tool chain
Name of the 3rd correction element in the tool chain
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
Read access

NC variables

Name of 4th correction element in the tool chain
Name of the 4th correction element in the tool chain
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
Read access
trafoDatHirthOff0 (N, PA) $NT_HIRTH_OFF[n, 0]

Angle offs. of 1st rot. axis w. Hirth tooth system
Angle offset of 1st rotary axis with Hirth tooth system
Addressing
Read access

Angle offs. of 2nd rot. axis w. Hirth tooth system
Angle offset of 2nd rotary axis with Hirth tooth system
Addressing
Read access

Angle offs. of 3rd rot. axis w. Hirth tooth system
Angle offset of 3rd rotary axis with Hirth tooth system
Addressing

NC variables

Read access
trafoDatHirthInc0 (N, PA) $NT_HIRTH_INC[n, 0]

Angle incr. of 1st rot. axis w. Hirth tooth system
Angle increment of 1st rotary axis with Hirth tooth system
Addressing
Read access

Angle incr. of 2nd rot. axis w. Hirth tooth system
Angle increment of 2nd rotary axis with Hirth tooth system
Addressing
Read access

Angle incr. of 3rd rot. axis w. Hirth tooth system
Angle increment of 3rd rotary axis with Hirth tooth system
Addressing
Read access
trafoDatRotAxMin0 (N, PA) $NT_ROT_AX_MIN[n, 0]

Minimum position of 1st manual rotary axis
Addressing

NC variables

Read access

Minimum position of 2nd manual rotary axis
Addressing
Read access

Minimum position of 3rd manual rotary axis
Addressing
Read access
trafoDatRotAxMax0 (N, PA) $NT_ROT_AX_MAX[n, 0]

Maximum position of 1st manual rotary axis
Addressing
Read access

Maximum position of 2nd manual rotary axis
Addressing
Read access

NC variables

Maximum position of 3rd manual rotary axis
Addressing
Read access
trafoDatBaseOrient0 (N, PA) $NT_BASE_ORIENT[n, 0]

X component of basic tool orientation
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access

Y component of basic tool orientation
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access

Z component of basic tool orientation
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
trafoDatBaseOrientNormal0 (N, PA) $NT_BASE_ORIENT_NORMAL[n, 0]

X component of the normal vector of orientation

NC variables

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access

Y component of the normal vector of orientation
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access

Z component of the normal vector of orientation
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
trafoDatPoleLimit (N, PA) $NT_POLE_LIMIT[n]

End angle tolerance with interpol. through pole
End angle tolerance with interpolation through pole
Addressing
Read access
trafoDatPoleTol (N, PA) $NT_POLE_TOL[n]

End angle tolerance for pole interpolation

NC variables
trafoDatPoleTol (N, PA) $NT_POLE_TOL[n]

Addressing
Read access
trafoDatRotOffsetFromFrame (N, PA) $NT_ROT_OFFSET_FROM_FRAME[n]

Accept rotary offs. for transformer select. fr. WO
Accept rotary offset for transformer selection from WO
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Addressing
Read access
trafoDatIgnoreToolOrient (N, PA) $NT_IGNORE_TOOL_ORIENT[n]

Ignore tool orientation
If this parameter is set, the orientation stored in the transformation data ($NT_BASE_ORIENT, $NT_BASE_ORIENT_NOR‐
MAL) is always used, regardless of the basic orientation contained in the tool data of an active tool, i.e. the orientation
defined in the transformation data set takes precedence over the tool orientation.
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Addressing
Read access
trafoDatTrafoIncludesTool (N, PA) $NT_TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL[n]

Tool treated internally or externally
This system variable indicates whether the tool is handled internally or externally in the case of an active transformation.
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
trafoDatPoleSideFix (N, PA) $NT_POLE_SIDE_FIX[n]

Working area in front of/behind pole for TRANSMIT
Restriction of working area in front of/behind pole or no restriction, i.e. traversal through the pole.
The assigned values have the following meanings:
0: No restriction of the working area. Traversal through the pole allowed.
1: Working area of linear axis for positions >=0,

(if tool length compensation parallel to linear axis = 0)
2: Working area of linear axis for positions <=0,

(if tool length compensation parallel to linear axis = 0)

- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
Read access
trafoDatCntrl (N, PA) $NT_CNTRL[n]

Bit-coded control word
This data is a bit-coded control word, with which the behavior can be influenced in specific situations.
The individual bits have the following meaning:
Bit 0 : Not assigned
Bit 1 - 3: The orientation axis assigned to the bit (Bit 1: First orientation axis, Bit 2: Second orientation axis, Bit 3: Third
orientation axis) is interpreted as speed-controlled spindle.
We currently only support the cases in which either the first or the third orientation axis is parameterized as a
spindle (turning on milling machines or 5-axis milling on machines on which the third orientation axis is not operated in
position control mode).
Bit 4 - 6: The orientation axis assigned to the bit (Bit 4: First orientation axis, Bit 5: Second orientation axis, Bit 6: Third
orientation axis) is Hirth-toothed. For the Hirth toothing, only the machine data $MA_INDEX_AX_NUMERATOR, $MA_IN‐
DEX_AX_DENOMINATOR and $MA_INDEX_AX_OFFSET are evaluated.
Der Inhalt des Maschinendatums $MA_HIRTH_IS_ACTIVE wird nicht ausgewertet, d.h. die Achse muss nicht als
echte Hirthachse prametriert sein.
Ist die Achse als Moduloachse parameriert, wird das Maschinendatum $MA_INDEX_AX_NUMERATOR durch das
Maschinendatum $MA_MODULO_RANGE ersetzt. Die Abstände der zulässigen Achspositionen ergeben sich dann durch
$MA_MODULO_RANGE / $MA_INDEX_AX_DENOMINATOR.
Das Maschinendatum $MA_INDEX_AX_OFFSET wird auch bei Moduloachsen ausgewertet.
Bit 7 - 8: Sind diese Bits gesetzt, werden an den Startpunkten der Teilketten (Bit7: Part-Kette; Bit 8: Tool-Kette) bei Be‐
darf intern automatisch zusätzliche konstante Kettenelmnente eingefügt, die eine Veebindung vom Endpunkt der Kette
zum Maschinennullpunkt herstellen ("Kette schließen").
Bit 9 - 31: Nicht belegt
- TYPE_DWORD

NC variables
trafoDatCntrl (N, PA) $NT_CNTRL[n]

Addressing
Read access
trafoDatTrafoIndex (N, PA) $NT_TRAFO_INDEX[n]

Index f. transformation call w. convention. syntax
A transformation defined by kinematic chains can also be activated by conventional language commands, such as
TRAORI(<n>) or TRANSMIT(<n>), instead of the call TRAFOON(<Name>), if a value not equal to zero is entered in this
system data, and the transformation type is compatible with the conventionally named transformation type.
The hundreds and thousands digits indicate the channel in which the transformation can be called with a conventional
language command. If both these digits are empty (zero), the definition applies to the first channel; this means that, for
example, the entries "1" and "101" are equivalent.
In order for a transformation defined by kinematic chains to be called with a conventional language command, the three
lowest-value decimal positions of this system data must not be zero. The orientation transformation indicated by the index
1 is also alternatively activated for compatibility reasons with the conventional call syntax with TRAORI(0), TRAORI() or
TRAORI but not with TRAORI(1). The same applies to the other transformation types (TRANSMIT, TRACYL and
TRAANG).
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
Read access
trafoDatAuxPos0 (N, PA) $NT_AUX_POS[n,0]

X comp. of the auxil. position for meas. cycles
X component of the auxiliary position for measuring cycles
Addressing
Read access

Y comp. of the auxil. position for meas. cycles
Y component of the auxiliary position for measuring cycles
Addressing

NC variables

Read access

Z comp. of the auxil. position for meas. cycles
Z component of the auxiliary position for measuring cycles
Addressing
Read access
trafoDatIdent0 (N, PA) $NT_IDENT[n, 0]

Identifier 0, ID number 0, no significance in NCK
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
Read access

- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
Read access

- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
trafoDatCorrElemP0 (N, PA) $NT_CORR_ELEM_P[n, 0]

Name of 1st correction element in part chain
Name of the 1st correction element in the part chain
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
Read access

- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
Read access

- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
Read access

- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
trafoDatRotAxCnt0 (N, PA) $NT_ROT_AX_CNT[n, 0]

Number of relevant rotary axes in the part chain
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
Read access
trafoDatRotAxCnt1 (N, PA) $NT_ROT_AX_CNT[n, 1]

Number of relevant rotary axes in the tool chain
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
Read access
trafoDatBaseToolComp (N, PA) $NT_BASE_TOOL_COMP[n]

Compensation of the tool axes with frames.
This bit-coded system variable means that components of the BaseTool can be compensated via the transformation frame
so that there is no change in the WCS component on transformation selection.
Bit0: MD24920 $NT_BASE_TOOL[n, 0] is compensated via $P_TRAFRAME.

This function is available only if the system frame $P_TRAFRAME is configured via MD28082 $MC_MM_SYS‐
TEM_FRAME_MASK bit6.
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
3.2.6.12 RP: Arithmetic parameter
Arithmetic parameters are specific, predefined variables which are addressed with the address R and subse‐
quent number. The contents and meaning of arithmetic parameters is specified by person programming the
part program. The number of parameters can be set in the machine data 18156 (MM_NUM_R_PARAM_NCK).
RG (N, RP) $RG[x] x = ParameterNo PA

Global R variables
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
MM_NUM_R_PARAM_NCK

aDbb (N, S) $A_DBB[x] x = ByteNo

Data byte from/to the PLC
- TYPE_UWORD
aDbd (N, S) $A_DBD[x] x = Offset

Data double word (32 bits) from/to the PLC
- TYPE_DWORD

NC variables
aDbr (N, S) $A_DBR[x] x = Offset

Real data (32 bits) from/to the PLC
- TYPE_DOUBLE
aDbsb (N, S) $A_DBSB

PLC data byte
- TYPE_DWORD 0 -128 127
Addressing
1023
Read access
aDbsw (N, S) $A_DBSW

PLC data word
- TYPE_DWORD 0 -32768 32767
Addressing
1022
Read access
aDbw (N, S) $A_DBW[x] x = Offset

Data word (16 bits) from/to the PLC
- TYPE_UWORD
aDlb (N, S) $A_DLB[index]

Data byte in link area
Data byte (8 bits) in link area
- TYPE_UWORD

NC variables
aDld (N, S) $A_DLD[index]

Access to data double word
Data double word (32 bits) in link data area
- TYPE_DWORD
aDlr (N, S) $A_DLR[index]

Real data
Read data (32 bits) in link data area
- TYPE_DOUBLE
aDlw (N, S) $A_DLW[index]

Data word in link area
Data word (16 bits) in link data area
- TYPE_UWORD
aDpInConf (N, S) $A_DP_IN_CONF

PROFIBUS configured input data areas
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 0xffffffff
Addressing
1
Read access
aDpInLength (N, S) $A_DP_IN_LENGTH

PROFIBUS length of input data area
Addressing
32
Read access

NC variables
aDpInState (N, S) $A_DP_IN_STATE

PROFIBUS status of input data area
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 3
Addressing
32
Read access
aDpInValid (N, S) $A_DP_IN_VALID

PROFIBUS valid input data areas
Addressing
1
Read access
aDpOutConf (N, S) $A_DP_OUT_CONF

PROFIBUS configured output data areas
Addressing
1
Read access
aDpOutLength (N, S) $A_DP_OUT_LENGTH

PROFIBUS length of output data area
Addressing
32
Read access
aDpOutState (N, S) $A_DP_OUT_STATE

PROFIBUS status of output data area

NC variables
aDpOutState (N, S) $A_DP_OUT_STATE

- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 3
Addressing
32
Read access
aDpOutValid (N, S) $A_DP_OUT_VALID

PROFIBUS valid output data areas
Addressing
1
Read access
aDpbIn (N, S) $A_DPB_IN

PROFIBUS input byte (unsigned)
Addressing
Read access
aDpbOut (N, S) $A_DPB_OUT

PROFIBUS output byte (unsigned)
Addressing
Read access
aDprIn (N, S) $A_DPR_IN

PROFIBUS input data (32 bit REAL)
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0

NC variables
aDprIn (N, S) $A_DPR_IN

Addressing
Read access
aDprOut (N, S) $A_DPR_OUT

PROFIBUS output data (32 bit REAL)
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Read access
aDpsbIn (N, S) $A_DPSB_IN

PROFIBUS input byte (signed)
- TYPE_DWORD 0 -128 127
Addressing
Read access
aDpsbOut (N, S) $A_DPSB_OUT

PROFIBUS output byte (signed)
- TYPE_DWORD 0 -128 127
Addressing
Read access
aDpsdIn (N, S) $A_DPSD_IN

PROFIBUS input data double word (signed)
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing

NC variables
aDpsdIn (N, S) $A_DPSD_IN
Read access
aDpsdOut (N, S) $A_DPSD_OUT

PROFIBUS output data double word (signed)
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
Read access
aDpswIn (N, S) $A_DPSW_IN

PROFIBUS input word (signed)
- TYPE_DWORD 0 -32768 32767
Addressing
Read access
aDpswOut (N, S) $A_DPSW_OUT

PROFIBUS output word (signed)
- TYPE_DWORD 0 -32768 32767
Addressing
Read access
aDpwIn (N, S) $A_DPW_IN

PROFIBUS input word (unsigned)
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
aDpwOut (N, S) $A_DPW_OUT

PROFIBUS output word (unsigned)
Addressing
Read access
aInco (N, S) $A_INCO[x] x = InputNo

Comperator input NC
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
2
Read access
aInsip (N, S)
Corresponds to $$safeIntInpValPlcBit
Return value 0: Input not set
1: Input set
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
64
Read access
aPbbIn (N, S) $A_PBB_IN[index]

IN data byte
Data byte (8bits) in PLC input/output area IN
(also available on 810D CCU2)
Return value Neg. values are also permitted in spite of TYPE_UWORD
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access

NC variables
aPbbOut (N, S) $A_PBB_OUT[index]

OUT data byte
Data byte (8 bits) in PLC input/output area OUT
- TYPE_UWORD
aPbdIn (N, S) $A_PBD_IN[index]

IN data double word
Data double word (32bits) in PLC input/output area IN
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
aPbdOut (N, S) $A_PBD_OUT[index]

OUT data double word
Data double word (32 bits) in the PLC input/output area OUT
- TYPE_DWORD
aPbrIn (N, S) $A_PBR_IN[index]

IN Real data
Real data (32bits) in PLC input/output area IN
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
aPbrOut (N, S) $A_PBR_OUT[index]

OUT Real data
Real data (32 bits) in the PLC input/output area OUT

NC variables
aPbrOut (N, S) $A_PBR_OUT[index]

- TYPE_DOUBLE
aPbwIn (N, S) $A_PBW_IN[index]

IN data word
Data word (16bits) in PLC input/output area IN
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access
aPbwOut (N, S) $A_PBW_OUT[index]

OUT data word
Data word (16 bits) in the PLC input/output area OUT
- TYPE_UWORD
aProbe (N, S) $A_PROBE

Probe status
Return value 0: Not deflected
1: Deflected
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
2
Read access
aProbeLimited (N, S) $A_PROBE_LIMITED

Measuring velocity exceeded
Contains the accumulated number of DP communication cycles
where at least one limitation was effective.
Return value An increasing value signals that the frequency of the
measuring probe signals must be reduced
(i.e. by reducing the speed of the toothed wheel to be measured).

NC variables
aProbeLimited (N, S) $A_PROBE_LIMITED

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
2
anCollStateCond (N, S) $AN_COLL_STATE_COND[i]

Activation conditions of a protection area
The system variable indicates if a protection area can currently be part of the collision monitoring.
The individual conditions which have to be fulfilled so that a protection area can actively prevent collisions are also shown.
The variable is coded as follows:
Bit 0: The protection area is monitored (this bit has the same significance as the system variable $AN_COLL_STATE).
Bit 1: The protection area is included in the internally mapped model.
Bit 2: The protection area has the status 'P' (PLC-controlled).
Bit 3: The protection area has the status 'A' (active).
Bit 4: All axes which can move the protection area are referenced.
Bit 5: Indicates whether a PLC bit is assigned to the protection area.
Bit 6: Status of the interface bit assigned to the SB.
An active protection area (bit 0 = TRUE) only then enters real collision monitoring when it is part of at least one collision
pair ($NP_COLL_PAIR). The other partner must also be an active protection area.
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
Read access
aStopesi (N, S) $A_STOPESI

Current Safety Integrated stop
Current Safety Integrated Stop E for some axis
Return value Value 0: No Stop E
Value not equal to 0: A Stop E is currently applied for some axis
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing

NC variables
aStopesi (N, S) $A_STOPESI

1
Read access
aXfaultsi (N, S) $A_XFAULTSI

Information about Stop F
Information about Stop F for a safety axis:
Return value Bit 0 = 1: An actual value error has been discovered in the cross-check between NCK and
the drive of any safety axis.
Bit 1 = 1: An error has been discovered in the cross-check between NCK and the drive
of any axis,
and the waiting time until Stop B is triggered is running or has expired in this axis
($MA_SAFE_STOP_SWITCH_TIME_F)
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
accIndex (N, S)
Global uplaoad starting point for ACC entries
Global upload starting point for ACC entries. If a value is set here, upload access to _N_xx_yyy_ACC modules starts from
this entry.
- TYPE_UWORD 1
anAxCtAS (N, S) $AN_AXCTAS[n]

Container actual address
Current container rotation, i.e. by how many slots the axis
container has been currently advanced. The original container
assignment is valid after Power On and outputs value 0.
Return value maxCount = Maximum number of assigned locations in the axis container - 1
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 $$maxnumContainer‐
Slots - 1
Addressing
$$numContainer
Read access

NC variables
anAxCtSwA (N, S) $AN_AXCTSWA[CTn]

Axis container rotation
A rotation is currently being executed on the
axis container.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$numContainer
Read access
anAxEsrTrigger (N, S) $AN_ESR_TRIGGER

ESR start signal
(Global) control signal "Start Stop/Retract". With a signal edge change
from 0 to 1, the reactions parameterized beforehand in axial MD $MA_ESR_REACTION
and enabled via system variable $AA_ESR_ENABLE are started.
Independent drive reactions subsequently require a Power-Off / Power-On,
independent NC reactions require at least an opposite edge change in the
relevant system variable as well as a Reset.
1: TRUE
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
1
Read access
anCollState (N, S) $AN_COLL_STATE[i]

Activation state of a protection zone
The system variable indicates if a protection area can currently be part of collision monitoring.
However, the following requirements must be met first:
1. The activation status of the protection area is active ("A") or the activation status is PLC-controlled ("P") and the inter‐
face bit assigned to the protection area is set.
2. The protection area group ("Machine", "TOOL" etc.) has been activated in the current operating mode via the associ‐
ated interface bit.
A protection area for which this system variable gives the value TRUE only then enters real collision monitoring when it is
part of at least one collision pair ($NP_COLL_PAIR). The other partner must also be an active protection area.

NC variables
anCollState (N, S) $AN_COLL_STATE[i]

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
Read access
anCollIpoActive (N, S) $AN_COLL_IPO_ACTIVE

Status main run monitoring collision avoidance
The system variable indicates if the main run monitoring of the collision avoidance is active.
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access
anCollIpoLimit (N, S) $AN_COLL_IPO_LIMIT

Velocity reduction collision monitoring
The system variable indicates if the main run monitoring of the collision avoidance leads to a velocity reduction.
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access
anCollLoad (N, S) $AN_COLL_LOAD

Calcul. time requir. for collision avoidance in ms
Gives the required calculation time in ms - required for certain operations in connection with collision avoidance. The oper‐
ation is defined by index i.
i = 0: Time requirement for last call of PROTA
i = 1: Time requirement for last call of collision avoidance during preprocessing
i = 2: Time requirement for last call of the calculation of free space (real-time monitoring)
The variables can be reset by describing with value 0. Every write attempt with a value other than 0 is refused with an
error message.

Addressing
3
anIpoActLoad (N, S) $AN_IPO_ACT_LOAD

Current IPO runtime
Current IPO runtime including the runtime of the
synchronized actions of all channels

NC variables
anIpoActLoad (N, S) $AN_IPO_ACT_LOAD

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
anIpoLoadLimit (N, S) $AN_IPO_LOAD_LIMIT

IPO utilization limit reached
Return value 0: Utilization limit not reached
1: Utilization limit reached
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
1
Read access
anIpoLoadPercent (N, S) $AN_IPO_LOAD_PERCENT

Ratio of curr. IPO runtime / IPO cycle
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
anIpoMaxLoad (N, S) $AN_IPO_MAX_LOAD

Maximum IPO runtime
Maximum IPO runtime including the runtime of the
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
anIpoMinLoad (N, S) $AN_IPO_MIN_LOAD

Minimum IPO runtime
Minimum IPO runtime including the runtime of the
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
anLinkCommState (N, S) $AN_LINK_COMM_STATE

Status of the NCU link communication
Status of the NCU link communication between all NCUs in the NCU link cluster.
Decimal values of the variable:

0: NCU link communication is not active (MD18780 $MN_MM_NCU_LINK_MASK)
1: NCU link communication is active (MD18780 $MN_MM_NCU_LINK_MASK) and functions correctly, that is signs of life
are received from all NCUs in the cluster
2: NCU link communication is active (MD18780 $MN_MM_NCU_LINK_MASK), but does not function correctly (e.g. start-
up with inactive link, communication error etc.)
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
anLinkConnRcv (N, S) $AN_LINK_CONN_RCV

Number of link variable changes
Number of link variable changes per cycle from the specified to the current NCU number.
The variable $AN_LINK_CONN_RCV[NCU-No] shows the transmission capacity reserved for non-cyclic messages from
NCU-No to NCU-Curr in bytes.
Systems without an NCU link return the value 0.
Note: This value is only available in the IPO, and therefore cannot be read via the OPI variable service for the display.

- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing

NC variables
anLinkConnRcv (N, S) $AN_LINK_CONN_RCV

$$maxNumNcusInNcuCluster
Read access
anLinkConnSizeLinkvar (N, S) $AN_LINK_CONN_SIZE_LINKVAR

Gross number of bytes required
Gross number of bytes required for a link variable to be transmitted in each PTP relationship
The assignment of a link variable (e.g. $a_dlb[9] = 1) loads the non-cyclic link connections with a message of length
$AN_LINK_CONN_SIZE_LINKVAR.
It is irrelevant here whether a double-link or a byte-link variable is written. This enables the customer to estimate the maxi‐
mum number of transmittable link variables per IPO cycle
($AN_LINK_CONN_SND[NCU-No] / $AN_LINK_CONN_SIZE_LINKVAR= number of link-variable changes per IPO cycle
from NCU-Curr to NCU-No).

- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
anLinkTransRateLast (N, S) $AN_LINK_TRANS_RATE_LAST

Unused bandwidth of link variables
Number of link variables that should have been sent off in a previous IPO cycle.
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
anLinkTransRateLastSum (N, S) $AN_LINK_TRANS_RATE_LAST_SUM

Free link variables of the specif. send direction
Number of link variables for the send direction to the specified NCU number that could have been sent off in a previous
IPO cycle.
- TYPE_UWORD 0

NC variables
anLinkTransRateLastSum (N, S) $AN_LINK_TRANS_RATE_LAST_SUM

Addressing
Read access
anLinkConnSnd (N, S) $AN_LINK_CONN_SND

Number of link variable changes per cycle
Number of link variable changes per cycle from the current to the specified NCU number.
The index NCU number of the variable $AN_LINK_CONN_SDN[ NCU-No] currently ranges from 1 to 16. The variable re‐
turns the number of bytes reserved
from the current NCU-Curr to the NCU-No in order to exchange any non-cyclic messages. Depending on the utilization of
this transmission capacity,
SIEMENS can supply new SDB blocks for the CBE-30 which reduce the total transmission capacity from NCU-Curr to
NCU-No.
This makes the link faster and thus the servo cycle shorter. Note: If NCU-Curr == NCU-No, the variable returns "0".

- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
Read access
anRebootDelayTime (N, S) $AN_REBOOT_DELAY_TIME

Time until reboot
Addressing
1
Read access
anServoActLoad (N, S) $AN_SERVO_ACT_LOAD

Current runtime of the position controller
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing

NC variables
anServoActLoad (N, S) $AN_SERVO_ACT_LOAD

1
Read access
anServoMaxLoad (N, S) $AN_SERVO_MAX_LOAD

Maximum runtime of the position controller
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
anServoMinLoad (N, S) $AN_SERVO_MIN_LOAD

Minimum runtime of the position controller
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
anSimChanMask (N, S) $AN_SIM_CHAN_MASK

Channels for the synchronized simulation
Bit-coded mask of channels to be considered in the synchronized multi-channel simulation.
The variable is valid only in connection with the synchronized simulation (see Bit4 $MN_PROG_TEST_MASK).
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 0x3FF
anSimMaxIpoStep (N, S) $AN_SIM_MAX_IPOSTEP

Maximum step for the synchronized simulation
Using this variable you can specify the maximum step width in real-time IPO cycles. After each step width an event is
output to the HMI interface. This allows setting the number of breakpoints. If value 0 is specified, then the system deter‐
mines the maximum possible step width.
The variable is valid only in connection with the synchronized simulation (see Bit4 $MN_PROG_TEST_MASK).

NC variables
anSimMaxIpoStep (N, S) $AN_SIM_MAX_IPOSTEP

- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
anSyncActLoad (N, S) $AN_SYNC_ACT_LOAD

Current runtime for synchronized actions
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
anSyncMaxLoad (N, S) $AN_SYNC_MAX_LOAD

Maximum runtime for synchronized actions
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
anSyncToIpo (N, S) $AN_SYNC_TO_IPO

Percentage of Synact / IPO computing time
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
anTimer (N, S) $AN_TIMER[n]

NCK timer
Global NCK timer in seconds.
Addressing
$MN_MM_NUM_AN_TIMER
Read access

NC variables
analogInpVal (N, S) $A_INA[x] x = AnaloginputNo

Value of HW analog input
A or V TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numAnalogInp
analogOutpVal (N, S) $A_OUTA[x] x = AnalogoutputNo

Number of HW analog output
A or V TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numAnalogOutp
axisActivInNcu (N, S)
Display of active axis
Display indicating whether the axis is active, i.e. whether it can be traversed via a channel
of its own NCU or via another NCU (link axis).
This data can be utilized by HMIs in order to suppress the display of any non-active axes.
Return value Bits 0-31 stand for the axes of the NCU.
Bit n = 1: Axis can be traversed.
Bit n = 0: Axis cannot be traversed.
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
badMemFfs (N, S)
FFS memory defect
Only with 840D-powerline:
Number of bytes which are defective in the Flash File System (FFS)

NC variables
badMemFfs (N, S)
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
basisFrameMask (N, S) $P_NCBFRMASK

Active channel-independent basic frames
Display indicating which channel-independent basic frames are active.
Return value Every bit in the mask indicates whether the appropriate basic frame
is active. Bit0 = 1st basic frame, Bit1 = 2nd basic frame, etc.
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
completeDpcAcxChangeCnt (N, S)
Other counter for _N_COMPLETE_DPC_ACX
Modification counter of ACX for the PROFIBUS configuration of
all PROFIBUS segments (_N_COMPLETE_DPC_ACX) that is
incremented when ACX is changed. If the contents of ACX
is or becomes invalid, the modification counter will be set to 0.
If the contents of ACX is valid again, the modification counter will
be reset to the value it had before the contents of ACX became invalid,
and will simultaneously be incremented (only the value), if the contents of
ACX has really changed.
Return value == 0: Contents of _N_COMPLETE_DPC_ACX is invalid
!= 0: Contents of _N_COMPLETE_DPC_ACX is valid
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
completeDocAcxChangeCnt (N, S)
Other counter for _N_COMPLETE_DOC_ACX
Modification counter of ACX for the configuration of
DO of all SINAMICS on all PROFIBUS segments (_N_COMPLETE_DOC_ACX) that is
incremented when the ACX is changed. If the contents of ACX
is or becomes invalid, the modification counter will be set to 0.
If the contents of ACX is valid again, the modification counter will
be reset to the value it had before the contents of ACX became invalid,
and will simultaneously be incremented (only the value), if the contents of
ACX has really changed.
Return value == 0: Contents of _N_COMPLETE_DOC_ACX is invalid
!= 0: Contents of _N_COMPLETE_DOC_ACX is valid
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
completeDotAcxChangeCnt (N, S)
Other counter for _N_COMPLETE_DOT_ACX
Modification counter of ACX that describes all
SINAMICS DO types known to the OPI (_N_COMPLETE_DOT_ACX) and that
is incremented when ACX changes. If the contents of ACX is or becomes
invalid, the modification counter will be set to 0.
If the contents of ACX is valid again, the modification counter will be
reset to the value it had before the contents of ACX became invalid and will
be incremented (only the value) simultaneously, if the contents of ACX has really changed.
Return value == 0: Contents of _N_COMPLETE_DOT_ACX is invalid

!= 0: Contents of _N_COMPLETE_DOT_ACX is valid
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
diagnoseDataFfs (N, S)
FFS diagnostic data
Diagnostic data for Flash File System (FFS)
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
8
Read access
digitInpVal (N, S) $A_IN[x] x = DigitalinputNo

Value of HW digital input
Return value 0 = low
1 = high
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numDigitInp
digitOutpVal (N, S) $A_OUT[x] x = DigitaloutputNo

Value of HW digital output
Return value 0 = low
1 = high
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numDigitOutp

NC variables
driveType (N, S)
Digital drive type
Digital drive type. Coded according
to machine data 13040, but additional code.
Note:
As long as the OPI variable contains the identifier 0x100 "Drive type unknown" after an NCK ramp-up,
the information is not yet consistent and must not be evaluated.
As soon as the identifier 0x100 is deleted, in NCU systems with SIMODRIVE 611D drives
it can be assumed that the content can only change after renewed link to the NCK.
(e.g. after modification of the drive modules), i.e. it need not be cyclically checked for change.
Return value 0x100: Drive type unknown.
0x200: This identifier is entered in addition to the code according to the machine data 13040
if a 611D-Performance2 module is detected.
For other codes, see MD 13040.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$maxnumDrives
Read access
driveTypeChangeCnt (N, S)
Modification counter for $$driveType
This counter is incremented by 1 every time $$driveType is modified.
The next value after 65535 is 0.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
freeDirectorys (N, S)
Number of directories that can be created
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables
freeDirectorys (N, S)
1
Read access
freeFiles (N, S)
Number of files that can be created
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
4
Read access
freeMem (N, S)
Free SRAM in bytes
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
freeMemDram (N, S)
Free memory in bytes
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
freeMemDramEPassF (N, S)
Free memory of the E file system
Memory in bytes available in the passive file system for executing from external drives
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
freeMemDramMPassF (N, S)
Free memory of the M file system
Free memory of the passive file system of the "Machine manufacturer" area in bytes
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
freeMemDramPassF (N, S)
Available memory DRAM file system no. 1
Memory available in passive file system (DRAM no. 1) in bytes
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
freeMemDramSPassF (N, S)
Free memory of the C file system
Free memory of the passive file system of the "Control manufacturer" area in bytes
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
freeMemDramTPassF (N, S)
Free memory of the T file system
Free memory of the passive file system of the "Temp" area in bytes
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
freeMemDramUPassF (N, S)
Alternative name: freeMemDram2PassF
Free memory of the User file system
Free memory of the passive file system of the "User" area in bytes
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
freeMemFfs (N, S)
FFS free memory
Number of bytes that are still available in the Flash File System (FFS)
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
freeMemISram (N, S)
Free internal SRAM
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
freeMemSettings (N, S)
Free SRAM (for the present memory layout)
Free SRAM for the part programs and persistent
data for the present (possibly not yet active) memory layout. It is updated when
memory-configuring machine data is changed. The size of the current
file system is taken into account.
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0

NC variables
freeMemSettings (N, S)
Addressing
1
Read access
freeMemSettingsDram (N, S)
Free DRAM (for the present memory layout)
Free DRAM memory for data for the present
(may not yet be active) memory layout. Is updated when memory-
configuring machine data is changed.
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
freeMemSettingsISram (N, S)
Free internal SRAM
Free internal SRAM for the current
(possibly not yet active) memory layout. It is updated when the
memory-configuring machine data is updated.
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
freeMemSramPassF (N, S)
Available memory SRAM file system
Memory available in passive file system (SRAM) in bytes
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
freeProtokolFiles (N, S)
Logging: res. no. free files
Logging: Number of protocol files that can still be created
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
10
Read access
handWheelTestDiffPulses (N, S)
Differential handwheel pulses
Define differential handwheel pulses for handwheel simulation via OPI
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
$$numHandWheels
handwheelStatus (N, S)
Handwheel status
Return value 0 = PASSIVE
1 = ACTIVE
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numHandWheels
hwMLFB (N, S)
MLFB of the NCU module
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
hwProductSerialNr (N, S)
Unique hardware number of the NCU
Unique hardware number of the NCU module
With solution line, this is the serial number of the CF card.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
1
Read access
hwProductSerialNrL (N, S)
Unique hardware number of the NCU (long)
Unique hardware number of the NCU module
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
1
Read access
licenseStatus (N, S)
Licensing status
Return value 0: Licensed,
1: Insufficiently licensed
2: Not licensed
3: PIN is expanded
4: PIN is OK
5: PIN entered incorrectly
6: PIN missing
7: Trial license active
8: Trial license expired
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
licensedOptions (N, S)
Licensed Options
Licensed options field
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
128
Read access
licTrialPeriod (N, S)
Number of trial periods used
- TYPE_WORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
licTrialTime (N, S)
Remaining time of the trial periods
Remaining time of the current trial period
- TYPE_WORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
licTrialPeriodMaxNum (N, S)
Number of permissible trial periods
Maximum number of permissible trial periods
- TYPE_WORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
memSize (N, S)
Result variable for PI:_N_MMSIZE
Result variable for the PI service _N_MMSIZE
The change in size of the memory, which is to be expected when
a memory-configuring machine data item is changed, is stored here.
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
3
Read access
mmcCmdPrepCounter (N, S)
Counter incremented with each call of EXTCALL
Counter that is incremented with each call of EXTCALL
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
nckAliveAndWell (N, S) DB10, DBX104.7 A4

NCK sign-of-life
NCK sign of life.
The value is increased on each reading, so that an HMI can detect whether the
NCK is still working correctly by reading this variable cyclically.
The value itself has no significance.
Cyclic result acknowledgments are also returned on this variable,
even when the cyclic services are not served by the NCK
because of block change time problems. This behavior is only
ensured if the variable is not mixed with others in one orde. In other words,
nckAliveAndWell must be integrated into a cluster as a sole
variable.
As long as a cyclic reading service is set on this variable, one of the
HMI-CPU ready signals is set in the PLC interface.
Which of the signals is set is specified, on the one hand by the line
number and, on the other hand, at the "gloports" of the client:
The following applies to Powerline:

An HMI on the MPI communicates via the gloports 0x20-0x2f -> DB10.DBX108 Bit2 is set
An HMI on the OPI communicates via the gloports 0x10-0x1f -> DB10.DBX108 Bit3 is set
In the n:m group, the 2nd HMI identifies itself by line=2 -> DB10.DBX108 Bit1 is set
The following applies to Solutionline:

HMIs (int./ext.) communicate via the gloports 0x10-0x17 -> DB10.DBX108 Bit3 is set
Reserved for subsequent extensions: DB10.DBX108 Bit1
Reserved for subsequent extensions: DB10.DBX108 Bit2
Note: The related signal NCK-CPU-ready is in DB10,DBX104.7.

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
2

NC variables
nckMode (N, S)
Mode in which the NCK works
Mode in which the NCK works.
The mode can be set with the PI _N_NCKMOD.
Return value Bit0: NCK works accelerated in simulation mode/DRY_RUN.
This mode is currently provided only for the VNCK.
Bit1: NCK is slowed down to give the simulation more computing time on the same process‐
or.
NC start not possible.
Bit2: PowerOn-Init_Finish; power-up initialization finished.
Meaning:
State = 1
All channels of the NCK have been powered up and
have interpreted the DEF files.
Thus the HMI may receive consistent data from the NCK.
Example of a call from HMI to NCK:
What macros are available?
What GUDs are available?
Note: With Init-Finish==1, the POWER-ON Progevent has NOT yet been run.
State = 0
Power up has not yet been finished, or initialization
could not been executed due to a fatal alarm
Bit3: PowerOn-Ready ; power-up finished
Meaning:
State == 1
NCK has finished initialization, AND the POWER-ON Progevent has been executed.
OR the POWER-ON Progevent could not be executed due to an alarm.
Note: The next RESET will "catch up" on the POWER-ON Progevent.
This will no longer influence PowerOn-Ready.
Without PowerOn Progevent bit 3 and bit 2 are the same.
Bit4: NCK works accelerated in simulation mode.
This mode is not currently provided for the VNCK.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 f
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
nckModeAccFact (N, S)
NCK acceleration factor
NCK acceleration factor.
The acceleration factor can be set with the PI _N_NCKMOD.
The NCK executes the programs in SERUPRO mode. This mode is currently provided only for the VNCK.
Return value 0 VNCK executes a program at normal speed.
>0 VNCK executes a program at accelerated speed.
$$nckModeAccFact defines the acceleration factor.
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
ncuLinkActive (N, S)
NCU link active
Display indicating whether NCU link is activated (via machine data setting)
Based on display, HMI decides whether link-specific calculations and
displays are required.
Return value 0: NCU link not activated
1: NCU link activated
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
1
Read access
nettoMemFfs (N, S)
FFS net size
Net number of bytes which are available for the
Flash File System (FFS).
This memory stores the files contents and
management data (e.g. file names).
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing

NC variables
nettoMemFfs (N, S)
1
Read access
numAlarms (N, S)
Number of pending general alarms
- TYPE_UWORD
numFilesPerDir (N, S)
Maximum number of files per directory
Maximum number of files per directory (see: $MN_MM_NUM_FILES_PER_DIR)
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
numSubDirsPerDir (N, S)
Maximum number of subdirectories per directory
Maximum number of subdirectories per directory see:
$MN_MM_NUM_SUBDIR_PER_DIR
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
numTraceProtocDataList (N, S) $MM_PROTOC_NUM_ETPD_STD_LIST

Logging: No. std. data lists
Logging: Number of standard data lists per user
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing

NC variables
numTraceProtocDataList (N, S) $MM_PROTOC_NUM_ETPD_STD_LIST

10
Read access
numTraceProtocOemDataList (N, S) $MM_PROTOC_NUM_ETPD_OEM_LIST

Logging: No. OEM data lists
Logging: Number of OEM data lists per user
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
10
Read access
protCnfgAutoLoad (N, S)
Protokoll. Load trace session while NCK Start up
Protokoll.: Controls automatic load from trace session from description file during the NCK Start up process
Return value 0: Function inactive
1: Logging session should be loaded automatically from a description file during NCK ramp-
up
2: Same as (1), but automatic loading is terminated by stop trigger
3: Same as (1), but the description file is updated at each status change
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 3
Addressing
10
protCnfgAutoLoadFile (N, S)
Log: Load file for trace session
Log: Directory path and file name from which
the trace session is to be loaded during NCK start-up
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
10

NC variables
protCnfgAutoSave (N, S)
Log: Configuration of session backup
Log: Configuration of the backup of the trace session
1: Automatically backs up the logging session in a description file
when logging is terminated.
2: Automatically backs up the logging session and diagnostic information in a
description file when logging is terminated.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 2
Addressing
10
protCnfgCtl (N, S)
Log: Configuration of session backup file
Log: Control word to manipulate the trace session description file
1: Backs up the logging session in a description file
2: Backs up the logging session and diagnostic information in a description file
3: Loads the logging session from a description file, and all active triggers are deactivated
4: Loads the logging session from a description file
5: Deletes the logging file
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 5
Addressing
10
protCnfgFilename (N, S)
Log: Name of session backup file
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
10

NC variables
protCnfgStat (N, S)
Log: Status of session backup/load
Log: Result of the most recent backup or loading of a session backup file
Return value 0: No Error
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
10
protSessAccR (N, S)
Logging: Access rights of the session
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
10
protSessComm (N, S)
Logging: Comments on session
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
10
protSessConn (N, S)
Logging: Connection of the session
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
10

NC variables
protSessName (N, S)
Logging: Name of the session
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
10
protSessPrior (N, S)
Logging: Priority of the session
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
10
protocLastValNetIpoCycle (N, S)
Logging: Last user run time
Logging: Runtime of all events of all channels of a user in the last IPO cycle
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
10
Read access
protocMaxValNetIpoCycle (N, S)
Logging: Max. user run time
Logging: Maximum run time of all events of all channels of a user
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
10

NC variables
protocStrtMaskInt16 (N, S)
Logging: Start screen form integer 16 bit
Logging: Integer 16 bit screen form with which the start trigger variable is logically AND-ed before the comparison is made
with the trigger value. There is no logic operation with the value 0.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
10
protocStrtMaskInt32 (N, S)
Logging: Start screen form integer 32 bit
Logging: Integer 32 bit screen form with which the start trigger variable is logically AND-ed before the comparison is made
with the trigger value. There is no logic operation with the value 0.
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
10
protocStrtMatchCount (N, S)
Logging: Number of start comparisons
Logging: Specifies how often the comparison must match before the start trigger fires.
The trigger will only fire, if all trigger conditions are fulfilled.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
10
protocStrtNumEvDelay (N, S)
Logging: Delay of start trigger
Logging: Number of events which are still to be omitted after the occurrence of the trigger event before logging is started.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing

NC variables
protocStrtNumEvDelay (N, S)
10
protocStrtRemMatchCount (N, S)
Logging: Remaining number of start comparisons
Logging: Specifies how often the comparison must match before the start trigger fires.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
10
Read access
protocStrtState (N, S)
Logging: Status of start triggering
Logging: Status of the start triggering
Return value 0: Passive (trigger inactive)
1: Active (trigger is active, but has not yet responded)
2: Delay (trigger has responded and is still waiting the delay time)
3: Firing (trigger has responded, but must still respond more frequently until the triggering
takes place)
4: Done (trigger has responded and is inactive)
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
10
protocStrtType (N, S)
Logging: Type of start triggering
Return value 0: Monitoring for equality
1: Monitoring for more than or equal to
2: Monitoring for greater than
3: Monitoring for less than or equal to
4: Monitoring for less than
5: Monitoring for inequality
6: Monitoring for value change
7: Monitoring for increasing values
8: Monitoring for falling values

NC variables
protocStrtType (N, S)
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
10
protocStrtValueInt16 (N, S)
Logging: Start value integer 16 bit
Logging: Integer 16 bit value with which the start trigger variable is to be compared
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
10
protocStrtValueInt32 (N, S)
Logging: Start value integer 32 bit
Logging: Integer 32 bit value with which the start trigger variable is to be compared
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
10
protocStrtValueReal32 (N, S)
Logging: Start value real 32 bit
Logging: Real 32 bit value with which the start trigger variable is to be compared
- TYPE_FLOAT 0 0
Addressing
10

NC variables
protocStrtValueReal64 (N, S)
Logging: Start value real 64 bit
Logging: Real 64 bit value with which the start trigger variable is to be compared
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
10
protocStrtVarCol (N, S)
Logging: Start variable: Col
Logging: Variable which is to be monitored for the start triggering.
Statement of the "Col"
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
10
protocStrtVarRow (N, S)
Logging: Start variable: Row
Statement of the "Row"
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
10
protocStrtVarType (N, S)
Logging: Start variable: Type
Statement of the "Type"
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0

NC variables
protocStrtVarType (N, S)
Addressing
10
protocStrtVarUnit (N, S)
Logging: Start variable: Unit
Statement of the "Unit".
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
10
protocTrigMaskInt16 (N, S)
Logging: Trigger mask integer 16-bit
Logging: Integer 16-bit mask with which the trigger variable is logically
ANDed before the comparison with the trigger value is made.
Variable is not ANDed if value is 0.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
10
protocTrigMaskInt32 (N, S)
Logging: Trigger mask integer 32-bit
Logging: Integer 32-bit mask with which the trigger variable is logically
ANDed before the comparison with the trigger value is made.
Variable is not ANDed if value is 0.
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
10

NC variables
protocTrigOperation (N, S)
Logging: Trigger operation
Logging:
There are two start trigger variables. Each of these two variables is monitored using $$protocTrigType.
The result from each of these monitoring actions is: Trigger: yes/no
Since there are two variables, there are also two results, which can now be combined with a
logic operator. This operator is specified with this variable
Return value 0: No logic operation, only the first variable is to be taken into consideration
1: NOT (unary, the result of the first variable is negated, no second variable
2: AND (the result of the first variable is combined with the result of the second variable with
logic AND
3: OR (the result of the first variable is combined with the result of the second variable with
logic OR
4: XOR (the result of the first variable is combined with the result of the second variable with
logic XOR
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
10
protocStrtOperation (N, S)
Logging: Start trigger operation
Logging:
There are two start trigger variables. Each of these two variables is monitored using $$protocTrigType.
The result from each of these monitoring actions is: Trigger: yes/no
Since there are two variables, there are also two results, which can now be combined with a
logic operator. This operator is specified with this variable
Return value 0: No logic operation, only the first variable is to be taken into consideration
1: NOT (unary, the result of the first variable is negated, no second variable
2: AND (the result of the first variable is combined with the result of the second variable with
logic AND
3: OR (the result of the first variable is combined with the result of the second variable with
logic OR
4: XOR (the result of the first variable is combined with the result of the second variable with
logic XOR
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0

NC variables
protocStrtOperation (N, S)
Addressing
10
protocTrigMatchCount (N, S)
Logging: Number of comparisons
Logging: Specifies how often the comparison in total must match before the trigger fires.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
10
protocTrigNumEvDelay (N, S)
Logging: Delay after trigger
Logging: Number of events to be recorded after the trigger event
has occurred before the logging operation is stopped.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
10
protocTrigRemMatchCount (N, S)
Logging: Remaining number of comparisons
Logging: Specifies how often the comparison must match before the trigger fires.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
10
Read access

NC variables
protocTrigState (N, S)
Logging: Triggering status
Return value 0: Passive (trigger inactive)
1: Active (trigger is active, but has not yet responded)
2: Delay (trigger has responded and is still waiting the delay time)
3: Firing (trigger has responded, but must still respond more frequently until the triggering
takes place)
4: Done (trigger has responded and is inactive)
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
10
protocTrigType (N, S)
Logging: Triggering method
Return value 0: Monitoring for equality
1: Monitoring for more than or equal to
2: Monitoring for greater than
3: Monitoring for less than or equal to
4: Monitoring for less than
5: Monitoring for inequality
6: Monitoring for value change
7: Monitoring for increasing values
8: Monitoring for falling values
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
10
protocTrigValueInt16 (N, S)
Logging: Trigger value integer 16-bit
Logging: Integer 16-bit value with which trigger variable must be
compared
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0

NC variables
Addressing
10
Logging: Trigger value integer 32-bit
Logging: Integer 32-bit value with which trigger variable must be
compared
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
10
protocTrigValueReal32 (N, S)
Logging: Trigger value real 32-bit
Logging: Real 32-bit value with which trigger variable must be
compared
- TYPE_FLOAT 0 0
Addressing
10
protocTrigValueReal64 (N, S)
Logging: Trigger value real 64-bit
Logging: Real 64-bit value with which trigger variable must be
compared
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
10

NC variables
protocTrigVarArea (N, S)
Logging: Trigger variable: Area
Specification of "Area".
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
10
protocTrigVarCol (N, S)
Logging: Trigger variable: Col
Logging: Variable to be monitored for triggering.
Specification of "Col".
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
10
protocTrigVarRow (N, S)
Logging: Trigger variable: Row
Specification of "Row".
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
10
protocTrigVarType (N, S)
Logging: Trigger variable: Type
Specification of "Type".
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0

NC variables
protocTrigVarType (N, S)
Addressing
10
protocTrigVarUnit (N, S)
Logging: Trigger variable: Unit
Specification of "Unit".
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
10
safeExtInpValNckBit (N, S) $A_INSE[n]

External NC input of SI prog. log. from NCK peri.
External NC input of the SI programmable logic from the NCK periphery
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$safeMaxNumExtInput
Read access
safeExtInpValNckWord (N, S) $A_INSED[n]

Image of external NC inputs of SI progr. logic
Image of the external NC inputs of the SI programmable logic
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
$$safeMaxNumExtInput / 32
Read access
safeExtInpValPlcBit (N, S) $A_INSEP[n]

External PLC input of SI prog. log. from PLC peri.
External PLC input of the SI programmable logic from the PLC periphery

NC variables
safeExtInpValPlcBit (N, S) $A_INSEP[n]

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
Read access
safeExtInpValPlcWord (N, S) $A_INSEPD[n]

Image of the external PLC inputs of SI progr. log.
Image of the external PLC inputs of the SI programmable logic
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
$$safeMaxNumExtInput / 32
Read access
safeExtOutpValNckBit (N, S) $A_OUTSE[n]

External NC output of SI prog. log. to NCK per.
External NC output of the SI programmable logic to the NCK periphery
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$safeMaxNumExtOutput
Read access
safeExtOutpValNckWord (N, S) $A_OUTSED[n]

Image of the external NC outputs of SI prog. log.
Image of the external NC outputs of the SI programmable logic
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
$$safeMaxNumExtOutput / 32
Read access

NC variables
safeExtOutpValPlcBit (N, S) $A_OUTSEP[n]

External PLC output of the SI progr. logic
External PLC output of the SI programmable logic to the PLC periphery
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
Read access
safeExtOutpValPlcWord (N, S) $A_OUTSEPD[n]

Image of the external PLC outputs of SI prog. log.
Image of the external PLC outputs of the SI programmable logic
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
$$safeMaxNumExtOutput / 32
Read access
safeIntInpValNckBit (N, S) $A_INSI[n]

Internal NC input of SI progr. logic
Internal NC input of the SI programmable logic from the NCK's SI monitoring channel
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$safeMaxNumIntInput
Read access
safeIntInpValNckWord (N, S) $A_INSID[n]

Image of int. NC inputs of SI progr. logic
Image of the internal NC inputs of the SI programmable logic from the NCK's SI monitoring channel
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
$$safeMaxNumIntInput / 32
Read access

NC variables
safeIntInpValPlcBit (N, S) $A_INSIP[n]

Internal PLC input of SI progr. logic
Internal PLC input of the SI programmable logic
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
Read access
safeIntInpValPlcWord (N, S) $A_INSIPD[n]

Image of PLC inputs of SI progr. logic
Image of the internal PLC inputs of the SI programmable logic
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
$$safeMaxNumIntInput / 32
Read access
safeIntOutpValNckBit (N, S) $A_OUTSI[n]

internal NC output of the SI progr. logic
Internal NC output of the SI programmable logic to the NCK's SI monitoring channel
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$safeMaxNumIntOutput
Read access
safeIntOutpValNckWord (N, S) $A_OUTSID[n]

Image of int. NC outputs of the SI progr. logic
Image of the internal NC outputs of the SI programmable logic to the NCK's SI monitoring channel
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
$$safeMaxNumIntOutput / 32
Read access

NC variables
safeIntOutpValPlcBit (N, S) $A_OUTSIP[n]

Internal PLC output of SI progr. logic
Internal PLC output of the SI programmable logic
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
Read access
safeIntOutpValPlcWord (N, S) $A_OUTSIPD[n]

Image of int. PLC outputs of the SI progr. logic
Image of the internal PLC outputs of the SI programmable logic
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
$$safeMaxNumIntOutput / 32
Read access
safeMarkerNck (N, S) $A_MARKERSI[n]

NCK flag for the SI programmable logic
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$safeMaxNumMarker
Read access
safeMarkerPlc (N, S) $A_MARKERSIP[n]

Image of the PLC flag-variable for SI prog. logic
Image of the PLC flag-variable for SI programmable logic
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$safeMaxNumMarker
Read access

NC variables
safePlcIn (N, S) $A_PLCSIIN[index]

Single channel SI signal from PLC to NCK
Bit image of the single channel safety signals from PLC to NCK
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$safeMaxNumPlcInOut
Read access
safePlcOut (N, S) $A_PLCSIOUT[index]

Single channel SI signal from NCK to PLC
Bit image of the single channel safety signals from NCK to PLC
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
$$safeMaxNumPlcInOut
Read access
safeSplStatus (N, S)
SPL booting status
Status of components and parameter settings required for
operation of Safe Programmable Logic
Return value Bit 0: SPL interfaces $A_INSE, $A_OUTSE, $A_INSI or $A_OUTSI have been parameter‐
ized
Bit 1: SPL program file SAFE.SPF loaded
Bit 2: NCK is waiting for PLC to power up
Bit 3: PLC is in cyclic operating mode. PLC can communicate with drive.
Bit 4: Interrupt for ASUB start of SPL must be assigned (FB4 call started)
Bit 5: Interrupt for ASUB start of SPL has been assigned (FB4 call ended)
Bit 6: Interrupt processing for SPL start called (FC9 call started)
Bit 7: Interrupt processing for SPL start ended (FC9 call ended)
Bit 8: SPL start by call from PROG_EVENT file
Bit 9: NCK data cross-checking has been started
Bit10: PLC data cross-checking has been started
Bit11: Cyclic SPL checksum check active
Bit12: All SPL protective mechanisms active
Bit13: SPL program execution ended
Bit14: SPL start by PowerOn safety event

NC variables
safeSplStatus (N, S)
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
safeTimerNck (N, S) $A_TIMERSI

NCK timer variable for the SI programmable logic
NCK timer-variable for the SI programmable logic
Addressing
8
Read access
safeXcmpCmd (N, S) $A_CMDSI[index]

Command word SPL-KDV
Command word for cross-checking (KDV) between NCK and PLC
Return value 0:No command

1:Extension of time window for different signal levels in cross-checking operation between
NCK and PLC

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
32
Read access
safeXcmpLevel (N, S) $A_LEVELSID

Fill-level display SPL-KDV
Fill-level display for cross-checking operation (KDV)
between NCK and PLC. Specifies the current number
of signals of different levels between the NCK and PLC)


NC variables
safeXcmpLevel (N, S) $A_LEVELSID

- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
safeXcmpState (N, S) $A_STATSID

Error SPL-KDV
Cross-checking (KDV) error has occurred between NCK and PLC.
Return value 0: No error has occurred

- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
scalingSystemCounter (N, S)
Modification counter for dimension system
Measuring system change counter (begins at 1 after a restart)
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
semaDataAvailable (N, S)
SEMA data accessible
Display indicating whether complete SEMA data are available for individual axes.
This is the case if a channel can be assigned to the relevant NCU axis, thus allowing
the data in the channel context to be accessed. This does not apply to link axes as these
are traversed by a channel of another NCU.
This data can be utilized by HMIs in order to conceal specific, inaccessible data
in link axis data displays.
Return value Bits 0-31 stand for the axes of the NCU.
Bit n = 1: Data can be accessed easily
Bit n = 0: Not all SEMA data are accessible
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
swLicensePIN (N, S)
PIN for licensing
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
1
kryptoKeyInfo (N, S)
Number of the crypto-key
Number of the crypto-key
reserved for internal applications
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
sysTimeBCD (N, S)
Time
Time represented in PLC format:
<month>.<day>.<year> <hours>:<minutes>:<seconds>.<milliseconds> <weekday> <status>
<weekday> can take following values: "SUN", "MON", "TUE", "WED", "THU", "FRI", "SAT"
- TYPE_DATETIME
sysTimeUdword (N, S)
Time in special data format
Time $$sysTimeBCD in special data format:
6 bits for second (bits of the lowest priority)
6 bits for minute
5 bits for hour
5 bits for day
4 bits for month
6 bits for the last two digits of the year
This coding is suitable for using the absolute time as trigger for logging.
Also see: $$protocStrtValueInt32 and $$protocTrigValueInt32
- TYPE_UDWORD
Read access
sysTimeNCSC (N, S)
NCSC system time
NCSC system time in microseconds
µs TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
sysTimeNCSCatTraceStart (N, S)
Trace start time
Logging: NCSC time stamp for the trace start time in µs
µs TYPE_DWORD 0 0

NC variables
sysTimeNCSCatTraceStart (N, S)
Addressing
10
Read access
sysTimeNCSCatTraceTrig (N, S)
Trace trigger time
Logging: NCSC time stamp for the trace start trigger time in µs
µs TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
10
Read access
sysTimeNCSCdiffTraceStart (N, S)
Time difference for the trace start
Logging: Time difference for the trace start time in µs
µs TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
10
Read access
sysTimeNCSCdiffTraceTrig (N, S)
Time difference for the start trigger
Logging: time difference for the trace start trigger time in µs
µs TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
10
Read access
sysTimeSinceStartup (N, S)
Time since NCK ramp-up
System run time in seconds since NCK ramp-up

NC variables
sysTimeSinceStartup (N, S)
Addressing
1
Read access
tlkNr (N, S)
Unique number of the TLK
Unique copy number for the temporary license key
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
1
Read access
tlkPIN (N, S)
TLK
Temporary license key
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
1
Read access
tlkStatus (N, S)
Status of the TLK
Status of the temporary license key
Return value 0: active
1: inactive
10: incorrect input
11: max. number of incorrect inputs exceeded
200: internal error (TLK_BUFFER_TOO_SMALL)
- TYPE_UWORD 1
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
totalDirectorys (N, S)
Max. number of directories which may be created
Maximum number of directories which may be created
see:
$MN_MM_NUM_DIR_IN_FILESYSTEM
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
totalFiles (N, S)
Max. number of files which may be created
Maximum number of files which may be created (see: $MM_NUM_FILES_IN_FILESYSTEM)
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
4
Read access
totalMem (N, S) S7
Total user memory in bytes
Total SRAM in bytes (user memory)
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
totalMemDram (N, S)
total DRAM in bytes
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
totalMemDramEPassF (N, S)
Size of the E file system
Size in bytes of the passive file system for executing from external drives
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
totalMemDramMPassF (N, S)
Size of the M file system
Size of the passive file system of the "Machine manufacturer" area in bytes
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
totalMemDramPassF (N, S)
Size of DRAM file system no. 1
Size of passive file system (DRAM No. 1) in bytes
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
totalMemDramSPassF (N, S)
Size of the C file system
Size of the passive file system of the "Control manufacturer" area in bytes
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
totalMemDramTPassF (N, S)
Size of the T file system
Size of the passive file system of the "Temp" area in bytes
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
totalMemDramUPassF (N, S)
Alternative name: totalMemDram2PassF
Size of the User file system
Size of the passive file system of the "User" area in bytes
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
totalMemFfs (N, S)
FFS total size
Number of bytes reserved on the PCMCIA card for the
Flash File System (FFS)
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
totalMemISram (N, S)
Total internal SRAM in bytes
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing

NC variables
totalMemISram (N, S)
1
Read access
totalMemSramPassF (N, S)
Size of SRAM file system
Size of passive file system (SRAM) in bytes
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
totalProtokolFiles (N, S) $MM_PROTOC_NUM_FILES

Logging: Max. no. of files
Logging: Maximum number of log files which may be created
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
10
Read access
traceProtocolActive (N, S) $A_PROTOC

Logging: User status
Return value 0 = Not active
1 = Active
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
10
Read access
traceProtocolLock (N, S) $A_PROT_LOCK

Logging: Disable of a user
Logging: Recording disable of a user
Return value 0: No disable
1: Disable
2: Disable, events from $$protocHmiEvent, however, are enabled

NC variables
traceProtocolLock (N, S) $A_PROT_LOCK

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
10
traceStopAction (N, S)
Logging: End actions
Logging: Actions on ending the recording
Return value Bit0: Automatic restart after the stop trigger has ended the trace
Bit1: Reserved
Bit2: The parameterization of the session is stored in an ACX file
The file name is formed from the log file with the extension "_U00_ACX".
Bit3: The parameterization of the session, including diagnostic data, is stored in an ACX file
The file name is formed from the log file with the extension "_U00_ACX".
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
10
usedDirectorys (N, S)
No.of directories that have already been created
Number of directories that have already been created
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
usedFiles (N, S)
Number of files that have already been created
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables
usedFiles (N, S)
4
Read access
usedMem (N, S) S7
Used memory in bytes
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
usedMemDram (N, S)
Used DRAM in bytes
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
usedMemDramEPassF (N, S)
Assigned memory of the E file system
Memory in bytes occupied by the passive file system for executing from external drives
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
usedMemDramMPassF (N, S)
Occupied memory of the M file system
Occupied memory of the passive file system of the "Machine manufacturer" area in bytes
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
usedMemDramPassF (N, S)
Memory used DRAM file system no. 1
Memory used in passive file system (DRAM No. 1) in bytes
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
usedMemDramSPassF (N, S)
Occupied memory of the S file system
Occupied memory of the passive file system of the "Control manufacturer" area in bytes
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
usedMemDramTPassF (N, S)
Occupied memory of the T file system
Occupied memory of the passive file system of the "Temp" area in bytes
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
usedMemDramUPassF (N, S)
Alternative name: usedMemDram2PassF
Occupied memory of the User file system
Occupied memory of the passive file system of the "User" area in bytes
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing

NC variables
usedMemDramUPassF (N, S)
1
Read access
usedMemFfs (N, S)
FFS used memory
Number of bytes assigned in the Flash File System (FFS)
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
usedMemISram (N, S)
Occupied internal SRAM
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
usedMemSramPassF (N, S)
Memory used in SRAM file system
Memory used in passive file system (SRAM) in bytes
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
usedOptionsNotLicensed (N, S)
Non-licensed options
List of options which are not licensed
- TYPE_STRING

NC variables
usedOptionsNotLicensed (N, S)
Addressing
1
Read access
usedProtokolFiles (N, S)
Logging: No. of files created
Logging: Number of protocol files that have already been created
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
10
Read access
vaDpActTel (N, S) $VA_DP_ACT_TEL[n, Achse]

PROFIBUS actual value message frame
Word for word image of the PROFIBUS actual value message frames from drives on the PROFIBUS/PROFIdrive

- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
100 * $$numMachAxes + 19
Read access
safeMarkerNckWord (N, S) $A_MARKERSID[n]

NCK flag words for the safe programmable logic
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$safeMaxNumMarker / 32
Read access
safeMarkerPlcWord (N, S) $A_MARKERSIPD[n]

Image of PLC flag words safe programmable logic
Image of the PLC flag words for the safe programmable logic

NC variables
safeMarkerPlcWord (N, S) $A_MARKERSIPD[n]

- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$safeMaxNumMarker / 32
Read access
passFChangeCounter (N, S)
Modification counter for file system
Counter is incremented by 1 when there is a change in
the passive file system (but not for changes to the FFS)
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
simo611dSupport (N, S)
611D support
This data specifies the extent to which the system supports
611 drives.
Return value Bit 0 set: NCK software supports 611D drives
Bit 1 set: Hardware supports 611D drives (only if bit 0 is also set).
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
freeMemWarrant (N, S)
Guaranteed memory (SRAM)
Guaranteed free memory for part programs and persistent data (from catalog NC60)
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
freeMemWarrantDram (N, S)
Guaranteed memory (DRAM)
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
protocStrtVarArea (N, S)
Logging: Start trigger variable: Area
Logging: Variable which is to be monitored for start triggering.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
10
checkSumForAcxData (N, S)
Checksum for ACX data
Current fingerprint of selected ACX data, in order to check relatively quickly
whether ACX data has changed.
The data required for the OPI access is located at the start of the downloaded ACX file.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
32
Read access

NC variables
anVModelStatus (N, S) $AN_VMODEL_STATUS

Status of the VRML model
System variable for the status of the VRML model
Return value 1: MODIFIED_STATE: The model has been modified internally
This is the original status. It may change,
if machine parameters such as protection zones change.
2: COPIED_STATE: This status is generated outside the NCK,
if the model file is ready for being displayed.
3: DISPLAYED_STATE: If the NCK sends the instruction for
display of the model in the display program.
- TYPE_DWORD 1 1 3
Addressing
1
licenseKeyInputCount (N, S)
Remaining number of license key inputs
Statement of how often the license key can still be entered
Return value > 0: LicenseKey can still be entered x times
= 0: LicenseKey can no longer be entered. An NCK Power On is required before a new en‐
try can be made.
- TYPE_UWORD 3 0 3
Addressing
1
Read access
stopCondNumNck (N, S)
Number of active stop states in the NCK
Number of active stop states in the NCK
Specifies the number of occupied lines in $$stopCond
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
stopCondChangeCounter (N, S)
Modification counter for stop states in the NCK
Modification counter for stop states in the NCK.
This is incremented as soon as one of the stop states has changed.
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
stopCond (N, S)
Stop state number of the NC in the NCK
Number of the NC stop state in the NCK
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
$$stopCondNumNck
Read access
stopCondTime (N, S)
BCD time stamp for stop state in the NCK
BCD time stamp for stop state in the NCK.

- TYPE_DATETIME
Addressing
$$stopCondNumNck
Read access

NC variables
stopCondChan (N, S)
Stop state channel
Channel in which the NC stop state was reported
- TYPE_UWORD 0 1 $$maxnumChannels
Addressing
$$stopCondNumNck
Read access
stopCondPar (N, S)
Stop state parameters in the NCK
Stop state parameters in the NCK.
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access
stopCondParA (N, S)
ASCII stop state parameter(s)
Stop state parameters in the NCK.
- TYPE_STRING
Read access
anCollMemAvailable (N, S) $AN_COLL_MEM_AVAILABLE

Memory available for collision monitoring in kb
Collision calculation requires internal memory, the size of which is either calculated automatically from the number of avail‐
able protection zones, protection zone elements, facets and the number of machine axes, or it can be explicitly defined by
machine data $MN_MM_MAXNUM_3D_COLLISION.
The size of the reserved memory area in kbytes can be read with system variable $AN_COLL_MEM_AVAILABLE.
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0

NC variables
anCollMemAvailable (N, S) $AN_COLL_MEM_AVAILABLE

Addressing
1
Read access
anCollMemUseMin (N, S) $AN_COLL_MEM_USE_MIN

Min. percent. of memory req. for coll. monitoring
The system variable $AN_COLL_MEM_USE_MIN returns the minimum memory space required for collision calculation as
a percentage of the reserved memory area.
It can be reset by writing with the value 0. Any attempt to write any other value than 0 is rejected with an error message.
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
anCollMemUseMax (N, S) $AN_COLL_MEM_USE_MAX

Max. percent. of memory req. for coll. monitoring
The system variable $AN_COLL_MEM_USE_MAX returns the maximum memory space required for collision calculation
as a percentage of the reserved memory area.

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1

NC variables
anCollMemUseAct (N, S) $AN_COLL_MEM_USE_ACT

Curr. percent. memory req. f. collision monitoring
The system variable $AN_COLL_MEM_USE_ACT returns the current (that is the last calculated) memory space required
for collision calculation as a percentage of the reserved memory area.

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
fsInfoUsed (N, S)
Assignment of file system info object
Assignment of file system info object.
The client first searches for a free info object by reading the list fsInfoUsed.
This is assigned by writing fsInfoUsed with 1.
If there is no error in the assignment, the desired file or directory can be selected by writing the fsInfoPathName.
The information about this object can then be read from the other variables.
Return value 0: Info object free. It must be explicitly released by writing 0.
1: Info object assigned. If an assigned object is assigned again then this is acknowledged
negatively.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 1
Addressing
$$fsInfoCount
fsInfoPathName (N, S)
Name of file or directory
Name of a file or directory to be observed
- TYPE_STRING

NC variables
fsInfoPathName (N, S)
Addressing
$$fsInfoCount
fsInfoObjStatus (N, S)
Status of $$fsInfoPathName
Status of file system object $$fsInfoPathName.
Return value Bit-coded (may be added to later):
Bit0 = 0: Object not loaded in the NCK.
Bit0 = 1: Object loaded in the NCK.
Bit1 = 0: Object is a file.
Bit1 = 1: Object is a directory
- TYPE_UWORD 0 3
Addressing
$$fsInfoCount
Read access
fsInfoFileLength (N, S)
Length of $$fsInfoPathName
Length of the file system object $$fsInfoPathName.
- TYPE_UDWORD
Addressing
$$fsInfoCount
Read access
fsInfoChangeDateTime (N, S)
Change time of $$fsInfoPathName
Change time of the file system object $$fsInfoPathName.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
$$fsInfoCount
Read access

NC variables
fsInfoChangeDateTimeSub (N, S)
Change time of the files contained.
Change time of the files contained in the $$fsInfoPathName directory.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
$$fsInfoCount
Read access
fsInfoPartition (N, S)
Partition of $$fsInfoPathName
Partition and lifetime of the file $$fsInfoPathName
Return value SRP: SRAM persistent
USV: DRAM User volatile
USP: DRAM User persistent
SIP: DRAM Siemens persistent
MAV: DRAM Manufacturer volatile
MAP: DRAM Manufacturer persistent
TMV: DRAM Temporary volatile
D1V: DRAM System 1 volatile
EXV: DRAM External volatile
EXP: DRAM External persistent
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
$$fsInfoCount
Read access
fsInfoRights (N, S)
Access protection of $$fsInfoPathName
Access protection and lifetime of file $$fsInfoPathName
Return value 0-7 ASCII-coded for read / write / execute / show / delete rights
- TYPE_STRING "77777"
Addressing
$$fsInfoCount
Read access

NC variables
fsInfoSeekw (N, S)
First writable line of the file.
First line enabled for modification in part program $$fsInfoPathName
- TYPE_UDWORD
Addressing
$$fsInfoCount
Read access
fsInfoChangeCounter (N, S)
Content change counter $$fsInfoPathName
- TYPE_UDWORD
Addressing
$$fsInfoCount
Read access
fsInfoAllChangeCounter (N, S)
Total change counter $$fsInfoPathName
- TYPE_UDWORD
Addressing
$$fsInfoCount
Read access
fsInfoCount (N, S)
Number of info objects
Number of file system info objects
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
safeFdpActCycle (N, S)
Current value of F_DP communication cycle
Current value of the F_DP communication cycle in seconds
Addressing
1
Read access
safeFdpMaxCycle (N, S)
Maximum value of F_DP communication cycle
Maximum value of F_DP communication cycle in s
Addressing
1
Read access
safeNumActiveFsdp (N, S)
Number F_SENDDP
Number of active F_SENDDP connections
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 16
Addressing
1
Read access
safeFsdpFDataNck (N, S)
F_SENDDP user data
The F user data sent from F_SENDDP to F_RECVDP
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0 0xFFFF
Addressing
16
Read access

NC variables
safeFsdpActComTime (N, S)
Current F_SENDDP communication time
Current F_SENDDP communication time in seconds
The communication time is the time from F_SENDDP sending the message telegram
until the arrival of the correct acknowledge telegram from F_RECVDP.
Addressing
16
Read access
safeFsdpMaxComTime (N, S)
Maximum value of the F_SENDDP communication time
Maximum value of the F_SENDDP communication time in s
After a communication error, the maximum value is reset to 0 by the user acknowledgment.
Addressing
16
Read access
safeFsdpDriverStateNck (N, S)
Current state of F_SENDDP driver
Current state of the F_SENDDP driver
Return value 0 = Not parameterized
1 = Initialization
2 = F_SENDDP ready: waiting for F_RECVDP
3 = F_RECVDP ready: waiting for sequence no. = 1
4 = F_SENDDP and F_RECVDP ready: waiting for user acknowledgment from F_RECVDP
5 = Normal operation
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 5
Addressing
3
Read access

NC variables
safeFsdpErrReacNck (N, S) $A_FSDP_ERR_REAC[n]

F_SENDDP error reaction NCK
The user can define the error reaction irrespective of the machining situation or the coupling of the communication part‐
ners.
Return value 0 = Alarm 27350 + stop D/E
1 = Alarm 27350
2 = Alarm 27351 (display only, self-clearing)
3 = No reaction
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0 3
Addressing
16
Read access
safeFsdpErrorNck (N, S) $A_FSDP_ERROR[n]

NCK communication error
A communication error has been detected. The cause is stated in the diagnostics data
Return value 0 = No communication error
1 = Communication error detected
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
16
Read access
safeFsdpSubsOnNck (N, S) $A_FSDP_SUBS_ON[n]

F_SENDDP output of substitute values on NCK
The communication relationship is not in normal operation.
If F_RECVDP is active, it outputs substitute values. The signal is set during the start-up of the F communication and in the
event of a communication error.
ERROR = 0 AND SUBS_ON = 1 => Power up
ERROR = 1 AND SUBS_ON = 1 => Communication error
Return value 0 = Process values are output by F_RECVDP
1 = Substitute values are output by F_RECVDP
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing

NC variables
safeFsdpSubsOnNck (N, S) $A_FSDP_SUBS_ON[n]

16
Read access
safeFsdpStatusSubsNck (N, S)
F_RECVDP outputs substitute values
Status signal in the acknowledgment telegram from F_RECVDP to F_SENDDP.
F_RECVDP informs F_SENDDP with this signal that there is a communication error, and it is currently outputting substi‐
tute values.
F_RECVDP resets the signal when it receives a user acknowledgment
Return value 0 = F_RECVDP outputs process values
1 = F_RECVDP outputs substitute values
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
16
Read access
safeFsdpDiagNck (N, S) $A_FSDP_DIAG[n]

F_SENDDP communication/system error
Diagnostics data for F_SENDDP communication/system error
Return value 10H = Timeout detected (TO)
20H = Sequence number error detected (SN)
40H = CRC error detected (CRC)
2000H = Deviations in the F telegram data detected (TD)
4000H = Sign-of-life monitoring error detected (LS)
8000H = Asynchronous error state detected (SF)
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0 0xFFFFFFFF
Addressing
16
Read access
safeNumActiveFrdp (N, S)
Number F_RECVDP
Number of active F_RECVDP connections
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 16

NC variables
safeNumActiveFrdp (N, S)
Addressing
1
Read access
safeFrdpFDataNck (N, S)
F_RECVDP user data
F user data received
Addressing
16
Read access
safeFrdpActComTime (N, S)
Current F_RECVDP communication time
Current F_RECVDP communication time in seconds
Addressing
16
Read access
safeFrdpMaxComTime (N, S)
Maximum value of F_RECVDP communication time
Maximum value of F_RECVDP communication time in s
Addressing
16
Read access

NC variables
safeFrdpDriverStateNck (N, S)
Current state of F_RECVDP driver
Current state of the F_RECVDP driver
1 = Initialization
2 = F_RECVDP ready: waiting for F_SENDDP
3 = F_SENDDP ready: waiting for sequence number = 1
4 = F_SENDDP and F_RECVDP ready: waiting for user acknowledgment after error
5 = Normal operation
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 5
Addressing
16
Read access
safeFrdpSubsNck (N, S) $A_FRDP_SUBS[n]

NCK substitute values
The user can define substitute values. These are then output to the application during power up, and communication er‐
rors are output instead of the process values.
Addressing
16
Read access
safeFrdpErrReacNck (N, S) $A_FRDP_ERR_REAC[n]

F_RECVDP error reaction NCK
ners.
1 = Alarm 27350
3 = No reaction
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0 3
Addressing
16
Read access

NC variables
safeFrdpErrorNck (N, S) $A_FRDP_ERROR[n]

F_RECVDP communication error NCK
An F_RECVDP communication error has been detected. The cause is stated in the diagnostics data.
Return value 0 = No communication error
1 = Communication error detected
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
16
Read access
safeFrdpSubsOnNck (N, S) $A_FRDP_SUBS_ON[n]

R_RECVDP output of substitute value NCK
During power up and in the event of a communication error, substitute values are output.
ERROR = 0 AND SUBS_ON = 1 => Power up
ERROR = 1 AND SUBS_ON = 1 => Communication error
Return value 0 = Process values are output
1 = Substitute values are output
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
16
Read access
safeFrdpAckReqNck (N, S) $A_FRDP_ACK_REQ[n]

Requirement for user acknowledgment NCK
After a communication error, the F_DP communication is back in cyclic operation. A user acknowledgment is required to
release normal operation with output of the process values.
Return value 0 = No user acknowledgment required
1 = User acknowledgment required
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
16
Read access

NC variables
safeFrdpDiagNck (N, S) $A_FRDP_DIAG[n]

F_RECVDP communication/system error
Diagnostics data for F_RECVDP communication/system error
Return value 0010H = Timeout detected (TO)
0020H = Sequence number error detected (SN)
0040H = CRC error detected (CRC)
2000H = Deviations in the F telegram data detected (TD)
4000H = Sign-of-life monitoring error detected (LS)
8000H = Asynchronous error state detected (SF)
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0 0xFFFFFFFF
Addressing
16
Read access
safeFrdpSendModeNck (N, S) $A_FRDP_SENDMODE[n]

Safety mode communication partner inactive
Current operating mode of the F-CPU of the F_SENDDP communication partner
Return value 0: FALSE: The F-CPU is in safety mode
1: TRUE: The F-CPU is in deactivated safety mode
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
16
Read access
safeFsdpErrReacPlc (N, S)
F_SENDDP error reaction PLC
ners.
1 = Alarm 27350
3 = No reaction
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0 3
Addressing

NC variables
safeFsdpErrReacPlc (N, S)
16
Read access
safeFrdpSubsPlc (N, S)
PLC substitute values
The user can define substitute values. These are then output to the application during power up, and communication er‐
rors are output instead of the process values.
Addressing
16
Read access
safeFrdpErrReacPlc (N, S)
F_RECVDP error reaction PLC
ners.
1 = Alarm 27350
3 = No reaction
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0 3
Addressing
16
Read access
anPrepActLoad (N, S) $AN_PREP_ACT_LOAD

Current preprocessing run time
Current preprocessing run time throughout all channels
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
anPrepMaxLoad (N, S) $AN_PREP_MAX_LOAD

Longest preprocessing run time
Longest preprocessing run time throughout all channels
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
anPrepMinLoad (N, S) $AN_PREP_MIN_LOAD

Shortest preprocessing run time
Shortest preprocessing run time throughout all channels
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
anPrepActLoadGross (N, S) $AN_PREP_ACT_LOAD_GROSS

Current gross preprocessing run time
Current gross preprocessing run time throughout all channels
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
anPrepMaxLoadGross (N, S) $AN_PREP_MAX_LOAD_GROSS

Longest gross preprocessing run time
Longest gross preprocessing run time throughout all channels
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
anPrepMinLoadGross (N, S) $AN_PREP_MIN_LOAD_GROSS

Shortest gross preprocessing run time
Shortest gross preprocessing run time throughout all channels
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
anAuxfuListGroupindex (N, S) $AN_AUXFU_LIST_GROUPINDEX[n]

Global list of auxiliary functions - group index
Group index of the auxiliary function collected in the channel.
The variable is only valid in combination with block search type 5 (SERUPRO).
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 MD_MAXNUM_AUX‐
FU_GROUPS - 1
Addressing
1280
anAuxfuListChanno (N, S) $AN_AUXFU_LIST_CHANNO[n]

Global list of auxiliary functions - channel no.
Channel number of the auxiliary function collected in the channel.
The variable is only valid in combination with block search type 5 (SERUPRO).
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 MD_MAXNUM_AUX‐
FU_CHANNELS
Addressing
1280
anAuxfuListEndindex (N, S) $AN_AUXFU_LIST_ENDINDEX

Last valid index of the global Auxfu list
The variable determines the last valid index for the global auxiliary function list.
- TYPE_DWORD 0 -1 MD_MAXNUM_AUX‐
FU_LIST_INDEX

NC variables
anAuxfuListEndindex (N, S) $AN_AUXFU_LIST_ENDINDEX

Addressing
1
Read access
anAxctSwE (N, S) $AN_AXCTSWE

Axis container rotation slot released
Has a release for rotation been granted for a slot on an axis container?
Bit mask, each bit corresponds to a slot, e.g. 0x5 corresponds to slots 1 and 3.
Bit == 1: The slot of an axis container has been released for rotation.
Bit == 0: The slot of an axis container has not been released for rotation.
Example: Axis container with 4 slots: 'Hfff5' slot 1 and 3 have been released for rotation.
As soon as a slot has been released for axis container rotation, bit == 1 is also output for unused slots. See example
'Hfff0'.
If the slots of an axis container are distributed across several NCUs, the current state of the slots on other NCUs is only
displayed
if all of the slots on the other NCU have been released for axis container rotation.
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0 0xffffffff
Addressing
$$numContainer
Read access
anLaiAxIsAxctax (N, S) $AN_LAI_AX_IS_AXCTAX

Bit mask: LAI axis is in the axis container
Bit mask that displays whether an axis in the logical NCK machine axis image
(machine data 10002 $MN_AXCONF_LOGIC_MACHAX_TAB) is an axis in an axis container
(machine data 1270x/1271x $MN_AXCT_AXCONF_ASSIGN_TABi).
Addressing
1
Read access
anLaiAxIsLinkax (N, S) $AN_LAI_AX_IS_LINKAX

Bit mask: is the LAI axis a link axis?
(machine data 10002 $MN_AXCONF_LOGIC_MACHAX_TAB) is a link axis
(axis physically connected to another NCU).

NC variables
anLaiAxIsLinkax (N, S) $AN_LAI_AX_IS_LINKAX

Addressing
1
Read access
anLaiAxIsLeadLinkax (N, S) $AN_LAI_AX_IS_LEADLINKAX

Bit mask: is the LAI axis a lead link axis?
(machine data 10002 $MN_AXCONF_LOGIC_MACHAX_TAB) is a lead link axis,
i.e. the same machine axis is referred to on several NCUs via MD10002 $MN_AXCONF_LOGIC_MACHAX_TAB
and the axial MD30554 $MA_AXCONF_ASSIGN_MASTER_NCU specifies
which NCU is the master NCU, which generates the setpoint value for the position controller following power-up.
Addressing
1
Read access
anLaiAxToMachax (N, S) $AN_LAI_AX_TO_MACHAX

Assignment of physical axis to LAI axis.
The NCU and machine axis are output for an LAI axis,
representing the physical image of the axis.
Here the NCU ID is output as from position 10000, e.g. 20005: NCU 2 axis 5. Without an NCU link,
i.e. if there is only one NCU, only the number of the machine axis will be output. In this case, the NCU ID is equal to zero.
If the LAI axis is not used, 0 is returned.
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
>$$maxnumGlobMachAxes
Read access

NC variables
anLaiAxToIpoNcChanax (N, S) $AN_LAI_AX_TO_IPO_NC_CHANAX

Interpolator (NCU or channel, channel axis)
If the LAI axis is currently interpolated to this NCU, the channel and channel axis number which define the interpolator of
the axis are output.
If the LAI axis is currently interpolated to a different NCU, the NCU identifier of the interpolated NCU and the global axis
number of the machine axis are output.
NCU, with NCU ID 2, with $AN_IPO_CHANAX[103].
If no LAI axis is used, 0 is returned.
Return value The channel is output as from position 100, and the channel axis number as from position 1,
e.g. 1005 - channel 10 channel axis 5. These values are always lower than 10000.
Here the NCU is output as from position 10000, e.g. 20103: NCU 2 and the global axis num‐
ber is 103.
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
>$$maxnumGlobMachAxes
Read access
anIpoChanax (N, S) $AN_IPO_CHANAX

Interpolator (channel, channel axis) of glob. axis
For a global axis number returned by valpoNcChanax,
the channel and channel axis number that define the writing interpolator of the axis are output.
Here the channel is output as from position 100, and the channel axis number as from position 1, e.g. 1005 - channel 10
channel axis 5.
If the axis with the specified global axis number is not used on this NCU, 0 will be returned.
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
170
Read access

NC variables
anSLTrace (N, S) $AN_SLTRACE

Trigger variable for the logging function
This variable is reserved for the application SinUTrace and Operate-Trace.
It serves as a trigger variable for the logging function.
The following coding is recommended:
0: Inactive
1: Start logging requested
2: Stop logging requested
The value is generally set by the part program, the reset by the application via OPI.

- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
safePsNumActiveDrivers (N, S)
Number of active PROFIsafe drivers
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 $$safePsMaxnumDrivers
Addressing
1
Read access
safePsNumDisabledDrivers (N, S)
Number of inactive PROFIsafe drivers
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 $$safePsMaxnumDrivers
Addressing
1
Read access
safePsActCycle (N, S)
Current value of the PROFIsafe communication cycle
Current value of the PROFIsafe communication cycle in s

NC variables
safePsActCycle (N, S)
Addressing
1
Read access
safePsMaxCycle (N, S)
Maximum value of the PROFIsafe communication cycle
Maximum value of the PROFIsafe communication cycle in s
Addressing
1
Read access
safePsAddress (N, S)
PROFIsafe address
>0 = PROFIsafe address
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
$$safePsMaxnumDrivers
Read access
safePsHostAddress (N, S)
PROFIsafe host address
PROFIsafe host address F module
>0 = PROFIsafe host address
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
safePsSlaveAddress (N, S)
PROFIBUS slave address
PROFIBUS slave address F module
Return value >0 = Not parameterized
>0 = PROFIBUS slave address
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
Read access
safePsModuleSlotNo (N, S)
Slot number F module
>0 = Slot number
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
Read access
safePsDriverMode (N, S)
PROFIsafe link mode
1 = Inactive
2 = Active
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 2
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
safePsDriverVersion (N, S)
PROFIsafe version
PROFIsafe version F driver
1 = PROFIsafe V1
2 = PROFIsafe V2
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 2
Addressing
Read access
safePsModuleType (N, S)
F module type
1 = F input module
2 = F output module
3 = F input/output module
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 3
Addressing
Read access
safePsNumSubSlotsIn (N, S)
Number of F user data IN subslots
Number of subslots F user data telegram incoming direction
>0 = Number of subslots
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 $$safePsMaxnumSub‐
Slots
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
safePsNumSubSlotsOut (N, S)
Number of F user data OUT subslots
Number of subslots F user data telegram outgoing direction
>0 = Number of subslots
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 $$safePsMaxnumSub‐
Slots
Addressing
Read access
safePsFDataIn (N, S)
User data from F module
F user data received from the PROFIsafe driver
Addressing
$$safePsMaxnumDrivers * $$safePsMaxnum‐
SubSlots
Read access
safePsFDataOut (N, S)
User data to F module
F user data sent by the PROFIsafe driver
Addressing
$$safePsMaxnumDrivers * $$safePsMaxnum‐
SubSlots
Read access

NC variables
safePsDriverState (N, S)
Current state of PROFIsafe driver
1 = Communication setup
2 = Communication setup: waiting for error-free telegrams
3 = Communication: waiting for error-free telegrams with the expected consecutive number
4 = Communication: normal operation
5 = Communication: waiting for acknowledgment after error
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 5
Addressing
Read access
safePsDriverError (N, S)
Communication error F driver
A communication error has been detected. The cause is stated in the diagnostics data.
- TYPE_BOOLEAN 0
Addressing
Read access
safePsDiagHost (N, S)
PROFIsafe-host F communication error
Diagnostic data PROFIsafe-host communication and system error
Return value 0x0004 = Error checksum (CRC)
0x0008 = Error timeout (TO)
0x0010 = Activate substitute values in slave
0x0100 = Host initialization active
0x0200 = Error consecutive number (CN)
0x0400 = Error host state NCK/PLC (SF)
0x0800 = Empty telegram detected (EA)
0x1000 = Timeout host internal (TF)
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 0xffff
Addressing

NC variables
safePsDiagHost (N, S)
Read access
safePsDiagSlave (N, S)
Status data PROFIsafe slave
Status data from PROFIsafe slave
Return value 0x0002 = Error in slave application
0x0004 = Error checksum (CRC)
0x0008 = Error timeout (TO)
0x0010 = Substitute values activated
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 0xffff
Addressing
Read access
safePsParamMaxComTime (N, S)
Maximum configured communication time F module
Maximum configured communication time in s.
The communication time is the time from the sending of a telegram by the
PROFIsafe host until the arrival of the correct response telegram from the PROFIsafe slave/device
Addressing
Read access
safePsActComTime (N, S)
Actual communication time
Current communication time in s.
The communication time is the time from the sending of a telegram by the
PROFIsafe host until the arrival of the correct response telegram from the PROFIsafe slave/device
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
safePsMaxComTime (N, S)
Maximum communication time
Maximum value of the communication time in s.
The maximum value is reset to 0 by a Reset after a communication error
Addressing
Read access
safePsMaxnumDrivers (N, S)
Maximum number of PROFIsafe drivers
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
safePsMaxnumSubSlots (N, S)
Maximum number of subslots F user data
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
safeMaxNumMarker (N, S)
Max. number MARKERSI for the SPL
Maximum number of markers for the SPL
Return value 192 = SPL with a max. of 192 MARKERSI
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
safeMaxNumExtInput (N, S)
Max. number INSE for SPL
Maximum number of external inputs of the Safe Programmable Logic
Return value 192 = SPL with a max. of 192 INSE
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
safeMaxNumExtOutput (N, S)
Max. number OUTSE for SPL
Maximum number of external outputs of the SPL
Return value 192 = SPL with a max. of 192 OUTSE
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
safeMaxNumIntInput (N, S)
Max. number INSI for SPL
Maximum number of internal inputs of the SPL
Return value 192 = SPL with a max. of 192 INSI
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
safeMaxNumIntOutput (N, S)
Max. number OUTSI for the SPL
Maximum number of internal outputs of the SPL
Return value 192 = SPL with a max. of 192 OUTSI
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0

NC variables
safeMaxNumIntOutput (N, S)
Addressing
1
Read access
safeMaxNumPlcInOut (N, S)
Max. number PLCSIIN/OUT
Maximum number of Safety signals from the PLC to the NCK and vice versa
Return value 96 = SPL with a max. of 96 PLCSIIN and 96 PLCSIOUT
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
safeMode (N, S)
Safety mode
Configured safety mode
Return value 0 = Not updated/invalid
1 = SINUMERIK Safety Integrated (Drive Based)
2 = Reserved)
3 = SINUMERIK Safety Integrated plus (F-PLC)
4 = SINUMERIK Safety Integrated (SPL)
5 = No safety
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
handWheelTestIpoDiffPulses (N, S)
Differential handwheel pulses per IPO cycle
Define differential handwheel pulses per IPO cycle for handwheel simulation via OPI
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing

NC variables
handWheelTestIpoDiffPulses (N, S)
$$numHandWheels
handWheelTestAbsPulses (N, S)
Absolute handwheel pulses
Query handwheel pulses via OPI
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
$$numHandWheels
Read access
handWheelTestMode (N, S)
Test mode of the handwheel simulation
Define test mode of handwheel simulation via OPI
Return value 0 = TEST_MODE_CLEAR
Resetting of all variables of the handwheel simulation
1 = TEST_MODE_STOP
Stopping the output of handwheel pulses to the IPO cycle
10 = TEST_MODE_SINGLE
Fully output pulses in $$handWheelTestDiffPulses in the next IPO cycle
(default)
11 = TEST_MODE_CONTINUE
Out put pulses in $$handWheelTestIpoDiffPulses continuously in
every IPO cycle
12 = TEST_MODE_PERIODE
Output pulses in $$handWheelTestDiffPulses continuously in
pulse packages that are defined via
$$handWheelTestIpoDiffPulses

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numHandWheels

NC variables
anActivateCollCheck (N, S) $AN_ACTIVATE_COLL_CHECK

ActivateCollCheck on the interface PLC->NCK
Status of the field ActivateCollcheck on the interface PLC->NCK (DB10.DBX234.0 - DB10.DBX241.7).
Data are made available in groups of 4 bytes, i.e. with index 1 you receive the first 4 bytes (DB10.DBX234.0 -
DB10.DBX237.7), with index 2 the second 4 bytes (DB10.DBX238.0 - DB10.DBX241.7)
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
2
Read access
anCollCheckOff (N, S) $AN_COLL_CHECK_OFF

Byte DeactivateCollCheckGroups PLC->NCK
Status of the byte DeactivateCollCheckGroups on the interface PLC->NCK (DB10.DBB58) for the operating-mode-de‐
pendant suppression of the collision avoidance for groups of protection areas.
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
anFacetsAvailable (N, S) $AN_FACETS_AVAILABLE

Available number of collision facets
Machine parts can be modeled from 3D facets for the collision avoidance function. The maximum number of 3D facets is
limited by the machine data 18895 $MN_MM_MAXNUM_3D_FACETS. The anFacetsAvailable variable indicates how
many facets are still available.
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
anFacetsAct (N, S) $AN_FACETS_ACT

Currently used number of collision facets
limited by the machine data 18895 $MN_MM_MAXNUM_3D_FACETS. The anFacetsAct variable indicates how many fac‐
ets are currently being used.

NC variables
anFacetsAct (N, S) $AN_FACETS_ACT

- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
anFacetsMin (N, S) $AN_FACETS_MIN

Minimum number of collision facets used
limited by the machine data 18895 $MN_MM_MAXNUM_3D_FACETS. The anFacetsMin variable indicates the minimum
number of facets used so far.
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
anFacetsMax (N, S) $AN_FACETS_MAX

Maximum number of collision facets
limited by the machine data 18895 $MN_MM_MAXNUM_3D_FACETS. The anFacetsMax variable indicates the maximum
number of facets used so far.
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
anFacetsInternAvailable (N, S) $AN_FACETS_INTERN_AVAILABLE

Available number of internal collision facets
Variable machine parts such as tools are automatically modeled from 3D facets by means of the collision avoidance func‐
tion. The maximum number of 3D facets is limited by the machine data 18894 $MN_MM_MAXNUM_3D_FACETS_IN‐
TERN. The anFacetsInternAvailable variable indicates how many facets are still available.
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing

NC variables
anFacetsInternAvailable (N, S) $AN_FACETS_INTERN_AVAILABLE

1
Read access
anFacetsInternAct (N, S) $AN_FACETS_INTERN_ACT

Current number of internal collision facets
TERN. The anFacetsInternAct variable indicates how many facets are currently being used.
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
anFacetsInternMin (N, S) $AN_FACETS_INTER_MIN

Minimum number of internal collision facets
TERN. The anFacetsInternMin variable indicates the minimum number of facets used so far.
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
anFacetsInternMax (N, S) $AN_FACETS_INTERN_MAX

Maximum number of internal collision facets
Variable machine parts such as tools are automatically modeled from triangle areas by means of the Collision prevention
function. The maximum number of triangles is limited by the machine data 18894 $MN_MM_MAXNUM_3D_FACETS_IN‐
TERN. The variable anFacetsInternMax indicates how many have been used so far.
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1

NC variables
anProtAreasAct (N, S) $AN_PROT_AREAS_ACT

Number of protection areas used
The collision avoidance function can monitor a maximum number of protection areas. This number is determined by ma‐
chine data 18890 $MN_MM_MAXNUM_3D_PROT_AREAS. The system variable $AN_PROT_AREAS_ACT states how
many of them are currently being used.
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
anProtAreaElemAct (N, S) $AN_PROT_AREA_ELEM_ACT

Number of protection area elements used
The collision avoidance function can monitor a maximum number of protection area elements. This number is determined
by machine data 18892 $MN_MM_MAXNUM_3D_PROT_AREA_ELEM. The system variable $AN_PROT_AREA_EL‐
EM_ACT states how many of them are currently being used.
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
anCollPairsAct (N, S) $AN_COLL_PAIRS_ACT

Number of collision pairs used
The collision avoidance function can monitor a maximum number of protection area pairs. This number is determined by
machine data 18898 $MN_MM_MAXNUM_3D_COLL_PAIRS. The system variable $AN_COLL_PAIRS_ACT states how
many of them are currently being used.
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
anTProtElemAct (N, S) $AN_T_PROT_ELEM_ACT

Number of tool protection area elements used
The collision avoidance function can monitor a maximum number of tool protection area elements. This number is deter‐
mined by machine data 18893 $MN_MM_MAXNUM_3D_T_PROT_ELEM. The system variable $AN_T_PROT_EL‐
EM_ACT states how many of them are currently being used.

NC variables
anTProtElemAct (N, S) $AN_T_PROT_ELEM_ACT

- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
anKinChainElemAct (N, S) $AN_KIN_CHAIN_ELEM_ACT

Number of kinematic elements used
The kinematic chains can only use a maximum number of elements. This number is determined by machine data
18880 $MN_MM_MAXNUM_KIN_CHAIN_ELEM. The system variable $AN_KIN_CHAIN_ELEM_ACT states how many of
them are currently being used.
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
safeExtInputQuality (N, S)
Property of external SPL input
Property of an external NCK-SPL input signal
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 3
Addressing
Read access
safeExtOutputQuality (N, S)
Property of external SPL output
Property of an external NCK-SPL output signal
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 3
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
safeIntInputQuality (N, S)
Property of internal SPL input
Property of an internal NCK-SPL input signal
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 3
Addressing
Read access
safeIntOutputQuality (N, S)
Property of internal SPL output
Property of an internal NCK-SPL output signal
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 3
Addressing
Read access
anRobin (N, S) $AN_ROBIN[index]

NCK-PLC robotic status interface
The system variable $AN_ROBIN[index] reads the relevant byte in the NCK-PLC interface robotic status.
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
8
Read access
anRobout (N, S) $AN_ROBOUT[index]

NCK-PLC robotic control interface
The system variable $AN_ROBOUT[index] reads the relevant byte in the NCK-PLC robotic control interface.
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
8
Read access

NC variables
pnRobin (N, S) $PN_ROBIN[index]

NCK-PLC robotic status interface (preprocessing)
The system variable $PN_ROBIN[index] reads the relevant byte in the NCK-PLC interface robotic status.
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
8
Read access
pnRobout (N, S) $PN_ROBOUT[index]

NCK-PLC robotic control interface (preprocessing)
The system variable $PN_ROBOUT[index] reads the relevant byte in the NCK-PLC robotic control interface.
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
8
Read access
anPoweronState (N, S) $AN_POWERON_STATE

State of NCK power on
The bit-coded variable indicates the state of the NCK power on.
All bits = 0: NCK power on has not started.
Bit0=1: The NCK power on has started, i.e. all NCK objects (channels etc.) have already been created and are being
initialized.
Bit1=1: The main run states can now be read. This means that all stations have been initialized, and that power on
Reset has been executed together with the Reset INIT blocks.
Bit2=1: User interventions (Reset, Stop etc.) are now possible and purposeful. This means that any configured Safety
ProgEvent has been correctly completed or possibly could not be executed because of alarms. Any configured PowerOn
ProgEvent is executed next provided that its execution is not prevented by alarms.
Bit2=1: User interventions (Reset, Stop etc.) are now possible and purposeful. Any configured PowerOn ProgEvent will
be executed provided that its execution is not prevented by alarms.
Bit24=1: The NCK power on has finished together with all the ProgEvents that could be executed automatically (Safety
ProgEvent, PowerOn ProgEvent). The bit does not indicate whether or not an error occurred during the power on (see
Bit25).
Bit24=1: The NCK power on has finished together with all the ProgEvents that could be executed automatically (Power‐
On-ProgEvent). The bit does not indicate whether or not an error occurred during power on (see Bit25).
Bit25=1: The NCK power on finished with errors. This means, for example, that an error occurred while the stations were
being initialized, during the Reset INIT blocks or the execution of the Safety ProgEvent. Other alarms indicate the exact
problem, and the alarm responses indicate which actions can be executed.
Bit25=1: The NCK power on finished with errors. This means, for example, that an error occurred while the stations were
being initialized or with the reset init blocks. Other alarms indicate the exact problem, and the alarm responses indicate
which actions can be executed.

NC variables
anPoweronState (N, S) $AN_POWERON_STATE

- TYPE_UDWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
measFctCmd (N, S)
Start of motion measuring function
Return value 0 = Function not active or abort
1 = Activate start of motion for all system axes
- TYPE_UWORD 0 1
Addressing
1
cncLockRequest (N, S)
Order status for the CNC lock function
Return value 0 = No task triggered by PI.
1 = The current task is being processed.
2 = The current task is faulty and has been rejected.
3 = The last task has been accepted. See $$cncLockState.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 3
Addressing
1
Read access
cncLockState (N, S)
Current status of the CNC lock function
Return value 0 = Die CNC-Sperrfunktion ist nicht aktiv.
1 = The CNC lock function is active without errors.
2 = Errors have been detected in the active CNC lock function.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 2

NC variables
cncLockState (N, S)
Addressing
1
Read access
cncLockTimeBCD (N, S)
Release date for the CNC lock
Date on which the CNC lock function is activated (displayed in the PLC format):
<Month>.<Day>.<Year> <Hours>:<Minutes>:<Seconds>.<Milliseconds> <Weekday> <Status>
<Weekday> can assume the following values: "SUN", "MON", "TUE", "WED", "THU", "FRI", "SAT"
- TYPE_DATETIME
Read access
anCecInputNcu (N, S) $AN_CEC_INPUT_NCU

CEC table: Basic axis on NCU
The variable indicates the number of the NCU, for which the basic axis is calculated.
It returns the value 0 if no NCU has been programmed.
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
62
Read access
anCecInputAxis (N, S) $AN_CEC_INPUT_AXIS

CEC table: Basic axis
The variable describes the number of the axis whose setpoint is used as entry for the
compensation table. The value -1 indicates that no axis
has been programmed.
- TYPE_DWORD -1
Addressing
62
Read access

NC variables
anCecOutputNcu (N, S) $AN_CEC_OUTPUT_NCU

CEC table: Compensation axis on NCU
The variable indicates the number of the NCU which the compensation axis is calculated
to. It returns the value 0 if no NCU has been programmed.
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
62
Read access
anCecOutputAxis (N, S) $AN_CEC_OUTPUT_AXIS

CEC table: Compensation axis
The variable describes the number of the axis onto which the output of the compensation table
has an effect. The value -1 indicates that no axis
has been programmed,
- TYPE_DWORD -1
Addressing
62
Read access
anCecStep (N, S) $AN_CEC_STEP

CEC table: Distance between interpolation points
The variable indicates the distance of the offset values.
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0.0
Addressing
62
Read access
anCecMin (N, S) $AN_CEC_MIN

CEC table: Starting position
The variable indicates the start position of the compensation table.
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0.0

NC variables
anCecMin (N, S) $AN_CEC_MIN

Addressing
62
Read access
anCecMax (N, S) $AN_CEC_MAX

CEC table: End position
The variable indicates the end position of the compensation table.
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0.0
Addressing
62
Read access
anCecDirection (N, S) $AN_CEC_DIRECTION

CEC table: Direction-dependence
The variable activates the direction-dependent activation of the compensation table:
0: Both traversing directions of the basic axis
1: Positive traversing direction of the basic axis
-1: Negative traversing direction of the basic axis
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
62
Read access
anCecMultByTable (N, S) $AN_CEC_MULT_BY_TABLE

CEC table: Multiplication
The variable indicates the number of the table whose output value shall be multiplied
with the output value of the compensation table.
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
62
Read access

NC variables
anCecIsModulo (N, S) $AN_CEC_IS_MODULO

CEC table: Modulo functionality
The variable indicates whether the values of the corresponding compensation table
shall be repeated cyclically:
TRUE: Cyclic repetition of the compensation table
FALSE: No cyclic repetition of the compensation table
- TYPE_BOOLEAN FALSE
Addressing
62
Read access
anCecType (N, S) $AN_CEC_TYPE

CEC table: table type
The variable specifies the compensation table type
0: no special table type
1: cylinder error compensation table type
- TYPE_UWORD FALSE
Addressing
62
Read access
pModelScalingOverload (N, S) $P_MODEL_SCALING_OVL

Machine data description is that of the NCK model
The variable indicates whether the original machine data description is overwritten during the NCK power on
-1: There is no machine data for the programmed MMC number.
0: The original definition is available for the NCK model (e.g. 840D-732)
1,2,..: The original definition for the NCK model was overwritten (typical in NCK simulation products)
- TYPE_DWORD FALSE
Addressing
MD_MAXNUM_MMCIDS
Read access

NC variables
pnChangeCntrNkData (N, S) $PN_CHANGE_CNTR_NK_DATA

Modification counter for kinematic chain data
Modification counter for kinematic chain data (chain elements and NK_SWITCHes).
- TYPE_DWORD 0 INT_MAX
Addressing
1
Read access
pnChangeCntrNkElem (N, S) $PN_CHANGE_CNTR_NK_ELEM

Modification counter for kinematic chain elements
Modification counter for kinematic chain elements (without NK_SWITCH).
Addressing
1
Read access
pnChangeCntrNkSwitch (N, S) $PN_CHANGE_CNTR_NK_SWITCH

Modification counter for $NK_SWITCHes
Modification counter for $NK_SWITCHes.
Addressing
1
Read access
pnChangeCntrNpData (N, S) $PN_CHANGE_CNTR_NP_DATA

Modification counter for 3D protection area data
Modification counter for 3D protection area data ($NP_xxx).
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
pnChangeCntrNtData (N, S) $PN_CHANGE_CNTR_NT_DATA

Modification counter for transf. data ($NT_xxx)
Modification counter for transformation data ($NT_xxx).
Addressing
1
Read access
anCUTrace (N, S) $AN_CUTRACE

Trigger variable for the SINAMICS trace function
Variable for triggering the trace function in SINAMICS.
If telegram 390, 391 or 395 is used. writing the value 1 sets bit 4 in the drive parameter r898 "Control word drive object 1"
in all Control Units activated via MD13120 $MN_CONTROL_UNIT_LOGIC_ADDRESS.
Triggering via telegram must have been previously parameterized in the trace.
Return value Write:
0: No action
1: Trip trigger
Read:
Always 0, because the trigger cannot be read back
- TYPE_DWORD 0 1
Addressing
1

NC variables
3.2.6.14 SALA: Alarm list, oldest alarm
The NCK alarms are sorted in a list in the order they occurred, the oldest alarm appears at the top of the list.
The alarm parameters are transferred as ASCII strings, the first character contains the type information for that
parameter. The following types are used:
S: General string, e.g. part program name
A: Axis name / spindle name
K: Channel name
N: Block number
Y: System error
D: Drive number
If a parameters is not assigned, an "S" is transferred.
All variables in this module are privileged variables! This means that cyclic acknowledgments are sent for these
variables even if the cyclic services are no longer serviced by the NCK because of block cycle problems.
Attention: Privileged variables lose this characteristic if they are combined with non-privileged variables in a re‐
quest. -> Do not combine alarm variables with other variables in a cluster!
In addition it is presumed that the cyclic services are set "on change" for the alarm variables and are not com‐
bined with other variables (not even with privileged variables) in the same request.
The module SALA only contains the alarms that are generated in the NCK. It contains neither PLC nor HMI
alarms. In order to read all alarms, the OEM-HMI user should use the alarm server functions and not read the
SALA module directly.
alarmNo (N, SALA) DA

Ordinal number of an alarm
Ordinal number of an alarm (how many alarms since control ON)
Return value 0 = unknown alarm
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
16

NC variables
clearInfo (N, SALA) DA

Acknowledgment criterion for an alarm
Return value 1 = Power On
2 = Reset
3 = Cancel
4 = Alarm is cancelled by NCK-software
5 = Alarm is cancelled by starting a program
6 = Alarm is cancelled by RESET in all channels of the bags (from SW 4.1)
7 = Alarm is cancelled by RESET in all channels of the NC (from SW 4.1)
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
1
fillText1 (N, SALA) DA

Parameter 1 of the alarm
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
16

- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
16

- TYPE_STRING

NC variables

Addressing
16

- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
16
textIndex (N, SALA)

Alarm number (actual alarm)
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
16
timeBCD (N, SALA)

Time stamp
Time stamp of an alarm
Time stamp, displayed in PLC format DATE_AND_TIME
- TYPE_DATETIME
Addressing
16

NC variables
3.2.6.15 SALAC: Alarm actions, oldest alarm
In a given alarm, all values in the SALAC module are identical to the corresponding variables in the SALA, SAL‐
AP and SALAL modules with the exception of actionType and actionCount.
The same alarm can be found in the various modules by comparing the values of alarmNo.
A client is registered with an alarm server when cyclic reading of the SALAC module has been set.
If the operator panel sets cyclic reading when a data in the module changes and column index 0 has been
specified, then the variable server sends the entire data block to the operator panel if the alarm server receives
a new alarm action.
Another alarm server client is registered at each cyclic reading of the SALAC module which has been set.
This mechanism therefore functions with more than one user interface connected. Registration is withdrawn
when the corresponding cyclic reading is terminated. As cyclic reading only applies to registered clients,
each regular and noncyclic reading returns the default value for the requested variable.
actionType (N, SALAC)

Type of alarm action
Specifies whether the alarm is deleted or activated.
Return value 0: No alarm action pending
1: Alarm set
2: Alarm deleted
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 2
Addressing
1
Read access
actionCount (N, SALAC)

Number of alarm actions
A unique number assigned to Alarm Action.
On power ON it is reset to zero by the NCK.
For each new alarm action it will be incremented by one.
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
alarmNo (N, SALAC)

Alarm number
A unique number assigned to the alarm.
It will be incremented by one for each reported alarm.
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
textIndex (N, SALAC)

Alarm text index
Identifies the alarm for alarm description.
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
timeBCD (N, SALAC)

Time stamp of the alarm
Date and time of the occurred alarm in BCD format.
- TYPE_DATETIME
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
clearInfo (N, SALAC)

Alarm deletion information
Describes the acknowledgment criterion for the alarm.
Return value 1 = Power ON
2 = Reset
3 = Delete
4 = Alarm is deleted by NCK software
5 = Alarm is deleted by program call
6 = Alarm is deleted by RESET in all channels of the mode groups (from SW 4.1)
7 = Alarm is deleted by RESET in all channels of the NC (from SW 4.1)
- TYPE_DWORD 1 1 7
Addressing
1
Read access
fillText1 (N, SALAC)

Alarm filler text 1
Parameter 1, ASCII string which is inserted
in the standard alarm text to supplement the alarm description.
- TYPE_STRING 0
Addressing
1
Read access

Alarm filler text 2
- TYPE_STRING 0
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables

Alarm filler text 3
- TYPE_STRING 0
Addressing
1
Read access

Alarm filler text 4
- TYPE_STRING 0
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
3.2.6.16 SALAL: Alarm list, most recent alarm
The NCK alarms are sorted in a list in the order they occurred, the most recent alarm appears at the bottom of
the list. The alarm parameters are transferred as ASCII strings, the first character contains the type information
for that parameter. The following types are used:
K: Channel name
N: Block number
Y: System error
D: Drive number
If a parameters is not assigned, an "S" is transferred.
All variables in this module are privileged variables! This means that cyclic acknowledgements are sent for
these variables even if the cyclic services are no longer serviced by the NCK because of block cycle problems.
Attention: Privileged variables lose this characteristic if they are combined with non-privileged variables in a re‐
The module SALA only contains the alarms that are generated in the NCK. It contains neither PLC nor HMI
SALA module directly.
alarmNo (N, SALAL) DA

- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
16

NC variables
clearInfo (N, SALAL) DA

2 = Reset
3 = Cancel
- TYPE_DWORD
fillText1 (N, SALAL) DA

- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
16

- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
16

- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
16

NC variables

- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
16
textIndex (N, SALAL)

- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
16
timeBCD (N, SALAL)

Time stamp
- TYPE_DATETIME
Addressing
16

NC variables
3.2.6.17 SALAP: Alarm list, highest priority alarm
The alarms of the NCK are arranged in a list in the order of their priorities. The highest-priority alarm is set to
position 1. The alarm list is sorted according to the following criteria:
1. Sorting criterion: deletion criterion (highest priority at 1st position)

- NC power OFF/ON
- Press reset key
- Press "Delete alarm"
- Press "NC start"
- Press "Recall" key
2. Sorting criterion: alarm occurrence time
The alarm parameters are transferred as ASCII strings, the first character contains the type information for the
parameter. The following types are used:
K: Channel name
N: Block name
Y: System error
D: Drive number
If a parameter is not assigned, an "S" is transferred.
All variables in this module are privileged variables! This means that cyclic acknowledgments are sent for these
variables even if the cyclic services are no longer serviced by the NCK because of block cycle problems.
Notice: Privileged variables lose this characteristic if they are combined with non-privileged variables in a re‐
The module SALAP only contains the alarms that are generated in the NCK. It contains neither PLC nor HMI
SALAP module directly.
alarmNo (N, SALAP) DA

- TYPE_DWORD

NC variables
alarmNo (N, SALAP) DA

Addressing
16
clearInfo (N, SALAP) DA

2 = Reset
3 = Cancel
- TYPE_DWORD
fillText1 (N, SALAP) DA

- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
16

- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
16


NC variables

- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
16

- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
16
textIndex (N, SALAP)

- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
16
timeBCD (N, SALAP)

Time stamp
- TYPE_DATETIME
Addressing
16

NC variables
3.2.6.18 SD: Servo data
The SD module makes servo data available.

These data can be accessed only via the cyc. variable service and the logging function (not individual variable
service).
The row index is coded as follows:

The lower three places contain the NCK axis index
The fourth place contains the data format.
The column index is coded as follows:

The lower three places contain the signal ID
The fourth place contains the servo cycle
Data format coding:

0: 32 bit float
1: 64 bit float
Servo cycle coding:

0: The average value of all servo cycle values of one IPO cycle must be applied
61: The minimum value must be applied
62: The maximum value must be applied
n: The value of the nth servo cycle in the course of one IPO cycle must be applied
Maximum value of: IPO_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO / POSCTRL_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO
( 1 <=n <=60 )
Coding of signal ID:

1: Following error
2: Control deviation
3: Contour deviation
4: Actual position value, measuring system 1
5: Actual position value, measuring system 2
6: Position setpoint
7: Actual velocity value of active encoders (NCK)
8: Drive velocity setpoint (NCK)
9: Compensation value, measuring system 1
10: Compensation value, measuring system 2
11: Controller mode
12: Parameter set
13: Active measuring system
14: Position setpoint at controller input
15: Velocity setpoint at controller input

NC variables
16: Acceleration setpoint at controller input

17: Velocity feedforward value (plus QEC)
18: Torque/force feedforward value
19: Torque/force limit value
20: Actual velocity, measuring system 1
21: Actual velocity, measuring system 2
22: Interpolation ended signal
23: Exact stop fine signal
24: Exact stop coarse signal
25: QEC learning criterion
26: QEC compensation value
27: Master-slave output torque compensatory controller
28: Master-slave tension torque
50: Utilization (m_soll/m_soll,grenz)
51: Active power
52: Torque/force setpoint (limited)
53: Torque generating actual current value i(q)
54: Actual speed/velocity motor
55: Valve lift setpoint
56: Actual valve lift
57: Actual pressure cylinder A end
58: Actual pressure cylinder B end
60: Safe actual position
61: Safe actual drive position
62: Safety-relevant input signal NCK
63: Safety-relevant output signal NCK
64: Safety-relevant input signal drive (from PLC)
65: Safety-relevant output signal drive (to PLC)
66: Reaction identifier for NCK
67: Reaction identifier for NCK/drive
68: Result list 1 NCK
69: Result list 1 drive
70: Result list 2 NCK
71: Result list 2 drive
72: Safety partial actual value
73: Actual velocity limit
74: Setpoint velocity limit
75: SI actual value difference
76: Current SI slip speed
77: Current SBR limit
78: External NCK-SPL inputs 1...32

NC variables
80: External NCK-SPL outputs 1...32

82: Internal NCK-SPL inputs 1...32
84: Internal NCK-SPL outputs 1...32
86: NCK-SPL marker 1...32
88: NCK-SPL timer 1
89: NCK-SPL timer 2
90: NCK-SPL timer 3
91: NCK-SPL timer 4
92: NCK-SPL timer 5
93: NCK-SPL timer 6
94: NCK-SPL timer 7
95: NCK-SPL timer 8
96: External PLC-SPL inputs 1...32
98: External PLC-SPL outputs 1...32
101: Internal PLC-SPL inputs 1...32
103: Internal PLC-SPL outputs 1...32
108: PLC-SPL marker 1...32
110: NCK-SPL timer 9
119: Cam SGA NCK
120: SGA drive
121: Cam SGA drive
122: Actual value difference fine position - coarse position
123: Results list 3 NCK
124: Results list 3 drive

NC variables

135: Smoothed actual velocity value NCK
200: Compile cycle signal 200

NC variables


NC variables

340: Single-channel SI signals PLC to NCK 1...32
343: Single-channel SI signals NCK to PLC 1...32
nckServoDataAbsComp1stEnc32 (N, SD)

Abs. compensation value meas. sys.1 (32 bit)
mm, inch, degree, user de‐ TYPE_FLOAT
fined
Addressing
Read access

fined

NC variables

Addressing
$$maxnumGlobMachAxes+1000
Read access
nckServoDataAbsComp2ndEnc32 (N, SD)

fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataAbsComp2ndEnc64 (N, SD)

fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataActCurr32 (N, SD)

Torque-prod. Current act. Val. i(q) (32 bit)
A TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access

Torque-prod. Current act. Val. i(q) (64 bit)
A TYPE_DOUBLE

NC variables

Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataActEnc32 (N, SD)

Active measuring system (32 bit)
- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataActEnc64 (N, SD)

Active measuring system (64 bit)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataActPos1stEnc32 (N, SD)

Position actual value meas.system 1 (32 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access

fined

NC variables

Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataActPos2ndEnc32 (N, SD)

fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataActPos2ndEnc64 (N, SD)

fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataActPower32 (N, SD)

Active power (32 bit)
W TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access

Active power (64 bit)
W TYPE_DOUBLE

NC variables

Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataActPressA32 (N, SD)

Act. pressure cylinder drive end (32 bit)
- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataActPressA64 (N, SD)

Act. pressure cylinder drive end (64 bit)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataActPressB32 (N, SD)

Act.pressure cylinder non-drive end (32 bit)
- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access

Act.pressure cylinder non-drive end (64 bit)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing

NC variables

Read access
nckServoDataActValveLift32 (N, SD)

Valve lift act. value (32 bit)
V TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataActValveLift64 (N, SD)

Valve lift act. value (64 bit)
V TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataActVel1stEnc32 (N, SD)

Velocity act. value meas. system 1 (32 bit)
mm/min, inch/min, user de‐ TYPE_FLOAT
fined
Addressing
Read access

fined
Addressing

NC variables

Read access
nckServoDataActVel2ndEnc32 (N, SD)

fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataActVel2ndEnc64 (N, SD)

fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataActVelActiveEnc32 (N, SD)

Velocity act. value active encoder (32 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access

Velocity act. value active encoder (64 bit)
fined
Addressing

NC variables

Read access
nckServoDataActVelMot32 (N, SD)

Speed / velocity act. Value motor (32 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataActVelMot64 (N, SD)

Speed / velocity act. Value motor (64 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataCmdAccCtrlIn32 (N, SD)

Acceleration setpt controller input (32 bit)
m/s2, 1000 inch/ s2, rev/ TYPE_FLOAT
s2, user defined
Addressing
Read access

Acceleration setpt controller input (64 bit)
m/s2, 1000 inch/ s2, rev/ TYPE_DOUBLE
s2, user defined
Addressing

NC variables

Read access
nckServoDataCmdPos2ndEnc32 (N, SD)

Position setpoint (32 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataCmdPos2ndEnc64 (N, SD)

Position setpoint (64 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataCmdPosCtrlIn32 (N, SD)

Position setpoint controller input (32 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access

Position setpoint controller input (64 bit)
fined
Addressing

NC variables

Read access
nckServoDataCmdTorque32 (N, SD)

Torque / force setpoint (limited) (32 bit)
Nm TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataCmdTorque64 (N, SD)

Torque / force setpoint (limited) (64 bit)
Nm TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataCmdValveLift32 (N, SD)

Valve lift setpoint (32 bit)
V TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataCmdValveLift64 (N, SD)

Valve lift setpoint (64 bit)
V TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
nckServoDataCmdVelCtrlIn32 (N, SD)

Velocity setpoint controller input (32 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataCmdVelCtrlIn64 (N, SD)

Velocity setpoint controller input (64 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataContDev32 (N, SD)

Contour deviation (32 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataContDev64 (N, SD)

Contour deviation (64 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
nckServoDataCtrlDev32 (N, SD)

Control deviation (32 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataCtrlDev64 (N, SD)

Control deviation (64 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataCtrlMode32 (N, SD)

Controller mode (32 bit)
- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataCtrlMode64 (N, SD)

Controller mode (64 bit)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
nckServoDataDrvCmdVel32 (N, SD)

Velocity setpoint drive (32 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataDrvCmdVel64 (N, SD)

Velocity setpoint drive (64 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataTorqueBalanceCtrl32 (N, SD)

Master/slave balance, torque bal.ctroller (32 bit)
- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataTorqueBalanceCtrl64 (N, SD)

Master/slave balance, torque bal.ctroller (64 bit)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
nckServoDataTensionTorque32 (N, SD)

Master-slave tension torque (32 bit)
- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataTensionTorque64 (N, SD)

Master-slave tension torque (64 bit)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataCmdPosNodComp32 (N, SD)

Position setpoint of pitch compensation (32 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataCmdPosNodComp64 (N, SD)

Position setpoint of pitch compensation (64 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
nckServoDataCmdVelNodComp32 (N, SD)

Velocity setpoint of pitch compensation (32 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataCmdVelNodComp64 (N, SD)

Velocity setpoint of pitch compensation (64 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataCmdAccNodComp32 (N, SD)

Acceleration setpt. of pitch compensation (32 bit)
m/s2, 1000 inch/ s2, rev/ TYPE_FLOAT
s2, user defined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataCmdAccNodComp64 (N, SD)

Acceleration setpt. of pitch compensation (64 bit)
m/s2, 1000 inch/ s2, rev/ TYPE_DOUBLE
s2, user defined
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
nckServoDataDrvLoad32 (N, SD)

Load (m_set/m_set,limit) (32 bit)
% TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataDrvLoad64 (N, SD)

Load (m_set/m_set,limit) (64 bit)
% TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataFfwTorque32 (N, SD)

Torque/Force feedforward value (32 bit)
- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataFfwTorque64 (N, SD)

Torque/Force feedforward value (64 bit)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataFfwVelQEC32 (N, SD)

Velocity feedfwd. value (plus QEC) (32 bit)

NC variables

fined
Addressing
Read access

Velocity feedfwd. value (plus QEC) (64 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataFlwErr32 (N, SD)

Following Error (32 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataFlwErr64 (N, SD)

Following Error (64 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataLimTorque32 (N, SD)

Torque/force limit value (32 bit)

NC variables

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access

Torque/force limit value (64 bit)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataParamSet32 (N, SD)

Parameter set (32 bit)
- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataParamSet64 (N, SD)

Parameter set (64 bit)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataQecCompVal32 (N, SD)

QEC compensation value (32 bit)

NC variables

fined
Addressing
Read access

QEC compensation value (64 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataQecLearnCrit32 (N, SD)

QEC learning criteria (32 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataQecLearnCrit64 (N, SD)

QEC learning criteria (64 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataSafeActPos32 (N, SD)

Safe actual position (32 bit)

NC variables

fined
Addressing
Read access

Safe actual position (64 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataSafeActPosDrv32 (N, SD)

Safe drive actual position (32 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataSafeActPosDrv64 (N, SD)

Safe drive actual position (64 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataSafeActValDiff32 (N, SD)

SI actual value difference (32 bit)

NC variables

fined
Addressing
Read access

SI actual value difference (64 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataSafeActVelDiff32 (N, SD)

Current SI slip speed (32 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataSafeActVelDiff64 (N, SD)

Current SI slip speed (64 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataSafeLimActVel32 (N, SD)

Actual velocity limit (32 bit)

NC variables

fined
Addressing
Read access

Actual velocity limit (64 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataSafeLimCmdVel32 (N, SD)

Set velocity limit (32 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataSafeLimCmdVel64 (N, SD)

Set velocity limit (64 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataSafeLimSBR32 (N, SD)

Current SBR limit value (32 bit)

NC variables

fined
Addressing
Read access

Current SBR limit value (64 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataSafePartActVal32 (N, SD)

Safety part actual value (32 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataSafePartActVal64 (N, SD)

Safety part actual value (64 bit)
fined
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataSafeResLst1Drv32 (N, SD)

Results list 1 drive (32 bit)

NC variables

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataSafeResLst1Nck32 (N, SD)

Results list 1 NCK (32 bit)
- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing

NC variables

Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataSafeRespIdDrv32 (N, SD)

Response identifier for NCK/drive (32 bit)
- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
nckServoDataSafeRespIdDrv64 (N, SD)

Response identifier for NCK/drive (64 bit)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataSafeRespIdNck32 (N, SD)

Response ID for NCK (32 bit)
- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataSafeRespIdNck64 (N, SD)

Response ID for NCK (64 bit)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataSafeSgaDrv32 (N, SD)

SGA drive (to PLC) (32 bit)
- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access

SGA drive (to PLC) (64 bit)

NC variables

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataSafeSgaNck32 (N, SD)

SGA NCK (32 bit)
- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataSafeSgaNck64 (N, SD)

SGA NCK (64 bit)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataSafeSgeDrv32 (N, SD)

SGE drive (from PLC) (32 bit)
- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access

SGE drive (from PLC) (64 bit)
- TYPE_DOUBLE

NC variables

Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataSafeSgeNck32 (N, SD)

SGE NCK (32 bit)
- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataSafeSgeNck64 (N, SD)

SGE NCK (64 bit)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataSigExStopCoarse32 (N, SD)

Signal exact stop coarse (32 bit)
- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access

Signal exact stop coarse (64 bit)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing

NC variables

Read access
nckServoDataSigExStopFine32 (N, SD)

Signal exact stop fine (32 bit)
- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataSigExStopFine64 (N, SD)

Signal exact stop fine (64 bit)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataSigIpoEnd32 (N, SD)

Signal interpolation completed (32 bit)
- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataSigIpoEnd64 (N, SD)

Signal interpolation completed (64 bit)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
servoDatFl32 (N, SD)

Servo data 32-bit
Servo data
column: Signal ID / Servo cycle (see module header)
- TYPE_FLOAT 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access
servoDatFl64 (N, SD)

Servo data 64-bit
Servo data
column: Signal ID / Servo cycle (see module header)
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access
nckServoDataSafeInseNck1_32 (N, SD)

ext. NCK-SPL inputs 1...32 (32 bits)
- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

NC variables

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access
nckServoDataSafeOutseNck1_32 (N, SD)

ext. NCK-SPL outputs 1...32 (32 bits)
- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access


NC variables

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access
nckServoDataSafeInsiNck1_32 (N, SD)

int. NCK-SPL inputs 1...32 (32 bits)
- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT

NC variables

Addressing
1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access
nckServoDataSafeOutsiNck1_32 (N, SD)

int. NCK-SPL outputs 1...32 (32 bits)
- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing

NC variables

1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access
nckServoDataSafeMarkerNck1_32 (N, SD)

NCK SPL marker 1...32 (32 bit)
- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access
nckServoDataSafeTimer1_32 (N, SD)

NCK-SPL timer 1 (32 bits)
- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1
Read access


NC variables

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE

NC variables

Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing

NC variables

1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

NC variables
nckServoDataSafeInsePlc1_32 (N, SD)

ext. PLC-SPL inputs 1...32 (32 bits)
- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access
nckServoDataSafeOutsePlc1_32 (N, SD)

ext. PLC-SPL outputs 1...32 (32 bits)

NC variables

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access
nckServoDataSafeInsiPlc1_32 (N, SD)

int. PLC-SPL inputs 1...32 (32 bits)
- TYPE_FLOAT

NC variables

Addressing
1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access
nckServoDataSafeOutsiPlc1_32 (N, SD)

int. PLC-SPL outputs 1...32 (32 bits)
- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing

NC variables

1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access
nckServoDataSafeMarkerPlc1_32 (N, SD)

PLC SPL marker 1...32 (32 bit)
- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1
Read access


NC variables

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE

NC variables

Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing

NC variables

1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

NC variables

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access
nckServoDataSafeNckCam32 (N, SD)

Cam SGA NCK (32 bits)
- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataSafeNckCam64 (N, SD)

Cam SGA NCK (64 bits)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataSafeDrvSga32 (N, SD)

SGA drive (32 bits)

NC variables

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access

SGA drive (64 bits)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataSafeDrvCam32 (N, SD)

Cam SGA drive (32 bits)
- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataSafeDrvCam64 (N, SD)

Cam SGA drive (64 bits)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataSafeFineRawDiff32 (N, SD)

Act. value difference fine - coarse pos. (32 bits)
- TYPE_FLOAT

NC variables

Addressing
Read access

Act. value difference fine - coarse pos. (64 bit)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing

NC variables

Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access

NC variables

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access


NC variables

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE

NC variables

Addressing
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing

NC variables

Read access
nckServoDataSafeLoadVelFilt32 (N, SD)

Smoothed actual velocity value NCK (32 bits)
- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataSafeLoadVelFilt64 (N, SD)

Smoothed actual velocity value NCK (64 bits)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
nckServoDataOemId200 (N, SD)

Compile cycle signal 200
Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0

NC variables

Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

NC variables

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0

NC variables

Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

NC variables

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0

NC variables

Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

NC variables

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0

NC variables

Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

NC variables

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0

NC variables

Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

NC variables

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0

NC variables

Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

NC variables

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0

NC variables

Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

NC variables

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0

NC variables

Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

NC variables

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

Servo data
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
siehe Bausteinkopf
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

NC variables

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access


NC variables

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT

NC variables

Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing

NC variables

1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

NC variables

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access


NC variables

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE

NC variables

Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing

NC variables

1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

NC variables

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access


NC variables

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT

NC variables

Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing

NC variables

1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

NC variables

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access


NC variables

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE

NC variables

Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing

NC variables

1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

NC variables

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access


NC variables

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT

NC variables

Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access
nckServoDataSafePlcIn1_32 (N, SD)

Single-chan. SI sig. PLC to NCK 1...32 (32 bits)
- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing

NC variables

1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access
nckServoDataSafePlcOut1_32 (N, SD)

Single-chan. SI sig. NCK to PLC 1...32 (32 bits)
- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

NC variables

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access

- TYPE_FLOAT
Addressing
1000+1
Read access


NC variables

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
1000+1
Read access
This module contains all global setting data. The physical units depend on the variable "$$userScale" in module
Y of area N.
CEC_TABLE_ENABLE (N, SE) SD 41300: $SN_CEC_TABLE_ENABLE

SD 41300: $SN_CEC_TABLE_ENABLE
- TYPE_BOOLEAN
Addressing
2
Read access
CEC_TABLE_WEIGHT (N, SE) SD 41310: $SN_CEC_TABLE_WEIGHT

SD 41310: $SN_CEC_TABLE_WEIGHT
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
COMPAR_THRESHOLD_1 (N, SE) SD 41600: $SN_COMPAR_THRESH‐

OLD_1
SD 41600: $SN_COMPAR_THRESHOLD_1
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing

NC variables

OLD_1
2
Read access

OLD_2
SD 41601: $SN_COMPAR_THRESHOLD_2
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
JOG_ROT_AX_SET_VELO (N, SE) SD 41130: $SN_JOG_ROT_AX_SET_VE‐

LO
SD 41130: $SN_JOG_ROT_AX_SET_VELO
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Read access
MDB_JOG_CONT_MODE_LEVELTRIGGRD (N, SD 41050:

SE) $SN_MDB_JOG_CONT_MODE_LEVEL‐
TRIGGRD
Alternative name: JOG_CONT_MODE_LEVELTRIGGRD
Jog mode
- TYPE_CHAR
MDB_JOG_REV_IS_ACTIVE (N, SE) SD 41100: $SN_MDB_JOG_REV_IS_AC‐

TIVE
Alternative name: JOG_REV_IS_ACTIVE
JOG at revolutional feedrate
1 = G95
- TYPE_CHAR

NC variables
MDD_JOG_REV_SET_VELO (N, SE) SD 41120:

$SN_MDD_JOG_REV_SET_VELO
Alternative name: JOG_REV_SET_VELO
JOG velocity for G95
MDD_JOG_SET_VELO (N, SE) SD 41110: $SN_MDD_JOG_SET_VELO

Alternative name: JOG_SET_VELO
JOG velocity for G94
MDD_JOG_SPIND_SET_VELO (N, SE) SD 41200:

$SN_MDD_JOG_SPIND_SET_VELO
Alternative name: JOG_SPIND_SET_VELO
JOG velocity for master spindle
MDD_JOG_VAR_INCR_SIZE (N, SE) SD 41010:

$SN_MDD_JOG_VAR_INCR_SIZE
Alternative name: JOG_VAR_INCR_SIZE
Variable incremental value for JOG mode
- TYPE_DOUBLE
SW_CAM_MINUS_POS_TAB_1 (N, SE) SD 41500: $SN_SW_CAM_MI‐

NUS_POS_TAB_1
SD 41500: $SN_SW_CAM_MINUS_POS_TAB_1
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing

NC variables

NUS_POS_TAB_1
2
Read access

NUS_POS_TAB_2
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access

NUS_POS_TAB_3
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access

NUS_POS_TAB_4
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
SW_CAM_MINUS_TIME_TAB_1 (N, SE) SD 41520: $SN_SW_CAM_MI‐

NUS_TIME_TAB_1
SD 41520: $SN_SW_CAM_MINUS_TIME_TAB_1

NC variables

NUS_TIME_TAB_1
Addressing
2
Read access

NUS_TIME_TAB_2
Addressing
2
Read access

NUS_TIME_TAB_3
Addressing
2
Read access

NUS_TIME_TAB_4
Addressing
2
Read access
SW_CAM_PLUS_POS_TAB_1 (N, SE) SD 41501:

$SN_SW_CAM_PLUS_POS_TAB_1
SD 41501: $SN_SW_CAM_PLUS_POS_TAB_1

NC variables

Addressing
2
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
2
Read access
SW_CAM_PLUS_TIME_TAB_1 (N, SE) SD 41521:

$SN_SW_CAM_PLUS_TIME_TAB_1
SD 41521: $SN_SW_CAM_PLUS_TIME_TAB_1

NC variables

Addressing
2
Read access

Addressing
2
Read access

Addressing
2
Read access

Addressing
2
Read access

NC variables
3.2.6.20 SEMA: Extended state data in MCS
the axis.
PRESETActive (N, SEMA)

Preset state
Return value 0 = no preset active
1 = preset active
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
PRESETVal (N, SEMA)

PRESET
The function PRESETON (...) programs a work offset for an axis. The value of the offset is stored in the variable 'PRE‐
SETVal'. The variable can be overwritten by the part program and by the HMI.
Addressing
aaAcc (N, SEMA)

Acceleration value
m/s2, 1000 inch/ s2, rev/ TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
s2, user defined
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
aaAccPercent (N, SEMA)

Current acceleration value in percent
Current acceleration value for single-axis interpolation in percent
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
Read access
aaActIndexAxPosNo (N, SEMA)

Current indexing position
Current indexing position; the display depends on
$MN_INDEX_AX_NO_MODE and the division (via table or equidistant)
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
Read access
aaAlarmStat (N, SEMA)

Display of active alarms
Display indicating whether alarms are active for a PLC-controlled axis.
The relevant coded alarm reactions can be used as a source for
the "Extended Stop and Retract" function.
Return value The data is bit-coded, allowing, where necessary, individual states to be
masked or evaluated separately (bits not listed supply a value of 0)
Bit2 = 1: NOREADY (active rapid deceleration + cancelation of servo enable)
Bit6 = 1: STOPBYALARM (rampm stop in all channel axes)
Bit9 = 1: SETVDI (VDI interface signal "Setting alarm")
Bit13 = 1: FOLLOWUPBYALARM (Follow-up)
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
aaAxChangeStat (N, SEMA)

Return value 0: Axis can be replaced
1: Axis is linked to the channel, but can become the PLC, command or reciprocating axis
2: Axis cannot be replaced
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 2
Addressing
Read access
aaAxChangeTyp (N, SEMA)

Axis type with respect to axis replacement
Return value 0: Axis assigned to the NC program
1: Axis assigned to the PLC or active as command axis or reciprocating axis
2: Other channel has interpolation right
3: Neutral axis
4: Neutral axis controlled from the PLC
5: Other channel has interpolation right; axis is requested for the NC program
6: Other channel has interpolation right; axis is requested as neutral axis
7: Axis is PLC axis or is active as command axis or reciprocating axis; axis is requested for
the
NC program
8: Axis is PLC axis or is active as command axis or reciprocating axis; axis is requested as
neutral axis
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 8
Addressing
Read access
aaBcsOffset (N, SEMA)

Axial offsets of an axis
Sum of all axial offsets of an axis,
such as DRF, online tool offset, $AA_OFF and ext. WO.
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0

NC variables
aaBcsOffset (N, SEMA)

Addressing
Read access
aaBrakeCondB (N, SEMA)

Conditions for interpolator stop in the BCS
A braking request consists of a collision direction relating to a coordinate axis in the BCS and a braking priority relating to
the machining step.
If the axis / spindle receives a current braking request on account of these requirement(s), bit 0 is set in
$AA_BRAKE_STATE[X] (in the next IPO cycle).
deceleration ramp.


positive direction.
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0 0x70007
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
aaBrakeCondM (N, SEMA)

Conditions for interpolator stop in the MCS
A braking request consists of a collision direction relating to a coordinate axis in the MCS and a braking priority relating to
the machining step.
Return value The highest braking priorities in the positive direction are indicated in bits 0 to 3:
0x0: No pending braking request
Braking always takes place, irrespective of the direction of motion.
0xD: Priority 13 covers all motions. Axial braking with an emergency stop braking ramp.
The highest braking priority in the negative direction is indicated in bits 16 to 19:

shows the braking priority
in the negative direction and the first character from the right shows it in the positive direc‐
tion.
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0 0x70007
Addressing
Read access
aaBrakeState (N, SEMA)

Current braking status
Returns for the axis / spindle whether braking has been initiated on account of the request of aaBrakeCondB or a CP SW
limit stop or a VDI interface signal DB31,..DBX4.3 "Feed stop / Spindle stop".
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0 1
Addressing

NC variables
aaBrakeState (N, SEMA)

Read access
aaChanNo (N, SEMA)

Axis in the channel
The variable supplies the number of the channel in which the axis
is currently being interpolated.
With value 0, the axis could not be assigned to any channel.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
Read access
aaCoupAct (N, SEMA)

Current coupling state of the slave spindle
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
Read access
aaCoupOffs (N, SEMA)

Pos. offset of the synchr. spindle desired value
Position offset of the synchronous spindle desired value
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
aaCurr (N, SEMA)

(Only available for PROFIdrive drives)

NC variables
aaCurr (N, SEMA)

A TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
aaDepAxO (N, SEMA)

Dependence on other axes
Dependency on other axes.
Returns an axis code for the defined axis AX containing all the machine axes that have a mechanical dependency on the
defined axis.
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
Read access
aaDtbb (N, SEMA)

Axis distance from beginning of the block in BCS
Axis-specific distance from the beginning of the block in the BCS for positioning and synchronous axes used in synchro‐
nous actions
(note: SYNACT only)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
aaDtbreb (N, SEMA)

Total decelaration distance, BCS
The estimated total distance until the end of deceleration is reached, BCS
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
aaDtbrebCmd (N, SEMA)

Command share of decel. dist. of axis ax in BCS
Command share of the overall deceleration distance of axis ax in the BCS.
The value is the estimated deceleration distance of the axis up to standstill.
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
Read access
aaDtbrebCorr (N, SEMA)

Offset section of the deceleration distance, BCS
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
Read access
aaDtbrebDep (N, SEMA)

Dependent section of the decelaration dist., BCS
Dependent section of the decelaration distance, BCS
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
Read access
aaDtbrem (N, SEMA)

Total decelaration distance, MCS
The estimated total distance until the end of deceleration is reached, MCS
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
aaDtbremCmd (N, SEMA)

Spec. section of the decelaration distance, MCS
Specified section of the decelaration distance, MCS
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
Read access
aaDtbremCorr (N, SEMA)

Offset section of the deceleration distance, MCS
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
Read access
aaDtbremDep (N, SEMA)

Dependent section of the decelaration dist., MCS
Dependent section of the decelaration distance, MCS
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0 0
Addressing
Read access
aaDteb (N, SEMA)

Axis distance to the end of the block in the BCS
Axis-specific distance to the end of the block in the BCS for positioning and synchronous axes used in synchronous ac‐
tions
(note: SYNACT only)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing

NC variables
aaDteb (N, SEMA)

Read access
aaDtepb (N, SEMA)

Axis dist-to-go of infeed during oscill. in BCS
Axis-specific distance-to-go of infeed during oscillation in the BCS
(note: SYNACT only)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
aaEnc1Active (N, SEMA)

First measuring system is active
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
Read access
aaEnc2Active (N, SEMA)

Second measuring system is active
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
Read access
aaEncActive (N, SEMA)

Measuring system is active

NC variables
aaEncActive (N, SEMA)

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
Read access
aaEsrEnable (N, SEMA)

ESR axis enable
(Axial) enabling of reactions of "Extended Stop and Retract" function.
The selected axial ESR reaction must be parameterized in MD $MA_ESR_REACTION.
beforehand. The corresponding Stop or Retract reactions can be activated via
$AN_ESR_TRIGGER (or for individual drives in the event of communications failure/
DC-link undervoltage), generator-mode operation is automatically activated in response to
undervoltage conditions.
1: TRUE
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
Read access
aaEsrStat (N, SEMA)

ESR axis status
(Axial) status checkback signals of "Extended Stop and Retract" function,
which can be applied as input signals for the gating logic of the ESR (synchronous actions).
evaluated separately if necessary:
Bit0 = 1: Generator mode is activated
Bit1 = 1: Retract operation is activated
Bit2 = 1: Stop operation is activated
Bit3 = 1: Risk of undervoltage (DC-link voltage monitoring,
voltage has dropped below warning threshold)
Bit4 = 1: Speed has dropped below minimum generator mode threshold (i.e. no more
regenerative rotation energy is available).
- TYPE_UWORD 0

NC variables
aaEsrStat (N, SEMA)

Addressing
Read access
aaEsrTrigger (N, SEMA)

Activation of ESR
Activation of "NC-controlled ESR" for PLC-controlled axis
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
Read access
aaFixPointSelected (N, SEMA)

Selected fixed point
Selected fixed point: Number of the fixed point that is to be approached
- TYPE_UDWORD 0
Addressing
Read access
aaIbnCorr (N, SEMA)

BZS setpoint value (N) incl. override components
Current BZS setpoint value of an axis including override components
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Read access
aaIenCorr (N, SEMA)

SZS setpoint value (N) incl. override components
Current SZS setpoint value of an axis including override components

NC variables
aaIenCorr (N, SEMA)

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Read access
aaInSync (N, SEMA)

Synchronization status of the following axis
Synchronization status of the following axis with master value coupling and ELG
Return value 0: Synchronization is not running
1: Synchronization is running, i.e. following axis is being synchronized
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
Read access
aaInposStat (N, SEMA)

Status for the programmed position
Return value 0: No status available (axis/spindle is outside of the programmed position)
1: Travel motion pending
2: Position setpoint reached
3: Position reached with 'exact stop coarse'
4: Position reached with 'exact stop fine'
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 4
Addressing
Read access
aaJerkCount (N, SEMA)

Total traverse processes of an axis with jerk
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
aaJerkTime (N, SEMA)

Total traverse time of an axis with jerk
Addressing
Read access
aaJerkTotal (N, SEMA)

Overall total jerk of an axis
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Read access
aaLeadP (N, SEMA)

Actual lead value position
fined
Addressing
Read access
aaLeadPTurn (N, SEMA)

Current master value
Current master value - position component lost
as a result of modulo reduction
fined
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
aaLeadSp (N, SEMA)

Simulated lead value - position
fined
Addressing
Read access
aaLeadSv (N, SEMA)

Simulated leading value velocity
fined
Addressing
Read access
aaLeadV (N, SEMA)

Actual lead value velocity
Actual lead value - velocity
fined
Addressing
Read access
aaLoad (N, SEMA)

Drive load in %
Drive load in % (only available for PROFIdrive drives)
% TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
aaMaslState (N, SEMA)

Current status of the master-slave coupling
Zero is displayed as default for inactive coupling. A master axis also shows default value zero.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 $$numGlobMachAxes
Addressing
Read access
aaMeaAct (N, SEMA)

Axial measuring active
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
Read access
aaMm1 (N, SEMA)

Access to meas. result 1 in MCS
Access to measurement result of trigger event in the MCS
fined
Addressing
aaMm2 (N, SEMA)


NC variables
aaMm2 (N, SEMA)

fined
Addressing
aaMm3 (N, SEMA)

fined
Addressing
aaMm4 (N, SEMA)

fined
Addressing
aaMm (N, SEMA)

Latched probe position in the MCS
Latched probe position in the machine coordinate system
fined
Addressing

NC variables
aaOff (N, SEMA)

Position offset from synchronous actions
Superimposed position offset from synchronous actions
fined
Addressing
Read access
aaOffLimit (N, SEMA)

Limit for axial correction $AA_OFF reached
Limit for axial correction $AA_OFF reached (Note: for SYNACT only)
Return value 0: Limit value not reached
1: Limit value reached in positive axis direction
11: Limit value reached in negative axis direction
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
Read access
aaOffVal (N, SEMA)

Total value of overlaid motion
Integrated value of overlaid motion for an axis.
The negative value of this variable can be used to cancel an overlaid motion.
e.g. $AA_OFF[axis] = -$AA_OFF_VAL[axis]

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Read access
aaOnFixPoint (N, SEMA)

Current fixed point
Current fixed point, number of the fixed point at which the axis stands

NC variables
aaOnFixPoint (N, SEMA)

- TYPE_UDWORD 0
Addressing
Read access
aaOscillBreakPos1 (N, SEMA)

fined
Addressing
Read access
aaOscillBreakPos2 (N, SEMA)

fined
Addressing
Read access
aaOscillReversePos1 (N, SEMA)

Current reverse position 1 for oscillation in the BCS. For synchronous actions the value of the setting data $SA_OS‐
fined
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
aaOscillReversePos2 (N, SEMA)

Current reverse position 2 for oscillation in the BCS; For synchronous actions the value of the setting data $SA_OS‐
fined
Addressing
Read access
aaOvr (N, SEMA)

Axial override for synchronous actions
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
aaPlcOvr (N, SEMA)

PLC override for motion-synchronous actions
Axial override specified by PLC for motion-synchronous actions
- TYPE_DOUBLE 100 0
Addressing
Read access
aaPolfa (N, SEMA)

Retraction position of the single axis
The programmed retraction position of the single axis
fined
Addressing

NC variables
aaPolfa (N, SEMA)

Read access
aaPolfaValid (N, SEMA)

Retraction of the single axis is programmed
States whether the retraction of the single axis is programmed
Return value 0: No retraction programmed for the single axis
1: Retraction programmed as position
2: Retraction programmed as distance
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 2
Addressing
Read access
aaPower (N, SEMA)

Drive power in W (611D only)
Drive power in W (only available for PROFIdrive drives)
W TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
aaProgIndexAxPosNo (N, SEMA)

Programmed indexing position
Return value 0: No indexing axis, therefore no indexing position available
>0: Number of the programmed indexing position
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
aaRef (N, SEMA)

Axis is referenced
Return value 0: Axis is not referenced
1: Axis is referenced
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
Read access
aaReposDelay (N, SEMA)

REPOS suppression active
Return value 0: REPOS suppression is currently not active for this axis
1: REPOS suppression is currently active for this axis
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
Read access
aaScPar (N, SEMA)

Current setpoint parameter set
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
Read access
aaSnglAxStat (N, SEMA)

Single axis status
Display status of a PLC-controlled axis
Return value 0: Not a single axis
1: Reset
2: Ended
3: Interrupted
4: Active
5: Alarm

NC variables
aaSnglAxStat (N, SEMA)

- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
Read access
aaSoftendn (N, SEMA)

Software end position, negative direction
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
aaSoftendp (N, SEMA)

Software end position, positive direction
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
aaStat (N, SEMA)

Axis status
Axis state
0: no axis state available
1: travel command is active
2: axis has reached the IPO end. only for channel axes
3: axis in position (exact stop coarse) for all axes
4: axis in position (exact stop fine) for all axes
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
aaSync (N, SEMA)

Status slave axis with lead value coupling
Coupling status of the following axis with master value coupling
Return value 0: No synchronism
1: Synchronism coarse
2: Synchronism fine
3: Synchronism coarse and fine
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
Read access
aaSyncDiff (N, SEMA)

fined
Addressing
Read access
aaSyncDiffStat (N, SEMA)

Status of the synchronism difference
Status of the setpoint synchronism difference
Return value -4: No valid value in $$aaSyncDiff, coupled motion from part program
-3: Reserved
-2: Reserved
-1: No valid value in $$aaSyncDiff
0: No valid value in $$aaSyncDiff, coupling not active
1: Valid value in $$aaSyncDiff
- TYPE_DWORD 0 -4 1
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
aaTorque (N, SEMA)

Desired torque value in Nm
Drive torque setpoint in Nm (only available for PROFIdrive drives)
Nm TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
aaTotalOvr (N, SEMA)

Total axial override f. motion-synchronous actions
The total axial override for motion-synchronous actions
- TYPE_DOUBLE 100 0
Addressing
Read access
aaTravelCount (N, SEMA)

Total traverse processes of an axis
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Read access
aaTravelCountHS (N, SEMA)

Total traverse processes of an axis at high speed
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
aaTravelDist (N, SEMA)

Total travel path of an axis
Total travel path of an axis in mm or degrees
fined
Addressing
Read access
aaTravelDistHS (N, SEMA)

Total travel path of an axis at high speed
Total travel path of an axis at high speed in mm or degrees

fined
Addressing
Read access
aaTravelTime (N, SEMA)

Total traverse time of an axis
Total traverse time of an axis in seconds
Addressing
Read access
aaTravelTimeHS (N, SEMA)

Total traverse time of an axis at high speed
Total traverse time of an axis at high speed in seconds
Addressing

NC variables
aaTravelTimeHS (N, SEMA)

Read access
aaTyp (N, SEMA)

Axis type according to $AA_TYP
Axis type
Return value 0: axis in other channel
1: channel axis of same channel
2: neutral axis
3: PLC axis
4: reciprocating axis
5: neutral axis, currently traversing in JOG
6: slave axis coupled via master value
7: coupled motion slave axis
8: command axis
9: compile cycle axis
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
Read access
aaType (N, SEMA)

Return value 0: Axis type cannot be determined
1: NC program axis
2: Neutral axis
3: PLC axis
4: Reciprocating axis
5: Neutral axis that is currently executing a JOG or homing motion
6: Following axis coupled to the master value
7: Coupled motion of the following axis, activated in a synchronized action
8: Command axis
9: Compile Cycle axis
10: Coupled slave axis (master-slave function.)
11: Program axis that is currently executing a JOG or homing motion
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 11

NC variables
aaType (N, SEMA)

Addressing
Read access
aaVactB (N, SEMA)

Axis veloc. in basic coordinates
Axis velocity in basic coordinate system
fined
Addressing
Read access
aaVactM (N, SEMA)

Axis veloc. in machine coordinates
Axis velocity in machine coordinate system
fined
Addressing
Read access
aaVc (N, SEMA)

Add. correction value for path feed or axial feed
Additive correction value for path feed or axial feed
fined
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
acRpValid (N, SEMA)

Return value 0: Reapproach position not valid
1: Reapproach position valid
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
Read access
ackSafeMeasPos (N, SEMA)

Confirmation of SI actual position
Return value 0 = not confirmed
0x00AC = confirmed
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
actCouppPosOffset (N, SEMA) S3

Offset to leading axis/spindle, actual value
Position offset of an axis to a leading axis / leading spindle (actual value)
fined
Addressing
actFeedRate (N, SEMA) S5

fined

NC variables
actFeedRate (N, SEMA) S5

Addressing
actIndexAxPosNo (N, SEMA)

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
Read access
actSpeedRel (N, SEMA)

Actual value of rotary speed
Actual value of rotary speed (referring to the maximum speed in %), for linear drives actual value of the velocity.
% TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
actValResol (N, SEMA)

Actual value of the resolution
Actual value resolution. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module)
fined
Addressing

NC variables
amSetupState (N, SEMA)

State var. PI Service auto. set-up of asyn. motor
State variable of the PI Service Automatic set-up of an asynchronous motor
1 = wait for PLC enable
2 = wait for key NC-start
3 = active
4 = stopped by Servo + fine code in the upper byte
5 = stopped by 611D + fine code in the upper byte
6 = stopped by NCK + fine code in the upper byte
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 0xff06
Addressing
Read access
axComp (N, SEMA)

Sum of compensation values
Sum of axis-specific compensation values (CEC Cross Error compensation and temperature compensation). The physical
unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
fined
Addressing
axisActiveInChan (N, SEMA)

Axis active
1 = active
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables
axisFeedRateUnit (N, SEMA)

1 = inch/min
2 = degree/min
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
chanAxisNoGap (N, SEMA)

Axis exists
Display of existing axis, i.e. no axis gap in channel.
Return value 0: Axis does not exist
1: Axis does exist
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
Read access
chanNoAxisIsActive (N, SEMA)

Channel number of axis
Channel number in which the channel axis is currently active
Return value 0 = axis is not assigned to any channel
1 to $$maxnumChannels (Area.:N / Module:Y) = channel number
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
cmdContrPos (N, SEMA)

Desired value of position after fine interpolation

NC variables
cmdContrPos (N, SEMA)

fined
Addressing
cmdCouppPosOffset (N, SEMA) S3

Position offset referring to leading axis/spindle
Position offset of an axis referring to the leading axis / leading spindle (desired value)
fined
Addressing
cmdFeedRate (N, SEMA)

fined
Addressing
cmdSpeedRel (N, SEMA)

Desired value of rotary speed.
Speed setpoint (as % of the maximum speed), velocity setpoint in the case of linear motors.
% TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing

NC variables
contrConfirmActive (N, SEMA)

Controller enable
Return value 0 = no controller enable
1 = controller enable
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
contrMode (N, SEMA)

Controller mode servo
Identifier for controller mode servo
Return value 0 = position control
1 = speed control
2 = stop
3 = park
4 = follow-up
(set the mode through VDI interface and partly through part program)
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
displayAxis (N, SEMA)

Machine axis identifier
Identifier indicating whether axis is displayed by HMI as a machine axis.
Addressing

NC variables
displayAxis (N, SEMA)

Read access
distPerDriveRevol (N, SEMA)

Distance per revolution of the drive
Rotary drive: Load-side path corresponding to one revolution of the drive.
Is returned in the unit of the internal computational resolution INT_INCR_PER_MM (for linear axes) or
INT_INCR_PER_DEG (for rotary axes / spindles) taking into account gear ratios etc.
In the case of linear axes, the pitch of the ball screw is also included in the calculation.
In the case of linear motors, a fixed value of "1mm" is used for the ball screw pitch instead of the non-existent ball screw.
fined
Addressing
drfVal (N, SEMA)

DRF value
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Read access
drive2ndTorqueLimit (N, SEMA)

2nd torque limit
2nd torque limit. With linear motors: 2nd force limit
1 = active
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables
driveActMotorSwitch (N, SEMA)

Actual motor wiring
Actual motor wiring (star/delta)
1 = delta
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
driveActParamSet (N, SEMA)

Number of the actual drive parameter set
- TYPE_UWORD 1 8
Addressing
driveClass1Alarm (N, SEMA)

Message ZK1 drive alarm
Return value 0 = no alarm set
1= alarm set (fatal error occured)
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
driveContrMode (N, SEMA)

Control mode of drive
Return value 0 = current control
1 = speed control
- TYPE_UWORD

NC variables
driveContrMode (N, SEMA)

Addressing
driveCoolerTempWarn (N, SEMA)

Heatsink temperature monitoring
1 = overtemperature
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
driveDesMotorSwitch (N, SEMA)

Motor wiring selection (star/delta)
1 = delta
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
driveDesParamSet (N, SEMA)

Desired parameter set of the drive
- TYPE_UWORD 1 8
Addressing
driveFastStop (N, SEMA)

Ramp-function generator rapid stop
Return value 0 = not stopped
1 = stopped

NC variables
driveFastStop (N, SEMA)

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
driveFreqMode (N, SEMA)

I/F mode
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
driveImpulseEnabled (N, SEMA)

Enable inverter impulse
Enable inverter impulse (checkback signal to impulseEnable)
1 = enabled
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
driveIndex (N, SEMA)

Drive assignment (driveIndex)
Return value 0 = drive does not exist
1 to 15 = logical drive number
- TYPE_UWORD 0 15
Addressing

NC variables
driveIntegDisable (N, SEMA)

Integrator disable
Return value 0 = not disabled
1 = disabled
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
driveLinkVoltageOk (N, SEMA)

State of the DC link voltage
Return value 0 = OK
1 = not OK
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
driveMotorTempWarn (N, SEMA)

Motor temperature warning
1 = overtemperature
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
driveNumCrcErrors (N, SEMA)

(Transmission errors when writing data to the drive; values may range up to FFFFH)
Return value 0 = no error

NC variables
driveNumCrcErrors (N, SEMA)

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
driveParked (N, SEMA)

Parking axis
Return value 0 = no parking axis
1 = parking axis
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
drivePowerOn (N, SEMA)

Drive switched on
Return value 0 = drive not switched on
1 = drive switched on
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
driveProgMessages (N, SEMA)

Configurable messages
Configurable messages (via machine data)
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables
driveReady (N, SEMA)

Drive ready
Return value 0 = drive not ready
1 = drive ready
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
driveRunLevel (N, SEMA)

(range: coarse state (0 to 5) * 100 + fine state (up to 22)
Return value Booting the firmware ---> 0 XX
entering the configuration ---> 1XX
hardware-init, communication-init
loading, converting data ---> 2XX
changing bus addressing ---> 3XX
preparing synchronization ---> 4XX
activating interrupt ---> 519
XX ==> fine state

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
driveSetupMode (N, SEMA)

Set-up mode
1 = active
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables
driveSetupMode (N, SEMA)

driveSpeedSmoothing (N, SEMA)

Smoothing the desired value of the rotary speed
Smoothing the desired value of the rotary speed, for linear drives: smoothing the desired value of the velocity
Return value 0 = no smoothing
1 = smoothing
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
effComp1 (N, SEMA)

Sum of the compensation values for encoder 1. The value results from: Temperature compensation, backlash compensa‐
fined
Addressing
effComp2 (N, SEMA)

Sum of the compensation values for encoder 2. The value results from: Temperature compensation, backlash compensa‐
fined
Addressing

NC variables
encChoice (N, SEMA)

Active encoder
Return value 0 = does not exist
1 = encoder 1
2 = encoder 2
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
fctGenState (N, SEMA)

State of the function generator
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
feedRateOvr (N, SEMA)

Feedrate override
Feedrate override (only if axis is a positioning axis)
% TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
focStat (N, SEMA)

Status of ForceControl function
Current status of "Travel with limited torque" function
Return value 0-2
0: FOC not active
1: FOC modal active (programming of FOCON[])
2: FOC non-modal active (programming of FOC[])

NC variables
focStat (N, SEMA)

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 2
Addressing
Read access
fxsInfo (N, SEMA)

Additional info on travel to fixed stop
Additional information on travel to fixed stop if
$VA_FXS[]=2, or OPI variable $$/N/SEMA/fxsStat=2.
Return value 0 No additional information available
1 No approach motion programmed
2 Programmed end position reached, movement ended
3 Abort by NC RESET (Reset key)
4 Fixed stop window exited
5 Torque reduction was rejected by drive
6 PLC has canceled enable signals
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 6
Addressing
Read access
fxsStat (N, SEMA)

State after travelling to fixed stop
Return value 0 = normal control
1 = fixed stop reached
2 = selection failed
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
handwheelAss (N, SEMA)


NC variables
handwheelAss (N, SEMA)

- TYPE_UWORD 0 3
Addressing
impulseEnable (N, SEMA)

Impulse enable for drive
1 = enabled
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
index (N, SEMA)

Absolute axis index
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
isDriveUsed (N, SEMA)

Machine axis has control over the drive
One or more machine axes are assigned to each drive.
The drive can only be controlled at any one time by one of these machine axes.
The machine manufacturer makes the selection.
The status of the drive control changes dynamically.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing

NC variables
isDriveUsed (N, SEMA)

Read access
kVFactor (N, SEMA)

position control gain factor
16.667 1/s TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
lag (N, SEMA)

Following error
Following error = desired value of position after fine interpolation - actual value of position. The physical unit is defined in
measUnit (in this module).
fined
Addressing
logDriveNo (N, SEMA)

Drive assignment (logDriveNo)
Return value 0 = not available
1 to 15 = drive number
- TYPE_UWORD 0 15
Addressing
measFctState (N, SEMA)

State of the probing function

NC variables
measFctState (N, SEMA)

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
measPos1 (N, SEMA)

fined
Addressing
measPos2 (N, SEMA)

fined
Addressing
measPosDev (N, SEMA)

Actual position difference between 2 encoders
Actual position difference between the two encoders. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
fined
Addressing

NC variables
measUnit (N, SEMA)

Unit for service values of the drives
Return value 0 = mm
1 = inch
2 = grd
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
paramSetNo (N, SEMA)

Number of parameter set
- TYPE_UWORD 1 8
Addressing
preContrFactTorque (N, SEMA)

Feed forward control factor torque
Nm TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
preContrFactVel (N, SEMA)

Feed forward control factor velocity
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing

NC variables
preContrMode (N, SEMA)

Feed forward control mode
1 = velocity feed forward
2 = torque feed forward
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
progIndexAxPosNo (N, SEMA)

Indexing number
Programmed indexing position number
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
Read access
qecLrnIsOn (N, SEMA)

Quadrant error compensation learning active
1 = Neuronal-QEC learning active
2 = Standard-QEC active
3 = Standard-QEC with adaptation of correction value active
4 = Neuronal-QEC active
5 = Neuronal-QEC with adaptation of measuring time active
6 = Neuronal-QEC with adaptation of decay time of correction value active
7 = Neuronal-QEC with adaptation of measuring time and decay time of correction value ac‐
tive
- TYPE_UWORD 0 7
Addressing

NC variables
qecLrnIsOn (N, SEMA)

refPtBusy (N, SEMA)

Axis is being referenced
Return value 0 = axis is not being referenced
1 = axis is being referenced
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
refPtCamNo (N, SEMA)

Reference point cam
Return value 0 = no cam approached
1 = cam 1
2 = cam 2
3 = cam 3
4 = cam 4
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
refPtPhase (N, SEMA)

Referencing phases
Return value 0 = False
1 = Phase 1
2 = Phase 2
3 = Phase 3
4 = Phase 4
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables
refPtPhase (N, SEMA)

refPtStatus (N, SEMA)

Axis must be referenced and is referenced
Identifier indicating whether an axis requires referencing and is referenced.
Note regarding exchange axes:

An exchange axis need only ever be referenced in the channel to which it is currently assigned. A referenced exchange
axis is thus logged onto the channel in which it is traversing with value "3" (requires referencing and referenced) and in
other channels with value "1" (does not require referencing, but referenced).
Return value Set bits have the following meanings:
Bit0: current measuring system has been referenced

Bit1: current measuring system requires referencing
(A busy signal affects the state)
- TYPE_UWORD Achsindex
Addressing
resolvStatus1 (N, SEMA)

1 = Referenced
2 = Activated
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

1 = Referenced
2 = Activated

NC variables

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
safeAcceptCheckPhase (N, SEMA)

Flag for NCK-side acceptance test phase
Flag for NCK-side acceptance test phase, the human-machine interface can determine which acceptance test phase is
present on the NCK.
Return value 0: NCK has acceptance test phase inactive = 0

0ACH: NCK has acceptance test phase active
Addressing
Read access
safeAcceptTestMode (N, SEMA)

SI PowerOn alarms can be acknowledged by Reset
SI PowerOn alarms can be acknowledged by Reset in acceptance test mode
Return value 0: Acceptance test mode: SI PowerOn alarms cannot be acknowledged by Reset
0ACH: Acceptance test mode: SI PowerOn alarms can be acknowledged by Reset
Addressing
safeAcceptTestPhase (N, SEMA)

Flag for acceptance test phase
Return value 0: Acceptance test Wizard not selected, activate NCK-side alarm suppression
0ACH: Dialogs for acceptance test support selected, deactivate NCK-side alarm suppression

NC variables
safeAcceptTestPhase (N, SEMA)

Addressing
safeAcceptTestSE (N, SEMA)

Flag for NCK-side SE acceptance test
Flag for NCK-side SE acceptance test. The human-machine interface starts checking the safe limit positions during the
acceptance test
Return value 0: NCK has SE acceptance test inactive = 0. The single channel SW limit positions are
activated.
0ACH: NCK is to activate SE acceptance test. The single channel SW limit positions are de‐
activated in this way.
Addressing
Read access
safeAcceptTestState (N, SEMA)

Flag for acceptance test status
Flag for acceptance test status, the human-machine interface can determine which acceptance test mode is present on
the NCK.
Return value 0: NCK has inactive acceptance test mode

0CH: Acceptance test mode not activated because SI PowerOn alarms already present.
The causes of the SI PowerOn alarms must be eliminated first.
0DH: Acceptance test mode not activated, the HMI writes invalid values in $$/N/SEMA/safe‐
AcceptTestMode to the NCK.
0ACH: NCK has active acceptance test mode
Addressing
Read access
safeActPosDiff (N, SEMA)

Curr. safety actual value difference NCK - drive
Current actual value difference betw. NCK and drive monitoring channels

NC variables
safeActPosDiff (N, SEMA)

fined
Addressing
Read access
safeActVeloDiff (N, SEMA)

Curr. safety speed difference NCK - drive
Current speed difference between NCK and drive monitoring channels
fined
Addressing
Read access
safeActVeloLimit (N, SEMA)

Safe limit of actual speed
Return value -1 => no actual speed limit active
>= 0 => limit of actual speed is active
fined
Addressing
Read access
safeDesVeloLimit (N, SEMA)

Safe limit of desired speed
Return value -1 => no desired speed limit active
>= 0 => desired speed limit is active
fined
Addressing

NC variables
safeDesVeloLimit (N, SEMA)

Read access
safeFctEnable (N, SEMA)

Safe operation active
Safe operation active (Safety Integrated / SPL)
>0 = active
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
safeInputSig2 (N, SEMA)

Safe input signals part 2
Addressing
Read access
safeInputSig (N, SEMA)

Safe input signals of the axis
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
safeInputSigDrive2 (N, SEMA)

Safe input signals of the drive part 2
Addressing

NC variables
safeInputSigDrive2 (N, SEMA)

Read access
safeInputSigDrive (N, SEMA)

Safe input signals of the drive
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
safeMaxVeloDiff (N, SEMA)

Max. safety speed difference NCK - drive
Maximum speed difference between NCK and drive monitoring channels since last NCK Reset
fined
Addressing
Read access
safeMeasPos (N, SEMA)

Safe actual position of axis
Safe actual position of the axis. The physical unit is defined in the variable measUnit (in this module).
fined
Addressing
safeMeasPosDrive (N, SEMA)

Safe actual position of the drive
Safe actual position of drive. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
fined

NC variables
safeMeasPosDrive (N, SEMA)

Addressing
safeOutputSig2 (N, SEMA)

Safe output signals part 2
Addressing
Read access
safeOutputSig (N, SEMA)

Safe output signals of the axis
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
safeOutputSigCam (N, SEMA)

NCK SI cam signals
Results of the NCK safe cam evaluation
Addressing
Read access
safeOutputSigCamDrive (N, SEMA)

Drive SI cam signals
Results of the drive safe cam evaluation

NC variables
safeOutputSigCamDrive (N, SEMA)

Addressing
Read access
safeOutputSigDrive2 (N, SEMA)

Safe output signals of the drive part 2
Addressing
Read access
safeOutputSigDrive (N, SEMA)

Safe output signals of the drive
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
safeActiveCamTrack (N, SEMA)

Status Safe cam track
Status Safe cam track (active/inactive)
Return value Bit 0 = 1/0: Safe cam track 1 active/inactive
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 0xF
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
safePosCtrlActive (N, SEMA)

Axis monitors absolute position
Return value 0 = Axis does not monitor absolute position (no SE/SN)
1 = Axis monitors absolute position
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
Read access
safeStopOtherAxis (N, SEMA)

Stop on another axis
Return value 0: No stop on another axis
1: Stop on another axis
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
Read access
spec (N, SEMA)

Axis specification
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
stateContrActive (N, SEMA)

State controller
State controller (not available)
Return value 1 = TRUE
0 = FALSE

NC variables
stateContrActive (N, SEMA)

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
subSpec (N, SEMA) T1

Subspecification
1 = indexing axis
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
torqLimit (N, SEMA)

Torque limitation value
Torque limitation value (referring to the nominal value of the drive). For linear motors: force limitation value.
% TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
traceState1 (N, SEMA)

2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables

2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables

trackErrContr (N, SEMA)

Position controller difference
Position controller difference (actual value / desired value of position)
fined
Addressing
trackErrDiff (N, SEMA)

Contour deviation
Contour deviation (difference actual value of position and calculated dynamical model)
fined
Addressing
type (N, SEMA)

Axis type
Axis type
In the case of a link axis, the initial setting of the machine data is returned
according to $$axisType. The difference between spindle and rotary axis
cannot be determined because there is no possibility of accessing
the other NCUs. Thus, in this case, there is no value 2 for spindle.
1 = rotary axis
2 = spindle
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables
type (N, SEMA)

vaAbsoluteEnc1ErrCnt (N, SEMA)

1st meas. system: Error counter for abs. encoder
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
Read access
vaAbsoluteEnc1State (N, SEMA)

1st meas. system: Status of abs. encoder interface
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
Read access
vaAbsoluteEnc2ErrCnt (N, SEMA)

2nd meas. system: Error counter for abs. encoder
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
vaAbsoluteEnc2State (N, SEMA)

2nd meas. system: Status of abs. encoder interface
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
Read access
vaCcCompValTotal (N, SEMA)

Axial OA total compensation value
Axial OA total compensation value of the compile cycles
fined
Addressing
Read access
vaCecCompVal (N, SEMA)

Axial sag compensation value
fined
Addressing
Read access
vaEnc1CompVal (N, SEMA)


NC variables

fined
Addressing
Read access
vaEnc1ZeroMonErrCnt (N, SEMA)

1st meas. system: Error counter for zero mark mon.
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
Read access

fined
Addressing
Read access
vaEnc2ZeroMonErrCnt (N, SEMA)

2nd meas. system: Error counter for zero mark mon.
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0
Addressing
Read access
vaCurr (N, SEMA)

Drive actual current value

NC variables
vaCurr (N, SEMA)

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Read access
vaDistTorque (N, SEMA)

Disturbing torque/max. torque (motor end)
Disturbing torque/max. torque (motor end, York)
% TYPE_DOUBLE 0 -100 100
Addressing
Read access
vaDpe (N, SEMA)

Status of power enable
Status of power enable of a machine axis
Return value 0-1
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
Read access
vaFoc (N, SEMA)

Actual status of "ForceControl"
Return value 0: ForceControl not active
1: Modal ForceControl active
2: Non-modal ForceControl active
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 2
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
vaFxs (N, SEMA)

Actual status of "Travel to fixed stop"
Return value 0: Axis not at fixed stop
1: Successful travel to fixed stop
2: Unsuccessful travel to fixed stop
3: Travel to fixed stop selection active
4: Fixed stop has been detected
5: Travel to fixed stop deselection active
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 5
Addressing
Read access
vaIm1 (N, SEMA)

fined
Addressing
Read access
vaIm2 (N, SEMA)

fined
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
vaIm (N, SEMA)

Alternative name: aaIm
Encoder master value
Encoder actual value in the machine coordinate system (measured
active measuring system)
fined
Addressing
Read access
vaLagError (N, SEMA)

Axis following error
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Read access
vaLoad (N, SEMA)

Drive utilization in %
Addressing
Read access
vaPosctrlMode (N, SEMA)

Position controller mode
Position controller mode"
Return value 0: Position control
1: Speed control
2: Holding
3: Parking
4: Tracking

NC variables
vaPosctrlMode (N, SEMA)

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 4
Addressing
Read access
vaPower (N, SEMA)

Active drive power
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Read access
vaPressureA (N, SEMA)

Pressure on A end of the cylinder
Pressure on A end of the cylinder in bar (only for Hydraulic)
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Read access
vaPressureB (N, SEMA)

Pressure on B end of the cylinder
Pressure on B end of the cylinder in bar (only for Hydraulic)
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Read access
vaSce (N, SEMA)

Status of speed controller enable

NC variables
vaSce (N, SEMA)

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
Read access
vaStopSi (N, SEMA)

Stop from Safety Integrated
Return value -1: No stop
0: Stop A
1: Stop B
2: Stop C
3: Stop D
4: Stop E
5: Stop F
10: Test stop of NC
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
Read access
vaSyncDiff (N, SEMA)

fined
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
vaSyncDiffStat (N, SEMA)

mm, inch, degree, user de‐ TYPE_DWORD 0 -4 1
fined
Addressing
Read access
vaTempCompVal (N, SEMA)

Axial temperature compensation value
fined
Addressing
Read access
vaTorque (N, SEMA)

Drive torque setpoint
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Read access
vaTorqueAtLimit (N, SEMA)

Status information torque limitation
Status "effective torque equals specified torque limit"
Return value 0: Effective torque lower than torque limit

1: Effective torque has reached torque limit

NC variables
vaTorqueAtLimit (N, SEMA)

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
Read access
vaVactm (N, SEMA)

Axis velocity actual value load side in the MCS
Axis velocity actual value on the load side in the MCS
fined
Addressing
Read access
vaValveLift (N, SEMA)

Actual valve lift
Actual valve lift in mm (only for Hydraulic)
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Read access
vaXfaultSi (N, SEMA)

Stop F through cross-checking error active
Return value Bit 0 set: An actual value error has been discovered in the cross-check between NCK and
drive
Bit 1 set: Some error has been discovered in the cross-check between NCK and drive
and the waiting time until Stop B ($MA_SAFE_STOP_SWITCH_TIME_F) is running or has
expired
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing

NC variables
vaXfaultSi (N, SEMA)

Read access
activeSvOverride (N, SEMA)

SG override factor
Currently active SG override factor in the NCK
Addressing
Read access
aaJogPosSelected (N, SEMA)

JOG to position is active
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
Read access
aaJogPosAct (N, SEMA)

Position reached for JOG to position
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing
Read access
vaEnc1ZeroMonAccessCnt (N, SEMA)

- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing

NC variables

Read access

- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
Read access
vaAbsoluteEnc1DeltaInit (N, SEMA)

- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
Read access
vaAbsoluteEnc2DeltaInit (N, SEMA)

- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
Read access
vaEnc1ZeroMonAct (N, SEMA)

- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0

NC variables

Addressing
Read access

- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
Read access
vaAbsoluteEnc1ZeroMonMax (N, SEMA)

- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
Read access
vaAbsoluteEnc2ZeroMonMax (N, SEMA)

- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
aaCoupCorr (N, SEMA)

Gen. coupling: comp. value of synchronism diff.
This variable is used to execute the function "Correct synchronism error".
It returns the compensation value for the position offset for the generic coupling with CPFRS = "MCS".
The actual values of this spindle are compared with the setpoints for the duration (MD 30455 MISC_FUNCTION_MASK,
bit 7) of the activation of the VDI interface signal
DB31...,DBX31.6 'Correct synchronism' for the following spindle with coupling active.
The difference is the compensation value, which can be read with this variable.

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Read access
aaCoupCorrDist (N, SEMA)

Generic coupling: path for $$aaCoupCorr
Generic coupling: path still to be retracted for $$aaCoupCorr
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Read access
vaEnc1ZeroMonInit (N, SEMA)

- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
Read access


NC variables

- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
Read access
safeDesChecksum1 (N, SEMA)

Setpoint hardware checksum
Setpoint checksum of the current values of the safety-relevant machine data dependent on hardware parameterization
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
aaMaslDef (N, SEMA)

Current status of master-slave configuration
Zero is displayed as default
if the coupling is not configured. A master axis also shows default value zero.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 $$numGlobMachAxes
Addressing
Read access
clampStatus (N, SEMA)

Axis is connected (VDI input signal)
Return value Bit 0 = 1: Axis is connected
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 1
Addressing

NC variables
clampStatus (N, SEMA)

Read access
aaMachax (N, SEMA)

Assignment of physical axis
The NCU and machine axis are output for an axis, representing the physical image of the axis.
The machine axis must be assigned to at least one channel on this NCU, otherwise 0 will be returned.
Without an NCU link, i.e. if there is only one NCU, only the number of the machine axis will be output. In this case, the
NCU ID is equal to zero.
Return value The NCU ID is output as from position 10000, e.g. 20005: NCU 2 axis 5.
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
Read access
aaIpoNcChanax (N, SEMA)

NC, channel and channel axis no. of interpolator.
If the axis is currently interpolated to this NCU, the channel and channel number which define the interpolator of the axis
are output.
If the axis is currently interpolated to a different NCU, the NCU identifier of the interpolated NCU and the global axis num‐
ber of the machine axis are output.
10000.
203.
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
vaIpoNcChanax (N, SEMA)

Machine axis to interpolator.
If the machine axis is currently interpolated to this NCU, the channel and channel axis number which define the interpola‐
tor of the axis are output.
If the machine axis is currently interpolated to a different NCU, the NCU identifier of the interpolated NCU and the global
axis number of the machine axis are output.
If no machine axis is used, 0 will be returned.
Return value The channel is output as from position 100, and the channel axis number as from position 1,
e.g. 1005 - channel 10 channel axis 5. These values are always lower than 10000.
103.
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
Read access
vaMotSensorDigi (N, SEMA)

Digital sensors on the motor
This variable determines the states of the digital sensors S4 and S5.
Bit0 = 0:
Bit1 = 0:
Bit2 = 0:
Bit3 = 0:
Bit4 = 1: Sensor S4 piston end position
Bit5 = 1: Sensor S5 angular position of the shaft
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
vaMotSensorAna (N, SEMA)

Analog sensor on the motor
This variable determines the analog measured value of sensor S1.
At a resolution of 1 mV, the analog value 0 - 10 V is mapped by a maximum of +10000 increments.

- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
Read access
vaMotSensorConf (N, SEMA)

Configuration of motor sensors
The configuration of the motor sensors can be queried with this variable.
Bit0 = 1: Sensor system present.
Bit1 = 1: Sensor S1 present. Analog measured value for position of the draw-bar.
Bit2 = 0:
Bit3 = 0:
Bit4 = 1: Sensor S4 present. Digital value for the piston end position
Bit5 = 1: Sensor S5 present. Digital value for the angular position of the shaft.

- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
vaMotClampingState (N, SEMA)

State of the clamping system
Starting from the position of the draw-bar (value of the S1), this variable determines the clamping state.
A maximum speed is assigned to each state. These are stored in the drive parameters p5043[0..6].
0: Sensor not present
1: Initial state, speed limit 0 rpm
3: Tool released / ejected, speed limit see drive parameter p5043[0]
4: Clamping (by spring force), speed limit see drive parameter p5043[1]
9: Further clamping (by spring force), speed limit see drive parameter p5043[5]
10: Clamped without tool, speed limit see drive parameter p5043[6]
- TYPE_UDWORD 0 0
Addressing
Read access
vaCpSync2 (N, SEMA)

Status synchronism(2) of the foll. axis / spindle
Second synchronism monitoring of the following axis / spindle
Return value 0: Monitoring not active
Bit 0 = 1: Monitoring 'Synchronism(2) coarse' active
Bit 1 = 1: Synchronism(2) coarse available
Bit 2 = 1: Monitoring 'Synchronism(2) fine' active
Bit 3 = 1: Synchronism(2) fine available
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
aaPosRes (N, SEMA)

Axis status "Position restored"
Axis status "Position restored".
The value TRUE shows that the position of the axis has been restored after the voltage breakdown.
($MA_ENC_REFP_STATE[] = 3). After referencing of the axis, the value goes to FALSE.
Return value 1 = TRUE: Axis position not restored
0 = FALSE: Axis position restored
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
Read access
aaCollPos (N, SEMA)

Collision position
Position of a machine axis with risk of collision
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
Read access
driveDdsPerMds (N, SEMA)

Number of drive data sets
Number of drive data sets assigned to a motor data set.
Refer to the SINAMICS S120 Function Manual for more information about drive and motor data sets.
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
spindleModePiState (N, SEMA)

Status of the spindle mode switchover
Status of the spindle mode switchover for this machine axis by PI service _N_SPIMOD
Return value 0 = PI service not selected
10 = PI service active
50 = PI service ended successfully
101 = PI service rejected because axis/spindle is not known in the channel
102 = PI service rejected because axis/spindle is not available in the channel
104 = PI service rejected because axis/spindle is not defined as a spindle.
105 = PI service rejected because axis/spindle is a permanently assigned PLC axis/spindle
106 = PI service rejected because axis/spindle is an active following axis/spindle
107 = PI service rejected because axis/spindle is a transformed spindle/axis
108 = PI service rejected because axis/spindle is not available as a command axis
200 = PI service rejected because of an internal error
Addressing
Read access
aaLoadSmooth (N, SEMA)

Smoothed drive load
Smoothed drive load in %
% TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access
aaPowerSmooth (N, SEMA)

Smoothed drive power
Smoothed drive power in W (only available for PROFIdrive drives)
W TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
safeAxisType (N, SEMA)

Safety axis mode
Type of axial safety monitoring
0 = No SINUMERIK Safety Integrated active
1 = SINUMERIK Safety Integrated (SPL) active
2 = SINUMERIK Safety Integrated plus (F-PLC) active
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
Read access
enc1IsOn (N, SEMA)

- TYPE_UWORD 0 2
Addressing
Read access
enc2IsOn (N, SEMA)

- TYPE_UWORD 0 2
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
vaAxForce (N, SEMA)

Feedrate force
N TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Read access
3.2.6.21 SMA: State data in the MCS
the axis.
actIncrVal (N, SMA) DB31-61, DBB5 H1

1 = INC_1000
2 = INC_100
3 = INC_10
4 = INC_1
5 = INC_VAR
6 = INC_JOG_CONT
7 = no incremental mode set
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
actToolBasePos (N, SMA)

Act tool base position

NC variables
actToolBasePos (N, SMA)

fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
cmdToolBasePos (N, SMA)

fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
extUnit (N, SMA)

Current physical unit of the axis position
Return value 0 = mm
1 = inch
2 = degree
4 = userdef
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
name (N, SMA)

Axis name
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing

NC variables
name (N, SMA)

$$numMachAxes
status (N, SMA)

Axis status
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
toolBaseDistToGo (N, SMA)

Tool base distance-to-go. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
toolBaseREPOS (N, SMA)

Tool base REPOS
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes

NC variables
varIncrVal (N, SMA)

Settable value for INC_VAR. The physical value depends on whether the axis is linear or rotary.
Linear axis: unit is 1 mm
Rotary axis: unit is 1/1000 degrees
fined
Addressing
$$numMachAxes
3.2.6.22 SSP: State data spindle
All status data that refer to the spindle are combined in the module SSP. The individual variables are defined as
arrays where the row index is the number of the spindle (assigned to the current channel). The spindle can be
identified by reading the variables "name" or "index" in the same module with the respective row index.
The number of spindles can be read from "$$numSpindles" in the module Y in the area C.
Values of 0 or ' ' are supplied for axes which are not spindles. The value SSP:index = 0 indicates that the axis
is not a spindle.
acConstCutS (N, SSP)

Addressing
Read access

NC variables
acSMode (N, SSP)

Spindle mode
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- TYPE_UWORD 1 0 4
Addressing
Read access
actGearStage (N, SSP)

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
actSpeed (N, SSP)

Addressing
channelNo (N, SSP)


NC variables
channelNo (N, SSP)

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
Read access
cmdAngPos (N, SSP)

Spindle position
Addressing
cmdConstCutSpeed (N, SSP)

G96 is active.
fined
Addressing
Read access
cmdGearStage (N, SSP)

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables
cmdGwps (N, SSP)

Addressing
cmdSpeed (N, SSP)

Addressing
driveLoad (N, SSP)

Load
% TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
gwpsActive (N, SSP)

1 = active
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables
gwpsActive (N, SSP)

index (N, SSP)

Absolute axis index
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
name (N, SSP)

Spindle name
Spindle name
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
namePhys (N, SSP)

Name of physical spindle.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
opMode (N, SSP)

Spindle mode
4 = axis mode
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
psModePos (N, SSP)

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Read access
psModePosBKS (N, SSP)

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Read access
psModePosS (N, SSP)


NC variables
psModePosS (N, SSP)

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Read access
speedLimit (N, SSP)

Addressing
speedOvr (N, SSP)

Spindle override
% TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
spindleType (N, SSP)

Spindle type
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables
status (N, SSP)

Spindle state
Spindle status
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
turnState (N, SSP)

0 = clockwise
2 = stop
3 = clockwise
5 = stop
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables
pSMode (N, SSP)

Prog. spindle mode
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
Read access
pSModeS (N, SSP)

Prog. spindle mode for block search
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
acSmaxVelo (N, SSP)

override > 100%.
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
acSmaxVeloInfo (N, SSP)

ing data
with COUPON,..)
18 Not used
19 Not used
chuck speed

- TYPE_DWORD

NC variables
acSmaxVeloInfo (N, SSP)

Addressing
Read access
acSminVelo (N, SSP)

or override < 100%.
Addressing
Read access
acSminVeloInfo (N, SSP)

0 Not used
1 Not used
3 Not used
4 Not used

NC variables
acSminVeloInfo (N, SSP)

- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
Read access
acSmaxAcc (N, SSP)

Addressing
Read access

NC variables
acSmaxAccInfo (N, SSP)


1 Not used
3 Not used
5 Not used
6 Not used
7 Not used
8 Not used
10 Not used
11 Not used
spindle.
the coupling
18 Not used
21 Not used
23 Not used

- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing

NC variables
acSmaxAccInfo (N, SSP)

Read access
acSpindState (N, SSP)

setpoint side.
Bit 18: Reserved
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
acSVC (N, SSP)

fined
Read access
acSType (N, SSP)

fined
Read access
vcSGear (N, SSP) $VC_SGEAR[spino]

....
....
- TYPE_WORD 0 0 5
Read access

NC variables
acSGear (N, SSP) $AC_SGEAR[spino]

....
....
- TYPE_WORD 0 0 5
Read access
3.2.6.23 SSP2: Spindle status data for spindle conversion
All state data that refer to a spindle, if a spindle converter (logical spindles) is active
acConstCutS (N, SSP2)

Addressing
Read access
acSMode (N, SSP2)

Spindle mode
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode

NC variables
acSMode (N, SSP2)

- TYPE_UWORD 1 0 4
Addressing
Read access
actGearStage (N, SSP2)

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
actSpeed (N, SSP2)

Addressing
channelNo (N, SSP2)

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
Read access
cmdAngPos (N, SSP2)

Spindle position

NC variables
cmdAngPos (N, SSP2)

Addressing
cmdConstCutSpeed (N, SSP2)

G96 is active.
fined
Addressing
Read access
cmdGearStage (N, SSP2)

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
cmdGwps (N, SSP2)

Addressing

NC variables
cmdSpeed (N, SSP2)

Addressing
driveLoad (N, SSP2)

Load
% TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
gwpsActive (N, SSP2)

1 = active
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
index (N, SSP2)

Absolute axis index
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables
index (N, SSP2)

name (N, SSP2)

Spindle name
Spindle name
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
namePhys (N, SSP2)

Physical spindle name
Name of assigned physical spindle.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
Read access
opMode (N, SSP2)

Spindle mode
4 = axis mode
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables
psModePos (N, SSP2)

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Read access
psModePosBKS (N, SSP2)

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Read access
psModePosS (N, SSP2)

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Read access
speedLimit (N, SSP2)

Addressing

NC variables
speedLimit (N, SSP2)

speedOvr (N, SSP2)

Spindle override
% TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
spindleType (N, SSP2)

Spindle type
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
status (N, SSP2)

Spindle state
Spindle status
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables
turnState (N, SSP2)

0 = clockwise
2 = stop
3 = clockwise
5 = stop
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
pSMode (N, SSP2)

Prog. spindle mode
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
pSModeS (N, SSP2)

Prog. spindle mode for block search
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
Read access
acSmaxVelo (N, SSP2)

override > 100%.
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
acSmaxVeloInfo (N, SSP2)

ing data
with COUPON,..)
18 Not used
19 Not used
chuck speed

- TYPE_DWORD

NC variables
acSmaxVeloInfo (N, SSP2)

Addressing
Read access
acSminVelo (N, SSP2)

or override < 100%.
Addressing
Read access
acSminVeloInfo (N, SSP2)

0 Not used
1 Not used
3 Not used
4 Not used

NC variables
acSminVeloInfo (N, SSP2)

- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
Read access
acSmaxAcc (N, SSP2)

Addressing
Read access

NC variables
acSmaxAccInfo (N, SSP2)


1 Not used
3 Not used
5 Not used
6 Not used
7 Not used
8 Not used
10 Not used
11 Not used
spindle.
the coupling
18 Not used
21 Not used
23 Not used

- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing

NC variables
acSmaxAccInfo (N, SSP2)

Read access
acSpindState (N, SSP2)

setpoint side.
Bit 18: Reserved
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
acSVC (N, SSP2)

fined
Read access
acSType (N, SSP2)

fined
Read access
vcSGear (N, SSP2) $VC_SGEAR[spino]

....
....
- TYPE_WORD 0 0 5
Read access

NC variables
acSGear (N, SSP2) $AC_SGEAR[spino]

....
....
- TYPE_WORD 0 0 5
Read access
3.2.6.24 VSYN: NCK-specific user variable for synchronous actions
This block contains NCK-specific user variables for synchronous actions.
anMarker (N, VSYN)

Dummy
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
3.2.6.25 Y: System data
The machine tool builder or user configures the control with the help of the machine data. Configuration can
only be performed with certain access rights. The configuration of the NC can be read in the system data re‐
gardless of current access rights.

NC variables
accessLevel (N, Y)
Level of access rights
Level of the access rights currently set. Can be changed by entering the password or turning the keyswitch.
Return value 0 = access level SIEMENS
1 = access level machine tool builder
2 = access level system start-up engineer (machine tool builder)
3 = access level end user with password
4 = access level key switch 3
- TYPE_UWORD
axisType (N, Y)
Axis types for all machine axes
Axis types for all machine axes (necessary for start-up): If a machine axis is addressed via the M module, the units and
values are returned with reference to the axis type accessible via this variable. (The absolute machine axis index 1-
N_Y_maxnumGlobMachAxes is specified via the line index)
Return value 0 = Linear axis
1 = Rotary axis
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
basicLengthUnit (N, Y)
Global basic unit
Return value 0 = mm
1 = inch
4 = userdef
- TYPE_UWORD

NC variables
chanAssignment (N, Y) MD 10010: AS‐ K1

SIGN_CHAN_TO_MODE_GROUP[x]
x=ChannelNo
Assignment of each channel to mode group
Return value 0 = channel does not exist
n = channel assigned to mode group n (n is maximum numBAGs (BAG = mode group))
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$maxnumChannels
externCncSystem (N, Y)
CNC system language
CNC system whose part programs must be processed on the
SINUMERIK control.
Return value 0: No external language defined
1: System ISO Dialect0 Milling (obsolete)
2: System ISO Dialect0 Turning (obsolete)
3: External language via OEM application (from P6.2)
4: System ISO Dialect0 Milling (from P7.)
5: System ISO Dialect0 Turning (from P7.)
etc.
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
extraCuttEdgeParams (N, Y)
Existing TO edge parameters
Bit string that specifies which TO edge parameters are available
in addition to the 25 standard parameters.
Return value Bit 0: Cutting edge parameter no. 26 valid (ISO Dialect Milling H No.)
Bit 1: Cutting edge parameter no. 27 valid (Orientation of the cutting edge)
Bit 2: Cutting edge parameter no. 28 valid (L1 of the orientation of the cutting edge)
Bit 5: Cutting edge parameter no. 31 valid (L1 of the orientation of the cutting edge normal)
Bit 8: Cutting edge parameter no. 34 valid (number of cutting edge teeth, always set)
Bit 9: Cutting edge parameter no. 35 valid (basic angle of rotation of the cutting edge, al‐
ways set)
etc.
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
kindOfSumcorr (N, Y) $MN_MM_KIND_OF_SUMCORR

Characteristics of total offsets in NCK
Characteristics of total offsets in NCK:
Bit No. Value Meaning
0 0 Total offsets are saved at the same time as the tool data.
1 Total offsets are not saved at the same time as the tool data.
1 0 Setup offsets are saved at the same time as the tool data.
1 Setup offsets are not saved at the same time as the tool data.
2 0 If the "Tool management" function is in use: The existing total/setup offsets are not affected when tool status
"active" is set.
1 When tool status "active" is set, the existing total offsets are set to zero. The setup offsets are not affected.
3 0 If the "Tool management" function plus "Adapter" is in use: Transformation of total offsets
1 No transformation of total offsets
4 0 No setup offset data sets
1 Setup offset data sets are created additionally, in which case the total offset equals the product of total offset + "fine
total offset".
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access

NC variables
maskToolManagement (N, Y) $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK

Settings for NCK tool management
Settings for NCK tool management function
Activation of tool management memory with "0" means: The set tool management data do not occupy any memory space.
Bit 0=1: Memory for TM-specific data is made available
Bit 1=1: Memory for monitoring data is made available
Bit 2=1: Memory for user data (CC data) is made available
Bit 3=1: Memory for "Consider adjacent location" is made available
Bit 5=0: Parameters and function for tool wear monitoring are not available.
Bit 5=1: Parameters and function for tool wear monitoring are available and, if bit 1 = 1, the wear monitoring function is
also available.
Bit 6=0: The wear group function is not available; i.e. parameters $TC_MAMP3, $TC_MAP9 cannot be programmed,
$TC_MPP5 is not defined for magazine locations of type 1.
Bit 6=1: The wear group function is available; i.e. parameters $TC_MAMP3, $TC_MAP9 can be programmed and wear
groups defined. $TC_MPP5 contains the wear group number for location type 1.
Bit 7=1: Tool adapter data sets are available.
Bit 8=1: Total offsets are available.
Bit 9=1: Tools in a turret are handled in OPI variable modules such that they are not "displayed" in tool half-locations,
but always displayed in a turret location. Please note, therefore, that tools in a turret remain (in display terms) in their
turret location in the event of a tool change.
Bit 9=0: Default response; Tools in a turret are "displayed" in the OPI in their actual (according to data) location.
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Read access
maxCuttingEdgeNo (N, Y) $MN_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO

Maximum value D number
Maximum value of D number
Return value 1 to 32000
Read access
maxNumAdapter (N, Y) $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER

Max. No. avail. tool adapt. data sets
Maximum number of tool adapter data sets available in NCK
Return value >0: Maximum number of adapter data sets.
0: Adapter data cannot be defined. Edge-specific parameters $TC_DP21, $TC_DP22,
$TC_DP23 are available, i.e. active tool management function with adapters is not in use.
-1: An adapter is automatically assigned to each magazine location, i.e. the number of
adapters provided internally corresponds to the number of magazine locations set in ma‐
chine data $MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION.

NC variables
maxNumAdapter (N, Y) $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER

- TYPE_DWORD 0 -1 600
Read access
maxNumNcusInNcuCluster (N, Y)
Maximum number of NCUs in the NCU link
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
maxNumSumCorr (N, Y) $MN_MM_NUM_SUMCORR

Total number total offsets in NCK
Total number of total offsets in NCK
Return value A setting of -1 means that the number of total offsets equals the
number of edges * number of total offsets per edge.
A setting of > 0 and < number of edges * number of total offsets per edge
means that a maximum number of total offsets equalling "number of total
offsets per edge" can be defined per edge, but need not be, i.e. it is thus
possible to use the buffer memory more economically.
In other words, only the edges have a total offset data set for which
data can be defined explicitly.
- TYPE_DWORD
Read access
maxnumAlarms (N, Y)
Size of NCK alarm buffer
Size of NCK alarm buffer (maximum number of pending alarms)
- TYPE_UWORD
maxnumChannels (N, Y)
Maximum number of available channels

NC variables
maxnumChannels (N, Y)
- TYPE_UWORD
maxnumContainer (N, Y)
Maximum number of axis containers
Maximum number of available axis containers
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
maxnumContainerSlots (N, Y)
Alternative name: maxnumContainerPlaces
Maximum number of slots per axis container
Maximum number of available slots per axis container
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
maxnumCuttEdges_Tool (N, Y) $MN_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PER_TOOL

Max. number edges per tool
Max. number of edges per tool
Return value 1 to 12
- TYPE_UWORD 9
Read access
maxnumDrives (N, Y)
Maximum number of available drives
- TYPE_UWORD

NC variables
maxnumEdgeSC (N, Y) $MN_MAX_SUMCORR_PERCUT‐

TING_EDGE
Max. number total offsets per edge
Max. number of total offsets per edge
Return value 0 to 6
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Read access
maxnumEventTypes (N, Y)
Max. no. of event types for trace protocolling
Maximum number of event types for the trace protocolling
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access
maxnumGlobMachAxes (N, Y)
Maximum number of available machine axes
- TYPE_UWORD
maxnumTraceProtData (N, Y)
Max. no of data per data list for trace protocol.
Maximum number of data per data list for trace protocolling
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access
maxnumTraceProtDataList (N, Y)
Max. no. of data per data list for trace protocol
Maximum number of data per data list for trace protocolling
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access

NC variables
modeSpindleToolRevolver (N, Y) MD $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGE‐

MENT_MASK Bit 9
Representation of active tool
Representation of tool currently in use in modules
magazine location data (T / TP, magazine data, location data) and
tool data (T / TD, tool data, general data and T / TV, tool data, directory)
Return value 0: Previous method: During operation, the tool is removed (in data terms) from its circu‐
lar magazine location and loaded to the spindle location in the buffer magazine.
1: During operation, the tool remains in its circular magazine locations in the OPI mod‐
ules. This applies to OPI modules magazine location data (T / TP, magazine data and loca‐
tion data) and tool data (T / TD, tool data, general data and T / TV, tool data, directory and
T / AEV, working offsets, directory).
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access
nckLogbookSeekPos (N, Y)
NCK logbook
- TYPE_DWORD
Addressing
1
nckType (N, Y)
NCK type
Return value 0: 840D pl
1000: FM-NC
2000: 810D pl
3000: 802S
4000: 802D pl
5000: 840Di pl (up to and including SW 6)
6000: SOLUTIONLINE
10700: 840D sl
14000: 802D sl T/M
14000: 802D sl N/G or C/U
14500: 808D
15000: 840Di sl
16000: 828D

NC variables
nckType (N, Y)
- TYPE_UWORD
nckVersion (N, Y) $AN_NCK_VERSION

NCK version
NCK version
Only the digits before the comma of the floating point number are evaluated, the digits after the comma may contain identi‐
fiers for development-internal intermediate releases.
The digits before the comma includes the official NCK identifier for the software release: For software release 3.4 the val‐
ue of the variable is 34,....
- TYPE_DOUBLE
exportRestricted (N, Y)
Export restriction
Export restriction
Identification of the software subject to export restriction according to the Federal Office of Economics and Export Control,
and Export Control and Customs
Compare OPI N/Y exportRestricted
- TYPE_BOOLEAN 1
Read access
ncuPerformanceClass (N, Y)
NCU power class
Return value 0: No special power class
1: Powerline
2-n: Reserved
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0
Addressing
1
Read access
numGlobalGFrames (N, Y) $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_G_FRAMES

Number of channel-independent G frames
- TYPE_UWORD 0

NC variables
numGlobalGFrames (N, Y) $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_G_FRAMES

Addressing
1
Read access
numSearchRunToolParams (N, Y)
Number of parameters in $$actToolDataBeforeSearch
Number of parameters in the data $$actToolDataBeforeSearch in the area C, module S
- TYPE_UWORD 3 0
Addressing
1
Read access
numAnalogInp (N, Y) MD 10300: FASTIO_ANA_NUM_INPUTS A2

Number of HW analog inputs
- TYPE_UWORD
numAnalogOutp (N, Y) MD 10310: FASTIO_ANA_NUM_OUT‐ A2

PUTS
Number of HW analog outputs
- TYPE_UWORD
numBAGs (N, Y)
Number of available mode groups
- TYPE_UWORD
numBasisFrames (N, Y) $MN_MM_NUM_GLOB‐

AL_BASE_FRAMES
Number of channel-independent basic frames

NC variables
numBasisFrames (N, Y) $MN_MM_NUM_GLOB‐

AL_BASE_FRAMES
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
numChannels (N, Y)
Number of active channels
- TYPE_UWORD
numContainer (N, Y)
Number of axis containers
Number of currently available axis containers
- TYPE_UWORD 0 $$maxnumContainer
Addressing
1
Read access
numContainerSlots (N, Y)
Alternative name: numContainerPlaces
Number of slots per axis container
Number of currently available slots per axis container
Physical unit: Data type: Maximum value:
- TYPE_UWORD $$maxnumContainer‐
Slots
Addressing
$$numContainer
Read access
numCuttEdgeParams (N, Y)
Number of P elements of a cutting edge

NC variables
numCuttEdgeParams (N, Y)
- TYPE_UWORD
numCuttEdgeParams_tao (N, Y) $MN_MM_NUM_CCS_TOA_PARAM

Number of Siemens applic. cutting edge data
Number of Siemens application cutting edge data in module TAO
!! Reserved for SIEMENS applications !!
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 10
Addressing
1
Read access
numCuttEdgeParams_tas (N, Y) $MN_MM_NUM_CCS_MON_PARAM

Number of Siemens applic. monitoring data
Number of Siemens application monitoring data in module TAS
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 10
Addressing
1
Read access
numCuttEdgeParams_ts (N, Y)
Number of P elements of a tool edge in module TS
Number of P elements of a cutting edge in module TS (tool monitoring data)
- TYPE_UWORD
numCuttEdgeParams_tu (N, Y) MD 18096: MM_CC_TOA_PARAM

No. of P elements of a cutting edge in module TUE
Number of P elements of a cutting edge in module TUE (cutting edge data for OEM)
- TYPE_UWORD

NC variables
numCuttEdgeParams_tus (N, Y) $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM

No. of param. in the user monitoring data
Number of parameters in the user monitoring data of a cutting edge in the module TUS

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 10
Addressing
1
Read access
numDigitInp (N, Y) MD 10350: FASTIO_DIG_NUM_INPUTS A2

Number of HW digital inputs
- TYPE_UWORD
numDigitOutp (N, Y) MD 10360: FASTIO_DIG_NUM_OUT‐ A2

PUTS
Number of HW digital outputs
- TYPE_UWORD
numDrives (N, Y)
Reserved
- TYPE_UWORD
numGCodeGroups (N, Y)
Number of NC instruction groups
- TYPE_UWORD

NC variables
numGCodeGroupsFanuc (N, Y)
Number NC instruction groups (ISO Dialect)
Number of NC instruction groups in ISO Dialect mode
(the number for the turning and milling versions is not the same)
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
numGlobMachAxes (N, Y)
Number of active machine axes
- TYPE_UWORD
numHandWheels (N, Y)
Maximum number of handwheels
- TYPE_UWORD
numMagLocParams_tap (N, Y) $MN_MM_NUM_CCS_MAGLOC_PARAM

Number of Siemens applic. magazine location data
Number of Siemens application magazine location data in module TAP
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 10
Addressing
1
Read access
numMagLocParams_u (N, Y) $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM

No of par. of the mag. user data f tool mag. place
Number of parameters of the magazine user data for a tool magazine place in the module TUP

NC variables
numMagLocParams_u (N, Y) $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 10
Addressing
1
Read access
numMagParams_tam (N, Y) $MN_MM_NUM_CCS_MAGAZINE_PAR‐

AM
Number of Siemens application magazine data
Number of Siemens application magazine data in module TAM
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 10
Addressing
1
Read access
numMagParams_u (N, Y) $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM

No of par. of the mag. user data for a tool mag.
Number of parameters of the magazine user data for
a tool magazine
in the TUM module
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 10
Addressing
1
Read access
numMagPlaceParams (N, Y)
Number of parameters per magazine location
Number of parameters of a magazine location
- TYPE_UWORD

NC variables
numMagPlacesMax (N, Y) MD 18086: MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCA‐ FBW

TION
Maximum number of magazine locations
- TYPE_UWORD
numMagsMax (N, Y) MD 18084: MM_NUM_MAGAZINE FBW

Maximum number of magazines
- TYPE_UWORD
numParams_Adapt (N, Y)
Number of parameters per adapter
- TYPE_UWORD 4
Read access
numParams_SC (N, Y)
No. total offset params per total offset set
Number of total offset parameters per total offset set
- TYPE_UWORD 9
Read access
numPlaceMulti (N, Y) FBW

No. of multiple assignments of a magazine location
Number of possible multiple assignments of a location to magazines
- TYPE_UWORD
numPlaceMultiParams (N, Y) FBW

Number of parameters of a multiple assignment

NC variables
numPlaceMultiParams (N, Y) FBW

- TYPE_UWORD
numToBaust (N, Y) MD 18110: MM_NUM_TOA_MODULES

Number of T areas
- TYPE_UWORD
numToolHolderParams (N, Y)
Number of parameters in $$toolHolderData
Number of parameters in the data $$toolHolderData in the area C, module S
Return value Number of parameters in $$toolHolderData.
If the "flat D number" is active, the value = 0 will be returned.
- TYPE_UWORD 5 0
Addressing
1
Read access
numToolParams_tad (N, Y) $MN_MM_NUM_CCS_TDA_PARAM

Number of Siemens application tool data
Number of Siemens application tool data in module TAD
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 10
Addressing
1
Read access
numToolParams_tu (N, Y) MD 18094: MM_CC_TDA_PARAM

Number of P elements of a tool
Number of P elements of a tool in module TU (tool data for OEM)
- TYPE_UWORD

NC variables
numMultiToolParams (N, Y)
Amount of multi-tool data
Amount of multi-tool data in T/MTD module
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
numMultiToolPlaceParams (N, Y)
Amount of multi-tool place data
Amount of multi-tool place data in the T/MTP module
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
maxNumPlacesPerMultitool (N, Y)
Maximum number of multi-tool places
Maximum number of places per multi-tool; specified by $MN_MAX_TOOLS_PER_MULTITOOL
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
numMultiToolParams_mtud (N, Y) $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MULTITOOL_PAR‐

AM
Amount of OEM-specific multi-tool data
Amount of OEM-specific multi-tool data in the MTUD module. Reserved for OEM applications
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables
numMultiToolParams_mtud (N, Y) $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MULTITOOL_PAR‐

AM
1
Read access
numMultiToolParams_mtad (N, Y) $MN_MM_NUM_CCS_MULTITOOL_PAR‐

AM
Amount of Siemens-specific multi-tool data
Amount of Siemens-specific multi-tool data in the MTAD module. Reserved for SIEMENS applications
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
numMultiToolPlaceParams_mtup (N, Y) $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MTLOC_PARAM

Amount of OEM-specific multi-tool place data
Amount of OEM-specific multi-tool place data in the MTUP module. Reserved for OEM applications
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
numMultiToolPlaceParams_mtap (N, Y) $MN_MM_NUM_CCS_MTLOC_PARAM

Amount of Siemens-specific multi-tool place data
Amount of Siemens-specific multi-tool place data in the MTAP module. Reserved for SIEMENS applications
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
numUserFrames (N, Y) $MN_MM_NUM_GLOB‐

AL_USER_FRAMES
Number of channel-independent user frames
- TYPE_UWORD 0

NC variables
numUserFrames (N, Y) $MN_MM_NUM_GLOB‐

AL_USER_FRAMES
Addressing
1
Read access
toolChangeMFunc (N, Y) MD 22560: TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE W1

Number of M function for tool change
Return value 0 = change on T selection (standard for turning)
1 = change on selection M1..
99999 = change on selection M99999
(standard for milling M06)
- TYPE_DWORD
typeOfCuttingEdge (N, Y)
Type of D-number programming
Type of D-number programming see MD: MM_TYPE_OF_CUTTING_EDGE
0 no 'flat D number management' active
1 flat D numbers active
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
userScale (N, Y)
User unit table
User unit table with 13 elements (see Start-up Guide 2.4 and machine data)
Return value 0 = table not active
1 = table active
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1

NC variables
handWheelNr (N, Y)
Handwheel number PLC interface
Handwheel number, as required for selection via the PLC user interface.
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
$$numHandWheels
Read access
maxNoOfChannels (N, Y)
Maximum number of channels
Maximum number of channels that can be activated.
This defines the upper limit of the option data $ON_NUM_CHANNELS.
- TYPE_UWORD 1 1
Addressing
1
Read access
maxNoOfProgLevel (N, Y)
Maximum number of program levels
Maximum number of program levels present in the system.
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
numOfISOCorr (N, Y)
Number of tool offset values in ISO mode
Number of offset values in the ISO offset memory in ISO2 and ISO3 modes.
- TYPE_UWORD 98

NC variables
numOfISOCorr (N, Y)
Addressing
1
Read access

NC variables
anLanguageOnHmi (N, Y) $AN_LANGUAGE_ON_HMI

Current language set on HMI
Current language set on HMI -- [*] available languages

NC variables

Return value 1 German [*]
2 French [*]
3 English (United Kingdom) [*]
4 Spanish [*]
5 Portuguese (Portugal)
6 Italian [*]
7 Dutch [*]
8 Chinese (Simplified) [*]
9 Swedish [*]
10 German (Austria)
11 German (Liechtenstein)
12 German (Luxembourg)
13 German (Switzerland)
15 Norwegian (Bokmål)
16 Norwegian (Nynorsk)
18 Hungarian [*]
19 Finnish [*]
20 French (Belgium)
21 French (Canada)
22 French (Luxembourg)
23 French (Principality of Monaco)
24 French (Switzerland)
26 Greek [*]
28 Czech [*]
30 English (United States)
31 English (Australia)
32 English (Belize)
33 English (Canada)
34 English (Caribbean)
35 English (India)
36 English (Ireland)
37 English (Jamaica)
38 English (Malaysia)
39 English (New Zealand)
40 Spanish (Argentina)
41 Spanish (Bolivia)
42 Spanish (Chile)
43 Spanish (Colombia)
44 Spanish (Costa Rica)
45 Spanish (Dominican Republic)
46 Spanish (Ecuador)
47 Spanish (El Salvador)
48 Spanish (Guatemala)
49 Spanish (Honduras)

NC variables

50 Portuguese (Brazil) [*]
53 Polish [*]
55 Danish [*]
57 Russian [*]
59 Albanian
60 Italian (Switzerland)
62 Bosnian (Latin, Bosnia and Herzegovina)
63 Bosnian (Cyrillic, Bosnia and Herzegovina)
65 Croatian (Croatia) [*]
66 Croatian (Latin, Bosnia and Herzegovina)
68 Slovak [*]
69 Slovenian [*]
70 Dutch (Belgium)
72 Romanian [*]
73 Romansh (Switzerland)
75 Bulgarian [*]
76 Estonian
77 Georgian
78 Latvian
79 Lithuanian
80 Chinese (Traditional) [*]
81 Chinese (Hong Kong S.A.R.)
82 Chinese (Macao S.A.R.)
83 Chinese (Singapore)
85 Korean [*]
87 Japanese [*]
88 Macedonian
89 Turkish [*]
90 Swedish (Finland)
92 Ukrainian
93 Afrikaans
94 Alsatian (France)
95 Amharic (Ethiopia)
96 Armenian
97 Azeri
98 Bashkir (Russia)
99 Belarusian
100 Arabic (Saudi Arabia)
101 Arabic (Algeria)
102 Arabic (Bahrain)
103 Arabic (Egypt)
104 Arabic (Iraq)
105 Arabic (Jordan)
106 Arabic (Kuwait)

NC variables

107 Arabic (Lebanon)
108 Arabic (Libya)
109 Arabic (Morocco)
110 Arabic (Oman)
111 Arabic (Qatar)
112 Arabic (Syria)
113 Arabic (Tunisia)
114 Arabic (U.A.E.)
115 Arabic (Yemen)
118 Assamese
119 Bengali
120 Gujarati
121 Hindi
122 Indonesian [*]
123 Kannada
124 Konkani
125 Malayalam
126 Marathi
127 Oriya
128 Punjabi
129 Sanskrit
130 English (Republic of the Philippines)
131 English (Singapore)
132 English (South Africa)
133 English (Trinidad and Tobago)
134 English (Zimbabwe)
137 Pashto (Afghanistan)
138 Dari (Afghanistan)
139 Urdu
140 Spanish (Mexico)
141 Spanish (Nicaragua)
142 Spanish (Panama)
143 Spanish (Paraguay)
144 Spanish (Peru)
145 Spanish (Puerto Rico)
146 Spanish (Spain)
147 Spanish (United States)
148 Spanish (Uruguay)
149 Spanish (Venezuela)
151 Serbian (Latin, Bosnia and Herzegovina)
152 Serbian (Cyrillic, Bosnia and Herzegovina)
155 Malay (Brunei Darussalam)
156 Quechua (Bolivia)
158 Inuktitut (Latin, Canada)

NC variables

159 Inuktitut (Syllabics, Canada)
160 Mohawk (Mohawk)
162 Mapudungun (Chile)
164 Tibetan (PRC)
165 Yi (PRC)
166 Mongolian (Traditional Mongolian, PRC)
167 Uighur (PRC)
169 Tamazight (Latin, Algeria)
171 Catalan
172 Basque
173 Galician
175 Sami, Northern (Finland)
176 Sami, Inari (Finland)
177 Sami, Skolt (Finland)
180 Breton (France)
181 Corsican (France)
182 Occitan (France)
184 Faroese
186 Tamil
187 Telugu
190 Welsh (United Kingdom)
192 Lower Sorbian (Germany)
193 Upper Sorbian (Germany)
195 Greenlandic (Greenland)
196 Icelandic
198 Irish
200 Persian
201 Syriac
203 Hebrew
204 Kazakh
205 Kyrgyz
206 Yakut (Russia)
207 Tatar
208 Uzbek
210 Khmer (Cambodia)
211 Lao
212 Thai [*]
213 Vietnamese [*]
214 Sinhala (Sri Lanka)
215 Filipino (Philippines)
216 Tajik (Cyrillic, Tajikistan)
217 Turkmen
220 Serbian (Cyrillic)
221 Serbian (Latin)

NC variables

224 K'iche (Guatemala)
225 Kiswahili
226 Luxembourgish
227 Divehi
228 Maltese
229 Mongolian
230 Malay [*]
231 Nepali (Nepal)
232 Hausa (Latin, Nigeria)
233 Igbo (Nigeria)
234 Yoruba (Nigeria)
235 Frisian (Netherlands)
236 Sami, Southern (Norway)
237 Sami, Northern (Norway)
238 Sami, Lule (Norway)
239 Maori (New Zealand)
240 Quechua (Peru)
241 Kinyarwanda (Rwanda)
242 Wolof (Senegal)
243 Sami, Southern (Sweden)
244 Sami, Northern (Sweden)
245 Sami, Lule (Sweden)
246 Sesotho sa Leboa (South Africa)
247 Setswana (South Africa)
248 isiXhosa (South Africa)
249 isiZulu (South Africa)
250 Quechua (Ecuador)
Addressing
1
driveTypeSupport (N, Y)
Type of supported drive
Return value 0 = stepper
1 = digital
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access

NC variables
maxNumToolCarrOffsets (N, Y)
Maximum number of ToolCarrOffsets
Maximum number of tool carrier offset vectors
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access
3.2.6.26 YFAFL: NCK instruction group list (Fanuc)
All G functions currently configured for the channels are made available for reading by the NCK. They are con‐
figured via machine data. Since the G functions are organized in groups, only one of which can be active at a
time, this module is organized as a table.
There are two columns for each G group. The 1st column lists the number of G functions in a group ($$/N/
YFAFL/Gruppe_NUM), this corresponds to the number of rows in each subsequent column. This second col‐
umn contains all the G functions belonging to a group ($$/N/YFAFL/Gruppe).
As a result, the data for a certain G group are calculated via a column offset.
The column offset of each variable is:
2 * (G group number - 1)
The number of G groups is given in the variable "$$numGCodeGroupsFanuc" in area N / module Y. The resul‐
tant maximum column offset of the variables is thus 2 * $$numGCodeGroupsFanuc.
The G functions currently active are listed in area C / module SNCF.
Gruppe (N, YFAFL)

Alternative name: function
Instruction group
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
$$/N/YFAFL/Gruppe_NUM
Read access
Gruppe_NUM (N, YFAFL)

Alternative name: groupId
Number of Fanuc-G functions
Number of Fanuc-G functions in the relevant group
- TYPE_UWORD 0

NC variables
Gruppe_NUM (N, YFAFL)

Addressing
1
Read access
3.2.6.27 YNCFL: NCK instruction group list
All G functions currently configured for the channels are made available for reading by the NCK. They are con‐
figured via machine data. Since the G functions are organized in groups, only one of which can be active at a
time, this module is organized as a table.
There are two columns for each G group. The 1st column lists the number of G functions in a group ($$/N/
YNCFL/Gruppe_NUM), this corresponds to the number of rows in each subsequent column. This second col‐
umn contains all the G functions belonging to a group ($$/N/YNCFL/Gruppe).
As a result, the data for a certain G group are calculated via a column offset.
The column offset of each variable is:
2 * (G group number - 1)
The number of G groups is given in the variable "$$numGCodeGroups" in area N / module Y. The resultant the
maximum column offset of the variables is thus 2 * $$numGCodeGroups.
The G functions currently active are listed in area C / module SNCF.
Gruppe (N, YNCFL)

Alternative name: function
Instruction group (Function)
Instruction group
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
$$/N/YNCFL/Gruppe_NUM
Gruppe_NUM (N, YNCFL)

Alternative name: groupId
Number of G functions (GroupID)
Number of G functions in the relevant group
- TYPE_UWORD

NC variables
Gruppe_NUM (N, YNCFL)

Addressing
1
3.2.7 Tool: Tool Data
3.2.7.1 AD: Adapter data
Adapter data are used to define the dimensions of an adapter (L1, L2, L3) per magazine location and the direc‐
tion (transformation) of loaded tools.
The transformation is applied when cutting edge data are processed in OPI modules TOT, TOST and TOET if
the tool is loaded in a magazine location to which adapter data are assigned.
Adapter data exist independently of magazine location data. Magazine location data contain a reference (see
module TP, placeData) to the adapter data.
adaptData (T, AD)

Adapter data
Adapter data
colIndex: AdaptNo
mm, inch, user defined TYPE_DOUBLE 0.0
Addressing
$$numParams_Adapt

NC variables
3.2.7.2 AEV: Working offsets: Directory
The active tool edges are sorted in consecutive ascending D number sequence in the AEV module. This mod‐
ule also contains the essential tool data for each D number entered. "Active" in this case refers to the replace‐
ment tools.
(If the "unique D numbers" option is not activated in the NC, the edges are sorted according to ascending ToolI‐
dent and DuploNumber. The D number variable is then set to 0 on all lines in this module.)
The D number assignment is not necessarily unique for active tools. For this reason, the same D number may
be entered in several lines (successively).
The line number is a serial number which is not related to the D number.
The number of active tool edges is stored in $$numActDEdges (module AEV), e.g. example 10,
i.e. module AEV contains entries for 10 tool edges. These are sorted in ascending D number sequence. The
tool edge with the lowest D number has index (serial number) 1, the next-higher D number index 2, etc. and the
edge with the highest D number index 10.
When tools are activated/deactivated and D numbers re-assigned, the entries for a D number change line dy‐
namically.
Module T / AEV is organized as a 1-dimensional variable array and can be used for the following purposes:
- Display all tool edges, including D numbers, of active tools.
- Display associated tool data
The module contains the following information which can be addressed via a column index:
- Single column, in 1st line only. Number of D numbers (lines, tool edges) in the current list
- The other columns apply to all lines, each line contains tool edge data with the following information:
- D number
- Internal T number of associated tool
- Tool edge number relative to tool
- Tool identifier
- Duplo number
- Magazine number and
- Location number of tool
Individual values cannot be altered via this module.
Re-assignment of D numbers and changes in allocation to tools (deactivate, activate replacement tools) and
other modifications to data cause changes to $$toolCounter in "C / S Channel-specific status data".
Variable $$modeSpindleToolRevolver (module N/Y, global system data) defines for circular magazines (T / TM,
magazine data, general data, MagKind=3) whether the tool in OPI modules "T / TP, magazine data, location
data", "T / TD, tool data, general data", "T/TV, tool data, directory" and "T / AEV, working offsets, directory"
remains (new functionality) in its circular magazine location during operation or changes to the buffer magazine
(earlier behaviour)).

NC variables
DNo (T, AEV)

D-number
D number
Meaningful and defined only in connection with "unique D numbers" function.

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numActDEdges
Read access
cuttEdgeNo (T, AEV)

Tool edge number
Number of edge for this tool

- TYPE_UWORD 1 $$maxnumCuttEdg‐
es_Tool
Addressing
$$numActDEdges
Read access
duploNo (T, AEV)

Duplo number
Duplo number

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numActDEdges
Read access

NC variables
numActDEdges (T, AEV)

Number of D numbers in module
Number of D numbers in this list

When tool management function is active:
Specifies the number of edges belonging to tools with "active"
status (contained in the TO unit)
When tool management function is not active:
Specifies the number of all edges contained in the TO unit.
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
Read access
toolIdent (T, AEV)

Tool identifier
Tool identifier

- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
$$numActDEdges
Read access
toolInMag (T, AEV)

Magazine
Magazine in which tool is located

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numActDEdges
Read access

NC variables
toolInPlace (T, AEV)

Location
Magazine location of tool

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numActDEdges
Read access
toolNo (T, AEV)

Internal T number
Internal T number

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numActDEdges
Read access
3.2.7.3 MTAD: Application-specific multi-tool data
This block contains application-specific multitool data.
siemData (T, MTAD) $TC_MTPCSx[y] x=ParamNo y=Multitool‐

No
Alternative name: applData
Siemens application multi-tool data
Siemens application multi-tool data
Column index corresponds to parameter number.
Reserved for SIEMENS applications.
The data type in the NCK is specified by MD18197 $MN_MM_TYPE_CCS_MULTITOOL_PARAM, and can be determined
from the file _N_COMPLETE_TOA_ACX. The data type for the OPI is changed to the data type TYPE_DOUBLE, and has
to be changed back to the NCK data type by the application.
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0.0

NC variables
siemData (T, MTAD) $TC_MTPCSx[y] x=ParamNo y=Multitool‐

No
Addressing
32000
3.2.7.4 MTAP: Application-specific multi-tool place data
This block contains application-specific multitool location data.
siemPlaceData (T, MTAP) $TC_MTPPCSx[y,z] x=ParamNo y=MtNo

z=MtPlaceNo
Alternative name: applPlaceData
Siemens application multi-tool place data
Siemens application multi-tool place data.
These parameters can only be used if the machine data $MN_MM_NUM_CCS_MTLOC_PARAM and
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK have been set accordingly.
The data type in the NCK is specified by MD18199 $MN_MM_TYPE_CCS_MTLOC_PARAM, and can be determined from
the file _N_COMPLETE_TOA_ACX. The data type for the OPI is changed to the data type TYPE_DOUBLE, and has to be
changed back to the NCK data type by the application.
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$numMultiToolPlaceParams_mtap * $$max‐
NumPlacesPerMultitool
3.2.7.5 MTD: Multi-tool data, general data
This block contains the general data of the multitool data.
multitoolNumLoc (T, MTD) $TC_MTPN

Number of places in MT
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 $MN_MAX_TOOLS_PER
_MULTITOOL
Addressing

NC variables
multitoolNumLoc (T, MTD) $TC_MTPN

32000
Read access
multitoolIdent (T, MTD) $TC_MTP2

MT identifier
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
32000
multitoolInMag (T, MTD)

Current magazine
Number of the magazine on which the multi-tool is located
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
32000
Read access
multitoolInPlace (T, MTD)

Current location
Number of the magazine place at which the multi-tool is located
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
32000
Read access
multitoolMyMag (T, MTD)

Number of the MT owner magazine
Owner magazine of the tool magazine from which the MT was loaded
Return value 0 = the MT has not been loaded. If multitoolInMag is >0, however,
the MT number specifies a manual tool, or TMMG is not active

NC variables
multitoolMyMag (T, MTD)

- TYPE_UWORD 0 max. Nummer eines def.
Magazins
Addressing
32000
Read access
multitoolMyPlace (T, MTD)

Number of the MT owner magazine place
Owner magazine place of the MT - magazine place from which the multi-tool
was loaded
Return value 0 = the MT is not loaded. If multitoolInPlace is >0, however,
the MT number specifies a manual tool, a valid magazine place number, or TMMG is not
active.
- TYPE_UWORD 0 max. Nummer def. Mag‐
azinplatz
Addressing
32000
Read access

NC variables
multitoolStateL (T, MTD) $TC_MTP8

Multi-tool status
Multi-tool status, significance of the bit values
Return value 0x0000: Not enabled
0x0001: Active MT
0x0002: Enabled
0x0004: Disabled
0x0008: Measured
0x0010: Prewarning limit reached
0x0020: MT being changed
0x0040: Fixed location coded
0x0080: MT was in use
0x0100: MT in the buffer magazine with transport order
0x0200: Ignore disabled state of the MT
0x0400: MT to be unloaded
0x0800: MT to be loaded
0x1000: Master tool
0x2000: Reserved
0x4000: Marked for 1:1 replacement
0x8000: Manual tool
0x10000: MT is disabled if a tool in the MT is disabled
0x20000: MT is at a disabled magazine location
- TYPE_UDWORD 0
Addressing
32000
multitoolplace_spec (T, MTD) $TC_MTP7

MT magazine place type
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
32000
multitoolsize_down (T, MTD) $TC_MTP6

MT size downward
MT size downward in half places

NC variables
multitoolsize_down (T, MTD) $TC_MTP6

- TYPE_UWORD 1 1 11
Addressing
32000
multitoolsize_left (T, MTD) $TC_MTP3

MT size to the left
MT size to the left in half places
- TYPE_UWORD 1 1 11
Addressing
32000
multitoolsize_right (T, MTD) $TC_MTP4

MT size to the right
MT size to the right in half places
- TYPE_UWORD 1 1 11
Addressing
32000
multitoolsize_upper (T, MTD) $TC_MTP5

MT size upward
MT size upward in half places
- TYPE_UWORD 1 1 11
Addressing
32000

NC variables
multitoolPosition (T, MTD) $TC_MTP_POS

MT position
MT position (number of the MT place)
_MULTITOOL
Addressing
32000
multitoolProtAreaFile (T, MTD) $TC_MTP_PROTA

Reserved, do not use!
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
32000
multitoolKindOfDist (T, MTD) $TC_MTP_KD

Type of distance coding
0: No multi-tool, or TMMG is not active
1: Multi-tool with place coding
2: Multi-tool with length coding
3: Multi-tool with angle coding
Return value 0: No multi-tool, or TMMG is not active
- TYPE_UWORD 1 0 3
Addressing
32000
Read access

NC variables
3.2.7.6 MTP: Multi-tool data, place data
This block contains the location data of the multitool data.
mtPlaceData (T, MTP) diverse, siehe Variablenbeschreibung

Multi-tool place data
P1: Location distance length ($TC_MTPPL)
P2: Location distance angle ($TC_MTPPA)
P3: Location type (read-only access) ($TC_MTPP2)
P4: Location state (bit array) ($TC_MTPP4)
Bit 0=1: Disabled
Bit 0=0: Enabled
Bit 1=1: Free to hold a tool
Bit 1=0: Occupied
P5: T number of the tool at this location ($TC_MTPP6)
P6: Number of the adapter at this location ($TC_MTPP7)
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numMultiToolPlaceParams * $$maxNumPla‐
cesPerMultitool
3.2.7.7 MTUD: Multi-tool data, user-defined data
This block contains the user-defined data of the multitool data.
userData (T, MTUD) $TC_MTPCx[y] x=ParamNo y=MultitoolNo

Multi-tool user data
Multi-tool user data
Column index corresponds to parameter number.
The data type in the NCK is specified by MD18193 $MN_MM_TYPE_CC_MULTITOOL_PARAM, and can be determined
from the file _N_COMPLETE_TOA_ACX. The data type for theOPI is changed to the data type TYPE_DOUBLE, and has
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0.0
Addressing
32000

NC variables
3.2.7.8 MTUP: Multi-tool place user data
This block contains the user multitool location data.
userPlaceData (T, MTUP) $TC_MTPPCx[y,z] x=ParamNo y=MtNo

z=MtPlaceNo
Multi-tool place user data
Multi-tool location user data. These parameters can only be used if the machine data $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MTLOC_PAR‐
AM and $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK have been set accordingly.
The data type in the NCK is specified by MD18195 $MN_MM_TYPE_CC_MTLOC_PARAM, and can be determined from
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$numMultiToolPlaceParams_mtup * $$max‐
NumPlacesPerMultitool
3.2.7.9 MTV: Multi-tool data, directory
This block contains the directory of the multitool data.
MTnumWZV (T, MTV)

Last assigned MT number for tool management
Number of the last multi-tool to be created
Return value 0 = No multi-tools have been defined, or TMMG is not active
Read access
numMultiTools (T, MTV) $P_MTOOLN

Number of defined multi-tools
Return value 0 = No multi-tools have been defined, or TMMG is not active
Read access

NC variables
numLocations (T, MTV)

Number of places in MT
Number of places in the multi-tool
_MULTITOOL
Addressing
$MN_MM_NUM_MULTITOOL
Read access
multitoolIdent (T, MTV)

Multi-tool identifier
Return value "" = No multi-tool, or TMMG is not active
- TYPE_STRING ""
Addressing
Read access
multitoolNo (T, MTV) $P_MTOOLMT

Number of the multi-tool
Number of the multi-tool. Array access to the column multitoolNo is
possible in order to read all assigned MT numbers.
Return value 0 = No multi-tool, or TMMG is not active
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
multitoolKindOfDist (T, MTV)

0: No multi-tool, or TMMG is not active
Return value 0: No multi-tool, or TMMG is not active
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 3
Addressing
Read access
multitoolInMag (T, MTV)

Magazine on which the MT is located
Number of the magazine on which the multi-tool is located
Return value 0 = The multi-tool is not loaded in a magazine, or TMMG is not active
Addressing
Read access
multitoolInPlace (T, MTV)

Magazine place at which the MT is located
Number of the magazine place at which the multi-tool is located
Return value 0 = The multi-tool is not loaded in a magazine, or TMMG is not active
Addressing
Read access

NC variables
3.2.7.10 TAD: Application-specific data
Data module TAD is organized as a 2-dimensional variable array. This module contains
application-specific data for all tools. Every element can be addressed via a column and
row index:
The column index is the number of the user-defined tool parameter. The number of
tool parameters (columns) can be found in variable $$numToolParams_tad in area N / module Y.
The row index is the tool number. Attempts to access non-existent tools are
negatively acknowledged.
Application-specific tool data are all of the same data type.
Application-specific tool data are reserved for SIEMENS applications.
siemData (T, TAD) $TC_TPCSx[y]

Siemens application tool parameter
Siemens application tool parameter
Important: 2-dimensional variable. Column index corresponds to the parameter number.
The data type in the NCK is specified by MD18205 $MN_MM_TYPE_CCS_TDA_PARAM, and can be determined from the
file _N_COMPLETE_TOA_ACX. The data type for the OPI is changed to the data type TYPE_DOUBLE, and has to be
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
32000
3.2.7.11 TAM: Application-specific magazine data
The TAM block contains application-specific information about the available tool magazines.
The application-specific magazine data are reserved for SIEMENS applications.
The TAM block is not intended for new developments.

NC variables
siemData (T, TAM)

Siemens application magazine data
Siemens application magazine data.
These parameters can be used only if machine data
$MN_MM_NUM_CCS_MAGAZINE_PARAM and $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK are set
accordingly.
This block exists only for compatibility reasons. New developments should be made with the T/TAMD block. (The data
format there is "TYPE_DOUBLE")
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
$$numMagParams_tam
3.2.7.12 TAMD: Application-specific magazine data double
The TAMD block contains application-specific information about the available tool magazines.
The application-specific magazine data are reserved for SIEMENS applications.
siemDataDouble (T, TAMD) $TC_MAPCSx[y]

Alternative name: applDataDouble
Siemens application magazine data.
$MN_MM_NUM_CCS_MAGAZINE_PARAM and $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK are set
accordingly.
Replaces the obsolete block T / TAM (same access, the only data type there is "TYPE_DWORD")
The data type in the NCK is specified by MD18201 $MN_MM_TYPE_CCS_MAGAZINE_PARAM, and can be determined
from the file _N_COMPLETE_TMA_ACX. The data type for the OPI is changed to the data type TYPE_DOUBLE, and has
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$numMagParams_tam

NC variables
3.2.7.13 TAO: Application-specific tool edge data
Data module TAO is organized as a 2-dimensional variable array. This module contains application-specific cut‐
ting edge data for all tools. Every element can be addressed via a column and row index. The column index is
the tool number (T number), i.e. one column contains the application-specific data for all the cutting edges of a
tool.
The assignments between tools and T numbers are listed in the Tool Directory (TV) module in the relevant T
area.
A request is negatively acknowledged if a non-existent tool number is entered as the column index.
The number of rows is determined by the number of parameters per cutting edge and the number of cutting
edges of a tool:
Max. number of rows = $$numCuttEdgeParams_tao * $$/T/TV/numCuttEdges (T number)
The number of parameters per cutting edge $$numCuttEdgeParams_tao can be found in area N / module Y.
The number of tool-specific cutting edges is specified in area T / module TV.
Several rows can be addressed where necessary which means, for example, that all application-specific edge
data of a tool can be read in one request.
Application-specific edge data are all of the same data type.
Application-specific cutting edge data are reserved for SIEMENS applications.
siemEdgeData (T, TAO) $TC_DPCSx[y,z]

Alternative name: applEdgeData
Siemens appl. tool cutting edge parameter
Siemens application tool edge parameter
Important: 2-dimensional variable. Column index corresponds to the T number.
The data type in the NCK is specified by MD18207 $MN_MM_TYPE_CCS_TOA_PARAM, and can be determined from the
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$numCuttEdgeParams_tao * $$/T/TV/numCut‐
tEdges

NC variables
3.2.7.14 TAP: Application-specific magazine location data
The TAP data block is organized as a 2-dimensional variable array. This block contains application-specific da‐
ta of a T area. Each element can be addressed via a column and row index:
The column index is the magazine number, i.e. one column contains the application-specific magazine location
data for all the locations of one magazine. The assignments between magazines and magazine numbers are
listed in the appropriate Magazine Directory (TMV) block in the relevant T area. A request is negatively acknowl‐
edged if a non-existent magazine number is entered as the column index.
The number of rows is determined by the number of parameters per magazine location and the number of mag‐
azine locations:
Max. number of rows = $$numMagLocParams_tap * $$magNrPlaces
Application-specific magazine location data are reserved for SIEMENS applications.
The TAP block is not intended for new applications.
siemPlaceData (T, TAP)

Alternative name: applPlaceData
Siemens application magazine location data.
$MN_MM_NUM_CCS_MAGLOC_PARAM and $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK are set
accordingly.
This block exists only for compatibility reasons. New developments should be made with the T/TAPD block. (The data
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
$$numMagLocParams_tap * $$magNrPlaces

NC variables
3.2.7.15 TAPD: Application-specific magazine location data double
The TAPD data block is organized as a 2-dimensional variable array. This block contains application-specific
data of a T area. Each element can be addressed via a column and row index:
The column index is the magazine number, i.e. one column contains the application-specific magazine location
data for all the locations of one magazine. The assignments between magazines and magazine numbers are
listed in the appropriate Magazine Directory (TMV) block in the relevant T area. A request is negatively acknowl‐
edged if a non-existent magazine number is entered as the column index.
The number of rows is determined by the number of parameters per magazine location and the number of mag‐
azine locations:
Max. number of rows = $$numMagLocParams_tap * $$magNrPlaces
Application-specific magazine location data are reserved for SIEMENS applications.
siemPlaceDataDouble (T, TAPD) $TC_MPPCSx[y,z]

Alternative name: applPlaceDataDouble
Siemens application magazine location data.
$MN_MM_NUM_CCS_MAGLOC_PARAM and $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK are set
accordingly.
Replaces the obsolete block T / TAP (same access, the only data type there is "TYPE_DWORD")
The data type in the NCK is specified by MD18203 $MN_MM_TYPE_CCS_MAGLOC_PARAM, and can be determined
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$numMagLocParams_tap * $$magNrPlaces

NC variables
3.2.7.16 TAS: Application-specific monitoring data
Data module TAS is organized as a 2-dimensional variable array. This module contains application-specific
monitoring data for all tools. Every element can be addressed via a column and row index:
The column index is the tool number (T number), i.e. one column contains the application-specific monitoring
data for all the cutting edges of a tool. The assignments between tools and T numbers are listed in the Tool
Directory (TV) module in the relevant T area. A request is negatively acknowledged if a non-existent tool num‐
ber is entered as the column index.
The number of rows is determined by the number of parameters per cutting edge and the number of cutting
edges of a tool:
Max. number of rows = $$numCuttEdgeParams_tas * $$/T/TV/numCuttEdges (T number)
The number of parameters per cutting edge $$numCuttEdgeParams_tas can be found in area N / module Y.
The number of tool-specific cutting edges ($$/T/TV/numCuttEdges) is specified in area T / module TV.
Several rows can be addressed where necessary which means, for example, that all application-specific moni‐
toring data of a tool can be read in one request.
Application-specific monitoring data are all of the same data type.
Application-specific monitoring data are reserved for SIEMENS applications.
siemData (T, TAS) $TC_MOPCSx[y,z]

Siemens application monitoring data
Siemens application monitoring data of a tool cutting edge.
$MN_MM_NUM_CCS_MON_PARAM and $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
are set accordingly.
The data type in the NCK is specified by MD18209 $MN_MM_TYPE_CCS_MON_PARAM, and can be determined from
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$numCuttEdgeParams_tas * $$/T/TV/numCut‐
tEdges

NC variables
3.2.7.17 TC: Toolholder parameters
Module TC contains the data which define an orientatable toolholder (offset vectors, axis directions, rotation
angle, type information).
It is also possible to read the current positions of the toolholder axes and the differences between the current
and programmed axis values for the active toolholder.
tcCarr10 (T, TC) $TC_CARR10

x component of rotary axis v2
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / $$numTo‐
Baust

y component of rotary axis v2
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Baust

z component of rotary axis v2
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Baust

Angle of rotation alpha1 (in degrees)

NC variables

Addressing
Baust

Angle of rotation alpha2 (in degrees)
Addressing
Baust

x component of offset vector l3
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Baust

y component of offset vector l3
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Baust

z component of offset vector l3
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0

NC variables

Addressing
Baust

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Baust

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Baust

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Baust

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0

NC variables

Addressing
Baust

Axis identifier of 1st rotary axis
- TYPE_STRING 0
Addressing
Baust

Axis identifier of 2nd rotary axis
- TYPE_STRING 0
Addressing
Baust

Kinematic type
Return value Kinematic type: P: Rotatable workpiece (Part)
M: Rotatable tool and rotatable workpiece (Mixed)
T or any character except P and M: Rotatable tool
- TYPE_STRING 0
Addressing
Baust

Offset of 1st rotary axis in degrees

NC variables

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Baust

Offset of 2nd rotary axis in degrees
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Baust

Offset Hirth tooth system 1st axis
Offset of Hirth tooth system in degrees of 1st rotary axis
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Baust

Offset Hirth tooth system 2nd axis
Offset of Hirth tooth system in degrees of 2nd rotary axis
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Baust

NC variables

Increment Hirth tooth system 1st axis
Increment of Hirth tooth system in degrees of 1st rotary axis
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Baust

Increment Hirth tooth system 2nd axis
Increment of Hirth tooth system in degrees of 2nd rotary axis
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Baust

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Baust

Minimum position of 1st rotary axis
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing

NC variables

Baust

Minimum position of 2nd rotary axis
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Baust

Maximum position of 1st rotary axis
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Baust

Maximum position of 2nd rotary axis
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Baust

NC variables

Toolholder name
Return value Contains a freely definable string provided as a freely definable
identifier for the orientatable toolholder.
It has no meaning as yet within the NCK and is not evaluated either.
The identifier should not be used for other purposes since a later
expansion will allow an orientatable toolholder to be activated via
a name as well as via numbers

- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
$MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER

Axis name 1
Return value Contains a freely definable string provided as a free identifier
for the first rotary axis.
It has no meaning whatsoever within the NCK, neither is it evaluated.
It can therefore be used for any other purposes.

- TYPE_STRING 0
Addressing

Axis name 2
Return value Contains a freely definable string provided as a free identifier
for the second rotary axis.
It can therefore be used for any other purposes.

- TYPE_STRING

NC variables

Addressing

Identifier
Return value Contains an integer number for identifying the toolholder.

- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing

Position component X
Return value Contains a position (X component of return position).

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing

Position component Y
Return value Contains a position (Y component of return position).

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing

NC variables

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Baust

Position component Z
Return value Contains a position (Z component of return position).

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing

Fine offset l1 X
x-component of the fine offset of the offset vector l1
Addressing

Fine offset l1 Y
y-component of the fine offset of the offset vector l1
Addressing

NC variables


Fine offset l1 Z
z-component of the fine offset of the offset vector l1
Addressing

Fine offset l2 X
Addressing

Fine offset l2 Y
Addressing

Fine offset l2 Z

NC variables

Addressing

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Baust

Fine offset l3 X
Addressing

Fine offset l3 Y
Addressing

Fine offset l3 Z

NC variables

Addressing

Fine offset l4 X
Addressing

Fine offset l4 Y
Addressing

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Baust

Fine offset l4 Z

NC variables

Addressing

Fine offset of offset of rotary axis v1
Fine offset of the offset of the rotary axis v1
Addressing

Fine offset of offset of rotary axis v2
Fine offset of the offset of the rotary axis v2
Addressing

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Baust

x component of rotary axis v1

NC variables

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Baust

y component of rotary axis v1
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Baust

z component of rotary axis v1
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
Baust
tcCarr_KIN_TOOL_START (T, TC) $TC_CARR_KIN_TOOL_START

Start element of the TOOL chain
Start element of the TOOL chain for parameterization from kinematic chains.
- TYPE_STRING 0
Addressing
Baust

NC variables
tcCarr_KIN_TOOL_END (T, TC) $TC_CARR_KIN_TOOL_END

End element of the TOOL chain.
Start element of the TOOL chain for parameterization from kinematic chains.
- TYPE_STRING 0
Addressing
Baust
tcCarr_KIN_PART_START (T, TC) $TC_CARR_KIN_PART_START

Start element of the part chain
Start element of the part chain for parameterization from kinematic chains.
- TYPE_STRING 0
Addressing
Baust
tcCarr_KIN_PART_END (T, TC) $TC_CARR_KIN_PART_END

End element of the part chain
End element of the part chain for parameterization from kinematic chains.
- TYPE_STRING 0
Addressing
Baust

NC variables
tcCarr_KIN_CNTRL (T, TC) $TC_CARR_KIN_CNTRL

Data accepted from kinematic chains.
Controls the acceptance of data from a kinematic chain.
Return value This system data defines which the geometry data of a tool carrier is read from the tool carri‐
er data or from kinematic chains.
The system data is bit-coded. At present, only Bit 0 is assigned.
Bit 0 :
If this bit is set, the offset vectors 1 to l4, the axis direction vectors v1 and v2 as well as the
angular offsets of the rotary axis are determined from the kinematic chains, which are refer‐
red to with the system data $TC_CARR_KIN_TOOL_START,
$TC_CARR_KIN_TOOL_END, $TC_CARR_KIN_PART_START and
$TC_CARR_KIN_PART_END.
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
tcCarr_CORR_ELEM1 (T, TC) $TC_TCARR_CORR_ELEM1

Name of the offset vector l1 of a tool carrier.
Name of the offset vector l1 of the tool carrier [i].
- TYPE_STRING 0
Addressing
Baust

- TYPE_STRING 0
Addressing
Baust

NC variables

- TYPE_STRING 0
Addressing
Baust

- TYPE_STRING 0
Addressing
Baust
tcCarr_KIN_ROTAX_NAME1 (T, TC) $TC_CARR_KIN_ROTAX_NAME

Name of first rotary axis of tool carrier.
Name of first rotary axis of tool carrier [i].
- TYPE_STRING 0
Addressing
Baust

Name of second rotary axis of tool carrier.
Name of second rotary axis of tool carrier [i].
- TYPE_STRING 0
Addressing

NC variables

Baust
3.2.7.18 TD: Tool data, general data
In addition to the tool offset data other tool characteristics are stored for managing the tools. The module TD
contains the general data of the tools. The tool characteristics can be addressed via individual multiple-line vari‐
ables. The variable line index corresponds to the T-number. If non-existent T-numbers are accessed, the re‐
quest is acknowledged negatively. The module Tool directory (TV) in the associated T area shows which T-
numbers are valid.
adaptNo (T, TD)

Adapter number
Number of adapter defined by system parameter $TC_ADPx which is
supporting the tool
Return value >0: adapter number
0: no adapter assigned
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 $$numMagPlacesMax
Addressing
max. T-Nummer
Read access
duploNo (T, TD) $TC_TP1 FBW

Duplo number
Duplo number (number of replacement tool)
In the tool management each tool is explicitly defined both by its identifier and its duplo number. This means that a T-area
can only contain tool identifiers with different duplo numbers.
- TYPE_UWORD T-Nummer
Addressing
32000
numCuttEdges (T, TD) $P_TOOLND[x] x = ToolNo

Number of cutting edges of a tool

NC variables
numCuttEdges (T, TD) $P_TOOLND[x] x = ToolNo

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
1
toolIdent (T, TD) $TC_TP2 FBW

Tool identifier
- TYPE_STRING "<T-Nummer>"
Addressing
32000
toolInMag (T, TD) $A_TOOLMN[x] x = ToolNo T

Current magazine
Current magazine in which the tool is located
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
32000
toolInMultitool (T, TD) $A_TOOLMTN[x] x = ToolNo T

Current multi-tool
Still to be defined
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
32000
Read access
toolInMultitoolPlace (T, TD) $A_TOOLMTLN[x] x = ToolNo T

Current multi-tool place
Still to be defined

NC variables
toolInMultitoolPlace (T, TD) $A_TOOLMTLN[x] x = ToolNo T

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
32000
Read access
toolInPlace (T, TD) $A_TOOLMLN[x] x = ToolNo T

Current location
Current location in which the tool is located
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
32000
toolInfo (T, TD) $TC_TP11 FBW

Sub-group for $P_USEKT
Definition of the sub-group to which the tool belongs (see $P_USEKT). The data is bit-coded.
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
32000
toolMon (T, TD) $TC_TP9 FBW

Type of tool monitoring
Return value 0: no tool monitoring
1: tool life monitoring
2: no. of workpieces monitoring
4: monitoring of edge wear parameters using wear limit
8: monitoring of total offset parameters using wear limit
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing

NC variables
toolMon (T, TD) $TC_TP9 FBW

32000
toolMyMag (T, TD) $A_MYMN

Owner magazine of the tool
Owner magazine of the tool magazine from which the tool was loaded
Return value 0 = the tool is not loaded. If toollnMag is >0 at the same time,
the T number will specify a manual tool, or TMMG is not active.
- TYPE_UWORD - 0 max. Nummer eines def.
Magazins
Addressing
max. T-Nummer
Read access
toolMyMultitool (T, TD) $A_MYMTN[x] x = ToolNo T

Owner multi-tool of the tool
Still to be defined
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
32000
Read access
toolMyMultitoolPlace (T, TD) $A_MYMTLN[x] x = ToolNo T

Owner multi-tool place of the tool
Still to be defined
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
32000
Read access

NC variables
toolMyPlace (T, TD) $A_MYMLN

Owner magazine location of the tool
Owner magazine of the tool - Magazine location from which the tool was
loaded
Return value 0 = the tool is not loaded. If toollnPlace is >0 at the same time,
the T number will specify a manual tool, a valid magazine location number or TMMG is not
active.
Physical unit: Data type: Initial value Maximum value:
- TYPE_UWORD - max. Nummer def. Mag‐
azinplatz
Addressing
max. T-Nummer
Read access
toolSearch (T, TD) $TC_TP10 FBW

Order of the replacement tools
Selection of the order of the replacement tools, if this is set with $TC_MAMP2, bit 3
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
32000

NC variables
toolState (T, TD) FBW

Tool state
Return value 0x0000:0: Not enabled
0x0001:1: Active tool (A)
0x0002:2: Enabled (F)
0x0004:4: Disabled (G)
0x0008:8: Measured (M)
0x0010:16: Prewarning limit reached (V)
0x0020:32: Tool being changed (W)
0x0040:64: Fixed location coded (P)
0x0080:128: Tool was in use (E)
0x0100:256: Tool is in the buffer magazine with transport order
0x0200:512: Ignore disabled state of tool
0x0400:1024: Tool must be unloaded (R)
0x0800:2048: Tool must be loaded (B)
0x1000:4096: Tool is a master tool (S)
0x2000:8192: Reserved.
0x4000:16384: Tool is marked for 1:1 exchange
0x8000:32768: Tool is being used as a manual tool.
- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
32000
toolplace_spec (T, TD) $TC_TP7 FBW

Magazine location type
Magazine location type of tool
- TYPE_UWORD 9999
Addressing
32000
toolsize_down (T, TD) $TC_TP6 FBW

Size downwards in half locations
- TYPE_UWORD 1 1 11

NC variables
toolsize_down (T, TD) $TC_TP6 FBW

Addressing
32000
toolsize_left (T, TD) $TC_TP3 FBW

Size to the left in half locations
- TYPE_UWORD 1 1 11
Addressing
32000
toolsize_right (T, TD) $TC_TP4 FBW

Size to the right in half locations
- TYPE_UWORD 1 1 11
Addressing
32000
toolsize_upper (T, TD) $TC_TP5 FBW

Size upwards in half locations
- TYPE_UWORD 1 1 11
Addressing
32000
toolProtAreaFile (T, TD)

Reserved, do not use!
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing

NC variables
toolProtAreaFile (T, TD)
Read access
toolMaxVelo (T, TD) $TC_TP_MAX_VELO

Maximum speed of tool
Maximum speed of the tool if the value is >0. There is no monitoring if no speed limit is defined (=0).
Addressing
32000
toolMaxAcc (T, TD) $TC_TP_MAX_ACC

Maximum angular acceleration of the tool
Maximum angular acceleration of the tool if the value is >0. There is no monitoring if no acceleration limit is defined (=0).
Addressing
32000

NC variables
toolStateL (T, TD) $TC_TP8 FBW

Tool state large
Return value 0x0000: Not enabled
0x0001: Active tool (A)
0x0002: Enabled (F)
0x0004: Disabled (G)
0x0008: Measured (M)
0x0010: Prewarning limit reached (V)
0x0020: Tool being changed (W)
0x0040: Fixed location coded (P)
0x0080: Tool was in use (E)
0x0100: Tool is in the buffer magazine with transport order
0x0200: Ignore disabled state of tool
0x0400: Tool must be unloaded (R)
0x0800: Tool must be loaded (B)
0x1000: Tool is a master tool (S)
0x2000: Reserved.
0x4000: Tool is marked for 1:1 exchange
0x8000: Tool is being used as a manual tool.
0x10000: Reserved
0x20000: Tool is at a disabled magazine location
- TYPE_UDWORD 0
Addressing
32000
3.2.7.19 TDC: Tool parameters of the Siemens application
Tool parameters of the Siemens application

NC variables
toolDataChangeInfo (T, TDC)

Change service for tool data
Pointer and data of the change service for tool data
The ring buffer of the tool data change data is organized in columns
Each column contains a change notice
In line 1: Column of the last entry in the ring buffer
In line 2: Number of overruns in the ring buffer
In line 3: Block number of the changed data
In line 4: Parameter number of the changed data
In line 5: 1st index of the parameter of the changed data
In line 6: 2nd index of the parameter of the changed data
In line 7: 3rd index of the parameter of the changed data (only with "ECP", "SCP", distance relation and new CE no. of
the edge)
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access
3.2.7.20 TF: Used as parameter and return value of the PI-Services _N_TMGETT and
_N_TSEARC
This module is used for parameterizing as well as for the return parameters of PI services _N_TMGETT and
_N_TSEARC. Access to this module must be T area specific and exclusive. It is up to the clients to guarantee
this by using the semaphore mechanism (PI service _N_MMCSEM) with the function number for
_N_TMSEARCH.
With _N_TMGETT, NO parameterizing elements (input parameters) are relevant; the only relevant one is the
result parameter resultToolNr
parDataTAD (T, TF)

Parameterizing data for module TAD
Parameterizing: For parameters with data type DOUBLE of the module TAD a value can be stored as a comparison value
for a 'complex search' (_N_TSEARC).
The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TAS according to $$parMasksTAD.
The size of the column matches the lines in module TAO.
Return value See module TAD
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numToolParams_tad

NC variables
parDataTAO (T, TF)

Parameterizing data for module TAO
Parameterizing: For parameters with data type DOUBLE of the module TAO a value can be stored as a comparison value
The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TAS according to $$parMasksTAO.
The size of the column matches the lines in module TAO.
Return value See module TAO
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numCuttEdgeParams_tao
parDataTAS (T, TF)

Parameterizing data for module TAS
Parameterizing: For parameters with data type DOUBLE of the module TAS a value can be stored as a comparison value
The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TAS according to $$parMasksTAS.
The size of the column matches the lines in module TAS.
Return value See module TAS
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numCuttEdgeParams_tas

NC variables
parDataTD (T, TF)

Alternative name: parDataToolDuploNo
parDataToolToolsize_left
parDataToolToolsize_right
parDataToolToolsize_upper
parDataToolToolsize_down
parDataToolToolplace_spec
parDataToolToolState
parDataToolToolMon
parDataToolToolSearch
parDataToolToolInfo
parDataToolToolInMag
parDataToolToolInPlace
parDataToolNumCuttEdges
Parameterizing data for module TD
Parameterizing: For parameters with data type UWORD of the module TD a value can be stored as a comparison value
The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TD according to $$parMasksTD.
The size of the column matches the lines in module TD.
Return value See module TD
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
17
parDataToolIdentTD (T, TF)

Parameterizing the module TD (identifier)
Parameterizing: For the parameter with data type string[32] (tool identifier) of the module TD a value can be stored as a
comparison value for a 'complex search' (_N_TSEARC).
The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TD according to $$parMasksTD.
Return value See module TD
- TYPE_STRING
parDataTO (T, TF)

Parameterizing data for module TO
Parameterizing: For each parameter of the module TO, a value can be stored as a comparison value for the 'complex
search' (_N_TSEARC).
The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TO according to $$parMasksTO.
The size of the column matches the data set of an edge in module TO.
Return value See module TO

NC variables
parDataTO (T, TF)

- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numCuttEdgeParams * $$maxnumCuttEdg‐
es_Tool
parDataTS (T, TF)

Parameterizing data for module TS
Parameterizing: For each parameter of the module TS a value can be stored as a comparison value for a 'complex
The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TS according to $$parMasksTS.
The size of the column matches the data set of an edge in module TS.
Return value See module TS
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numCuttEdgeParams_ts * $$maxnumCut‐
tEdges_Tool
parDataTU (T, TF)

Parameterizing data for module TU
Parameterizing: For each parameter of the module TU a value can be stored as a comparison value for a 'complex
The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TU according to $$parMasksTU.
The size of the column matches the lines in module TU.
Return value See module TU
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numToolParams_tu

NC variables
parDataTUE (T, TF)

Parameterizing data for module TUE
Parameterizing: For each parameter of the module TUE a value can be stored as a comparison value for a 'complex
The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TUE according to $$parMasksTUE.
The size of the column matches the data set of an edge in module TUE.
Return value See module TUE
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numCuttEdgeParams_tu * $$maxnumCut‐
tEdges_Tool
parDataTUS (T, TF)

Parameterizing data for module TUS
Parameterizing: For each parameter of the module TUS a value can be stored as a comparison value for a 'complex
search' (_N_TUSEARC).
The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TUS according to $$parMasksTUS.
The size of the column matches the data set of an edge in module TUS.
Return value See module TUS
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
$$numCuttEdgeParams_tus * $$maxnumCut‐
tEdges_Tool

NC variables
parMasksTAD (T, TF)

Parameterizing mask for module TAD
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TAD that indicates whether it is to serve as a search
criterion for a 'complex search' (_N_TSEARC) and how it is to be combined.
The corresponding comparison values are stored in $$parDataTAD. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has
been selected (#0), they are logically combined with AND.
Return value Value 0 : Corresponding operand is not evaluated / Variable is not a criterion for comparison
Value 1 : == (equal)
Value 2 : < (less than)
Value 3 : > (greater than)
Value 4 : <= (less or equal)
Value 5 : >= (greater or equal)
Value 6 : && (bitwise AND, value only allowed for operands of the types WORD and DOU‐
BLEWORD)
For string operands "==" is the only operator allowed

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 6
Addressing
$$numToolParams_tad

NC variables
parMasksTAO (T, TF)

Parameterizing mask for module TAO
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TAO that indicates whether it is to serve as a search
The corresponding comparison values are stored in $$parDataTAO. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has
BLEWORD)

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 6
Addressing
$$numCuttEdgeParams_tao

NC variables
parMasksTAS (T, TF)

Parameterizing mask for module TAS
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TAS that indicates whether it is to serve as a search
The corresponding comparison values are stored in $$parDataTAS. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has
BLEWORD)

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 6
Addressing
$$numCuttEdgeParams_tas

NC variables
parMasksTD (T, TF)

Parameterizing mask for module TD
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TD that indicates whether it is to serve as a search
The corresponding comparison values are stored in $$parDataTD. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has
BLEWORD)

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 6
Addressing
17

NC variables
parMasksTO (T, TF)

Parameterizing mask for module TO
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TO
that indicates whether it is to serve as a search criterion for a 'complex search'
(_N_TSEARC) and how it is to be combined.
The corresponding comparison values are stored in $$parDataTO.
If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has been selected (#0), they are logically combined with AND.
BLEWORD)

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 6
Addressing
$$numCuttEdgeParams * $$maxnumCuttEdg‐
es_Tool

NC variables
parMasksTS (T, TF)

Parameterizing mask for module TS
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TS
The corresponding comparison values are stored in $$parDataTS.
BLEWORD)

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 6
Addressing
tEdges_Tool
parMasksTU (T, TF)

Parameterizing mask for module TU
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TU
The corresponding comparison values are stored in $$parDataTU.
BLEWORD)

NC variables
parMasksTU (T, TF)

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 6
Addressing
$$numToolParams_tu
parMasksTUE (T, TF)

Parameterizing mask for module TUE
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TUE
The corresponding comparison values are stored in $$parDataTUE.
BLEWORD)

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 6
Addressing
tEdges_Tool

NC variables
parMasksTUS (T, TF)

Parameterizing mask for module TUS
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TUS that indicates whether it is to serve as a search
criterion for a 'complex search' (_N_TUSEARC) and how it is to be combined.
The corresponding comparison values are stored in $$parDataTUS.
Return value Value 0 : Corresponding operand is not evaluated
/ Variable is not a criterion for comparison
BLEWORD)

- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 6
Addressing
tEdges_Tool
resultCuttingEdgeNrUsed (T, TF) $A_USEDD

D numbers since last count of cutting edges used
D numbers of the cutting edges used since the last workpiece count, that have previously been used on the defined tool
carrier via $$resultNrOfCutEdgesUsed.
Various D offsets for a tool indicate multiple entries of the tool, that means a T number can be present more than once.
The two variables are linked to each other. $$resultNrOfCutEdgesUsed has to be read first, and then the individual T num‐
bers with $$resultToolNrUsed.
See also $A_USEDND, $A_USEDT and SETPIECE command.
Return value 0 maximum number of cutting edges in NCK
- TYPE_DWORD 0 0 max. Anzahl Schneiden
in NCK
Addressing
Zeile 1 * Zeile 2 von $$resultNrOfCutEdge‐
sUsed
Read access

NC variables
resultNrOfCutEdgesUsed (T, TF) $A_USEDND

Number of cutting edges since last workpiece count
Line 1: Number of tool carriers
Line 2: Maximum number of entries of $$resultToolNrUsed or $$resultCuttingEdgeNrUsed per tool carrier
Line i+2: Number of the i. tool carrier
Line i+3: Number of cutting edges which have been used since the last workpiece count on the i. tool carrier. This corre‐
sponds to $A_USEDND.
The T and D numbers of the cutting edges can be read with $$resultToolNrUsed and $$resultCuttingEdgeNrUsed respec‐
tively.
If TOOLMAN is not active and
$MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO = FALSE, then line 1 = 1,
$MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO = TRUE, then line 1 = 32.
If tool monitoring is not active, line 2 = 0.
See also $A_USEDT, $A_USEDD and SETPIECE command
in NCK
Addressing
2*max.Anz. der Distanzbez. zw.Mag. und WZ-
Haltern + 2 = 66
Read access
resultNrOfTools (T, TF)

Result: number of tools found
Result: Number of tools found
Return value In the case of _N_TMGETT, it is possible to find no tools (value=0) or exactly 1 tool (value
1); in the case of _N_TSEARC, the number of found tools can be any number > 0, limited by
the number of tools in the NC or no tools at all (value=0).
- TYPE_UWORD 0 0 $$numTools
Addressing
1
Read access
resultToolNr (T, TF)

Result: T-numbers of the tools found
Return value The array elements contain the internal T- numbers of the tools found. The storing order is
the order in which the tools have been found by the PI-Service.

NC variables
resultToolNr (T, TF)

Addressing
$$resultNrOfTools
Read access
resultToolNrUsed (T, TF) $A_USEDT

T numbers since last count of cutting edges used
T numbers of the cutting edges used since the last workpiece count, that have previously been used on the defined tool
carrier via $$resultNrOfCutEdgesUsed.
Various D offsets for a tool indicate multiple entries of the tool, that means a T number can be present more than once.
The two variables are linked to each other. $$resultNrOfCutEdgesUsed has to be read first, and then the individual T num‐
bers with $$resultToolNrUsed.
See also $A_USEDND, $A_USEDD and SETPIECE command.
in NCK
Addressing
Zeile 1 * Zeile 2 von $$resultNrOfCutEdge‐
sUsed
Read access
3.2.7.21 TG: Tool data, grinding-specific data
Special tool data are required for grinding tools. These data are contained in the module TG. They can be ad‐
dressed via several multiple-row variables. The row index corresponds to the T number. If a non-existent T-
number is addressed negative acknowledgment is returned. The module tool directory (TV) in the associated
area T shows which T-numbers are valid.
actToolWide (T, TG) $TC_TPG5 W4

Current width of the grinding wheel
Addressing
32000

NC variables
conntectPar (T, TG) $TC_TPG2 W4

Chaining rule
Chaining rule. This parameter ( which is bitwise defined ) specifies which tool parameters of cutting edge 2 and cutting
edge 1 are chained. If the value of any chained parameter is altered, the value of the other chained parameter is automati‐
cally adapted.
Return value If the following bits are set, the corresponding parameters of D1 and D2 are chained:
Bit0: tool type
Bit2: geometry length1
Bit11: wear length1
Bit12: wear length2
Bit13: wear length3
Bit20: base dimension/adapter dimension length1
The value is stored internally as an integer.
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
32000
drsPath (T, TG) $TC_TPG_DRSPATH

Path to the dressing program
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
32000
drsProgname (T, TG) $TC_TPG_DRSPROG

Program name for dressing (grinding)
Grinder dressing program name.
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing

NC variables
drsProgname (T, TG) $TC_TPG_DRSPROG

32000
inclAngle (T, TG) $TC_TPG8 W4

Inclination angle of inclined grinding wheel
Angle of inclination of the inclined grinding wheel in the current plane
Degree TYPE_DOUBLE -90 90
Addressing
32000
maxRotSpeed (T, TG) $TC_TPG6 W4

Maximum rotary speed of the grinding wheel
Addressing
32000
maxTipSpeed (T, TG) $TC_TPG7 W4

Maximum peripheral speed of the grinding wheel
Maximum peripheral speed of the grinding wheel
fined
Addressing
32000
minToolDia (T, TG) $TC_TPG3 W4

Minimum diameter of the grinding wheel
Addressing

NC variables
minToolDia (T, TG) $TC_TPG3 W4

32000
minToolWide (T, TG) $TC_TPG4 W4

Minimum width of the grinding wheel
Addressing
32000
paramNrCCV (T, TG) $TC_TPG9 W4

Compensation parameters for SUG
Compensation parameters for the function SUG ("constant perimeter speed of grinding wheel"). These parameters define
which compensation value is to be used for SUG, tool monitoring and centerless grinding. The value always refers to cut‐
ting edge D1.
Return value 3: length 1
4: length 2
5: length 3
6: radius
The value is stored internally as an integer.
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
32000
spinNoDress (T, TG) $TC_TPG1 W4

Referenced spindle number
Spindle number to which the monitoring data and the function SUG ("constant perimeter speed of grinding wheel") refer.
Return value The value is stored internally as an integer.
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
32000

NC variables
3.2.7.22 TISO: ISO tool offset data
This block contains the ISO tool offset data.
isoCorrParam (T, TISO) $TC_ISO_*

Offset values for ISO modes
This variable contains the offset values for the ISO2.2 and ISO3.2 modes.
The column index contains the offset number.
Addressing
13
3.2.7.23 TM: Magazine data, general data
This module contains the information for the available tool magazines.
magActPlace (T, TM) $TC_MAP8

Current magazine position
Return value Location number of tool change position
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMagsMax
magCmd (T, TM)

Command for magazine execution
Return value 1: Find_empty location_loading
2: Tool_MOVE
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMagsMax

NC variables
magCmdPar1 (T, TM)

Command parameter 1 of the magazine
Command parameter of the magazine
Return value In case of a succesfull return, the return value is the magazine number.
If an error occurs, an error number is set.
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMagsMax
magCmdPar2 (T, TM)

Command parameter 2 of the magazine
Command parameter of the magazine
Return value In case of a succesfull return, the return value is the place number.
If an error occurs an error number is set.
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMagsMax
magCmdState (T, TM)

Command status of the magazine
Command state of the magazine
Return value 1: started
2: running
3: end correct
4: end with error
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMagsMax

NC variables
magDim (T, TM) $TC_MAP6 FBW

Dimension of the magazine
Dimension of the magazine, number of magazine lines in the box magazine
Return value Applies to box magazines (magKind = 5) number of lines. For all other magazine types the
value is 1.
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMagsMax
magDim2 (T, TM) $TC_MAP7

Dimension of the magazine, number of columns
Dimension of the magazine, number of columns in the box magazine
magDim * magDim2 = magNrPlaces
Addressing
$$numMagsMax
Read access
magIdent (T, TM) $TC_MAP2 FBW

Identifier of the magazine
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
$$numMagsMax
magKind (T, TM) $TC_MAP1 FBW

Type of the magazine
Return value 1 = chain
3 = revolver
5 = box magazine
7 = internal magazine tool buffer
9 = internal magazine loading stations

NC variables
magKind (T, TM) $TC_MAP1 FBW

- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
$$numMagsMax
magLink1 (T, TM) $TC_MAP4 FBW

Chaining 1 of the magazine to following magazine
Chaining 1 of the magazine to the following magazine. Number to (next) background magazine. Can be used with chain,
revolver and box magazines (magKind = 1,3 or 5)
- TYPE_UWORD -1
Addressing
$$numMagsMax
magLink2 (T, TM) $TC_MAP5 FBW

Chaining 2 of the magazine to previous magazine
Chaining 2 of the magazine to the previous magazine. Backward chaining of background magazines. Can be used for
chaining to chain, revolver and box magazines (magKind = 1, 3 or 5)
- TYPE_UWORD -1
Addressing
$$numMagsMax

NC variables
magPlaceUserDataNumLimit (T, TM) entfaellt BTSS-Baustein T/TUP

Readability of all OEM magazine location data
Return value The row number for access to the OEM magazine location data in the OPI block TUP is cal‐
culated as follows: $$numMagLocParams_u * $$magNrPlaces. ( $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MA‐
GLOC_PARAM * $TC_MAP6[magNo] * $TC_MAP7[magNo]). However, the maximum possi‐
ble row number is 32767, this means that not all OEM location data can be addressed. The
following bit-coded status codes are provided to indicate this state:
Bit0=1: The product of the current values from the number of magazine locations
($TC_MAP6[magNo] * $TC_MAP7[magNo]) and the number of OEM magazine location pa‐
rameters ($MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM) exceeds the maximum row number.
These values may not yet be effective.
Bit1=1: The product of the effective values from the number of magazine locations
($TC_MAP6[magNo] * $TC_MAP7[magNo]) and the number of OEM magazine location pa‐
rameters ($MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM) exceeds the maximum row number.
Therefore not all OEM data from all magazine locations of this magazine can be read on the
OPI.

- TYPE_UWORD 0
Addressing
1
Read access
magNo (T, TM)

Number of the magazine
- TYPE_UWORD 1 $$numMagsMax
Addressing
$$numMagsMax
magNrPlaces (T, TM)

Number of real locations in the magazine
Number of real locations (in chain magazine) or number of slots (in box magazine)
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMagsMax

NC variables
magState (T, TM) $TC_MAP3 FBW

State of the magazine
Return value 1 = current magazine
2 = disabled
4 = magazine in loading position
8 = motion is active
16 = enabled for loading
- TYPE_UWORD 2
Addressing
$$numMagsMax
magToolSearchStrat (T, TM) $TC_MAP10, Bits 0-7

Current tool search strategy of magazine.
Tool search strategy
A set bit has the following meaning:
Bit0=0: (Default strategy) Take the first available tool found in the tool group. Search first in the magazine from which the
last change was made.
Bit0=1: Select the "active" tool in the magazine of the previously changed tool, otherwise find the replacement tool with
the lowest duplo number. If no tool is found in this magazine, the search is continued in the other linked magazines.
Bit1: Find the next replacement tool that is closest to the current magazine position.
Bit2: Select the "active" tool, otherwise the replacement tool with the lowest number contained in $TC_TP10.
Bit3: Find the tool in the group with the lowest actual value of the monitored size.
Bit4: Find the tool in the group with the highest actual value of the monitored size.
Bit5: Reserved
Bit6: Search first in the currently considered magazine (effective only in conjunction with bit 7=1).
Bit7=0: Start the tool search in the magazine from which the last changed tool came.
Bit7=1: Always start the search in the 1st magazine in the distance table.
Note:
Bit7=1 + bit0=1 or bit2=1, if no "active tool" is found in the magazine, then - if present - the active tool is selected from one
of the other magazines linked to the tool holder
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
320000
Read access

NC variables
magWearCompoundNo (T, TM) $TC_MAP9

Number of active wear group
Each magazine has its own active wear group (wear group number).
The number of this group is stored in OPI variables magWearCompoundNo:
Meaning: Number of active wear group.
=0: No wear group active.
>0: Number of wear group in which tool search commences.
(this is the number of the active wear group.)
<0: Number of wear group in which tool search commences.
However, this wear group is disabled which means that the next tool
search is started in the next possible wear group.
This system parameter can thus also be used to disable a wear
group. See also wear group number of magazine location
/ $TC_MPP7 and modeWearGroup / $TC_MAMP3.
Previous name: actWearGrInMag

Return value -32000, ..., -1, 0, 1, 2, ... 32000
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
$$numMagsMax

NC variables
magPlaceSearchStrat (T, TM) $TC_MAP10, Bits 8-15

Curr. empty location search strategy of magazine.
Empty location search strategy (bits 14 and 15 cannot be changed and are hidden.)
The NCK enters the value from $TC_MAP10 as default. In particular the globally effective bits 14 and 15 and are entered
via $TC_MAP10.
A set bit has the following meaning:

Bit8: Search forwards. Search in ascending order from location no. 1.
Bit9: Search forwards. Search in ascending order from the current location at the change position.
Bit10: Search backwards. Search backwards from the last location no.
Bit11: Search backwards. Search backwards from the current location at the change position.
Bit12: Symmetrical search. The search starts at the current location no. at the change position (1st location left, 1st loca‐
tion right, 2nd location left, 2nd location right and so on).
Bit13: 1:1 exchange (only with tool change of significance): If the old and new tools have the same location type and size,
the magazine location of the "new" tool to be loaded is transferred to the "old" tool to be unloaded and vice versa. The 1:1
exchange is checked first. If the 1:1 exchange is not possible, the other settings become effective for the search strategy.
Bit14=0: Search first in the individual magazines. If no possible location is found, search for a free location for the tool in
the next magazine.
Bit14=1: Search in all magazines for the best location for the tool corresponding to the hierarchy.
Bit15=0: (Conventional type of hierarchy): With this type, the location type of the sought tool is sought in the table of sys‐
tem variables $TC_MPTH. If the location type is found, this hierarchy is accepted, and evaluated from this level to the end.
Bit15=1: (Alternative type of hierarchy): Location type hierarchies can be defined for the selected location types 1, ...,
$MN_MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HIERARCHIES. The hierarchy for location type 1 is defined by $TC_MPTH[0,n], that for loca‐
tion type 2 by $TC_MPTH[1,n], and so on. (n: index within a hierarchy). With this setting, one location type can be defined
in different hierarchies.
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
Read access
3.2.7.24 TMC: Magazine data, configuration data
Each tool magazine is configured with several parameters during start-up. These configuration data together
with the state information are combined in the module TMC.
magBLMag (T, TMC) W4

Number of the internal load magazine
- TYPE_UWORD

NC variables
magCBCmd (T, TMC) W4

Command for magazine execution
Return value 1: Find_empty location_loading
2: Tool_MOVE
- TYPE_UWORD
magCBCmdState (T, TMC) W4

Command status of the magazine
Command state of the magazine (for magCBCmd)
Return value 1: started
2: running
3: end correct
4: end with error
- TYPE_UWORD
magCBIdent (T, TMC) $TC_MAMP1 W4

- TYPE_STRING
magCMCmdPar1 (T, TMC) W4

Return variable 1 for the command MagCBCmd
Return variable for the command MagCBCmd
Return value In case of a succesfull return, the return value is the magazine number.
If an error occurs, an error number is set.
- TYPE_UWORD

Return value 2 for command MagCBCmd
Return variable for the command MagCBCmd
Return value In case of a succesfull return, the return value is the place number.
If an error occurs an error number is set.

NC variables

- TYPE_UWORD
magRPlaces (T, TMC) W4

Total number of real magazine locations
Total number of real magazine locations (incl. buffer and loading locations)
- TYPE_UWORD

NC variables
magSearch (T, TMC) $TC_MAMP2 W4

Type of tool search and empty location search
Type of tool search and empty location search. The variable has a bit-by-bit meaning.

NC variables

Return value A set bit has the following meaning:
Tool search:
Bit0=0: (Default strategy) Take the first available tool found in the tool group. Search first in
the magazine from which the last change was made.
Bit0=1: Select the "active" tool in the magazine of the previously changed tool, otherwise
find the replacement tool with the lowest duplo number. If no tool is found in this magazine,
the search is continued in the other linked magazines.
Bit2: Select the "active" tool, otherwise the replacement tool with the lowest number con‐
tained in $TC_TP10.
Bit3: Find the tool in the group with the lowest actual value of the monitored variable.
Bit4: Find the tool in the group with the highest actual value of the monitored variable.
Bit5: Reserved
Bit6: Search first in the currently considered magazine (effective only in conjunction with bit
7=1).
Note:
Bit7=1 + bit0=1 or bit2=1, if no "active tool" is found in the magazine, then - if present - the
active tool is selected from one of the other magazines linked to the tool holder
Empty location search:

Bit9: Search forwards. Search in ascending order from the current location at the change
position.
Bit11: Search backwards. Search backwards from the current location at the change posi‐
tion.
Bit12: Symmetrical search. The search starts at the current location no. at the change posi‐
tion (1st location left, 1st location right, 2nd location left, 2nd location right and so on).
Bit13: 1:1 exchange (only with tool change of significance): If the old and new tools have the
same location type and size, the magazine location of the "new" tool to be loaded is transfer‐
red to the "old" tool to be unloaded and vice versa. The 1:1 exchange is checked first. If the
1:1 exchange is not possible, the other settings become effective for the search strategy.
Bit14=0: Search first in the individual magazines. If no possible location is found, search for
a free location for the tool in the next magazine.
Bit14=1: Search in all magazines for the best location for the tool corresponding to the hier‐
archy.
Bit15=0: (Conventional type of hierarchy): With this type, the location type of the sought tool
is sought in the table of system variables $TC_MPTH. If the location type is found, this hier‐
archy is accepted, and evaluated from this level to the end.
Bit15=1: (Alternative type of hierarchy): Location type hierarchies can be defined for the se‐
lected location types 1, ..., $MN_MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HIERARCHIES. The hierarchy for lo‐
cation type 1 is defined by $TC_MPTH[0,n], that for location type 2 by $TC_MPTH[1,n], and
so on. (n: index within a hierarchy). With this setting, one location type can be defined in
different hierarchies.

NC variables

- TYPE_UWORD
magVPlaces (T, TMC) W4

Number of defined locations for the control block
Number of defined locations for the control block
Number of virtual locations (without buffer and loading locations) for all real magazines in this area unit
- TYPE_UWORD
magZWMag (T, TMC) W4

Number of internal buffer magazine
- TYPE_UWORD

NC variables
modeWearGroup (T, TMC) $TC_MAMP3

Strategy wear group
Definition of strategies relating to wear group.
The value is bit-coded. Default setting = 0.
Effects on tool status
Bit Value Meaning
0 0 When a wear group is activated internally, the status of the tools it contains remains unchanged.
1 When a wear group is activated internally, the status of the tools it contains changes. One tool from each tool group
is set to the "active" state.
1 0 When a wear group is disabled internally, the status of the tools it contains remains unchanged.
1 When a wear group is disabled internally, the status of the tools it contains changes. The "active" status is cancelled
for all tools.
"Internally" in this instance means disabling or activation due to a tool change necessitating a change in the wear group.
Activating/disabling the appropriate tools after writing system parameters or via OPI.
2... Reserved
... Reserved
7... Reserved
Search strategy for next wear group:
Bit Value Meaning
8 0 Find the next possible wear group
1 Find the wear group with the next-higher group number which can be activated
9... Reserved
... Reserved
11... Reserved
Search strategy within the wear group for the tool to be activated
Bit Value Meaning
12 0 Lowest possible duplo number
1 Lowest possible magazine location number
13... Reserved
... Reserved
15... Reserved
The active wear group can be disabled completely by negating the contents of $TC_MAP9. It is also possible to disable
any selected wear group by negating $TC_MPP5 for a magazine location assigned to the relevant wear group.
See also system parameter $$magWearCompoundNo / $TC_MAP9 (active wear group number) and wear group number
of magazine location / $TC_MPP5.
- TYPE_UWORD
Read access

NC variables
magConfToolSearchStrat (T, TMC) $TC_MAMP2 W4

Type of tool search
Type of tool search. This variable is bitwise defined.
Bit0=0: (Default strategy) Take the first available tool found in the tool group. Search first in
the magazine from which the last change was made.
Bit0=1: Select the "active" tool in the magazine of the previously changed tool, otherwise
find the replacement tool with the lowest duplo number. If no tool is found in this magazine,
the search is continued in the other linked magazines.
Bit2: Select the "active" tool, otherwise the replacement tool with the lowest number con‐
tained in $TC_TP10.
Bit3: Find the tool in the group with the lowest actual value of the monitored variable.
Bit4: Find the tool in the group with the highest actual value of the monitored variable.
Bit5: Reserved
Bit6: Search first in the currently considered magazine (effective only in conjunction with bit
7=1).
Note:
Bit7=1 + bit0=1 or bit2=1, if no "active tool" is found in the magazine, then - if present - the
active tool is selected from one of the other magazines linked to the tool holder
- TYPE_UDWORD

NC variables
magConfMagSearchStrat (T, TMC) $TC_MAMP2 W4

Type of empty location search
Type of empty location search. The variable has a bit-by-bit meaning.
Bit9: Search forwards. Search in ascending order from the current location at the change
position.
Bit11: Search backwards. Search backwards from the current location at the change posi‐
tion.
Bit12: Symmetrical search. The search starts at the current location no. at the change posi‐
tion (1st location left, 1st location right, 2nd location left, 2nd location right and so on).
Bit13: 1:1 exchange (only with tool change of significance): If the old and new tools have the
same location type and size, the magazine location of the "new" tool to be loaded is transfer‐
red to the "old" tool to be unloaded and vice versa. The 1:1 exchange is checked first. If the
1:1 exchange is not possible, the other settings become effective for the search strategy.
Bit14=0: Search first in the individual magazines. If no possible location is found, search for
a free location for the tool in the next magazine.
Bit14=1: Search in all magazines for the best location for the tool corresponding to the hier‐
archy.
Bit15=0: (Conventional type of hierarchy): With this type, the location type of the sought tool
is sought in the table of system variables $TC_MPTH. If the location type is found, this hier‐
archy is accepted, and evaluated from this level to the end.
Bit15=1: (Alternative type of hierarchy): Location type hierarchies can be defined for the se‐
lected location types 1, ..., $MN_MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HIERARCHIES. The hierarchy for lo‐
cation type 1 is defined by $TC_MPTH[0,n], that for location type 2 by $TC_MPTH[1,n], and
so on. (n: index within a hierarchy). With this setting, one location type can be defined in
different hierarchies.
Bit16: The hierarchy consideration is canceled for the mini hierarchy that consists merely of
the location type itself and location type 0. In this case, the empty location search does not
distinguish between the suitable location type ( $TC_TP7 == $TC_MPP2) and the general
location type "0" of the magazine location.
- TYPE_UDWORD

NC variables
3.2.7.25 TMV: Magazine data, directory
The data module TMV can be used for the following purposes:
1. To display all magazines. The most important magazine information is combined in the module TMV. The
existing magazines are sorted in ascending order according to the magazine number without gaps. This
means that variables that are defined in this module as one-dimensional arrays contain all magazine informa‐
tion without any gaps. The row index with which a specific array can be addressed does not refer to the maga‐
zine number, it is merely a serial number. Inserting/deleting a magazine dynamically changes the contents of a
row.
2. To access magazine data in the modules TM, TP and TPM. Before accessing an element in the above mod‐
ules, the module TV should be consulted to determine which tools have actually been defined.
magVIdent (T, TMV)

- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
$$numMagsMax
magVNo (T, TMV)

Number of the magazine
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numMagsMax
numActMags (T, TMV)

Number of magazines
Number of magazines in the modules TMV and TM
- TYPE_UWORD $$numMagsMax

NC variables
3.2.7.26 TO: Tool offsets
The data module TO is organized as a 2-dimensional variable array.

The module contains the tool edge offset data for all tools. Each element can be addressed via a column and
row index:
The column index is the tool number (T-number), i.e. the offset data for all cutting edges of a tool are located in
one column. The assignment of a tool to a T-number is given in the module "Tool directory" (TV) in the related
area T. If a non-existent tool number is entered for the column index the request is negatively acknowledged.
The number of rows is derived from the number of parameters per tool edge and the number of edges on a tool:
maxZeilenindex = $$numCuttEdgeParams * $$/T/TV/numCuttEdges (T-number)
The number of parameters per tool edge "$$numCuttEdgeParams" is given in module Y in area N. The number
of cutting edges "$$/T/TV/numCuttEdges" is always tool-specific and is given in the module TV in associated
area T.
If necessary, several rows can be addressed, so that in one request, for example, all tool edge offset data of a
single tool can be read. The offset values of the tool edges are all of the same data type and have the same
physical unit.
cuttEdgeParam (T, TO) $TC_DPCEx[y,z] x = ParamNo y = Tool‐

No z = EdgeNo
Replaced by $$edgeData
Return value The value for the tool type is stored internally as an integer.
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
($$numCuttEdgeParams + 1) * $$maxnumCut‐
tEdges_Tool

NC variables
edgeData (T, TO) $TC_DPx[y,z] x = ParamNo y = ToolNo z

= EdgeNo
Edge offset value (edgeData)
Offset value parameters and cutting edge list with D numbers for a tool
Part 1: Offset value parameters for a tool edge:

Definition of a line index: (EdgeNo - 1) * $$numCuttEdgeParams + ParameterNo
The meaning of each parameter depends on the corresponding tool type. At present, 35 parameters are reserved for each
tool edge, however only some are allocated values. The valid parameters, some of which are only optional, can be found
in the OPI variable "$$extraCuttEdgeParams". To maintain flexibility for future extensions, the variable value '$$numCut‐
tEdgeParams' should be used for calculation rather than the fixed number of 35 parameters.
A detailed description of the tool parameters can be found in the 'Tool edge' chapter of the 'Tool Offset (W1)' documenta‐
tion. The following list is a summary of the tool edge parameters:
Parameter 1: Geometry -- tool type ($TC_DP1)
Parameter 2: Geometry -- cutting edge position ($TC_DP2)
Parameter 3: Geometry -- length 1 ($TC_DP3)
Parameter 6: Geometry -- radius ($TC_DP6)
Parameter 7: Geometry -- corner radius (tool type 700; grooving saw) ($TC_DP7)
Parameter 8: Geometry -- length 4 (tool type 700; grooving saw) ($TC_DP8)
Parameter 10: Geometry -- angle 1 ($TC_DP10)
Parameter 11: Geometry -- angle 2 for tapered milling tools ($TC_DP11)
Parameter 12: Wear -- length 1 ($TC_DP12)
Parameter 15: Wear -- radius ($TC_DP15)
Parameter 16: Wear -- groove width b / rounding radius ($TC_DP16)
Parameter 17: Wear -- proj. length k ($TC_DP17)
Parameter 19: Wear -- angle 1 ($TC_DP19)
Parameter 20: Wear -- angle 2 for tapered milling tools ($TC_DP20)
Parameter 21: Adapter -- length 1 ($TC_DP21)
Parameter 24: Tool clearance angle ($TC_DP24)
Parameter 25: Manual: Cutting speed ($TC_DP25)
ShopMill: Bit-coded value for different states of tools of type 1xx and 2xx ($TC_DP25)
Parameter 26: H number, with ISO mode
Parameter 27: Orientation -- Tool edge orientation
Parameter 28: Orientation -- L1 component of the tool edge orientation

NC variables
edgeData (T, TO) $TC_DPx[y,z] x = ParamNo y = ToolNo z

= EdgeNo
Parameter 31: Orientation -- standardized L1 component of the tool edge orientation
Parameter 34: Number of teeth of a cutting edge
Parameter 35: Basic angle of rotation of the cutting edge
All unlisted parameters up to number 35 are reserved.
Part 2: edgeDNo, associated optional D numbers of cutting edges:

Definition of the line index: (($$numCuttEdgeParams * $$maxnumCuttEdges_Tool) + EdgeNo)
Meaning of the values:

-1: No edge present
1 .. maxDNo: Edge present, associated D number, only when the "any D numbers" function is activated ($$maxnumCut‐
tEdges_Tool < $$maxCuttingEdgeNo)
Edge no.: 1 to $$maxnumCuttEdges_Tool when edge is present, but when the "Assignment of any D numbers" function
is not activated on the NC.
0: No D number assigned/assignment cancelled. (In this case, OPI deviates from the NCK variable $TC_DPCE....
$TC_DPCE....
$TC_DPCE = edge number, D = offset number D.
If the D number of an edge (variable of module TO) has been set to invalid, the value $TC_DPCE remains unaffected.
The edge number specified in the description of the row index matches the parameter $TC_DPCE.
The variable D no. defined in the module matches the second index in the offset-specific parameters of type
$TC_DPx[T,D],... and others; with x=1,....35.).
Notice: This variable is called "cuttEdgeParam" in the non-Windows HMI and the PLC.
Return value The value for the tool type is stored internally as an integer.
Addressing
tEdges_Tool
3.2.7.27 TOE: Edge-related location-dependent coarse total offsets, setup offsets
One set of edge-related coarse total offsets, setup offsets, exists for each tool edge and operating location.
This module corresponds totally to module T / TOS, edge-related location-dependent fine total offsets.

NC variables
edgeECData (T, TOE) $TC_ECPx[t,d]

Location-dependent setup offset
Location-dependent offsets, setup value
Addressing
$$numParams_SC * $$maxnumEdgeSC * $
$maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
3.2.7.28 TOET: Edge-related location-dependent coarse total offsets, transformed setup offsets
One set of edge-related transformed total offsets exists for each tool edge and operating location.
This module corresponds totally to module T / TOE.
edgeECData (T, TOET)

Transformed location-dependent setup offset
Transformed location-dependent offsets, setup value
colIndex: TNo
Addressing

NC variables
3.2.7.29 TOS: Edge-related positional fine total offsets
One set of edge-related total offsets exists for each tool edge and operating location.
The maximum number of operating locations is identical for all tool edges and defined by the new variable $
$maxnumEdgeSC ($MN_MAX_SUMCORR_PERCUTTING_EDGE) in "N / Y global system data".
$$numParams_SC (currently 9) offsets are provided (depending on location-independent wear values) for each
total offset set: Length 1, length 2, length 3, radius and 5 others.
Each replacement tool has its own separate (different) data.
The NCK resets the data when the associated tool is activated if machine data ($MN_MM_KIND_OF_SUM‐
CORR, bit 1 = 1) is used for activation.
The total offsets of a tool edge are accessible via the internal T number of the associated tool, edge number,
total offset number ("operating location").
PI Services may exist for selective creation and deletion of tool edge total offsets.
The existence of total offsets can be controlled selectively via the new machine data $MN_MM_NUM_SUM‐
CORR (OPI: $$maxNumSumCorr in N / Y).
The following applies:

When the MMC2 tool management function is in use, $MN_MM_NUM_SUMCORR = -1 must be set to ensure
that the total offsets exist for all offset locations (number = $$maxnumEdgeSC) from creation of the tool edge
until its deletion.
(The new PI Services for creation / deletion will not currently be used by the MMC2 tool management for turn‐
ing applications). For the present, the new NC machine data $MN_MM_NUM_SUMCORR = -1 must be set to
automatic creation / deletion.
The method of addressing in this module is analogous to accessing "Edge data / offsets" by column addressing
with T number (using an array access operation to gain quick access to the total offsets of all tool edge operat‐
ing locations or all edges of a tool).
The module contains the location-dependent total offsets for all tools. Each element is addressed via a column
and line index:
The column index is the tool number (T number), i.e. all location-dependent total offsets of this tool (for all
edges / locations) can be found in one column.
If a non-existent T number is specified as the column index, the request is acknowledged negatively.
The number of lines is determined by the number of total offset values, the number of operating locations and
the maximum possible edge number of a tool:
maxZeilenindex = $$numParams_SC * $$maxnumEdgeSC * $$maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
These variables are stored in "N / Y global system data" and have the following meanings:
$$numParams_SC: No. of wear offsets per location (according to L1, L2, L3, radius and 5 others), current‐
ly 9

NC variables
$$maxnumEdgeSC: Maximum number of locations (SC) per edge

$$maxnumCuttEdges_Tool: Max. permissible number of edges per tool
Several lines can be addressed simultaneously if necessary, allowing, for example, all location-dependent total
offsets of all edges of one tool to be read in one request. The location-dependent total offsets of the tools are all
of the same data type and have the same physical unit.
Module T / TOS has a 2-dimensional organization.
The following lines are provided for each T number (column index):
Edge 1, Location 1, L1
Edge 1, Location 1, Radius
Edge 1, Location 1, Par5
.......... ..... .....
Edge 1, Location 1, Par $$numParams_SC
Edge 1, ..... ......
Edge 1, Location $$maxnumEdgeSC, Par $$numParams_SC
.......... ..... .....
Edge 2, Location $$maxnumEdgeSC, Par $$numParams_SC
.......... ..... .....
Edge $$maxnumCuttEdges_Tool, Location $$maxnumEdgeSC, Par $$numParams_SC
Interrelationship between edge parameters, total offsets and variables:

Edge parameter DL1 DL2 ... DL4 ...
$TC_DP3 $TC_SCP13 $TC_SCP23 ... $TC_SCP43 ...
....
with DLx, TC_DPy, TC_SCPz

NC variables
x from 1 to 6 ($$maxnumEdgeSC = $MN_MAX_SUMCORR_PERCUTTING_EDGE) and maximum = 6

y from 3 to 11
z = (10 * x) + y
edgeSCData (T, TOS) $TC_SCPx[t,d]

Location-dependent wear offset
Location-dependent offsets, wear
colIndex: TNo
Addressing
3.2.7.30 TOST: Edge-related location-dependent total offsets, transformed
One set of edge-related transformed total offsets exists for each tool edge and operating location.
This module corresponds totally to module T / TOS.
edgeSCData (T, TOST)

Transformed location-dependent wear offset
Transformed location-dependent offsets, wear
colIndex: TNo
Addressing

NC variables
3.2.7.31 TOT: Edge data, transformed offset data
The HMI must be capable of displaying and modifying the offset data of the tool edges as both transformed and
untransformed data. The transformation refers to the adapter data (if programmed) of magazine locations. The
HMI can display and modify both transformed and untransformed data (of the same tool if necessary) "simulta‐
neously" (in different applications or different HMIs).
To provide access to transformed data, a new module, T / TOT (edge data: transformed offset data), is provi‐
ded which is identical to the existing module T / TO (edge data: Offset data), except that it supplies transformed
data instead of untransformed data.
The information edge DNo (D numbers assigned to edges) is included under the offset ($$numCuttEdgePar‐
ams * $$maxnumCuttEdges_Tool) in both the T / TOT and T / TO modules.
Both modules have a 2-dimensional organization.
The T number is the column index.

Line numbers are calculated by the following method:
(EdgeNo -1) * $$numCuttEdgeParams +parameter No.
$$numCuttEdgeParams = parameter per edge (currently 25) (from Y in N area)

EdgeNo = edge number for tool
Example: with $$numCuttEdgeParams = 25 and $$maxnumCuttEdges_Tool = 9
Column: T number
Lines:
1 edge 1, parameter 1
...
25 edge 1, parameter numCuttEdgeParams
...
50 edge 2, parameter numCuttEdgeParams
...
225 edge maxnumCuttEdges_Tool, parameter numCuttEdgeParams
226 edge 1, D No assigned to edge 1
Untransformed data: /Tool/Compensation/edgeData[uToa,cTNr,line_from,line_to]

Transformed data: /Tool/CompTransfor/edgeData[uToa,cTNr,line_from,line_to]
Values which can be displayed as transformed data are the 9 geo-data (corresponding to L1, L2, L3, radius,
and generally 5 other values), wear and total offsets.

NC variables
If tools which are not located in a magazine location with adapter data are accessed via the module for trans‐
formed data, then the data are treated as if they were untransformed.
cuttEdgeParam (T, TOT)

Replaced by $$edgeData
Addressing
tEdges_Tool
edgeData (T, TOT)

Transformed edge offset value (edgeData)
Adapter-transformed edge offset data and D number list
NOTICE! This variable is called "cuttEdgeParam" in NonWindows HMI and PLC.
Parameter number corresponds with numbering in T/TO module.

The following data are transformed:
Param2 (edge position)
Param11 (cutting direction if tool type is grinding or turning tool)
The following geometry data are exchanged amongst each other:
Param3 - Param5 (length)
Param12 - Param14 (wear)
The other parameters are identical with the values in the T/TO module.
Addressing
tEdges_Tool

NC variables
3.2.7.32 TP: Magazine location data
The data module TP is organized as a 2-dimensional variable array. The module contains the state and assign‐
ment of all magazine locations of a T area. Each element can be addressed by a column and line index:
The column index is the magazine number, i.e. the configuration data for all locations of a magazine are con‐
tained in one column. The assignment of a magazine to a magazine number is stated in the associated area T
of the associated Magazine directory module (TMV). If a non-existent magazine number is specified for the col‐
umn index, the request is negatively acknowledged.
The number of lines is derived from the number of parameters per magazine location and from the number of
magazine locations:
maxLineindex = $$numMagPlaceParams * $$magNrPlaces
The number of parameters per magazine location "$$numMagPlaceParams" is given in area N of module Y.
The line indices are based on the following scheme:
1: Location type ($TC_MPP1) (read only)
1: Magazine location
2: Spindle
3: Gripper
4: Loader
5: Transfer location
6: Loading station
7: Loading point
2: Location type ($TC_MPP2) (read only)
>0: Location type for virtual location
=0: "Match all" (buffer location)
9999: Undefined (not a virtual location)
3: T number of tool in this location ($TC_MPP6)
4: Consideration of adjacent location on / off ($TC_MPP3)
0: off
1: on
5: Location status ($TC_MPP4)
1: Disabled
2: Free (<> occupied)
4: Reserved for tool in buffer location
8: Reserved for tool to be loaded
16: Occupied in left half-location
32: Occupied in right half-location
64: Occupied in top half-location
128: Occupied in bottom half-location
6: Physical magazine reference (read only)
Magazine number of magazine to which location belongs
7: Type index ($TC_MPP5) (read only) and new: Wear group number as from SW 5.1

NC variables
Type index/wear group number is read only in SW earlier than 5.1 but read/write as from SW 5.1 if it is
assigned "Wear group" meaning.
Type index: The locations of a location type in a magazine are numbered in ascending order, e.g. type=2,
type index=5; ==> Spindle5)
(previous meaning when location type = 1 before P5: Equals location number when location type=1)
Wear group number as from SW 5.1 ($TC_MPP5)
When location type = 1: Number of wear group to which this magazine location is assigned.
Value range: -32000, ..., -1, 0, 1, 2, ... 32000
=0: Not assigned to a wear group
>0: Number of assigned wear group, this wear group is enabled
<0: Number of assigned wear group, this wear group is disabled
By negating this system parameter, it is possible to disable or enable the whole assigned wear group.
See also $$magWearCompoundNo / $TC_MAP9 (active wear group number) and $$modeWearGroup /
$TC_MAMP3 (general settings for wear grouping).
8: Adapter number as from SW 5.1 ($TC_MPP7)
Reference to adapter data set number.
Associated system data:

The number of parameters of this module changes accordingly:
N / Y, global system data, $$numMagPlaceParams = 8 as from SW 5.1
The number of magazine locations "$$magNrPlaces" is magazine specific and can be found in the associated
area T of module TM.
The locations of the buffer magazine and the loading magazine are numbered in ascending order independent‐
ly of the location type index.
If necessary, several lines can be addressed, so that, for example, all location data of a magazine can be read
in a single request. The location data are all of the same type.

NC variables
placeData (T, TP) diverse, siehe Variablenbeschreibung

Magazine location data
P1: Location type (read-only access) ($TC_MPP1)
P2: Location type (read-only access) ($TC_MPP2)
P3: T number of the tool at this location ($TC_MPP6)
P4: Consider adjacent location On/Off ($TC_MPP3)
P5: Location state (bit array) ($TC_MPP4)
Bit 0: Disabled
Bit 1=1: Free to accept a tool
Bit 1=0: Occupied
Bit 2: Reserved for a tool from the buffer magazine
Bit 3: Reserved for new tool to be loaded
Bit 4: Occupied in left half location
Bit 5: Occupied in right half location
Bit 6: Occupied in upper half location
Bit 7: Occupied in lower half location
Bit 8: Left half location reserved
Bit 9: Right half location reserved
Bit 10: Upper half location reserved
Bit 11: Lower half location reserved
Bit 12: Wear group disabled
Bit 13: Disabled magazine location can be overlapped by oversize tool
P6: Physical magazine reference (read-only access)
P7: Location type index (numbering of a location type) ($TC_MPP5)
P8: Number of the adapter at the magazine location ($TC_MPP7)
P9: Mag-Location-ToolNo-Reserved-For ($TC_MPP66)
P10: Number of the spindle assigned to the buffer magazine location ($TC_MPP_SP)
Only of significance if
- Tool holders are used ($MC_TOOLHOLDER_MANAGEMENT > 0)
- The magazine location "m" belongs to a buffer magazine "n"
- The magazine location describes a tool holder ($TC_MPP1[n,m]=2)
In this case the system variable contains the spindle number, the speed of which is to be monitored for maximum tool
speed.
If no tool holders are used ($MC_TOOLHOLDER_MANAGEMENT = 0), the variable contains the value of the spindle
index from $TC_MPP5
If magazine location "n,m" does not use a buffer magazine location for a spindle or tool holder, this variable contains the
value = 0.
P11: Type of T no. (tool or MT) ($P_TMNOIS)
colIndex: Tool magazine number

Notice! This variable is referred to as "dummy" in the non-Windows HMI and the PLC.
- TYPE_UWORD

NC variables
placeData (T, TP) diverse, siehe Variablenbeschreibung

Addressing
$$numMagPlaceParams * $$magNrPlaces
3.2.7.33 TPM: Magazine data, multiple assignment of place data
The data module TPM is organized as a 2-dimensional variable array.

ParameterNo = 1: Specifies the magazine number with which a relationship exists.
ParameterNo = 2: Distance (in locations) between the internal location and the magazine change position (cf.
magazine number for 1st parameter) with which a relationship will be established.
It contains information about possible multiple assignments. The column index is the magazine number.
For location P with location number p in magazine MP (= column index) $$numPlaceMulti times the multiple
assignments to other magazines which are possible are stored with the associated distances to the change po‐
sitions in each of the magazines. The offset for row index zi for a location number p is calculated according to
the following rule: zi = (p-1) * $$numPlaceMulti * $$numPlaceMultiParams + ParameterNo.
Determining the distance between the load position and the change position:
The value 9999 (magazine no. load position) must be specified for the variable $$multiPlace in the column. The
LocationNo (p) for the line is the number of the load position. The line for the first assignment is calculated with
ParameterNo = 1. When reading the variable, the system can thus read the magazine number linked to the
intended change position. If this magazine number is correct, it is possible to read the number of locations be‐
tween the load position and the change position with the variable $$multiPlace with the next higher line num‐
ber. If the magazine number read was incorrect, the following magazine assignment must be read with the line
number increased by $$numPlaceMulti.
This procedure has to be repeated a max. of $$numPlaceMultiParams times until the desired relationship has
been found.
multiPlace (T, TPM) diverse, siehe Variablenbeschreibung

Distance to change position
P1: Distance between the change position of magazine n and the location m of the first internal magazine (loading maga‐
zine, 9999) ($TC_MDP1)
P2: Distance between the change position of magazine n and the location m of the second internal magazine (buffer mag‐
azine, 9998) ($TC_MDP2)
colIndex: Tool magazine number
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing

NC variables
multiPlace (T, TPM) diverse, siehe Variablenbeschreibung

$$numPlaceMulti * $$numPlaceMultiParams * $
$magNrPlaces
3.2.7.34 TS: Tool monitoring data
The module TS is organized as a 2-dimensional variable array. The module contains the tool edge monitoring
data for all tools. Each element can be addressed via a column and line index:
The column index is the tool number (T-number), i.e. one column contains the monitoring data for all tool edges
of a tool. The assignment of a tool to a T-number is given in the module Tool directory (TV) in the associated
area T. If a non-existent tool number is specified for the column index, the request is acknowledged negatively.
The number of lines is derived from the number of parameters per tool edge and from the number of tool edges
of a tool:
maxZeilenanzahl = $$numCuttEdgeParams_ts * $$/T/TV/numCuttEdges (T-number)
The number of parameters per tool edge "$$numCuttEdgeParams_ts" is given in the module Y in area N. The
number of tool edges "$$/T/TV/numCuttEdges" is always tool specific and can be found in the module TV in
associated area T.
If necessary, several lines can be addressed, so that in one request, for example, all tool edge monitoring data
of a single tool can be read. The monitoring data of the tool edges are all of the same data type and have the
same physical unit.
New tool monitoring modes "Monitoring of wear values" and "Monitoring of total offsets":
3 new parameters are provided for these modes:
P7 = Wear prewarning limit (SW 5.1 and later) ($TC_MOP6)
P8 = Remaining wear (actual value) (SW 5.1 and later) ($TC_MOP5)
P9 = Wear setpoint (SW 5.1 and later) ($TC_MOP15)

NC variables
data (T, TS) $TC_MOPx[y,z] x=ParamNo,y=T-Num‐

ber,z=Edge
Alternative name: dummy
Monitoring data per tool edge
Notice: The variable is not documented for the user!
Monitoring data per tool edge
Important: This is a 2-dimensional variable.
9 parameters are available for each tool edge.
The parameters have the following meaning:
P1 = Prewarning limit service life in minutes ($TC_MOP1)
P2 = Remaining service life in minutes ($TC_MOP2)
P3 = Prewarning limit workpiece number ($TC_MOP3)
P4 = Remaining workpiece number ($TC_MOP4)
P5 = Desired service life ($TC_MOP11)
P6 = Desired workpiece number ($TC_MOP13)
P7 = Prewarning limit wear (prewarning limit) ($TC_MOP5)
This parameter can only be set if bit 5 of machine data $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK has been set corre‐
spondingly.
P8 = Remaining wear (actual value) ($TC_MOP6) cannot be written
P9 = Desired wear ($TC_MOP15)
This parameter can only be set if Bit 5 of machine data
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK has been set correspondingly.

- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
tEdges_Tool
3.2.7.35 TT: Magazine location data
The module TT is organized as a 2-dimensional array where the variable with index (1/1) contains the maxi‐
mum number of columns (corresponds to the location hierarchies) in this module. Each element can be ad‐
dressed via a column and row index:
The column index is the number of the location hierarchy + 1. The row index is the number of the location type
+ 1. Row 1 contains the current T-number of rows for a specific location hierarchy as special information.
If all location types are to be read out for a location hierarchy, this must be defined in two steps:
1. The 1st line of each location hierarchy contains the number of assigned location types for this hierarchy
2. Lines 2 ... n can be read out in a single request.

NC variables
placeType (T, TT)

Magazine location hierarchy
Magazine location hierarchy
Attention: This variable is called "dummy" in the non-Windows HMI and the PLC.
colIndex: Number of the location hierarchy + 1
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
Wert aus Zeile 1
3.2.7.36 TU: Tool data for OEM
(Previous designation: TUD)
The TUD data module is defined as a two-dimensional variable array. The module contains user-defined data
for all tools. Each element can be addressed via a column and line index:
The column index is the number of the user-defined tool parameter. The number of tool parameters (columns)
is given by the variable "$$numToolParams_tu" in module Y in area N.
The line index is the tool number. If non-existent tools are accessed, the request is acknowledged negatively.
The user-defined tool data are all of the same type.
data (T, TU) $TC_TPCx[y] x = ParameterNo y = FBW

ToolNo
User-defined tool parameters
User-defined tool parameter. Important: This is a two-dimensional variable, the column index is the parameter number.
The data type in the NCK is specified by MD18095 $MN_MM_TYPE_CC_TDA_PARAM, and can be determined from the
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
32000

NC variables
dataStr (T, TU) $TC_TPCx[y] x = ParameterNo y =

ToolNo
User-defined tool parameter (string type)
User-defined tool parameter (type string)
Important: 2-dimensional variable. Column index 1000 is the parameter number. The line number is the tool number.
With access to column 1000 + parameter no.: read and write to variable if the parameter is of the type "string".

- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
32000
3.2.7.37 TUE: Tool edge data for OEM
(Previous designation: TUO)
The data module TUE is organized as a two-dimensional variable field. The module contains user-defined edge
data for all tools. Each element can be addressed via a column and line index:
The column index is the tool number (T number), i.e. the user-defined data for all edges of a tool can be found
in one column. The assignment of a tool to a T number can be drawn from the module Tool Directory in te
related area T. If a non-existant tool number is entered for the column index, then the job is acknowledged
negatively.
The number of lines results from the number of parameters per edge and from the number of edges of a tool:
maxNumberof lines = $$numCuttEdgeParams_tu * $$/T/TV/numCuttEdges (T number)
The number of parameters per edge "$$numCuttEdgeParams_tu" can be drawn from module Y in area N. The
number of edges "$$/T/TV/numCuttEdges" which can be tool-specific, can be drawn from module TV in the
related area T.
If required, several lines may be addressed so that - for example - in one job all user-defined edge data of a
tool can be read. The data are all of the same type.
edgeData (T, TUE) $TC_DPCx[y,z] x=ParamNo,y=ToolNo FBW

z=EdgeNo
User-defined cutting edge parameter
User-defined tool edge parameter. Important: This is a two-dimensional variable, the column index is the T number.
The data type in the NCK is specified by MD18097 $MN_MM_TYPE_CC_TOA_PARAM, and can be determined from the

NC variables
edgeData (T, TUE) $TC_DPCx[y,z] x=ParamNo,y=ToolNo FBW

z=EdgeNo
- TYPE_DOUBLE
Addressing
tEdges_Tool
3.2.7.38 TUM: Mgazine user data
This block contains the user magazine data
The TUM block is not intended for new developments.
userData (T, TUM)

Magazine user data for a tool magazine
Magazine user data for a tool magazine. These parameters can only be used if the machine data
$MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM and
This block exists only for compatibility reasons. New developments should be made with the T/TUMD block. (The data
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
$$numMagParams_u
3.2.7.39 TUMD: User magazine data double
This block contains the user magazine data (double)

NC variables
userDataDouble (T, TUMD) $TC_MAPCx[y] x = ParameterNo y =

MagazineNo
Magazine user data for a tool magazine
Magazine user data for a tool magazine. These parameters can only be used if the machine data
$MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM and
Replaces the obsolete block T / TUM (same access, the only data type there is "TYPE_DWORD")
The data type in the NCK is specified by MD18091 $MN_MM_TYPE_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM, and can be determined
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$numMagParams_u
3.2.7.40 TUP: Magazine place user data
This block contains the user magazine location data
The TUP block is not intended for new developments.
userPlaceData (T, TUP)

Magazine location user data for a tool magazine
Magazine location user data for a tool magazine. These parameters can only be used if the machine data
$MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM and
This block exists only for compatibility reasons. New developments should be made with the T/TUPD block. (The data
- TYPE_DWORD 0
Addressing
$$numMagLocParams_u * $$magNrPlaces
3.2.7.41 TUPD: User magazine location data double
This block contains the user magazine location data (double)

NC variables
userPlaceDataDouble (T, TUPD) $TC_MPPCx[y,z] x=ParamNo y=Magazi‐

neNo z=MagPlaceNo
Magazine location user data for a tool magazine
Magazine location user data for a tool magazine. These parameters can only be used if the machine data
$MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM and
Replaces the obsolete block T / TUP (same access, the only data type there is "TYPE_DWORD")
The data type in the NCK is specified by MD18093 $MN_MM_TYPE_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM, and can be determined
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
$$numMagLocParams_u * $$magNrPlaces
3.2.7.42 TUS: User monitoring data
This block contains the user monitoring data of the tool data
userData (T, TUS) $TC_MOPCx[y,z] x=ParamNo,y=T-Num‐

ber,z=Edge
User data for monitoring a cutting edge.
User data for monitoring of a cutting edge. These parameters can only be used if the machine data
$MN_MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM and $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK have been set accordingly.
The data type in the NCK is specified by MD18099 $MM_TYPE_CC_MON_PARAM, and can be determined from the file
_N_COMPLETE_TOA_ACX. The data type for the OPI is changed to the data type TYPE_DOUBLE, and has to be
- TYPE_DOUBLE 0
Addressing
tEdges_Tool

NC variables
3.2.7.43 TV: Tool data, directory
Data module TV can be used for the following purposes:
1. For displaying all tools of a magazine. The most important tool information is contained in module TV. Availa‐
ble tools are sorted consecutively in ascending order of T-number. This means that variables that are defined
as one-dimensional arrays in this module contain all the tool information without any gaps. The line index with
which a specific array is addressed has no connection with the tool number but is only a serial number. Insert‐
ing/deleting tools changes the contents of a line dynamically.
2. Access to tool data in modules TD, TG, TO, TS, TU and TUE. Before an element in one of the above mod‐
ules is accessed, module TV should be consulted to ascertain which tools are actually defined.
SW 5.1 and later: Variable $$modeSpindleToolRevolver (module N/Y, global system data) defines for circular
magazines (T / TM, magazine data, general data, MagKind=3) whether the tool in OPI modules "T / TP, maga‐
zine data, location data", "T / TD, tool data, general data", "T/TV, tool data, directory" and "T / AEV, working
offsets, directory" remains (new functionality) in its circular magazine location during operation or changes to
the buffer magazine (earlier behaviour).
Associated system data:

$$modeSpindleToolRevolver (module N / Y, global system data) with SW 5.1 and later.
TnumWZV (T, TV)

Last assigned T-number for tool management
Last assigned T-number for tool management
The last assigned T number is the T number of the new tool
last created in the NCK through an NC language command or the PI service.
- TYPE_UWORD
nrDuplo (T, TV)

Duplo number
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numTools
numCuttEdges (T, TV)

Number of cutting edges of a tool

NC variables
numCuttEdges (T, TV)

- TYPE_UWORD 9
Addressing
$$numTools
numTools (T, TV)

Number of tools in the area TO
- TYPE_UWORD 0 MD MM_NUM_TOOL
toolIdent (T, TV)

Tool identifier
- TYPE_STRING
Addressing
$$numTools
toolInMag (T, TV)

Current magazine
Current magazine in which the tool is located
Return value 0 = tool not loaded
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numTools
toolInPlace (T, TV)

Current location
Current location in which the tool is located
Return value 0 = tool not loaded

NC variables
toolInPlace (T, TV)

- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numTools
toolNo (T, TV)

T number
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
$$numTools
numToolGroups (T, TV)

numToolGroups
- TYPE_UWORD
Addressing
Read access
3.2.8 DriveVsa: Feed drive data
V-M
r0020 (V, M)
Speed setpoint smoothed
The currently smoothed speed setpoint at the input of the speed controller resp. the U/f characteristic (after the interpola‐
tor)
- TYPE_FLOAT
Read access

NC variables
r0021 (V, M)
Actual speed smoothed
Smoothed actual motor speed value
- TYPE_FLOAT
Read access
r0027 (V, M)
Absolute actual current smoothed
Smoothed actual current value
- TYPE_FLOAT
Read access
r0034 (V, M)
Motor utilization thermal
Thermal motor load
- TYPE_FLOAT
Read access
r0035 (V, M)
Motor temperature
Display and connector output for the actual temperature in the motor.
- TYPE_FLOAT
Read access

NC variables

No cyclic service may be set up on variables in this module. Only single variable access is permitted.
load611U (V, S)
Load 611U
- TYPE_FLOAT

Interface signals - overview 4
4.1 Overview of the PLC blocks
4.1.1 Organization blocks (OBs)
Table 4-1 Assignment of the organization blocks (OBs)
OB No. Designation Meaning Package

1 CYCLE Cyclic execution GP
40 ALARM Process alarms GP
82 DIAGNOSTIC ALARM Asynchronous error GP
alarm
86 RACK FAILURE Asynchronous error GP
alarm
100 RESTART Startup/restart GP
4.1.2 Function blocks (FBs)
Table 4-2 Assignment of the function blocks (FBs)
Number Designation Meaning

0 - 29 --- Reserved for Siemens
1 RUN_UP Basic program start-up
2 GET Read NC variables
3 PUT Write NC variables
4 PI_SERV PI services
5 GETGUD Read GUD variable
7 PI_SERV2 General PI services
9 M2N M to N transition block
10 SI_relay Safety Integrated relay
11 SI_Braketest Safety Integrated brake test
29 Diagnostics Signal recorder and data trigger diagnostics
30 - 999* --- Free for user assignment
1024 - upper --- Free for user assignment
limit
* The actual upper limit of the block number depends on the PLC CPU contained in the selected NCU.

4.1.3 Function blocks (FCs)
Table 4-3 Assignment of the function blocks (FCs)
Number Designation Meaning

2 GP_HP Basic program cyclic part
3 GP_PRAL Basic program alarm-controlled part
5 GP_DIAG Basic program diagnostic alarm and module failure
6 TM_TRANS2 Transfer block for tool management and multitool
7 TM_REV Transfer block for tool change with turret
8 TM_TRANS Transfer block for tool management
9 ASUB Asynchronous subprograms
10 AL_MSG Alarms/messages
12 AUXFU Call interface for user auxiliary functions
13 BHG_DISP Display control for the handheld unit
17 YDelta Star-delta changeover
18 SpinCtrl Spindle control for PLC
19 MCP_IFM Distribution of MCP and operating software signals at the
interface (milling machine)
21 Transfer PLC-NC data exchange
22 TM_DIR Direction selection for tool management
24 MCP_IFM2 Transferring MCP signals to the NC/PLC interface
25 MCP_IFT Transferring MCP/BT signals to the NC/PLC interface
26 HPU_MCP Transmission of the HT 8 signals to the interface
30 - 999* --- Free for user assignment
1005 AG_SEND Transferring data to the Ethernet CP
1006 AG_RECV Receiving data from the Ethernet CP
1024 - upper --- Free for user assignment
limit
* The actual upper limit of the block number depends on the PLC CPU contained in the selected NCU.
4.1.4 Data blocks (DBs)
Note
The number of DBs to be set up depends on the parameterization made in the NC machine
data.
Note
Data blocks of channels, axes/spindles and tool management that have not been activated
are available for the user.

Table 4-4 Overview of the data blocks (DBs)
DB No. Designation Interface for

1 --- Reserved for Siemens
2-5 PLC-MELD PLC messages
6-8 --- Basic program
9 NC-COMPILE NC compile cycles
10 NC INTERFACE Central NC
11 Mode group Mode group
12 --- Computer link and transport system
13 --- Reserved for Hymnos
14 --- Reserved for basic program
15 --- Basic program
16 --- PI Service definitions
17 --- Version identifier
18 --- Reserved for basic program (SPL interface (Safety
Integrated))
19 --- Operating software
20 --- PLC machine data
21 - 30 CHANNEL 1 ... CHANNEL NC channels
10
31 - 61 AXIS 1 ... AXIS 31 Axes/spindle
62 - 70 --- Free for user assignment
71 - 74 --- User tool management
75 - 76 --- M group decoding
77 --- MCP, HHU signals (for SDB210)
81 - 127 --- Free for user assignment
1000 --- Ctrl-Energy
1001 --- SENTRON PAC
1002 … 1070 --- Reserved for Siemens
1071 --- Multitool: Loading/unloading magazine
1072 --- Multitool: Spindle
1073 --- Multitool: Revolver
4.1.5 Timer block
Table 4-5 Assigned times
Timer No. Meaning

0 - 512* Free for user assignment
* The actual upper limit of the timer number (DB) depends on the PLC CPU contained in the selected
NCU.

4.2 Signals from/to the machine control panel
4.2.1 M version, signals from the MCP: Input image
Table 4-6 M version, signals from the MCP: Input image
Signals from the MCP (keys) (MCP → PLC)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
EB n + 0 Spindle override Operating mode
D C B A JOG TEACH IN MDI AUTO
EB n + 1 Machine function
REPOS REF INCvar INC10000 INC1000 INC100 INC10 INC1
EB n + 2 Key-operat‐ Key-operat‐ Spindle *Spindle Feedrate *Feedrate NC start *NC stop
ed switch ed switch start stop start stop
position 0 position 2
EB n + 3 Key-operat‐ Feedrate override
ed switch
position 1
Reset Single E D C B A
block
EB n + 4 Direction keys Key-operat‐ Axis selection
ed switch
position 3
+R15 -R13 Rapid tra‐ X R1 4th axis R4 7th axis R7 R10
verse R14
EB n + 5 Axis selection
Y R2 Z R3 5th axis R5 Travel com‐ R11 9th axis R9 8th axis R8 6th axis R6
mand
MCS/WCS
EB n + 6 Freely assignable customer keys
T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8
4.2.2 M version, signals to the MCP: Output image
Table 4-7 M version, signals to the MCP: Output image
Signals to the MCP (LED) (PLC → MCP)

AB n + 0 Machine function Operating mode
INC1000 INC100 INC10 INC1 JOG TEACH IN MDI AUTO


AB n + 1 Feedrate *Feedrate NC start *NC stop Machine function
start stop
REPOS REF INCvar INC10000
AB n + 2 Direction Axis selection Single Spindle *Spindle
key X R1 4th axis R4 7th axis R7 R10 block start stop
-R13
AB n + 3 Axis selection Direction
Z R3 5th axis R5 Travel com‐ R11 9th axis R9 8th axis R8 6th axis R6 key
mand +R15
MCS/WCS
R12
AB n + 4 Freely assignable customer keys Y R2
T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15
AB n + 5 Freely assignable customer keys
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8
4.2.3 T version, signals from the MCP: Input image
Table 4-8 T version, signals from the MCP: Input image

D C B A JOG TEACH IN MDI AUTO
EB n + 1 Machine function
REPOS REF INCvar INC10000 INC1000 INC100 INC10 INC1
EB n + 2 Key-operat‐ Key-operat‐ Spindle *Spindle Feedrate *Feedrate NC start *NC stop
ed switch ed switch start stop start stop
position 0 position 2
EB n + 3 Key-operat‐ Feedrate override
ed switch
position 1
Reset Single E D C B A
block
EB n + 4 Direction keys Key-operat‐ Direction keys
ed switch
position 3
R15 R13 R14 +Y R1 -Z R4 -C R7 R10
EB n + 5 Direction keys
+X R2 +C R3 Rapid tra‐ Travel com‐ R11 -Y R9 -X R8 +Z R6
verse over‐ mand MCS/
ride R5 WCS R12
T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15


T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8
4.2.4 T version, signals to the MCP: Output image
Table 4-9 T version, signals to the MCP: Output image

AB n + 0 Machine function Operating mode
INC1000 INC100 INC10 INC1 JOG TEACH IN MDI AUTO
AB n + 1 Feedrate *Feedrate NC start *NC stop Machine function
start stop
REPOS REF INCvar INC10000
AB n + 2 Direction keys Single Spindle *Spindle
R13 +Y R1 -Z R4 -C R7 R10 block start stop
AB n + 3 Direction keys
R3 R5 Travel com‐ R11 -Y R9 -X R8 +Z R6 R15
mand
MCS/WCS
AB n + 4 Freely assignable customer keys Direction
T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 key +X R2
AB n + 5 Freely assignable customer keys
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8
4.2.5 Slimline version, signals from the MCP: Input image
Table 4-10 Slimline version, signals from the MCP: Input image
Signals from the slimline MCP (switches and keys) (MCP → PLC)
*NC stop SP - SP 100% SP + SINGLEB JOG MDI AUTO
EB n + 1 Spindle Key-operat‐ Machine function
ed switch
NC start SP right *SP stop SP left INT 3 REF REPOS TEACH IN
EB n + 2 Feedrate Key-operat‐ Machine functions
ed switch
Start *Stop INCvar INT 0 INC1000 INC100 INC10 INC1

Signals from the slimline MCP (switches and keys) (MCP → PLC)
EB n + 3 Key-operated switch Feedrate override
Reset INT 2 INT 1 E D C B A
EB n + 4 Direction keys Optional customer keys
+R15 -R13 Rapid tra‐ KT4 KT3 KT2 KT1 KT0
verse R14
T17 KT5 6 5 4 Z Y X
EB n + 6 Freely assignable customer keys MCS/WCS Freely assignable customer keys
T9 T10 T11 T12 T14 T15 T16
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8
4.2.6 Slimline version, signals to the MCP: Output image
Table 4-11 Slimline version, signals to the MCP: Output image
Signals to the slimline MCP (LED) (PLC → MCP)

NC stop SP - SP 100% SP + SINGLEB JOG MDI AUTO
EB n + 1 Spindle Machine function
NC start SP right SP stop SP left Not as‐ REF REPOS TEACH IN
signed
EB n + 2 Feedrate Machine functions
Start Stop INCvar Not as‐ INC1000 INC100 INC10 INC1
signed
EB n + 3 Not assigned
EB n + 4 Direction keys Optional customer keys

+R15 -R13 Rapid tra‐ KT4 KT3 KT2 KT1 KT0
verse R14
T17 KT5 6 5 4 Z Y X
EB n + 6 Freely assignable customer keys Freely assignable customer keys
T9 T10 T11 T12 MCS/WCS T14 T15 T16
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8

4.3 Signals from/to the handheld unit HT 2
4.3.1 Signals from the handheld unit: Input image
Table 4-12 Signals from the handheld unit: Input image
Signals from the handheld unit (keys) (HHU / HT 2 → PLC)

IB m + 0 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
IB m + 1 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
IB m + 2 Feedrate Free T2 AUTO NC stop Spindle Feed stop Free T1 JOG
start key stop key
IB m + 3 Free T3 Handwheel 4th axis Z Y X NC start Spindle
key start
IB m + 4 Direction Rapid tra‐ Direction Free T4
key verse over‐ key + key
ride
IB m + 5 Acknowl‐ Key-operat‐ Rapid traverse/feedrate override switch
edgement ed switch E D C B A
Digital dis‐
play
4.3.2 Signals to the handheld unit: Output image
Table 4-13 Signals to the handheld unit: Output image
Signals to the handheld unit (LED) (PLC → HHU / HT 2)

QB m + 0 Always 1 Free T4 Free T3 Free T2 Free T1
key key key key
QB m + 1 New data Selecting the line
for selec‐ 3 and 4 1 and 2
ted line
QB m + 2 Feedrate Rapid tra‐ AUTO NC stop Spindle Feed stop Direction JOG
start verse over‐ stop key +
ride
QB m + 3 Direction Handwheel 4th axis Z Y X NC start Spindle
key + start
Digital display of the handheld unit
QB m + 4 Default setting of 1st character (right) of selected line
QB m + 5 Default setting of 2nd character of selected line

Signals to the handheld unit (LED) (PLC → HHU / HT 2)

QB m + 6 Default setting of 3rd character of selected line
QB m + 7 Default setting of 4th character of selected line
QB m + 19 Default setting of 16th character (left) of selected line
Note
The parameterization or configuration of the various MCP/HHU versions is described in:
References
● Manual, Operator Components and Networking
● Function Manual, Basic Functions: Basic PLC program (P3)

4.4.1 Signals from the MCP simulation: Input image
Table 4-14 Signals from the MCP simulation: Input image
Signals from the MCP simulation (HT 8 → PLC)

EB n + 0 Function key block
REF TEACH AUTO MDI JOG QUIT Reset Work/
Machine
EB n + 1 Function key block
CPF U4 U3 BigFct U2 U1 INC REPOS
(U key)
EB n + 2 Change‐ Traversing keys (JOG) positive direction
over axes
(HMI Ad‐
vanced on‐
ly)
Ax7-Ax12 Ax6 Ax5 Ax4 Ax3 Ax2 Ax1
instead of
Ax1-Ax6
EB n + 3 Traversing keys (JOG) negative direction
Ax6 Ax5 Ax4 Ax3 Ax2 Ax1
EB n + 4
U9 U10 U11 U12 U13 U14 U15 U16
EB n + 5
U8 U7 U6 U5 SBL
EB n + 6 Start key block
Reserved HT 8 SF2 SF1 SF4 SF3 Start Stop
EB n + 7 Feedrate override
E D C B A
4.4.2 Signals to the MCP simulation: Output image
Table 4-15 Signals from the MCP simulation: Output image
Signals to the MCP simulation (PLC → HT 8)

AB n + 0 Function key block
REF TEACH AUTO MDI JOG QUIT Reset Work/
Machine
AB n + 1 Function key block
U4 U3 U2 U1 INC REPOS

4.5 PLC alarms/messages
Signals to the MCP simulation (PLC → HT 8)

AB n + 2 Axes 7 - n Traversing keys (JOG) positive direction
selected
Ax6 Ax5 Ax4 Ax3 Ax2 Ax1
AB n + 3 Traversing keys (JOG) negative direction
For WCS: Ax6 Ax5 Ax4 Ax3 Ax2 Ax1
no ma‐
chine axes
AB n + 4
U9 U10 U11 U12 U13 U14 U15 U16
AB n + 5
U8 U7 U6 U5 SBL
AB n + 6 Start key block
Display tra‐ SF2 SF1 SF4 SF3 Start Stop
versing
keys
AB n + 7
4.5.1 FC 10 alarms in the DB2 (FB1: "ExtendAIMsg" = FALSE)
Message type
● FM: A fault message with the associated event number as fault number is triggered by
the signal.
● OM: An operating message with the associated event number as message number is
triggered by the signal.

References
A detailed description of error and operating messages can be found in the:
Function Manual, Basic Functions; Chapter "P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D
sl", "Block descriptions", "FC10: AL_MSG - fault and operating messages"
Table 4-16 DB2, channel range 1
DB2 Signals for PLC events (PLC → HMI)

FB1 parameter "ExtendAIMsg" = FALSE
(message
type)
Channel 1
Feedrate disable (event no.: 510000-510015)
0 (FM) 510007 510006 510005 510004 510003 510002 510001 510000
1 (OM) 510015 510014 510013 510012 510011 510010 510009 510008
2 (FM) Feedrate and read-in disable, byte 1 (event no.: 510100-510107)
4 (OM) Feedrate and read-in disable, byte 3 (event no.: 510116-510123)
6 (FM) Read-in disable, byte 1 (event no.: 510200-510207)
8 (OM) Read-in disable, byte 3 (event no.: 510216-510223)
10 (FM) NC start disable, byte 1 (event no.: 510300-510307)
11 (OM) NC start disable, byte 2 (event no.: 510308-510315)
12 (FM) Feedrate stop, geo axis 1, byte 1 (event no.: 511100-511107)
13 (OM) Feedrate stop, geo axis 1, byte 2 (event no.: 511108-511115)

(message
type)
Channel 2
18 (FM) 520007 520006 520005 520004 520003 520002 520001 520000
19 (OM) 520015 520014 520013 520012 520011 520010 520009 520008


(message
type)

(message
type)
Channel 3
36 (FM) 530007 530006 530005 530004 530003 530002 530001 530000
37 (OM) 530015 530014 530013 530012 530011 530010 530009 530008


(message
type)

(message
type)
Channel 4
54 (FM) 540007 540006 540005 540004 540003 540002 540001 540000
55 (OM) 540015 540014 540013 540012 540011 540010 540009 540008

(message
type)
Channel 5


(message
type)
72 (FM) 550007 550006 550005 550004 550003 550002 550001 550000
73 (OM) 550015 550014 550013 550012 550011 550010 550009 550008

(message
type)
Channel 6
90 (FM) 560007 560006 560005 560004 560003 560002 560001 560000
91 (OM) 560015 560014 560013 560012 560011 560010 560009 560008


(message
type)

(message
type)
Channel 7
108 (FM) 570007 570006 570005 570004 570003 570002 570001 570000
109 (OM) 570015 570014 570013 570012 570011 570010 570009 570008


(message
type)
Channel 8
126 (FM) 580007 580006 580005 580004 580003 580002 580001 580000
127 (OM) 580015 580014 580013 580012 580011 580010 580009 580008
Channels 9 and 10 not implemented
Table 4-24 DB2, axis ranges

(message
type)
Axis/spindle
Feedrate stop / spindle stop for axis/spindle 1 (event no.: 600100-600115)
144 (FM) 600107 600106 600105 600104 600103 600102 600101 600100
145 (OM) 600115 600114 600113 600112 600111 600110 600109 600108
146 (FM) Feedrate stop / spindle stop for axis/spindle 2, byte 1 (event no.: 600200-600207)
147 (OM) Feedrate stop / spindle stop for axis/spindle 2, byte 2 (event no.: 600208-600215)


(message
type)
162 (FM) Feedrate stop/spindle stop for axis/spindle 10 byte 1 (event no.: 601000-601007)
163 (OM) Feedrate stop/spindle stop for axis/spindle 10 byte 2 (event no.: 601008-601015)
Axes 19 – 31 not realized
Table 4-25 DB2, user ranges

(message type)
User ranges
User range 0 (event no.: 700000-700015)


(message type)
180 (FM) 700007 700006 700005 700004 700003 700002 700001 700000
181 (FM) 700015 700014 700013 700012 700011 700010 700009 700008
182 (FM) User range 0: Byte 3 (event no.: 700016-700023)
184 (OM) User range 0: Byte 5 (event no.: 700032-700039)
188 - 191 (FM) User range 1: Byte 1 - 4 (event no.: 700100-700131)
192 - 195 (OM) User range 1, bytes 5 - 8 (event no.: 700132-700163)
200 - 203 (OM) User range 2: Byte 5 - 8 (event no.: 700232-700263)


(message type)
Note
Parameterizing user ranges
The number of user ranges (maximum of 32) can be parameterized using FB 1 "MsgUser".

4.5.2 FC 10 alarms in the DB2 (FB1: "ExtendAIMsg" = TRUE)
Message type
● FM: A fault message with the associated event number as fault number is triggered by
the signal.
● OM: An operating message with the associated event number as message number is
triggered by the signal.
References
A detailed description of fault and operating messages can be found in the following manual:
Function Manual, Basic Functions; Chapter "P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D
sl", "Block descriptions", "FC10: AL_MSG - fault and operating messages"

FB1 parameter "ExtendAIMsg" = TRUE
(message
type)
Signals WITHOUT the display of a fault/operating message (DBB0 - 309)
Channel 1
0 Feedrate disable
1 Feedrate disable
2 Read-in disable
3 Read-in disable
4 Start disable
5 Start disable
6 Feedrate stop, geo axis 1, byte 1
12 - 119 Channel 2 - channel 10, see above "Channel 1"
Axis/spindle 1
120 Feedrate stop / spindle stop, byte 1
121 Feedrate stop / spindle stop, byte 2
122 - 181 Axis / spindle 2 - 31, see above "Axis /spindle 1"
Additional values for user range 0
182 Additional value for event number 700000
... ...


(message
type)
Signals WITH the display of a fault/operating message (from DBB 310)

Channel 1
310 (FM) 510007 510006 510005 510004 510003 510002 510001 510000
311 (OM) 510015 510014 510013 510012 510011 510010 510009 510008
312 (FM) Feedrate and read-in disable: Byte 1 (event no.: 510100-510107)
313 (FM) Feedrate and read-in disable: Byte 2 (event no.: 510108-510115)
314 (OM) Feedrate and read-in disable: Byte 3 (event no.: 510116-510123)
315 (OM) Feedrate and read-in disable: Byte 4 (event no.: 510124-510131)
316 (FM) Read-in disable Byte 1 (event no.: 510200-510207)
317 (FM) Read-in disable Byte 2 (event no.: 510208-510215)
318 (OM) Read-in disable Byte 3 (event no.: 510216-510223)
319 (OM) Read-in disable Byte 4 (event no.: 510224-510231)
320 (FM) NC start disable: Byte 1 (event no.: 510300-510307)
321 (OM) NC start disable: Byte 2 (event no.: 510308-510315)
322 (FM) Feedrate stop, geo axis 1: Byte 1 (event no.: 511100-511107)
323 (OM) Feedrate stop, geo axis 1: Byte 2 (event no.: 511108-511115)

(message
type)
Channel 2
328 (FM) 520007 520006 520005 520004 520003 520002 520001 520000
329 (OM) 520015 520014 520013 520012 520011 520010 520009 520008


(message
type)

(message
type)
Channel 3
346 (FM) 530007 530006 530005 530004 530003 530002 530001 530000
347 (OM) 530015 530014 530013 530012 530011 530010 530009 530008


(message
type)
Channel 4
364 (FM) 540007 540006 540005 540004 540003 540002 540001 540000
365 (OM) 540015 540014 540013 540012 540011 540010 540009 540008

(message
type)
Channel 5
382 (FM) 550007 550006 550005 550004 550003 550002 550001 550000
383 (OM) 550015 550014 550013 550012 550011 550010 550009 550008


(message
type)

(message
type)
Channel 6
400 (FM) 560007 560006 560005 560004 560003 560002 560001 560000
401 (OM) 560015 560014 560013 560012 560011 560010 560009 560008


(message
type)
Channel 7
418 (FM) 570007 570006 570005 570004 570003 570002 570001 570000
419 (OM) 570015 570014 570013 570012 570011 570010 570009 570008

(message
type)
Channel 8
436 (FM) 580007 580006 580005 580004 580003 580002 580001 580000
437 (OM) 580015 580014 580013 580012 580011 580010 580009 580008


(message
type)

(message
type)
Channel 9
454 (FM) 590007 590006 590005 590004 590003 590002 590001 590000
455 (OM) 590015 590014 590013 590012 590011 590010 590009 590008


(message
type)
Channel 10
472 (FM) 500007 500006 500005 500004 500003 500002 500001 500000
473 (OM) 500015 500014 500013 500012 500011 500010 500009 500008
Table 4-36 DB2, axis ranges

(message
type)
Axis/spindle
Feedrate stop / spindle stop for axis/spindle 1 (event no.: 600100-600115)
490 (FM) 600107 600106 600105 600104 600103 600102 600101 600100
491 (OM) 600115 600114 600113 600112 600111 600110 600109 600108
492 (FM) Feedrate stop/spindle stop for axis/spindle 2 (event no.: 600200-600207)
493 (OM) Feedrate stop/spindle stop for axis/spindle 2 (event no.: 600208-600215)


(message
type)


(message
type)
Table 4-37 DB2, user ranges

(message type)
User ranges
User range 0 (event no.: 700000-700015)
554 (FM) 700007 700006 700005 700004 700003 700002 700001 700000
555 (FM) 700015 700014 700013 700012 700011 700010 700009 700008


(message type)
730 – 733 (FM) User range 22: Byte 1 - 4 (event no.: 702200-702231)


(message type)
810 - 813 (FM) User area 32: Byte 1 - 4 (event no.: 703200 - 703231)
814 - 817 (BM) User area 32: Byte 5 - 8 (event no.: 703232 - 703263)
822 - 825 (OM) User area 33: Byte 5 - 8 (event no.: 703332 - 703363)
858 - 861 (FM) User area 38: Byte 5 - 8 (event no.: 703800 -703831)
862 - 865 (OM) User area 38: Byte 1 - 4 (event no.: 703832 -703863)
866 - 869 (FM) User area 39: Byte 5 - 8 (event no.: 703900 -703931)
870 - 873 (OM) User area 39: Byte 1 - 4 (event no.: 703932 -703963)
874 - 877 (FM) User area 40: Byte 1 - 4 (event no.: 704000-704031)
878 - 881 (OM) User area 40: Byte 5 - 8 (event no.: 704032-704063)


(message type)
962 -965 (FM) User area 51: Byte 1 - 4 (event no.: 705100-705131)
1002 - 1005 User area 56: Byte 1 - 4 (event no.: 705600-705631)
(FM)
(OM)
1010 -1013 (FM) User area 57: Byte 1 - 4 (event no.: 705700-705731)
(OM)
(FM)
(OM)
(FM)
(OM)
(FM)

4.6 Signals from/to the NC, PLC and operating software

(message type)
(FM)
(OM)
(FM)
(OM)
(FM)
1062 -1065 (BM) User area 63: Byte 5 - 8 (event no.: 706332-706363)
Note
Parameterizing user ranges
The number of user ranges (maximum of 64) can be parameterized using FB 1 "MsgUser".
4.6.1 DB10, onboard inputs and outputs of the NC
Table 4-38 DB10, onboard inputs and outputs of the NC
DB10 Signals to the NC (PLC → NC)

DBB0 Disable of the digital NC inputs
see also (Page 1367)
Input without hardware Input onboard
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DBB1 Setting of the digital NC inputs from the PLC
Input without hardware Input onboard
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DBB2 - Not assigned
DBB3


DBB4 Disable of the digital NC outputs
Output without hardware Output onboard
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DBB5 Overwrite mask of the digital NC outputs
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DBB6 Setting value of the digital NC outputs from the PLC
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DBB7 Input mask of the digital NC outputs
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DBB8 - Machine axis numbers table for FC 19, FC 24, FC 25, FC 26 (1st MCP)
DBB29
DBW30 Upper limit of the machine axis numbers for FC 19, FC 24 (1st MCP)
With 0, the maximum number of machine axis numbers applies
DBB32 - Machine axis numbers table for FC 19, FB 24, FB 25, FB 26 (2nd MCP)
DBB53
DBW54 Upper limit of the machine axis numbers for FC 19, FC 24 (2nd MCP)
With 0, the maximum number of machine axis numbers applies

4.6.2 DB10, general signals to the NC
Table 4-39 DB10, general signals to the NC

DBB56 Key-operated switch position Acknowl‐ Emergen‐
see also (Page 1371) edge Emer‐ cy Stop
gency Stop see
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
see also
also (Page
(Page 1371)
1370)
DBB57 Reserved INC inputs
in the
mode
group
range ac‐
tive
DBB58 Collision avoidance: Deactivate protection area group
For operating mode: JOG For operating mode: AUTOMATIC
Workpieces Workholder Tools Machine Workpieces Workholder Tools Machine
DBB59
4.6.3 DB10, onboard inputs and outputs from the NC/operating software
Table 4-40 DB10, onboard inputs and outputs from the NC/operating software
DB10 Signals from the NC (NC → PLC)

DBB60 Actual value of the digital NC inputs Actual value of the digital onboard inputs of the NC
Input 8 Input 7 Input 6 Input 5 Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1
DBB61 -
DBB63
DBB64 Setpoint for the digital outputs of the NC without Setpoint for the digital onboard outputs of the NC
hardware see also (Page 1373)
Output 8 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1
DBB65 -
DBB67
DBB68 Handwheel 1 is operated
DBB71 Change counter, inch/metric system of units


DBB72 Status of the displayed actual value screen (1st MCP)
HT 8 → op‐ Traversing MCS / Display val‐
erating soft‐ keys shown WCS id
ware
DBB73 Status of the displayed actual value screen (2nd MCP)
HT 8 → op‐ Traversing MCS / Display val‐
erating soft‐ keys shown WCS id
ware
DBB74 - Machine axis numbers of the displayed axes (1st MCP)
DBB79 MCPT1AxisFromHMI
HT 8 → op‐
erating soft‐
ware
DBB80 - Machine axis numbers of the displayed axes (2nd MCP)
DBB85 MCP2AxisFromHMI
HT 8 → op‐
erating soft‐
ware
DBW86 Reserved
DBB88 Reserved
4.6.4 DB10, selection and status signals from the operating software
Table 4-41 DB10, selection and status signals from the operating software

DBB90
SINUMER‐
IK Inte‐
grate → PL
C
DBB91
PLC → SIN‐
UMERIK
Integrate
DBB92 Suppress fault message in case of fail‐ Slave OK
GP → PLC ure
PN bus DP1 bus MPI/DP PN bus DP1 bus MPI/DP
bus bus


DBB93 Deactivate collision avoidance
Operating JOG mode AUTO mode
soft‐ Workpieces Workholder Tools Machine Workpieces Workholder Tools Machine
ware → PL
C
DBB94 Alarm Alarm, di‐
Direct rect keys 1
keys 2 Communi‐
Communi‐ cation error
cation error
DBB95
DBB96 Set language ID of the operating software

Operating
soft‐
ware → PL
C
DBB97 Channel number for handwheel 1
Operating see also (Page 1375)
soft‐ D C B A
ware → PL
C
soft‐ D C B A
ware → PL
C
soft‐ D C B A
ware → PL
C
DBB100 Axis number for handwheel 1
soft‐ Machine Handwheel Define E D C B A
ware → PL axis 1 selected handwheel
C 1 as con‐
see see
also also tour hand‐
(Page (Page wheel
1378) 1377) see
also
(Page
1376)


C 2 as con‐
see see
(Page (Page wheel
1379) 1379) see
also
(Page
1379)
C 3 as con‐
see see
(Page (Page wheel
1380) 1380) see
also
(Page
1379)
DBB103 Operating Operating AT box Operating Operating Remote di‐
Operating software software ready software software agnostics
soft‐ battery tempera‐ see fan moni‐ monitor active
ware → PL alarm ture limit also toring hard disk see
C see see (Page also
also also 1380) (Page
(Page (Page 1380)
1381) 1380)
4.6.5 DB10, general signals from the NC
Table 4-42 DB10, general signals to the PLC
DB10 Signals to the PLC

DBB104 NC CPU: 1st OB1 cy‐ Op2Key Op1Key HHU ready MCP 2 MCP 1
GP → PLC Ready 1) cle ready ready ready ready
see
also
(Page
1381)
DBB105 TOOLMAN:
GP → PLC Command
Cancel


DBB106 Emergen‐ Collision
NC → PLC cy Stop: avoidance:
Active Protection
see area moni‐
also toring ac‐
(Page tive
1381)
DBB107 Inch sys‐ NCU link: Measuring input activated
NC → PLC tem of Active see also
units (Page 1382)
see
also Pushbut‐ Pushbut‐
(Page ton 2 ton 1
1382)
DBB108 NC ready Drive ready Drives in Operating Operator Operator
NC → PLC see see cyclic oper‐ software panel at panel 2:
also also ation ready MPI: "ready"
(Page (Page see see "ready"
1383) 1383) also also
(Page (Page
1383) 1382)
DBB109 NC bat‐ Air temper‐ Heat sink PC operat‐ NC alarm
NC → PLC tery alarm ature alarm tempera‐ ing system is active
see see ture NCU error see
also also alarm also
(Page (Page see (Page
1385) 1385) also 1384)
(Page
1385)
DBB110 Software cam minus
NC → PLC see also (Page 1386)
7 8 5 4 3 2 1 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24
DBB114 Software cam plus
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8


23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24
DBB118- SINUMERIK Integrate data
DBB121
SINUMERIK
Integrate →
PLC
1)
DB10 DBX104.7 (NC CPU: ready) The signal should be included in the machine safety circuit.
4.6.6 DB10, external digital NC inputs
Table 4-43 DB10, external digital NC inputs

DBB122 Disable of the external digital NC inputs
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
DBB123 Values from the PLC for the external digital NC inputs
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33


40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
4.6.7 DB10, external digital NC outputs
Table 4-44 DB10, external digital NC outputs

DBB130 Disable of the external digital NC outputs
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
DBB131 Overwrite mask for the external digital NC outputs
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
DBB132 Value from the PLC for the external digital NC outputs
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
DBB133 Input mask for the external digital NC outputs
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25


32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
4.6.8 DB10, external analog NC inputs
Table 4-45 DB10, external analog NC inputs

DBB146 Analog NC inputs disabled
Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1
DBB147 Input analog value input for the NC from the PLC
DBW148 Setpoint from the PLC for analog input 1 of the NC



DBW164
4.6.9 DB10, external analog NC outputs
Table 4-46 DB10, external analog NC outputs

DBB166 Overwrite mask for the analog NC outputs
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DBB167 Input mask for the analog NC outputs
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DBB168 Analog NC outputs disabled
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DBB169 Reserved
DBW170 Setpoint from the PLC for analog output 1 of the NC


4.6.10 DB10, external digital NC inputs and outputs
Table 4-47 DB10, external digital NC inputs and outputs

DBB186 Actual value of the external digital NC inputs
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
DBB190 NC setpoint for the external digital NC outputs
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
4.6.11 DB10, analog NC inputs and outputs
Table 4-48 DB10, analog NC inputs and outputs

DBW194 Actual value of analog input 1 of the NC


DBW210 Setpoint of analog output 1 of the NC
4.6.12 DB10, collision avoidance: Protection area active
Table 4-49 DB10, collision avoidance: Protection zone active

DBB226 Collision avoidance: Protection zone active (bit)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8


23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24
39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32
47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40
55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48
63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56
4.6.13 DB10, collision avoidance: Activate protection area
Table 4-50 DB10, collision avoidance: Activate protection zone
DB10 Signals from the PLC (PLC → NC)

DBB234 Collision avoidance: Activate protection zone (bit)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24
39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32


47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40
55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48
63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56
4.6.14 DB10, extension, handwheel signals from the NC
Table 4-51 DB10, extension, handwheel signals from the NC

DBB242 Handwheel 4 is moved
DBB245 Ethernet handwheel is stationary
Handwheel Handwheel Handwheel Handwheel Handwheel Handwheel
6 5 4 3 2 1
DBB246 Reserved
4.6.15 DB10, interface robot status.
Table 4-52 DB10, signals from the robot

DBB248 Robot status byte 0

4.7 Mode group-specific signals
4.6.16 DB10, interface robot status
Table 4-53 DB10, signals to the robot

DBB256 Robot control byte 0
4.7.1 DB11, mode signals 1 to the NC

The start address of a mode group interface can be calculated as follows:
Start address = 20 * (n - 1), with n = mode group number = 1, 2, 3, ...
Table 4-54 DB11, mode signals mode group 1 to NC
DB11 Signals to mode group 1 (PLC → NC)

DBB0 Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode: Requirement
group reset group stop group Stop change dis‐ JOG MDI AUTO
see axes plus see able
see see see
also spindles also see also also also
(Page see (Page also (Page (Page (Page
1415) also 1413) (Page 1412) 1412) 1412)
(Page 1413)
1414)
DBB1 Single block Machine function: Requirement
Type A Type B REF REPOS TEACH IN
see see see see see
also also also also also
(Page (Page (Page (Page (Page
1417) 1416) 1416) 1416) 1415)


DBB2 Machine function: Requirement
Note: The interface must be enabled explicitly: DB10 DBX57.0 (Page 1274) = 1
Continu‐ INCvar INC10000 INC1000 INC100 INC10 INC1
ous travel
active
DBB3
4.7.2 DB11, mode signals 1 from the NC
Table 4-55 DB11, mode signals mode group 1 from NC
DB11 Signals from mode group 1 (NC → PLC)

DBB4 Mode strobe
Operating JOG MDI AUTO
soft‐ see see see
ware → PL also also also
C (Page (Page (Page
1418) 1418) 1418)
DBB5 Machine function strobe
Operating REF REPOS TEACH IN
soft‐ see see see
ware → PL also also also
C (Page (Page (Page
1419) 1419) 1418)
DBB6 All chan‐ NC internal Mode Mode Active operating mode
nels in the JOG active group re‐ group JOG MDI AUTO
reset state /FB1-K1/ set per‐ ready
see see see
see formed see also also also
also /FB1-K1/ also (Page (Page (Page
(Page (Page 1420) 1420) 1419)
1421) 1420)
DBB7 Active machine function
REF REPOS TEACH IN
see see see
also also also
(Page (Page (Page
1422) 1421) 1421)
DBB8 Machine functions: Selection
Note: The interface must be enabled explicitly: DB10 DBX57.0 (Page 1274)= 1
ous travel
active

4.7.3 DB11, mode signals 2 to the NC
Table 4-56 DB11, mode signals mode group 2 to NC

DBB20 Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode: Requirement
group reset group Stop group Stop change dis‐ JOG MDI AUTO
axes plus able
spindles
DBB21 Single block Machine function: Requirement
Type A Type B REF REPOS TEACH IN
DBB22 Machine function: Requirement
Note: The interface must be enabled explicitly: DB10 DBX57.0 = (Page 1274) 1
ous travel
active
DBB23
4.7.4 DB11, mode signals 2 from NC
Table 4-57 DB11, mode signals mode group 2 from NC
DB11 Signals from mode group 2 (NC → PLC)

DBB24 Mode strobe
Operating JOG MDI AUTO
soft‐
ware → PL
C
DBB25 Machine function strobe
Operating REF REPOS TEACH IN
soft‐
ware → PL
C
DBB26 All chan‐ JOG is ac‐ Mode Mode Active operating mode
nels in tive inter‐ group re‐ group JOG MDI AUTO
state: Re‐ nally in the set per‐ ready
set NC formed
REF REPOS TEACH IN
Note: The interface must be enabled explicitly: DB10 DBX57.0 (Page 1277) = 1
ous travel
active

4.8 Safety Integrated (SPL)
4.8.1 DB18, parameterization part
Table 4-58 DB18, parameterization part
DB18 SPL signals (PLC → PLC)

DBB0 -
DBB34
DBB36 Stop E SPL ready
see see
also also
(Page (Page
1422) 1422)
DBB37
4.8.2 DB18, data area / errors
Table 4-59 DB18, data area / errors
DB18 SPL signals (PLC ←→ NC)

/FBSsl/
Data area of the SPL inputs/outputs
DBB38 - SPL_DATA.INSEP [1..32]
DBB41 see also (Page 1423)
DBB42 - SPL_DATA.INSEP [33..64]

DBB46 - SPL_DATA.OUTSEP [1..32]

DBB50 - SPL_DATA.OUTSEP [33..64]

DBB53
Data area for user SPL
DBB54 - SPL_DATA.INSIP [1..32]
DBB57
DBB58 - SPL_DATA.INSIP [33..64]
DBB61
DBB62 - SPL_DATA.OUTSIP [1..32]
DBB65


/FBSsl/
DBB66 - SPL_DATA.OUTSIP [33..64]
DBB69
DBB70 - SPL_DATA.MARKERSIP [1..32]
DBB73
DBB74 - SPL_DATA.MARKERSIP [33..64]
DBB77
Difference in signal level NC - PLC for diagnostics
DBB78 - -DBB81 SPL_DELTA.INSEP [1..32]
DBB81
DBB82 - SPL_DELTA.INSEP [33..64]
DBB85
DBB86 - SPL_DELTA.OUTSEP [1..32]
DBB89
DBB90 - SPL_DELTA.OUTSEP [33..64]
DBB93
DBB94 - SPL_DELTA.INSIP [1..32]
DBB97
DBB98 - SPL_DELTA.INSIP [33..64]
DBB101
DBB102- SPL_DELTA.OUTSIP [1..32]
DBB105
DBB106 - SPL_DELTA.OUTSIP [33..64]
DBB109
DBB110 - SPL_DELTA.MARKERSIP [1..32]
DBB113
DBB114 - SPL_DELTA.MARKERSIP [33..64]
DBB117
DBB118 CMDSI
DBB119 NC signals Systemer‐ Crosswise PROFIsafe
a stop to ror CDC data com‐ communi‐
the PLC parison er‐ cation error
ror, SPL
protection
status
DBD120 STATSI
0 = no error
Crosswise data comparison error tripped
DBD124 CDC stack level display
(diagnostics capability: How many SPL signals currently have a different level)

4.8.3 DB18, additional data areas
Table 4-60 DB18, additional data areas

/FBSIsl/
Data area of the single-channel inputs/outputs
DBB128 PLC_SI_OUT [1..8]
NC → PLC
NC → PLC
NC → PLC
NC → PLC
DBB132 PLC_SI_IN [1..8]
NC → PLC
NC → PLC
NC → PLC
NC → PLC
DBB136- SPL status
DBB137
DBB138 PROFIsafe module(s) for input byte
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DBB139
DBB140 PROFIsafe module(s) for output byte

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DBB141
DBB142 -
DBB149
DBB150 -
DBB157
DBB158 -
DBB188

4.8.4 DB18, F_SENDDP sender
Table 4-61 DB18, F_SENDDP sender

/FBSIsl/
1st F_SENDDP interface: FSDP[1]
DBW190 ERR_REAC
DBB192 SUBS_ON ERROR
DBB193
DBW194 DIAG
DBW196 RETVAL14
DBW198 RETVAL15
2nd F_SENDDP interface: FSDP[2]
DBW200 ERR_REAC
DBB203
DBW204 DIAG
DBW206 RETVAL14
DBW208 RETVAL15
3rd F_SENDDP interface: FSDP[3]
DBW210 ERR_REAC
DBB213
DBW214 DIAG
DBW216 RETVAL14
DBW218 RETVAL15
4.8.5 DB18, F_SENDDP receiver
Table 4-62 DB18, F_SENDDP receiver

/FBSIsl/
1st F_RECVDP interface: FRDP[1]
(SUBS)
DBB220 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DBB221 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
DBB222 REAC
DBB224 ACK_REI


/FBSIsl/
DBB225 SEND ACK_REQ SUBS_ON ERROR
MODE
DBW226 DIAG
DBW228 RETVAL14
DBW230 RETVAL15
2nd F_RECVDP interface: FRDP[2]
(SUBS)
DBB232 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DBB233 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
DBW234
DBB236 ACK_REI
MODE
DBW238 DIAG
DBW240 RETVAL14
DBW242 RETVAL15
3rd F_RECVDP interface: FRDP[3]
(SUBS)
DBB244 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DBB245 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
DBW246 REAC
DBB248 ACK_REI
MODE
DBW250 DIAG
DBW252 RETVAL14
DBW254 RETVAL15
4.8.6 DB18, SPL user data
Table 4-63 DB18, SPL user data

/FBSsl/
DBD256 SPL_USER_DATA[0]

4.8.7 DB18, data area / errors: Extended data area
Table 4-64 DB18, data area / errors: Extended data area
DB18 Signals for the safety SPL (PLC ←→ NC)

/FBSIsl/
Data area of the SPL inputs/outputs
DBD272 SPL_DATA_HF.INSEP [65..96]
DBD288 SPL_DATA_HF.OUTSEP [65..96]
Data area for user SPL

DBD304 SPL_DATA_HF.INSIP [65..96]
DBD320 SPL_DATA_HF.OUTSIP [65..96]
DBD336 SPL_DATA_HF. MARKERSIP [65..96]


/FBSIsl/
Difference in signal level NC - PLC for diagnostics

DBD352 SPL_DELTA_HF.INSEP [65..96]
DBD368 SPL_DELTA_HF.OUTSEP [65..96]
DBD384 SPL_DELTA_HF. INSIP [65..96]
DBD388 SPL_DELTA_HF.INSIP [97..128]
DBD392 SPL_DELTA_HF.INSIP [129..160]
DBD400 SPL_DELTA_HF.OUTSIP [65..96]
DBD416 SPL_DELTA_HF.MARKERSIP [65..96]


/FBSIsl/
DBD420 SPL_DELTA_HF. MARKERSIP [97..128]
4.8.8 DB18, additional data areas: Extended data area
Table 4-65 DB18, additional data areas: Extended data area

/FBSIsl/
Data area of the single-channel inputs/outputs
DBB432 PLCSIOUT_HF [33..40]
von NC
von NC
von NC
von NC
von NC
von NC
von NC
von NC
DBB440 PLCSIIN_HF [33..40]
an NC
an NC
an NC
an NC

4.9 Control/status signals to/from operator panel (OP)

/FBSIsl/
an NC
an NC
an NC
an NC
4.9.1 DB19, signals to the operator panel (OP)
Table 4-66 DB19, signals to the operator panel (OP)
DB19 Signals from the operator panel (OP)

(PLC → operating software)
DBB0 Interface of 1st Control (DBB0 - DBB49)
Actual val‐ Save to ac‐ HMI Ad‐ Delete re‐ Delete can‐ Key lock Darken Brighten
ue in the tion log vanced: call alarms cel alarms see screen screen
WCS, (1) / Shutdown see see also see see
MCS (0) also also (Page also also
see (Page (Page 1425) (Page (Page
also 1426) 1426) 1424) 1424)
(Page
1426)
DBB1 Rights for External
the exter‐ viewer
nal viewer
DBB2
DBB4
DBB6 Analog spindle 1: Utilization as a percentage
DBB7 Analog spindle 2: Utilization as a percentage
DBB8 Channel number of the machine control panel to the control
DBB9 Reserved selection Autotool OEM2 OEM1
measure


(PLC → operating software)
DBB10 Hardkeys
DBB11 Reserved
DBB12
DBB13 Part program Reserved Disable
Selection Load Unload teach in
transfer
see see see
also also also /IHsl-IM9/
(Page (Page (Page
1428) 1428) 1427)
DBB14 Active (0) / V24 active file system: Index of the file to be transferred from the standard list.
passive (1) V24 passive file system: Number of the control file for user file names.
file system
see
also
(Page
1429)
DBB15 V24 active file system: Index which specifies the axis, channel or TO No.
V24 passive file system: Index of the file to be transferred from the user list.
DBB16 Always 1 Program selection from the PLC: Index of the program list
DBB17 Program selection from the PLC: Program index in the program list
DBB18
DBB19 Reserved (message counter)
4.9.2 DB19, signals from the operator panel (OP)
Table 4-67 DB19, signals from the operator panel (OP)

(Operating software → PLC)
DBB20 Switch Simulation Language Recall Cancel Cancel key Screen is
over active 2 switched alarm de‐ alarm de‐ actuated dark
MCS/WCS see over leted leted /FB1-A2/ see
see also /IHsl-IM9/ see see also
also (Page also also (Page
(Page 1431) (Page (Page 1430)
1432) 1431) 1431)
DBB21 Actual number of the active operating area
/FB1-P3/; /FB1-A2/


DBB22 Current channel number
DBB23 Control 1
Screen Data trans‐ Keyboard
change ac‐ fer active has been
tive used
DBW24 Current screen number
DBB25
DBB26 Program selection from the PLC: Status signals
Selection Load Unload Active Error Job com‐ Reserved
see see see see see pleted
also also also also also see
(Page (Page (Page (Page (Page also
1435) 1434) 1434) 1433) 1433) (Page
1432)
DBB27 Program selection from the PLC: Error detection
DBW28 Screen number for "Supplement user interface" /IHsl-BE2/
DBB30 Screen selection from the PLC: Control signals
PLC → OP Screen de‐ Screen se‐
selection lection
DBB31 Screen selection from the PLC: Status signals
Operating Inactive Error, Screen is Screen ac‐ Screen is Screen se‐
soft‐ screen se‐ deselected tive selected lection ac‐
ware → PL lection not cepted
C possible
DBB32 Busy func‐ Strobe Function selection No. from the PLC
PLC → op‐ tion function see also (Page 1436)
erating soft‐ see see
ware also also
(Page (Page
1437) 1437)
DBB33 Parameter 1 for function selection No. (function selection from DBB32)
PLC → op‐ see also (Page 1437)
erating soft‐
ware
PLC → op‐
erating soft‐
ware
PLC → op‐
erating soft‐
ware


DBB36 Error code for function selection No. (function selection from DBB32)
soft‐
ware → PL
C
Operating
soft‐
ware → PL
C
Operating
soft‐
ware → PL
C
Operating
soft‐
ware → PL
C
DBB40 - Reserved
DBB47
DBB48 PLC busy Operating Function selection No. from the operating software
Operating Function software
soft‐ strobe
ware → PL Function
C
DBB49 Error code for function selection No. (function selection from DBB48)
PLC → op‐
erating soft‐
ware
DBB50 - Interface of 2nd Control (assignment the same as DBB0 - DBB49)
DBB99
DBB100 Switchover interface to the operating software
Call waiting interface (operating software announces itself to the NC)
ONL_REQUEST (online request from the operating software) /FB2-B3/
Operating software writes its client identification as online request (bits 8-15: bus type, bits 0-7: bus address)
DBB102 ONL_CONFIRM (acknowledgment from PLC regarding online request) /FB2-B3/
PLC writes as acknowledgment the operating software client identification (bus type, bus address; such as
DBB100).
DBB104 PAR_CLIENT_IDENT /FB2-B3/
Operating software writes its client identification (bus type, bus address; such as DBB100).
DBB106 PAR_MMC_TYP /FB2-B3/
Type of operating software acc. to NETNAMES.INI: Main/secondary operator panel / server /...
DBB107 PAR_MCP_ADR /FB2-B3/
Operating software writes address of the MCP to be activated; 255, if no MCP activation


DBB108 PAR_STATUS /FB2-B3/
PLC writes the online enable for the operating software
DBB109 PAR_Z_INFO /FB2-B3/
PLC writes supplementary information on the status
DBB110 M_TO_N_ALIVE
Sign-of-life from the PLC to the operating software using the M to N block
DBB112 Res. Bus type MCP
DBB113 ParOpKeyAdr
Direct key index call waiting interface
DBB114 ParTcuIndex
TCU index call waiting interface
DBB115 ParHt2Index
Ht2 index logon interface
DBB116 Direct key address of 1st Online interface
DBB117 Direct key address of 2nd Online interface
DBB118 TCU index of 1st Online interface
DBB119 TCU index of 2nd Online interface
DBB120 Online interface OP 1 (user)
MMC1_CLIENT_IDENT /FB2-B3/
PLC writes PAR_CLIENT_IDENT to MMCx_CLIENT_IDENT, if operating software goes online.
DBB122 MMC1_TYP /FB2-B3/
PLC writes PAR_MMC_TYP to MMCx_TYP, if operating software goes online.
DBB123 MMC1_MCP_ADR /FB2-B3/
PLC writes PAR_MCP_ADR to MMCx_MCP_ADR, if operating software goes online.
DBB124 MMC1_STATUS /FB2-B3/
Connection state, operating software and PLC write alternating their requests/acknowledgments.
DBB125 MMC1_Z_INFO /FB2-B3/
Additional information, connection state (pos./neg. acknowledgment, error messages, etc.)
DBB126 Reserved TCU1_ MMC1_ MMC1_ MMC1_ MMC1_ MMC1_ MMC1_
SHIFT_ CHANGE_ ACTIVE_ ACTIVE_ ACTIVE_ MCP_ SHIFT_
LOCK DENIED CHANGED PERM REQ SHIFT- LOCK
/FB2-B3/ /FB2-B3/ /FB2-B3/ /FB2-B3/ LOCK /FB2-B3/
/FB2-B3/
DBB127 Reserved bus type MCP
DBB128 - Reserved Transline (Transline DB number)

DBB129
DBB130 Online interface OP 2 (user)
MMC2_CLIENT_IDENT /FB2-B3/
PLC writes PAR_CLIENT_IDENT to MMCx_CLIENT_IDENT, if operating software goes online.
DBB132 MMC2_TYP /FB2-B3/
PLC writes PAR_MMC_TYP to MMCx_TYP, if operating software goes online.


DBB133 MMC2_MCP_ADR /FB2-B3/
PLC writes PAR_MCP_ADR to MMCx_MCP_ADR, if operating software goes online.
DBB134 MMC2_STATUS /FB2-B3/
Connection state, operating software and PLC write alternating their requests/acknowledgments.
DBB135 MMC2_Z_INFO /FB2-B3/
Additional information, connection state (pos./neg. acknowledgment, error messages, etc.)
DBB136 Reserved TCU2_ MMC2_ MMC2_ MMC2_ MMC2_ MMC2_ MMC2_
SHIFT_ CHANGE_ ACTIVE_ ACTIVE_ ACTIVE_ MCP_ SHIFT_
LOCK DENIED CHANGED PERM REQ SHIFT_ LOCK
/FB2-B3/ /FB2-B3/ /FB2-B3/ /FB2-B3/ LOCK /FB2-B3/
/FB2-B3/
DBB137 Reserved bus type MCP
DBB138 - Reserved Transline (Transline DB number)

DBB139
DBB140 - Assignment of the PLC for transfer parameters
DBB197 These data blocks are reserved for the "Tool Ident Connection" option.
/FBWsl/
DBB198 - Assignment of the PLC for return values
/FBWsl/
DBB250 - Function call of the PLC interface
/FBWsl/
DBB256 - Commands for Paramtm.exe
DBB267
DBB268 Traffic light status
DBD270 - Counter [1...32]
DBD394
DBB398 Handwheel number for simulation override
DBW400 Simulation override
DBW402 Simulation state

4.9.3 DB19, sidescreen - interface for the MCP function
Table 4-68 DB19, sidescreen - interface for the MCP function
DB19 Signals to/from the operator panel

Signal from the operating software → PLC
DBB404 Customer keys
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41
56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57
4.9.4 DB19, sidescreen - interface for the MCP function
Table 4-69 DB19, sidescreen - interface for the MCP function signals to/from the operator panel
DB19 Signals to/from the operator panel [r/w]

Signal from PLC → operating software
DBB412 Customer LED
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DBB413 Customer LED
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
DBB414 Customer LED
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
DBB415 Customer LED
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
DBB416 Customer LED
40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
DBB417 Customer LED
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41

4.10 Defining PLC alarms
DB19 Signals to/from the operator panel [r/w]

Signal from PLC → operating software
DBB418 Customer LED
56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
DBB419 Customer LED
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57
DBB420 Customer key deactivated
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41
56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57
4.10.1 DB20, NC machine data
Table 4-70 DB20, NC machine data
DB20 NC machine data (PLC → user)

DBW0 INT values
DBW
DBW INT values
DBB Bit arrays

DB20 NC machine data (PLC → user)

DBB
DBB
DBB Bit arrays
DBD REAL values
DBD
DBD REAL values
Note
The start and end addresses of the PLC machine data areas are dependent on the
particular length data of the partial areas. The range of INTEGER values always starts with
data byte 0. The upper limit is defined by the associated length data. The range of the bit
arrays starts after the range of the INTEGER values at the next even address. The range of
REAL values starts after the range of the bit arrays at the next even address.

4.11 Channel-specific signals
4.11.1 DB21 - DB30, control signals to the channel (1)
DB21 - Signals to the channel (PLC → NC)

DB30
DBB0 Activate Activate Activate Activate RESU: RESU:
dry run fee‐ M01 single block DRF Start re‐ Backward/
drate see see see trace sup‐ forward
see also also also port see
also (Page (Page (Page see also
(Page 1440) 1440) 1439) also (Page
1441) (Page 1438)
1439)
DBB1 Activate PLC action CLC cor‐ CLC stop Time moni‐ Disable all Enable pro‐ Activate
program completed rection see toring ac‐ synchron‐ tection referencing
test see see also tive (tool ized actions zones see
see also also (Page manage‐ /FBSY/ /FB1-A5/ also
also (Page (Page 1443) ment) (Page
(Page 1444) 1443) see 1442)
1445) also
(Page
1442)
DBB2 Activate skip block
/7 /6 /5 /4 /3 /2 /1 /0
DBB3 Nibbling and punching
Manual Stroke in‐ Delayed Stroke sup‐ Manual Stroke ena‐
stroke ini‐ operative stroke pression stroke ini‐ ble
tiation see see see tiation see
see also also also see also
also (Page (Page (Page also (Page
(Page 1447) 1447) 1447) (Page 1446)
1448) 1446)
DBB4 Path feedrate override
H G F E D C B A
DBB5 Path rapid traverse override
H G F E D C B A


DB30
DBB6 Path fee‐ Path rapid Program Delete UP Delete dis‐ Read-in Feedrate
drate over‐ traverse level abort number of tance-to-go disable disable
ride active override ac‐ see passes see see see
see tive also also also also
also see (Page (Page (Page (Page
(Page also 1454) 1454) 1453) 1452)
1455) (Page
1455)
DBB7 Reset Deactivate NC Stop NC stop NC Stop at NC start NC start
see start disa‐ axes plus see block limit see disable
also ble spindle also see also see
(Page see (Page also (Page also
1459) also 1457) (Page 1456) (Page
(Page 1457) 1456)
1458)
DBB8 Activate machine-related protection area
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DBB9 Activate machine-related protection area
10 9
DBB10 Activate channel-specific protection area
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DBB11 Activate channel-specific protection area
10 9
Note
● Feedrate override active: Even if the feedrate override is not active (=100%), the 0%
position is still effective.
● Feedrate override: Either 31 positions (Gray code) with 31 MD for % evaluation, or 0% to
200% corresponding to the dual value in the byte (201 to 255 = max. 200%)
● Rapid traverse override: Either 31 positions (Gray code) with 31 MD for % evaluation, or
0% to 100% corresponding to the dual value in the byte (101 to 255 = max. 100%)
● Single block: Select the version using "Write variable"
● Delete distance-to-go: Is only active for path axes and not for positioning axes

4.11.2 DB21 - DB30, control signals to the geometry axes
Table 4-71 DB21 - DB30, control signals to the geometry axes

DB30
Geometry axis 1
DBB12 Traversing keys Rapid tra‐ Traversing Feedrate Activate handwheel
see also verse over‐ key lock stop see also (Page 1460)
(Page 1463) ride see see
Plus Minus see also also C B A
also (Page (Page
(Page 1462) 1461)
1462)
DBB13 Requested machine function
ous man‐
ual travel
DBB14 OEM signals
DBB15 Invert
handwheel
direction of
rotation
see
also
(Page
1466)
Geometry axis 2
see also also
also (Page (Page
Plus Minus C B A
(Page 1467) 1461)
1467)

ous man‐
ual travel
DBB18 OEM signals


DB30
DBB19 Invert
handwheel
direction of
rotation
see
also
(Page
1468)
Geometry axis 3
see also also
also (Page (Page
Plus Minus C B A
(Page 1468) 1461)
1468)

ous man‐
ual travel
DBB22 OEM signals
DBB23 Invert
handwheel
direction of
rotation
see
also
(Page
1469)
Note
The NC only evaluates the machine function signals if the signal DB10 DBX57.0
(Page 1274)"INC inputs in mode group area active" is not set.

4.11.3 DB21 - DB30, HMI signals to channel / OEM signals from/to channel
Table 4-72 DB21 - DB30, control signals from the operating software to the PLC, PLC to the NC and status signal from
channel to the PLC
DB21 - Signals from the channel/PLC/operating software (operating software → PLC, PLC → NC, NC → PLC)
DB30
DBB24 Dry run fee‐ M01 selec‐ M01 asso‐ DRF selec‐
Operating drate selec‐ ted ciated with ted
soft‐ ted see NC selec‐ see
ware → PL see also ted also
C also (Page see (Page
(Page 1470) also 1469)
1471) (Page
1469)
DBB25 Program REPOS Feedrate REPOS mode /FB1-K1/
Operating test selec‐ mode override se‐ C B A
soft‐ ted change lected for
ware → PL /FB1-K1/ /FB1-K1/ rapid tra‐
C verse
see
also
(Page
1471)
DBB26 Skip block requested, level/x
Operating /FB1-K1/
soft‐ /7 /6 /5 /4 /3 /2 /1 /0
ware → PL
C
DBB27 Skip block requested,
Operating level/x
soft‐ /9 /8
ware → PL
C
DBB28 OEM signals: Requirement
PLC → NC
DBB29 Tool Deactivate Deactivate Activate Activate fixed feedrate
PLC → NC do not lock wear moni‐ workpiece PTP traver‐ see also (Page 1474)
toring counter sal
see 4 3 2 1
also see see see
(Page also also also
1477) (Page (Page (Page
1476) 1476) 1475)

DB30
DBB30 No tool Jog circles Activate Contour Simulation Activate contour handwheel
PLC → NC change see NC-associ‐ handwheel contour see also (Page 1477)
commands also ated M0/1 simulation, handwheel
C B A
(Page see negative di‐ on
1479) also rection see
(Page see also
1479) also (Page
(Page 1478)
1479)
DBB31 Activate skip block Invert con‐ REPOS REPOS mode
PLC → NC tour hand‐ mode see also (Page 1480)
wheel di‐ change
/9 /8 C B A
rection of see
rotation also
see (Page
also 1481)
(Page
1481)
DBB32 Last action M00/M01 Approach Action RESU: RESU: Execution
NC → PLC block active active block active block active Retrace Retrace from exter‐
see see see see support ac‐ mode ac‐ nal active
also also also also tive tive
(Page (Page (Page (Page see see
1483) 1483) 1483) 1482) also also
(Page (Page
1482) 1482)
DBB33 Program Transfor‐ M02/M30 Block Handwheel Rotational Orientable Referenc‐
NC → PLC test active mation ac‐ active search ac‐ override ac‐ feedrate toolholder ing active
see tive see tive tive active active see
also see also see see /FB1-V1/ also
(Page also (Page also also (Page
1487) (Page 1485) (Page (Page 1484)
1487) 1485) 1485)
DBB34 OEM signals: Feedback signal
NC → PLC
DBB35 Channel state Program status
NC → PLC Reset Interrupted Active interrupted Interrupted Stopped Waiting Running
see see see see see see see see
also also also also also also also also
(Page (Page (Page (Page (Page (Page (Page (Page
1492) 1492) 1491) 1491) 1490) 1489) 1488) 1488)

DB30
DBB36 NC alarm Channel- Channel is Interrupt All axes All axes
NC → PLC with ma‐ specific ready handling stationary that have
chining NC alarm see active see to be refer‐
stop is ac‐ is active also see also enced are
tive see (Page also (Page referenced
see also 1494) (Page 1494) see
also (Page 1494) also
(Page 1495) (Page
1495) 1493)
DBB37 "Stop at Read-in CLC stop‐ CLC stop‐ CLC active Contour handwheel active
NC → PLC the end of disable is ped ped see see also (Page 1495)
block for ignored Upper limit Lower limit also C B A
single see (Page
see see
block also 1496)
also also
(SBL)" is (Page (Page (Page
suppressed 1498) 1497) 1497)
see
also
(Page
1498)
DBB38 Nibbling and punching /FB2-N4/
NC → PLC Manual Stroke re‐
stroke ini‐ lease active
tiation: Ac‐ see
knowledg‐ also
ment (Page
see 1499)
also
(Page
1499)
DBB39 Contour NC alarm Protection
NC → PLC handwheel with pro‐ area moni‐
direction of gram stop toring not
rotation in‐ see guaranteed
verted ac‐ also /FB1-A5/
tive (Page
see 1500)
also
(Page
1500)

4.11.4 DB21 - DB30, control signals from the geometry axes
Table 4-73 DB21 - DB30, control signals from the geometry axes
DB21 - Signals from the channel (NC → PLC)

DB30
Geometry axis 1
DBB40 Travel command Traversing requests Handwheel active
see also see also see also (Page 1501)
(Page 1502) (Page 1501)
Plus Minus Plus Minus C B A
ous man‐
ual travel
DBB42 OEM signals
DBB43 Handwheel
direction of
rotation in‐
verted
see
also
(Page
1504)
DBB44
Operating
soft‐
ware → PL
C
Geometry axis 2
(Page 1504) (Page 1504)
ous man‐
ual travel
DBB48 OEM signals


DB30
DBB49 Handwheel
direction of
rotation in‐
verted
see
also
(Page
1505)
DBB50
Operating
soft‐
ware → PL
C
Geometry axis 3
(Page 1505) (Page 1505)
C B A
ous man‐
ual travel
DBB54 OEM signals
DBB55 Handwheel
direction of
rotation in‐
verted
see
also
(Page
1506)
DBB56
Operating
soft‐
ware → PL
C

4.11.5 DB21 - DB30, change signals for auxiliary function transfer from the channel
Table 4-74 DB21 - DB30, change signals for auxiliary function transfer from the channel

DB30
DBB58 change
M fct. 5 M fct. 4 M fct. 3 M fct. 2 M fct. 1
DBB59 Not decoded
DBB60 Quick change
see also (Page 1507) see also (Page 1506)
S fct. 3 S fct. 2 S fct. 1 S fct. 3 S fct. 2 S fct. 1
DBB61 Quick change
T fct. 3 T fct. 2 T fct. 1 T fct. 3 T fct. 2 T fct. 1
DBB62 Quick change
D fct. 3 D fct. 2 D fct. 1 D fct. 3 D fct. 2 D fct. 1
DBB63 DL fct. DL
Quick fct.change
DBB64 Quick change
H fct. 3 H fct. 2 H fct. 1 H fct. 3 H fct. 2 H fct. 1
DBB65 change
F fct. 6 F fct. 5 F fct. 4 F fct. 3 F fct. 2 F fct. 1
DBB66 Quick
DBB67 Quick
F fct. 6 F fct. 5 F fct. 4 F fct. 3 F fct. 2 F fct. 1
Note
● For 10-decade T numbers, only the signal DBB61, DBX0 "T fct.1 change" is available.
● For 5-decade D numbers, only the signal DBB62, DBX0 "D fct.1 change" is available.

4.11.6 DB21 - DB30, transferred M and S functions:
Table 4-75 DB21 - DB30, transferred M and S functions:

DB30
DBW68 Extended address, M function 1 (16-bit INT)
DBD70 M function 1 (DINT)
DBW98 Extended address, S function 1 (16-bit INT)
DBD100 S function 1 (REAL format)
Note
M functions are programmed in the part program in the INTEGER format (8 decades plus
leading sign).

4.11.7 DB21 - DB30, transferred T/D/DL functions
Table 4-76 DB21 - DB30, transferred T/D/DL functions

DB30
DBW116 Extended address, T function 1 (16-bit INT)
DBW118 T function 1 (dual) /
DBD118 For 8-decade T No., DBD118 is used as T function 1 (32-bit INT) (see note below)
DBW122 T function 2 (INT)
DBW126 T function 3 (INT)
DBB128 Extended address D function 1 (8-bit INT)
DBB129 D function 1 (binary)
DBW130 For 5-decade D No., DBW130 is used as D function 1 (16-bit INT)
DBB131 D function 2 (8-bit INT)
DBB133 D function 3 (8-bit INT)
DBW134 Extended address DL function (16-bit INT)
DBD136 DL function (REAL)
Note
● Programmed T functions are not output to the PLC when tool management is active.
● 8 decade T numbers are only available under DBD118 "T function 1".
● Programmed D functions with names (e.g. D=CUTTING EDGE_1) cannot be output to
the PLC in ASCII format.
● 5-decade D numbers are only available as DBW130 "D function 1".
● The REAL format corresponds to the floating-point representation in STEP 7 (24-bit
mantissa and 8-bit exponent). This floating point format supplies a maximum of 7 valid
places.

4.11.8 DB21 - DB30, transferred H/F functions
Table 4-77 DB21 - DB30, transferred H/F functions

DB30
DBW140 Extended address, H function 1 (16-bit INT)
DBD142 H function 1 (REAL or DINT)
DBW158 Extended address F function 1 (16-bit INT)
DBD160 F function 1 (REAL format)

Note
● F functions are programmed in the part program in the REAL data format.
● The extended address of the F function contains an identifier with the following meaning:
– 0: Path feedrate
– 1 – 31: Machine axis number for feedrate for positioning axes
● The data type of the H function depends on machine data:
MD22110 $MC_AUXFU_H_TYPE_INT
4.11.9 DB21 - DB30, decoded M signals
Table 4-78 DB21 - DB30, decoded M signals
DB21 - Signals from the channel (M0 - M99) (NC → PLC)

DB30

Dynamic M functions
DBB194
M07 M06 M05 # M04 # M03 # M02 M01 M00
DBB195
M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M09 M08
DBB196
M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16
DBB197
M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24
DBB198
M39 M38 M37 M36 M35 M34 M33 M32
DBB199
M47 M46 M45 M44 M43 M42 M41 M40
DBB200
M55 M54 M53 M52 M51 M50 M49 M48
DBB201
M63 M62 M61 M60 M59 M58 M57 M56
DBB202
M71 M70 # M69 M68 M67 M66 M65 M64
DBB203
M79 M78 M77 M76 M75 M74 M73 M72
DBB204
M87 M86 M85 M84 M83 M82 M81 M80

DB21 - Signals from the channel (M0 - M99) (NC → PLC)

DB30

DBB205
M95 M94 M93 M92 M91 M90 M89 M88
DBB206
M99 M98 M97 M96
DBB207
Note
● #: the M function is not displayed here, if a spindle is parameterized in the channel. In this
case, the M function is displayed as extended M function under DB21,... DBB68 ff. and
axial under DB31,... DBB86 ff. displayed.
● Dynamic M functions (M00 - M99) are decoded by the basic PLC program.
Static M functions must be generated in the PLC user program from dynamic M functions.
4.11.10 DB21 - DB30, active G functions
Table 4-79 DB21 - DB30, active G functions

DB30
DBB208 Number of the active G function of G function group 1 (8-bit INT)
... ...


DB30
DBB270 Number of the active G function of G function group n-1 (8-bit INT)
DBB271 Number of the active G function of G function group n (8-bit INT)
Note
● The active G functions of the group, for each programming of a G function or a
mnemonic identifier (e.g. SPLINE), are updated.
● G functions within a G group are output as binary value, starting with 1. A G function with
the value 0 means that for this G group, no G function is active.
4.11.11 DB21 - DB30, protection areas from the channel
Table 4-80 DB21 - DB30, signals for the protection zones from the channel

DB30
DBB272 Machine-related protection zone preactivated
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DBB273 Machine-related protection zone preactivated
10 9
DBB274 Channel-specific protection zone preactivated
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DBB275 Channel-specific protection zone preactivated
10 9
DBB276 Machine-related protection zone violated
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DBB277 Machine-related protection zone violated
10 9
DBB278 Channel-specific protection zone violated
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1


DB30
DBB279 Channel-specific protection zone violated
10 9
4.11.12 DB21 - DB30, synchronous actions, signals from/to the channel
Note
The request signals should be set in the PLC user program. After data transfer, they are
reset by the basic PLC program.
Table 4-81 DB21 - DB30, job-controlled signals from/to the channel
DB21 - Signals to the channel (PLC ←→ NC)

DB30
/FBSY/
DBB280 Require‐ Reserved
PLC → NC ment
Disable
synchron‐
ized actions
DBB281 Acknowl‐
NC → PLC edgment
Synchron‐
ized ac‐
tions disa‐
bled
DBW282 - Reserved
DBW298
DBB300 Lock synchronized action
PLC → NC 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PLC → NC 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
PLC → NC 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
PLC → NC 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
PLC → NC 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

DB21 - Signals to the channel (PLC ←→ NC)

DB30
/FBSY/
PLC → NC 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41
PLC → NC 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
PLC → NC 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57
DBB308 Synchronized action can be locked
NC → PLC 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
NC → PLC 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
NC → PLC 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
NC → PLC 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
NC → PLC 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
NC → PLC 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41
NC → PLC 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
NC → PLC 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57
4.11.13 DB21 - DB30, control signals from/to the channel
Note
The request signals should be set in the PLC user program. After data transfer, they are
reset by the basic PLC program.
Table 4-82 DB21 - DB30, job-controlled signals from/to the channel
DB21 - Signals from/to the channel (PLC ←→ NC)

DB30
DBB316 Active G functions
G00 geo.

DB21 - Signals from/to the channel (PLC ←→ NC)

DB30
DBB317 Tool miss‐ PTP tra‐ Drive test Target External
ing versing ac‐ travel re‐ number of language
see tive quest workpieces mode ac‐
also see reached tive
(Page also see
1514) (Page also
1514) (Page
1513)
DBB318 Overstore Dry run fee‐ M01 asso‐ Delayed TOFF mo‐ TOFF ac‐ Block ASUB stop‐
active drate active ciated with stop tion active tive search via ped
/F1-A2/ /FB1-V1/ PLC active see see program see
see also also test, SERU‐ also
also (Page (Page PRO, is ac‐ (Page
(Page 1516) 1515) tive 1514)
1516) see
also
(Page
1515)
DBB319 No tool Feedrate REPOS de‐ Feedrate Active REPOS mode Acknowl‐
change stop lay stop see also (Page 1517) edgment of
commands Delay see Delay the RE‐
C B A
active also POS mode
Suppress
(Page change
1518) see
also
(Page
1517)
4.11.14 DB21 - DB30, signals to the orientation axes
Table 4-83 DB21 - DB30, signals to the orientation axes

DB30
Orientation axis 1
see also verse over‐ key disable stop see also (Page 1519)
(Page 1521) ride see
Plus Minus see also C B A
also (Page
(Page 1520)
1520)


DB30
ous man‐
ual travel
DBB322 OEM signals
DBB323 Handwheel
direction of
rotation in‐
verted
see
also
(Page
1524)
Orientation axis 2
also (Page
(Page 1525)
1525)
ous man‐
ual travel
DBB326 OEM signals
DBB327 Handwheel
direction of
rotation in‐
verted
see
also
(Page
1525)
Orientation axis 3
also (Page
(Page 1526)
1526)


DB30
ous man‐
ual travel
DBB330 OEM signals
DBB331 Handwheel
direction of
rotation in‐
verted
see
also
(Page
1526)
4.11.15 DB21 - DB30, signals from the orientation axes
Table 4-84 DB21 - DB30, signals from the orientation axes

DB30
Orientation axis 1
DBB332 Traversing command Travel request Handwheel active
(Page 1528) (Page 1527)
ous man‐
ual travel
DBB334 OEM signals
DBB335 Handwheel
direction of
rotation in‐
version ac‐
tive
Orientation axis 2


DB30
(Page 1530) (Page 1530)
ous man‐
ual travel
DBB338 OEM signals
DBB339 Handwheel
direction of
rotation in‐
version ac‐
tive
Orientation axis 3
(Page 1531) (Page 1530)
ous man‐
ual travel
DBB342 OEM signals
DBB343 Handwheel
direction of
rotation in‐
version ac‐
tive

4.11.16 DB21 - DB30, tool management functions from the channel
Table 4-85 DB21 - DB30, tool management functions from the channel

DB30
Change signals, tool management functions
DBB344 Last re‐ Transition Tool limit Tool pre‐
placement to new re‐ value warning
tool of the placement reached limit
tool group tool see reached
see see also see
also also (Page also
(Page (Page 1531) (Page
1532) 1532) 1531)
DBB345 -
DBB347
Transferred tool management functions
DBD348 T number for tool prewarning limit (DINT)
DBD352 T number for tool limit value (DINT)
DBD356 T number of new replacement tool (DINT)
DBD360 T number of last replacement tool (DINT)
4.11.17 DB21 - DB30, control signals from/to the channel (2)
Table 4-86 DB21 - DB30, signals from the channel

DB30
DBB364 CH_CYCLES_SIG_IN (1)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DBB365 CH_CYCLES_SIG_IN (2)
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
DBB366 CH_CYCLES_SIG_OUT (1)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DBB367 CH_CYCLES_SIG_OUT (2)
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
DBB368 CH_OEM_TECHNO_SIG_IN (1)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17


DB30
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
DBB372 CH_OEM_TECHNO_SIG_OUT (1)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
DBB376 Display of the triggering event in case of event-driven program call
ProgEventDisplay
DBB377 Jog circle Retraction JOG re‐ Stop condi‐ Collision

active data availa‐ tract active tion avoidance:
see ble see Stop
also see also see
(Page also (Page also
1534) (Page 1533) (Page
1534) 1533)
DBB378 "Silent" ASUB is
ASUB is active
active see
see also
also (Page
(Page 1534)
1535)
DBB379
DBB380 Reserved ASUB

Table 4-87 DB21 - DB30, signals to the channel

DB30
DBB384 Enable
GOTOS
see
also
(Page
1535)
DBB385 Grinding: Input signals 1 ... 8
($AC_IN_KEY_G[1 ... 8])
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DBB386 Grinding: Disable input signals 1 ... 8
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DBB387 Grinding: Status of the grinding functions 1 ... 8
($AC_IN_KEY_G_RUN_IN[1...8])
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Table 4-88 DB21 - DB30, signals from/to channel
DB21 - Signals from/to the channel (NC ↔ PLC)

DB30
DBW388 Active transformation number
NC → PLC
DBB390 Grinding: Enable status of input signals 1 ... 8
PLC → NC ($AC_IN_KEY_G_ISENABLE[1...8])
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DBB391 Grinding: Status of the grinding functions 1 ... 8
NC → PLC ($AC_IN_KEY_G_RUN_OUT[1...8])
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DBB392 Selection of the coordinate system for Cartesian manual traversing and handwheel override in the automatic
PLC → NC mode in the tool direction (DRF)
DBB393 Reserved
DBB394 Reserved
DBB395 Reserved

4.12 Axis/spindle signals
4.12.1 DB31 - DB61, signals to the axis/spindle
Table 4-89 DB31 - DB61, signals to the axis/spindle
DB31 - Signals to the axis/spindle (PLC → NC)

DB61
DBB0 Feedrate override, axis-specific
DBB1 Override Position measuring sys‐ Follow-up Axis/spin‐ Sensor for Acknowl‐ Drive test
Axis and active tem 1 - 2 mode dle disable fixed stop edge fixed travel ena‐
spindle see see also see see see stop ble
also (Page 1544) also also also reached see
(Page Bit 2 Bit 1 (Page (Page (Page see also
1546) 1543) 1540) 1539) also (Page
(Page 1538)
1539)
DBB2 Reference point value 1 - 4 Clamping Delete dis‐ Controller Cam acti‐
Axis and see also (Page 1551) in progress tance-to- enable vation
spindle see go / spin‐ see see
also dle reset also also
(Page see (Page (Page
1551) also 1547) 1547)
(Page
1549)
DBB3 Program Velocity / Activate fixed feedrate Travel to Accept off‐
Axis and test axis/ spindle see also (Page 1553) fixed stop set exter‐
spindle spindle speed limi‐ enabled nal WO
enable tation see see
see also also
also (Page (Page
(Page 1552) 1552)
1554)

Axis and see also verse over‐ key disable stop / spin‐ see also (Page 1554)
spindle (Page 1557) ride see dle stop
Plus Minus see al‐ also see Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1
so (Page also
(Page 1557) (Page
1557) 1555)


DB61
DBB5 Machine function
Axis and see also (Page 1559)
spindle
ous man‐
ual travel
DBB6 OEM signals
DBB7 OEM signals
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Invert
handwheel
direction of
rotation
see
also
(Page
1560)
DBB8 Request Channel NC axis / spindle channel assignment
PLC axis/ assign‐ see also (Page 1560)
spindle ment
changed
DBB9 Parameter Controller parameter set
set change see also (Page 1561)
inhibited
Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
see
also
(Page
1561)
DBB10 REPOS de‐
lay
see
also
(Page
1562)
DBB11 SI:
Start brake
test
DBB12 Delay ref‐ Modulo ro‐ 2nd software limit switch Hardware limit switch
Axis erence tary axes: Plus Minus Plus Minus
point ap‐ Activate
see see see see
proach traversing
also also also also
see range limits
(Page (Page (Page (Page
also see 1563) 1563) 1563) 1562)
(Page also
1564) (Page
1563)


DB61
DBB13 JOG to po‐ JOG fixed point approach
Axis sition see also (Page 1564)
see Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
also
(Page
1565)
DBB14 Program test
Axis Activate Suppress
see see
also also
(Page (Page
1566) 1565)
DBB15
Axis
DBB16 Delete S No speed Resynchronize Gear is Actual gear stage
Spindle value monitoring spindle changed see also (Page 1566)
see during over
Measuring Measuring Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
also gear see
system 2 system 1
(Page change also
see al‐ see
1569) (Page
so also
1568)
(Page (Page
1568) 1567)
DBB17 Invert Resynchronize spindle Feedrate
Spindle M3/M4 during positioning correction
see Measuring Measuring spindle val‐
also system 2 system 1 id
(Page see al‐ see
1570) so also
(Page (Page
1570) 1569)
DBB18 Oscillation direction of Oscillation Oscillation
Spindle rotation enable controlled
Links Right see al‐ by PLC
see see so see
also also (Page also
(Page (Page 1571) (Page
1573) 1572) 1570)
DBB19 Speed override, spindle-specific
Spindle see also (Page 1573)


DB61
DBB20 Open mo‐ Ramp-func‐
Drive tor holding tion gener‐
brake ator disa‐
ble 1)
see
also
(Page
1575)
DBB21 Pulse en‐ Integrator Motor be‐ Motor/drive data set: Selection
Drive able disable, ing selected (interface definition: DB31, …DBX130.0 - 4 (Page 1337))
see speed con‐ see al‐ see also (Page 1576)
also troller so
Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
(Page see (Page
1578) also 1577)
(Page
1577)
DBB22 SI: SG selection SI: Ac‐ SI: SI:
Safety Inte‐ see also knowledg‐ SBH dese‐ SBH/SG
grated (Page 1579) ment, com‐ lection deselection
munication
Bit 1 Bit 0 see see
failure
also also
(Page (Page
1578) 1578)
DBB23 SI: SINAMICS SI: SI: Gear ratio selection
Safety Inte‐ Test stop Close brake SE selec‐ see also (Page 1579)
grated selection tion Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
see
also
(Page
1579)
DBB24 Master/ Setpoint Master/ MCS cou‐ MCS cou‐ Control axis Stepping
slave: switchover slave: pling: pling: motor:
switch on Accept Activate Activate deactivate Rotation
see drive con‐ torque collision or do not monitoring
also trol equaliza‐ protection permit
(Page see al‐ tion con‐ see see
1582) so troller also also
(Page see (Page (Page
1581) also 1580) 1580)
(Page
1581)
DBB25 Dynam. Ac‐
tivate back‐
lash com‐
pensation


DB61
DBB26 Override Compensa‐
Grinding Enable tory control‐
see ler on
also
(Page
1583)
DBB27 Stop Resume
Grinding HIAxMove Corr. DEPBCS DEPMCS HIAxMove Corr. DEPBCS DEPMCS
DBB28 PLC con‐ PLC-con‐ PLC-con‐ Alter rever‐ Set rever‐ PLC-con‐ PLC-con‐ Oscillation
Grinding: trols axis trolled axis: trolled axis: sal point sal point trolled axis: trolled axis: reversal
Oscillation see Stop along Stop at see see Continue Reset from exter‐
also braking next rever‐ also also nal
see see
(Page ramp sal point (Page (Page also also see
1587) see see al‐ 1586) 1585) (Page (Page also
also so 1584) 1583) (Page
(Page (Page 1583)
1586) 1586)
DBB29 Disable au‐ Start gan‐
Couplings tomatic syn‐ try syn‐
chronization chroniza‐
tion
DBB30 Spindle- Select Spindle Spindle Spindle
Technology start posi‐ gear stage start, coun‐ start, clock‐ stop
tioning ter-clock‐ wise rota‐
wise rota‐ tion
tion
DBB31 Delete Correct Disable Re‐ REPOS for
Technology synchron‐ synchro‐ synchro‐ synchron‐ transforma‐
ism cor‐ nous oper‐ nous opera‐ ize tion with
rection ation tion PTP
see al‐
so
(Page
1588)
DBB32 SI: Dese‐ SI: Dese‐ SI: Dese‐ SI: Dese‐
Safety Inte‐ lect exter‐ lect exter‐ lect exter‐ lect exter‐
grated nal nal nal nal
STOP_E STOP_D STOP_C STOP_A
DBB33 SI: SG override selection/override
Safety Inte‐ Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
grated
DBB34 Setpoint limitation
Bit 1 Bit 0
DBB35
DBB36
Technology
DBB37


DB61
DBB38
DBB39
DBB40 -
DBB55
DBB56 Spindle in‐ Spindle Separate
PLC → HMI ternal speed dis‐ feedrate
clamping play drive cou‐
pled as C
axis
DBB57
DBB58 Reserved
DBB59
1)
Only when cyclic interface between NC and drive is operated in the "611U compatibility mode".
Note
DBX8.4 is automatically reset after the assignment is executed
4.12.2 DB31 - DB61, signals from the axis/spindle
Table 4-90 DB31 - DB61, signals from the axis/spindle
DB31 - Signals from the axis/spindle (NC → PLC)

DB61
DBB60 Position reached with ex‐ Referenced/synchronized Encoder limit frequency NCU link: Spindle /
Axis / spin‐ act stop Position measuring sys‐ exceeded, measuring Axis active rotary axis
dle tem system see
see
fine coarse 2 1 2 1 also also
(Page (Page
see see see see see see
1589) 1589)
also also also also also also
(Page (Page (Page (Page (Page (Page
1593) 1592) 1591) 1591) 1590) 1590)
DBB61 Current Speed con‐ Position Axis/spin‐ Follow-up Axis ready Axis-specif‐ Drive test
Axis / spin‐ controller troller ac‐ controller dle station‐ mode ac‐ see ic alarm travel re‐
dle active tive active ary (n < tive also see quest
see see see nmin) see (Page also see
also also also see also 1594) (Page also
(Page (Page (Page also (Page 1594) (Page
1597) 1597) 1596) (Page 1594) 1593)
1595)


DB61
DBB62 Axis con‐ Travel to Travel to Travel to Measure‐ Revolution‐ Handwheel Software
tainer: fixed stop: fixed stop: fixed stop: ment active al feedrate override ac‐ cams active
Rotation Force limit‐ Fixed stop Activating see active tive see
active ing active reached the function also see see also
see see see (Page also also (Page
also also also 1599) (Page (Page 1597)
(Page (Page (Page 1598) 1598)
1600) 1599) 1599)
DBB63 Stop Axis/spin‐ Axis stop PLC-con‐ Reset exe‐
HIAxMove Corr. active DEPBCS DEPMCS dle disable active trolled axis cuted
active active active active see see see
also also also
(Page (Page (Page
1601) 1600) 1600)
Axis / spin‐ see also see also see also (Page 1601)
dle (Page 1603) (Page 1602)
Plus Minus Plus Minus Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Axis / spin‐ see also (Page 1603)
dle Continu‐ INCvar INC10000 INC1000 INC100 INC10 INC1
ous man‐
ual travel
DBB66 MCS cou‐
Axis / spin‐ pling:
dle Collision
protection
active
see
also
(Page
1604)
DBB67 Handwheel
direction of
rotation in‐
version ac‐
tive
see
also
(Page
1604)
DBB68 Status axis/spindle replacement
PLC axis/ Neutral ax‐ Axis inter‐ New type NC axis / spindle channel assignment
spindle is/spindle change requested Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
possible from PLC


DB61
DBB69 NCU number in the NCU link group Controller parameter set servo
DBB70 DRV Safe‐ NC Safety REPOS de‐ REPOS off‐ REPOS off‐
ty Integra‐ Integrated lay ac‐ set valid set
ted active active knowledg‐ see see
with ment also also
SIC/SCC see (Page (Page
also 1607) 1606)
(Page
1607)
DBB71 PLC axis Position restored Brake test
permanent‐ Encoder 2 Encoder 1 active
ly assigned
see see
also also
(Page (Page
1608) 1608)
DBB72 REPOS de‐
HMI → PLC lay active
see
also
(Page
1609)
DBB73
HMI → PLC
DBB74 Modulo ro‐
Axis tary axes:
Traversing
range lim‐
its active
see
also
(Page
1609)
DBB75 JOG posi‐ JOG travel JOG approach fixed point reached JOG approach fixed point active
Axis tion to position see also (Page 1610) see also (Page 1610)
reached active
Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
see see
also also
(Page (Page
1611) 1611)
DBB76 Rounding Indexing Positioning Path axis Lubrication
Axis axis in posi‐ axis in posi‐ axis see pulse
tion tion see also see
see also (Page also
also (Page 1612) (Page
(Page 1612) 1611)
1612)


DB61
DBB77 Collision
Axis avoidance:
Velocity re‐
duction
see
also
(Page
1613)
DBD78 F value (REAL) for positioning axis
Axis see also (Page 1614)
DBB82 Change Setpoint gear stage
Spindle gear stage see also (Page 1614)
see Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
also
(Page
1615)
DBB83 Actual di‐ Speed Spindle in Support Geometry Speed setpoint Speed limit
Spindle rection of monitoring setpoint range lim‐ monitoring Increased limited exceeded
rotation see range its violated see see
see see
clockwise also see also also
also also
see (Page also (Page (Page (Page (Page
also 1618) (Page 1617) 1615) 1615) 1617)
(Page 1618)
1618)
DBB84 Active spindle mode Tapping CLGON ac‐ GWPS ac‐ Const. cut‐
Spindle Control Oscillation Positioning Synchro‐ without tive tive ting veloci‐
mode mode mode nous oper‐ compensat‐ see ty active
ation ing chuck also
see see see
active (Page
also also also see
(Page (Page (Page also see 1619)
1621) 1620) 1620) (Page also
1620) (Page
1619)
DBB85 Spindle ac‐ Tool with
Spindle tually dynamic re‐
reached sponse lim‐
position itation
see see
also also
(Page (Page
1622) 1621)
DBW86 M function (INT) for spindle (M3, M4, M5, M19, M70 or defined via MD)
DBD88 S function (REAL) for spindle


DB61
DBB92 Enable Motor hold‐ Independ‐ Ramp-func‐
Drive drive oper‐ ing brake ent drive tion-gener‐
ation opened motion ac‐ ator disa‐
tive1) ble active
see see
also also
(Page (Page
1624) 1623)
DBB93 Pulse ena‐ Integrator Drive ready Motor/drive data set: Display
Drive ble disable, see (interface definition: DB31, …DBX130.0 - 4 (Page 1589))
see speed con‐ also see also (Page 1624)
also troller (Page
(Page see 1625)
1626) also
(Page
1626)
DBB94 Variable nact = nset |nact| < nx |nact| < nmin Md < Mdx Run-up Temperature pre-alarm
Drive signaling see see see see completed Heat sink Motor
function2) also also also also see see see
see (Page (Page (Page (Page also also also
also 1630) 1630) 1629) 1629) (Page (Page (Page
(Page 1628) 1627) 1626)
1631)
DBB95 Alarm of ESR: Gen‐ ESR: Re‐ ESR: DC
Drive alarm erator oper‐ sponse trig‐ link under‐
class C is ation mini‐ gered or voltage
active mum generator (p1248)
see speed fall‐ operation see
also en below active also
(Page (p2161) (r0887.12) (Page
1632) see see 1631)
also also
(Page (Page
1632) 1632)
DBB96 Master/ Setpoint Master-slave: Control ax‐ Stepping
slave: switchover: Compensa‐ Coarse Fine speed is active motor: Ro‐
Coupling drive con‐ tory control‐ speed dif‐ difference tation moni‐
active trol active ler active ference toring error
see
see see see see also
also also also also (Page
(Page (Page (Page (Page 1633)
1634) 1634) 1634) 1633)
DBB97 MCS coupling:
Offset Mirroring Coupling Following
change active active axis
see see see see
also also also also
(Page (Page (Page (Page
1636) 1636) 1635) 1635)


DB61
DBB98 ESR re‐ Accelera‐ Velocity Superim‐ Actual val‐ Synchronous operation
Synchro‐ sponse ini‐ tion warn‐ warning posed mo‐ ue coupling coarse fine
nous spin‐ tiated ing thresh‐ threshold tion see see see
dle old reached reached see also also also
see see also (Page (Page (Page
also also (Page 1638) 1637) 1637)
(Page (Page 1638)
1639) 1639)
DBB99 Max. accel‐ Max. veloc‐ Synchroni‐ Axis accel‐ Synchron‐ Following Leading
Synchro‐ eration ity reached zation in erating ism correc‐ spindle ac‐ spindle ac‐
nous spin‐ reached progress see tion imple‐ tive tive
dle also mented see see
(Page also also
1640) (Page (Page
1640) 1639)
DBB100 Oscillation Oscillation Sparking- Fault dur‐ Oscillation Oscillation
Oscillation active motion ac‐ out active ing oscilla‐ cannot be reversal
grinding see tive see tion motion started from exter‐
also see also see work for nal active
(Page also (Page also now I get see
1642) (Page 1642) (Page why you also
1642) 1641) see (Page
also 1641)
(Page
1641)
DBB101 Gantry axis Gantry Gantry Gantry syn‐ Gantry Gantry
Gantry guide axis grouping is chroniza‐ alarm limit shutdown
synchro‐ tion ready exceeded limit excee‐
nous to start ded
DBB102 Position measuring sys‐ Clamping Dynam.
tem activated tolerance Backlash
2 1 exceeded compensa‐
tion active
see see
also also
(Page (Page
1643) 1642)
DBB103 Synchronous operation 2 Synchron‐
coarse fine ism correc‐
tion is tak‐
en into ac‐
count
DBB104 Active infeed axis
Grinding see also (Page 1643)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Grinding 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Grinding 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17


DB61
Grinding 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
DBB108 SI: SI: SI: SI: SI: SI:
Safety Inte‐ Axis safely Communi‐ CRC error Status, pul‐ CRC or SBH/SG
grated referenced cation fail‐ ses are sign-of-life active
ure not ac‐ canceled error
knowl‐
edged
DBB109 SI: Output cam position
Safety Inte‐ SN 4- SN 4+ SN 3- SN 3+ SN 2- SN 2+ SN 1- SN 1+
grated
DBB110 n < nx SI: Active SG SI:
Safety Inte‐ B A SBH active
grated
DBB111 SI: Stop A - E
Safety Inte‐ Stop E Stop D Stop C Stop A/B
grated Active Active Active Active
DBB112 Output cam range for cam track 1
Safety Inte‐
grated
Safety Inte‐
grated
Safety Inte‐
grated
Safety Inte‐
grated
DBB116 Reserved
Safety Inte‐
grated
DBB117 Reserved Output cam track
Safety Inte‐ 4 3 2 1
grated
DBB118 SI: Cam range bit for cam track 1
Safety Inte‐ 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
grated
Safety Inte‐ 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
grated
Safety Inte‐ 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
grated


DB61
Safety Inte‐ 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
grated
Safety Inte‐ 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
grated
Safety Inte‐ 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
grated
Safety Inte‐ 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
grated
Safety Inte‐ 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
grated
DBB126
DBB127
DBB128 Program test

HMI → PLC activate suppress
see see
also also
(Page (Page
1644) 1644)
DBB129
DBB130 Motor/drive Motor/drive data set: Formatting
data set: (interface definition: DB31, …DBX21.0 ... 4 (Page 1332),
Formatting DB 31. ...DBX93.0 ... 4 (Page 1624))
is valid see also (Page 1645)
DBB131
DBB132 Sensor configuration
Weiss spin‐ Sensor S6 Sensor S5 Sensor S4 Sensor S1 Sensors
dle available available available available available
(angular (piston end (clamped see
position, position) state) also
motor see see (Page
shaft) also also 1645)
see (Page (Page
also 1646) 1645)
(Page
1646)


DB61
DBB133 Sensor configuration
Weiss spin‐ Status val‐
dle ue is gener‐
ated,
speed limi‐
tation
p5043 is
active
see
also
(Page
1646)
DBW134 Clamping state (sensor S1) status value
Weiss spin‐ see also (Page 1647)
dle
DBW136 Clamping state (sensor S1) analog value
Weiss spin‐ see also (Page 1647)
dle
DBB138 Status digital sensors
Weiss spin‐ Sensor S5 Sensor S4,
dle angular po‐ piston end
sition, mo‐ position
tor shaft see
see also
also (Page
(Page 1648)
1648)
DBB139 Status digital sensors
Weiss spin‐
dle
1)
With SINAMICS valid for NC 62.07 and higher when using a 611U telegram type
2)
With SINAMICS valid for SW2.6 and higher

4.13 Safety Integrated
4.13 Safety Integrated
4.13.1 DB31 - DB61, Safety Control Channel (SCC)
Table 4-91 DB31 - DB61, axis signals: Safety Control Channel (SCC)
DB31 - Signals to the axis/spindle

DB61
/FBSIsl/
SCC (PLC → drive)
DBB140 Test stops
for exten‐
ded func‐
tions
DBB141
DBB142
DBB143 External Test se‐ Direction Test with Start brake Select safe
brake quence 1 of rotation brake 1 or test brake test
closed or 2 2 (SBT) (SBT)
(SBC) (SBT)
DBB144 ...
DBB163
4.13.2 DB31 - DB61, Safety Info Channel (SIC)
Table 4-92 DB31 - DB61, axis signals: Safety Info Channel (SIC)
DB31 - Signals from axis/spindle

DB61
/FBSIsl/
SIC (drive → PLC)
DBB164 Safety er‐ ESR re‐ Bit 1 limit Bit 0 limit Safely limi‐
ror active quested value value ted acceler‐
Safely limi‐ Safely limi‐ ation
ted speed ted speed (SLA)
(SLS) (SLS)
DBB165 Safety er‐ Safely-limi‐ Safe oper‐ Safely-limi‐ Safe oper‐ Safe stop 2 Safe stop 1 Safe tor‐
ror with ted speed ating stop ted speed ating stop (SS2) (SS1) que off
Stop A selected selected active active (STO)
(SLS) (SOS) (SLS) (SOS)

4.14 Tool management
DB31 - Signals from axis/spindle

DB61
/FBSIsl/
DBB166 Accept‐ Accept‐ Safe direc‐ Safe direc‐
ance test ance test tion nega‐ tion positive
stop re‐ stop active tive (SDI)
quested (SDI)
DBB167 Safely limi‐ Bit 0
ted posi‐ For area
tion is se‐
Safely limi‐
lected
ted position
(SLP)
(SLP)
DBD168 Speed limit
DBB172 Accept‐ Accept‐ SS2E_AC‐
ance test: ance test: TIVE
Safely limi‐ Safely limi‐
ted posi‐ ted posi‐
tion selec‐ tion active
ted (SLP)
(SLP)
DBB173 Load tor‐ Close ex‐ Brake test
que nega‐ ternal brake (SBT)
tive sign (SBC) completed OK Active with brake Setpoint in‐ Safe Brake
2 put during Test (SBT)
SBT in the
drive
DBB174 ...
DBB187
4.14.1 DB71, interface for loading/unloading the magazine
Table 4-93 DB71, interface for loading/unloading the magazine
DB71 Loading/unloading positions (NC → PLC)

DBB0 Interface (SS) active
SS8 SS7 SS6 SS5 SS4 SS3 SS2 SS1
DBB1


DBB2 Standard end acknowledgement
DBB3
DBBn + 0 Reserved Command:
Multitool NC progr. Positioning Relocating Unloading Loading
positioning positions to the load‐ see see see
see magazine ing point also also also
also see see (Page (Page (Page
(Page also also 1650) 1650) 1649)
1652) (Page (Page
1651) 1651)
DBBn + 1 Command: Reserved Acknowl‐
Data in ex‐ edgement
tended status = 3
Area see
(DB1071 also
(Page (Page
1362)) 1652)
see
also
(Page
1653)
DBBn + 2 Assigned channel (8-bit INT)
DBBn + 3 Tool management no. (8-bit INT)
DBBn + 4 Reserved (free parameter 1 (DWord))
DBBn + 8 Reserved (free parameter 2 (DWord))
DBDn + 12 Reserved (free parameter 3 (DWord))
DBWn + 16 Identifier for loading/unloading point (INT), (fixed value 9999)
DBWn + 18 Location no. of load/unload point (INT)
DBWn + 20 Magazine no. (Source) for unloading/relocating/positioning (INT)
DBWn + 22 Location no. (Source) for unloading/relocating/positioning (INT)
DBWn + 24 Magazine no. (Target) for loading/relocating/positioning (INT)
DBWn + 26 Location no. (Target) for loading/relocating/positioning (INT)


DBWn + 28 Reserved Loading/
unloading
without
moving
magazine
see
also
(Page
1656)
DBWn + 29 Reserved
Starting addresses of loading/unloading points:
Loading/unloading point 1: n = 4 Loading/unloading point 3: n = 64

Loading/unloading point 2: n = 34 Loading/unloading point 4: n = 94
Loading interface 1 is responsible for loading/unloading in (all) spindles/toolholders and for
relocating tools and for positioning at any locations (e.g. buffer location).
Loading and unloading manual tools is always realized via loading interface 1.
4.14.2 DB72, interface for the spindle as change position
Table 4-94 DB72, interface for the spindle as change position
DB72 Signals from the spindle (NC → PLC)

DBB1
DBB2 Standard end acknowledgment
DBB3


DBBn + 0 Command code:
Spindle Replace Insert man‐ Old T in T0 Prepare Perform Obligatory
tool re‐ manual tool ual tool buffer see change change (ini‐ change
mains in see see see also see tiate: M06) see
the spindle also also also (Page also see also
see (Page (Page (Page 1659) (Page also (Page
also 1660) 1660) 1659) 1658) (Page 1657)
(Page 1658)
1661)
DBBn + 1 Data in ex‐ Reserved Acknowl‐
tended edgment
Area status = 3
(DB1072 see
(Page also
1363)) (Page
see 1661)
also
(Page
1662)
DBBn + 3 Tool management No. (8-bit INT)
DBDn + 4 User parameter 0 (DWord)
DBWn + 16 Buffer identifier (INT), (fixed value 9998)
(corresponds to "Target position for new tool")
DBWn + 18 Relative location (target) in buffer magazine (INT)
DBWn + 20 Magazine No. (Source) for new tool (INT)
DBWn + 22 Location No. (Source) for new tool (INT)
DBWn + 24 Magazine No. (Target) for old tool (INT)
DBWn + 26 Location No. (Target) for old tool (INT)
DBWn + 28 Tool new: Location type (INT)


DBWn + 30 Tool new: Size left (INT)
DBWn + 32 Tool new: Size right (INT)
DBWn + 34 Tool new: Size top (INT)
DBWn + 36 Tool new: Size bottom (INT)
DBBn + 38 Tool status for new tool
Manual tool 1:1 ex‐ Reserved Master tool Tool to be Tool to be Disabled, Tool in the
change loaded unloaded but ignore buffer
Tool has Tool fixed- Tool being Prewarn‐ Measure Tool disa‐ Enable tool Active tool
been in use location-co‐ changed ing limit tool bled
ded reached
DBWn + 40 Tool new: Internal T No. (INT)
DBWn + 42 Buffer location of the old tool
DBWn + 44 Original magazine of the new tool
DBWn + 46 Original location of the new tool
Start addresses of the buffer
Spindle 1: n=4
Spindle 2: n = 52
4.14.3 DB73, interface for the turret
Table 4-95 DB73, interface for the turret
DB73 Signals for the turret (NC → PLC)



DBB1
DBB2 Standard end acknowledgment
DBB3
DBBn Reserved Command code:
Unload Reserved T0 Reserved Perform Obligatory
manual tool see change change
also see see
(Page also also
1671) (Page (Page
1671) 1671)
DBBn + 1 Data in ex‐ Reserved Acknowl‐
tended edgment
Area status = 3
(DB1073 see
(Page also
1364)) (Page
see 1672)
also
(Page
1672)
DBBn + 3 Tool management No. (8-bit INT)
DBWn + 16 Reserved
DBWn + 18 Reserved
DBWn + 20 Magazine No. of the turret (INT)
DBWn + 22 Location No. of new tool (INT)
DBWn + 24 Magazine No. of old tool
DBWn + 26 Location No. of old tool (INT)

4.15 Signals from/to the machine control panel and the handheld unit

DBWn + 28 Tool new: Location type (INT)
DBWn + 30 Tool new: Size left (INT)
DBWn + 32 Tool new: Size right (INT)
DBWn + 34 Tool new: Size top (INT)
DBWn + 36 Tool new: Size bottom (INT)
Manual tool 1:1 ex‐ Reserved Master tool Tool to be Tool to be Disabled, Tool in the
change loaded unloaded but ignore buffer
Tool has Tool fixed- Tool being Prewarn‐ Measure Tool disa‐ Enable tool Active tool
been in use location-co‐ changed ing limit tool bled
ded reached
DBWn + 40 Tool new: Internal T No. (INT)
DBWn + 42 Original location of new tool in this circular magazine
Start addresses of the turret:
Turret, 1: n=4
Turret, 2: n = 48
4.15 Signals from/to the machine control panel and the handheld unit
4.15.1 DB77, signals from/to the MCP and the HHU
Table 4-96 DB77, signals from/to the MCP and the HHU
DB77 Signals from/to MCP and HHU (GD communication)

DBB0 - Input signals from MCP1 to the PLC, MPI bus
DBB7

4.16 Signals for Ctrl-Energy
DB77 Signals from/to MCP and HHU (GD communication)

DBB8 - Output signals from MCP1 to the PLC, MPI bus
DBB15
DBD16 Status, send MCP1, MPI bus
DBD20 Status, receive MCP1, MPI bus
DBB24 - Input signals from MCP2 to the PLC, MPI bus

DBB31
DBB32 - Output signals from MCP2 to the PLC, MPI bus
DBB39
DBD40 Status, send MCP2, MPI bus
DBD44 Status, receive MCP2, MPI bus
DBB48 - Input signals from the HHU to the PLC, MPI bus
DBB53
DBB60 - Output signals from the HHU to the PLC, MPI bus
DBB79
DBD80 Status, send HHU, MPI bus
DBD84 Status, receive HHU, MPI bus
4.16.1 DB1000, energy-saving profiles
Table 4-97 DB1000, energy-saving profiles
DB1000 Ctrl-Energy (operating software → PLC)

/SCE/
DBBn + 0 Control signals
Set time to Immediate‐
prewarning ly activate
limit energy-sav‐
ing profile


/SCE/
DBBn + 1 Control signals
Directly ac‐
tivate ener‐
gy-saving
profile
DBBn + 2 Signals to check/test the energy-saving profile
PLC user Master
signal computer
signal
DBBn + 3 Reserved
DBBn + 4 Status signal

Activation Energy-
time T1 saving pro‐
has expired file active
DBBn + 5 Reserved
DBWn + 6 Actual value: Actual value T1
DBWn + 8 Actual value: Actual value T2
DBBn + 10 Effectiveness, profile

Disable en‐ Energy-
ergy-sav‐ saving pro‐
ing profile file config‐
ured
State conditions
DBBn + 11
Screen Data trans‐ Keyboard
change ac‐ fer active has been
tive used
DBBn + 12
MP used
for opera‐
tion
DBBn + 13 NC channel in reset
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DBBn + 14 NC channel in reset
10 9
DBBn + 15
PLC user Master
signal computer
signal

4.17 SENTRON PAC

/SCE/
DBWn + 16 Activation time T1
DBWn + 18 Pre-warning time T2
Additional profile instances
Energy profile 2: DB1000 DBB20…DBB39

4.17 SENTRON PAC
4.17.1 DB1001, SENTRON PAC
Table 4-98 DB1001, signals for SENTRON PAC
DB1001 SENTRON PAC

/SCE/
DBB0 Regenera‐ Regenera‐ Regenera‐ Energy fed SENTRON Display
PLC → op‐ tive ener‐ tive ener‐ tive energy in is read PAC repre‐ manual val‐
erating soft‐ gy: Integra‐ gy: Integra‐ is read by by SEN‐ sents the ue
ware tion using tion using SENTRON TRON PAC machine
FW FW PAC
DBB1 GP should
GP perform
measure‐
ment
DBB2
Operating Measure‐
soft‐ ment in
ware → PL progress
C

4.17 SENTRON PAC
DB1001 SENTRON PAC

/SCE/
DBB3 Power dis‐
PLC → op‐ play on
erating soft‐
ware
DBD4 Manual value (REAL) to operating software
PLC → op‐
erating soft‐
ware
DBD8 Total active power (REAL) to operating software
PLC → op‐
erating soft‐
ware
DBD12 Measured drawn active energy in kWh (REAL) to the operating software
PLC → op‐
erating soft‐
ware
DBD16 Measured supplied active energy in kWh (REAL) to the operating software
PLC → op‐
erating soft‐
ware
DBD20 Total active power in watts (REAL) from SENTRON
GP
DBD24 Drawn active energy at tariff 1 (F) in Wh (REAL) from SENTRON
GP
DBD28 Supplied active energy at tariff 1 (F) in Wh (REAL) from SENTRON
GP
DBD32 Drawn active energy in kWh per day (REAL) to the operating software
DBD36 Supplied active energy in kWh day (REAL) to the operating software
DBD40 Drawn active energy in kWh previous day (REAL) to the operating software
DBD44 Supplied active energy in kWh previous day (REAL) to the operating software
DBD48 Drawn active energy in kWh month (REAL) to the operating software
DBD52 Supplied active energy in kWh month (REAL) to the operating software
DBD56 Drawn active energy in kWh previous month (REAL) to the operating software
DBD60 Supplied active energy in kWh previous month (REAL) to the operating software

4.17 SENTRON PAC
DB1001 SENTRON PAC

/SCE/
DBD64 Drawn active energy in kWh year (REAL) to the operating software
DBD68 Supplied active energy in kWh year (REAL) to the operating software
DBD72 Drawn active energy in kWh previous year (REAL) to the operating software
DBD76 Supplied active energy in kWh previous year (REAL) to the operating software
DBB80 ... Reserved

DBB95
DBB96 ProductionAct
PLC→GP/
operating
software
DBB97 Values invalid in
GP DBD28 DBD24 DBD20
GP DBD384 DBD344 DBD304 DBD264 DBD224 DBD184 DBD144 DBD104
GP DBD464 DBD424
4.17.2 DB1001, SENTRON PAC, auxiliary devices
Table 4-99 DB1001, signals for SENTRON PAC
DB1001 SENTRON PAC

/SCE/
DBBn+100 Control/command bits
PLC → GP op‐ Reset Input Different Energy Read ener‐ Process
erating soft‐ data mode: (en‐ values measure‐ gy actual device
ware struc‐ ergy or when ment run‐ value up‐
ture power) measuring ning date
energy
DBBn+101 Reserved
DBBn+102 Reserved

4.17 SENTRON PAC
DB1001 SENTRON PAC

/SCE/
DBBn+104 Active power or active energy of the auxiliary unit [kW] or [kWh]
PLC → GP op‐
erating soft‐
ware
DBDn+108 Drawn active energy of the auxiliary unit [kWh]
PLC → operat‐
ing software
DBDn+112 Active energy supplied by the auxiliary unit [kWh]
GP → operat‐
ing software
DBDn+116 Active energy drawn by the auxiliary unit at the measurement start [kWh]
GP → operat‐
ing software
DBDn+120 Active energy supplied by the auxiliary unit at the measurement start [kWh]
GP → operat‐
ing software
DBDn+124 Active energy drawn by the auxiliary unit at the measurement end [kWh]
GP → operat‐
ing software
DBDn+128 Active energy supplied by the auxiliary unit at the measurement end [kWh]
GP → operat‐
ing software
DBDn+132 Reserved
DBDn+136 Reserved
Auxiliary unit instances:
Auxiliary unit 1 (n=0): DB1001 DBB100…DBB139


4.18 Spindle temperature sensor
4.18.1 DB1002: spindle temperature sensors
Table 4-100 DB1002, signals for spindle temperature sensors
DB1002 SENTRON PAC

/SCE/
DBWn + 0 Sensor n
Sensor installation location
DBWn + 2 Reserved
DBDn + 4 Sensor n
Temperature sensor actual value [°C]
DBDn + 8 Sensor n
Temperature sensor warning threshold value [°C]
DBWn + 12 Sensor n
Number of alarm limit value violations
DBBn + 14 Sensor n
Last alarm limit value violation: Year total active power (REAL) to the operating software
DBBn + 15 Sensor n
Last alarm limit value violation: Month
DBBn + 16 Sensor n
Last alarm limit value violation: Day
DBBn + 17 Sensor n
Last alarm limit value violation: Hour
DBBn + 18 Sensor n
Last alarm limit value violation: Minute
DBBn + 19 Sensor n
Last alarm limit value violation: Seconds

DB1002 SENTRON PAC

/SCE/
DBBn + 20 Sensor n
Duration of the warning limit value violations
DBBn + 24 Sensor n
Temperature sensor fault threshold value [°C]
DBBn + 28 Sensor n
Number of fault limit value violations
DBBn + 30 Sensor n
Last alarm limit value violation: Year
DBBn + 31 Sensor n
Last alarm limit value violation: Month
DBBn + 32 Sensor n
Last alarm limit value violation: Day
DBBn + 33 Sensor n
Last alarm limit value violation: Hour
DBBn + 34 Sensor n
Last alarm limit value violation: Minute
DBBn + 35 Sensor n
Last alarm limit value violation: Seconds
DBDn + 36 Sensor n
Duration of the fault limit value violation
Spindle/temperature sensor instances
Spindle_1, Temperature_sensor_1 (n=0): DB1002 DBB00…DBB39


4.19 Interface to the tool management, extended area

4.19.1 DB1071, interface for loading/unloading the magazine Multitool
Table 4-101 DB1071, interface for loading/unloading the magazine Multitool

/FBWsl/
DBWn + 0 Type of distance coding of the multitool (corresponds to $TC_MTP_KD)
DBWn + 2 Multitool location number
Number of locations of the multitool
DBWn + 4 Multitool location distance
DBWn + 8 Multitool number
DBWn + 12 Tool holder
DBWn + 14 Reserved
DBWn + 16 Reserved
DBWn + 18 Reserved

4.19.2 DB1072, interface for the spindle: Multitool
Table 4-102 DB1072, interface for the spindle: Multitool
DB1072 Spindle (NC → PLC)

/FBWsl/
DBWn + 0 Distance coding (corresponds to to $TC_MTP_KD)
DBWn + 8 Multitool number (new tool)
DBWn + 10 Multitool location number (new tool)
DBWn + 12 Multitool number (old tool)
DBWn + 14 Multitool location number (old tool)
DBWn + 16 New tool: Location type
DBWn + 18 New tool: Size left
DBWn + 20 New tool: Size right
DBWn + 22 New tool: Size top
DBWn + 24 New tool: Size bottom
DBWn + 26 Tool status for new tool (corresponds to $TC_TP8[T_Nr])
DBWn + 28 New tool: Internal T number of the NC
Spindle or toolholder number to which the change refers
DBWn + 32 Original magazine of new tool (corresponds to NC variables $A_MYMN[T No])
If the new tool is located in the magazine, this value is identical with DB72 DBW(n + 20 (Page 1349)).

DB1072 Spindle (NC → PLC)

/FBWsl/
DBWn + 34 Original location of new tool (corresponds to NC variables $A_MYMLN[T No])
If the new tool is located in the magazine, this value is identical with DB72 DBW(n + 22).
DBWn + 36 Reserved
-
DBWn + 48
4.19.3 DB1073, interface for the turret: Multitool
Table 4-103 DB1073, interface for the turret: Multitool
DB1073 Turret (NC → PLC)

/FBWsl/
DBWn + 0 Distance coding (corresponds to to $TC_MTP_KD)
DBWn + 8 Multitool number (new tool)
DBWn + 10 Multitool location number (new tool)
DBWn + 12 Multitool number (old tool)
DBWn + 14 Multitool location number (old tool)
DBWn + 16 Location type
DBWn + 18 New tool: Size left
DBWn + 20 New tool: Size right
DBWn + 22 New tool: Size top
DBWn + 24 New tool: Size bottom
DBWn + 26 Tool status for new tool (corresponds to parameter $TC_TP8[T_No])

4.20 Access to SINAMICS signals via PLC
DB1073 Turret (NC → PLC)

/FBWsl/
DBWn + 28 New tool: Internal T number of the NC
DBWn + 32 Original magazine of new tool (corresponds to NC variables $A_MYMN[T No])
If the new tool is located in the magazine, this value is identical with DB73 DBW (Page 1351)(n + 20).
DBWn + 34 Original location of new tool (corresponds to NC variables $A_MYMN[T No])
If the new tool is located in the magazine, this value is identical with DB73 DBW (Page 1351)(n + 22).
DBWn + 36 Reserved
-
DBWn + 48
4.20.1 DB1002, Active Line Module (ALM)
Table 4-104 DB1002, signals for Active Line Module (ALM)
DB1002 ALM_IF [r/w]

DBWn+0 STW1.15 STW1.14 STW1.13 STW1.12 STW1.11 STW1.10 STW1.9 STW1.8
Control by
PLC
DBWn+1 STW1.7 STW1.6 STW1.5 STW1.4 STW1.3 STW1.2 STW1.1 STW1.0
Acknowl‐ Disable Disable mo‐ Operation No OFF2 ON/OFF1
edge faults generator tor opera‐ enabled "0/1"
operation tion
DBWn+2 ZSW1.15 ZSW1.14 ZSW1.13 ZSW1.12 ZSW1.11 ZSW1.10 ZSW1.9 ZSW1.8
Line con‐ Precharg‐ Control re‐
tactor ing comple‐ quest to
closed ted PLC
DBWn+3 ZSW1.7 ZSW1.6 ZSW1.5 ZSW1.4 ZSW1.3 ZSW1.2 ZSW1.1 ZSW1.0

Alarm ac‐ Switching No OFF2 Fault active Operation Ready to Ready to
tive on inhibited active enabled operate start
ALM instances:
ALM 1 (n=0): DB1002.DBW0 … DBW3
ALM 2 (n=4): DB1002.DBW4 … DBW7


Interface signals - detailed description 5
5.1 DB10: NC, PLC and HMI
5.1.1 DB10 DBX0.0 - 7 (digital NC inputs 1 - 8: Lock)
DB10 DBX0.0 - 7 Digital NC inputs 1 - 8: Lock

Signal flow PLC → NC
Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The digital NC input is locked.
Signal state 0 The digital NC input is enabled.
Additional information Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Input 8 2)
Input 7 2)
Input 6 2)
Input 5 2)
Input 4 1)
Input 3 1)
Input 2 1)
Input 1 1)
1) Onboard inputs of the NCU
2) Inputs without hardware
Note
When read, a locked input supplies a value of 0.
Corresponds with DB10 DBX0, 122, 124, 126, 128 (digital NC inputs 1 - 8: Lock)
DB10 DBB1, 123, 125, 127, 129 (digital NC inputs 1 - 8: Set)
DB10 DBB60, 186, 187, 188, 189 (digital NC inputs 1 - 8: Actual value)
MD10350 $MN_FASTIO_DIG_NUM_INPUTS
Additional references Function Manual Expansion Functions; Chapter "A4: Digital and analog NC I/O" > "Indirect
I/O accesses via PLC" > "Digital NC inputs/outputs" > "NC inputs"
5.1.2 DB10 DBX1.0 - 7 (digital NC inputs 1 - 8: Set)
DB10 DBX1.0 - 7 Digital NC inputs 1 - 8: Set

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Set NC input value to a defined value of 1.
Signal state 0 Do not influence NC input value.
Input 8 2)
Input 7 2)
Input 6 2)
Input 5 2)
Input 4 1)
Input 3 1)
Input 2 1)
Input 1 1)
1) Onboard inputs of the NCU
2) Inputs without hardware
If the PLC user program sets the NC input to a value of 1, then the signal state at the on‐
board input of the NCU - as well as the lock of the NC input - have no effect.

Interface signals - detailed description

Corresponds to DB10 DBX0, 122, 124, 126, 128 (digital NC inputs 1 - 8: Lock)
Additional references Extended Functions Function Manual; Section "A4: Digital and analog NC I/O" > "Indirect
5.1.3 DB10 DBX4.0 - 7 (digital NC outputs 1 - 8: Lock)
DB10 DBX4.0 - 7 Digital NC outputs 1 - 8: Lock

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The digital NC output is locked.
Signal state 0 The digital NC output is enabled.
If the digital NC output is locked, then 0 V (defined) is output at the hardware output.
If the digital NC output is not locked, then the value specified in the NC program or by the
PLC program is output at the hardware output.
Corresponds to DB10 DBB5, 131, 135, 139, 143 (digital NC outputs 1 - 8: Overwrite screen form)
DB10 DBB6, 132, 136, 140, 144 (digital NC outputs: Setting value from the PLC)
DB10 DBB7, 133, 137, 141, 145 (digital NC outputs: Target screen form)
MD10360 $MN_FASTIO_DIG_NUM_OUTPUTS
I/O accesses via PLC" > "Digital NC inputs/outputs" > "NC outputs"
5.1.4 DB10 DBX5.0 - 7 (digital NC outputs 1 - 8: Overwrite)
DB10 DBX5.0 - 7 Digital NC outputs 1 - 8: Overwrite

Update Cyclic
Edge change 0 → 1 The associated "setting value" is activated.
Edge change 1 → 0 No effect.


For a positive edge change 0 → 1, then for the corresponding output, instead of the value
written using system variables $A_OUT, the setting value specified from the PLC user pro‐
gram is used. The value written via system variables $A_OUT is then lost.
For a negative edge change 1 → 0, for the corresponding output, the actual value at the
hardware output is kept.
Note
The NC/PLC interface DBB6, ... (Digital NC outputs: setting value) is jointly used by:
● DB10 DBB5, ... (overwrite) for edge change 0 → 1
● DB10 DBB7, ... (target) for signal state 1
Activating the two interfaces simultaneously should be avoided.
Corresponds to DB10 DBB4, 130, 134, 138, 142 (digital NC outputs: Lock)
DB10 DBB5, 131, 135, 139, 143 (digital NC outputs 1 - 8: Overwrite)
Additional references Extended Functions Function Manual; Section "A4: Digital and analog NC I/Os"
5.1.5 DB10 DBX6.0 - 7 (digital NC outputs 1 - 8: Setting value)
DB10 DBX6.0 - 7 Digital NC outputs 1 - 8: Setting value

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Value of the setting value is 1.
Using the setting value, the PLC user program can specify a defined output value. In order
that the setting value becomes active, it must be activated from the overwrite screen form
or the setting screen form.
Note

5.1.6 DB10 DBX7.0 - 7 (digital NC outputs 1 - 8: Target)
DB10 DBX7.0 - 7 Digital NC outputs 1 - 8: Target

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The target is active.
Signal state 0 The target is not active.
If a bit is set, then for the corresponding output, instead of the NC output value, the setting
value specified by the PLC user program is used. The actual NC output value is kept.
If a bit is reset, then for the corresponding output, the last NC output value becomes active
again.
Note
5.1.7 DB10 DBX56.1 (Emergency Stop)
DB10 DBX56.1 Emergency Stop

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Emergency Stop is requested.
Signal state 0 Emergency Stop is not requested.
Additional information All machine axes are braked in the relevant axis-specific parameterized time:
MD36610 $MA_AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME
Corresponds with DB10 DBX56.2 (acknowledge Emergency Stop)
DB10 DBX106.1 (Emergency Stop active)
MD36610 $MA_AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME (time of braking ramp in event of errors)
Additional references Function Manual Basic Functions, Chapter "N2: Emergency Stop"

5.1.8 DB10 DBX56.2 (acknowledge Emergency Stop)
DB10 DBX56.2 Acknowledge Emergency Stop

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Acknowledgment of the "Emergency Stop" state is requested.
Signal state 0 Acknowledgment of the "Emergency Stop" state is not requested.
Additional information To acknowledge the "Emergency Stop" state of the NC, the following interface signals
must remain set until interface signal DB10 DBX106.1 (Emergency Stop active) has been
reset:
● DB10 DBX56.2 = 1 (acknowledge Emergency Stop)
● DB11, ... DBX0.7 = 1 (mode group reset) for all mode groups of the NC
Corresponds with DB10 DBX56.1 (Emergency Stop)
DB10 DBX106.1 (Emergency Stop active)
DB11 DBX0.7 (mode group reset)
Additional references Function Manual Basic Functions, Chapter "N2: Emergency Stop" > "Emergency Stop ac‐
knowledgment"
5.1.9 DB10 DBX56.4 - 7 (key-operated switch position 0 - 3)
DB10 DBX56.4 - 7 Key-operated switch position 0 - 3

Update Cyclic
Additional information Depending on the key-operated switch position, access to certain elements in the NC can
be enabled or disabled.
● Key-operated switch position 0 represents the lowest access rights
● Key-operated switch position 3 represents the highest access rights
The interface signals of key-operated switch positions 1 to 3 can either be directly specified
from the key-operated switch on the machine control panel or from the PLC user program.
It is only permissible to set one bit. If several bits are set simultaneously, the control inter‐
nally activates switch position 3.
Key-operated switch position Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
0 0 0 0 1
1 0 0 1 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 1 0 0 0
Corresponds with ... Machine data for access levels: MD11612, MD51044 - MD51064, MD51070 - MD51073,
MD51199 - MD51211, MD51215 - MD51225, MD51235
Disabling using a password

5.1.10 DB10 DBX58.0 - 7 (collision avoidance: Deactivate protection area group)
DB10 DBX58.0 - 7: Collision avoidance: Deactivate protection area group

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The deactivation of all protection areas of the protection area type in the selected operating
mode is requested.
mode is not requested.
Additional information Bit Operating mode Protection area type1)
0 AUTOMATIC Machine
1 Tool
2 Workholder
3 Workpiece
4 JOG Machine
5 Tool
6 Workholder
7 Workpiece
1)
Type of a protection area ($NP_PROT_TYPE)
Note
The deactivation of a protection area group is selected from the SINUMERIK Operate user
interface in the operating area "AUTOMATIC", "JOG" or "MDI" > "ETC key (">")" > "Set‐
tings" > "Collision avoidance" > "Switch collision avoidance on and off" by setting the HMI/
PLC interface signal DB10 DBX93.0 ... 7 of the protection area group.
The interface signal is transferred according to the value of the FB1 parameter MMCToIf
by the basic PLC program into the NC/PLC interface signal DB10 DBX58.0 ... 7:
● "TRUE": Transmission
● "FALSE": No transmission
The default value of the parameter is "TRUE".
Note
If manual traversing has been enabled in AUTOMATIC mode (MD10735 with bit 0 == 1:
allow jogging in the automatic mode) the settings for the JOG mode also apply in AUTO‐
MATIC mode during manual traversing.
Corresponds with DB10 DBX93.0 - 7 (deactivate collision avoidance)
$NP_PROT_TYPE (type of protection area)
MD10735 $MN_JOG_MODE_MASK (settings for the JOG mode)
Additional references ● Turning and/or Milling Operating Manual respectively; Chapter "Collision avoidance"
● Function Manual, Special Functions; Chapter "K8: Geometric machine modeling" >
"Commissioning" > "System variables: Protection areas" > "$NP_PROT_TYPE"
● Function Manual, Special Functions; Chapter "K9: Collision avoidance"

5.1.11 DB10 DBX60.0 - 7 (digital NC inputs 1 - 8: Actual value)
DB10 DBX60.0 - 7 Digital NC inputs 1 - 8: Actual value

Signal flow NC → PLC
Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The actual value is 1.
The actual NC output value can be read in the PLC user program via the actual value.
Note
The value in the "Actual value" interface can, as a result of the various subsequent influenc‐
ing possibilities "Lock" and "Set", have a different value than that available at the NC out‐
put.
Additional references Function Manual Expansion Functions; Chapter "A4: Digital and analog NC I/Os"
5.1.12 DB10 DBX64.0 - 7 (digital NC outputs 1 - 8: Setpoint)
DB10 DBX64.0 - 7 Digital NC outputs 1 - 8: Setpoint

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The setpoint is 1.
The actual NC output value can be read in the PLC user program via the setpoint.
Note
The value in the "Setpoint" interface can, as a result of the various subsequent influencing
possibilities "Target" and "Lock", have a different value than that available at the NC output.
Corresponds with DB10 DBB4, 130, 134, 138, 142 (digital NC outputs: Lock)

5.1.13 DB10 DBX93.0 ... 7 (collision avoidance: Deactivate protection area group)
DB10 DBX93.0 ... 7 Collision avoidance: Deactivate protection area group

Signal flow HMI → PLC
Update Cyclic
mode is requested.
mode is not requested.
Additional information Bit Operating mode Protection area type1)
0 AUTOMATIC Machine
1 Tool
2 Workholder
3 Workpiece
4 JOG Machine
5 Tool
6 Workholder
7 Workpiece
1)
Type of a protection area ($NP_PROT_TYPE)
Note
The deactivation of a protection area group is selected from the SINUMERIK Operate user
interface in the operating area "AUTOMATIC", "JOG" or "MDI" > "ETC key (">")" > "Set‐
tings" > "Collision avoidance" > "Switch collision avoidance on and off" by setting the HMI/
PLC interface signal DB10 DBX93.0 ... 7 of the protection area group.
by the basic PLC program into the NC/PLC interface signal DB10 DBX58.0 ... 7:
Note
If manual traversing has been enabled in AUTOMATIC mode (MD10735 with bit 0 == 1:
allow jogging in the automatic mode) the settings for the JOG mode also apply in AUTO‐
MATIC mode during manual traversing.
Corresponds with DB10 DBX58.0 ... 7 (collision avoidance: Deactivate protection area group)
$NP_PROT_TYPE (type of protection area)
MD10735 $MN_JOG_MODE_MASK (settings for the JOG mode)
Additional references ● Turning and/or Milling Operating Manual respectively; Chapter "Collision avoidance"
● Function Manual, Special Functions; Chapter "K8: Geometric machine modeling" >
"Commissioning" > "System variables: Protection areas" > "$NP_PROT_TYPE"

5.1.14 DB10 DBX97.0 - 3 (channel number geometry axis handwheel 1)
DB10 DBX97.0 - 3 Channel number for geometry axis, handwheel 1

Update Cyclic
Additional information The operator can assign an axis to the handwheel (1, 2, 3) directly at the operator panel. If
this axis is a geometry axis (interface signal "Machine axis handwheel <n>" = 0), then the
basic PLC program provides the corresponding channel number at the HMI interface as
binary-coded value.
Example:
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Channel number
0 0 1 0 2
Note
For machine axes (interface signal "Machine axis handwheel <n>" = 1), interface signal
"Channel number geometry axis handwheel <n>" has no significance.
Corresponds with DB10 DBX98.0 - 3 (channel number geometry axis handwheel 2)
DB10 DBX99.0 - 3 (channel number geometry axis handwheel 3)
DB10 DBX100.0 - 4 (axis number handwheel 1)
DB10 DBX100.6 (handwheel 1 selected)
DB10 DBX100.7 (machine axis handwheel 1)
DB21, ... DBX12.0 - 2 (geometry axis 1: activate handwheel)
DB31, ... DBX4.0 - 2 (activate handwheel)
Additional references Function Manual, Extended Functions; Chapter "H1: manual and handwheel travel"

Additional information See DB10 DBB97 (channel number geometry axis handwheel 1) (Page 1375).

Additional information See DB10 DBB97 (channel number geometry axis handwheel 1) (Page 1375).

5.1.17 DB10 DBX100.0 - 4 (axis number handwheel 1)
DB10 DBX100.0 - 4 Axis number handwheel 1

Update Cyclic
Additional information The operator can assign an axis to the handwheel (1, 2, 3) directly at the operator panel.
To do this, it specifies the requested axis (e.g. X). The basic PLC program provides the
axis number, associated with the axis, at the HMI interface as binary-coded value.
Example:
Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Axis number
0 0 1 0 1 5
The following applies when assigning the axis identifier to the axis number:
● Machine axis (interface signal "Machine axis" = 1):
→ The assignment is realized using machine data MD10000.
● Geometry axis (interface signal "Machine axis" = 0):
→ The assignment is realized using machine data MD20060.
Corresponds with DB10 DBX101.0 - 4 (axis number handwheel 2)
MD10000 $MN_AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB [<n>] (machine axis name)
MD20060 $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB [<n>] (name of the geometry axis in the
channel)
5.1.18 DB10 DBX100.5 (define handwheel 1 as contour handwheel)
DB10 DBX100.5 Define handwheel 1 as contour handwheel

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The handwheel is defined as contour handwheel via the operator interface.
Signal state 0 The handwheel is not defined as contour handwheel.


Additional information In order that the handwheel defined via the user interface is also active as contour hand‐
wheel, signal "Define handwheel <n> as contour handwheel" must be linked to signal "Acti‐
vate handwheel <n> as contour handwheel".
Note
Depending on the settings of parameter HWheelMMC in FB1 of the basic PLC program,
these signals are either supplied by the basic program or must be supplied by the PLC
user program.
Corresponds with DB10 DBX101.5 (define handwheel 2 as contour handwheel)
DB10 DBX102.5 (define handwheel 3 as contour handwheel)
DB21 ... DBX30.0 - 2 (activate contour handwheel)
FB1 parameter "HWheelMMC"
Additional references Function Manual Basic Functions; Chapter "P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D
sl"
Function Manual, Extended Functions; Chapter "H1: manual and handwheel travel"
5.1.19 DB10 DBX100.6 (handwheel 1 selected)
DB10 DBX100.6 Handwheel 1 selected

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Enable handwheel for activation.
Signal state 0 Lock handwheel.
Additional information The basic PLC program provides this interface signal at the HMI interface if, at the opera‐
tor panel, the operator selects or deselects handwheel 1 for the specified axis, i.e enables
or locks for activation. The information is transferred from the basic PLC program to the
PLC (precondition: FB1 parameter "HWheelMMC" == "TRUE") and the interface signal "Ac‐
tivate handwheel" appropriately set for the specified axis. Depending on the setting in the
HMI interface signal "machine axis", either the interface for the geometry axis or for the
machine axis is used.


Corresponds with DB10 DBX101.6 (handwheel 2 selected)
FB1 parameter "HWheelMMC"
5.1.20 DB10 DBX100.7 (machine axis handwheel 1)
DB10 DBX100.7 Machine axis handwheel 1

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Axis is a machine axis.
Signal state 0 Axis is a geometry axis.
Additional information The basic PLC program provides this interface signal at the HMI interface if the operator
has assigned an axis to the handwheel (1, 2, 3) directly at the operator panel.
Corresponds with DB10 DBX101.7 (machine axis handwheel 2)


Additional information See DB10 DBX100.0 - 4 (axis number handwheel 1) (Page 1376).

Additional information See DB10 DBX100.5 (define handwheel 1 as contour handwheel) (Page 1376).

Additional information See DB10 DBX100.6 (handwheel 1 selected) (Page 1377).

Additional information See DB10 DBX100.7 (machine axis handwheel 1) (Page 1378).

Additional information See DB10 DBX100.0 - 4 (axis number handwheel 1) (Page 1376).

Additional information See DB10 DBX100.5 (define handwheel 1 as contour handwheel) (Page 1376).


Additional information See DB10 DBX100.6 (handwheel 1 selected) (Page 1377).

Additional information See DB10 DBX100.7 (machine axis handwheel 1) (Page 1378).
5.1.29 DB10 DBX103.0 (remote diagnosis active)
DB10 DBX103.0 Remote diagnosis active

Update Cyclically
Signal state 1 Remote diagnosis (optional) is active, i.e. the control is operated via an external PC.
Signal state 0 Remote diagnosis is not active.
5.1.30 DB10 DBX103.5 (AT box ready)
DB10 DBX103.5 AT box ready

Update Cyclically
Signal state 1 The AT box for expansion modules is ready.
Signal state 0 The AT box is not ready. An expansion module conforming to the AT specification has ei‐
ther no functionality or restricted functionality.
5.1.31 DB10 DBX103.6 (HMI temperature limit)
DB10 DBX103.6 HMI temperature limit

Update Cyclically
Signal state 1 The temperature is within the permissible tolerance range from 5 to 55 °C.
Signal state 0 The temperature is outside the permissible tolerance range from 5 to 55 °C.
The temperature monitoring has responded and the PCU has been disabled.

5.1.32 DB10 DBX103.7 (HMI battery alarm)
DB10 DBX103.7 HMI battery alarm

Update Cyclically
Signal state 1 The battery monitor has responded. Power failure can cause the loss of recently changed
data and a correct device configuration. An appropriate alarm is issued. The buffer battery
should be checked. An insufficient battery voltage also affects the current time on the user
interface.
Signal state 0 No HMI battery alarm is present.
Additional references Operator Components Manual (PCU)
5.1.33 DB10 DBX104.7 (NC-CPU ready)
DB10 DBX104.7 NC CPU ready

Update Cyclically
Signal state 1 The NC CPU is ready and registers itself cyclically with the PLC.
After a correct initial start and the first complete OB1 cycle, the PLC and NC continuously
exchange sign-of-life signals.
Signal state 0 NC CPU is not ready for operation.
The following measures are started by the basic PLC program:
● The status signals of the NC to the PLC (user interface) are deleted
● The change signals of auxiliary functions are deleted.
● Cyclic processing of the user interface PLC to NC is terminated.
Additional references ● Diagnostics Manual
● Function Manual, Basic Functions;
– Chapter "P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl"
– Chapter "P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D"
5.1.34 DB10 DBX106.1 (Emergency Stop active)
DB10 DBX106.1 Emergency Stop active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Emergency Stop is active
Signal state 0 Emergency Stop is notactive.

DB10 DBX106.1 Emergency Stop active

Additional information To acknowledge the "Emergency Stop" state of the NC, the following interface signals
must remain set until interface signal DB10 DBX106.1 (Emergency Stop active) has been
reset:
● DB10 DBX56.2 = 1 (acknowledge Emergency Stop)
● DB11, ... DBX0.7 = 1 (mode group reset) for all mode groups of the NC
Corresponds with DB10 DBX56.1 (Emergency Stop)
DB10 DBX56.2 (acknowledge Emergency Stop)
DB11 DBX0.7 (mode group reset)
Additional references Function Manual Basic Functions, Chapter "N2: Emergency Stop"
5.1.35 DB10 DBX107.0 - 1 (probe actuated)
DB10 DBX107.0 - 1 Probe actuated

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Probe deflected.
Signal state 0 Probe not deflected
Additional information Bit 0 Probe 1
Bit 1 Probe 2
Additional references Function Manual, Extended Functions; Chapter "M5: Measuring"
5.1.36 DB10 DBX107.6 (NCU link active)
DB10 DBX107.6 NCU link: Active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 NCU link communication is active.
Signal state 0 NCU link communication is not active.
Additional information The signal is irrelevant for a system with an NCU.
Additional references ● Function Manual, Extended Functions; Chapter "B3: Distributed systems - 840D sl only"
● NCU Equipment Manual
5.1.37 DB10 DBX108.3 (operating software ready)
DB10 DBX108.3 Operating software ready

Update Cyclically

DB10 DBX108.3 Operating software ready

Signal state 1 SINUMERIK Operate is ready and registers itself cyclically with the NC.
Signal state 0 SINUMERIK Operate is not ready.
Additional references Diagnostics Manual
5.1.38 DB10 DBX108.5 (drives in cyclic operation)
DB10 DBX108.5 Drives in cyclic operation

Update Cyclically
Signal state 1 For all machine axes of the NC, the corresponding drives are in cyclic operation, i.e. they
cyclically exchange PROFIdrive telegrams with the NC.
Signal state 0 For at least one machine axis of the NC, the corresponding drive is not in cyclic operation,
i.e. it is not cyclically exchanging PROFIdrive telegrams with the NC.
5.1.39 DB10 DBX108.6 (drive ready)
DB10 DBX108.6 Drive ready

Update Cyclically
Signal state 1 For all machine axes of the NC, the corresponding drives are ready:
DB31, ... DBX93.5 == 1 (DRIVE ready)
Signal state 0 For at least one machine axis of the NC, the corresponding drive is not ready:
DB31, ... DBX93.5 == 0 (DRIVE ready)
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX93.5 (DRIVE ready)
5.1.40 DB10 DBX108.7 (NC ready)
DB10 DBX108.7 NC ready

Update Cyclically
Signal state 1 The control is ready.
The interface signal is an image of the relay contact "NC Ready".
The signal is set when:
● Relay contact "NC Ready" closed
● All internal control voltages have been established
● Control state: Cyclic operation

DB10 DBX108.7 NC ready

Signal state 0 The control is not ready.
The signal is set when:
● Relay contact "NC Ready" open
Possible causes:
● The undervoltage or overvoltage monitoring function has responded
● Individual components are not ready (NC CPU ready)
● The NC CPU watchdog has responded
If still possible, the following internal control responses occur:
● NC: The controller enable signals are withdrawn ⇒ the drives stop
● PLC basic program:
– The status signals from the NC to the PLC (user interface) are deleted
– The change signals of the auxiliary functions are deleted
– Cyclic processing of the user interface PLC to NC is terminated.
Remedy:
A warm restart must be initiated to exit the fault state.
Corresponds with DB10 DBX104.7(NC CPU ready)
● Function Manual, Basic Functions:
– Chapter "P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl"
– Chapter "P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D"
5.1.41 DB10 DBX109.0 (NC alarm active)
DB10 DBX109.0 NC alarm is active

Update Cyclically
Signal state 1 At least one NC alarm is active.
Signal state 0 No NC alarm is active.
Additional information The interface signal is a combination of interface signals of all of the existing channels:
DB21, ... DBX36.6 (channel-specific NC alarm active)
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX36.6 (channel-specific NC alarm active)
DB21, ... DBX36.7 (NC alarm with machining stop active)

5.1.42 DB10 DBX109.5 (heat sink temperature alarm, NCU)
DB10 DBX109.5 NCU heat sink temperature alarm

Update Cyclically
Signal state 1 The heat sink temperature limit of the NCU has been exceeded. Continuous NCU opera‐
tion can no longer be guaranteed.
Signal state 0 The heat sink temperature limit of the NCU has not been exceeded.
5.1.43 DB10 DBX109.6 (air temperature alarm)
DB10 DBX109.6 Air temperature alarm

Update Cyclically
Signal state 1 The monitoring of the ambient temperature and/or the fan monitoring has responded.
Possible causes:
● Ambient temperature too high
● The speed monitoring of the 24 VDC fan used to cool the module has responded.
Possible remedy: Replace the fan and/or ensure that additional ventilation/cooling is provi‐
ded.
Signal state 0 The monitoring of the ambient temperature and the fan monitoring has not responded.
Corresponds with Relay contacts of the infeed/regenerative feedback unit: Terminal 5.1, 5.2 or 5.1, 5.3)
5.1.44 DB10 DBX109.7 (NC battery alarm)
DB10 DBX109.7 NC battery alarm

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The NC battery voltage monitoring function has responded.
This may be due to the following causes:
● The battery voltage is within the pre-warning limit range (approx. 2.7 to 2.9 V).
● The battery voltage is below the pre-warning limit range (≤ 2.6 V).
● When the controller powered-up, it was identified that the battery voltage was below
the pre-warning limit range (≤ 2.6 V).
Signal state 0 The battery voltage is higher than the lower limit value (normal situation).
Additional information The NC battery should only be replaced while the NC is switched on to avoid data loss as
there is no memory backup.

5.1.45 DB10 DBX110.0 - 113.7 (software cams: minus cam signal 1 to 32)
DB10 DBX110.0 - 113.7 Software cams: minus cam signal 1 to 32

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Linear axis
The minus cam signal switches from 0 to 1 when the axis passes over the minus cam in
the negative direction.
Modulo rotary axis
The minus cam signal changes level in response to every positive edge of the plus cam
signal.
The minus cam signal switches from 1 to 0 when the axis passes over the minus cam in
the positive axis direction.
Modulo rotary axis
The minus cam signal changes level in response to every positive edge of the plus cam
signal.
Additional information The switching edge of the minus cam signal 1 to 32 is generated depending on the travers‐
ing direction of the (round) axis, and is transferred in the IPO clock cycle to the PLC inter‐
face.
Corresponds with DB10 DBX114.0 - 117.7 (software cams: plus cam signal 1 to 32)
DB31, ... DBX2.0 (software cams: activation)
Additional references Function Manual, Extended Functions; Chapter "N3: software cams, position switching sig‐
nals"
5.1.46 DB10 DBX114.0 - 117.7 (software cams: plus cam signal 1 to 32)
DB10 DBX114.0 - 117.7 Software cams: plus cam signal 1 to 32

Update Cyclic
The plus cam signal switches from 0 to 1 when the axis traverses the plus cam in the posi‐
tive direction.
Modulo rotary axis
When passing over the minus cam in the positive axis direction, the plus cam signal
switches from 0 to 1.
The plus cam signal switches from 1 to 0 when the axis traverses the plus cam in the nega‐
tive direction.
Modulo rotary axis
When passing over the plus cam in the positive axis direction, the plus cam signal switches
back from 1 to 0.

DB10 DBX114.0 - 117.7 Software cams: plus cam signal 1 to 32

Additional information The switching edge of the plus cam signal 1 to 32 is generated depending on the travers‐
ing direction of the (round) axis, and is transferred in the IPO clock cycle to the PLC inter‐
face.
Note
The described response of the plus cam for modulo rotary axes applies under the condition:
plus cam - minus cam < 180 degrees
If this condition is not fulfilled or if the minus cam is set to a greater value than the plus
cam, then the behavior of the plus cam signal is inverted. The response of the minus cam
signal remains unchanged.
Corresponds with DB10 DBX110.0 - 113.7 (software cams: minus cam signal 1 to 32)
nals"

Update Cyclic
Note
Corresponds with DB10 DBB1, 123, 125, 127, 129 (digital NC inputs set from the PLC)
DB10 DBB60, 186, 187, 188, 189 (actual value of the digital NC inputs)

Update Cyclic



Update Cyclic
Note

Update Cyclic



Update Cyclic
Note

Update Cyclic



Update Cyclic
Note

Update Cyclic



Update Cyclic
Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output 9
16 15 14 13 12 11 10
Corresponds with DB10 DBB5, 131, 135, 139, 143 (digital NC outputs 1 - 8: Overwrite screen form)

Update Cyclic


16 15 14 13 12 11 10
Note

Update Cyclic
16 15 14 13 12 11 10
Note


Update Cyclic
16 15 14 13 12 11 10
again.
Note

Update Cyclic
Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17



Update Cyclic
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
Note

Update Cyclic


24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
Note

Update Cyclic
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
again.
Note


Update Cyclic
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25

Update Cyclic
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
Note



Update Cyclic
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
Note

Update Cyclic


32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
again.
Note

Update Cyclic
40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33


Update Cyclic
40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
Note

Update Cyclic


40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
Note

Update Cyclic
40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
again.
Note

5.1.71 DB10 DBX146.0 - 7 (analog NC inputs 1 - 8: Lock)
DB10 DBX146.0 - 7 Analog NC inputs 1 - 8: Lock

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The analog NC input is locked.
Signal state 0 The analog NC input is enabled.
Corresponds with DB10 DBB147 (analog NC inputs 1 - 8: Target)
DB10 DBW148 - 162 (analog NC outputs 1 - 8: Setting value)
DB10 DBB194 - 208 (analog NC outputs 1 - 8: Actual value)
MD10300 $MN_FASTIO_ANA_NUM_INPUTS
I/O accesses via PLC" > "Analog NC inputs/outputs" > "NC inputs"
5.1.72 DB10 DBX147.0 - 7 (analog NC inputs 1 - 8: Target)
DB10 DBX147.0 - 7 Analog NC inputs 1 - 8: Target

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The target of the setting value is activated.
Signal state 0 The target of the setting value is notactivated.
If the target of the setting value is activated, then the setting value is active as NC input
value.
If the setting value target is de-activated, then as NC input value, the analog value availa‐
ble at the NC input is active or for an active lock, the value of 0.
Corresponds with DBX146.0 - 7 (analog NC inputs 1 - 8: Lock)
DB10 DBB147 (analog NC inputs 1 - 8: Target)
DB10 DBB194 - 208 (analog NC outputs 1 - 8: Actual value)

5.1.73 DB10 DBW148 - 162 (analog NC outputs 1 - 8: Setting value)
DB10 DBW148 - 162 Analog NC inputs 1 - 8: Setting value

Update Cyclic
Additional information DBW162 DBW160 DBW158 DBW156 DBW154 DBW152 DBW150 DBW148
The setting value is transferred as NC input value if input "Target" (DB10 DBB147) was set
The setting value must be specified as a fixed point number (16 bit value including sign) in
2's complement.
DB10 DBB194 - 209 (analog NC inputs 1 - 8: Actual value)
5.1.74 DB10 DBX166.0 - 7 (analog NC outputs 1 - 8: Overwrite)
DB10 DBX166.0 - 7 Analog NC outputs 1 - 8: Overwrite

Update Cyclic
written using system variables $A_OUTA, the setting value specified from the PLC user
program is used. The value written via system variables $A_OUTA is then lost.
Note
The NC/PLC interface DBW170, ... (Analog NC output 1 - 8: setting value) is jointly used
by:

DB10 DBX166.0 - 7 Analog NC outputs 1 - 8: Overwrite

Corresponds with DB10 DBX167.0 - 7 (analog NC outputs 1 - 8: Target)
DB10 DBX168.0 - 7 (analog NC outputs 1 - 8: Lock)
DB10 DBW210 - 224 (analog NC outputs 1 - 8: Setpoint)
MD10310 $MN_FASTIO_ANA_NUM_OUTPUTS
I/O accesses via PLC" > "Analog NC inputs/outputs" > "NC outputs"
5.1.75 DB10 DBX167.0 - 7 (analog NC outputs 1 - 8: Target)
DB10 DBX167.0 - 7 Analog NC outputs 1 - 8: Target

Update Cyclic
again.
Note
by:
Corresponds with DB10 DBX166.0 - 7 (analog NC outputs 1 - 8: Overwrite)
5.1.76 DB10 DBX168.0 - 7 (analog NC outputs 1 - 8: Lock)

Update Cyclic


again.
DB10 DBX167.0 - 7 (analog NC outputs 1 - 8: Target)
5.1.77 DB10 DBW170 - 184 (analog NC outputs 1 - 8: Setting value)
DB10 DBW170 - 184 Analog NC outputs 1 - 8: Setting value

Update Cyclic
that the setting value becomes active, it must be activated via the interface for "Override"
or "Target".
Note
by:


Update Cyclic
Note
put.

Update Cyclic
Note
put.


Update Cyclic
Note
put.

Update Cyclic
Note
put.


Update Cyclic
16 15 14 13 12 11 10
Note

Update Cyclic
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
Note


Update Cyclic
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
Note

Update Cyclic
40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
Note

5.1.86 DB10 DBW194 - 208 (analog NC inputs 1 - 8: Actual value)
DB10 DBW194 - 208 Analog NC inputs 1 - 8: Actual value

Update Cyclic
The actual value must be specified as a fixed point number (16 bit value including sign) in
a 2's complement.
5.1.87 DB10 DBW210 - 224 (analog NC outputs 1 - 8: Setpoint)
DB10 DBW210 - 224 Analog NC outputs 1 - 8: Setpoint

Update Cyclic
The setpoint is represented as a fixed point number (16 bit value including sign) in a 2's
complement.
Note
possibilities, have a different value than that available at the NC output.

5.1.88 DB10 DBX226.0 - 233.7 (collision avoidance: Protection area active)
DB10 DBX226.0 - 233.7 Collision avoidance: Protection area active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The protection area connected to the interface signal is active.
If several protection areas are connected to the interface signal: All protection areas are
active.
Signal state 0 The protection area connected to the interface signal is not active.
If several protection areas are connected to the interface signal: At least one protection
area is not active.
Additional information The assignment protection area ↔ interface signal (<byte>.<bit>) is realized by appropriate‐
ly parameterizing system variables $NP_BIT_NO:
$NP_BIT_NO[<protection area>] = <bit number>
Byte Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit number
226 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
227 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
228 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
229 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24
230 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32
231 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40
232 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48
233 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56
Corresponds with DB10 DBX234.0 - 241.7 (collision avoidance: Activate protection area)
System variable $NP_BIT_NO (number of the interface bit for switchover activated)
Additional references ● Function Manual, Special Functions; Chapter "K8: Geometric machine modeling" >
"Commissioning" > "System variables: Protection areas" > "$NP_BIT_NO"
5.1.89 DB10 DBX234.0 - 241.7 (collision avoidance: Activate protection area)
DB10 DBX234.0 - 241.7 Collision avoidance: Activate protection zone

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Request to activate the protection areas that are connected with the interface signal.
Signal state 0 Request to deactivate the protection areas that are connected with the interface signal.

DB10 DBX234.0 - 241.7 Collision avoidance: Activate protection zone

Additional information The assignment protection area ↔ interface signal (<byte>.<bit>) is realized by appropriate‐
ly parameterizing system variables $NP_BIT_NO:
$NP_BIT_NO[<protection area>] = <bit number>
Byte Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit number
234 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
235 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
236 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
237 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24
238 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32
239 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40
240 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48
241 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56
Corresponds with DB10 DBX226.0 - 233.7 (collision avoidance: Protection area active)
System variable $NP_BIT_NO (number of the interface bit for switchover activated)
Additional references ● Function Manual, Special Functions; Chapter "K8: Geometric machine modeling" >
"Commissioning" > "System variables: Protection areas" > "$NP_BIT_NO"
5.1.90 DB10 DBX245.0 - 5 (Ethernet handwheel stationary)
DB10 DBX245.0 - 5 Ethernet handwheel is stationary

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Ethernet handwheel is stationary.
Signal state 0 Ethernet handwheel is moved.
Additional information A stationary state is detected by the Ethernet modules to which the handwheel is connec‐
ted. If a handwheel does not transfer any handwheel pulses for a defined period of time,
the module detects this to be a stationary state and transfers it to the NC/PLC interface: A
signal is available for every handwheel for this purpose:
Bit 0 Handwheel 1
Bit 1 Handwheel 2
Bit 2 Handwheel 3
Bit 3 Handwheel 4
Bit 4 Handwheel 5
Bit 5 Handwheel 6

5.2 DB11: Mode group
5.2.1 DB11 DBX0.0 (AUTOMATIC mode)
DB11 DBX0.0 AUTOMATIC mode

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 There is an active request to switch over into the AUTOMATIC mode.
Signal state 0 There is no active request to switch over into the AUTOMATIC mode.
Additional information Irrelevant for: DB11 DBX0.4 (operating mode, changeover inhibit) == 1
Corresponds with DB11 DBX0.2 (JOG mode)
DB11 DBX0.1 (MDI mode)
DB11 DBX0.4 (mode change inhibit)
DB11 DBX6.0 AUTOMATIC mode active)
Additional references Basic Functions Function Manual; Chapter "K1: mode group, channel, program mode, re‐
set response"
5.2.2 DB11 DBX0.1 (MDI mode)
DB11 DBX0.1 MDI mode

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 There is an active request to switch over into the MDI mode.
Signal state 0 There is no active request to switch over into the MDI mode.
Corresponds with DB11 DBX0.0 (AUTOMATIC mode)
DB11 DBX0.2 (JOG mode)
DB11 DBX6.1 (active MDI mode)
set response"
5.2.3 DB11 DBX0.2 (JOG mode)
DB11 DBX0.2 JOG mode

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 There is an active request to switch over into the JOG mode.
Signal state 0 There is no active request to switch over into the JOG mode.

DB11 DBX0.2 JOG mode

DB11 DBX6.2 (JOG mode active)
set response"
5.2.4 DB11 DBX0.4 (mode change inhibit)
DB11 DBX0.4 Mode change inhibit

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The active mode of the mode group cannot be changed.
Note
The machine functions that can be selected within a mode group can be changed.
Signal state 0 The mode of the mode group can be changed.
DB11 DBX0.2 (JOG mode)
set response"
5.2.5 DB11 DBX0.5 (mode group stop)
DB11 DBX0.5 Mode group stop

Update Cyclic

DB11 DBX0.5 Mode group stop

Signal state 1 There is an active request for "Mode group stop".
Responses:
● An "NC Stop" is initiated for all the channels of the mode group.
● Channel state change as a result of the mode group stop:
– "Active" → "Interrupted"
– "Reset" → "Reset"
● Program state change as a result of the mode group stop
– "Running" → "Stopped"
● All traversing axes of the mode group are braked without contour violation to zero
speed along their acceleration curves.
Programs that have been stopped can be restarted with "NC Start".
The spindles of the mode group are not influenced.
Signal state 0 There is no active request for "Mode group stop".
Corresponds with DB21, ... .DBX7.2 (NC start)
DB21, ... .DBX7.3 (NC stop)
set response"
5.2.6 DB11 DBX0.6 (mode group stop, axes plus spindles)
DB11 DBX0.6 Mode group stop axes plus spindles

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 There is an active request for "Mode group stop axes plus spindles".
Responses:
● An "NC Stop" is initiated for all the channels of the mode group.
● Channel state change as a result of the mode group stop:
– "Active" → "Interrupted"
– "Reset" → "Reset"
● Program state change as a result of the mode group stop
– "Running" → "Stopped"
● All traversing axes and spindles of the mode group are braked without contour violation
to zero speed along their acceleration curves.
Programs that have been stopped can be restarted with "NC Start".
Signal state 0 There is no active request for "Mode group stop axes plus spindles".
Corresponds with DB21, ... .DBX7.2 (NC start)
DB21, ... .DBX7.3 (NC stop)
set response"

5.2.7 DB11 DBX0.7 (mode group reset)
DB11 DBX0.7 Mode group reset

Update Cyclic
Edge change 0 → 1 A request was initiated for a "Mode group reset".
Responses:
● In all channels of the mode group, a "channel reset" is initiated in the control system
corresponding to DB21, ... DBX 7.7 = 1.
● All the channels are then in the channel state "reset" (DB21, ... DBX35.7 == 1).
● All active NC programs are then in the "canceled" program state (DB21, ... DBX35.4 ==
1).
● All traversing axes and spindles are decelerated without contour violation to zero speed
according to their acceleration curves.
● The channel-specific reset positions become active.
● All alarms of the mode group are cleared - with the exception of power on alarms.
Edge change 1 → 0 Reset of the last request for a "Mode group reset".
Starting at this time, a new "Mode group reset" can be requested.
Additional information Special case
If an alarm resets the interface signal DB11 DBX6.3 (mode group ready), all channels of
the mode group are no longer in the "reset" channel state. In order that the mode of the
mode group can be switched over, initially, a "Mode group reset" must be initiated using
DB11 DBX0.7.
Note
Before a new action can be requested in a channel of the mode group from the PLC user
program after a mode group reset (e.g. NC start or axis interchange), the system must first
wait for either the mode group state "All channels of the mode group in the reset state"
(DB11 DBX6.7 == 1) - or the channel state "Reset" (DB21, ... DBX35.7 == 1) of the chan‐
nel involved.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX7.7 (channel reset)
DB11 DBX6.7 (all channels in the reset state)
set response"
5.2.8 DB11 DBX1.0 (TEACH IN machine function)
DB11 DBX1.0 TEACH IN machine function

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 There is an active request to activate the TEACH IN machine function.
Signal state 0 There is no active request to activate the TEACH IN machine function.
Additional information Note
Only active in the JOG mode

DB11 DBX1.0 TEACH IN machine function

Corresponds with DB11 DBX6.2 (JOG mode active)
DB11 DBX7.1 (TEACH IN machine function active)
set response"
5.2.9 DB11 DBX1.1 (REPOS machine function)
DB11 DBX1.1 REPOS machine function

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 There is an active request to activate the REPOS machine function.
Signal state 0 There is no active request to activate the REPOS machine function.
DB11 DBX7.2 (REPOS machine function active)
set response"
5.2.10 DB11 DBX1.2 (REF machine function)
DB11 DBX1.2 REF machine function

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 There is an active request to activate the REF machine function.
Signal state 0 There is no active request to activate the REF machine function.
DB11 DBX7.3 (REF machine function active)
set response" and "R1" referencing"
5.2.11 DB11 DBX1.6 (single block, type B)
DB11 DBX1.6 Single block, type B

Update Cyclic

DB11 DBX1.6 Single block, type B

Signal state 1 There is an active request to activate the "Single block, type B".
Signal state 0 There is no active request to activate the "Single block, type B".
Additional information Cross mode group response when activating "Single block, type B".
● All channels are stopped.
● All channels receive a start command
● Channel KS stops at the end of the block.
● The KA channels receive the STOPATEND instruction (comparable with DB21, ...
DBX7.2 (NC Stop at the block limit)).
● All channels are stopped at a block limit (at some point in time).
Note
● DB11 DBX1.6 == 1 AND DBX1.7 == 0 ⇒ single block type B
● DB11 DBX1.6 == 0 AND DBX1.7 == 1 ⇒ single block type A
● DB11 DBX1.6 == 1 AND DBX1.7 == 1 OR
DB11 DBX1.6 == 0 AND DBX1.7 == 0 ⇒ No mode group-specific single block selected
Corresponds with DB11 DBX1.7 (single block, type A)
set response"
5.2.12 DB11 DBX1.7 (single block, type A)
DB11 DBX1.7 Single block, type A

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 There is an active request to activate the "Single block, type A".
Signal state 0 There is no active request to activate the "Single block, type A".
Additional information Cross mode group response when activating "Single block, type A".
● All channels are stopped.
● All channels receive a start command
● Channel KS stops at the end of the block.
● The KA channels receive the STOPATEND instruction (comparable with DB21, ...
DBX7.2 (NC Stop at the block limit)).
● All channels are stopped at a block limit (at some point in time).
Note
● DB11 DBX1.6 == 1 AND DBX1.7 == 0 ⇒ single block type B
● DB11 DBX1.6 == 0 AND DBX1.7 == 1 ⇒ single block type A
● DB11 DBX1.6 == 1 AND DBX1.7 == 1 OR
DB11 DBX1.6 == 0 AND DBX1.7 == 0 ⇒ No mode group-specific single block selected
Corresponds with DB11 DBX1.6 (single block, type B)
set response"

5.2.13 DB11 DBX4.0 (AUTOMATIC mode selected)
DB11 DBX4.0 AUTOMATIC mode selected

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 There is an active HMI request to select the AUTOMATIC mode.
Signal state 0 There is no active HMI request to select the AUTOMATIC mode.
set response"
5.2.14 DB11 DBX4.1 (MDI mode selected)
DB11 DBX4.1 MDI mode selected

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 There is an active HMI request to select the MDI mode.
Signal state 0 There is no active HMI request to select the MDI mode.
Corresponds with DB11 DBX0.1 (MDI mode)
set response"
5.2.15 DB11 DBX4.2 (JOG mode selected)
DB11 DBX4.2 JOG mode selected

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 There is an active HMI request to select the JOG mode.
Signal state 0 There is no active HMI request to select the JOG mode.
set response"
5.2.16 DB11 DBX5.0 (TEACH IN machine function selected)
DB11 DBX5.0 TEACH IN machine function selected

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 There is an active HMI request to select the TEACH IN machine function.

DB11 DBX5.0 TEACH IN machine function selected

Signal state 0 There is no active HMI request to select the TEACH IN machine function.
Corresponds with DB11 DBX7.1 (active TEACH IN machine function)
set response"
5.2.17 DB11 DBX5.1 (REPOS machine function selected)
DB11 DBX5.1 REPOS machine function selected

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 There is an active HMI request to select the REPOS machine function.
Signal state 0 There is no active HMI request to select the REPOS machine function.
Corresponds with DB11 DBX7.2 (active REPOS machine function)
set response"
5.2.18 DB11 DBX5.2 (REF machine function selected)
DB11 DBX5.2 REF machine function selected

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 There is an active HMI request to select the REF machine function.
Signal state 0 There is no active HMI request to select the REF machine function.
Corresponds with DB11 DBX7.3 (active REF machine function)
set response"
5.2.19 DB11 DBX6.0 (AUTOMATIC mode active)
DB11 DBX6.0 AUTOMATIC mode active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The AUTOMATIC mode is active.
Signal state 0 The AUTOMATIC mode is not active.
set response"

5.2.20 DB11 DBX6.1 (active MDI mode)
DB11 DBX6.1 Active MDI mode

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The MDI mode is active.
Signal state 0 The MDI mode is not active.
Corresponds with DB11 DBX0.1 (MDI mode)
set response"
5.2.21 DB11 DBX6.2 (JOG mode active)
DB11 DBX6.2 Active JOG mode

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The JOG mode is active.
Signal state 0 The JOG mode is not active.
set response"
5.2.22 DB11 DBX6.3 (mode group ready)
DB11 DBX6.3 Mode group ready

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The mode group is ready.
Signal state 0 The mode group is ready.
Additional information Response when the signal changes from 0 → 1:
● Traversing axes and spindles are braked down to standstill with setpoint 0 or maximum
braking current.
● The interface signals from the PLC to the NC are brought into an inactive state (reset
position).
Note
If an alarm occurs that clears "Mode group ready", before switching over the mode, a
mode group reset (DB11 DBX 0.7) must first be initiated.
Corresponds with DB11 DBX0.7 (mode group reset)
set response"

5.2.23 DB11 DBX6.7 (all channels in the "Reset" state)
DB11 DBX6.7 All channels in the "Reset" state.

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 All mode group channels are in the "Reset" state.
Signal state 0 At least one channel of the mode group is not in the "Reset" state.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX7.7 (channel state, "Reset")
set response"
5.2.24 DB11 DBX7.0 (TEACH IN machine function active)
DB11 DBX7.0 TEACH IN machine function active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The TEACH IN machine function is active.
Signal state 0 The TEACH IN machine function is not active.
Corresponds with DB11 DBX1.0 (TEACH IN machine function)
DB11 DBX5.0 (TEACH IN machine function selected)
set response"
5.2.25 DB11 DBX7.1 (REPOS machine function active)
DB11 DBX7.1 REPOS machine function active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Machine function REPOS is active.
Signal state 0 Machine function REPOS is not active.
Corresponds with DB11 DBX1.1 (REPOS machine function)
DB11 DBX5.1 (REPOS machine function selected)
set response"

5.3 DB18: Safety Integrated, SPL
5.2.26 DB11 DBX7.2 (REF machine function active)
DB11 DBX7.2 REF machine function active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Machine function REF is active.
Signal state 0 Machine function REF is not active.
Corresponds with DB11 DBX1.2 (REF machine function)
DB11 DBX5.2 (REF machine function selected)
set response"
5.3.1 DB18 DBB36.0 (SPL_READY)
DB18 DBB36.0 SPL_READY

Signal flow PLC → PLC
Update Job-controlled
Signal state 1 The SPL_READY = TRUE signal indicates that the commissioning phase has been com‐
pleted, i.e. if a CDC error has occurred, the basic program signals a "STOP D/E" to all the
axes.
Signal state 0 SPL_READY = FALSE
Additional references Function Manual, SINUMERIK Safety Integrated; Chapter "7.5.11 SPL data on the PLC
side"
5.3.2 DB18 DBB36.1 (STOP_E)
DB18 DBB36.1 STOP_E

Signal flow PLC → PLC
Signal state 1 STOP E is active.
The signal must be used for the forced checking procedure for external STOPs.
Signal state 0 STOP E is active.
Additional references Function Manual SINUMERIK Safety Integrated; Chapter "6.3 Safe Stops A-F"

5.3.3 DB18 DBB38 - 41 (SPL inputs, SPL_DATA.INSEP[1...32])
DB18 DBB38.0 - 41.7 Data area of the SPL inputs

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 When cyclic F communication is established, the process values received from
F_SENDDP are output at the SPL inputs SPL_DATA.INSEP.
Signal state 0 The process values received from F_SENDDP are not output at the SPL inputs SPL_DA‐
TA.INSEP.
Additional information Byte Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit number
38 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
39 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
40 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
41 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24
Corresponds with $A_INSE
Additional references Function Manual, Safety Integrated; Chapter "7.4: Safety-related CPU-CPU communica‐
tion"
5.3.4 DB18 DBB42.0 - 45.7 (SPL inputs, SPL_DATA.INSEP[33...64])
DB18 DBB42.0 - 45.7 Data area of the SPL inputs

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 When cyclic F communication is established, the process values received from
F_SENDDP are output at the SPL inputs SPL_DATA.INSEP.
Signal state 0 The process values received from F_SENDDP are not output at the SPL inputs SPL_DA‐
TA.INSEP.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit number
42 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32
43 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40
44 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48
45 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56
Corresponds with $A_INSE
tion"

5.4 DB19: Operator panel
5.3.5 DB18 DBB46.0 - 49.7 (SPL outputs, SPL_DATA.OUTSEP[1...32]
DB18 DBB46.0 - 49.7 Data area of the SPL outputs

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The received process values are output at the SPL outputs SPL_DATA.OUTSEP.
Signal state 0 The received process values are not output at the SPL outputs SPL_DATA.OUTSEP.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit number
38 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
39 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
40 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
41 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24
Corresponds with $A_OUTSE
tion"
5.4.1 DB19 DBX0.0 (brighten screen)
DB19 DBX0.0 Brighten screen

Signal flow PLC → OP
Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The screen content is displayed. Screen darkening is ignored.
Signal state 0 Screen darkening is active.
Corresponds with DB19 DBX0.1 (darken screen)
5.4.2 DB19 DBX0.1 (darken screen)
DB19 DBX0.1 Darken screen

Update Cyclic

DB19 DBX0.1 Darken screen

Signal state 1 The screen is darkened.
The automatic screen brightening/darkening is therefore inactive. The screen does not au‐
tomatically become bright when a key on the keyboard is pressed.
Notice
If the interface signal is set, and the screen is darkened, then the keyboard of the operator
panel front still remains active. It is therefore recommended that the keyboard of the opera‐
tor panel front is also locked:
DB19 DBX0.2 = 1 (key lock)
Signal state 0 The screen is brightened.
In this state, the control automatically brightens/darkens the screen:
● The screen is darkened if no keystroke is made at the keyboard for a time that is
defined using the following machine data:
MD9006 $MM_DISPLAY_SWITCH_OFF_INTERVAL (time to darken the screen) The
default setting is 15 minutes.
● The screen is brightened the next time a key on the operator panel front is pressed.
Corresponds with DB19 DBX0.0 (brighten screen)
DB19 DBX0.2 (key lock)
MD9006 $MM_DISPLAY_SWITCH_OFF_INTERVAL (time to darken the screen)
5.4.3 DB19 DBX0.2 (key lock)
DB19 DBX0.2 Key lock

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The keyboard is locked for the user.
Signal state 0 The keyboard is enabled for the user.
Additional information If the screen is darkened with the interface signal: DB19 DBX0.1 (darken screen), the key‐
board should be locked simultaneously with the interface signal: DB19 DBX0.2 (key lock)
to avoid an unintended operation.
Notice
If the screen is darkened with (DB19 DBX0.1 = 1), the operator panel front keyboard still
remains functional. It is therefore recommended that the keyboard of the operator panel
front is also locked:
DB19 DBX0.2 = 1 (key lock)
Corresponds with DB19 DBX0.0 (brighten screen)
DB19 DBX0.1 (darken screen)

5.4.4 DB19 DBX0.3 (delete cancel alarms)
DB19 DBX0.3 Delete cancel alarms

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The delete error key on the operator panel is pressed ⇒
Request to acknowledge all cancel alarms of the NC and operator panel.
Signal state 0 The delete error key is not pressed on the operator panel.
Corresponds with DB19 DBX20.3 (cancel alarms deleted)
5.4.5 DB19 DBX0.4 (delete recall alarms)
DB19 DBX0.4 Delete recall alarms

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The delete error key is pressed on the operator panel.
Request to acknowledge all recall alarms of the NC and operator panel.
Signal state 0 The delete error key is not pressed on the operator panel.
Corresponds with DB19 DBX20.4 (recall alarms deleted)
5.4.6 DB19 DBX0.7 (actual values in the WCS)
DB19 DBX0.7 Actual values in the WCS

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 If the "machine" operating area is selected on the user interface, the axis-specific positions
and distance-to-go are displayed in the workpiece coordinate system (WCS).
Signal state 0 If the "machine" operating area is selected on the user interface, the axis-specific positions
and distance-to-go are displayed in the previous active coordinate system.
Additional information Within the "machine" operating area, the coordinate system can be displayed in which the
axis-specific positions and distances-to-go are switched via the "MCS actual values" and
"WCS actual values" softkeys:
Corresponds with DB19 DBX20.7 (switch MCS/WCS)

5.4.7 DB19 DBB6 (analog spindle 1, utilization as a percentage)
DB19 DBB6 Analog spindle 1, utilization in percent

Update Cyclic
Additional information Format: UINT (unsigned, 0 ... 255D or 0 ... FFH)
5.4.8 DB19 DBB7 (analog spindle 2, utilization as a percentage)
DB19 DBB7 Analog spindle 2, utilization in percent

Update Cyclic
5.4.9 DB19 DBB8 (channel number)
DB19 DBB8 Channel number

Update Cyclic
Valid channel numbers: 1 ... maximum number of NC channels
5.4.10 DB19 DBB10 (PLC hardkeys)
DB19 DBB10 PLC hardkeys

Update Cyclic
Signal state ≠ 0 1 ... 255: Selects the corresponding programming area
Signal state == 0 0: No selection
5.4.11 DB19 DBX13.5 (NC program: unload)
DB19 DBX13.5 NC program: Unload

Update Cyclic

DB19 DBX13.5 NC program: Unload

Signal state 1 Unload active
Signal state 0 Unload not active
5.4.12 DB19DBX13.6 (NC program: load)
DB19 DBX13.6 NC program: Load

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Load active
Signal state 0 Load not active
5.4.13 DB19 DBX13.7 (NC program: selection)
DB19 DBX13.7 NC program: Selection

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Selection active
Signal state 0 Selection not active
5.4.14 DB19 DBX14.0 - 6 (PLC index)
DB19 DBX14.0 - 6 PLC index

Update Cyclic
Additional information The V24 interface is controlled with bits 0 - 6. They specify the PLC index for the standard
control file, which specifies the axis, channel or TO number.
The file system is selected via:
● DB19 DBX14.7 == 1 ⇒ passive file system: PLC index for the user control file
● DB19 DBX14.7 == 0 ⇒ active file system: PLC index, which specifies the axis, channel
or TO number.
Format: UINT (unsigned, 0 ... 127D or 0 ... 7FH)
Corresponds with DB19 DBX14.7 (selects the file system)

5.4.15 DB19 DBX14.7 (selects the file system)
DB19 DBX14.7 Selects the file system

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Passive file system
Signal state 0 Active file system
Corresponds with DB19 DBX14.0 - 6 (PLC index)
5.4.16 DB19 DBB15 (PLC line offset)
DB19 DBB15 PLC line offset

Update Cyclic
Additional information The byte to control the V24 interface defines the line of the standard or user control file in
which the control file to be transferred is specified.
The control file is selected using:
● DB19 DBX14.7 == 1 ⇒ passive file system: PLC line offset in a user control file
● DB19 DBX14.7 == 0 ⇒ active file system: PLC line offset in a standard control file
Format: UINT (unsigned, 0 ... 255D or 0 ... FFH)
Corresponds with DB19 DBX14.7 (selects the file system)
5.4.17 DB19 DBB16 (program selection from the PLC: Index of the program list)
DB19 DBB16: Program selection from the PLC: Index of the program list
Update Cyclic
Additional information Preselected programs/workpieces in the PLC program lists can be selected for machining
by the NC via the PLC/HMI interface.
To specify the program list, its number (index) is output in binary code via control byte
DB19 DBB16:
Always 1
DB19 DBB16 = <number of the program list>
Number Number Program list
(binary-coded) (decimal)
1000 0001 129 User program list (/user/sinumerik/hmi/plc/
programlist/plc_proglist_user.ppl)
1000 0011 131 Manufacturer program list (/oem/
sinumerik/hmi/plc/programlist/plc_prog‐
list_manufacturer.ppl)

DB19 DBB16: Program selection from the PLC: Index of the program list
Corresponds to DB19.DBX13.7 (NC program: Selection)
DB19.DBB17 (program selection from the PLC: Program index in the program list)
DB19.DBB26 (program selection from the PLC: Status signals)
DB19.DBB27 (program selection from the PLC: Error detection)
MD9106 $MM_SERVE_EXTCALL_PROGRAMS (editing EXTCALL calls)
MD51041 $MN_ENABLE_PROGLIST_USER (activation of PLC program list USER area)
MD51043 $MN_ENABLE_PROGLIST_MANUFACT (activation of PLC program list MANU‐
FACTURER area)
Additional references Basic Functions Function Manual; Section "P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D
sl" > "PLC functions for HMI (DB19)" > "Program selection"
5.4.18 DB19 DBB17 (program selection from the PLC: Program index in the program
list)
DB19 DBB17 Program selection from the PLC: Program index in the program list
Update Cyclic
Additional information Preselected programs/workpieces in the PLC program lists can be selected for machining
by the NC via the PLC/HMI interface.
To specify the program within the program list selected via DB19 DBB16, the program num‐
ber is output in binary code via control byte DB19 DBB17.
Area Program number
user 1 - 100
oem 201 - 255
DB19.DBB16 (program selection from the PLC: Index of the program list)
FACTURER area)
5.4.19 DB19 DBX20.1 (screen is dark)
DB19 DBX20.1 Screen is dark

Signal flow OP → PLC
Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The screen is darkened.

DB19 DBX20.1 Screen is dark

Signal state 0 The screen is not darkened.
Corresponds with DB19 DBX0.1 (darken screen)
MD9006 $MM_DISPLAY_SWITCH_OFF_INTERVAL (time for the screen darkening)
5.4.20 DB19 DBX20.3 (cancel alarms deleted)
DB19 DBX20.3 Cancel alarm deleted

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Feedback: Cancel alarms were deleted.
Signal state 0 Note
The interface signal must be reset in the PLC user program.
Corresponds with DB19 DBX0.3 (delete cancel alarms)
5.4.21 DB19 DBX20.4 (recall alarms deleted)
DB19 DBX20.4 Recall alarms deleted

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Feedback: Recall alarms were deleted
Signal state 0 Note
The interface signal must be reset in the PLC user program.
Corresponds with DB19 DBX0.4 (delete recall alarms)
5.4.22 DB19 DBX20.6 (simulation active)
DB19 DBX20.6 Simulation active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 An NC program has been selected at the user interface and the "Simulation" function acti‐
vated for this program.
Signal state 0 The "Simulation" function is not active.
Additional references Commissioning Manual SINUMERIK 828D respectively SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK
Operate; Chapter "Simulation and simultaneous recording"
Operating manuals "Turning", "Milling" and "Universal"; Chapter "Simulating machining"

5.4.23 DB19 DBX20.7 (switch MCS/WCS)
DB19 DBX20.7 Switch over MCS/WCS

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Request to switch over the display of the axis-specific positions and residual distances to
go on the user interface of the workpiece coordinate system (WCS) into the machine coor‐
dinate system (MCS) or from MCS to WCS.
The signal is active for one PLC cycle.
Signal state 0 No effect
Corresponds with DB19, DBX0.7 (actual value in WCS)
5.4.24 DB19 DBB22 (actual channel number)
DB19 DBB22 Actual channel number

Update Cyclic
5.4.25 DB19 DBW24 (current screen number)
DB19 DBW24 Actual screen number

Update Cyclic
5.4.26 DB19 DBX26.1 (program selection from the PLC: Job completed)
DB19 DBX26.1 Program selection from the PLC: Job completed

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Program selection from the PLC: Job completed
Signal state 0 Program selection from the PLC: Job not completed

DB19 DBX26.1 Program selection from the PLC: Job completed

FACTURER area)
5.4.27 DB19 DBX26.2 (program selection from the PLC: Error)
DB19 DBX26.2 Program selection from the PLC: Error

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Program selection from the PLC: Job completed with errors
Signal state 0 Program selection from the PLC: Job completed correctly.
DB19.DBB16 (program selection from the PLC: index of the program list)
DB19.DBB17 (program selection from the PLC: program index in the program list)
FACTURER area)
5.4.28 DB19 DBX26.3 (program selection from the PLC: Active)
DB19 DBX26.3 Program selection from the PLC: Active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Program selection from the PLC: Job active
Signal state 0 Program selection from the PLC: No job active

DB19 DBX26.3 Program selection from the PLC: Active

Corresponds with DB19.DBX13.7 (NC program: Selection)
FACTURER area)
5.4.29 DB19 DBX26.5 (program selection from the PLC: Unload)
DB19 DBX26.5 Program selection from the PLC: Unload

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Program selection from the PLC: Unload active
Signal state 0 Program selection from the PLC: Unload inactive
FACTURER area)
5.4.30 DB19 DBX26.6 (program selection from the PLC: Load)
DB19 DBX26.6 Program selection from the PLC: Load

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Program selection from the PLC: Load active
Signal state 0 Program selection from the PLC: Load inactive

DB19 DBX26.6 Program selection from the PLC: Load

FACTURER area)
5.4.31 DB19 DBX26.7 (program selection from the PLC: Selection)
DB19 DBX26.7 Program selection from the PLC: Selection

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Program selection from the PLC: Selection active
Signal state 0 Program selection from the PLC: Selection inactive
FACTURER area)
5.4.32 DB19 DBB27 (program selection from the PLC: Error detection)
DB19 DBB27 Program selection from the PLC: Error identification

Update Cyclic

DB19 DBB27 Program selection from the PLC: Error identification

Additional information Output byte for the error values of the data transfer.
Value Meaning
0 No error
1 Invalid program list number (DB19.DBB16)
3 User-spec. program list plc_proglist_main.ppl not found (only for DB19.DBB16
≠ 129, 131)
4 Invalid program number (DB19.DBB17)
5 The job list in the selected workpiece could not be opened
6 Error in job list (Job list Interpreter returns error)
7 Job list Interpreter returns empty job list
DB19.DBB16 (program selection from the PLC: index of the program list)
DB19.DBB17 (program selection from the PLC: program index in the program list)
FACTURER area)
5.4.33 DB19 DBX32.0 - 5 (function number)
DB19 DBX32.0 - 5 Function selection from the PLC: Function number

Update Cyclic
Additional information The function number is entered in DB19 DBX32.0 - 5, which after setting the requesting
strobe in DB19 DBX32.6, is executed:
Function num‐ Function
ber
0 No function
1 Channel selection
Corresponds with DB19 DBX32.6 (requesting strobe)
DB19 DBX32.7 (status)
DB19 DBB33 - 35 (parameter 1 - 3)
DB19 DBB36 (error detection)
sl" > "PLC functions for HMI (DB19)" > "Channel selection"

5.4.34 DB19 DBX32.6 (function request)
DB19 DBX32.6 Function selection from the PLC: Request strobe

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Execution of the set function by the NC is requested.
Signal state 0 The function was executed by the NC or no function execution is requested.
Corresponds to DB19 DBX32.0 - 5 (function number)
DB19 DBB36 - 35 (error detection)
5.4.35 DB19 DBX32.7 (status)
DB19 DBX32.7 Function selection from the PLC: Status

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The requested function is currently being processed by the NC.
Signal state 0 The processing of the requested function has been completed.
DB19 DBX32.6 (requesting strobe)
DB19 DBB36 - 35 (error detection)
5.4.36 DB19 DBB33 - 35 (parameter 1 - 3)
DB19 DBB33 - 35 Function selection from the PLC: Parameter 1 - 3

Update Cyclic
Additional information Parameters can be specified for the function requested in DB19 DBB32:
● Parameter 1: DB19 DBB33
The number and value range of the parameters depends on the associated function.

5.5 DB21, ...: Channel
DB19 DBB33 - 35 Function selection from the PLC: Parameter 1 - 3

DB19 DBX32.6 (requesting strobe)
DB19 DBB36 (error detection)
5.4.37 DB19 DBB36 (error identification)
DB19 DBB36 Error identification

Update Cyclic
Additional information Error identification after completion of the function execution by the NC:
● 0: No error
● 1: Invalid function number (DBX32.0 - .5)
● 2: Invalid parameter (DBB33 - DBB35)
● 3: Error when writing the HMI-internal variable
● 10: Channel not present (DBB33)
DB19 DBX32.6 (function request)
5.5.1 DB21, ... DBX0.1 (RESU: backward/forward)
DB21, ... DBX0.1 RESU: Backward/forward

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Requirement: Reverse travel
Signal state 0 Requirement: Forward travel

DB21, ... DBX0.1 RESU: Backward/forward

Additional information Precise retracing of contours is possible on all programmed contours comprising straight
and circular elements. During retracing, other contour elements such as splines or automat‐
ically inserted non-linear contour elements (circle, parable, etc. e.g. through tool radius
compensation) are mapped as straight lines between the start and end points of the corre‐
sponding contour element, thereby preventing precise retracing of contours.
The main RESU program (CC_RESU.MPF) is generated from the logged traversing blocks
of the RESU internal block buffer, so corresponding to the interface signal, the next time
that the NC starts, the contour can be traversed either backward or forward.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX0.1 (RESU: backward/forward)
DB21, ... DBX0.2 (RESU: start retrace support)
DB21, ... DBX32.1 (RESU: retrace mode active)
DB21, ... DBX32.2 (RESU: retrace support active)
Additional references Function Manual, Special Functions; Chapter "TE7: Continue machining at the contour (re‐
trace support) - 840D sl only
5.5.2 DB21, ... DBX0.2 (RESU: start retrace support)
DB21, ... DBX0.2 RESU: Start retrace support

Update Cyclic
Edge change 0 → 1 "Start retrace support" is requested.
Additional information For retrace support, RESU automatically reselects the original machining program and
launches a block search with calculation as far as the program continuation point.
Additional references Function Manual, Special Functions; Chapter "TE7: Continue machining at the contour (re‐
trace support) - 840D sl only
5.5.3 DB21, ... DBX0.3 (activate handwheel offset (DRF))
DB21, ... DBX0.3 Activate handwheel offset (DRF)

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Activation of handwheel offset (DRF) is requested.
Signal state 0 Activation of handwheel offset (DRF) is not requested.

DB21, ... DBX0.3 Activate handwheel offset (DRF)

Additional information With the handwheel offset (DRF) an axis-specific offset can be performed in the AUTO‐
MATIC and MDI modes using a handwheel.
Note
Handwheel offset (DRF) is selected from the SINUMERIK Operate user interface in the op‐
erating area "Automatic" > "Program control" by setting the HMI/PLC interface signal
DB21, ... DBX24.3.
by the basic PLC program into the NC/PLC interface signal DB21, ... DBX0.3:
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX24.3 (handwheel offset (DRF) selected)
5.5.4 DB21, ... DBX0.4 (activate single block)
DB21, ... DBX0.4 Activate single block

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 A request has been made to activate the "single block" function:
Signal state 0 A request has not been made to activate the "single block" function.
Additional information In AUTOMATIC and MDI modes, the operator must enable processing of each individual
part program block of the part program selected in the channel by reactivating NC Start.
set response";
● Chapter "Program test" > "Program execution in the single block mode"
● Chapter, "Single block"
5.5.5 DB21, ... DBX0.5 (activate M01)
DB21, ... DBX0.5 Activate M01

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Activation of program control "Conditional stop" M01 is requested.
Signal state 0 Activation of program control "Conditional stop" M01 is not requested.

DB21, ... DBX0.5 Activate M01

Additional information Program control "Conditional stop" M01 is selected from the SINUMERIK Operate user in‐
terface: Operating area "Automatic" > "Program control" by setting the HMI/PLC interface
signal DB21, ... DBX24.5.
The interface signal is then transferred according to the value of the FB1 parameter
MMCToIf by the basic PLC program into the NC/PLC interface signal DB21, ... DBX0.5:
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX24.5 (M01 selected)
DB21, ... DBX32.5 (M0/M01 active)
set response"
5.5.6 DB21, ... DBX0.6 (activate dry run feedrate)
DB21, ... DBX0.6 Activate dry run feedrate (DRY)

Update Cyclic
Edge change 0 → 1 Activation of dry run feedrate (DRY) is requested.
Edge change 1 → 0 Activation of dry run feedrate (DRY) is not requested.
Additional information If the channel is in the "Reset" state, for active G function G01, G02, G03 the currently ef‐
fective feedrate is used with the next NC start:
● Edge change 0 → 1: Dry run feedrate
● Edge change 1 → 0: Programmed feedrate
Note
If the programmed feed rate within a G33 block is requested, then the programmed
feedrate is not activated until the end of the block is reached. No NC stop is executed
within a G33 block.
Note
Dry run feedrate (DRY) is selected from the SINUMERIK Operate user interface in the op‐
DB21, ... DBX24.6.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX24.6 (dry run feedrate (DRY) selected)
SD42100 $SC_DRY_RUN_FEED (dry run feedrate)
Additional references Function Manual, Basic Functions;
● Chapter "K1: mode group, channel, program mode, reset response" > "Program test" >
"Program processing with dry run feedrate"
● Chapter "V1: Feedrates" > "Feedrate control" > "Dry run feedrate"

5.5.7 DB21, ... DBX1.0 (activate referencing)
DB21, ... DBX1.0 Activate referencing

Update Cyclic
Edge change 0 → 1 The "referencing" function is requested.
Edge change 1 → 0 No effect
Additional information Acknowledgment signal: DB21, ... DBX33.0 (referencing active)
Note
Using the axis-specific machine data, the sequence in which the machine axes are refer‐
enced for channel-specific referencing can be defined:
MD34110 $MA_REFP_CYCLE_NR
For channel-specific referencing, when all axes entered in machine data
MD34110 $MA_REFP_CYCLE_NR have reached their reference point, then interface sig‐
nal DB21, ... DBX36.3 (all axes stationary) is set.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX33.0 (referencing active)
DB21, ... DBX36.3 (all axes stationary)
MD34110 $MA_REFP_CYCLE_NR (Axis sequence for channel-specific referencing)
Additional references Basic Functions Function Manual; Chapter "R1: referencing"
5.5.8 DB21, ... DBX1.3 (time monitoring active)
DB21, ... DBX1.3 Time monitoring active

Signal state 1 Acquire tool life.
Signal state 0 Do not acquire tool life.
Additional information The tool life is always acquired as standard, if the geometry axes are not traversed with
rapid traverse (G0).
With the interface signal, acquiring the tool life is deactivated and then activated again.
Precondition
Enable the functionality with MD20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 17 = 1

DB21, ... DBX1.3 Time monitoring active

Corresponds with $A_MONIFACT (factor for reading tool life monitoring)
$TC_MOP1 (prewarning limit for tool life)
MD18080 $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK (memory reserved for the tool man‐
agement)
MD20124 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER (tool holder number)
MD20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK bit 17 (activation of the tool management func‐
tions)
MD20320 $MC_TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK (time monitoring for tool in the tool holder)
Additional references Function Manual, Tool Management:
● Chapter "Function description" > "Tool monitoring (workpiece count, tool life, wear)" >
"Tool life monitoring"
● Chapter "Function description" > "Tool monitoring without active tool management" >
"Tool life monitoring"
5.5.9 DB21, ... DBX1.4 (clearance control (CLC): stop)
DB21, ... DBX1.4 Clearance control (CLC): Stop

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Activating clearance control (CLC) is requested (analogous to the program instruction
CLC_GAIN=0.0).
Signal state 0 Activating clearance control (CLC) is not requested.
Corresponds with CLC_GAIN=0.0 ; deactivate control loop gain
DB21, ... DBX37.3 (clearance control (CLC) active)
Additional references Function Manual, Special Functions; Chapter "TE1: Clearance control"
5.5.10 DB21, ... DBX1.5 (clearance control (CLC): Override)
DB21, ... DBX1.5 Clearance control (CLC): Override

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The channel-specific feedrate override (DB21, … DBB4) should be active for clearance
control (CLC).
Signal state 0 The channel-specific feedrate override (DB21, … DBB4) should not be active for clearance
control (CLC).

DB21, ... DBX1.5 Clearance control (CLC): Override

Additional information For signal state 1, the channel-specific feedrate override acts on the maximum velocity of
the clearance control motion (MD62516):
● Override settings < 100%
The velocity limit set in MD62516 for clearance control is appropriately reduced.
● Override settings > 100%
The limit value from MD62516 is active.
Signal state 0 is the maximum velocity of the clearance control motion, independent of the
override setting.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBB4 (feed rate override)
DB21, ... DBX6.7 (feed override active)
DB21, ... DBX37.3 (clearance control (CLC) active)
MD62516 $MC_CLC_SENSOR_VELO_LIMIT (velocity of clearance control motion)
5.5.11 DB21, ... DBX1.6 (PLC action completed)
DB21, ... DBX1.6 PLC action completed

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 PLC action completed.
Signal state 0 PLC action is not yet completed.
At the end of the block search, concluding action blocks are executed:
DB21, ... DBX32.3 (action block active) == 1 AND
DB21, ... DBX32.6 (last action block active) == 1
Alarm "10208 Channel <Channel Number> Issue NC Start to continue program" notifies
that a new NC Start is required to continue the NC program from the target block.
If other actions are to be executed by the PLC user program prior to the NC Start (e.g. tool
change), by parameterizing the search mode, the output of the alarm can be delayed until
the signal is set again:
MD11450 $MN_SEARCH_RUN_MODE = 1
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX7.1 (NC Start)
DB21, ... DBX32.3 (action block active)
DB21, ... DBX32.6 (last action block active)
DB21, ... DBX33.4 (block search active)
set response";
● Chapter, "Block search, types 1, 2, and 4"
● Chapter, "Block search type 5 (SERUPRO)"

5.5.12 DB21, ... DBX1.7 (activate program test (PRT))
DB21, ... DBX1.7 Activate program test (PRT)

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Activation of program test (PRT) is requested.
Signal state 0 Activation of program test (PRT) is not requested.
Additional information If program test (PRT) is active, the machine axes do not move during the execution of a
block or NC program. However, the axis movements are displayed on the user interface
with changing setpoint position values.
Note
While program test (PRT) is active, all traversing motions of the axes, but not the spindles,
take place under "Axis disable."
Note
PRT (Program test) is selected from the SINUMERIK Operate user interface in the operat‐
ing area "Automatic" > "Program control" by setting the HMI/PLC interface signal DB21, ...
DBX25.7.
Notice
Because of the axis disable, the assignment of a tool magazine is not changed while the
program is being tested. The user / machine manufacturer must utilize a suitable PLC user
program to ensure that the NC-internal tool management and the actual assignment of the
tool magazine remain consistent.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX25.7 (program test (PRT) requested)
DB21, ... DBX33.7 (program test (PRT) active)
set response"; Chapter "Program test"
5.5.13 DB21, ... DBX2.0 ... 7 (activate "skip block" (SKP))
DB21, ... DBX2.0 ... 7 Activate "skip block" (SKP)

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Activation of "Skip block" (SKP) of the skip level is requested.
Signal state 0 Activation of "Skip block" (SKP) of the skip level is not requested.

DB21, ... DBX2.0 ... 7 Activate "skip block" (SKP)

Additional information Bit 0 ... bit 7 are assigned to the skip levels 0 ... 7.
Note
We recommend that the interface signal is already set before the NC program starts.
Note
For multiple consecutive skip blocks, the blocks are only skipped if the interface signal was
already present before the first skip block of the block sequence was decoded.
Note
"Skip block" (SKP) is selected from the SINUMERIK Operate user interface in the operat‐
DBX26.0 ...7.
by the basic PLC program into the NC/PLC interface signal DB21, ... DBX2.0 ... 7:
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX26.0 - 7 ("Skip block" (SKP) selected)
set response"
5.5.14 DB21, ... DBX3.0 (stroke enable)
DB21, ... DBX3.0 Stroke enable

Signal state 1 Execution of punch strokes is enabled.
Signal state 0 Execution of punch strokes is locked.
Additional information This signal releases the punching strokes via the PLC. It is not permissible that the NC ini‐
tiates a punch stroke if the signal is not set. The NC waits until the enable signal is availa‐
ble before continuing the part program.
Additional references Function Manual, Extended Functions; Chapter "N4: Punching and nibbling"
5.5.15 DB21, ... DBX3.1 (punch interface 1: Manual stroke initiation)
DB21, ... DBX3.1 Punch interface 1: Manual stroke initiation

Signal state 1 Execute manual punch stroke at the 1st punch interface.
Signal state 0 There is no request to initiate a manual punch stroke at the 1st punch interface.
Additional information This signal allows a single stroke in the manual mode to be initiated at the 1st punch inter‐
face. In principle, this is possible in every operating mode, assuming that the axes do not
move. The signal is ignored if the axes are moved during the manual stroke initiation. Dur‐
ing the stroke, the axes are inhibited, i.e. they can only be moved again after the "Stroke
initiation active" signal has been withdrawn.


Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX3.0 (stroke enable)
DB21, ... DBX3.5 (punch interface 2: Manual stroke initiation)
DB21, ... DBX38.0 (stroke initiation active)
DB21, ... DBX38.1 (manual stroke initiation: Acknowledgment)
5.5.16 DB21, ... DBX3.2 (stroke suppression)
DB21, ... DBX3.2 Stroke suppression

Signal state 1 Activate stroke suppression.
Signal state 0 There is no request to activate stroke suppression.
Additional information The interface signal suppresses the fast "Initiate stroke" signal. This allows the part pro‐
gram to be processed without initiating a punching operation (dry run). With active path
segmentation, the axes traverse in the "Stop and go" mode.
5.5.17 DB21, ... DBX3.3 (delayed stroke)
DB21, ... DBX3.3 Delayed stroke

Signal state 1 Activate "Delayed stroke" option.
Signal state 0 There is no request to activate option "Delayed stroke".
Additional information A "delayed stroke" can be activated using this signal. This functionally corresponds to pro‐
gramming PDELAYON.
5.5.18 DB21, ... DBX3.4 (stroke inoperative)
DB21, ... DBX3.4 Stroke inoperative

Signal state 1 Stroke inoperative
Signal state 0 Stroke operative.

DB21, ... DBX3.4 Stroke inoperative

Additional information The NC responds to this interface signal by immediately stopping motion. An alarm is out‐
put if motion or another action is to be interrupted due to this signal.
In physical terms, the interface signal is identical to the fast signal "Stroke active" for the
NC, i.e. the system is wired in such a way that the two signals are taken to the same NC
input via an AND gate.
5.5.19 DB21, ... DBX3.5 (punch interface 2: Manual stroke initiation)

Signal state 1 Perform manual punch stroke at the 2nd punch interface.
Signal state 0 There is no request to initiate a manual punch stroke at the 2nd punch interface.
Additional information This signal enables a single stroke to be initiated at the 2nd punch interface in manual
mode. In principle, this is possible in every operating mode, assuming that the axes do not
move. The signal is ignored if the axes are moved during the manual stroke initiation. Dur‐
ing the stroke, the axes are inhibited, i.e. they can only be moved again after the "Stroke
initiation active" signal has been withdrawn.
DB21, ... DBX3.1 (punch interface 1: Manual stroke initiation)
DB21, ... DBX38.1 (manual stroke initiation: Acknowledgment)
5.5.20 DB21, ... DBB4 (path feedrate override)
DB21, ... DBB4 Path feedrate override

Update Cyclic


Additional information Binary/Gray coding
The override factors can be specified in the binary or Gray-coded format. The control must
be informed of the used format via the following machine data:
MD12020 $MN_OVR_FEED_IS_GRAY_CODE = <Coding>
Binary coding
With binary coding, the value in the interface corresponds to the override factor.
Binary code Decimal Override factor
0000 0000 0 0.00
0000 0001 1 0.01
0000 0010 2 0.02
0000 0011 3 0.03
000 0100 4 0.04
... ... ...
0110 0100 100 1.00
... ... ...
1100 1000 200 2.00
Gray coding
The Gray-coded values of the interface are assigned the override factors via the following
machine data:
MD12030 $MN_OVR_FACTOR_FEEDRATE[ <Switch position> - 1 ] = <Override factor>
Switch position Gray code Override factor 1)
1 00001 0.00
2 00011 0.01
3 00010 0.02
4 00110 0.04
5 00111 0.06
6 00101 0.08
7 00100 0.10
8 01100 0.20
9 01101 0.30
10 01111 0.40
11 01110 0.50
12 01010 0.60
13 01011 0.70
14 01001 0.75
15 01000 0.80
16 11000 0.85
17 11001 0.90
18 11011 0.95
19 11010 1.00
20 11110 1.05
21 11111 1.10
22 11101 1.15


23 11100 1.20
24 10100 1.20
25 10101 1.20
26 10111 1.20
27 10110 1.20
28 10010 1.20
29 10011 1.20
30 10001 1.20
31 10000 1.20
Limitations
● The active override factor is limited internally in the control to 2.00 or 200%.
● The maximum possible override factor can be limited to a value less than 200% with
the following machine data:
MD12100 $MN_OVR_FACTOR_LIMIT_BIN
Corresponds to DB21, ... DBX6.7 (path feedrate override active)
Additional references Basic Functions Function Manual; Section "V1: Feedrates" > "Feedrate control" > "Fee‐
drate override via the machine control panel"
1) Default values
5.5.21 DB21, ... DBB5 (path rapid traverse override)
DB21, ... DBB5 Path rapid traverse override

Update Cyclic


Additional information Binary coding
Binary-co‐ Decimal Override factor
ded
0000 0000 0 0.00
0000 0001 1 0.01
0000 0010 2 0.02
0000 0011 3 0.03
000 0100 4 0.04
... ... ...
0110 0100 100 1.00
... ... ...
1100 1000 200 2.00
Gray coding
machine data:
MD12050 $MN_OVR_FACTOR_RAPID_TRA[ <Switch position> - 1 ] = <Override factor>
Switch posi‐ Gray code Override factor 1)
tion
1 00001 0.00
2 00011 0.01
3 00010 0.02
4 00110 0.04
5 00111 0.06
6 00101 0.08
7 00100 0.10
8 01100 0.20
9 01101 0.30
10 01111 0.40
11 01110 0.50
12 01010 0.60
13 01011 0.70
14 01001 0.75
15 01000 0.80
16 11000 0.85
17 11001 0.90
18 11011 0.95
19 11010 1.00
20 11110 1.00
21 11111 1.00
22 11101 1.00
23 11100 1.00
24 10100 1.00


25 10101 1.00
26 10111 1.00
27 10110 1.00
28 10010 1.00
29 10011 1.00
30 10001 1.00
31 10000 1.00
Limitations
Note
The path rapid traverse override is not effective with the following functions when cutting
threads: G33, G331, G332, G63
Corresponds to DB21, ... DBX6.6 (path rapid traverse override active)
drate override from the machine control panel"
1) Default values
5.5.22 DB21, ... DBX6.0 (feedrate disable)
DB21, ... DBX6.0 Feedrate disable

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Feedrate disable is active in the channel.
Signal state 0 Feedrate disable is not active in the channel.

DB21, ... DBX6.0 Feedrate disable

Additional information ● The interface signal is active for all of the geometry, synchronized and positioning axes
traversing in the channel.
● If the interface signal is set while traversing an axis, then the axis is braked down to
standstill along its braking characteristic. For geometry axes, the axes are braked so
that they follow the contour.
● After the interface signal has been reset, traversing motion that was stopped is
continued.
● The position control is retained and the following error is eliminated.
● If the interface signal is set, and a request is issued to traverse an axis, then the axis is
not traversed. However, the traverse request is kept. When the interface signal is reset,
the traverse request is immediately executed, i.e. the axis is traversed.
● The interface signal is active in all modes.
Thread cutting
During various thread cutting operations, the interface signal is not effective:
Thread cutting Effectiveness
G33, G34, G35 Not effective
G331, G332 Effective
G63 Effective
Additional references Function Manual, Basic Functions; Chapter "V1: Feedrates" > "Feedrate control" > "Fee‐
drate disable and feedrate/spindle stop"
5.5.23 DB21, ... DBX6.1 (read-in disable)
DB21, ... DBX6.1 Read-in disable

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 A request has been made to activate the "read-in disable" function.
Signal state 0 A request has not been made to activate the "read-in disable" function.
Additional information If the read-in disable is set, then the data transfer for the next block is enabled in the inter‐
polator.
Note
Only active in the AUTOMATIC and MDI modes.
Application
If the auxiliary functions must be completed (e.g. for the tool change) before the next NC
block can be processed, then the automatic block change must be prevented through the
read-in disable.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX35.0 (program state running)
set response"

5.5.24 DB21, ... DBX6.2 (delete distance-to-go, channel-specific)
DB21, ... DBX6.2 Delete distance-to-go (channel-specific)

Signal flow PLC→ NC
Update Cyclic
Edge change 0 → 1 Delete distance-to-go (channel-specific) is requested.
Geometry axes
For a rising edge of the signal, the geometry axes currently traversing in the block are
brought to a standstill along a braking ramp and then the distance-to-go is deleted. Any
remaining following error is still corrected. The next traversing block is then loaded.
Path axes
"Delete distance-to-go" for path axes acts only in the AUTOMATIC mode.
Note
"Delete distance-to-go" causes the next traversing block to be prepared with the new posi‐
tions. After a "Delete distance-to-go", the geometry axes thus follow a different contour to
the one originally programmed in the NC program.
Traversal to absolute positions (G90) in the block after "Delete distance-to-go" causes at
least exact approach to the block end position. For incremental traversing (G91), the posi‐
tion specified in the NC program is not approached in the following block.
Additional information Signal irrelevant for
● Positioning axes
● Dwell time
Application example
Termination of the traversing motion on account of an external signal (e.g. probe)
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX2.2 (delete distance-to-go (axis-specific))
5.5.25 DB21, ... DBX6.4 (program level abort)
DB21, ... DBX6.4 Program level abort

Update Cyclic
Signal state 0 → 1 Request to abort program processing of the actual program level (subprogram level, ASUB
level, data save routine).
Signal state 1 → 0 Reset of the last request.
Additional information After a program level abort, the calling program of the next higher program level is pro‐
cessed further from the call location.
The main program level cannot be aborted with the program level abort, but only with a
channel reset.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX7.7 (reset)
set response"

5.5.26 DB21, ... DBX6.6 (path rapid traverse override active)
DB21, ... DBX6.6 Path rapid traverse override active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The path rapid traverse override (DB21, ... DBB5) is active.
Signal state 0 The path rapid traverse override is not active.
Additional information If the path rapid traverse override is not active, then irrespective of the current switch posi‐
tion, a value of 1.0 ≙ 100% is used as factor in the control. The first switch position is an
exception. Depending on the selected coding, the following factor is active for the first
switch position:
● Binary coding: 0
● Gray coding: MD12050 $MN_OVR_FACTOR_RAPID_TRA[ 0 ]
Corresponds to DB21, ... DBB5 (path rapid traverse override)
MD12020 $MN_OVR_FEED_IS_GRAY_CODE (path feed override switch Gray-coded)
MD12030 $MN_OVR_FACTOR_FEEDRATE (evaluation of the path feedrate override
switch)
5.5.27 DB21, ... DBX6.7 (path feedrate override active)
DB21, ... DBX6.7 Path feedrate override active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The path feedrate override (DB21, ... DBB4) is active.
Signal state 0 The path feedrate override is not active.
Additional information If the path feedrate override is not active, then irrespective of the current switch position, a
value of 1.0 ≙ 100% is used as override factor in the control. The first switch position is an
exception. Depending on the selected coding, for the first switch position the following ap‐
plies:
● Binary coding: Override factor = 0
● Gray coding: Override factor = MD12030 $MN_OVR_FACTOR_FEEDRATE[ 0 ]
Corresponds to DB21, ... DBB4 (path feedrate override)
MD12020 $MN_OVR_FEED_IS_GRAY_CODE (path feed override switch Gray-coded)
switch)

5.5.28 DB21, ... DBX7.0 (NC start disable)
DB21, ... DBX7.0 NC start disable

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 A request has been made to activate the "NC start disable" function.
Signal state 0 A request has not been made to activate the "NC start disable" function.
Additional information If the NC start disable is set, then the start (DB21, ... DBX7.1) of the NC program selected
in the channel is ignored.
Note
The NC start inhibit is not active if the part program is started by the part program com‐
mand START in another channel of the mode group.
Application
e.g. to suppress new program execution because there is no lubricant.
set response"
5.5.29 DB21, ... DBX7.1 (NC Start)
DB21, ... DBX7.1 NC start

Update Cyclic
Signal state 0 → 1 Request to start the program selected in the channel.
Additional information AUTOMATIC mode: The selected NC program is started or continued, or the auxiliary func‐
tions that were saved during the program interruption are output.
If data is transferred from the PLC to the NC during program state "Program interrupted,"
then this data is immediately cleared at NC Start.
MDI mode:
The blocks in the MDI block memory are executed.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX7.0 (NC Start disable)
DB21, ... DBX7.3 (NC Stop)
DB21, ... DBX7.7 (reset)
● Chapter "K1: mode group, channel, program mode, reset response"
● Chapter, "Program mode " > "Channel state"
● Chapter, "Program mode " > "Program state"

5.5.30 DB21, ... DBX7.2 (NC Stop at the block limit)
DB21, ... DBX7.2 NC Stop at block limit

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 NC stop at the end of the actual block is requested.
Signal state 0 NC stop at the end of the actual block is not requested.
Additional information The actual block is executed to the end of the block. Program execution is then stopped:
● Channel state: "Interrupted"
● Program state: "Stopped"
DB21, ... DBX7.4 (NC Stop axes plus spindles)
DB21, ... DBX35.2 (program state stopped)
DB21, ... DBX35.6 (interrupted channel state)
5.5.31 DB21, ... DBX7.3 (NC Stop)
DB21, ... DBX7.3 NC stop

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 NC Stop is requested.
Signal state 0 NC Stop is not requested.
Additional information AUTOMATIC or MDI mode
Execution of the active part program in the channel is stopped.
The traversing axes (not spindles) are braked down to standstill with the parameterized ac‐
celeration rates.
● Channel state: Interrupted
● Program state: Stopped
JOG mode
In the JOG mode, incompletely traversed incremental paths (INC...) are executed at the
next NC Start (DB21, ... DBX7.1).
Note
If data is transferred to the NC after "NC Stop" (e.g. tool offset), the data is taken into ac‐
count with the next "NC start".

DB21, ... DBX7.3 NC stop

5.5.32 DB21, ... DBX7.4 (NC Stop axes plus spindles)
DB21, ... DBX7.4 NC Stop axes plus spindles

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 NC Stop is requested.
Signal state 0 NC Stop is not requested.
Additional information AUTOMATIC or MDI mode
Execution of the active part program in the channel is stopped.
The traversing axes and spindles are braked down to standstill with the parameterized ac‐
celeration rates.
● Channel state: Interrupted
● Program state: Stopped
JOG mode
In the JOG mode, incompletely traversed incremental paths (INC...) are executed at the
next NC Start (DB21, ... DBX7.1).
Note
If data is transferred to the NC after "NC Stop" (e.g. tool offset), the data is taken into ac‐
count with the next "NC start".

5.5.33 DB21, ... DBX7.7 (reset)
DB21, ... DBX7.7 Reset

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Channel reset is requested.
Signal state 0 Channel reset is not requested.
Additional information Responses:
● All traversing axes and spindles are decelerated without contour violation to zero speed
according to their acceleration curves.
● All channel-specific reset positions become active.
● All alarms of the channel, other than Power On alarms, are deleted.
● Channel state: "Reset" (DB21, ... DBX35.7 == 1)
● Program state of an active NC program: "Aborted" (DB21, ... DBX35.4 == 1)
Note
After a channel reset from the PLC user program, before a new action can be requested in
the channel (e.g. NC start or axis interchange), the system must wait for the channel state
"reset" to be indicated at the NC/PLC interface.
DB21, ... DBX35.7 == 1
Corresponds with DB11, ... DBX0.7 (mode group reset)
DB21, ... DBX7.1 (NC Start)
DB21, ... DBX35.4 (program state "aborted")
DB21, ... DBX35.7 (channel state "reset")
set response"
5.5.34 DB21, ... DBX8.0 - 9.1 (activate machine-related protection zone 1 - 10)
DB21, ... DBX8.0 - 9.1 Activate machine-related protection zone 1 - 10

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Request to activate the machine-related protection zone
The protection zone is immediately active.
Note
Activating the protection zone is only effective if it was already preactivated via an NC pro‐
gram.
Signal state 0 Request to deactivate the active machine-related protection zone.
The protection zone is immediately inactive.
Note
Deactivating the protection zone is only active if it was preactivated via an NC program and
was activated via the interface signal.


Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX1.1 (enable protection zones)
DB21, ... DBX8.0 - 9.1 (activate machine-related protection zone 1 - 10)
DB21, ... DBX10.0 - 11.1 (activate channel-specific protection zone 1 - 10)
DB21, ... DBX272.0 - 273.1 (machine-related protection zone 1 - 10 preactivated)
DB21, ... DBX274.0 – 275.1 (channel-specific protection zone 1 - 10 preactivated)
DB21, ... DBX276.0 - 277.1 (machine-related protection zone 1 - 10 violated)
DB21, ... DBX278.0 – 279.1 (channel-specific protection zone 1 - 10 violated)
Additional references Basic Functions Function Manual; Chapter "A5: Protection zones"
5.5.35 DB21, ... DBX10.0 - 11.1 (activate channel-specific protection zone 1 - 10)

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Request to activate the machine-related protection zone.
The protection zone is immediately active.
Note
Activating the protection zone is only effective if it was already preactivated via an NC pro‐
gram.
Signal state 0 Request to deactivate the machine-related protection zone.
The protection zone is immediately inactive.
Note
Deactivating the protection zone is only active if it was preactivated via an NC program and
was activated via the interface signal.
5.5.36 DB21, ... DBX12.0 - 2 (geometry axis 1: activate handwheel)
DB21, ... DBX12.0 - 2 Geometry axis 1: Activate handwheel

Update Cyclic


Additional information The interface can be interpreted either bit or binary-coded. The definition is realized using
machine data MD11324.
Bit coded: maximum 3 handwheels
Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Number of the assigned handwheel
0 0 0 No handwheel assignment
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2
1 0 0 3
Binary coded: maximum 6 handwheels
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2
0 1 1 3
1 0 0 4
1 0 1 5
1 1 0 6
Note
At any one time, an axis can only be assigned to one handwheel. If, for bit coding, several
interface signals are set simultaneously, then the following priority applies: "Handwheel 1"
before "Handwheel 2" before "Handwheel 3".
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX16.0 - 2 (geometry axis 2: activate handwheel)
DB21, ... DBX40.0 - 2 (geometry axis 1: handwheel active)
MD11324 $MN_HANDWH_VDI_REPRESENTATION (representation of the handwheel
number at the VDI interface)
5.5.37 DB21, ... DBX12.3, 16.3, 20.3 (feedrate stop, geometry axes 1 / 2 / 3)
DB21, ... DBX12.3 Feedrate stop, geometry axis 1, 2, 3

DB21, ... DBX16.3
DB21, ... DBX20.3
Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Feedrate disable for geometry axis is active.

DB21, ... DBX12.3 Feedrate stop, geometry axis 1, 2, 3

DB21, ... DBX16.3
DB21, ... DBX20.3
Signal state 0 Feedrate disable for geometry axis is not active.
Additional information ● If the interface signal is set while traversing a geometry axis, then the geometry axis is
braked down to standstill along its braking characteristic.
continued.
● If the interface signal is set, and a request is issued to traverse an axis, then the axis is
not traversed. However, the traverse request is kept. When the interface signal is reset,
the traverse request is immediately executed, i.e. the axis is traversed.
● The interface signal is only active in the JOG mode.
5.5.38 DB21, ... DBX12.4 (geometry axis 1: traversing key lock)
DB21, ... DBX12.4 Geometry axis 1: Traversing key lock

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The traversing key lock for the geometry axis is active.
Signal state 0 The traversing key lock for the geometry axis is not active.
When the traversing key disable is activated while traversing, then traversing is canceled.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX16.4 (geometry axis 2: traversing key lock)
DB21, ... DBX20.4 (geometry axis 3: traversing key lock)
DB21, ... DBX12.6 - 7 (geometry axis 1: traversing keys "Plus" / "Minus")
5.5.39 DB21, ... DBX12.5 (geometry axis 1: rapid traverse override)
DB21, ... DBX12.5 Geometry axis 1: Rapid traverse override

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 When manually traversing the geometry axis using the traversing keys, when the interface
signal is set, rapid traverse velocity becomes active (MD32010).
Signal state 0 When manually traversing the geometry axis using the traversing keys, the entered JOG
velocity becomes active (SD41110 or MD32020).


Additional information The signal is only active for continuous or incremental manual traversing in the JOG mode.
The signal is irrelevant:
● for reference point approach (JOG mode)
● in the AUTOMATIC and MDI modes
The rapid traverse velocity can be influenced using the rapid traverse override switch.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX16.5 (geometry axis 2: rapid traverse override)
DB21, ... DBX20.5 (geometry axis 3: rapid traverse override)
MD32010 $MA_JOG_VELO_RAPID (conventional rapid traverse)
MD32020 $MA_JOG_VELO (conventional axis velocity)
SD41110 $SN_JOG_SET_VELO (axis velocity for JOG)
Additional references Function Manual, Basic Functions; Chapter "V1: Feedrates"
5.5.40 DB21, ... DBX12.6 - 7 (geometry axis 1: traversing keys "Plus" / "Minus")
DB21, ... DBX12.6 - 7 Geometry axis 1: traversing keys "Plus" / "Minus"

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 A request has been made to traverse the geometry axis using the traversing key
in the positive/negative axis direction.
Signal state 0 A request has not been made to traverse the geometry axis using the traversing
key in the positive/negative axis direction.


Additional information There is a request signal for every traversing key and/or axis direction:
Bit 6 Traversing key "Minus" (for traversing in the negative axis direction)
Bit 7 Traversing key "Plus" (for traversing in the positive axis direction)
Depending on the active machine function, as well as the settings for jog and
continuous operation (SD41050 and MD11300), different responses are initiated
when the signal changes:
1. Continuous manual travel in the jog mode
The geometry axis traverses in the direction concerned to the active limit
switch as long as the interface signal is set to 1.
2. Continuous manual travel in continuous operation
At the first edge change 0 →1, the geometry axis starts to traverse in the
relevant direction. This traversing movement still continues when the edge
changes from 1 → 0. Any new signal edge change 0 → 1 (same traversing
direction!) stops the traversing movement.
3. Incremental manual travel in the jog mode
With signal 1 the geometry axis starts to traverse at the set increment. If the
signal changes to the 0 state before the increment is traversed, then
traversing is interrupted. When the signal state changes to 1 again,
traversing is continued. The geometry axis can be stopped and started
several times as described above until it has traversed the complete
increment.
4. Incremental manual travel in continuous operation
At the first edge change 0 → 1 the geometry axis starts to traverse at the set
increment. If another edge change 0 → 1 is performed with the same traverse
signal before the geometry axis has traversed the increment, the traversing
movement will be cancelled. The increment is no longer traversed to the end.
Note
● The interface signal is irrelevant in operating modes:
– AUTOMATIC
– MDI
● If both traversing signals ("plus" and "minus") are set at the same time there
is no traversing or the current traversing is aborted.
● In contrast to machine axes, for geometry axes, only one geometry axis can
be traversed at any one time using the traversing keys.
● Using DB21, ... DBX12.4, 16.4, 20.4 (geometry axes 1, 2, 3: Traversing key
lock) traversing using traversing keys can be locked.
● In the following cases, the geometry axis cannot be traversed in the JOG
operating mode:
– The geometry axis is already being traversed via the axis-specific
interface as machine axis.
– If another geometry axis is already being traversed with the traversing
keys.


Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX16.6 - 7 (geometry axis 2: traversing keys "Plus" / "Minus")
DB31, ... DBX4.6 - 7 (traversing keys "Plus" / "Minus")
MD11300 $MN_JOG_INC_MODE_LEVELTRIGGRD (INC and REF in jog mode)
SD41050 $SN_JOG_CONT_MODE_LEVELTRIGGRD (jog/continuous operation
for JOG, continuous)
Additional references Function Manual, Extended Functions; Chapter "H1: manual and handwheel
travel"
5.5.41 DB21, ... DBX13.0 - 6 (geometry axis 1: machine function request)
DB21, ... DBX13.0 - 6 Geometry axis 1: machine function request

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The machine function to manually traverse the geometry axis has been requested.
Signal state 0 The machine function to manually traverse the geometry axis has not been requested.


Additional information There is a request signal for every machine function to manually traverse the geometry ax‐
is in the JOG mode.
Bit 0 INC1
Bit 1 INC10
Bit 2 INC100
Bit 3 INC1000
Bit 4 INC10000
Bit 5 INCvar
Bit 6 Continuous manual travel
Incremental manual travel
In addition to five fixed increment sizes (default setting in MD11330: INC1, INC10, INC100,
INC1000 and INC10000), a variable increment size (INCvar) that can be set via the setting
data SD41010 is also available. The distance evaluation of one increment for fixed and var‐
iable increment sizes is performed via the axis-specific machine data MD31090.
When pressing the "Plus" or "Minus" traversing key, or by rotating the electronic hand‐
wheel, the geometry axis starts to traverse in the appropriate direction, corresponding to
the number of increments of the active machine function.
Continuous manual travel
For continuous manual travel, the plus and minus traversing keys are selected to move the
geometry axis continuously and the appropriate direction.
Notes
● If several requests are set simultaneously, no machine function becomes active.
● If a geometry axis is currently being traversed via a machine function, the movement is
aborted through deselection or change of the machine function.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX17.0 - 6 (geometry axis 2: machine function request)
DB21, ... DBX21.0 - 6 (geometry axis 3: machine function request)
DB21, ... DBX41.0 - 6 (geometry axis 1: active machine function)
MD11320 $MN_HANDWH_IMP_PER_LATCH (handwheel pulses per detent position)
MD11330 $MN_JOG_INCR_SIZE_TAB (increment size for INC/handwheel)
MD31090 $MA_JOG_INCR_WEIGHT (evaluation of an increment for INC/handwheel)
SD41010 $SN_JOG_VAR_INCR_SIZE (size of the variable increment for JOG)
5.5.42 DB21, ... DBX15.0 (geometry axis 1: invert handwheel direction of rotation)
DB21, ... DBX15.0 Geometry axis 1: invert handwheel direction of rotation

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 A request has been made to invert the direction of rotation of the handwheel assigned to
the geometry axis.


Signal state 0 A request has not been made to invert the direction of rotation of the handwheel assigned
to the geometry axis.
It is only permissible to change the interface signal when the geometry axis is at a stand‐
still.
Application examples
● The direction of movement of the handwheel does not match the expected direction of
the axis.
● A handwheel is assigned to several axes with different orientations.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX19.0 (geometry axis 2: invert handwheel direction of rotation)
DB21, ... DBX23.0 (geometry axis 3: invert handwheel direction of rotation)
DB21, ... DBX43.0 (geometry axis 1: handwheel direction of rotation inversion active)

Additional information See DB21, ... DBX12.0 - 2 (geometry axis 1: activate handwheel) (Page 1460).
DB21, ... DBX16.4 Geometry axis 2: Traversing key lock

Additional information See DB21, ... DB21, ... DBX12.4 (geometry axis 1: traversing key lock) (Page 1462).

Additional information See DB21, ... DBX12.5 (geometry axis 1: rapid traverse override) (Page 1462).

Additional information See DB21, ... DBX12.6 - 7 (geometry axis 1: traversing keys "Plus" / "Minus")
(Page 1463).


Additional information See DB21, ... DBX13.0 - 6 (geometry axis 1: machine function request) (Page 1465).

Additional information See DB21, ... DBX15.0 (geometry axis 1: invert handwheel direction of rotation)
(Page 1466).
DB21, ... DBX20.0 - 2: Geometry axis 3: Activate handwheel

Additional information See DB21, ... DBX12.0 - 2 (geometry axis 1: activate handwheel) (Page 1460).
DB21, ... DBX20.4: Geometry axis 3: Traversing key lock

Additional information See DB21, ... DBX12.4 (geometry axis 1: traversing key lock) (Page 1462).

Additional information See DB21, ... DBX12.5 (geometry axis 1: rapid traverse override) (Page 1462).
DB21, ... DBX20.6 - 7: Geometry axis 3: traversing keys "Plus" / "Minus"

Additional information See DB21, ... DBX12.6 - 7 (geometry axis 1: traversing keys "Plus" / "Minus")
(Page 1463).


Additional information See DB21, ... DBX13.0 - 6 (geometry axis 1: machine function request) (Page 1465).

Additional information See DB21, ... DBX15.0 (geometry axis 1: invert handwheel direction of rotation)
(Page 1466).
5.5.55 DB21, ... DBX24.3 (handwheel offset (DRF) requested)
DB21, ... DBX24.3 Handwheel offset (DRF) selected

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Handwheel offset (DRF) is selected
Signal state 0 Handwheel offset (DRF) is not selected.
Additional information As soon as handwheel offset (DRF) is active, the handwheel offset can be changed in AU‐
TOMATIC or MDI mode using the handwheel assigned to the axis.
Note
Handwheel offset (DRF) is selected from the SINUMERIK Operate user interface in the op‐
DB21, ... DBX24.3.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX0.3 (activate handwheel offset (DRF))
5.5.56 DB21, ... DBX24.4 (select NC-associated M01)
DB21, ... DBX24.4 Associated auxiliary function selected

Signal state 1 Associated auxiliary function is selected.
Signal state 0 Associated auxiliary function is not selected.

DB21, ... DBX24.4 Associated auxiliary function selected

Additional information "Associated auxiliary function" (M-1) is selected from the SINUMERIK Operate user inter‐
face in the operating area "Automatic" > "Program control" by setting the HMI/PLC inter‐
face signal DB21, ... DBX24.4.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX30.5 (activate associated auxiliary function)
DB21, ... DBX318.5 (associated auxiliary function active)
MD22254 $MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE (additional M function for program stop)
MD22256 $MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M1_VALUE (additional M function for conditional stop)
Additional references Function Manual, Basic Functions; Chapter "H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC > "Asso‐
ciated auxiliary functions"
5.5.57 DB21, ... DBX24.5 (M01 requested)
DB21, ... DBX24.5 M01 selected

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Program control "Conditional stop"M01 is selected.
Signal state 0 Program control "Conditional stop"M01 is not selected.
Additional information Program control "Conditional stop" M01 is selected from the SINUMERIK Operate user in‐
terface: Operating area "Automatic" > "Program control" by setting the HMI/PLC interface
signal DB21, ... DBX24.5.
The interface signal is then transferred according to the value of the FB1 parameter
MMCToIf by the basic PLC program into the NC/PLC interface signal DB21, ... DBX0.5:
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX0.5 (activate M01)
DB21, ... DBX32.5 (M00/M01 active)
Additional references Basic Functions Function Manual; Chapter "K1: Mode group, channel, program operation,
reset response" > "Program control" > "Function selection via user interface or PLC user
program"
Operating Manual, HMI Advanced "Machine operating area"

5.5.58 DB21, ... DBX24.6 (dry run feedrate selected)
DB21, ... DBX24.6 Dry run feedrate (DRY) selected

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Dry run feedrate (DRY) is selected.
Signal state 0 Dry run feedrate (DRY) is not selected.
Dry run feedrate (DRY) is selected from the SINUMERIK Operate user interface in the op‐
DB21, ... DBX24.6.
Note
The value for the dry run feedrate is set using:
SD42100 $SC_DRY_RUN_FEED
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX0.6 (activate dry run (DRY) feedrate)
SD42100 $SC_DRY_RUN_FEED (dry run feedrate)
SD42101 $SC_DRY_RUN_FEED_MODE (mode for dry run velocity)
Additional references Function Manual, Basic Functions
● Chapter "K1: mode group, channel, program mode, reset response" > "Program test" >
"Program processing with dry run feedrate"
● Chapter "V1: Feedrates" > "Feedrate control" > "Dry run feedrate"
Operating Manual, Turning or Milling or Grinding
● Chapter "Machining a workpiece" > "Controlling the program sequence" > "Program
controls"
5.5.59 DB21, ... DBX25.3 (feedrate override selected for rapid traverse)
DB21, ... DBX25.3 Feedrate override selected for rapid traverse

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Feedrate override is selected for rapid traverse
Signal state 0 Feedrate override is not selected for rapid traverse

DB21, ... DBX25.3 Feedrate override selected for rapid traverse

Additional information If there is no dedicated rapid traverse override switch on the machine control panel, you
can then toggle between feedrate override and rapid traverse override. Rapid traverse
override can be selected by selecting feedrate override for rapid traverse at the user inter‐
face. The interface signal is set:
DB21, ... DBX25.3 = 1
The following interface signals are set by the PLC basic program:
● Rapid traverse override active = feedrate override for rapid traverse selected
DB21, ... DBX6.6 = DB21, ... DBX25.3
● Rapid traverse override = feedrate override
DB21, ... DBB5 = DB21, ... DBB4
Override factors> 100% are limited to 100%.
Note
The PLC user program can also initiate the switchover between rapid traverse and fee‐
drate override. To do this, the following interface signals must be set:
● Rapid traverse override active
DB21, ... DBX6.6 = 1
● Rapid traverse override = feedrate override
DB21, ... DBB5 = DB21, ... DBB4
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBB4 (feedrate override)
DB21, ... DBB5 (rapid traverse override)
DB21, ... DBX6.6 (rapid traverse override active)
5.5.60 DB21, ... DBX25.7 (program test (PRT) requested)
DB21, ... DBX25.7 Program test (PRT) selected

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Program test (PRT) is selected
Signal state 0 Program test (PRT) is not selected.

DB21, ... DBX25.7 Program test (PRT) selected

Note
While program test (PRT) is active, all traversing motions take place in the channel depend‐
ing on the current mode of the axis:
● Axes: "Axis disable" is active ⇒ no real traversing motions
● Spindles: "Axis disable" is not active ⇒ real traversing motions
Note
Program test (PRT) is selected from the SINUMERIK Operate user interface in the operat‐
DBX25.7.
Notice
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX1.7 (activate program test (PRT))
DB21, ... DBX33.7 (program test (PRT) active)
set response"; Chapter "Program test"
5.5.61 DB21, ... DBX26.0 ... 7 ("Skip block" (SKP) selected)
DB21, ... DBX26.0 ... 7 "Skip block" (SKP) selected

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 "Skip block" (SKP) of the skip level is selected.
Signal state 0 "Skip block" (SKP) of the skip level is not selected.

DB21, ... DBX26.0 ... 7 "Skip block" (SKP) selected

Additional information Bit 0 ... bit 7 are assigned to the skip levels 0 ... 7.
Note
We recommend that the interface signal is already set before the NC program starts.
Note
For multiple consecutive skip blocks, the blocks are only skipped if the interface signal was
already present before the first skip block of the block sequence was decoded.
Note
"Skip block" (SKP) is selected from the SINUMERIK Operate user interface in the operat‐
DBX26.0 ...7.
by the basic PLC program into the NC/PLC interface signal DB21, ... DBX2.0 ... 7:
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX2.0 ... 7 (activate "skip block")
set response"
5.5.62 DB21, ... DBX29.0 - 3 (activate fixed feedrate 1 - 4, path/geometry axes)
DB 21, ... DBX29.0 - 3 Activate fixed feedrate 1 - 4, path/geometry axes

Update Cyclic

DB 21, ... DBX29.0 - 3 Activate fixed feedrate 1 - 4, path/geometry axes

Additional information With the interface signals, in the AUTOMATIC mode, instead of the programmed feedrate
or the configured JOG velocities, the fixed feedrate - parameterized using machine data -
is activated.
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Meaning
0 0 0 0 Fixed feedrate not selected
0 0 0 1 Fixed feedrate 1
The fixed feedrates are parameterized using the following machine data:
● Linear axes: MD12202 $MN_PERMANENT_FEED
● Rotary axes: MD12204 $MN_PERMANENT_ROT_AX_FEED
Notes
● The fixed feedrate is not used for:
– Spindles
– Positioning axes
– Tapping
● The fixed feedrate is always interpreted as linear feedrate. Switchover to linear
feedrate is performed internally in the control system also when revolutional feedrate is
active.
Corresponds with MD12200 $MN_RUN_OVERRIDE_0 (traversing behavior with override 0)
MD12202 $MN_PERMANENT_FEED (fixed feedrates for linear axes)
MD12204 $MN_PERMANENT_ROT_AX_FEED (fixed feedrates for rotary axes)
Additional references Function Manual, Basic Functions; Chapter "V1: Feedrates" > "Feedrate control" > "Fixed
feedrate values "
5.5.63 DB21, ... DBX29.4 (activate PTP travel)
DB21, ... DBX29.4 Activate PTP travel

Edge change 0 → 1 Activate PTP (Point-To-Point) travel
Edge change 1 → 0 Activate CP (Continuous-Path) travel
Additional information Using this signal, in the the jog mode, you can switch between Cartesian path movement
(CP) and the Cartesian PTP travel.
Note
DB21, ... DBX29.4 is only relevant in the JOG mode when the transformation is active.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX317.6 (PTP travel active)
Additional references Function Manual, Extended Functions; Chapter "M1: Kinematic transformation"

5.5.64 DB21, ... DBX29.5 (tool manager: Deactivate workpiece counter)
DB21, ... DBX29.5 TOOLMAN: Deactivate workpiece counter

Signal state 1 Deactivate workpiece counter monitoring is requested.
Signal state 0 Deactivate workpiece counter monitoring is not requested.
Additional information The workpiece counter monitoring allows workpieces to be counted that depend on the
process, the workpiece material or other factors. Workpiece counter monitoring can be de‐
activated using the interface signal
Corresponds with SETPIECE (function)
TMPCIT (PI service)
$TC_MOP4 (remaining unit quantity)
$TC_TP9 (type of tool monitoring)
"Workpiece counter monitoring"
"Workpiece counter monitoring"
5.5.65 DB21, ... DBX29.6 (tool manager: Deactivating wear monitoring)
DB21, ... DBX29.6 TOOLMAN: Deactivate wear monitoring

Signal state 1 Deactivate wear monitoring is requested.
Signal state 0 Deactivate wear monitoring is not requested.
Corresponds with $TC_MOP15 (wear setpoint or additive offset value)
$TC_MOP5 (wear pre-warning limit or additive offset pre-warning limit)
$TC_MOP6 (wear value or additive offset setpoint)
$TC_TP9 (type of tool monitoring)
MD18080 $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK (memory reserved for the tool man‐
agement)
MD20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK bit 17 (activation of the tool management func‐
tions)
"Wear monitoring"
"Wear monitoring"

5.5.66 DB21, ... DBX29.7 (tool manager: Tool lock not active)
DB21, ... DBX29.7 TOOLMAN: Tool lock not active

Signal state 1 Tool lock notactive.
Signal state 0 Tool lock is active
Additional information A tool assumes the "locked" state if the actual value of the active monitoring function (work‐
piece count, tool life or wear) has reached a value of zero. If the tool is still being used,
then it remains in use (for machining) until the next tool change. After that the tool can no
longer be used.
Using the interface signal, it can be set that the NC does not take the "locked" state into
account when searching for a tool that can be used.
The interface signal is not active if the tool selection is realized using in it blocks (reset and
start mode mask).
Corresponds with MD22562 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE (response for tool change errors)
Additional references Function Manual, Tool Management; Chapter "Function description" > "Tool monitoring
(workpiece count, tool life, wear)" > "Wear monitoring" > "Signals to the PLC and from the
PLC"
5.5.67 DB21 ... DBX30.0 - 2 (activate contour handwheel)
DB21, ... DBX30.0 - 2: Activate contour handwheel

Update Cyclic

DB21, ... DBX30.0 - 2: Activate contour handwheel

0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2
1 0 0 3
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2
0 1 1 3
1 0 0 4
1 0 1 5
1 1 0 6
Note
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX37.0 - 2 (contour handwheel active)
5.5.68 DB21, ... DBX30.3 (simulation contour handwheel: Activate)
DB21, ... DBX30.3 Simulation contour handwheel: Activation

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Activate contour handwheel simulation
Signal state 0 Deactivate contour handwheel simulation
Additional information During simulation, the feedrate is no longer defined by the contour handwheel, but travers‐
ing occurs with the programmed feedrate on the contour. When deactivated, the actual tra‐
versing motion is braked along the braking ramp.
Note
Simulation is only effective in AUTOMATIC mode and can only be activated when the con‐
tour handwheel is activated.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX30.4 (simulation contour handwheel: Negative direction)

5.5.69 DB21, ... DBX30.4 (simulation contour handwheel: Negative direction)
DB21, ... DBX30.4 Simulation contour handwheel: Negative direction

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 When simulating the contour handwheel, it is traversing on the contour in the opposite di‐
rection to the programmed direction.
Signal state 0 When simulating the contour handwheel, it is traversing on the contour in the direction to
the programmed direction.
Additional information When switching over the traversing direction, the actual traversing motion is braked along
the braking ramp and then traversed in the opposite direction.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX30.3 (simulation contour handwheel: Activate)
5.5.70 DB21, ... DBX30.5 (activate M0 / M1 associated with NC)
DB21, ... DBX30.5 Activate associated auxiliary function

Signal state 1 Activation of "Associated auxiliary function" is requested.
Signal state 0 Activation of "Associated auxiliary function" is not requested.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX24.4 (associated auxiliary function selected)
DB21, ... DBX318.5 (associated auxiliary function active)
Additional references Function Manual, Basic Functions; Chapter "H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC > "Asso‐
ciated auxiliary functions"
5.5.71 DB21, ... DBX30.6 (JOG circular travel)
DB21, ... DBX30.6 JOG circular travel

Update Cyclic

DB21, ... DBX30.6 JOG circular travel

Signal state 1 The "Circular travel in JOG" function is requested.
Signal state 0 The "Circular travel in JOG" function is not requested.
Additional information As soon as the function is active (see DB21, ... DBX377.6), the machine operator can si‐
multaneously traverse the two geometry axes of the active plane along an arc using the
traverse keys or handwheel.
Application
This function is used for machine tools that are exclusively operated manually.
Note
The following preconditions applying for the "Circular travel in JOG" function:
● The "Circular travel in JOG" function can be activated only in the JOG mode.
The function cannot be activated if the machine functions JOG-REPOS and JOG-REF
are active.
● The axes that participate in traversing must be referenced.
● It is not permissible that the active plane is inclined in space.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX377.6 (JOG circular travel active)
5.5.72 DB21, ... DBX31.0 - 2 (REPOS mode)
DB21, ... DBX31.0 - 2 REPOS mode

Update Cyclic
Additional information Selecting the REPOS mode:
Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 REPOS mode
0 0 0 No REPOS mode active
0 0 1 RMB: Repositioning to start of block
0 1 0 RMI: Repositioning to interrupt point
0 1 1 RME: Repositioning to end of block
1 0 0 RMN: Repositioning to the nearest point on the path
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX25.4 (REPOS mode activation)
DB21, ... DBX31.4 (REPOS mode change)
DB31, ... DBX10.0 (REPOS delay)
DB21, ... DBX319.0 (REPOS mode change acknowledgment)
DB21, ... DBX319.1 - 3 (active REPOS mode)
DB21, ... DBX319.5 (REPOS acknowledgment delay)
DB31, ... DBX70.0 (REPOS offset)
DB31, ... DBX70.1 (REPOS offset valid)
DB31, ... DBX70.2 (REPOS delay acknowledgment)
MD11470 $MN_REPOS_MODE_MASK (repositioning properties)
set response"

5.5.73 DB21, ... DBX31.4 (REPOS activation)
DB21, ... DBX31.4 REPOS activation

Update Cyclic
Signal state 0 → 1 Request to activate the "REPOS" function for the actual main run block.
The following become active:
● DB21, ... DBX31.0 - 2 (REPOS mode)
● DB31, ... DBX10.0 (REPOS delay)
DB21, ... DBX31.0 - 2 (REPOS mode)
● Chapter "B1: Continuous-path mode, exact stop, LookAhead" > "Smoothing and
repositioning (REPOS)"
● Chapter "K1: Mode group, channel, program mode, reset response" > "Repositioning to
the contour (REPOS)"
5.5.74 DB21, ... DBX31.5 (contour handwheel: invert handwheel direction of rotation)
DB21, ... DBX31.5 Contour handwheel: invert handwheel direction of rotation

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 A request has been made to invert the direction of rotation of the contour handwheel.
Signal state 0 A request has not been made to invert the direction of rotation of the contour handwheel.
It is only permissible to change the interface signal when the axis is at a standstill.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX39.5 (Contour handwheel: handwheel direction of rotation inversion active)

5.5.75 DB21, ... DBX32.1 (RESU: retrace mode active)
DB21, ... DBX32.1 RESU: Retrace mode active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The retrace mode is active.
Signal state 0 The retrace mode is not active.
Additional information The interface signal is set, if DB21, ... DBX0.1 == 1
The interface signal is reset, if DB21, ... DBX0.2 == 1
Additional references Function Manual, Special Functions; Chapter "TE7: Continue machining (retrace support)
5.5.76 DB21, ... DBX32.2 (retrace support active)
DB21, ... DBX32.2 RESU: Retrace support active

Edge evaluation: No
Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Retrace support active
Signal state 0 Retrace support is not active.
Additional information The interface signal is set, if DB21, ... DBX0.2 == 1 is identified.
The interface signal is reset if the last action block has been completed.
Additional references Function Manual, Special Functions; Chapter "TE7: Continue machining (retrace support)
5.5.77 DB21, ... DBX32.3 (action block active)
DB21, ... DBX32.3 Action block active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 An action block is active / is being executed.
Signal state 0 No action block is active.

DB21, ... DBX32.3 Action block active

Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX33.4 (block search active)
DB21, ... DBX32.6 (last action block active)
Additional references Basic Functions Function Manual; Chapter "K1: Mode group, channel, program mode, re‐
set response" > "Block search type 1, 2 and 4"
5.5.78 DB21, ... DBX32.4 (approach block active)
DB21, ... DBX32.4 Approach block active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The approach block to continue the NC program for block search, type 2 "Block search
with calculation at the contour" is active.
Signal state 0 No approach block is active.
set response"
5.5.79 DB21, ... DBX32.5 (M00/M01 active)
DB21, ... DBX32.5 M00/M01 active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Auxiliary function M00 or M01 is active.
The block in which the auxiliary function is programmed, is executed and the help functions
output.
Program state "stopped"
Signal state 0 Auxiliary function M00 or M01 is not active.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX0.5 (activate M01)
DB21, ... DBX24.5 (M01 selected)
set response"
5.5.80 DB21, ... DBX32.6 (last action block active)
DB21, ... DBX32.6 Last action block active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The last action block is active / is being executed.
Signal state 0 The last action block is not active.

DB21, ... DBX32.6 Last action block active

Additional information If the last action block is active, this means that all the action blocks on the NC side have
been processed and the actions on the PLC side (ASUB, FC) or the operator such as over‐
store, mode change according to JOG/REPOS are possible. In this way the PLC, for exam‐
ple, can still perform a tool change before the start of movement.
Action blocks contain the actions collected during "Block search with computation" such as
● Help function outputs H, M00, M01, M..
● Tool programming T, D, DL
● Spindle programming S value, M3/M4/M5/M19, SPOS
● Feed programming, F
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX33.4 (block search active)
set response"
5.5.81 DB21, ... DBX33.0 (referencing active)
DB21, ... DBX33.0 Referencing active

Update Cyclic
Edge change 0 → 1 Referencing is active
Additional information Feedback signal for the request to activate referencing:
1. DB21, ... DBX1.0: 0 → 1 (request)
2. DB21, ... DBX33.0: 0 → 1 (feedback signal)
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX1.0 (activate referencing)
5.5.82 DB21, ... DBX33.2 (revolutional feedrate active)
DB31, ... DBX33.2 Revolutional feedrate active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Revolutional feedrate (G95) is active.
Signal state 0 Revolutional feedrate (G95) is not active.
Further information The interface signal indicates that, in AUTOMATIC mode, path or synchronized axes move
at revolutional feedrate.
Additional references Function Manual Basic Functions; Chapter "V1: feedrates" "Path feedrate F" > "Feedrate
type G93, G94, G95"

5.5.83 DB21, ... DBX33.3 (handwheel override active)
DB21, ... DBX33.3 Handwheel override active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The "Handwheel override in automatic mode" function is active for the programmed path
axes.
Signal state 0 The function "Handwheel override in automatic mode" is not active for the programmed
path axes.
Additional information The handwheel pulses of the 1st geometry axis function as a velocity override on the pro‐
grammed path velocity.
In the following cases, the override is inactive:
● The path axes have reached the programmed target position.
● The distance-to-go has been deleted.
● Reset was initiated.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX6.2 (delete distance-to-go)
5.5.84 DB21, ... DBX33.4 (block search active)
DB21, ...DBX33.4 Block search active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The "block search" function is active.
It was selected from the user interface and started using the interface signal:
DB21, ... DBX7.1 (NC Start)
Signal state 0 The "block search" function is not active - or the search target was found.
set response" > "Block search type 1, 2 and 4" or "Block search type 5 (SERUPRO)"
5.5.85 DB21, ... DBX33.5 (M02 / M30 active)
DB21, ... DBX33.5 M02 / M30 active

Update Cyclic

DB21, ... DBX33.5 M02 / M30 active

Signal state 1 End of program M02 / M30 is active.
The interface signal is set after:
● A program reset has been completed (M02, M30 or M17)
Note: If traversing motion is programmed in the block of M02, M30 or M17, then the
signal is only set after all of the axes have reached their target positions.
● Executed the PROG_EVENT program (PROG_EVENT.SPF) after:
– end of program reset (M02 / M30)
– Channel reset
– Warm restart (power on)
– Output of the last action block after a block search
Signal state 0 End of program M02 / M30 is not active
The interface signal is reset or remains reset:
● after the start and while executing an NC program, asynchronous subprogram (ASUB)
or PROG_EVENT program.
Note: The last signal state is kept after the start of a block search with calculation in the
"Program test" mode (SERUPRO).
● After a program cancellation as the result of an alarm.
● During and after executing a channel reset without executing a PROG_EVENT
program.
● During and after the control system powers up without executing a PROG_EVENT
program.
Additional information ● In the last part program block of an NC program, it is not permissible to program the
following functions:
– Auxiliary functions, which initiate a read-in stop
– Programmed spindle speed (S value), that should be effective beyond the end of
program (M02 / M30)
● After a program reset has been completed (M02 / M30), then the signal is set to a value
of 1 While processing a subsequent PROG_EVENT program, the signal is set to 0, and
after completion of the PROG_EVENT program, is again set to 1.
Note
The signal is not suitable to automatically initiate follow-on functions such as tool counting,
bar feed etc. In order to identify the completion of the previous processing (NC program,
ASUB, PROG_EVENT, etc.) the end of program command (M02 / M30) must be written to
its own dedicated part program block. Command (M02 / M30) or the decoded signal of the
M function can be used as trigger.
Additional references ● Function Manual, Basic Functions
Chapter: "K1: Mode group, channel, program mode, reset behavior" > " Program
mode" > "Event driven program call (PROG_EVENT)"
● List Manual NC Variables and Interface Signals
Chapter: "Interface signals - overview" > "Channel-specific signals" > "Transferred M/
and S functions" or "Decoded M signals"

5.5.86 DB21, … DBX33.6 (transformation active)
DB21, ... DBX33.6 Transformation active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 A transformation is not active.
Signal state 0 A transformation is not active.
Additional information In the channel - in the active NC program - one of the following commands TRANSMIT,
TRACYL, TRAANG or TRAORI has been programmed. The corresponding block has been
processed and the corresponding transformation is active.
set response"
Function Manual, Extended Functions; Chapter "M1: Kinematic transformation"
5.5.87 DB21, ... DBX33.7 (program test active)
DB21, ... DBX33.7 Program test (PRT) active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Program test (PRT) is active.
Signal state 0 Program test (PRT) is not active.
Note
While program test (PRT) is active, all traversing motions of the axes, but not the spindles,
take place under "Axis disable."
Note
Program test (PRT) is selected from the SINUMERIK Operate user interface in the operat‐
DBX25.7.
Notice
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX1.7 (activate program test (PRT))
DB21, ... DBX25.7 (program test (PRT) requested)
set response"

5.5.88 DB21, ... DBX35.0 (program state "running")
DB21, ... DBX35.0 Program state "running"

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Program state == "running"
Signal state 0 Program state ≠ "running"
Additional information The signal is set after starting the NC program using DB21, ... DBX7.1 = 1.
The signal remains set if NC program execution is stopped using DB21, ... DBX6.1 = 1.
The signal is not reset if NC program execution is stopped as a result of the following
events:
● A feedrate disable or spindle disable is active
● DB21, ... DBX6.1 (read-in disable)
● Feedrate override: 0 %
● A spindle and axis monitoring function responds
● Position setpoints are entered in the NC program for axes in the "follow-up mode," for
axes without "controller enable," or for "parking axes"
Program states:
● DB21, ... DBX35.4 (program state "aborted")
● DB21, ... DBX35.3 (program state "interrupted")
● DB21, ... DBX35.2 (program state "stopped")
● DB21, ... DBX35.1 (program state "wait")
● DB21, ... DBX35.0 (program state "running")
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX6.1 = 1 (read-in disable)
DB21, ... DBX7.1 = 1 (NC Start)
DB21, ... DBX35.3 (program state "interrupted")
DB21, ... DBX35.2 (program state "stopped")
DB21, ... DBX35.1 (program state "wait")
set response"
5.5.89 DB21, ... DBX35.1 (program state "wait")
DB21, ... DBX35.1 Program state "Wait"

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Program state == "wait"
Signal state 0 Program state ≠ "wait"

DB21, ... DBX35.1 Program state "Wait"

Additional information The "Wait" program state is assumed if, in the NC program, with WAIT_M or WAIT_E the
system waits for synchronization with an NC program or another channel.
Program states:
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX35.4 (program state "aborted")
DB21, ... DBX35.0 (program state "running")
set response"
5.5.90 DB21, ... DBX35.2 (program state "stopped")
DB21, ... DBX35.2 Program state"stopped"

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Program state == "stopped"
Signal state 0 Program state ≠ "stopped"
Additional information Events, which lead to the NC program being stopped:
● DB21, ... DBX7.3 (NC Stop)
● DB21, ... DBX7.4 (NC Stop axes plus spindles)
● DB21, ... DBX7.2 (NC Stop at the block limit)
● Programmed command M00 or M01
● Single-block mode
Program states:

DB21, ... DBX35.2 Program state"stopped"

Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX7.3 (NC Stop)
DB21, ... DBX7.2 (NC Stop at the block limit)
set response"
5.5.91 DB21, ... DBX35.3 (program state "interrupted")
DB21, ... DBX35.3 Program state "interrupted"

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Program state == "interrupted"
Signal state 0 Program state ≠ "interrupted"
Additional information The signal indicates that the interrupted NC program can be continued with NC start
(DB21, ... DBX7.1 = 1).
For example, the "interrupted" state is assumed if, in the "stopped" state (DB21, ...
DBX35.2 == 1), the system changes from the AUTOMATIC or MDI mode into the JOG
mode. After a subsequent operating mode change from JOG to AUTOMATIC or MDI, the
NC program can be executed again from the interruption point using an NC start (DB21, ...
DBX7.1 = 1).
Program states:
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX35.4 (program state "aborted")
set response"

5.5.92 DB21, ... DBX35.4 (program state "aborted")
DB21, ... DBX35.4 Program state "aborted"

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Program state == "aborted"
Signal state 0 Program state ≠ "aborted"
Additional information The signal is set in the following cases:
● The actual NC program was selected in the channel, however it was not started.
● The actual NC program was executed in the channel, and aborted using DB21, ...
DBX7.7 = 1 (channel reset).
Program states:
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX7.7 (reset)
set response"
5.5.93 DB21, ... DBX35.5 (channel state "active")
DB21, ... DBX35.5 Channel state "active"

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Channel state == "active"
Signal state 0 Channel state ≠ "active"
● An NC program is being executed in the Automatic or MDI mode
● At least one axis is being traversed in the JOG mode.
Channel states:
● DB21, ... DBX35.5 (channel state "active")
● DB21, ... DBX35.6 (channel state "interrupted")
● DB21, ... DBX35.7 (channel state "reset")

DB21, ... DBX35.5 Channel state "active"

Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX35.6 (channel state "interrupted")
set response"
5.5.94 DB21, ... DBX35.6 (channel state "interrupted")
DB21, ... DBX35.6 Channel state "interrupted"

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Channel state == "interrupted"
Signal state 0 Channel state ≠ "interrupted"
Additional information An interruption can be initiated when executing an NC program in the AUTOMATIC or
MDA mode - or in the JOG mode while an axis is traversing as a result of the following
events:
● DB21, ... DBX7.3 (NC Stop)
● DB21, ... DBX7.4 (NC Stop axes plus spindles)
● DB21, ... DBX7.2 (NC Stop at the block limit)
● Programmed stop M00 or M01
● Single-block mode
Channel states:
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX7.3 (NC Stop)
DB21, ... DBX7.2 (NC Stop at the block limit)
DB21, ... DBX35.5 (channel state "active")
set response"
5.5.95 DB21, ... DBX35.7 (channel state "reset")
DB21, ... DBX35.7 Channel state "reset"

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Channel state == "reset"
Signal state 0 Channel state ≠ "reset"

DB21, ... DBX35.7 Channel state "reset"

● end of program reset (M02 / M30)
● Channel reset
● Warm restart (power on)
Channel states:
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX35.5 (channel state "active")
DB21, ... DBX35.6 (channel state "interrupted")
set response"
5.5.96 DB21, ... DBX36.2 (all axes that have to be referenced have been referenced)
DB21, ... DBX36.2 All axes that have to be referenced are referenced
Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 All axes that must be referenced (linear axes and rotary axes) of the channel are refer‐
enced.
The machine data:
MD20700 $MC_REFP_NC_START_LOCK (NC start inhibit without reference point)
is zero.
If two position measuring systems are connected to an axis, that would prevent an NC
start, then the active one must be referenced so that the axis is considered to have been
referenced.
An NC Start command for the part program processing is only accepted when this signal is
present.
Axes that have to be referenced are axes, if:
MD34110 $MA_REFP_CYCLE_NR _ = -1
and the axis is not in the parked position (position measuring system inactive and the con‐
troller enable withdrawn).
Signal state 0 One or more axes of the channel that have to be referenced are not referenced.
Additional information The spindles of the channel have no effect on this interface signal.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX60.4 (referenced / synchronized 1)
DB31, ... DBX60.5 (referenced / synchronized 2)

5.5.97 DB21, ... DBX36.3 (all axes stationary)
DB21, ... DBX36.3 All axes stationary

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 All channel axes are stationary - and no other traversing motion is active.
Signal state 0 Not all channel axes are stationary - or other traversing motion is presently active.
Additional information Criterion for "axis stationary": Interpolator end
Additional references Function Manual, Basic Functions; Chapter "B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look
Ahead" > "Exact stop mode"
5.5.98 DB21, ... DBX36.4 (interrupt handling active)
DB21, ... DBX36.4 Interrupt handling active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Interrupt handling is active.
One or more channels in the mode group are not in the desired operating mode as the
result of an active interrupt routine.
Signal state 0 Interrupt handling is not active.
All channels are operating in the requested mode.
The interface signal is notset, if an interrupt is handled in a program mode (AUTOMATIC
or MDI).
Corresponds with MD11600 $MN_BAG_MASK (definition of the mode group response)
set response"
5.5.99 DB21, ... DBX36.5 (channel ready)
DB21, ... DBX36.5 Channel is ready

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The channel is ready
Signal state 0 The channel is not ready.
Additional information The channel is ready to execute an NC program and to traverse axes and spindle that are
assigned to the channel.
Corresponds with MD11600 $MN_BAG_MASK (definition of the mode group response)
set response"

5.5.100 DB21, ... DBX36.6 (channel-specific NC alarm active)
DB21, ... DBX36.6 Channel-specific NC alarm active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 At least one NC alarm is active in the channel.
Signal state 0 No NC alarm is active in the channel.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX36.7 (NC alarm with machining stop active)
DB10 DBX109.0 (NC alarm active)
Additional references Diagnostics guide
5.5.101 DB21, ... DBX36.7 (NC alarm with machining stop active)
DB21, ... DBX36.7 NC alarm with machining stop is active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 At least one NC alarm with machining stop is active in the channel.
Signal state 0 No NC alarm with machining stop is active in the channel.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX36.6 (channel-specific NC alarm active)
DB10 DBX109.0 (NC alarm active)
Additional references Diagnostics guide
5.5.102 DB21, ... DBX37.0 - 2 (contour handwheel active)
DB21, ... DBX37.0 - 2 Contour handwheel active

Update Cyclic

DB21, ... DBX37.0 - 2 Contour handwheel active

0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2
1 0 0 3
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2
0 1 1 3
1 0 0 4
1 0 1 5
1 1 0 6
Note
Corresponds with DB21 ... DBX30.0 - 2 (activate contour handwheel)
5.5.103 DB21, ... DBX37.3 (clearance control (CLC): Active)
DB21, ... DBX37.3 Clearance control (CLC):

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Clearance control (CLC) is active.
Signal state 0 Clearance control (CLC) is not active.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX1.4 (clearance control (CLC): stop)
DB21, ... DBX1.5 (clearance control (CLC): Override)
DB21, ... DBX37.4 (clearance control (CLC): Stop at the lower motion limit)
DB21, ... DBX37.5 (clearance control (CLC): Stop at the upper motion limit)
DB21, ... DBX37.4 - 5 (clearance control (CLC): Motion has stopped)

5.5.104 DB21, ... DBX37.4 (clearance control (CLC): Stop at the lower motion limit)
DB21, ... DBX37.4 Clearance control (CLC): Stop at the lower motion limit
Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The traversing motion of the clearance-controlled axis, generated by the clearance control,
has reached the lower motion limit and was stopped.
has not reached the lower motion limit.
Additional information The lower motion limit of the clearance control is set in machine data:
MD62505 $MC_CLC_SENSOR_LOWER_LIMIT
The parameterized limit value can be adapted on a block-specific basis by programming
CLC_LIM(...) in the part program.
Note
If, in addition to DB21, ... DBX37.4, DB21, ... DBX37.5 are also simultaneously set, then
signal "DB21, ... DBX37.3 (clearance control (CLC): Active) (Page 1496)"is active.
Corresponds with CLC_LIM(...) ; the control range is limited
DB21, ... DBX37.5 (clearance control (CLC): Stop at the upper motion limit)
MD62505 $MC_CLC_SENSOR_LOWER_LIMIT (lower clearance control motion limit)
5.5.105 DB21, ... DBX37.5 (clearance control (CLC): Stop at the upper motion limit)
DB21, ... DBX37.5 Clearance control (CLC): Stop at the upper motion limit
Update Cyclic
has reached the upper motion limit and was stopped.
has not reached the upper motion limit.
Additional information The upper motion limit of the clearance control is set in machine data:
MD62506 $MC_CLC_SENSOR_UPPER_LIMIT
The parameterized limit value can be adapted on a block-specific basis by programming
CLC_LIM(...) in the part program.
Note
If, in addition to DB21, ... DBX37.5, DB21, ... DBX37.4 are also simultaneously set, then
signal "DB21, ... DBX37.3 (clearance control (CLC): Active) (Page 1496)"is active.
Corresponds with CLC_LIM(...) ; the control range is limited
DB21, ... DBX37.4 (clearance control (CLC): Stop at the lower motion limit)
MD62506 $MC_CLC_SENSOR_UPPER_LIMIT (upper clearance control motion limit)

5.5.106 DB21, ... DBX37.6 (read-in disable is ignored)
DB21, ... DBX37.6 Read-in disable is ignored

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Read-in disable (DB21, ... DBX6.1) is ignored.
Signal state 0 Read-in disable (DB21, ... DBX6.1) is not ignored.
Additional information Read-in disable (DB21, ... DBX6.1) is ignored, if the following applies:
DB21, ... DBX6.1 == 1 (read-in disable) AND actual block has the status "read-in disable
inactive"
Read-in disable (DB21, ... DBX6.1) is not ignored, if the following applies:
DB21, ... DBX6.1 == 0 (read-in disable) OR
( DB21, ... DBX6.1 == 1 (read-in disable) AND actual block has the status "read-in disable
active" )
Blocks for which read-in disable is ignored have the status "read-in disable inactive".
The following machine data is used to specify that the read-in disable (DB21, ... DBX6.1) is
to be ignored:
● MD11602 $MN_ASUP_START_MASK, bit 2
● MD20116 $MC_IGNORE_INHIBIT_ASUP
● MD20107 $MC_ PROG_EVENT_IGN_INHIBIT
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX37.7 (stop at block end is ignored during single block (SBL))
MD11602 $MN_ASUP_START_MASK, bit 2 (start also permitted if read-in disable is active)
MD20116 $MC_IGNORE_INHIBIT_ASUP (execute interrupt program in spite of read-in dis‐
able)
MD20107 $MC_ PROG_EVENT_IGN_INHIBIT (prog events ignore read-in disable)
set response"
5.5.107 DB21, ... DBX37.7 (stop at block end is ignored during single block (SBL))
DB21, ... DBX37.7 Stop at block end is ignored during single block (SBL)
Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Stop at block end is ignored during single block (SBL).
Signal state 0 Stop at block end is not ignored during single block (SBL).

DB21, ... DBX37.7 Stop at block end is ignored during single block (SBL)
Additional information Stop at block end is ignored during single block (SBL), if the following applies:
DB21, ... DBX0.4 == 1 (single block) AND actual block has the status "single block inactive"
Stop at block end is not ignored during single block (SBL), if the following applies:
DB21, ... DBB0.4 == 0 (single block) OR
(DB21, ... DBB0.4 == 1 (single block) AND actual block has the status "single block active")
The following machine data and commands are used to specify that the stop at block end
during single block (DB21, ... DBX0.4) is to be ignored:
● MD10702 $MN_IGNORE_SINGLEBLOCK_MASK (prevent single-block stop)
● MD20117 $MC_IGNORE_SINGLEBLOCK_ASUP (execute interrupt program
completely in spite of single block)
● MD20106 $MC_PROG_EVENT_IGN_SINGLEBLOCK (prog events ignore single block)
● SBLOF (suppress single block), SBLON (neutral single block suppression)
Blocks for which stop at block end during single block is ignored are designated as "single
block inactive".
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX0.4 (single block)
DB21, ... DBX37.6 (read-in disable is ignored)
set response"
5.5.108 DB21, ... DBX38.0 (stroke initiation active)
DB21, ... DBX38.0 Stroke initiation active

Signal state 1 Stroke initiation is active.
Signal state 0 Stroke initiation is not active.
5.5.109 DB21, ... DBX38.1 (manual stroke initiation: Acknowledgment)
DB21, ... DBX38.1 Manual stroke initiation: Acknowledgment

Signal state 1 Manual stroke has been initiated.
Signal state 0 Manual stroke was not initiated.
DB21, ... DBX3.1 (manual stroke initiation)
DB21, ... DBX3.5 (manual stroke initiation 2)

5.5.110 DB21, ... DBX39.1 (NC alarm with program stop)
DB21, ... DBX39.1 NC alarm with program stop

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The interface signal indicates when the program progress is blocked by the presence of an
alarm.
This relates to all alarms generated by stop response:
● Stop on the path with deletion of the ready signal
● Axes are braked
● Immediate stop on the path
● Interpreter is stopped, IPO buffer is still being executed.
● No stop at end of block
Alarms with the following alarm response are also taken into account:
● NC start disable in this channel
● NC start disable in this channel, ASUB starts, where relevant, are permitted
For alarms with this response the interface signal is not set until an NC start has been trig‐
gered and only if the alarm has not yet been acknowledged. In this case, the interface sig‐
nal is not set until NC start.
The interface signals are set if the start of an ASUB is refused because of an NC start disa‐
ble in this channel.
The interface signal is deleted as soon as alarm responses that activated the signal are no
longer active. This depends on the delete conditions of the alarms.
Signal state 0 No NC alarm with program stop is present in the channel.
Corresponds with DB10 DBX109.0 (NC alarm present)
DB21, ... DBX36.6 (channel-specific NC alarm present)
DB21, ... DBX36.7 (NC alarm with machining stop present)
5.5.111 DB21, ... DBX39.5 (Contour handwheel: handwheel direction of rotation

inversion active)
DB21, ... DBX39.5 Contour handwheel: handwheel direction of rotation inversion active
Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Inversion of the direction of rotation of the contour handwheel is active.
Signal state 0 Inversion of the direction of rotation of the contour handwheel is not active.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX31.5 (contour handwheel: invert handwheel direction of rotation)

5.5.112 DB21, ... DBX40.0 - 2 (geometry axis 1: handwheel active)
DB21, ... DBX40.0 - 2 Geometry axis 1: handwheel active

Update Cyclic
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2
1 0 0 3
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2
0 1 1 3
1 0 0 4
1 0 1 5
1 1 0 6
Note
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX46.0 - 2 (geometry axis 2: handwheel active)
5.5.113 DB21, ... DBX40.4 - 5 (geometry axis 1: traversing request "Plus" / "Minus")
DB21, ... DBX40.4 - 5 Geometry axis 1: traversing request "Plus" / "Minus"

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 There is a traversing request available for the geometry axis.
Signal state 0 There is no traversing request available for the geometry axis.


Additional information Depending on the mode selected, the traversing request is initiated in different ways:
● JOG mode
"Plus" or "Minus" traversing key
● REF mode
Traversing key that initiates traversing motion in the direction of the reference point.
● AUTOMATIC or MDI mode
A program block with a traversing operation is executed for a geometry axis.
There is a signal for each axis direction:
Bit 4 Traversing request "Minus" (for traversing in the negative axis direction)
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX46.4 - 5 (geometry axis 2: traversing request "Plus" / "Minus")
DB21, ... DBX52.4 - 5 (geometry axis 3: traversing request "Plus" / "Minus")
DB21, ... DBX40.6 - 7 (geometry axis 1: traversing command "Plus" / "Minus")
5.5.114 DB21, ... DBX40.6 - 7 (geometry axis 1: traversing command "Plus" / "Minus")
DB21, ... DBX40.6 - 7 Geometry axis 1: traversing command "Plus" / "Minus"

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 There is a traversing request for the geometry axis or the geometry axis is traversing.
Signal state 0 There is not a traversing request for the geometry axis or the geometry axis is not travers‐
ing.
Additional information Depending on the setting of MD17900, bit 0, the traversing command is already output if a
"Traversing request" is active (bit 0 = 0) or only if the axis is actually traversing (bit 0 = 1).
Bit 6 Traversing command "Minus" (for traversing in the negative axis direction)
Bit 7 Traversing command "Plus" (for traversing in the positive axis direction)
Application example
Releasing the axis clamp when the traversing command is identified.
Note
For axes where clamping is not released until a drive command is detected, the continuous-
path mode (G64) is not possible.


Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX46.6 - 7 (geometry axis 2: traversing command "Plus" / "Minus")
MD17900 $MN_VDI_FUNCTION_MASK (setting for VDI signals)
5.5.115 DB21, ... DBX41.0 - 6 (geometry axis 1: active machine function)
DB21, ... DBX41.0 - 6 Geometry axis 1: active machine function

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The machine function to manually traverse the geometry axis is active.
Signal state 0 The machine function to manually traverse the geometry axis is notactive.
Additional information There is a signal for every machine function to manually traverse the geometry axis in the
JOG mode.
Bit 0 INC1
Bit 1 INC10
Bit 2 INC100
Bit 3 INC1000
Bit 4 INC10000
Bit 5 INCvar
Note
Depending on the machine function, the response when actuating the traversing key or the
handwheel differs.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX47.0 - 6 (geometry axis 2: active machine function)

5.5.116 DB21, ... DBX43.0 (geometry axis 1: handwheel direction of rotation inversion
active)
DB21, ... DBX43.0 Geometry axis 1: handwheel direction of rotation inversion active
Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Inversion of the direction of rotation of the handwheel assigned to the geometry axis is ac‐
tive.
Signal state 0 Inversion of the direction of rotation of the handwheel assigned to the geometry axis is not
active.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX49.0 (geometry axis 2: handwheel direction of rotation inversion active)

Additional information See DB21, ... DBX40.0 - 2 (geometry axis 1: handwheel active) (Page 1501).

Additional information See DB21, ... DBX40.4 - 5 (geometry axis 1: traversing request "Plus" / "Minus")
(Page 1501).
DB21, ... DBX46.6 - 7: Geometry axis 2: traversing command "Plus" / "Minus"

Additional information See DB21, ... DBX40.6 - 7 (geometry axis 1: traversing command "Plus" / "Minus")
(Page 1502).


Additional information See DB21, ... DBX41.0 - 6 (geometry axis 1: active machine function) (Page 1503).
active)
Additional references See DB21, ... DBX43.0 (geometry axis 1: handwheel direction of rotation inversion active)
(Page 1504).

Additional information See DB21, ... DBX40.0 - 2 (geometry axis 1: handwheel active) (Page 1501).

Additional information See DB21, ... DBX40.4 - 5 (geometry axis 1: traversing request "Plus" / "Minus")
(Page 1501).

Additional information See DB21, ... DBX40.6 - 7 (geometry axis 1: traversing command "Plus" / "Minus")
(Page 1502).

Additional information See DB21, ... DBX41.0 - 6 (geometry axis 1: active machine function) (Page 1503).

active)
Additional references See DB21, ... DBX43.0 (geometry axis 1: handwheel direction of rotation inversion active)
(Page 1504).
5.5.127 DB21, ... DBB58, DBB60 - 65 (M-, S-, T-, D-, H-, F fct. change)
DB21, ... DBB58, M, S, T, D, H, F fct. change

DB21, ... DBB60 - 65
Signal state 1 M, S, T, or F information was output to the interface with a new value together with the
associated change signal at the beginning of an OB1 cycle. In this case, the change signal
indicates that the appropriate value is valid.
Signal state 0 The change signals are reset by the PLC basic program at the start of the next OB1 cycle.
The value of the respective data is not valid.
Additional references Function Manual, Basic Functions; Chapter "H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC"
5.5.128 DB21, ... DBX59.0 - 4 (M fct. 1-5 not decoded)
DB21, ... DBX59.0 - 4 M fct. 1-5 not decoded

Signal state 1 M function is greater than 99 (for extended address = 0) or for extended address > 0, not
included in the decoding list.
This signal is available - together with the associated M change signal - for one OB1 cycle.
Cause:
● Incorrect M function programmed
● M function not configured in the decoding list of the PLC
Remedy e.g.:
● PLC sets read-in inhibit
● Output of a PLC alarm
Signal state 0 M function less than 99 (for extended address = 0) or for extended address > 0 included in
the decoding list.

5.5.129 DB21, ... DBB60 - 64, ... DBB66 - 67 (M-, S-, T-, D-, H-, F fct. Additional quick
information (quick acknowledgment)
DB21, ... DBB60 - 64, M, S, T, D, H, F fct. Additional quick information (fast acknowledgment)
DB21, ... DBB66 - 67
Signal state 1 M, S, T, D, H or F information has been output to the interface with a new value together
with the associated change signal at the beginning of an OB1 cycle.
In this case, the additional info "Quick" indicates the quick help function.
Signal state 0 The change signals are reset by the PLC basic program at the start of the next OB1 cycle.
The value of the respective data is not valid.
5.5.130 DB21, ... DBB68 - 97 (M function 1 - 5 and extended address M function 1 - 5 )
DB21, ... DBB68 - 97 M function 1 - 5 and extended address M function 1 - 5

Additional information If an M function change signal (DB21, ... DBB58) is present, then the up to five M functions
- that can be programmed in an NC block - together with the number of the M function and
the extended address are available here.
The M function values remain until they are overwritten by new M functions.
The M function values are deleted by the following events:
● The PLC powers up (boots).
● A new M function is entered.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX58.0 - 4 (changes signals: M function)
MD10715 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE
MD10716 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME
MD10718 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR
$C_M (system variable)
5.5.131 DB21, ... DBB98 - 115 (S function 1 - 3 and extended address S function 1 - 3 )
DB21, ... DBB98 - 115 S function 1 - 3 and extended address S function 1 - 3


DB21, ... DBB98 - 115 S function 1 - 3 and extended address S function 1 - 3

Additional information If an S function change signal (DB21, ... DBB60) is present, then the up to three S func‐
tions - that can be programmed in an NC block - together with the number of the S function
and the extended address are available here.
The S function values remain until they are overwritten by new S functions.
The S function values are deleted by the following events:
● A new S function is entered.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX60.0 - 2 (change signals: S function)
5.5.132 DB21, ... DBB118 (T function 1)
DB21, ... DBW118 or T function 1

DBD118
Additional information If a T function change signal (DB21, ... DBB61) is present, then number of the T functions,
programmed in the NC block, is made available here.
The T function values remain until they are overwritten by new T functions.
The T function values are deleted by the following events:
● A new T function is entered.
Corresponds with MD10717 $MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME (name of the tool change cycle for T function
replacement)
MD10719 $MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_MODE (parameterization of the T function replace‐
ment)
MD22220 $MC_AUXFU_T_SYNC_TYPE (output time of the T functions)
MD22550 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE (new tool compensation for M function)
$C_T... (system variable)
5.5.133 DB21, ... DBB129 (D function 1)
DB21, ... DBB129 D function 1


DB21, ... DBB129 D function 1

Additional information If a D function change signal (DB21, ... DBB62) is present, then the number of the D func‐
tions, programmed in the NC block, is made available.
The D function values remain until they are overwritten by new D functions.
The D function values are deleted by the following events:
● A new D function is entered.
Corresponds with MD22250 $MC_AUXFU_D_SYNC_TYPE (output time D functions)
MD22252 $MC_AUXFU_DL_SYNC_TYPE (output time DL functions)
5.5.134 DB21, ... DBB140 - 157 (H function 1 - 3 and extended address H function 1 -
3)
DB21, ... DBB140 - 157 H function 1 - 3 and extended address H function 1-3
Additional information If an H function change signal (DB21, ... DBB64) is present, then the up to three H func‐
tions - that can be programmed in an NC block - together with the number of the H function
and the extended address are available here.
The H function values remain until they are overwritten by new H functions.
The H function values are deleted by the following events:
● A new H function is entered.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX64.0 - 2 (change signals: H function)
MD22110 $MC_AUXFU_H_TYPE_INT (type of H-auxiliary function is an integer)
MD22230 $MC_AUXFU_H_SYNC_TYPE (output time of the H functions)
5.5.135 DB21, ... DBB158 - 193 (F function 1 - 6 and extended address F function 1 -
6)
DB21, ... DBB158 - 193 F function 1 - 6 and extended address F function 1 - 6


DB21, ... DBB158 - 193 F function 1 - 6 and extended address F function 1 - 6

Additional information If an F function change signal (DB21, ... DBB65) is present, then the up to six F functions -
that can be programmed in an NC block - together with the number of the F function and
the extended address are available here.
The extended address of the F function is generated from the feedrate type (path feed or
axis-specific feed) and the axis names.
● Path feedrate 0
● Axis-specific feedrate: Machine axis number of positioning axis 1, 2, 3, ... maximum
number of machine axes
The F function values remain until they are overwritten by new F functions.
The F function values are deleted by the following events:
● A new F function is entered.
Corresponds with MD22240 $MC_AUXFU_F_SYNC_TYPE (output time of F functions)
5.5.136 DB21, ... DBB194 - 206 (dynamic M functions: M0 - M99)
DB21, ... DBX194.0 - 7 - Dynamic M functions M0 - M99

DBX206.0 - 3
Signal state 1 The associated M function was has been decoded.
Signal state 0 The associated M function has not been decoded or the interface signal has been reset
from the PLC basic program as acknowledgment.
For a general auxiliary function output, the interface signal is reset by the PLC basic pro‐
gram after OB1 has been completely executed.
For a fast auxiliary function output, the interface signal is reset by the PLC basic program
in the same OB40 cycle.
5.5.137 DB21, ... DBB208 - 271 (active G command of group 1 to 60)
DB21, ... DBB208 - 271 Active G command of group 1 to 60

Update Cyclic

DB21, ... DBB208 - 271 Active G command of group 1 to 60

Additional information The G command displayed in the BCD format or its mnemonic identifier is active in the
specified G group.
DBB Meaning
208 G group 1: Internal number of the active G command
... ...
Application example
G group 14 ≙ DBB208 + 14 - 1 = DBB221,
Active G commands: DBB221 == 1 ≙ internal number for G commandG90
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Value 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
DBB221 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Special case
For a value of 0, no G command or mnemonic identifier of the G group is active.
Note
In contrast to auxiliary functions, G commands are not output to the PLC subject to ac‐
knowledgment, i.e. processing of the part program is continued immediately after the G
command output.
set response"
A complete list of the G groups, G commands and their internal numbers can be found in:
Programming Manual, Fundamentals; Chapter "Tables" > "G commands"
5.5.138 DB21, ... DBX272.0 - 273.1 (machine-related protection zone 1 - 10

preactivated)
DB21, ... DBX272.0 - 273.1 Machine-related protection zone 1 - 10 preactivated

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The machine-related protection zone 1 (...10) is preactivated.
Preactivation is realized in the NC program using command NPROT.
Signal state 0 The machine-related protection zone 1 (...10) is not preactivated.
Only a preactivated machine-related protection zone can be activated or deactivated using
the corresponding interface signal:

DB21, ... DBX272.0 - 273.1 Machine-related protection zone 1 - 10 preactivated

5.5.139 DB21, ... DBX274.0 – 275.1 (channel-specific protection zone 1 - 10

preactivated)
DB21, ... DBX274.0 - 275.1 Channel-related protection zone 1 - 10 preactivated

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The channel-specific protection zone 1 (...10) is preactivated.
Preactivation is realized in the NC program using command NPROT.
Signal state 0 The channel-specific protection zone 1 (...10) is not preactivated.
Only a preactivated channel-specific protection zone can be activated or deactivated using
the corresponding interface signal:
5.5.140 DB21, ... DBX276.0 - 277.1 (machine-related protection zone 1 - 10 violated)
DB21, ... DBX276.0 - 277.1 Machine-related protection zone 1 - 10 violated

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The activated, machine-related protection zone 1 - 10 wasviolated in the current block or in
the current JOG traversing motion.
The preactivated, machine-related protection zone 1 - 10 would be violated in the current
block if it would be active.

DB21, ... DBX276.0 - 277.1 Machine-related protection zone 1 - 10 violated

Signal state 0 The activated, machine-related protection zone 1 - 10 was not violated in the current block
or in the current JOG traversing motion.
The preactivated, machine-related protection zone 1 - 10 would not be violated in the cur‐
rent block if it would be active.
5.5.141 DB21, ... DBX278.0 – 279.1 (channel-specific protection zone 1 - 10 violated)
DB21, ... DBX278.0 - 279.1 Channel-specific protection zone 1 - 10 violated

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The activated, channel-specific protection zone 1 - 10 wasviolated in the current block or in
the current JOG traversing motion.
The preactivated, channel-specific protection zone 1 - 10 would be violated in the current
block if it would be active.
Signal state 0 The activated, channel-specific protection zone 1 - 10 was not violated in the current block
or in the current JOG traversing motion.
The preactivated, channel-specific protection zone 1 - 10 would not be violated in the cur‐
rent block if it would be active.
5.5.142 DB21, ... DBB317.1 (workpiece setpoint reached)
DB21, ... DBX317.1 Target number of workpieces reached

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The number of machined workpieces (actual workpiece total) is equal to the number of
workpieces to be machined (target [required] number of workpieces):
$AC_ACTUAL_PARTS == $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS

DB21, ... DBX317.1 Target number of workpieces reached

Signal state 0 The number of machined workpieces (actual workpiece total) is not equal to the number of
workpieces to be machined (target [required] number of workpieces):
$AC_ACTUAL_PARTS <> $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS
Corresponds with MD27880 $MC_PART_COUNTER (activation of workpiece counters)
Additional references Function Manual, Fundamentals, Section "K1: Mode group, channel, program mode, reset
response" > "Program runtime / workpiece counter" > "Workpiece counter"
5.5.143 DB21, ... DBX317.6 (PTP traversing active)
DB21, ... DBX317.6 PTP traversing active

Edge change 0 → 1 PTP (Point-To-Point) traversing is active.
Edge change 1 → 0 CP (Continuous Path) traversing is active.
DB21, ... DBX317.6 is only relevant in the JOG mode when the transformation is active.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX29.4 (activate PTP travel)
Additional references Function Manual, Extended Functions; Chapter "M1: Kinematic transformation"
5.5.144 DB21, ... DBX317.7 (TOOLMAN: Tool missing)
DB21, ... DBX317.7 TOOLMAN: Tool missing

Signal state 1 The programmed tool is missing.
Signal state 0 Irrelevant.
Additional information A tool is either missing or cannot be used.
5.5.145 DB21, ... DBX318.0 (ASUB is stopped)
DB21, ... DBX318.0 ASUB is stopped

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The ASUB is in the "stopped" state.
Note
The ASUB was stopped by the control system before it was completely executed.

DB21, ... DBX318.0 ASUB is stopped

Signal state 0 The ASUB is not in the "stopped" state.
Note
For the following events, the signal is always set to 0:
● NC start
● Channel reset
Additional information The interface signal is only processed in the following states:
● AUTOMATIC or MDI mode:
● Channel state "interrupted"
● Program state"stopped"
Additional references Basic Functions Function Manual; Chapter "K1: Mode group, program mode, reset re‐
sponse" > "Asynchronous subprogram (ASUBs)" > "Function" > "ASUB with REPOSA"
5.5.146 DB21, ... DBX318.1 (block search via program test is active (SERUPRO))
DB21, ... DBX318.1 Block search via program test is active (SERUPRO)
Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Block search via program test is active
During processing of the blocks as part of the block search (internal channel state: "Pro‐
gram test"), the interface signal is set up until the target block is changed to in the main run
(program state: "stopped") .
Signal state 0 Block search via program test is not active
When the target block is changed to in the main run (internal channel state "Program test"
is deselected; stop condition: "Search target found" is displayed), the interface signal is re‐
set.
Additional information The block search (SERUPRO) can only be activated in AUTOMATIC mode in program
state "Aborted".
set response"
5.5.147 DB21, ... DBX318.2 (online tool length compensation (TOFF) active)
DB21, ... DBX318.2 Online tool length compensation (TOFF) active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Online tool length compensation (TOFF) is active.
Signal state 0 Online tool length compensation (TOFF) is not active.

DB21, ... DBX318.2 Online tool length compensation (TOFF) active

Additional information Using the online tool length correction, effective tool lengths can be changed in real time
so that the length changes are also considered for changes in orientation of the tool.
Application areas:
● Orientation transformations (TRAORI)
● Orientable toolholder (TCARR)
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX318.3 (online tool length compensation (TOFF): Compensation motion active)
Additional references Function Manual, Special Functions; Chapter "F2: Multi-axis transformations"
5.5.148 DB21, ... DBX318.3 (online tool length compensation (TOFF): Compensation
motion active)
DB21, ... DBX318.3 Online tool length compensation (TOFF): Compensation motion active
Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Compensation motion active.
Signal state 0 Compensation motion is not active.
Additional information If, for active online tool length compensation (DB21, ... DBX318.2 == 1), compensation mo‐
tion is active, then the interface signal is set to "1":
DB21, ... DBX318.3 == 1
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX318.2 (online tool length compensation (TOFF) active)
Additional references Function Manual, Special Functions; Chapter "F2: Multi-axis transformations"
5.5.149 DB21, ... DBX318.5 (associated M0 / M1 active)
DB21, ... DBX318.5 Associated auxiliary function is active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 "Associated auxiliary function" is active.
Signal state 0 Associated auxiliary function is not active.

DB21, ... DBX318.5 Associated auxiliary function is active

Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX24.4 (associated auxiliary function selected)
DB21, ... DBX30.5 (activate associated auxiliary function)
5.5.150 DB21, ... DBX319.0 (REPOS mode change acknowledgment)
DB21, ... DBX319.0 REPOS mode change acknowledgment

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The acknowledgment of the REPOS mode change is available.
The interface signal DB21, ... DBX31.4 (REPOS mode change) identified by the NC is ac‐
knowledged if the requested REPOS mode DB21, ... DBX31.0-2 and delay signal DB31, ...
DBX10.0 were accepted in the NC.
The signal states refer to the actual main run block
Signal state 0 The acknowledgment of the REPOS mode change is not available.
The SERUPRO-ASUB stops automatically before REPOS and DB21, ... DBX31.4 (REPOS
mode change) does not affect the SERUPRO approach.
set response"
5.5.151 DB21, ... DBX319.1 - 3 (active REPOS mode)
DB21, ... DBX319.1 - 3 Active REPOS mode

Update Cyclic

DB21, ... DBX319.1 - 3 Active REPOS mode

Additional information Active REPOS mode:
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Active REPOS approach mode
0 0 0 No REPOS approach mode active
0 0 1 Reposition to start of block RMBBL
0 1 0 Reposition to interrupt point RMIBL
0 1 1 Reposition to end of block RMEBL
1 0 0 Reposition to nearest path point RMNBL
set response" > "Block search type 5 (SERUPRO)" > "Repositioning to the contour (RE‐
POS)"
5.5.152 DB21, ... DBX319.5 (REPOS delay)
DB21, ...DBX319.5 REPOS delay

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 A REPOS delay is active.
Signal state 0 A REPOS delay is not active.
Additional information All axes currently controlled by this channel have either no REPOS offset or their REPOS
offsets are not traversed through.

DB21, ...DBX319.5 REPOS delay

set response"
5.5.153 DB21, ... DBX320.0 - 2 (orientation axis 1: activate handwheel)
DB21, ... DBX320.0 - 2 Orientation axis 1: Activate handwheel

Update Cyclic
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2
1 0 0 3
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2
0 1 1 3
1 0 0 4
1 0 1 5
1 1 0 6
Note


Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX324.0 - 2 (orientation axis 2: activate handwheel)
DB21, ... DBX328.0 - 2 (orientation axis 3: activate handwheel)
DB21, ... DBX332.0 - 2 (orientation axis 1: handwheel active)
5.5.154 DB21, ... DBX320.4 (orientation axis 1: traversing key lock)
DB21, ... DBX320.4 Orientation axis 1: Traversing key lock

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The traversing key lock for the orientation axis is active.
Signal state 0 The traversing key lock for the orientation axis is not active.
When the traversing key disable is activated while traversing, then traversing is canceled.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX324.4 (orientation axis 2: traversing key lock)
DB21, ... DBX328.4 (orientation axis 3: traversing key lock)
DB21, ... DBX320.6 - 7 (orientation axis 1: traversing keys "Plus" / "Minus")
5.5.155 DB21, ... DBX320.5 (orientation axis 1: rapid traverse override)
DB21, ... DBX320.5 Orientation axis 1: Rapid traverse override

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 When manually traversing the orientation axis using the traversing keys, when the inter‐
face signal is set, rapid traverse velocity becomes active (MD32010).
Signal state 0 When manually traversing the orientation axis using the traversing keys, the entered JOG


Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX324.5 (orientation axis 2: rapid traverse override)
DB21, ... DBX328.5 (orientation axis 3: rapid traverse override)
Additional references Function Manual, Basic Functions; Chapter "V1: Feedrates"
5.5.156 DB21, ... DBX320.6 - 7 (Orientierungsachse 1: traversing keys "Plus" / "Minus")
DB21, ... DBX320.6 - 7 Orientation axis 1: traversing keys "Plus" / "Minus"

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 A request has been made to traverse the orientation axis using the traversing key in the
positive/negative axis direction.
Signal state 0 A request has not been made to traverse the orientation axis using the traversing key in
the positive/negative axis direction.


Depending on the active machine function, as well as the settings for jog and continuous
operation (SD41050 and MD11300), different responses are initiated when the signal
changes:
The orientation axis traverses in the direction concerned to the active limit switch as
long as the interface signal is set to 1.
At the first edge change 0 →1, the orientation axis starts to traverse in the appropriate
direction. This traversing movement still continues when the edge changes from 1 → 0.
Any new signal edge change 0 → 1 (same traversing direction!) stops the traversing
movement.
With signal 1 the orientation axis starts to traverse the set increment. If the signal
changes to the 0 state before the increment is traversed, then traversing is interrupted.
When the signal state changes to 1 again, traversing is continued. The orientation axis
can be stopped and started several times as described above until it has traversed the
complete increment.
At the first edge change 0 → 1 the orientation axis starts to traverse the set increment.
If another edge change 0 → 1 is performed with the same traverse signal before the
orientation axis has traversed the increment, the traversing movement will be
cancelled. The increment is no longer traversed to the end.
Note
– AUTOMATIC
– MDI
● If both traversing signals ("plus" and "minus") are set at the same time there is no
traversing or the current traversing is aborted.
● In contrast to machine axes, for orientation axes, only one orientation axis can be
traversed at any one time using the traversing keys.
● Using DB21, ... DBX320.4, 324.4, 328.4 (orientation axis 1, 2, 3: Traversing key lock)
traversing using traversing keys can be locked.
● In the following cases, the orientation axis cannot be traversed in the JOG operating
mode:
– The orientation axis is already being traversed via the axis-specific interface as
machine axis.
– If another orientation axis is already being traversed with the traversing keys.


Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX324.6 - 7 (orientation axis 2: traversing keys "Plus" / "Minus")
DB31, ... DBX4.6 - 7 (traversing keys "Plus" / "Minus")
SD41050 $SN_JOG_CONT_MODE_LEVELTRIGGRD (jog/continuous operation for JOG,
continuous)
5.5.157 DB21, ... DBX321.0 - 6 (orientation axis 1: machine function request)
DB21, ... DBX321.0 - 6 Orientation axis 1: machine function request

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 A request has been made to manually traverse the orientation axis.
Signal state 0 A request has not been made to manually traverse the orientation axis.
Additional information There is a request signal for every machine function to manually traverse the orientation
axis in the JOG mode.
Bit 0 INC1
Bit 1 INC10
Bit 2 INC100
Bit 3 INC1000
Bit 4 INC10000
Bit 5 INCvar
wheel, the orientation axis starts to traverse in the appropriate direction, corresponding to
the number of increments of the active machine function.
orientation axis continuously and the appropriate direction.
Notes
● If an orientation axis is currently being traversed via a machine function, the movement
is aborted through deselection or change of the machine function.


Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX325.0 - 6 (orientation axis 2: machine function request)
DB21, ... DBX329.0 - 6 (orientation axis 3: machine function request)
DB21, ... DBX333.0 - 6 (orientation axis 1: active machine function)
5.5.158 DB21, … DBX323.0 (orientation axis 1: invert handwheel direction of rotation)
DB21, ... DBX323.0 Orientation axis 1: invert handwheel direction of rotation

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 A request has been made to invert the direction of rotation of the assigned handwheel.
Signal state 0 A request has not been made to invert the direction of rotation of the assigned handwheel.
It is only permissible to change the interface signal when the orientation axis is at a stand‐
still.
● The handwheel direction of rotation should match the axis direction of motion.
Corresponds with DB21, … DBX327.0 (orientation axis 2: invert handwheel direction of rotation)
DB21, … DBX331.0 (orientation axis 3: invert handwheel direction of rotation)
DB21, ... DBX335.0 (orientation axis 1: handwheel direction of rotation inversion active)

Additional information See DB21, ... DBX320.0 - 2 (orientation axis 1: activate handwheel) (Page 1519).


Additional information See DB21, ... DBX320.4 (orientation axis 1: traversing key lock) (Page 1520).

Additional information See DB21, ... DBX320.5 (orientation axis 1: rapid traverse override) (Page 1520).
5.5.162 DB21, ... DBX324.6 - 7 (orientation axis 2: traversing keys "Plus" / "Minus")

Additional information See DB21, ... DBX320.6 - 7 (Orientierungsachse 1: traversing keys "Plus" / "Mi‐
nus") (Page 1521).

Additional information See DB21, ... DBX321.0 - 6 (orientation axis 1: machine function request) (Page 1523).

Additional information See DB21, … DBX323.0 (orientation axis 1: invert handwheel direction of rotation)
(Page 1524).

Additional information See DB21, ... DBX320.0 - 2 (orientation axis 1: activate handwheel) (Page 1519).


Additional information See DB21, ... DBX320.4 (orientation axis 1: traversing key lock) (Page 1520).

Additional information See DB21, ... DBX320.5 (orientation axis 1: rapid traverse override) (Page 1520).
5.5.168 DB21, ... DBX328.6 - 7 (orientation axis 3: traversing keys "Plus" / "Minus")

Additional information See DB21, ... DBX320.6 - 7 (Orientierungsachse 1: traversing keys "Plus" / "Minus")
(Page 1521).

Additional information See DB21, ... DBX321.0 - 6 (orientation axis 1: machine function request) (Page 1523).

Additional information See DB21, … DBX323.0 (orientation axis 1: invert handwheel direction of rotation)
(Page 1524).
5.5.171 DB21, ... DBX332.0 - 2 (orientation axis 1: handwheel active)
DB21, ... DBX332.0 - 2 Orientation axis 1: handwheel active

Update Cyclic


0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2
1 0 0 3
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2
0 1 1 3
1 0 0 4
1 0 1 5
1 1 0 6
Note
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX336.0 - 2 (orientation axis 2: handwheel active)
5.5.172 DB21, ... DBX332.4 - 5 (orientation axis 1: traversing request "Plus" / "Minus")
DB21, ... DBX332.4 - 5 Orientation axis 1: traversing request "Plus" / "Minus"

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 There is a traversing request available for the orientation axis.
Signal state 0 There is no traversing request available for the orientation axis.


Additional information The traversing request is initiated in different ways depending on the operating mode:
● JOG mode
● REF mode
A program block with a traversing operation is executed for an orientation axis.
Bit 4 Traversing request "Minus" (for traversing in the negative axis direction)
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX336.4 - 5 (orientation axis 2: traversing request "Plus" / "Minus")
DB21, ... DBX340.4 - 5 (orientation axis 3: traversing request "Plus" / "Minus")
DB21, ... DBX332.6 - 7 (orientation axis 1: traversing command "Plus" / "Minus")
5.5.173 DB21, ... DBX332.6 - 7 (orientation axis 1: traversing command "Plus" / "Minus"
DB21, ... DBX332.6 - 7 Orientation axis 1: traversing command "Plus" / "Minus"

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 There is a traversing request for the orientation axis or the orientation axis is traversing.
Signal state 0 There is no traversing request for the orientation axis or the orientation axis is not travers‐
ing.
Additional information Depending on the setting of MD17900, bit 0, the traversing command is already output if a
"Traversing request" is active (bit 0 = 0) or only if the axis is actually traversing (bit 0 = 1).
Bit 6 Traversing command "Minus" (for traversing in the negative axis direction)
Bit 7 Traversing command "Plus" (for traversing in the positive axis direction)
Application example
Note


Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX336.6 - 7 (orientation axis 2: traversing command "Plus" / "Minus")
5.5.174 DB21, ... DBX333.0 - 6 (orientation axis 1: active machine function)
DB21, ... DBX333.0 - 6 Orientation axis 1: active machine function

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The machine function to manually traverse the orientation axis is active.
Signal state 0 The machine function to manually traverse the orientation axis is not active.
Additional information There is a signal for every machine function to manually traverse the orientation axis in the
JOG mode.
Bit 0 INC1
Bit 1 INC10
Bit 2 INC100
Bit 3 INC1000
Bit 4 INC10000
Bit 5 INCvar
Note
handwheel differs.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX337.0 - 6 (orientation axis 2: active machine function)


Additional information See DB21, ... DBX332.0 - 2 (orientation axis 1: handwheel active) (Page 1526).

Additional information See DB21, ... DBX332.4 - 5 (orientation axis 1: traversing request "Plus" / "Minus")
(Page 1527).

Additional information See DB21, ... DBX332.6 - 7 (orientation axis 1: traversing command "Plus" / "Minus"
(Page 1528).

Additional information See DB21, ... DBX333.0 - 6 (orientation axis 1: active machine function) (Page 1529).
DB21, ... DBX340.0 - 2: Orientation axis 3: handwheel active

Additional information See DB21, ... DBX332.0 - 2 (orientation axis 1: handwheel active) (Page 1526).
DB21, ... DBX340.4 - 5: Orientation axis 3: traversing request "Plus" / "Minus"

Additional information See DB21, ... DBX332.4 - 5 (orientation axis 1: traversing request "Plus" / "Minus")
(Page 1527).


Additional information See DB21, ... DBX332.6 - 7 (orientation axis 1: traversing command "Plus" / "Minus"
(Page 1528).

Additional information See DB21, ... DBX333.0 - 6 (orientation axis 1: active machine function) (Page 1529).
5.5.183 DB21, ... DBX344.0 (TM: tool prewarning limit reached)
DB21, ... DBX344.0 TOOLMAN: Tool prewarning limit reached

Signal state 1 The tool prewarning limit has been reached.
Additional information The T number of the tool, whose prewarning value has been reached, is located in:
DBD348
The change signal is active for one OB 1 cycle.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX344.1 tool management change signal: T number for tool limit value
DB21, ... DBX344.2 tool management change signal: T number for the new replacement
tool
DB21, ... DBX344.3 tool management change signal: T number of the last replacement tool
DBD348 (T number for tool prewarning limit)
Additional references Function Manual, Tool Management
5.5.184 DB21, ... DBX344.1 (TM: Tool limit value reached)
DB21, ... DBX344.1 TOOLMAN: Tool limit value reached

Signal state 1 The tool limit value has been reached
Additional information The T number of the tool, whose limit value has been reached, is located in: DBD352

DB21, ... DBX344.1 TOOLMAN: Tool limit value reached

Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX344.0 tool management change signal: T number for tool pre-alarm limit
tool
DBD352 (T number for tool limit value)
5.5.185 DB21, ... DBX344.2 (TM: Transition to new replacement tool)
DB21, ... DBX344.2 TOOLMAN: Transition to new replacement tool

Signal state 1 A transition is made to a new replacement tool.
Additional information The T number for the new replacement tool is located in: DBD356
DB21, ... DBX344.1 tool management change signal: T number for tool limit value
DBD356 (T number of the replacement tool)
5.5.186 DB21, ... DBX344.3 (TM: Last replacement tool of the tool group)
DB21, ... DBX344.3 TOOLMAN: Last replacement tool of the tool group
Signal state 1 The last replacement tool of the tool group has been reached
Additional information The T number of the last replacement tool of the tool group is located in: DBD360
Note
The monitoring for the last replacement tool must be activated in
MD20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 18.
DB21, ... DBX344.1 tool management change signal: T number for tool limit value
tool
DB21, ... DBD360 (T-number of the last replacement tool)

5.5.187 DB21, ... DBB376 (PROG_EVENT trigger event)
DB21, ...DBB376 PROG_EVENT trigger event

Update Cyclic
Additional information The event that initiated the PROG_EVENT is displayed bit-coded.
Bit Value Event
0 1 NC start from channel state "reset"
1 1 End of program reset (e.g. M30)
2 1 Channel reset
3 1 Warm restart (power on)
4 1 1. NC start after search
5 1 Safety
6-7 --- Reserved, currently always 0
Note
As a minimum, the interface signal must remain for a complete PLC cycle.
set response"
5.5.188 DB21, ... DBX377.0 (collision avoidance: stop)
DB21, ... DBX377.0 Collision avoidance: Stop

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The collision avoidance has triggered a stop of the traversing motion in the channel.
Signal state 0 The collision avoidance has not triggered a stop of the traversing motions in the channel.
Additional references Function Manual, Special Functions; Chapter "K9: Collision avoidance"
5.5.189 DB21, ... DBX377.4 (JOG retract active)
DB21, ... DBX377.4 JOG retract active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 JOG retract has been selected and is active.
Signal state 0 JOG retract has not been selected.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX377.5 (JOG retract retraction data available)

5.5.190 DB21, ... DBX377.5 (JOG retract retraction data available)
DB21, ... DBX377.5 JOG retract retraction data available

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Retraction data is available for traversing in the tool direction.
Signal state 0 Retraction data is not available for traversing in the tool direction. JOG retract cannot be
selected
Additional information If the signal state is active, then the JOG retract can be selected (user interface or PI serv‐
ice "RETRAC").
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX377.4 (JOG retract active)
5.5.191 DB21, ... DBX377.6 (JOG circular travel active)
DB21, ... DBX377.6 JOG circular travel active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The "Circular travel in JOG" function is active.
Signal state 0 The "Circular travel in JOG" function isnot active.
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX30.6 (JOG circular travel)
5.5.192 DB21, … DBX378.0 (ASUB active)
DB21, ... DBX378.0 ASUB is active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 An ASUB is active.
Signal state 0 No ASUB is active.
Also outside block FC9, feedback about a running ASUB is realized using the interface sig‐
nal.
sponse" > "Asynchronous subprograms (ASUBs)"

5.5.193 DB21, … DBX378.1 (stopped ASUB active)
DB21, ... DBX378.1 "Silent" ASUB is active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 A "silent" ASUB is active.
Signal state 0 No "silent" ASUB is active.
Additional information A "silent" ASUB is an ASUB where blocks are not displayed on the screen as this has
been suppressed with DISPLOF.
sponse" > "Asynchronous subprograms (ASUBs)"
5.5.194 DB21, ... DBX384.0 (enable GOTOS)
DB21, ... DBX384.0 Enable GOTOS

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 A request has been made to enable GOTOS (return jump to the program start) in the chan‐
nel.
Signal state 0 A request has not been made to enable GOTOS (return jump to the program start) in the
channel.
NC program execution is continued with the next command following GOTOS.
Corresponds with MD27850 $MC_PROG_NET_TIMER_MODE (impact of the program runtime net counter)
MD27860 $MC_PROCESSTIMER_MODE (activation of the program runtime measure‐
ment)
MD27880 $MC_PART_COUNTER (activation of the workpiece counters)
set response" > "Program mode" > "Program jumps" > "Return jump to the beginning of
the program"
5.5.195 DB21, ... DBB392 (selection: Coordinate system for Cartesian manual
traversing and handwheel override in automatic mode in the tool direction
(DRF))
DB21, ... DBB392 Selection: Coordinate system for Cartesian manual traversing and handwheel override in
automatic mode in the tool direction (DRF)
Update Cyclic

5.6 DB31, ...: Axis/spindle
DB21, ... DBB392 Selection: Coordinate system for Cartesian manual traversing and handwheel override in
automatic mode in the tool direction (DRF)
Additional information Selection of the coordinate system for:
● Cartesian manual traversing of the geometry axes in the tool direction (TCS)
● Handwheel override of the geometry axes in the AUTOMATIC mode in the tool
direction (DRF)
Value Description
0 The function is not selected
1 Manual traversing of the geometry axes in the basic coordinate system
(BCS)
2 Manual traversing of the geometry axes in the workpiece coordinate sys‐
tem (WCS)
3 Manual traversing or handwheel override (DRF) of the geometry axes in
the workpiece coordinate system (WCS)
Additional references ● Function Manual, Basic Functions, Section:
– "K2: Axes, coordinate systems, frames" > "Coordinate systems" > "Additive offsets"
> "DRF offset"
– "P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl" > Block descriptions" > "FC19:
LBP_MCPCtrlMilling - Transmission of the MCP signals to the interface"
● Function Manual Extended Functions; Chapter:
– "M1: Kinematic transformation" > "Cartesian manual travel"
– "F2: Multi-axis transformations" > "Cartesian manual travel"
– "H1: Manual and handwheel traversing" > "Using a handwheel in the automatic
mode" > "DRF offset"
5.6.1 DB31, ... DBB0 (feedrate override, axis-specific)
DB31, ... DBB0 Feedrate override, axis-specific

Update Cyclic


MD12000 $MN_OVR_AX_IS_GRAY_CODE = <Coding>
Binary coding
0000 0000 0 0.00
0000 0001 1 0.01
0000 0010 2 0.02
0000 0011 3 0.03
000 0100 4 0.04
... ... ...
0110 0100 100 1.00
... ... ...
1100 1000 200 2.00
Gray coding
machine data:
MD12010 $MN_OVR_FACTOR_AX_SPEED[ <Switch position> - 1 ] = <Override factor>
1 00001 0.00
2 00011 0.01
3 00010 0.02
4 00110 0.04
5 00111 0.06
6 00101 0.08
7 00100 0.10
8 01100 0.20
9 01101 0.30
10 01111 0.40
11 01110 0.50
12 01010 0.60
13 01011 0.70
14 01001 0.75
15 01000 0.80
16 11000 0.85
17 11001 0.90
18 11011 0.95
19 11010 1.00
20 11110 1.05
21 11111 1.10
22 11101 1.15


23 11100 1.20
24 10100 1.20
25 10101 1.20
26 10111 1.20
27 10110 1.20
28 10010 1.20
29 10011 1.20
30 10001 1.20
31 10000 1.20
Limitations
Notes
The axis-specific feedrate override is not effective with the following functions when cutting
threads: G33, G331, G332, G63
Corresponds to DB21, ... DBB4 (path feedrate override)
DB31, ... DBB19 (speed override, spindle-specific)
DB31, ... DBX1.7 (override active)
1) Default values
5.6.2 DB31, ... DBX1.0 (drive test travel enable)
DB31, ... DBX1.0 Drive test travel enable

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The travel enable for the drive test is set, i.e. axis motion for the drive test is enabled.
Signal state 0 The travel enable for the drive test is notset, i.e. axis motion for the drive test is inhibited.
Further information The signal is the feedback signal for the request:
DB31, ... DBX61.0 == 1 (drive test travel request)
Only the PLC can enable an axis so that it can be traversed.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX61.0 (drive test travel request)
Additional references Commissioning Manual IBN CNC: NC, PLC, Drive

5.6.3 DB31, ... DBX1.1 (acknowledge fixed stop reached).
DB31, ... DBX1.1 Acknowledge fixed stop reached

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Significance when the fixed stop is reached: DB31, ... DBX62.5 (fixed stop reached) == 1
● The axis presses against the fixed stop with the clamping torque.
● The fixed stop monitoring window is activated.
● A block change is executed.
Signal state 0 Significance when the fixed stop is reached: DB31, ... DBX62.5 (fixed stop reached) == 1
● The axis presses against the fixed stop with the clamping torque.
● The fixed stop monitoring window is activate
● A block change is not executed, and the channel message "Wait: HiFu
acknowledgment missing" is displayed
● The function is canceled, alarm "20094 axis %1 Function aborted" is output.
Significance after deselecting the function FXS=0 via the part program:
● The torque limiting and the monitoring of the fixed stop monitoring window are
canceled.
Additional information Irrelevant for MD37060 $MA_FIXED_STOP_ACKN_MASK == 0 or 2
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX1.2 (fixed stop sensor)
DB31, ... DBX3.1 (enable travel to fixed stop)
DB31, ... DBX62.4 (activate travel to fixed stop)
DB31, ... DBX62.5 (fixed stop reached)
MD37060 $MA_FIXED_STOP_ACKN_MASK (monitoring PLC acknowledgements for trav‐
el to fixed stop)
Additional references Function Manual, Basic Functions; Chapter "F1: Travel to fixed stop"
5.6.4 DB31, ... DBX1.2 (fixed stop sensor)
DB31, ... DBX1.2 Sensor for fixed stop

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Fixed stop has been reached.
Signal state 0 Fixed stop has not been reached.
Additional information The signal is only active if: MD37040 $MA_FIXED_STOP_BY_SENSOR == 1
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX1.1 (acknowledge fixed stop reached).
MD37040 $MA_FIXED_STOP_BY_SENSOR = (fixed stop detection via sensor)

5.6.5 DB31, ... DBX1.3 (axis/spindle disable)
DB31, ... DBX1.3 Axis/spindle disable

Update Cyclic


Signal state 1 Axis/spindle disable is requested.
Axis
● Effects with stationary axis:
– No setpoints are output to the position controller, i.e. the axis traversing movement
is disabled. The axis is in closed-loop position control and any remaining following
error is compensated.
– If the axis is traversed via an NC program or manually, the set position and set
velocity are displayed as the actual position and actual velocity on the user
interface. With channel reset or end of program (M30/M2), the display of the actual
value is set to the actual value of the machine axis.
– The travel commands are output to the NC/PLC interface.
● Effects with traversing axis:
– The axis is stopped in compliance with the currently active braking characteristic
and an alarm is displayed. Subsequently, the travel movements of the axis are
disabled. Position control remains active and holds the axis in the current position.
Spindle
● Effects with open-loop control mode and stationary spindle:
– No setpoints are output to the speed controller, i.e. the spindle traversing
movement is disabled.
– If the spindle is traversed via an NC program or manually, the speed setpoint is
displayed on the user interface as the speed actual value.
● Effects with open-loop control mode and rotating spindle:
– Speed setpoint zero is immediately output to the speed controller.
– The spindle is stopped in compliance with the currently active braking characteristic
and an alarm is displayed. Subsequently, the travel movements of the spindle are
disabled. Position control remains active and holds the axis in the current position.
● Effects with positioning mode: See Stationary axis / Traversing axis
Structure graphic
'%'%;
$[LVVSLQGOHGLVDEOH
3RVLWLRQ 3RVLWLRQ
VHWSRLQW
FRQWUROOHU

3RVLWLRQDFWXDOYDOXH
Axis/spindle disable
Note
● If one of the following interface signals is set for a traversing axis/spindle for which the
signal "Axis/spindle disable" is present, the axis/spindle is not stopped:
– DB21, ... DBX12.3, 16.3 or 20.3 (feedrate stop for geometry axes 1, 2 and 3)
– DB21, ... DBX320.3, 324.3 or 328.3 (feedrate stop for orientation axes 1, 2 and 3)


– DB31, ... DBX4.3 (feedrate stop / spindle stop)
● The axis/spindle can still be switched to the "hold" or "follow up" state with DB31, ...
DBX1.4 (follow-up mode).
● An axis cannot be referenced either channel-specifically via DB21, ... DBX1.0 from the
NC program (G74) or axis-specifically (REF machine function).
● If the signal "Axis/spindle disable" is set only briefly for a traversing axis, the axis is
stopped without an alarm. With the next travel request, the axis is traversed to the new
position.
Example:
N10 G0 X0 Y0
N20 G1 F1000 X100
N30 Y100
N40 X200
Regarding N20: At position 20 mm, "Axis/spindle lock" is set briefly for axis X ⇒ axis X
is stopped
Regarding N40: Axis X traverses from the last position (approx. 20 mm + braking
distance) to position 200 mm.
● Effects of "Axis/spindle disable" for spindle or axis couplings:
DB31, ... . DB31, ... Coupl. 3) Effect
DBX99.0 DBX99.1
1) 2)
0 0 Off Setpoints are output

0 1 Off No setpoint output for following spindle/axis
1 0 Off No setpoint output for leading spindle/axis
1 1 Off No setpoint output for leading and following spindle/
axis
0 0 On Setpoints are output
0 1 On Axis/spindle disable has no effect on the FS / FA
1 0 On Axis/spindle disable also has an effect on the FS / FA
1 1 On No setpoint output
1) Leading spindle/axis active
2) Following spindle/axis active
3) Status of the coupling between leading and following spindle/axis
Signal state 0 There is no request for "axis / spindle disable".
Note
The reset of the signal does not take effect until the axis/spindle is stationary.
● Axis
Setpoints are output to the position controller again immediately after the signal has
been reset. If a travel request is pending, it is executed immediately.
● Spindle
After the reset of the signal, the spindle disable which is still effective internally must be
canceled by an axis-specific reset, channel reset or end of program (M30 / M2). Only
then are setpoints output to the speed controller again.


Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX14.1 (activate program test)
DB31, ... DBX63.3 (axis/spindle lock active)
DB21, ... DBX1.7 (activate program test)
DB21, ... DBX33.7 (program test active)
Additional references Behavior in synchronous mode:
Function Manual, Extended Functions; Synchronous Spindle (S3)
5.6.6 DB31, ... DBX1.4 (follow-up mode)
DB31, ... DBX1.4 Follow-up mode

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Follow-up mode is active:
● The position setpoint is continuously tracked: position setpoint = actual position value
● Feedback signal: DB31, ... DBX61.3 = 1 (follow-up active)
● Standstill and clamping monitoring are not active.
● If an NC program is active when the closed-loop control system is switched on again, a
control-internal repositioning operation is performed (REPOSA: Linear approach with
all axes) to the last programmed position.
Note
Follow-up mode is only useful with a simultaneous reset of the controller enable: DB31, ...
DBX2.1 = 0
Signal state 0 Follow-up mode is not active:
● The position setpoint is not tracked: Position setpoint = programmed set position
● Feedback signal: DB31, ... DBX61.3 = 0 (follow-up not active)
● Standstill and clamping monitoring are active.
Note
If the controller enable is reset (DB31, ... DBX2.1 == 0), the axis is in the "hold" state.
Whereby the set position of the axis is not corrected to the actual position. If the axis is
moved in this state, e.g. manually, the difference between the set position and the actual
position increases constantly (following error). The following error is suddenly corrected to
zero when the "Controller enable" is set (speed setpoint jump).

DB31, ... DBX1.4 Follow-up mode

Additional information If the controller enable is cancelled in the control because of faults, the "hold" state should
be activated for the axis before the NC start after the queued alarms have been successful‐
ly deleted, and the accompanying controller enable set: DB31, ... DBX1.4 = 0 (follow-up
mode).
Otherwise, for an NC Start and active follow-up mode, the traversing distance of the previ‐
ous NC block would not be executed due to the internal delete distance-to-go.
Notice
During the transition from the "follow-up" state to the "hold" state or when the controller en‐
able is set in position control, delete distance-to-go is activated in the control. As a conse‐
quence, a traversing block in which only this axis is traversed, is terminated directly.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX2.1 (controller enable)
DB31, ... DBX2.3 (clamping in progress)
DB31, ... DBX61.3 (follow-up active)
5.6.7 DB31, ... DBX1.5 - 6 (position measuring system 1 (PMS1) / position

measuring system 2 (PMS2))
DB31, ... DBX1.5 - 6 Position measuring system 1 (PMS1) / position measuring system 2 (PMS2)
Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The position measuring system is active.
Signal state 0 The position measuring system is inactive.

Additional information Bit 6 Bit 5 Effect
(PMS (PMS
2) 1)
0 1 Position measuring system 1 is active:
● Position control of the machine axis via position measuring system
1.
● Monitoring functions (measuring system, standstill, clamping
monitoring, contour deviation, etc.) of the machine axis via position
measuring system 1.
● If position measuring system 2 exists (MD30200 $MA_NUM_ENCS
== 2), its actual position value is acquired, but not monitored by
any of these functions.
1 0 Position measuring system 2 is active:
● Position control of the machine axis via position measuring system
2.
● Monitoring functions (measuring system, standstill, clamping
monitoring, contour deviation, etc.) of the machine axis via position
measuring system 2.
● If position measuring system 1 exists (MD30200 $MA_NUM_ENCS
== 2), its actual position value is acquired, but not monitored by
any of these functions.
1 1 ● Position control of the machine axis via position measuring system
1.
● If position measuring system 2 is available
(MD30200 $MA_NUM_ENCS == 2), its actual position value is also
acquired.
0 0 Position measuring systems 1 and 2 are inactive ("parking" of the ma‐
chine axis):
● There is no actual value acquisition.
● The monitoring of the position measuring system has been
deactivated.
● The following interface signals are reset:
– DB31, ... DBX60.4 / 5 == 0 (referenced/synchronized, encoder
1/2)
– DB31, ... DBX61.5 (position controller active)
– DB31, ... DBX61.6 (speed controller active)
– DB31, ... DBX61.7 (current controller active)
Notes
● If the interface signal of the active position measuring system is reset for a traversing
axis, the axis is stopped with a ramp stop without the controller enable being cancelled
internally.
● If a speed-controlled spindle does not have a position measuring system, the
"Controller enable" interface signal must be set:
DB31, ... DBX2.1 == 1 (controller enable)
● After deactivation of the "parking" state, incremental position measuring systems have
to be referenced to achieve the "referenced" encoder status.

● If the "parking" state is active, the following interface signal is ignored at NC start for
this axis:
DB31, ... DBX60.4 / 5 (referenced/synchronized 1/ 2).
1. Switching over from position measuring system 1 to positioning measuring system 2
(and vice versa).
If the axis was referenced in both position measuring systems and the limit frequency
of the used measured value encoder has not been exceeded in the meantime, i.e.
DB31, ... DBX60.4 and 60.5 == 1 (referenced/synchronized 1/2), a new reference point
approach is not required after the switchover.
On switchover, the current difference between position measuring system 1 and 2 is
traversed immediately.
A tolerance band in which the deviation between the two actual values may lie at the
switchover can be specified in the following machine data:
MD36500 $MA_ENC_CHANGE_TOL (maximum tolerance for actual position value
switchover)
If the actual value difference is greater than the tolerance, switchover is not performed
and alarm 25100 "Measuring system switchover not possible" is displayed.
2. Machine axis is parked:
The position measuring system monitoring is switched off when the measured value
encoder is removed.
3. Switch off position measuring system:
When the position measuring system 1 or 2 is switched off, the associated interface
signal is reset:
DB31, ... DBX60.4/5 (referenced/synchronized 1/2)
4. Reference point approach:
Reference point approach of the axis is executed with the selected position measuring
system. Every position measuring system must be referenced separately.
Corresponds to DB31, ... DBX60.4 / .5 (referenced/synchronized 1/2)
DB31, ... DBX61.6 (speed controller active)
DB31, ... DBX2.1 (controller enable)
MD36500 $MA_ENC_CHANGE_TOL (max. tolerance on actual position value switchover)
MD30200 $MA_NUM_ENCS (number of encoders)
Additional references Function Manual, Basic Functions; Velocities, Setpoint / Actual Value Systems, Closed-
Loop Control (G2)
5.6.8 DB31, ... DBX1.7 (override active)
DB31, ... DBX1.7 Override active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Feedrate/spindle overrideis active.
Signal state 0 Feedrate/spindle override is not active.

DB31, ... DBX1.7 Override active

Additional information The feedrate override factor (DB31, ... DBB0) specified by the NC/PLC interface is activa‐
ted with the interface signal.
If the feedrate/spindle override is not active, then independent of the actual switch position,
a value of 1.0 ≙ 100 % is used as override factor in the control. The first switch position is
an exception. Depending on the selected coding, for the first switch position the following
factor applies:
● Binary coding: Override factor = 0
● Gray coding: Override factor = MD12030 $MN_OVR_FACTOR_FEEDRATE[ 0 ]
Corresponds to MD12000 $MN_OVR_AX_IS_GRAY_CODE (axis-specific feedrate override switch Gray-co‐
ded)
switch)
MD12100 $MN_OVR_FACTOR_LIMIT_BIN (limit for binary coded override switch)
5.6.9 DB31, ... DBX2.0 (software cams: activation)
DB31, ... DBX2.0 Software cams: Activation

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 A request has been made to activate the output of the minus and plus cam signals of an
axis to the PLC interface.
Signal state 0 A request has not been made to activate the output of the minus and plus cam signals of
an axis to the PLC interface.
DB10 DBX114.0 - 117.7 (software cams: plus cam signal 1 to 32)
DB31, ... DBX62.0 (software cams active)
nals"
5.6.10 DB31, ... DBX2.1 (controller enable)
DB31, ... DBX2.1 Controller enable

Update Cyclic


Signal state 1 Controller is enabled.
The position control loop is closed and the axis/spindle is in closed-loop control.
Feedback:
DB31, ... DBX61.5 = 1 (position controller active)
If the axis/spindle was referenced before resetting the interface signal, the axis/spindle
does not have to be re-referenced after the interface signal is set again. Supplementary
condition: The limit frequency of the active measuring system must not be exceeded in the
meantime.
Note
If the axis/spindle was moved from its position during the time in which the controller ena‐
ble was not set, the behavior when the controller enable is set depends on the interface
signal "follow-up mode":
● DB31, ... DBX1.4 == 1 (follow-up mode)
Position control is performed at the current position
● DB31, ... DBX1.4 == 0 (follow-up mode)
Position control is performed at the last position before the controller enable is reset
Signal state 0 Controller is not enabled.
The behavior when the "controller enable" is removed depends on whether the axis/spindle
is stationary or traversing at this time:
● Axis/spindle stationary:
– The position control loop of the axis is opened.
– For DB31, ... DBX1.4 == 1 (follow-up mode) ⇒ position setpoint = actual position
value
– The controller enable on the drive is reset
– The following interface signals are reset:
DB31, ... DBX61.5 = 0 (position controller active)
DB31, ... DBX61.6 = 0 (speed controller active)
DB31, ... DBX61.7 = 0 (current controller active)
● Axis/spindle traverses
– The axis is stopped with rapid stop.
– Alarm 21612 "Controller enable VDI signal reset during motion".
– The position control loop of the axis/spindle is opened.
– Independent of the interface signal DB31, ... DBX1.4 (follow-up mode), the position
setpoint is corrected at the end of the braking operation (position setpoint = actual
position value) and the feedback signal DB31, ... DBX61.3 = 1 (follow-up mode) is
set.
– The following interface signals are reset:
DB31, ... DBX61.5 (position controller active)
DB31, ... DBX61.7 (current controller active)
Note
The current set position is retained in the control when "Controller enable" is reset and "Fol‐
low-up mode" (DB31, ... DBX1.4 == 0) is not set. If the axis is moved in this state, e.g. man‐
ually, the difference between the set position and the actual position increases constantly
(following error). The following error is suddenly corrected to zero when the "Controller ena‐
ble" is set (speed setpoint jump).


Additional information Mechanical clamping of an axis
If the axis is positioned at the clamping position, the clamping mechanism is closed. The
controller enable is then reset. Otherwise, the position controller would constantly work
against the clamping, if the axis was moved mechanically from its specified position during
the clamping operation.
When the clamping is removed, the controller enable is set first and then the mechanical
clamping is released.
Note
● Travel request for an axis/spindle without controller enable:
– The axis/spindle is not traversed
– The travel command is output to the interface
– As long as the travel request is present, the axis/spindle is traversed immediately
when the controller enable is set.
● When the controller enable is reset for a traversing geometry axis, this always results in
a contour violation.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX61.3 (follow-up active)
DB31, ... DBX1.4 (follow-up mode)
MD36620 $MA_SERVO_DISABLE_DELAY_TIME (OFF delay of the controller enable)
MD36610 $MA_AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME (braking ramp time when errors occur)
5.6.11 DB31, ... DBX2.2 (spindle reset/delete distance to go)
DB31, ... DBX2.2 Delete distance-to-go/spindle reset

Update Cyclic
Edge change 0 → 1 Axis: "Delete-distance-to-go" is requested.
Spindle: Reset is requested

DB31, ... DBX2.2 Delete distance-to-go/spindle reset

Additional information Axis: Delete distance-to-go
● AUTOMATIC and MDI modes
The interface signal is only active if the axis is traversed as positioning axis. A
positioning axis is decelerated to standstill along its brake characteristic. The distance-
to-go of the axis is deleted.
● JOG mode
The axis is braked down to standstill alone its deceleration characteristic and then a
possible delete distance to go is a deleted.
Note
After the delete distance to go, in an NC program, the following block is prepared again
with the actual axis position. As a consequence, a different contour is traversed along than
programmed in the NC program. Traversing to absolute position G90 in the block after "De‐
lete distance-to-go" at least allows the programmed position is approached. When travers‐
ing using incremental dimension G91, then the programmed position would not be ap‐
proached.
Spindle: reset
● Control mode:
– The spindle is stopped
– The NC program is again executed
– The spindle continues to rotate with the next M and S value programmed in the NC
program.
● Oscillation mode:
– Oscillation is interrupted
– The axes continue to traverse
– The NC program continues with the actual gear stage
– The spindle continues to rotate with the next M and S value programmed in the NC
program. The speed obtained from these values (actual S value and the last active
gear stage) could be too high. In this case, the interface signal is set.
DB31, ... DBX83.1
● Positioning mode: The spindle is stopped
● Axis mode: The spindle is stopped
Note
The response for a spindle reset is independent of the setting in machine data:
MD35040 $MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET
Dwell time (G4): Delete distance-to-go
During a block with dwell time (G4), the interface signal has no influence on the time that
elapses.
DB31, ... DBX83.1 (programmed speed too high)
MD35040 $MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET (own spindle reset)
Additional references Basic Functions Function Manual; Chapter "S1: spindles"
Function Manual, Extended Functions; Chapter "P2: positioning axes"

5.6.12 DB31, ... DBX2.3 (clamping in progress)
DB31, ... DBX2.3 Clamping in progress

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Clamping in progress.
The clamping monitoring is active.
Signal state 0 Clamping completed.
Standstill monitoring is active.
Corresponds with MD36050 $MA_CLAMP_POS_TOL (clamping tolerance)
5.6.13 DB31, ... DBX2.4 - 7 (reference point value 1 - 4)
DB31, ... DBX2.4 - 7 Reference point value 1-4

Update Cyclic
Additional information When the reference cam is reached, the NC is signaled by the interface which coded refer‐
ence cam has been approached.
Actual value = MD34100 $MA_REFP_SET_POS [ <reference point value x> ]
0 0 0 0 Reference point value 1
Notes
● The interface signal must remain set until the reference point is reached or until a new
coded reference cam is approached.
● If the machine axis has reached the reference point, and noreference point value has
been selected, then reference point value 1 is used.
● For length measuring systems with distance-coded reference marks, the interface
signal is irrelevant.
Application example
On a machine tool with large traversing paths, up to four coded reference cams can be
distributed over the distance traveled by the axis; up to four different reference points ap‐
proached. This allows the traversing time when referencing to be shortened.
Corresponds with MD34100 $MA_REFP_SET_POS (reference point value)

5.6.14 DB31, ... DBX3.0 (accept external work offset)
DB31, ... DBX3.0 Accept external work offset

Signal flow PLC→ NC
Update Cyclic
Signal state 0 → 1 Accepting the values for the external work offset is requested.
Signal state 1 → 0 Accepting the values for the external work offset is not requested.
Additional information With the interface signal, the value in system variable $AA_ETRANS is transferred into the
frame of the external work offset as external work offset ($P_EXTFRAME, $P_EXTFR):
DB31, ... DBX3.0: 0 → 1 ⇒ $P_EXTFRAME[<axis>] = $P_EXTFR[<axis>] =
$AA_ETRANS[<axis>]
Corresponds with ... $AA_ETRANS[<axis>] (external work offset)
$P_EXTFRAME[<axis>] (active system frame, external frame)
$P_EXTFR[<axis>] (data management frame for external frame)
MD28082 $MC_MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK,bit1 (system frame)
Additional references Function Manual Basic Functions; Chapter "K2: axes, coordinate systems, frames"
5.6.15 DB31, ... DBX3.1 (enable travel to fixed stop)
DB31, ... DBX3.1 Enable travel to fixed stop

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Positive feedback to the request to enable travel to the fixed stop with DB31, ... DBX62.4 =
1.
Signal state 0 Negative feedback to the request to enable travel to the fixed stop with DB31, ... DBX62.4
= 1.
Meaning after activating the function "travel to fixed stop" in the NC program (FXS):
● Travel to fixed stop is inhibited.
● The axis is stationary at the start position with reduced torque.
● The channel message "Wait: HiFu acknowledgment missing" is displayed.
Meaning beforereaching the fixed stop DB31, ... .DBX62.5 == 0 (fixed stop reached):
● Travel to fixed stop interrupted.
● Alarm "20094: Axis%1 function was canceled" is displayed.
Meaning afterreaching the fixed stop DB31, ... .DBX62.5 == 1 (fixed stop reached):
● The torque limiting and monitoring of the fixed stop monitoring window are canceled.
Additional information Irrelevant for MD37060 $MA_FIXED_STOP_ACKN_MASK == 0 or 2
DB31, ... DBX1.2 (fixed stop sensor)
MD37060 $MA_FIXED_STOP_ACKN_MASK (monitoring PLC acknowledgements for trav‐
el to fixed stop)

5.6.16 DB31, ... DBX3.2 - 5 (activate fixed feedrate 1 - 4, machine axes)
DB 31, ... DBX3.2 - 5 Activate fixed feedrate 1 - 4, machine axes

Update Cyclic
Additional information With the interface signals, in the JOG mode, the fixed feedrate - parameterized using ma‐
chine data - is activated.
0 0 0 0 Fixed feedrate not selected
Instead of the parameterized JOG velocity/ JOG rapid traverse velocity (MD... ...JOG_VE‐
LO_...), the axis is traversed with the selected fixed feedrate. The traversing direction is
specified via the interface signal:
DB31, ... DBX6 / 7 (traversing keys, minus/plus)
The fixed feedrates are parameterized using the following machine data:
● Linear axes: MD12202 $MN_PERMANENT_FEED
● Rotary axes: MD12204 $MN_PERMANENT_ROT_AX_FEED
Notes
● The fixed feedrate is not used for:
– Spindles
– Positioning axes
– Tapping
● The fixed feedrate is always interpreted as linear feedrate. Switchover to linear
feedrate is performed internally in the control system also when revolutional feedrate is
active.
Corresponds with MD12200 $MN_RUN_OVERRIDE_0 (traversing behavior with override 0)
MD12202 $MN_PERMANENT_FEED (fixed feedrates for linear axes)
MD12204 $MN_PERMANENT_ROT_AX_FEED (fixed feedrates for rotary axes)
MD21150 $MC_JOG_VELO_RAPID_ORI (conventional rapid traverse for orientation axes)
MD21155 $MC_JOG_VELO_ORI (conventional velocity for orientation axes)
MD21160 $MC_JOG_VELO_RAPID_GEO (conventional rapid traverse for geometry axes)
MD21165 $MC_JOG_VELO_GEO (conventional velocity for geometry axes)
Additional references Function Manual, Basic Functions; Chapter "V1: Feedrates" > "Feedrate control" > "Fixed
feedrate values "

5.6.17 DB31, ... DBX3.6 (velocity/spindle speed limiting)
DB31, ... DBX3.6 Velocity/spindle speed limitation

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The velocity/spindle speed limiting is active.
Signal state 0 The velocity/spindle speed limiting is not active.
Additional information The control limits the velocity/spindle speed to the parameterized limit value:
MD35160 $MA_SPIND_EXTERN_VELO_LIMIT
Corresponds with MD35100 $MA_SPIND_VELO_LIMIT (maximum spindle speed)
MD35160 $MA_SPIND_EXTERN_VELO_LIMIT (spindle speed limiting from the PLC)
SD43220 $SA_SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26 (programmable upper spindle speed limitation for
G26)
SD43230 $SA_SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS (spindle speed limitation for G96/G961/G97)
5.6.18 DB31, ... DBX4.0 - 2 (activate handwheel)
DB31, ... DBX4.0 - 2 Activate handwheel

Update Cyclic
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2
1 0 0 3
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2
0 1 1 3
1 0 0 4
1 0 1 5
1 1 0 6
Note
At any one time, the machine axis can only be assigned to one handwheel. If, for bit cod‐
ing, several interface signals are set simultaneously, then the following priority applies:
"Handwheel 1" before "Handwheel 2" before "Handwheel 3".

DB31, ... DBX4.0 - 2 Activate handwheel

Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX64.0 - 2 (handwheel active)
5.6.19 DB31, ... DBX4.3 (feedrate/spindle stop, axis-specific)
DB31, ... DBX4.3 Feedrate/spindle stop, axis-specific

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Feedrate/spindle stop is active.
Signal state 0 Feedrate/spindle stop is not active.

DB31, ... DBX4.3 Feedrate/spindle stop, axis-specific

Additional information Axis
● If the interface signal is set while traversing the axis, then the axis is braked down to
standstill along its braking characteristic. If the axis is in an interpolatory relationship
with other axes, these are also braked.
continued.
● If the interface signal is set, and a request is issued to traverse, then the axis is not
traversed. However, the traverse request is kept. When the interface signal is reset, the
traverse request is immediately executed, i.e. the axis is traversed.
G33, G34, G35 Effective (contour deviations occur)
G331, G332 Effective
G63 Effective
Spindle
● If the interface signal is set while traversing the spindle, then the spindle is braked
down to standstill along its braking characteristic. If the spindle is in an interpolatory
relationship with other spindles, these are also braked.
continued.
● During positioning, the position control is retained and the following error is eliminated.
● If the interface signal is set, and a request is issued to move during positioning
operation, then the spindle is not moved. However, the traverse request is kept. When
the interface signal is reset, the traverse request is immediately executed, i.e. the
spindle is moved.
● The interface signal is not active during tapping (G331, G332).
G33, G34, G35 Effective (contour deviations can occur de‐
pending on the dynamic performance that
has been parameterized)
G331, G332 Not effective
G63 Effective
Note
The interface signal is not active when "Axis/spindle inhibit" (DB31, ... DBX1.3 == 1) is ac‐
tive.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX1.3 (axis/spindle disable)
drate disable and feedrate/spindle stop"

5.6.20 DB31, ... DBX4.4 (traversing key disable)
DB31, ... DBX4.4 Traversing key lock

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The "Plus" and "Minus" traversing keys are locked.
Signal state 0 The "Plus" and "Minus" traversing keys are enabled.
If the traversing key disable is activated while traversing, the axis is stopped.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX4.6 - 7 (traversing keys "Plus" / "Minus")
5.6.21 DB31, ... DBX4.5 (rapid traverse override)
DB31, ... DBX4.5 Rapid traverse override

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 When manually traversing the machine axis using the traversing keys, when the interface
signal is set, rapid traverse velocity becomes active (MD32010).
Signal state 0 When manually traversing the machine axis using the traversing keys, the entered JOG
The signal is irrelevant:
● for reference point approach (JOG mode)
● in the AUTOMATIC and MDI modes
5.6.22 DB31, ... DBX4.6 - 7 ("Plus" / "Minus" traversing keys)
DB31, ... DBX4.6 - 7 Traversing keys "Plus" / "Minus"

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 A request has been made to traverse the machine axis using the traversing key in the posi‐
tive/negative axis direction.
Signal state 0 A request has not been made to traverse the machine axis using the traversing key in the
positive/negative axis direction.

DB31, ... DBX4.6 - 7 Traversing keys "Plus" / "Minus"

Depending on the active machine function, as well as the settings for jog and continuous
operation (SD41050 and MD11300), different responses are initiated when the signal
changes:
The machine axis traverses in the direction concerned to the active limit switch as long
as the interface signal is set to 1.
On the first edge change 0 →1 the machine axis starts to traverse in the relevant
direction. This traversing movement still continues when the edge changes from 1 → 0.
Any new signal edge change 0 → 1 (same traversing direction!) stops the traversing
movement.
With signal 1 the machine axis starts to traverse at the set increment. If the signal
changes to the 0 state before the increment is traversed, then traversing is interrupted.
When the signal state changes to 1 again, traversing is continued. The axis can be
stopped and started several times as described above until it has traversed the
complete increment.
At the first edge change 0 → 1, the machine axis starts to traverse at the set increment.
If another edge change 0 → 1 is performed with the same traverse signal before the
geometry axis has traversed the increment, the traversing movement will be cancelled.
The increment is no longer traversed to the end.
Note
– AUTOMATIC
– MDI
● If both traversing signals ("plus" and "minus") are set at the same time there is no
traversing or the current traversing is aborted.
● Traversing by means of the traversing keys can be locked via DB31, ... DBX4.4
(traversing key disable).
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX4.4 (traversing key disable)
DB31, ... DBX64.6 - 7 ("Plus" and "Minus" traversing command)
SD41050 $SN_JOG_CONT_MODE_LEVELTRIGGRD (jog/continuous operation for JOG,
continuous)

5.6.23 DB31, ... DBX5.0 - 6 (machine function request)
DB31, ... DBX5.0 - 6 Machine function request

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The machine function to manually traverse the machine axis has been requested.
Signal state 0 The machine function to manually traverse the machine axis has not been requested.
Additional information There is a request signal for every machine function to manually traverse the machine axis
in the JOG mode.
Bit 0 INC1
Bit 1 INC10
Bit 2 INC100
Bit 3 INC1000
Bit 4 INC10000
Bit 5 INCvar
wheel, the axis starts to traverse in the appropriate direction, corresponding to the number
of increments of the active machine function.
axis continuously and the appropriate direction.
Notes
● If an axis is currently being traversed via a machine function, the movement is aborted
through deselection or change of the machine function.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX65.0 - 65.6 (active machine function)

5.6.24 DB31, ... DBX7.0 (invert handwheel direction of rotation)
DB31, ... DBX7.0 Invert handwheel direction of rotation

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 A request has been made to invert the direction of rotation of the handwheel assigned to
the machine axis.
Signal state 0 A request has not been made to invert the direction of rotation of the handwheel assigned
to the machine axis.
It is only permissible to change the interface signal when the machine axis is at a standstill.
● The direction of movement of the handwheel does not match the expected direction of
the axis.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX67.0 (handwheel direction of rotation inversion active)
5.6.25 DB31, ... DBB8 (request axis/spindle replacement)
DB31, ... DBB8 Axis/spindle exchange request

Update Cyclic
Edge change 0 → 1 Request from PLC, switchover axis
Edge change 1 → 0 Acknowledged by the NC
Additional information From the PLC user program, via DBB8 an axis/spindle exchange can be requested:
● From an NC channel to the PLC
● From the PLC to an NC channel
● From an NC channel to another NC channel
Bit Meaning
0 ... 3 Name of the channel to which the axis/spindle is to be assigned (binary code).
Example:
The axis should be assigned to channel 2.
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Channel num‐
ber
0 0 1 0 2
4 Request axis/spindle exchange
0→1 Request from PLC
1→0 Acknowledged by the NC
5 -
6 -
7 Request "PLC axis"

DB31, ... DBB8 Axis/spindle exchange request

Corresponds with DB31, ... DBB68 (Axis/spindle replacement)
MD20070 $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED (machine axis number valid in channel)
MD30550 $MA_AXCONF_ASSIGN_MASTER_CHAN (initial setting of channel for axis re‐
placement)
Additional references Function Manual, Extended Functions; Chapter "K10: Cross-channel axis interchange"
5.6.26 DB31, ... DBX9.0 - (2 select: position controller parameter set)
DB31, ... DBX9.0 - 2 Selection: Position controller parameter set

Additional information Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Parameter set
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 2
0 1 0 3
0 1 1 4
1 0 0 5
1 0 1 6
1 1 0 6
1 1 1 6
Note
Selecting a position controller parameter set is ignored, for:
MD35590 $MA_PARAMSET_CHANGE_ENABLE == 0
Corresponds with DB31, ...DBX69.0, .1, ..2 (feedback signal: active position controller parameter set)
Additional references Commissioning Manual IBN CNC: NC, PLC, Drive; Section: "NC commissioning"
5.6.27 DB31, ... DBX9.3 (parameter set definitions disabled by NC)
DB31, ... DBX9.3 Parameter set definitions disabled by NC

Signal state 1 The parameter set switchover is disabled.
Signal state 0 The parameter set switchover is enabled.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX9.0, .1, .2

DB31, ... DBX10.0 REPOS delay

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 A REPOS delay is requested.
After a block search, a REPOS offset is applied for this axis. However it is not applied us‐
ing the approach block, but rather using the next traversing block in which the axis is pro‐
grammed.
Signal state 0 A REPOS delay is not requested.
After a block search, a REPOS offset is applied for this axis using the approach block.
If the machine axes are involved on a path (DB31, ... DBX76.4 == 1 (path axis)), then the
interface signal is not active.
DB31, ... DBX76.4 (path axis)
POS)"
5.6.29 DB31, ... DBX12.0 (hardware limit switch minus)
DB31, ... DBX12.0 Hardware limit switch minus:

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The hardware limit switch minus was activated.
Signal state 0 The hardware limit switch minus was not activated.
Additional information Alarm 21614 "Hardware limit switch -" is displayed, and the axis is stopped.
Corresponds with MD36600 $MA_BRAKE_MODE_CHOICE (deceleration behavior when the hardware limit
switch responds)

5.6.30 DB31, ... DBX12.1 (hardware limit switch plus)
DB31, ... DBX12.1 Hardware limit switch plus

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Hardware limit switch plus was triggered.
Signal state 0 Hardware limit switch plus was not triggered.
Additional information Alarm 21614 "Hardware limit switch +" is displayed, and the axis is stopped.
Corresponds with MD36600 $MA_BRAKE_MODE_CHOICE (deceleration behavior when the hardware limit
switch responds)
5.6.31 DB31,... DBX12.2 (second software limit switch minus)
DB31, ... DBX12.2 Second software limit switch minus

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Second software limit switch minus
Signal state 0 The second software limit switch minus was not triggered.
Corresponds with MD36100 $MA_POS_LIMIT_MINUS (1st software limit switch minus)
MD36120 $MA_POS_LIMIT_MINUS2 (2nd software limit switch minus)
5.6.32 DB31, ... DBX12.3 (second software limit switch plus)
DB31, ... DBX12.3 Second software limit switch plus

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The second software limit switch plus was triggered.
Signal state 0 The second software limit switch plus was not triggered.
Corresponds with MD36110 $MA_POS_LIMIT_PLUS (1st software limit switch plus)
MD36130 $MA_POS_LIMIT_PLUS2 (2nd software limit switch plus)
5.6.33 DB31, ... DBX12.4 (modulo rotary axis: activate traversing range limits)
DB31, ... DBX12.4 Modulo rotary axis: activate traversing range limits
Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Activate traversing range limits (software limit switch, working area limits) for modulo rotary
axes.

DB31, ... DBX12.4 Modulo rotary axis: activate traversing range limits
Signal state 0 Deactivate traversing range limits for modulo rotary axes.
The signal is irrelevant if linear axes/rotary axes do not have modulo functionality.
Application example
Mounted rotary axis with monitoring
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX74.4 (modulo rotary axis: traversing range limits active)
Additional references Function Manual, Extended Functions; Chapter "R2: rotary axes"
5.6.34 DB31, ... DBX12.7 (reference point approach deceleration)
DB31, ... DBX12.7 Deceleration of reference point approach

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The machine axis is positioned at the reference cam.
Signal state 0 The machine axis is positioned in front of the reference cam.
Using a suitable reference cam, which extends from the reference point to the end of the
traversing range, it is recommended to ensure that before the reference point approach,
the machine axis can be located in the range behind the reference cam.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX2.4 - 7 (reference point value 1 to 4)
5.6.35 DB31, ... DBX13.0 - 2 (JOG approach fixed point)
DB31, ... DBX13.0 - 2 JOG fixed point approach

Update Cyclic
Additional information After selecting the "Approach fixed point in JOG" function, the PLC outputs the number of
the fixed point to be approached binary coded to the NC using DB31, ... DBX.0 - 2:
Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Number of fixed point to be approached
0 0 0 -
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2
0 1 1 3
1 0 0 4
As soon as the function is active (see DB31, ... DBX75.0 - 2), then the selected machine
axis can be traversed to the corresponding fixed point using either the traversing keys or
the handwheel. The fixed points are defined using machine data MD30600.

DB31, ... DBX13.0 - 2 JOG fixed point approach

Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX75.0 - 2 (JOG approach fixed point active)
DB31, ... DBX75.3 - 5 (JOG approach fixed point reached)
MD30600 $MA_FIX_POINT_POS[<n>] (fixed value positions of the axis)
5.6.36 DB31, ... DBX13.3 (JOG travel to position)
DB31, ... DBX13.3 JOG travel to position

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The function "Position travel in JOG" is requested:
Signal state 0 The function "Position travel in JOG" is not requested:
Additional information As soon as the function is active (see DB31, ... DBX75.6), then using the traversing keys
or the handwheel, the selected machine axis can be traversed to the position specified with
setting data SD43320.
Application
The function is used for machine tools that are exclusively operated manually, e.g. to ap‐
proach drill-holes in precise increments.
Note
The following preconditions applying for the "Position travel in JOG" function:
● The function can only be activated in the JOG mode.
The function cannot be activated if the machine function JOG-REPOS or JOG-REF is
active and in JOG in AUTOMATIC.
● The axis to be traversed must be referenced.
● A kinematic transformation may not be active.
● The axis to be traversed may not be a following axis of an active coupling.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX75.6 (JOG travel to position active)
DB31, ... DBX75.7 (JOG position reached)
SD43320 $SA_JOG_POSITION (JOG position)
5.6.37 DB31, ... DBX14.0 (suppress program test)
DB31, ... DBX14.0 Suppress program test

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Suppression of the program test (setpoint output locked) is requested.
Signal state 0 Suppression of the program test (setpoint output locked) is not requested.


Additional information If function "Program test" (PRT) is active in the channel to which the axis currently belongs,
the axis is traversed with internal axis disable. Setpoints are generated but they not output
to the machine axes. Actual value = Setpoint.
If the program test is suppressed for the axis, setpoints are output to the machine axis de‐
spite the function "program test" being active in the channel to which the axis currently be‐
longs.
Automatic transfer of the interface signals
The HMI request signals DB21, ... DBX128.0 / .1 are only transferred from the basic PLC
program to the PLC request signals DB21, ... DBX14.0 / .1 if FB1 parameter MMCToIF is
set to TRUE. If the parameter is not set, the PLC request signals must be set by the PLC
user program.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX14.1 (activate program test)
DB31, ... DBX128.0 (suppress program test)
Additional references Function Manual Extended Functions, Chapter "K5: Cross-channel program coordination"
> "Channel-by-channel running-in"
5.6.38 DB31, ... DBX14.1 (activate program test)
DB31, ... DBX14.1 Activate program test

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Activation of the function "program test" (setpoint output locked) is requested.
Signal state 0 Activation of the function "program test" (setpoint output locked) is not requested.
Additional information If the function "program test" is active, the axis is traversed with internal axis disable. Set‐
points are generated but they not output to the machine axes. Actual value = Setpoint.
user program.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX14.0 (suppress program test)
5.6.39 DB31, ... DBX16.0 - 2 (actual gear stage)
DB31, ... DBX16.0 - 2 Actual gear stage

Update Cyclic

DB31, ... DBX16.0 - 2 Actual gear stage

Additional information If the new gear stage is selected at the machine, the PLC user program sets the following
interface signals as feedback signal to the NC:
● DB31, ... DBX16.0 - 2 (actual gear stage)
● DB31, ... DBX16.3 (gear stage has been changed)
This signals the NC that the correct stage has been successfully selected. The associated
parameter set becomes active in the NC.
Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Parameter set Meaning: Parameter set for
No.
--- --- --- 0 Axis mode
0 0 0 1 Gear stage 1
0 0 1 Gear stage 1
1 1 0 Gear stage 5
1 1 1 Gear stage 5
Note
If the PLC user program signals back to the NC with a different actual gear stage than is‐
sued by the NC as the set gear stage requested by the PLC, the gear change is still consid‐
ered to have been successfully completed and the actual gear stage that is signaled back
is activated in the NC.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX16.3 (gear stage has been changed)
DB31, ... DBX18.5 (oscillation speed)
DB31, ... DBX82.0 - 2 (set gear stage)
DB31, ... DBX82.3 (change over gear stage)
5.6.40 DB31, ... DBX16.3 (gear stage has been changed)
DB31, ... DBX16.3 Gear is changed over

Update Cyclic
Edge change 0 → 1 Gear is changed over

DB31, ... DBX16.3 Gear is changed over

Additional information If the new gear stage is selected at the machine, the PLC user program sets the following
interface signals as feedback signal to the NC:
● DB31, ... DBX16.0 - 2 (actual gear stage)
● DB31, ... DBX16.3 = 0 → 1 (gear stage has been changed)
Feedback signal from the NC to the PLC: DB31, ... DBX82.3 = 0 (changeover gear stage)
Feedback signal from the PLC to the NC: DB31, ... DBX16.3 = 0 (gear stage has been
changed)
This completes the gear stage change in the control system.
Note
● The interface signal is irrelevant for all spindle modes with the exception of the
oscillation mode.
● If the PLC user program signals back to the NC with a different actual gear stage than
issued by the NC as the set gear stage requested by the PLC, the gear change is still
considered to have been successfully completed and the actual gear stage that is
signaled back is activated in the NC.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX16.0 - 2 (actual gear stage)
5.6.41 DB31, ... DBX16.4 (resynchronize spindle, measuring system 1)
DB31, ... DBX16.4 Resynchronize spindle, measuring system 1

Update Cyclic
Edge change 0 → 1 There is an active request to synchronize measuring system 1 of the spindle.
The interface signal is irrelevant for all spindle modes with the exception of the control
mode.
5.6.42 DB31, ... DBX16.5 (resynchronize spindle, measuring system 2)

Update Cyclic


Edge change 0 → 1 There is an active request to synchronize measuring system 2 of the spindle.
The interface signal is irrelevant for all spindle modes with the exception of the control
mode.
5.6.43 DB31, ... DBX16.7 (delete S value)
DB31, ... DBX16.7 Delete S value

Update Cyclic
Edge change 0 → 1 There is an active request to delete the S value.
Additional information Control mode:
● The spindle is braked via its parameterized braking ramp down to standstill.
Oscillation mode, axis mode, positioning mode:
● Deleting the actual S value has no effect on the actual function. However, if the control
mode is selected again, a new S value must be programmed.
5.6.44 DB31, ... DBX17.4 (resynchronizing the spindle before positioning, measuring
system 1)
DB31, ... DBX17.4 Resynchronizing the spindle before positioning, measuring system 1
Update Cyclic
Edge change 0 → 1 There is an active request to resynchronize measuring system 1 before positioning the
spindle.
The interface signal is irrelevant for all spindle modes with the exception of the positioning
mode.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX60.4 (referenced/synchronized 1)

5.6.45 DB31, ... DBX17.5 (resynchronizing the spindle before positioning, measuring
system 2)
DB31, ... DBX17.5 Resynchronizing the spindle before positioning, measuring system 2
Update Cyclic
Edge change 0 → 1 There is an active request to resynchronize measuring system 2 before positioning the
spindle.
The interface signal is irrelevant for all spindle modes with the exception of the positioning
mode.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX60.2 (referenced/synchronized 2)
5.6.46 DB31, ... DBX17.6 (invert M3 / M4)
DB31, ... DBX17.6 Invert M3/M4

Update Cyclic
Edge change 0 → 1 There is an active request to invert the direction of rotation programmed with M3 / M4.
Additional information The direction of rotation of the spindle motor changes for the following functions:
● M3
● M4
● M5
● SPOS/M19/SPOSA from the motion; not effective for SPOS/M19/SPOSA from zero speed
(stationary).
5.6.47 DB31, ... DBX18.4 (oscillation controlled by the PLC)
DB31, ... DBX18.4 Oscillation controlled by the PLC

Update Cyclic
Edge change 0 → 1 The "Oscillation of the machine axis controlled by the PLC user program" function is re‐
quested.
Edge change 1 → 0 The "Oscillation of the machine axis controlled by the PLC user program" function is not
requested.

DB31, ... DBX18.4 Oscillation controlled by the PLC

Additional information For the "Oscillation of the machine axis controlled by the PLC user program" function the
following system data must be set or parameterized.
● DB31, ... DBX18.4 = 1 (oscillation controlled by the PLC)
● DB31, ... DBX18.5 = 1 (oscillation speed)
● MD35400 $MA_SPIND_OSCILL_DES_VELO = <oscillation speed>
● MD35410 $MA_SPIND_OSCILL_ACCEL = <oscillation acceleration>
● DB31, ... DBX18.6 = ... → 0 → 1 → 0 ... (set direction of rotation clockwise)
● DB31, ... DBX18.7 = ... → 1 → 0 → 1 ... (set direction of rotation counterclockwise)
The direction of rotation when starting and the traversing duration for each direction of rota‐
tion must be specified by the PLC user program.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX18.5 (oscillation speed)
DB31, ... DBX18.6 (setpoint direction of rotation, clockwise)
DB31, ... DBX18.7 (setpoint direction of rotation, counterclockwise)
MD35400 $MA_SPIND_OSCILL_DES_VELO (oscillation speed)
MD35410 $MA_SPIND_OSCILL_ACCEL (acceleration when oscillating)
Additional references Function Manual, Basic Functions:
● Chapter "S1: spindles" > "Configurable gear adaptations" > "Gear stage change with
oscillation mode"
● Chapter "P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D" > "Function interface" > "PLC axis control" >
"Oscillate spindle"
Function Manual Expansion Functions:
● Chapter "P5: oscillation"
5.6.48 DB31, ... DBX18.5 (oscillation enable)
DB31, ... DBX18.5 Oscillation enable

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Traversing the spindle in the oscillation mode (oscillation) has been enabled by the NC.
Signal state 0 Traversing the spindle in the oscillation mode (oscillation) has not been enabled by the NC.
The interface signal is irrelevant for all spindle modes with the exception of the oscillation
mode.

DB31, ... DBX18.5 Oscillation enable

DB31, ... DBX16.3 (gear stage has been changed)
DB31, ... DBX18.4 (oscillation controlled by the PLC)
DB31, ... DBX18.5 (oscillation enable)
DB31, ... DBX61.4 (spindle stationary)
DB31, ... DBX83.5 (spindle in setpoint range)
DB31, ... DBX84.6 (active spindle mode: oscillating mode)
Additional references Basic Functions Function Manual; Chapter "S1: spindles" > "Configurable gear adapta‐
tions" > "Gear stage change with oscillation mode"
5.6.49 DB31, ... DBX18.6 (oscillation: Clockwise direction of rotation)
DB31, ... DBX18.6 Oscillation: Clockwise direction of rotation

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Clockwise oscillation direction of rotation is requested.
Signal state 0 Clockwise oscillation direction of rotation is not requested.
mode.
Corresponds to DB31, ... DBX16.0 - 2 (actual gear stage)
DB31, ... DBX84.6 (active spindle mode: Oscillation mode)
Additional references Basic Functions Function Manual; Section "S1: spindles" > "Configurable gear adapta‐

5.6.50 DB31, ... DBX18.7 (oscillation: Counterclockwise direction of rotation)
DB31, ... DBX18.7 Oscillation: Counterclockwise direction of rotation

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Counterclockwise oscillation direction of rotation is requested.
Signal state 0 Counterclockwise oscillation direction of rotation is not requested.
mode.
Corresponds to DB31, ... DBX16.0 - 2 (actual gear stage)
DB31, ... DBX84.6 (active spindle mode: Oscillation mode)
Additional references Basic Functions Function Manual; Section "S1: spindles" > "Configurable gear adapta‐
5.6.51 DB31, ... DBB19 (speed override, spindle-specific)
DB31, ... DBB19 Speed override, spindle-specific

Update Cyclic


MD12060 $MN_OVR_SPIN_IS_GRAY_CODE = <Coding>
Binary coding
0000 0000 0 0.00
0000 0001 1 0.01
0000 0010 2 0.02
0000 0011 3 0.03
000 0100 4 0.04
... ... ...
0110 0100 100 1.00
... ... ...
1100 1000 200 2.00
Gray coding
machine data:
MD12070 $MN_OVR_FACTOR_SPIND_SPEED[ <Switch position> - 1 ] = <Override fac‐
tor>
1 00001 0.50
2 00011 0.55
3 00010 0.60
4 00110 0.65
5 00111 0.70
6 00101 0.75
7 00100 0.80
8 01100 0.85
9 01101 0.90
10 01111 0.95
11 01110 1.00
12 01010 1.05
13 01011 1.10
14 01001 1.15
15 01000 1.20
16 11000 1.20
17 11001 1.20
18 11011 1.20
19 11010 1.20
20 11110 1.20
21 11111 1.20


22 11101 1.20
23 11100 1.20
24 10100 1.20
25 10101 1.20
26 10111 1.20
27 10110 1.20
28 10010 1.20
29 10011 1.20
30 10001 1.20
31 10000 1.20
Limitations
● The effective override factor is limited to 100% in the "oscillation mode" spindle mode.
Notes
● The spindle-specific speed override is not effective with the following function when
cutting threads: G63
● The spindle-specific speed override acts on the programmed values before other limits
(e.g. G26, LIMS...) take effect.
Corresponds to MD12080 $MN_OVR_REFERENCE_IS_PROG_FEED (override reference velocity)
DB31, ... DBB0 (feedrate override, axis-specific)
DB31, ... DBX1.7 (feedrate/speed override active)
1) Default values
5.6.52 DB31, ... DBX20.1 (ramp-function generator disable)
DB31, ... DBX20.1 Ramp-function generator disable

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 A rapid stop with speed setpoint 0 is requested for the drive. The drive is stopped without a
ramp function (regenerative braking).
Feedback for the triggering of the rapid stop in the drive is via:
DB31, ... DBX92.1 == 1 (ramp-function generator disable active)
Signal state 0 No rapid stop with speed setpoint 0 is requested for the drive.
Additional information Using drive parameters p0922 and p2038, a PROFIdrive telegram compatible with the "SI‐
MODRIVE 611 universal" interface mode must be set in the drive.


Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX92.1 (ramp-function generator disable active)
Driver parameter p0922 (IF1 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection)
Drive parameter p2038 (IF1 PROFIdrive STW/ZSW interface mode)
Additional references NC: Commissioning Manual IBN CNC: NC, PLC, Drive
Drive: SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual
5.6.53 DB31, ... DBX21.0 - 4 (motor/drive data set: selection)
DB31, ... DBX21.0 - 4 Motor/drive data set: Selection

Update Cyclic
Additional information The switchover to a new motor (MDS) and/or to drive data sets (DDS) is requested via the
interface:
Formatting
Formatting the request interface, i.e. which bits are used to address the motor data sets
(MDS) – and which are used to address the drive data sets (DDS) is set via the formatting
interface (DB31, …DBX130.0 - 4).
Main spindle drive
For main spindle drives, the following classification applies:
● MDS[ 0 ] → star operation
● MDS[ 1 ] → delta operation
Switchover time
In principle it is possible to switch over drive parameter sets at any time. However, as tor‐
que jumps can occur when switching over speed controller parameters and motor speed
normalization, parameters should only be switched over in stationary states, especially ax‐
is standstill.
As soon as the request to switch over to another motor data set is identified, the pulses
enable is reset.
● Main spindle drive
For example, it is possible to switch between operating mode 1 (star operation) and
operating mode 2 (delta operation) for a main spindle drive (MSD) by switching over
the motor data set.
● Drive parameter set
It may be necessary to switch over the drive parameter set, for:
– Gear stage change
– Changing the measuring circuit
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX93.0 - 4 (motor/drive data set: display)
DB31, …DBX130.0 - 4 (motor/drive data set: formatting)
DB31, ... DBX21.5 (motor has been selected)
Additional references ● Function Manual, Basic Functions, Chapter "A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and
functions" > "Switchover motor/drive data sets"
● Commissioning Manual IBN CNC: NC, PLC, Drive

5.6.54 DB31, ... DBX21.5 (motor has been selected)
DB31, ... DBX21.5 Motor being selected

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The necessary electrical and/or mechanical switchover operations (e.g. contactor switch‐
over for star-delta switchover) have been completed.
● It is permissible that the axis traverses again.
● The drive enables the pulses.
Signal state 0 The necessary electrical (e.g. contactor switchover for star-delta switchover) and/or me‐
chanical switchovers have not been completed:
● It is not permissible that the axis traverses.
● The drive does not enable the pulses.
Additional information The signal must be reset before a request to switch over to a new motor data set (MDS)
and/or drive data set (DDS) (DB31, ... DBX21.0 - 4).
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX21.0 - 4 (motor/drive data set: request interface)
DB31, ... DBX93.0 - 4 (motor/drive data set: display interface)
DB31, …DBX130.0 - 4 (motor/drive data set: formatting interface)
5.6.55 DB31, ... DBX21.6 (integrator disable, speed controller)
DB31, ... DBX21.6 Integrator disable, speed controller

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The integrator (I component) of the speed controller is disabled or is to be disabled (P in‐
stead of PI behavior).
Note:
If the speed controller integrator disable is activated, compensatory action may be taken in
certain applications (e.g. if the integrator was already holding a load while stationary).
The drive acknowledges the integrator disable
to the PLC with the interface signal: DB31, ... DBX93.6 (speed controller integrator disa‐
bled).
Signal state 0 The integrator (I component) of the speed controller is enabled (PI behavior).
Additional information If the speed controller integrator disable is activated, compensatory action may be taken,
e.g. if the integrator was already holding a load while stationary.
The feedback signal regarding the speed controller disable is realized from the drive using:
DB31, ... DBX93.6 (integrator disable, speed controller)
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX93.6 (integrator disable, speed controller)

5.6.56 DB31, ... DBX21.7 (pulse enable)
DB31, ... DBX21.7 Pulse enable

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The pulses are enabled for the drive.
Signal state 0 The pulses are disabled for the drive.
Additional information The pulses are only enabled in the drive when the drive signals that it is ready:
DB31, ... DBX93.5 == 1 (feedback signal: drive ready)
If the pulse enable is removed during motion (e.g. emergency stop), the axis/spindle is no
longer braked under control. The axis coasts to standstill.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX93.5 (feedback signal: drive ready)
DB31, ... DBX93.7 (feedback signal: Pulses are enabled)
5.6.57 DB31, ... DBB22.0 (SI: SBH/SG deselection)
DB31, ... DBX22.0 SBH / SG deselection

Signal state 1 SBH and SG are deselected
Signal state 0 SBH and SG are deselected
Additional references Function Manual SINUMERIK Safety Integrated; Chapter "6.1 Safe stop (SH)" and "6.2
Safe operating stop (SBH)"
5.6.58 DB31, ... DBB22.1 (SI: SBH deselection)
DB31, ... DBX22.1 SBH deselection

Signal state 1 SBH is deselected
Signal state 0 SBH is selected
Additional references Function Manual SINUMERIK Safety Integrated; Chapter "6.1 Safe stop (SH)" and "6.2
Safe operating stop (SBH)"

5.6.59 DB31, ... DBB22.3 - 4 (SI: SG selection)
DB31, ... DBX22.3 - 4 SG selection

Additional information When the SG function is active, the speed limit value is selected using the interface signals.
Bit 1 Bit 0 Meaning
0 0 Speed limit value for SG1 is selected
Additional references Function Manual SINUMERIK Safety Integrated; Chapter "6.5 Safely reduced speed"
5.6.60 DB31, ... DBB23.0 - 2 (gear ratio selection)
DB31, ... DBX23.0 - 2 Gear ratio selection

Additional information Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Meaning
0 0 0 Gearbox stage 1 is selected
Additional references Function Manual, SINUMERIK Safety Integrated
5.6.61 DB31, ... DBB23.4 (SI: SE selection)
DB31, ... DBX23.4 SE selection

Additional information Selection of the safe software limit switch 1 or 2:
Bit 4 Meaning
0 SE2 is selected
1 SE1 is selected
Additional references Function Manual SINUMERIK Safety Integrated; Chapter "6.7 Safe software limit switch
(SE)"

5.6.62 DB31, ... DBB24.1 (control axis)
DB31, ... DBX24.1 Control axis

Signal state 1 The axis-specific "Control axis" function is set using machine data MD30460_
$MA_BASE_FUNCTION_MASK.
Bit 0 = 1: The axis traverses in speed mode
Signal state 0 Bit 0 = 0: Axis control is not allowed
Additional references SINUMERIK 840D sl List Manual, machine data
5.6.63 DB31, …DBX24.2 (MCS coupling: deactivate or do not permit)
DB31, …DBX24.2 MCS coupling: Deactivate or do not permit

Signal state 1 Deactivate MCS coupling - or do not permit is requested
Signal state 0 Deactivate MCS coupling - or do not permit is not requested.
Additional information Notes
● The interface signal is only active if the axis is a slave axis of an MCS coupling
● An active coupling is not deactivated until the relevant axes are stationary.
● If, with the interface signal set, CC_COPON (activate coupling) is programmed, then the
MCS coupling is not activated. No alarm is displayed.
Corresponds with DB31, …DBX24.2 (MCS coupling: deactivate or do not permit)
DB31, ... DBX24.3 (MCS coupling: activate collision protection)
DB31, ... DBX66.0 (MCS coupling: collision protection active)
DB31, ... DBX97.0 (MCS coupling: slave axis)
DB31, … DBX97.1 (MCS coupling: coupling active)
DB31, ... DBX97.2 (MCS coupling: mirroring active)
DB31, ... DBX97.3 (MCS coupling: offset change)
Additional references Function Manual, Special Functions; Chapter "TE6: MCS coupling"
5.6.64 DB31, ... DBX24.3 (MCS coupling: activate collision protection)
DB31, ... DBX24.3 MCS coupling: Activate collision protection

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Activating the protection function for the axis pair is requested.
Signal state 0 Activating the protection function for the axis pair is not requested.

DB31, ... DBX24.3 MCS coupling: Activate collision protection

Additional information Activation
The protection function is activated if the interface signal for one of the two machine axes
of the axis pair is set.
Deactivation
The protection function is deactivated if the interface signal for both machine axes of the
axis pair is reset.
5.6.65 DB31, ... DBX24.4 (master-slave: activate torque compensatory controller)
DB31, ... DBX24.4 Master-slave: activate torque compensatory controller

Update Cyclic
Edge change 0 → 1 Activation of the torque compensatory controller is requested.
Edge change 1 → 0 Deactivation of the torque compensatory controller is requested.
Additional information The torque compensatory controller can be activated for specific axes via the PLC inter‐
Preconditions for activation:
● Input of the supplementary speed setpoint is enabled:
MD37254 $MA_MS_TORQUE_CTRL_MODE[<slave axis>] = 1
● The "fine" differential speed is reached:
DB31, ... DBX96.2 == 1
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX96.2 (master-slave: fine differential speed)
DB31, ... DBX96.4 (master-slave: compensatory controller active)
MD37254 $MA_MS_TORQUE_CTRL_MODE (interconnection torque compensatory con‐
troller)
Additional references Function Manual, Special Functions; Chapter "TE3: Speed/torque coupling, master-slave"
5.6.66 DB31, ... DBX24.5 (setpoint switchover: request drive control)
DB31, ... DBX24.5 Setpoint switchover: request drive control

Update Cyclic

DB31, ... DBX24.5 Setpoint switchover: request drive control

Signal state 1 Accepting the drive control is requested.
Signal state 0 Accepting the drive control is not requested.
Additional information Notes
● If the request to accept the drive control is pending simultaneously in multiple axes,
switchover does not occur. The drive control then remains with the axis in which it is
currently active.
● If no transfer requests are pending when the control powers up, drive control is
assigned by the control to the first of the axes found in the machine data
(MD30110 $MA_CTRLOUT_MODULE_NR[<Achse>]) with the same logical drive
number.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX96.5 (setpoint switchover: drive control active)
Additional references Function Manual, Special Functions; Chapter "S9: setpoint switchover"
5.6.67 DB31, ... DBX24.7 (master-slave: activate coupling)
DB31, ... DBX24.7 Master-slave: activate coupling

Update Cyclic
Edge change 0 → 1 Activation of the master-slave coupling is requested.
Edge change 1 → 0 Deactivation of the master-slave coupling is requested.
Additional information A master-slave coupling can be activated/deactivated for specific axes via interface signal
DB31, ... DBX24.7.
The following conditions must be satisfied for activating/deactivating a master-slave cou‐
pling:
● MD37262 = 0: The master-slave coupling is not continuously active.
● DB31, ... DBX61.5 == 1: Master and slave axis must be in position control.
● DB31, ... DBX61.4 == 1 Master and slave axis must be stationary.
● DB21, ... DBX35.7 == 1: the channels of the master and slave axes must be in the
"Reset" state.
If a condition is not fulfilled, the coupling will not be activated or deactivated. An alarm is
not output and the state of the coupling remains the same. If, at a later point, all conditions
are fulfilled, the coupling will be activated or deactivated depending on the state of the sig‐
nal.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX35.7 (reset channel status)
DB31, ... DBX61.4 (axis/spindle stationary (n < nmin))
DB31, ... DBX96.7 (master-slave: coupling active)
MD37262 $MA_MS_COUPLING_ALWAYS_ACTIVE (permanent master-slave coupling)

5.6.68 DB31, ... DBX26.4 (enable following axis override)
DB31, ... DBX26.4 Enable following axis override

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Additional traversing motion can be overlaid on the following axis.
Signal state 0 The following axis cannot be overlaid and traversed.
Additional information This signal is required for the flying synchronization of master and slave axes.
As long as the "Enable following axis overlay" signal stays set to "1", the following axis se‐
lected with EGONSYN will traverse to synchronization in the EG coupling group. If the EG
axis grouping includes modulo axes, their position values are reduced in the modulo, there‐
by ensuring that they approach the next possible synchronization.
If, for the following axis "Enable following axis overlay" has notbeen set, then the axis it
does not traverse to synchronization. Instead, the program is stopped at the EGONSYN
block and the self-clearing alarm 16771 is issued.
Additional references Function Manual, Special Functions; Chapter "M3: axis couplings"
5.6.69 DB31, ... DBX28.0 (oscillation reversal from external)
DB31, ... DBX28.0 Oscillation reversal from external

Update Cyclic
Edge change 0 → 1 Brake oscillation motion and move oscillation axis in the opposite direction with the oscilla‐
tion axis.
Edge change 1 → 0 Continue oscillation without interruption
Additional references Function Manual, Extended Functions; Chapter "P5: Oscillation"
5.6.70 DB31, ... DBX28.1 (PLC-controlled axis: Reset)
DB31, ... DBX28.1 PLC-controlled axis: Reset

Update Cyclic
Edge change 0 → 1 PLC-controlled axis: Reset is requested

DB31, ... DBX28.1 PLC-controlled axis: Reset

Additional information NC responses:
● The axis is transitioned into the "Single axis in Reset" status:
$AA_SNGLAX_STAT == 1
● Stopped sequences are canceled.
● Internal axis states are reset.
● Axis specific, machine data active at reset become active.
● Execution is confirmed:
– DB31, ... DBX63.0 (reset executed) == 1
– DB31, ... DBX63.2 (axis stop active) == 0
● Result: The axis is in the reset state.
Note
In conjunction with a channel reset, no axial machine data is active for axes controlled from
the PLC.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX28.7 (PLC-controlled axis)
DB31, ... DBX63.1 (reset executed)
DB31, ... DBX63.2 (axis stop active)
System variable: $AA_SNGLAX_STAT (status of the single axis)
OPI variable: aaSnglAxStat
Additional references Function Manual, Extended Functions; Chapter "P2: positioning axes"
5.6.71 DB31, ... DBX28.2 (PLC-controlled axis: Resume)
DB31, ... DBX28.2 PLC-controlled axis: Resume

Update Cyclic
Edge change 0 → 1 PLC-controlled axis: Resume uninterrupted traversing motion is requested

DB31, ... DBX28.2 PLC-controlled axis: Resume

Additional information Using the signal, the traversing motion of an axis - controlled from the PLC - which is in the
"Single axis is interrupted" status ($AA_SNGLAX_STAT = 3), is resumed.
NC responses:
● Checks whether, for the axis, an axis-specific alarm with delete criterion
"CANCELCLEAR" or "NCSTARTCLEAR" is present? If yes, then this is deleted.
● Checks whether axis motion can be resumed? If yes, then the axis makes the transition
into the "Single axis is active" state.
– DB31,... DBX60.6 (position reached with exact stop coarse) == 0
– DB31, ... DBX60.7 (position reached with exact stop fine) == 0
– DB31, ... DBX64.6 / 7 (traversing command minus/plus) == 1
● Result: Traversing motion of the axis is resumed.
Note
The signal is ignored in the following cases:
● The axis is not controlled by the PLC.
● The axis is not in the "Single axis is interrupted" status.
● It is not permissible that axis traversing motion resumes due to an active alarm.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX28.6 (PLC-controlled axis: Stop along braking ramp)
DB31, ... DBX28.7 (PLC-controlled axis)
DB31, ... DBX60.6 (position reached with exact stop coarse)
DB31, ... DBX60.7 (position reached with exact stop fine)
DB31, ... DBX64.6 (traversing command "minus")
DB31, ... DBX64.7 (traversing command "plus")
5.6.72 DB31, ... DBX28.3 (set reversal point)
DB31, ... DBX28.3 Set reversal point

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Reversal point 2
Signal state 0 Reversal point 1

5.6.73 DB31, ... DBX28.4 (change reversal point)
DB31, …DBX28.4 Change reversal point

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The reversal point position can be changed by manually traversing the axis.
In conjunction with DB31, ...DBX28.0 (oscillation reversal from external):
The position at which the axis is braked after "oscillation reversal from external", should be
the new reversal point.
Signal state 0 The reversal point position cannot be changed by manually traversing the axis.
In conjunction with DB31, ...DBX28.0 (oscillation reversal from external):
No change of the reversal point position.
Additional information The braking position of the axis can be accepted as the new reversal position by means of
the signal DB31, ... DBX28.4 (change reversal position). The signal DB31, ... DBX28.3 (set
reversal point) is ignored, but rather the change affects the last initiated "Oscillation rever‐
sal from external" command.
Note
For the axis, it is not permissible that changing the reversal points via traversing keys or
handwheel is active. In this case, display alarm 20081 "Braking position cannot be used as
reversal point - handwheel active "is signaled.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX28.0 (oscillation reversal from external)
DB31, ... DBX28.3 (set reversal point)
5.6.74 DB31, ... DBX28.5 (PLC-controlled axis: Stop at the next reversal point)
DB31, ... DBX28.5 PLC-controlled axis: Stop at the next reversal point
Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Interrupt oscillation motion of the PLC-controlled axis at the next reversal point.
Signal state 0 There is no request to interrupt the oscillation motion of the PLC-controlled axis at the next
reversal point.
5.6.75 DB31, ... DBX28.6 (PLC-controlled axis: Stop along braking ramp)
DB31, ... DBX28.6 PLC-controlled axis: Stop along braking ramp

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 PLC-controlled axis: Braking the axis along a braking ramp is requested.

DB31, ... DBX28.6 PLC-controlled axis: Stop along braking ramp

Signal state 0 PLC-controlled axis: Braking the axis along a braking ramp is not requested.
Additional information Using the signal, the traversing motion of an axis - controlled from the PLC - can be stop‐
ped.
NC responses:
● The axis is braked down to standstill along its deceleration characteristic.
● The axis is transitioned into the "Single axis is interrupted" status:
– DB31,... DBX60.6 (position reached with exact stop coarse) == 1
– DB31, ... DBX60.7 (position reached with exact stop fine) == 1
– DB31, ... DBX64.6 / 7 ("Plus" / "Minus" traversing command) == 0
● Result: Axis is stopped.
Note
Following axis movements can only be suppressed when the leading axis stops.
Retraction motion triggered by the "Extended stop and retract" function cannot be stopped.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX28.5 (PLC-controlled axis: Stop at the next reversal point)
DB31, ... DBX64.6 (traversing command "minus")
DB31, ... DBX64.7 (traversing command "plus")
5.6.76 DB31, ... DBX28.7 (request, PLC-controlled axis)
DB31, ... DBX28.7 Request PLC-controlled axis

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Axis control should be relinquished to the PLC.
Signal state 0 There is no request that axis control is transferred to the PLC.
Additional information NC responses:
● Checks whether the axis is a main run axis or a neutral axis.
● Checks whether an additional axis may be controlled from the PLC.
● Transfer is confirmed:
– DB31, ... DBX63.1 (PLC controls axis) == 1
– $AA_SNGLAX_STAT == 1
● Result: PLC controls axis.

DB31, ... DBX28.7 Request PLC-controlled axis

Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX63.1 (PLC-controlled axis)
5.6.77 DB31, ... DBX31.5 (disable synchronization)
DB31, ... DBX31.5 Disable synchronization

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Synchronous spindle coupling: The PLC blocks synchronization motion for the following
spindle specified by offset programming.
Signal state 0 Synchronous spindle coupling: The PLC does not block synchronization motion for the fol‐
lowing spindle specified by offset programming.
Additional information When the main run advances to a block with the part program statement
COUPON(<FS>,<LS>,<offset>), then interface signal DB31, ... DBX31.5 (block syn‐
chronization) is evaluated for the following spindle:
● For DB31, ... DBX31.5 == 1, only continuous velocity synchronous operation is
established. The following spindle does not execute any additional movement. The
coupling then responds analogously to a programmed COUPON(<FS>,<LS>).
● For DB31, ... DBX31.5 == 0, the axis only moves through the position offset.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX84.4 (active spindle operating mode: Synchronous operation)
DB31, ... DBX98.1 (coarse synchronous operation)
DB31, ... DBX98.0 (fine synchronous operation)
Additional references Function Manual, Extended Functions; Chapter "S3: Synchronous spindle"
5.6.78 DB31, ... DBX34.0 - 1 (setpoint limitation)
DB31, ... DBX34.0 - 1 Setpoint limitation

Update Cyclic
Further information With the interface signals, one of the four setpoint speed limits parameterized in
MD36933 $MA_SAFE_DES_VELO_LIMIT[0 ... 3] can be activated, irrespective of the ac‐
tive SG stage.
Bit 1 Bit 0 Meaning: Activation of
0 0 MD36933 $MA_SAFE_DES_VELO_LIMIT[ 0 ]
Corresponds with MD36933 $MA_SAFE_DES_VELO_LIMIT[0 ... 3]
Additional references Function Manual, Safety Integrated

5.6.79 DB31, ... DBX60.0 (spindle / rotary axis)
DB31, ... DBX60.0 Spindle

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The machine axis is operated as a spindle in the following modes:
● Control mode
● Oscillation mode
● Positioning mode
● Tapping with compensating chuck
● Synchronous mode
The interface signals to the axis (DB31, ... DBB12 - DBB15) and from the axis (DB31, ...
DBB74 - DBB81) are invalid.
The interface signals to the spindle (DB31, ... DBB16 - DBB19) and from the spindle
(DB31, ... DBB82 - DBB91) are valid.
Signal state 0 The machine axis is operated as rotary axis.
The interface signals to the axis (DB31, ... DBB12 - DBB15) and from the axis (DB31, ...
DBB74 - DBB81) are valid.
The interface signals to the spindle (DB31, ... DBB16 - DBB19) and from the spindle
(DB31, ... DBB82 - DBB91) are invalid.
Additional information If a machine axis is operated alternating as spindle or rotary axis, using the signal it is pos‐
sible to identify which mode is currently active.
● Turning machine: Spindle ↔ C axis
● Milling machine: Spindle ↔ rotary axis for rigid tapping
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBB82 - DBB91
5.6.80 DB31, ... DBX60.1 (NCU link axis active)
DB31, ... DBX60.1 NCU link: Axis active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The axis is active as NCU link axis.
Signal state 0 The axis is not active as NCU link axis.
Additional information The signal is irrelevant for a system with an NCU.
Additional references ● Function Manual, Extended Functions; Chapter "B3: Distributed systems - 840D sl only"

5.6.81 DB31, ... DBX60.2 (encoder limit frequency exceeded 1)
DB31, ... DBX60.2 Encoder limit frequency exceeded, measuring system 1

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The encoder frequency limit of measuring system 2 has been exceeded ⇒
● DB31, ... .DBX60.4 = 0 (referenced/synchronized position measuring system 1)
● DB31, ... .DBX61.5 = 0 (position controller active)
● DB31, ... .DBX61.5 = 1 (speed controller active) only for a spindle
● Axis is stopped (fast stop)
Signal state 0 The encoder frequency limit of measuring system 2 has not been exceeded, or after it was
exceeded, the encoder frequency limit for encoder resynchronization was fallen below
again:
MD36302 $MA_ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW
Additional information The encoder frequency limit to be monitored is set using the following machine data:
MD36300 $MA_ENC_FREQ_LIMIT
The monitoring of the encoder frequency limit always refers to the active measuring sys‐
tem selected in the NC/PLC interface:
DB31, ... DBX1.5 / 6 (position measuring system 1 / 2)
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX1.5 (position measuring system 1)
DB31, ... DBX1.6 (position measuring system 2)
MD36300 $MA_ENC_FREQ_LIMIT (encoder frequency limit)
MD36302 $MA_ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW (encoder frequency limit for encoder resynchroni‐
zation)
Additional references Basic Functions Function Manual; Chapter "A3: Axis monitoring functions" > "Measuring
system monitoring" > "Encoder frequency limit monitoring"
5.6.82 DB31, ... DBX60.3 (encoder frequency limit exceeded, measuring system 2)
DB31, ... DBX60.3 Encoder frequency limit exceeded, measuring system 2

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The encoder frequency limit of measuring system 2 has been exceeded ⇒
● DB31, ... .DBX60.5 = 0 (referenced/synchronized position measuring system 2)
● DB31, ... .DBX61.5 = 0 (position controller active)
● DB31, ... .DBX61.5 = 1 (speed controller active) only for a spindle
● Axis is stopped (fast stop)
Signal state 0 The encoder frequency limit of measuring system 2 has not been exceeded, or after it was
exceeded, the encoder frequency limit for encoder resynchronization was fallen below
again:
MD36302 $MA_ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW

DB31, ... DBX60.3 Encoder frequency limit exceeded, measuring system 2

Additional information The encoder frequency limit to be monitored is set using the following machine data:
MD36300 $MA_ENC_FREQ_LIMIT
The monitoring of the encoder frequency limit always refers to the active measuring sys‐
tem selected in the NC/PLC interface:
DB31, ... DBX1.5 / 6 (position measuring system 1 / 2)
DB31, ... DBX1.6 (position measuring system 2)
MD36300 $MA_ENC_FREQ_LIMIT (encoder frequency limit)
MD36302 $MA_ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW (encoder frequency limit for encoder resynchroni‐
zation)
Additional references Basic Functions Function Manual; Chapter "A3: Axis monitoring functions" > "Measuring
system monitoring" > "Encoder frequency limit monitoring"
5.6.83 DB31, ... DBX60.4 (referenced/synchronized 1)
DB31, ... DBX60.4 Referenced / synchronized 1

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Position measuring system 1 of the machine axis is referenced/synchronized.
Signal state 0 Position measuring system 1 of the machine axis is not referenced/synchronized.
After successful referencing or synchronizing, the interface signal is set
Spindle
The interface signal is set at the latest after one spindle revolution (360 degrees), if the
zero mark was passed or the contactless proximity switch has responded.
DB31, ... DBX2.4 - 7 (reference point value 1 to 4)
DB31, ... DBX12.7 (reference point approach deceleration)
DB31, ... DBX71.4 (position restored encoder 1)
MD34102 $MA_REFP_SYNC_ENCS (measuring system calibration)
5.6.84 DB31, ... DBX60.5 (referenced/synchronized 2)
DB31, ... DBX60.5 Referenced/synchronized 2

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Position measuring system 2 of the machine axis is referenced/synchronized.
Signal state 0 Position measuring system 2 of the machine axis is not referenced/synchronized.

DB31, ... DBX60.5 Referenced/synchronized 2

After successful referencing or synchronizing, the interface signal is set
Spindle
The interface signal is set at the latest after one spindle revolution (360 degrees), if the
zero mark was passed or the contactless proximity switch has responded.
DB31, ... DBX2.4 - 7 (reference point value 1 to 4)
DB31, ... DBX12.7 (reference point approach deceleration)
5.6.85 DB31,... DBX60.6 (position reached with exact stop coarse)
DB31, ... DBX60.6 Position reached with exact stop coarse

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 At least one of the following states applies:
● The axis is not traversing, and the actual axis position is within the parameterized exact
stop limit MD36000 $MA_STOP_LIMIT_COARSE
● The control system is in the "Reset" state
● The axis was last programmed as positioning axis or positioning spindle.
● Path motion was terminated with an NC stop.
● The spindle is in closed-loop position control (SPCON/SPOS) and is stationary
● The axis was switched over from closed-loop speed to closed-loop position control
● The axis is traversing
● Traversing motion is pending for the axis
● The actual axis position lies outside the parameterized exact stop limit
MD36000 $MA_STOP_LIMIT_COARSE
● The spindle is in closed-loop speed control (SPCOF/SPOSA)
● The axis is in the "Follow-up mode" state
● The axis is in the "Park" state
● The axis was switched over from closed-loop position to closed-loop speed control
Corresponds with MD36000 $MA_STOP_LIMIT_COARSE (exact stop coarse)

5.6.86 DB31, ... DBX60.7 (position reached with exact stop fine)
DB31, ... DBX60.7 Position reached with exact stop fine

Update Cyclic
● The axis is not traversing, and the actual axis position is within the parameterized exact
stop limit MD36010 $MA_STOP_LIMIT_FINE
● The control system is in the "Reset" state
● The axis was last programmed as positioning axis or positioning spindle.
● Path motion was terminated with an NC stop.
● The spindle is in closed-loop position control (SPCON/SPOS) and is stationary
● The axis was switched over from closed-loop speed to closed-loop position control
● The axis is traversing
● Traversing motion is pending for the axis
● The actual axis position lies outside the parameterized exact stop limit
MD36010 $MA_STOP_LIMIT_FINE
● The spindle is in closed-loop speed control (SPCOF/SPOSA)
● The axis is in the "Follow-up mode" state
● The axis is in the "Park" state
● The axis was switched over from closed-loop position to closed-loop speed control
Corresponds with MD36010 $MA_STOP_LIMIT_FINE (exact stop fine)
5.6.87 DB31, ... DBX61.0 (drive test travel request)
DB31, ... DBX61.0 Drive test travel request

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The travel enable for the drive test is requested, as the travel conditions for the axis are
satisfied:
● The mechanical brake of the axis involved was previously released.
● Axis disable is not active DB31, ... DBX1.3 == 0
The feedback signal is realized using: DB31, ... DBX1.0 == 1
Signal state 0 The travel enable for the drive test is not requested
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX1.0 (drive test travel enable)

5.6.88 DB31, ... DBX61.1 (axis-specific alarm)
DB31, ... DBX61.1 Axis-specific alarm

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 An axis-specific alarm is output.
Signal state 0 No alarm
Additional information Responses:
● The axis is braked down to standstill along its deceleration characteristic.
● Status of the axis is transitioned into "Single axis alarm is active":
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX28.7 (request, PLC-controlled axis)
5.6.89 DB31, ... DBX61.2 (axis ready)
DB31, ... DBX61.2 NCU link: Axis ready

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The axis is ready.
Signal state 0 The axis is not ready.
Additional information The signal is processed on the NCU to which the drive of the axis connected. The axis is
not ready, if, on this NCU an alarm with system response "NC ..." or "Mode group..." or
"Channel not ready" is displayed, which involves this specific axis.
Additional references Function Manual, Extended Functions; Chapter "B3: Distributed systems - 840D sl only"
5.6.90 DB31, ... DBX61.3 (follow-up active)
DB31, ... DBX61.3 Follow-up active

Update Cyclic

DB31, ... DBX61.3 Follow-up active

Signal state 1 The follow-up mode for the axis/spindle is active.
Possible causes:
● The controller enable for the drive has been withdrawn.
– DB31, ... .DBX2.1 == 0 (controller enable)
– in the control for faults; see under "Additional reference"
● Follow-up mode was selected:
– DB31, ... DBX1.4 == 1 (follow-up mode).
– in the control, e.g. when withdrawing the controller enable for a traversing axis
During the follow-up mode: position setpoint = actual position value
Note
The standstill and clamping monitoring are not active.
Signal state 0 The follow-up mode for the axis/spindle is not active.
The standstill and clamping monitoring are active.
In the "Hold" state, the "Follow-up mode active" signal is not set.
Notice
Delete distance-to-go is executed in the control for the following state transitions:
● From the state "Follow-up" into the state "Hold" (DB31, ... DBX1.4 = 1 → 0 (follow-up
mode))
● From the state "Follow-up" into the state "Position control" (DB31, ... .DBX2.1 = 1
(controller enable))
5.6.91 DB31, ... DBX61.4 (axis/spindle stationary (n < nmin))
DB31, ... DBX61.4 Axis/spindle stationary (n < nmin) (status)

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The axis/spindle is stationary This means that the actual velocity of the axis or the actual
speed of the spindle is less than or equal to the parameterized limit value:
MD36060 $MA_STANDSTILL_VELO_TOL

DB31, ... DBX61.4 Axis/spindle stationary (n < nmin) (status)

Signal state 0 The axis/spindle is not stationary This means that the actual velocity of the axis or the ac‐
tual speed of the spindle is greater than the parameterized limit value:
MD36060 $MA_STANDSTILL_VELO_TOL
If a travel command is present, e.g. for a spindle, then the signal is always = 0 - even if the
actual speed lies below that specified in MD36060.
If the interface signal:
DB31, ... DBX61.4 (axis/spindle stationary)
is signaled and there is no closed-loop position control active for the spindle, then at the
user interface, an actual speed of zero is displayed and with the system variable $AA_S[n]
zero is read.
Additional information The signal is always 0 if, for the axis/spindle, a travel command is present
(DB31, ... .DBX64.6 or .7) - or if the actual velocity of the axis or actual speed of the spin‐
dle is less than or equal to the parameterized limit value.
Corresponds with MD36060 $MA_STANDSTILL_VELO_TOL (maximum velocity/speed for signal "Axis/spin‐
dle stationary")
5.6.92 DB31, ... DBX61.5 (position controller active)
DB31, ... DBX61.5 Position controller active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The position controller is active, i.e. the position control loop of the axis/spindle is closed.
Signal state 0 The position controller is not active, i.e. the position control loop of the axis/spindle is not
closed.
The signal is reset if the controller enable (DB31, ... DBX2.1 == 0) is reset by the PLC user
program, or as a result of an internal fault.
Additional information Spindle without position control
For a spindle without position control, the signal is always 0.
Spindle with position control
For spindles with the option of position control, after activating the position control, e.g.us‐
ing SPCON or M70, then the signal is handled the same as for a position-controlled axis.
Vertical axis
For a vertical axis, the holding brake should be activated as soon as the position control is
no longer active (DB31, ... DBX61.5 == 0).
Simulation axis
The output of the signal can also be parameterized for a simulation axis:
MD30350 $MA_SIMU_AX_VDI_OUTPUT = 1
DB31, ... DBX1.5 and .6 (position measuring systems 1 and 2)

5.6.93 DB31, ... DBX61.6 (speed controller active)
DB31, ... DBX61.6 Speed controller active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The speed controller is active, i.e. the speed control loop of the axis/spindle is closed.
Signal state 0 The speed controller is not active, i.e. the speed control loop of the axis is not closed.
The speed controller output is cleared.
Additional information Spindle without position control
If the spindle is not under position control, the signal can be used as a feedback signal for
signal DB31, ... DBX2.1 (controller enable).
Simulation axis
The output of the signal can also be parameterized for a simulation axis:
MD30350 $MA_SIMU_AX_VDI_OUTPUT = 1
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX61.5 (position controller active)
5.6.94 DB31, ... DBX61.7 (current controller active)
DB31, ... DBX61.7 Current controller active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The current controller is active, i.e. the current control loop of the axis/spindle is closed.
Signal state 0 The current controller is not active, i.e. the current control loop of the axis is not closed.
The current controller output, including the injection variables on the control voltage, is
cleared.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX61.5 (position controller active)
5.6.95 DB31, ... DBX62.0 (software cams active)
DB31, ... DBX62.0 Software cams active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The output of the minus and plus cam signals of an axis to the PLC interface is active.
Signal state 0 The output of the minus and plus cam signals of an axis to the PLC interface is not active.
DB10 DBX114.0 - 117.7 (software cams: plus cam signal 1 to 32)
nals"

5.6.96 DB31, ... DBX62.1 (handwheel override active)
DB31, ... DBX62.1 Handwheel override active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The "Handwheel override in AUTOMATIC mode" function is active for the programmed po‐
sitioning axis (FDA[<axis>]).
Signal state 0 The "Handwheel override in automatic mode" function is not active for the programmed po‐
sitioning axis.
Additional information For the positioning axis, the handwheel pulses either act as path definition (for
FDA[<axis>]=0) - or as velocity override (for FDA[<axis>]>0) on the programmed axis
feed.
In the following cases, the override is inactive:
● The positioning axis has reached the programmed target position.
● The distance-to-go has been deleted.
● Reset was initiated.
Note
SINUMERIK 840D sl: The interface signal will also be set if "Handwheel override in auto‐
matic mode" is active with a concurrent positioning axis with FC18.
5.6.97 DB31, ... DBX62.2 (revolutional feedrate active)
DB31, ... DBX62.2 Revolutional feedrate active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Revolutional feedrate (G95) is active.
Signal state 0 Revolutional feedrate (G95) is not active.
Further information The interface signal indicates that in JOG mode or AUTOMATIC mode, the axes traverse
as a positioning axis with revolutional feedrate.
Corresponds with SD41100 $SN_JOG_REV_IS_ACTIVE (JOG: Revolutional/linear feedrate)
SD41120 $SN_JOG_REV_SET_VELO (revolutional feedrate of the axes JOG)
SD42600 $SC_JOG_FEED_PER_REV_SOURCE (control of the revolutional feedrate in
JOG)
SD43300 $SA_ASSIGN_FEED_PER_REV_SOURCE (revolutional feedrate for positioning
axes/spindles)
MD32040 $MA_JOG_REV_VELO_RAPID (revolutional feed rate for JOG with rapid tra‐
verse override)
MD32050 $MA_JOG_REV_VELO (revolutional feed rate for JOG mode)
Additional references Function Manual Basic Functions; Chapter "V1: feedrates" "Path feedrate F" > "Feedrate
type G93, G94, G95"

5.6.98 DB31, ... DBX62.3 (measurement active)
DB31, ... DBX62.3 Measurement active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 A measuring function is active.
Signal state 0 A measuring function is not active.
Additional information Interface signal DBX31, ... DBX62.3 shows the instantaneous measurement status of the
axis, and can be evaluated for all measuring functions.
Additional references Function Manual, Extended Functions; Chapter "M5: Measuring"
5.6.99 DB31, ... DBX62.4 (activate travel to fixed stop)
DB31, ...DBX62.4 Activate travel to fixed stop

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Request to enable travel to fixed stop.
Signal state 0 No request
Additional information The feedback signal is realized via DB31, ... DBX3.1 (enable travel to fixed stop)
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX3.1 (enable travel to fixed stop)
5.6.100 DB31, ... DBX62.5 (fixed stop reached)
DB31, ... DBX62.5 Fixed stop reached

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Fixed stop has been reached.
Signal state 0 Fixed stop has not been reached.
Additional information Application example
In order that a programmable clamping torque can be specified, for analog drives, the sig‐
nal is used to switch the actuator drive from closed-speed into closed-loop current or tor‐
que controlled operation.
DB31, ... DBX1.2 (fixed stop sensor)

5.6.101 DB31, ... DBX62.7 (axis container rotation active)
DB31, ... DBX62.7 Axis container: Rotation active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 An axis container rotation is active for the axis.
Signal state 0 An axis container rotation is not active for the axis.
Additional references Function Manual, Extended Functions; Chapter "B3: Distributed systems - 840D sl only"
5.6.102 DB31, ... DBX63.0 (reset executed)
DB31, ... DBX63.0 Reset executed

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The PLC-controlled axis is in the reset state.
Signal state 0 The PLC-controlled axis is not in the reset state.
Additional information Reset status:
● The machine data of the axis is reloaded.
● The axis status is at "Single axis in reset":
● DB31, ... DBX63.2 (axis stop active) == 0
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX28.1 (PLC-controlled axis: Reset)
5.6.103 DB31, ... DBX63.1 (PLC-controlled axis)
DB31, ... DBX63.1 PLC-controlled axis

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Axis control is transferred to the PLC.
Signal state 0 The axis is controlled by the NC.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX28.7 (request, PLC-controlled axis)

5.6.104 DB31, ... DBX63.2 (axis stop active)
DB31, …DBX63.2 Axis stop active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The PLC-controlled axis is stopped as a result of DB31, ... DBX28.6 = 1.
Signal state 0 The PLC-controlled axis is stopped.
Additional information After stopping, the axis is in the "Single axis is interrupted" status.
5.6.105 DB31, ... DBX63.3 (axis/spindle disable active)
DB31, ... DBX63.3 Axis/spindle disable active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Axis/spindle disable is active.
Signal state 0 The axis/spindle disable is not active.
Additional information An axis / spindle disable is requested via DB31, ... DBX1.3 = 1
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX1.3 (axis/spindle disable)
DB21, ... DBX33.7 (program test active)
Additional references Behavior in synchronous mode:
Function Manual, Extended Functions; Synchronous Spindle (S3)
5.6.106 DB31, ... DBX64.0 - 2 (handwheel active)
DB31, ... DBX64.0 - 2 Handwheel active

Update Cyclic

DB31, ... DBX64.0 - 2 Handwheel active

0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2
1 0 0 3
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2
0 1 1 3
1 0 0 4
1 0 1 5
1 1 0 6
If the assignment is active, the machine axis can be traversed with the handwheel in JOG
mode or a DRF offset can be generated in AUTOMATIC or MDI mode.
Note
At any one time, the machine axis can only be assigned to one handwheel. If, for bit cod‐
ing, several interface signals are set simultaneously, then the following priority applies:
"Handwheel 1" before "Handwheel 2" before "Handwheel 3".
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX4.0 - 2 (activate handwheel)
5.6.107 DB31, ... DBX64.4 - 5 ("Plus" / "Minus" traversing request)
DB31, ... DBX64.4 - 5 Traversing request "Plus" / "Minus"

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 There is a traversing request for the machine axis.
Signal state 0 There is no traversing request for the machine axis.

DB31, ... DBX64.4 - 5 Traversing request "Plus" / "Minus"

Additional information Depending on the mode selected, the traversing request is initiated in different ways:
● JOG mode
● REF mode
A program block with a traversing operation is executed for a geometry axis.
Bit 4 Traversing command "Minus", travel request in the negative axis direction
Bit 5 Traversing command "Plus" travel request in the positive axis direction
DB31, ... DBX64.6 - 7 ("Plus" / "Minus" traversing command)
5.6.108 DB31, ... DBX64.6 - 7 ("Plus" / "Minus" traversing command)
DB31, ... DBX64.6 - 7 Traversing command "Plus" / "Minus"

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 A travel command is pending for the machine axis
Signal state 0 No travel command is pending for the machine axis
Additional information The travel command is output depending on MD17900 $MN_VDI_FUNCTION_MASK, bit 0.
Bit 6 Travel command "Minus", for traversing in the negative axis direction
Bit 7 Travel command "Plus", for traversing in the positive axis direction
Application example
Note
DB31, ... DBX64.4 - 5 (traversing request "Plus" / "Minus")
5.6.109 DB31, ... DBX65.0 - 6 (active machine function)
DB31, ... DBX65.0 - 6 Active machine function

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The machine function to manually traverse the machine axis is active.
Signal state 0 The machine function to manually traverse the machine axis is not active .

DB31, ... DBX65.0 - 6 Active machine function

Additional information There is a signal for every machine function to manually traverse the machine axis in the
JOG mode.
Bit 0 INC1
Bit 1 INC10
Bit 2 INC100
Bit 3 INC1000
Bit 4 INC10000
Bit 5 INCvar
Note
handwheel differs.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX5.0 - 6 (machine function request)
5.6.110 DB31, ... DBX66.0 (MCS coupling: collision protection active)
DB31, …DBX66.0 MCS coupling: Collision protection active

Signal state 1 Collision protection is active.
Signal state 0 Collision protection is not active.
Additional information Note:
The interface signal must be activated with:
MD63543 $MD_CC_PROTECT_OPTIONS, bit 7 = 1
5.6.111 DB31, ... DBX67.0 (handwheel direction of rotation inversion active)
DB31, ...DBX67.0 Handwheel direction of rotation inversion active

Update Cyclic

DB31, ...DBX67.0 Handwheel direction of rotation inversion active

Signal state 1 The inversion of the direction of rotation of the handwheel assigned to the machine axis is
active.
Signal state 0 The inversion of the direction of rotation of the handwheel assigned to the machine axis is
not active.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX7.0 (invert handwheel direction of rotation)
5.6.112 DB31, ... DBB68 (status axis/spindle replacement)
DB31, ... DBB68 Status axis/spindle replacement

Update Cyclic
Additional information The current status of an axis with regard to axis/spindle replacement can be read by the
PLC user program via DBB68.
Bit Meaning
0 ... 3 Name of the channel to which the axis/spindle is assigned (binary code).
Example:
The axis is assigned to channel 2:
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Channel num‐
ber
0 0 1 0 2
4 New axis type is requested from the PLC.
5 Axis replacement is possible
6 Axis is "neutral axis/spindle".
7 Axis is "PLC axis/spindle".
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBB8 (request axis/spindle replacement)
MD20070 $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED (machine axis number valid in channel)
MD30550 $MA_AXCONF_ASSIGN_MASTER_CHAN (initial setting of channel for axis re‐
placement)
Additional references Function Manual, Extended Functions; Chapter "K10: Cross-channel axis interchange"
5.6.113 DB31, ... DBX69.0 - 2 (active position controller parameter set)
DB31, ... DBX69.0 - 2 Active position controller parameter set


DB31, ... DBX69.0 - 2 Active position controller parameter set

Additional information Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Parameter set
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 2
0 1 0 3
0 1 1 4
1 0 0 5
1 0 1 6
1 1 0 6
1 1 1 6
Note
The interface is irrelevant when the switchover is deactivated
MD35590 $MA_PARAMSET_CHANGE_ENABLE == 0
In this case, the 1st parameter set is always active.
Corresponds with DB31, ...DBX9.0 - DBX9.2 (selection: position controller parameter set)
5.6.114 DB31, ... DBX70.0 (REPOS offset)
DB31, ... DBX70.0 REPOS offset

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 A REPOS offset must be applied for the axis.
Signal state 0 No REPOS offset needs to be applied for the axis.
POS)"

5.6.115 DB31, ... DBX70.1 (REPOS offset valid)
DB31, ... DBX70.1 REPOS offset valid

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The REPOS offset has been calculated as valid
Signal state 0 The REPOS offset has been calculated as invalid.
POS)"
5.6.116 DB31, ... DBX70.2 (REPOS delay acknowledgment)
DB31, ... DBX70.2 REPOS delay acknowledgment

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The REPOS delay is acknowledged.
Note
A REPOS offset was pending for the axis and "REPOS delay" was active:
DB31, ... DBX10.0 == 1 (REPOS delay)
The axis was programmed within a traversing block, and the REPOS offset was applied.
The interface signal behaves just like:
DB21, ... DBX319.1 - 3 (REPOS approach mode acknowledgment)
Signal state 0 The REPOS delay is still not acknowledged - or there is no REPOS offset available.

DB31, ... DBX70.2 REPOS delay acknowledgment

POS)"
5.6.117 DB31, ... DBX71.4 (position restored measuring system 1)
DB31, ... DBX71.4 Position restored, measuring system 1

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The position of measuring system 1 of the machine axis is restored.
Signal state 0 The position of measuring system 1 of the machine axis is not restored.
Additional information MD34210 $MA_ENC_REFP_STATE == 3
After the control system has powered up, for distance-coded, incremental measuring sys‐
tems the last axis position buffered before switch off is restored. Referencing does not take
place automatically. The position measuring system is in the "position restored" state.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX71.5 (position restored, measuring system 2)
MD34210 $MA_ENC_REFP_STATE (adjustment status absolute encoder)
5.6.118 DB31, ... DBX71.5 (position restored, measuring system 2)

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The position of measuring system 2 of the machine axis is restored.
Signal state 0 The position of measuring system 2 of the machine axis is not restored.


Additional information MD34210 $MA_ENC_REFP_STATE == 3
After the control system has powered up, for distance-coded, incremental measuring sys‐
tems the last axis position buffered before switch off is restored. Referencing does not take
place automatically. The position measuring system is in the "position restored" state.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX71.4 (position restored measuring system 1)
MD34210 $MA_ENC_REFP_STATE (adjustment status absolute encoder)
DB31, ... DBX72.0 REPOS delay active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The REPOS delay is active.
After a block search, a REPOS offset is applied for this axis. However it is not applied us‐
ing the approach block, but rather using the next traversing block in which the axis is pro‐
grammed.
Signal state 0 A REPOS delay is not active.
If the machine axes are involved on a path (DB31, ... DBX76.4 == 1 (path axis)), then the
interface signal is not active.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX72.0 (REPOS delay)
POS)"
5.6.120 DB31, ... DBX74.4 (modulo rotary axis: traversing range limits active)
DB31, ... DBX74.4 Modulo rotary axis: traversing range limits active
Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Traversing range limits (software limit switch, working area limits) active for modulo rotary
axes.
Signal state 0 Traversing range limitation for modulo rotary axes not active.
The signal is irrelevant if linear axes/rotary axes do not have modulo functionality.
Application example
Mounted rotary axis with monitoring
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX12.4 (modulo rotary axis: activate traversing range limits)
Additional references Function Manual, Extended Functions; Chapter "R2: rotary axes"

5.6.121 DB31, ... DBX75.0 - 2 (JOG approach fixed point active)
DB31, ... DBX75.0 - 2 JOG approach fixed point active

Update Cyclic
Additional information As soon as the "Approach fixed point in JOG" function is active, the number of the fixed
point to be approached is signaled back to the PLC binary-coded using DB31, ... DBX75.0 -
2:
Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Number of fixed point to be approached
0 0 0 -
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2
0 1 1 3
1 0 0 4
The selected machine axis can be traversed to the corresponding fixed point with the tra‐
versing keys or the handwheel. The fixed points are defined using machine data MD30600.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX13.0 - 2 (JOG approach fixed point)
DB31, ... DBX75.3 - 5 (JOG approach fixed point reached)
5.6.122 DB31, ... DBX75.3 - 5 (JOG approach fixed point reached)
DB31, ... DBX75.3 - 5 JOG approach fixed point reached

Update Cyclic
Additional information Once the axis for "Approach fixed point in JOG" has reached the fixed point position with
"Exact stop fine", using DB31, ... DBX75.3 - 5 the number of the approached fixed point is
signaled back to the PLC in binary-coded form:
Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Number of the approached fixed point
0 0 0 -
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2
0 1 1 3
1 0 0 4
This feedback signal is also issued if the axis reaches the fixed point position in the ma‐
chine coordinates system via other methods e.g. NC program, FC18 (for 840D sl) or
synchronized action on the setpoint side and comes to a standstill on the actual value side
within the "Exact stop fine" tolerance window.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX13.0 - 2 (JOG approach fixed point)
DB31, ... DBX75.0 - 2 (JOG approach fixed point active)
MD36010 $MA_STOP_LIMIT_FINE (exact stop fine)

5.6.123 DB31, ... DBX75.6 (JOG travel to position active)
DB31, ... DBX75.6 JOG travel to position active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The function "Position travel in JOG" is active.
Signal state 0 The function "Position travel in JOG" is not active
Additional information The selected machine axis can be traversed to the position specified with setting data
SD43320 using the traversing keys or the handwheel.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX13.3 (JOG travel to position)
DB31, ... DBX75.7 (JOG position reached)
5.6.124 DB31, ... DBX75.7 (JOG position reached)
DB31, ... DBX75.7 JOG position reached

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 For "Position travel in JOG", the axis has reached the position specified with SD43320 with
"Exact stop fine".
Signal state 0 For "Position travel in JOG", the axis has still not reached the position specified with
SD43320.
Additional information Approaching the position is started with the traversing keys or the handwheel. The axis tra‐
verses until it comes to an automatic standstill at the position to be approached.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX13.3 (JOG travel to position)
DB31, ... DBX75.6 (JOG travel to position active)
5.6.125 DB31, ... DBX76.0 (lubrication pulse)
DB31, ... DBX76.0 Lubrication pulse

Update Cyclic
Edge change 0 → 1 The traversing path parameterized in machine data (MD33050 $MA_LUBRICATION_DIST)
was traversed.
Edge change 1 → 0 The traversing path parameterized in machine data (MD33050 $MA_LUBRICATION_DIST)
was traversed.

DB31, ... DBX76.0 Lubrication pulse

Additional information As soon as the axis/spindle has moved through the traversing distance set in machine da‐
ta, then the interface signal is inverted.
The distance measurement is always restarted after the control powers up.
Corresponds with MD33050 $MA_LUBRICATION_DIST (lubrication pulse distance)
5.6.126 DB31, ... DBX76.4 (path axis)
DB31, ... DBX76.4 Path axis

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The axis is not a path axis: This means that it is traversed with other axes along a path
(path axis).
Signal state 0 The axis is not a path axis.
In conjunction with block search type 5 (SERUPRO) in the state: "Target block found" - the
interface signal refers to the property of the axis in the target block.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX72.0 (REPOS delay)
POS)"
5.6.127 DB31, ... DBX76.5 (positioning axis)
DB31, ... DBX76.5 Positioning axis

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The axis is a positioning axis.
Signal state 0 The axis is not a positioning axis.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBD78 (feedrate, positioning axis)
5.6.128 DB31, ... DBX76.6 (indexing axis in position)
DB31, ... DBX76.6 Indexing axis in position

Update Cyclic

DB31, ... DBX76.6 Indexing axis in position

Signal state 1 The signal is set to "1" in the following cases:
● The indexing axis has reached the indexing position with "Exact stop fine".
● The indexing axis is located at the indexing position, which was approached in the
AUTOMATIC mode with CAC, CACP, CACN, CDC or CIC.
Signal state 0 The signal is "0" in the following cases:
● The axis is not defined as an indexing axis.
● A traversing command is active, and the indexing axis is traversed.
● The indexing axis is located at a position which is not an indexing position.
● In the AUTOMATIC mode, the indexing axis was not positioned using CAC, CACP,
CACN, CDC or CIC but instead is traversed to any position, for example with AC or DC.
● The "Controller enable" of the indexing axis is withdrawn.
Additional information Signal is irrelevant for axes that have not been defined as indexing axes.
Application example
Tool magazine: Activation of the gripper to remove the tool from the magazine is initiated
as soon as the indexing axis is in position. The PLC user program must ensure this hap‐
pens.
Special cases or errors
The axis positions entered in the indexing position table for the individual divisions can be
changed using work offsets (including DRF).
The interface signal "Indexing axis in position" is set if the actual position of the indexing
axis assumes the position value entered into the indexing table plus the offset.
If a DRF offset is applied to an indexing axis in AUTOMATIC mode, then the "Indexing axis
in position" interface signal remains active even though the axis is no longer at an indexing
position.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX64.6/64.7 (traversing command -/+)
MD30500 $MA_INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB (axis is an indexing axis)
Additional references Function Manual, Extended Functions; Chapter "T1: Indexing axes"
5.6.129 DB31, ... DBX77.0 (collision avoidance: Velocity reduction)
DB31, ... DBX77.0 Collision avoidance: Velocity reduction

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The traversing velocity of the axis is reduced by the collision avoidance.
Signal state 0 The traversing velocity of the axis is not reduced by the collision avoidance.
Additional references Function Manual, Special Functions; Chapter "K9: Collision avoidance"

5.6.130 DB31, ... DBD78 (feedrate, positioning axis)
DB31, ... DBD78 Feedrate, positioning axis

Update Cyclic
Additional information The feedrate value of the axis can be read via the interface if this axis is traversed as posi‐
tioning axis.
Type: REAL
The output time is specified using machine data:
MD22240 $MC_AUXFU_F_SYNC_TYPE
Notes
● As default setting, the output is suppressed, because if the feedrate is output (auxiliary
function output) in the continuous-path mode, then the velocity can drop.
● The last feedrate value is kept until it is overwritten by a new value.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX76.5 (positioning axis)
MD22240 $MC_AUXFU_F_SYNC_TYPE (output time of F functions)
MD32060 $MA_POS_AX_VELO (initial setting for positioning axis velocity)
Additional references Function Manual, Basic Functions; Chapter "V1: Feedrates" > "Feedrate for positioning ax‐
is (FA)"
Function Manual, Extended Functions; Chapter "P2: positioning axes"
5.6.131 DB31, ... DBX82.0 - 2 (set gear stage)
DB31, ... DBX82.0 - 2 Set gear stage

Update Cyclic
Additional information Gear stage requested from the NC, which must be selected at the machine.
Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Meaning:
--- --- --- Axis mode
0 0 0 Gear stage 1
0 0 1 Gear stage 1
0 1 0 Gear stage 2
0 1 1 Gear stage 3
1 0 0 Gear stage 4
1 0 1 Gear stage 5
1 1 0 Gear stage 5
1 1 1 Gear stage 5

5.6.132 DB31, ... DBX82.3 (change over gear stage)
DB31, ... DBX82.3

Change gear stage
Update Cyclic
Edge change 0 → 1 There is an active requested to changeover the gear to the set gear stage.
The gear is only changed over to the new set gear stage if the following applies: Set gear
stage <> actual gear stage
tions" > "Gear stages for spindles and gear stage change"
5.6.133 DB31, ... DBX83.0 (speed limit exceeded)
DB31, ... DBX83.0 Speed limit exceeded

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The speed limit is exceeded.
Signal state 0 The speed limit is not exceeded.
Additional information The speed limit is exceeded if the following applies.
Actual speed > (MD35100 $MA_SPIND_VELO_ LIMIT + MD35150 $MA_SPIND_DES_VE‐
LO_TOL)
Corresponds with MD35150 $MA_SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL (spindle speed tolerance)
MD35100 $MA_SPIND_VELO_LIMIT (maximum spindle speed)
5.6.134 DB31, ... DBX83.1 (speed setpoint limited)
DB31, ... DBX83.1 Setpoint speed limited

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The setpoint speed is limited.
Signal state 0 The setpoint speed is not limited.

DB31, ... DBX83.1 Setpoint speed limited

Additional information The NC has automatically limited the setpoint speed, as it exceeds the active maximum
limit value:
● MD35130 $MA_GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT
● MD35100 $MA_SPIND_VELO_LIMIT
● DB31, ... DBX3.6
● G26
● LIMS
● VELOLIM
● Safety Integrated
MD36931 $MA_SAFE_VELO_LIMIT (limit for safely reduced speed)
Notes
● A possible response in the PLC user program would be to inhibit/lock the path feedrate:
DB21, ... DBX6.0 = 1 (feedrate inhibit)
● The interface signal DB31, ... DBX83.5 (spindle in the setpoint range) is updated.
Safety Integrated
In addition to the limit value MD36931 $MA_SAFE_VELO_LIMIT, depending on the active
safety speed level SG1 ... SGn, the following machine data should be taken into account:
● MD36932 $MA_ SAFE_VELO_OVR_FACTOR
● MD36933 $MA_SAFE_DES_VELO_LIMIT
Example:
All standard limit values are greater than 1500 rpm.
● SG1 is active
● MD36932 $MA_ SAFE_VELO_OVR_FACTOR[<SG1>] = 1111.11111 [rpm]
● MD36933 $MA_SAFE_DES_VELO_LIMIT[<SG1>] = 90%
Programming: M3 S1500
The speed setpoint is limited to 1000 rpm (MD36932 * MD36933) ⇒ DB31, ... DBX83.1 = 1
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX6.0 (feedrate disable)
DB31, ... DBX4.3 (feedrate/spindle stop)
DB31, ... DBX83.2 (speed setpoint increased)
DB31, ... DBX3.6 (spindle speed limitation to MD35160 $MA_SPIND_EXTERN_VELO_LIM‐
IT)
MD35100 $MA_SPIND_VELO_LIMIT (maximum spindle speed)
MD35130 $MA_GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT (maximum speed of gear stage)
MD36931 $MA_SAFE_VELO_LIMIT (limit for safely reduced speed)
MD36932 $MA_ SAFE_VELO_OVR_FACTOR (SG correction values)
MD36933 $MA_SAFE_DES_VELO_LIMIT (SG setpoint speed limit)
G26 (upper spindle speed limit)
LIMS (speed limit for the master spindle when G96/G961/G97 is active)
VELOLIM: programmed spindle speed limit in the open-loop speed controlled mode

5.6.135 DB31, ... DBX83.2 (speed setpoint increased)
DB31, ... DBX83.2 Setpoint speed increased

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The setpoint speed was increased.
Signal state 0 The setpoint speed was not increased.
Additional information The NC has automatically increased the setpoint speed, as it had fallen below the active
minimum limit value:
● MD35120 $MA_GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO
● MD35140 $MA_GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT
● G25
Notes
● A possible response in the PLC user program would be to inhibit/lock the path feedrate:
DB21, ... DBX6.0 = 1 (feedrate inhibit)
● The interface signal DB31, ... DBX83.5 (spindle in the setpoint range) is updated.
DB31, ... DBX83.1 (speed setpoint limited)
MD35120 $MA_GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO (minimum speed for automatic gear stage selec‐
tion M40)
MD35140 $MA_GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT (minimum speed of the gear stage)
G25 (lower spindle speed limitation)
5.6.136 DB31, ... DBX83.3 (geometry monitoring)
DB31, ... DBX83.3 Geometry monitoring

Signal state 1 Error in the grinding wheel geometry
The actual wheel radius falls below the value specified in parameter $TC_TPG3 or the ac‐
tual wheel width ($TC_TPG5) falls below the value defined in parameter $TC_TPG4.
Note
There is no controller-internal error response. Required responses must be programmed
by the PLC user.
Signal state 0 No error in the grinding wheel geometry
Additional information The geometry monitoring is a subfunction of the grinding-specific tool monitoring. The ac‐
tual wheel radius and the actual wheel width are monitored.
Additional references Function Manual, Extended Functions; Chapter "W4: Grinding-specific tool offset and tool
monitoring"

5.6.137 DB31, ... DBX83.5 (spindle in setpoint range)
DB31, ... DBX83.5 Spindle in setpoint range

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The spindle speed is in the setpoint range.
Signal state 0 The spindle speed is not in the setpoint range.
Additional information The spindle speed is in the setpoint range if the following applies.
| Actual speed - setpoint speed | < MD35150 $MA_SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL
Note
It is normal if the spindle speed is not in the setpoint range while accelerating or braking.
DB31, ... DBX83.1 (speed setpoint limited)
DB31, ... DBX83.2 (speed setpoint increased)
Additional references
5.6.138 DB31, ... DBX83.6 (speed monitoring)
DB31, ... DBX83.6 Speed monitoring

Signal state 1 Error in grinding wheel speed
The speed limit value is reached, the speed is limited to the limit value.
Note
There is no controller-internal error response. Required responses must be programmed
by the PLC user.
Signal state 0 No error in grinding wheel speed
Additional information The speed monitoring is a subfunction of the grinding-specific tool monitoring. The speed
monitor checks the grinding wheel peripheral speed in m/s (parameter $TC_TPG7) as well
as the maximum spindle speed in rpm (parameter $TC_TPG6). The speed setpoint is moni‐
tored against the speed limitation cyclically with allowance for the spindle override.
monitoring"
5.6.139 DB31, ... DBX83.7 (clockwise actual direction of rotation)
DB31, ... DBX83.7 Actual direction of rotation clockwise

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Actual direction of rotation: Clockwise
Signal state 0 Actual direction of rotation: Counterclockwise

DB31, ... DBX83.7 Actual direction of rotation clockwise

Additional information The actual direction of rotation is derived from the spindle position measuring encoder.
Note
The interface signal is irrelevant for:
● DB31, ... DBX61.4 == 1 (axis/spindle stationary)
● Spindles without position encoder
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX61.4 (axis/spindle stationary)
5.6.140 DB31, ... DBX84.1 (grinding wheel peripheral speed active)
DB31, ... DBX84.1 Grinding wheel peripheral speed active

Signal state 1 The function "constant grinding wheel peripheral speed (GWPS)" is active.
Signal state 0 The function "Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed (GWPS)" is not active.
Additional information If the function is active, then all S value inputs from the PLC are interpreted as the grinding
wheel peripheral speed.
monitoring"
5.6.141 DB31, ... DBX84.3 (tapping without compensating check active)
DB31, ... DBX84.3 Tapping without compensating chuck active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Rigid tapping (without compensating chuck) active
Signal state 0 Rigid tapping (without compensating chuck) not active
Additional information If "Rigid tapping without compensating chuck" (G331/G332) is active, then internally the
spindle is switched over into closed-loop position controlled axis mode.
Notice
Setting the following interface signals while tapping without compensating chuck (rigid tap‐
ping) will destroy the thread:
● DB11, … DBX0.7 (mode group reset) = 1
● DB21, ... DBX7.7 (channel reset) = 1
● DB31, ... DBX2.1 (controller enable) = 0
● DB31, ... DBX4.3 (feedrate stop) = 1
Corresponds with DB11, … DBX0.7 (mode group reset)
DB21, ... DBX7.7 (channel reset)
DB31, ... DBX4.3 (feedrate stop)

5.6.142 DB31, ... DBX84.4 (active spindle operating mode: Synchronous operation)
DB31, ... DBX84.4 Active spindle mode: Synchronous mode

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The spindle is in the "synchronous mode".
Note
The signal is only set for the machine axis which is active as following spindle:
DB31, ... DBX99.1 (following spindle active) == 1
Signal state 0 The spindle is not operated as a following spindle in the "synchronous mode".
Additional information In the synchronous mode, the following spindle tracks the motion of the leading spindle cor‐
responding to the ratio and the monitoring functions are active for coarse and fine syn‐
chronism.
When deactivating the coupling (deselection of synchronous mode), the following spindle
is switched to the "control mode".
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX98.0 (fine synchronous operation)
DB31, ... DBX98.1 (coarse synchronous operation)
DB31, ... DBX99.1 (following spindle active)
5.6.143 DB31, ... DBX84.5 (active spindle mode: positioning mode)
DB31, ... DBX84.5 Active spindle mode: Positioning mode

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Positioning mode (SPOS or SPOSA) is active.
Signal state 0 Positioning mode (SPOS or SPOSA) is not active.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX84.6 (spindle mode, oscillation mode)
DB31, ... DBX84.7 (spindle mode, control mode)
tions" > "Gear stage change to fixed position"
5.6.144 DB31, ... DBX84.6 (active spindle mode: oscillating mode)
DB31, ... DBX84.6 Active spindle mode: Oscillation mode

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Oscillation mode is active.
Signal state 0 Oscillation mode is not active.

DB31, ... DBX84.6 Active spindle mode: Oscillation mode

When the gear stage is changed over, the spindle automatically goes into the oscillation
mode.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX82.3 (change over gear stage)
DB31, ... DBX84.5 (spindle mode, positioning mode)
DB31, ... DBX84.7 (spindle mode, control mode)
5.6.145 DB31, ... DBX84.7 (active spindle mode: control mode)
DB31, ... DBX84.7 Active spindle mode: Control mode

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Control mode is active
Signal state 0 Control mode is notactive.
Additional information The spindle is in control mode for the following functions:
● Spindle direction of rotation specified by M3/M4 or spindle stop M5
● M41...M45, or automatic gear stage change M40
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX84.5 (spindle mode, positioning mode)
DB31, ... DBX84.6 (spindle mode, oscillation mode)
5.6.146 DB31, ... DBX85.0 (tool with dynamic response limitation)
DB31, ... DBX85.0 Tool with dynamic response limitation

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 After a tool change on the spindle, it is shown that a tool with dynamic response limitation
is in the spindle. To do this, the PLC acknowledgments are evaluated.
The assignment state of the spindles is checked, especially if all tools have a maximum
tool speed, which may be very high so that there is no effective limiting.
Signal state 0 The tool does not contain a parameterized dynamic response limitation.
Corresponds with Option "Tool monitoring for maximum speed"
Tool data TC_TP_MAX_VELO >0 or TC_TP_MAX_ACC >0

5.6.147 DB31, ... DBX85.5 (spindle in position)
DB31, ... DBX85.5 Spindle in position

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The spindle is in position.
Signal state 0 The spindle is not in position.
Additional information Precondition for the output of the interface signal:
● DB31, ... DBX60.7 == 1 (exact stop fine) AND
● Programmed setpoint position is reached
Note
● The interface signal is only processed in the positioning mode (DB31, ... DBX84.5 ==
1), e.g.:
– NC program: SPOS, SPOSA and M19:
– Synchronized action: SPOS and M19
– PLC user program: Positioning with FC18 or DB31, ... DBX30.4
● The interface signal remains set if the spindle is already at the programmed setpoint
position.
Corresponds with DB31, … DBX30.4 (spindle positioning start)
DB31, ... DBX60.7 (exact stop fine)
DB31, ... DBX84.5 (spindle mode, positioning mode)
SPOS
SPOSA
M19
Additional references Basic Functions Function Manual; Chapter "S1: spindles" >
● "Modes" > "Positioning mode" > "Signal "Spindle in position" for tool change"
● "Programming" > "Special spindle motion via PLC interface"
5.6.148 DB31, ... DBW86 (M function for spindle)
DB31, ... DBW86 M function for spindle


DB31, ... DBW86 M function for spindle

Additional information The M function programmed for the spindle in the NC program is output.
Value M function
3 M3 (clockwise spindle rotation)
4 M4 (counterclockwise spindle rotation)
5 M5 (spindle stop)
19 M19 (spindle positioning to the position entered in SD43240)
70 M70 (switchover in axis operation)
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX58.0 - 4 (M function: change)
DB21, ... DBX59.0 - 4 (M function: not decoded)
DB21, ... DBB68 - 97 (M functions for spindles)
5.6.149 DB31, ... DBD88 (S function for spindle)
DB31, ... DBD88 S function for spindle

Additional information The spindle-specific S function programmed in the NC program is output.
The following S functions are checked:
● S.... as spindle speed in rpm (programmed value)
● S .... as constant cutting rate in m/min or ft/min
The following S functions are not output:
● S.... as the programmed spindle speed limiting G25
● S.... as the programmed spindle speed limiting G26
● S .... as spindle speed in rpm if a spindle was not defined in the control system
● S.... as the dwell time in spindle revolutions
Corresponds with DB21, ... DBX60.0 - 2 (S function: change)
DB21, ... DBX60.4 - 6 (S function: Quick)
DB21, ... DBB98 - 115 (S functions for spindles), channel-specific
5.6.150 DB31, ... DBX92.1 (ramp-function generator disable active)

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Ramp function generator fast stop is active for the axis drive.
Signal state 0 Ramp function generator fast stop is not active for the axis drive.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX20.1 (ramp-function generator fast stop)

5.6.151 DB31, ... DBX92.4 (drive-autonomous motion active)
DB31, ... DBX92.4 Drive-autonomous motion active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Drive-autonomous motion is active.
The axis traverses due to setpoints generated by drive-internal functions. The drive still re‐
sponds to control signals of the NC, e.g. controller enable. Setpoints from the NC are ignor‐
ed.
Signal state 0 Drive-autonomous motion is not active.
Additional information DBX92.4 = 1 IF MELDW.11 == 1 (controller enable) AND ZSW1.2 == 0 (operation enabled)
Note
● SINAMICS S120: Message word (MELDW)
The message word (MELDW) is only contained in PROFIdrive telegrams compatible
with SIMODRIVE 611U, for example, telegrams 102, 103, 105, 106, 110, 111, 116,
118, 125, 126, 136, 138, 139
Reference SINAMICS List Manual, Function Diagrams 2419 and 2420
● SINAMICS S120: Status word 1 / 2 (ZSW1/2)
The status words ZSW1 or ZSW2 only refer to SIMODRIVE 611U-compatible
PROFIdrive telegrams in the following (SIMODRIVE 611U interface mode, p2038 = 1)
Internal drive functions:
● Rotor or pole position identification
● Function generator
Additional references SINAMICS S120 Function Manual;
Pole position identification: Chapter "Servo control" > "Pole position identification"
Function generator: Chapter "Servo control" > "Optimization of the current and speed con‐
troller"
5.6.152 DB31, ... DBX93.0 - 4 (motor/drive data set: display)
DB31, ... DBX93.0 - 4 Motor/drive data set: Display

Update Cyclic
Additional information Display interface for the currently active motor (MDS) / drive data set (DDS).
Formatting
Formatting the display interface, i.e. which bits are used to address the motor data sets
(MDS) – and which are used to address the drive data sets (DDS) is set via the formatting
interface (DB31, …DBX130.0 - 4).

DB31, ... DBX93.0 - 4 Motor/drive data set: Display

Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX21.0 - 4 (motor/drive data set: selection)
DB31, …DBX130.0 ... 4 (motor/drive data set: formatting)
5.6.153 DB31, ... DBX93.5 (drive ready)
DB31, ... DBX93.5 Drive ready

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The drive is ready.
Signal state 0 The drive is not ready.
If the signal is reset while operational, the drive is stopped (pulse inhibit or fast stop). When
powering-up, the pulses are still inhibited (canceled). In addition, the following interface sig‐
nals are reset:
● DB10, DBX108.6 = 0 (drive ready)
● DB31, ... DBX61.7 = 0 (current controller active)
● DB31, ... DBX61.6 = 0 (speed controller active)
Additional information Interface signal: DB31, ... DBX93.5 = drive: MELDW.12
Note
118, 125, 126, 136, 138, 139
Corresponds with DB10, DBX108.6 (Drives ready)
● SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual

5.6.154 DB31, ... DBX93.6 (integrator disable, speed controller)
DB31, ... DBX93.6 Integrator disable, speed controller

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The integrator of the speed controller in the drive is inhibited.
The speed controller functions as a P controller.
Signal state 0 The integrator of the speed controller in the drive is not disabled.
The speed controller functions as a PI controller.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX21.6 (integrator disable, speed controller)
5.6.155 DB31, ... DBX93.7 (pulses enabled)
DB31, ... DBX93.7 Pulses enabled

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The drive pulses are enabled.
Signal state 0 The drive pulses are not enabled.
● DB31, ... DBX61.7 = 0 (current controller active)
● DB31, ... DBX61.6 = 0 (speed controller active)
● DB31, ... DBX61.5 = 0 (position controller active)
Additional information DB31, ... DBX93.7 = MELDW.13
Note
118, 125, 126, 136, 138, 139
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX21.7 (pulse enable)
5.6.156 DB31, ... DBX94.0 (motor temperature prewarning)
DB31, ... DBX94.0 Motor temperature prewarning

Update Cyclic

DB31, ... DBX94.0 Motor temperature prewarning

Signal state 1 The motor temperature has exceeded the warning threshold (p0604) configured in the
drive.
Note
If the motor temperature remains too high for longer than the parameterized time (p0606),
a fault is output, the drive is stopped and the pulse enable removed.
If the motor temperature falls below the warning threshold (p0604) again before the time
has expired (p0606), the interface signal is reset.
Signal state 0 The motor temperature is below the warning threshold (p0604).
Additional information The actual motor temperature is displayed on the user interface at:
Operating area "Diagnostics" > "Service display: Axis/spindle"
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX94.1 (heat sink temperature prewarning)
5.6.157 DB31, ... DBX94.1 (heat sink temperature prewarning)
DB31, ... DBX94.1 Heat sink temperature prewarning

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The heat sink temperature of the power semiconductors has exceeded the parameterized
warning threshold (p0294).
Note
The parameterized reaction (p0290) is performed in the drive. If the temperature violation
remains, a fault is output after approx. 20 s, the drive is stopped and the pulse enable re‐
moved.
Signal state 0 The heat sink temperature is below the warning threshold.

DB31, ... DBX94.1 Heat sink temperature prewarning

Additional information The interface signals DB31, ... DBX94.0 and .1 are derived from the following signals of
the cyclic drive telegram:
● Case 1: Temperature alarm in the message word
– DB31, ... DBX94.0 ≙ MELDW, bit 6 (no motor overtemperature warning)
– DB31, ... DBX94.1 ≙ MELDW, bit 7 (no thermal overload in power unit warning)
● Case 2: Alarm of alarm class B (interface mode "SIMODRIVE 611U", p2038 = 1)
DB31, ... DBX94.0 == 1 and DBX94.1 == 1, if the following applies:
cyclic drive telegram, ZSW1: bit 11 == 0 and 12 == 1 (alarm class B)
The interface signals are derived from the alarm of alarm class B if there is no specific infor‐
mation from the message word.
An alarm is displayed. Alarm number = 200.000 + alarm value (r2124)
Note
118, 125, 126, 136, 138, 139
Additional references ● S120 Commissioning Manual, Chapter "Commissioning" > "Temperature sensors for
SINAMICS components"
● S120 Function Manual, Chapter "Monitoring and protection functions"
● S120 List Manual
– MELDW, bit 6 ≙ BO: r2135.14 → function diagram: 2548, 8016
– MELDW, bit 7 ≙ BO: r2135.15 → function diagram: 2548, 2452, 2456, 8016
● SINUMERIK Diagnostics Manual
5.6.158 DB31, ... DBX94.2 (run-up completed)
DB31, ... DBX94.2 Power up completed

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 After a new speed setpoint, the speed actual value has reached the speed tolerance band
defined using drive parameter p2164, and has not left it for the time specified in p2166.
Any subsequent speed fluctuations, also outside the tolerance band, e.g. due to load
changes, will not affect the interface signal.
Signal state 0 The power up operation is still active after the speed setpoint has been changed.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX94.6 ("nact = nset")
DB31, ... DBX94.3 ("|MD| = Mdx")
Additional references ● SINUMERIK Commissioning Manual IBN CNC: NCK, PLC, Drive
● SIMATIC S120 List Manual

5.6.159 DB31, ... DBX94.3 (|Md| < Mdx)
DB31, ... DBX94.3 |Md| < Mdx

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The current torque utilization is below the torque utilization threshold (torque threshold 2,
p2194).
The power up operation has been completed, the drive is in the steady state and the tor‐
que setpoint |Md| drive does not exceed the threshold torque Mdx.
The torque threshold characteristic is speed-dependent.
During the power up operation, DB31, ... DBX94.3 (|Md|< Mdx) == 1. The interface signal is
not updated until the power has been completed (DB31, ... DBX94.2 == 1) and the signal
interlocking time for the threshold torque has expired.
Signal state 0 The torque setpoint |Md| is higher than the threshold torque Mdx.
A motor overload can be determined via the interface signal. An appropriate response can
then be initiated in the PLC user program.
Note
118, 125, 126, 136, 138, 139
Additional references ● SINUMERIK Commissioning Manual IBN CNC: NC, PLC, Drive
● SIMATIC S120 List Manual
5.6.160 DB31, ... DBX94.4 (|nact| < nmin)
DB31, ... DBX94.4 |nact| < nmin

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The actual speed value nact is less than nmin (speed threshold value 3, p2161).
Signal state 0 The actual speed value is greater than the minimum threshold speed nmin.

DB31, ... DBX94.4 |nact| < nmin

Note
118, 125, 126, 136, 138, 139
5.6.161 DB31, ... DBX94.5 (|nact| < nx)
DB31, ... DBX94.5 |nact| < nx

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The actual speed value nact is less than nx (speed threshold value 2, p2155).
Signal state 0 The actual speed value nact is greater than the threshold speed nx.
Note
118, 125, 126, 136, 138, 139
5.6.162 DB31, ... DBX94.6 (nact = nset)
DB31, ... DBX94.6 nact = nset

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The actual speed value is at least the parameterized time (switch-on delay n_act = n_set,
p2167) within the tolerance band around the speed setpoint (speed threshold value 4,
p2163).

DB31, ... DBX94.6 nact = nset

Signal state 0 The actual speed value is outside the tolerance band around the speed setpoint (speed
threshold value 4, p2163).
5.6.163 DB31, ... DBX94.7 (variable signaling function)
DB31, ... DBX94.7 Variable signaling function

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The parameterized drive variable has exceeded the specified threshold value, including
hysteresis.
Signal state 0 The parameterized drive variable has fallen below the specified threshold value, including
hysteresis.
Additional information Using the "Variable signaling" function, BICO interconnections and parameters which have
the attribute traceable can be monitored in the drive.
DB31, ... DBX94.7 = MELDW.5
Note
118, 125, 126, 136, 138, 139
Additional references SINAMICS S120 Function Manual, Chapter "Servo control" > "Variable signaling function"
5.6.164 DB31, ... DBX95.1 (ESR: DC link undervoltage)
DB31, ... DBX95.1 ESR: DC link undervoltage

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The drive signals that the DC link voltage UDC link is less than the lower DC link voltage
threshold set with parameter p1248.
Signal state 0 The drive signals that the DC link voltage UDC link is greater than they lower DC link voltage
threshold set with parameter p1248.
The PLC user program can initiate measures in order to safely end machining and/or to
buffer the DC link voltage, e.g. initiate a drive-based and/or control-managed extended
stop and retract (ESR).

DB31, ... DBX95.1 ESR: DC link undervoltage

Corresponds with Drive parameter p1248 (lower DC link voltage threshold)
Drive telegram MELDW.Bit 4
Additional references CNC Commissioning Manual: NC, PLC, drive
5.6.165 DB31, ... DBX95.2 (ESR: Response initiated or generator operation active)
DB31, ... DBX95.2 ESR: Response initiated or generator operation active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The drive signals that the configured ESR response has been initiated or generator opera‐
tion is active.
Signal state 0 The drive signals that neither the configured ESR response has been initiated nor that gen‐
erator operation is active.
Corresponds with Drive telegram MELDW.Bit 9
5.6.166 DB31, … DBX95.3 (generator operation minimum speed fallen below)
DB31, ... DBX95.3 ESR: Generator operation - minimum speed fallen below
Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The axis is parameterized as generator axis. The drive signals that the actual speed is less
than the minimum speed set using parameter p2161 (speed threshold value 3).
Signal state 0 The axis is parameterized as generator axis. The drive signals that the actual speed is
greater than the minimum speed set using parameter p2161 (speed threshold value 3).
Additional information The PLC user program can initiate measures in order to safely end machining and/or to
buffer the DC link voltage, e.g. initiate a drive-based and/or control-managed extended
stop and retract (ESR).
Corresponds with Drive parameter p2161 (speed threshold value 3)
Drive telegram MELDW.Bit2
5.6.167 DB31, ... DBX95.7 (alarm of alarm class C is active)
DB31, ... DBX95.7 Alarm of alarm class C is active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The drive signals that an alarm of alarm class C is active.
Signal state 0 The drive signals that no alarm of alarm class C is active.

DB31, ... DBX95.7 Alarm of alarm class C is active

Additional information In the drive, an alarm is the response to a detected potential or expected fault condition
that does not cause the drive to switch off and does not have to be acknowledged.
Additional references SINAMICS S120 List Manual, Chapter "Faults and alarms"
5.6.168 DB31, ... DBX96.2 (master-slave: fine differential speed)
DB31, ... DBX96.2 Master-slave: Fine speed difference

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The speed difference between the master and slave axis lies within the tolerance specified
with MD37272.
Signal state 0 The speed difference between the master and slave axis lies outside the tolerance speci‐
fied with MD37272.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX24.4 (master-slave: activate torque compensatory controller)
DB31, ... DBX24.7 (master-slave: activate coupling)
DB31, ... DBX96.3 (master-slave: coarse speed difference)
MD37272 $MA_MS_VELO_TOL_FINE (master-slave: velocity tolerance fine)
5.6.169 DB31, ... DBX96.3 (master-slave: coarse speed difference)
DB31, ... DBX96.3 Master-slave: Coarse speed difference

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The speed difference between the master and slave axis lies within the tolerance specified
with MD37270.
Signal state 0 The speed difference between the master and slave axis lies outside the tolerance speci‐
fied with MD37270.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX24.7 (master-slave: activate coupling)
DB31, ... DBX96.2 (master-slave: fine differential speed)
MD37270 $MA_MS_VELO_TOL_COARSE (master-slave: Speed tolerance coarse)

5.6.170 DB31, ... DBX96.4 (master-slave: compensatory controller active)
DB31, ... DBX96.4 Master-slave: Compensatory controller active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Torque compensatory control is active.
Signal state 0 Torque compensatory control is not active.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX24.4 (master-slave: activate torque compensatory controller)
MD37254 $MA_MS_TORQUE_CTRL_MODE (interconnection torque compensatory con‐
troller)
5.6.171 DB31, ... DBX96.5 (setpoint switchover: drive control active)
DB31, ... DBX96.5 Setpoint switchover: drive control active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The axis has taken over control of the drive.
Signal state 0 The axis has not taken over control of the drive.
Additional information The controller can only be enabled (DB31, ... DBX2.1) if the axis has control of the drive:
DB31, ... DBX96.5 == 1
Note
All axes included in setpoint switchover that currently do not have drive control, are switch‐
ed to follow-up mode by the control. I.e. they are not in position control. As a consequence,
we recommend that suspended axes are assigned a brake control.
DB31, ... DBX24.5 (setpoint switchover: accept drive control)
Additional references Function Manual, Special Functions; Chapter "S9: setpoint switchover"
5.6.172 DB31, ... DBX96.7 (master-slave: coupling active)
DB31, ... DBX96.7 Master/slave: Active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The coupling is active.
Signal state 0 The coupling is not active.

DB31, ... DBX96.7 Master/slave: Active

For a master/slave coupling, for the brake control logic of the slave axes, it is no longer
permissible that the interface signal DB31, ... DBX61.5 (position controller active) is evalu‐
ated, as it is no longer set for an active master/slave coupling. Instead, this interface signal
must be used.
5.6.173 DB31, ... DBX97.0 (MCS coupling: slave axis)
DB31, …DBX97.0 MCS coupling: Following axis

Signal state 1 The axis is a following axis:
Signal state 0 The axis is not a following axis:
5.6.174 DB31, … DBX97.1 (MCS coupling: coupling active)
DB31, …DBX97.1 MCS coupling: Coupling active

Signal state 1 The coupling is active.
Signal state 0 The coupling is not active.

5.6.175 DB31, ... DBX97.2 (MCS coupling: mirroring active)
DB31, …DBX97.2 MCS coupling: Mirroring active

Signal state 1 The "mirroring" function is active.
Signal state 0 The "mirroring" function is not active.
Additional information Displayed only for the CC_slave axis.
5.6.176 DB31, ... DBX97.3 (MCS coupling: offset change)
DB31, …DBX97.3 MCS coupling: Offset change

Signal state 1 The offset has changed since activation instant.
Signal state 0 The offset has not changed since the activation instant.
Additional information The interface signal is set, if, for an active 1:1 coupling, the offset saved at the activation
instant has changed.
Note
In the reset phase, the interface signal is not set.

5.6.177 DB31, ... DBX98.0 (fine synchronous operation)
DB31, ... DBX98.0 Synchronous operation fine

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Synchronous spindle coupling: The position deviation or velocity difference between the fol‐
lowing spindle and its leading spindle is within the "Fine synchronous operation" tolerance
band.
lowing spindle and its leading spindle is not within the "Fine synchronous operation" toler‐
ance band.
The signal is relevant only for the following spindle in synchronous operation.
Application example
Clamping of the workpiece in the following spindle at the transfer from the leading spindle:
The clamping of the workpiece is only initiated by the PLC user program when the spindles
are operating in adequate synchronism.
MD37210 $MA_COUPLE_POS_TOL_FINE (threshold value for "fine synchronism")
MD37230 $MA_COUPLE_VELO_TOL_FINE ("fine" speed tolerance)
5.6.178 DB31, ... DBX98.1 (coarse synchronous operation)
DB31, ... DBX98.1 Synchronous operation, coarse

Update Cyclic
lowing spindle and its leading spindle is within the "Coarse synchronous operation" toler‐
ance band.
lowing spindle and its leading spindle is not within the "Coarse synchronous operation" tol‐
erance band.
Application example
Clamping of the workpiece in the following spindle at the transfer from the leading spindle:
The clamping of the workpiece is only initiated by the PLC user program when the spindles
are operating in adequate synchronism.
MD37200 $MA_COUPLE_POS_TOL_COARSE (threshold value for "coarse synchronism")
MD37220 $MA_COUPLE_VELO_TOL_COARSE ("coarse" speed tolerance)

5.6.179 DB31, ... DBX98.2 (actual value coupling)
DB31, ... DBX98.2 Actual value coupling

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Synchronous spindle coupling: Actual value coupling active
Signal state 0 Synchronous spindle coupling: Setpoint coupling active
The signal is relevant only for the active following spindle in synchronous operation.
If faults occur on the following spindle that cause a withdrawal of the "Controller enable" for
the following spindle, under certain circumstances, the control may exchange the coupling
relationship of the following spindle and leading spindle and switch to actual value coupling.
MD21310 $MC_COUPLING_MODE_1 (coupling type in synchr. spindle oper.)
5.6.180 DB31, ... DBX98.4 (overlaid movement)
DB31, ... DBX98.4 Overlaid motion

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Synchronous spindle coupling: The following spindle executes an additional motion compo‐
nent that is superimposed on the motion from the coupling with the leading spindle.
Signal state 0 Synchronous spindle coupling: The following spindle does not traverse through any addi‐
tional motion component - or this has been completed.
Example for superimposed motion of the following spindle:
● Activating the synchronous mode with a defined angular offset between the following
spindle and leading spindle.
● Activating the synchronous mode for rotating leading spindle.
● Changing the ratio while the synchronous mode is active.
● Entering a new defined angular offset when the synchronous mode is active.
● Traversing the following spindle in the JOG mode with the traversing keys "Plus" /
"Minus" or the handwheel with synchronous operation active

5.6.181 DB31, ... DBX98.5 (speed alarm threshold reached)
DB31, ... DBX98.5 Velocity alarm threshold reached

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Electronic gearbox (EG): The velocity of the following axis has reached or exceeded the
parameterized velocity alarm threshold.
Signal state 0 Electronic gearbox (EG): The velocity of the following axis is below the parameterized ve‐
locity alarm threshold.
Additional information The signal is only relevant when the "Electronic gearbox (EG)" coupling function is active.
It is set if the velocity of the following axis, reaches or exceeds the velocity alarm threshold,
defined with MD37550 and MD32000 (= percentage of the maximum axis velocity).
Corresponds with MD37550 $MA_EG_VEL_WARNING (threshold value velocity alarm threshold)
MD32000 $MA_MAX_AX_VELO (maximum axis velocity)
5.6.182 DB31, ... DBX98.6 (acceleration alarm threshold reached)
DB31, ... DBX98.6 Acceleration alarm threshold reached

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Electronic gearbox (EG): The acceleration of the following axis has reached or exceeded
the parameterized acceleration alarm threshold.
Signal state 0 Electronic gearbox (EG): The acceleration of the following axis is below the parameterized
acceleration alarm threshold.
It is set if the acceleration of the following axis, reaches or exceeds the acceleration alarm
threshold, defined with MD37550 and MD32300 (= percentage of the maximum axis accel‐
eration).
Corresponds with MD37550 $MA_EG_VEL_WARNING (threshold value velocity alarm threshold)
MD32300 $MA_MAX_AX_ACCEL (maximum axis acceleration)
5.6.183 DB31, ... DBX99.0 (leading spindle active)
DB31, ... DBX99.0 Leading spindle active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Synchronous spindle coupling: The machine axis is presently active as leading spindle.
Signal state 0 Synchronous spindle coupling: The machine axis is presently not active as leading spindle.

DB31, ... DBX99.0 Leading spindle active

The signal is relevant only in synchronous operation.
relationship of the following spindle and leading spindle and switch to actual value cou‐
pling. In this case, the previous leading spindle becomes the new active following spindle
(IS "Following spindle active ").
DB31, ... DBX99.1 (following spindle active)
5.6.184 DB31, ... DBX99.1 (following spindle active)
DB31, ... DBX99.1 Following spindle active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Synchronous spindle coupling: The machine axis is currently being operated as a following
spindle.
Signal state 0 Synchronous spindle coupling: The machine axis is currently not being operated as a fol‐
lowing spindle.
Additional information For DB31, ... DBX99.1 == 1, the following spindle follows the motion of the leading spindle
corresponding to the ratio.
Note
The signal is relevant only in synchronous operation.
relationship of the following spindle and leading spindle and switch to actual value coupling.
DB31, ... DBX99.0 (leading spindle active)
5.6.185 DB31, ... DBX99.3 (axis accelerates)
DB31, ... DBX99.3 Axis accelerates

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Electronic gearbox (EG): The acceleration of the following axis has reached or exceeded
the parameterized acceleration level, at which the acceleration of the axis is displayed.
Signal state 0 Electronic gearbox (EG): The acceleration of the following axis lies below the parameter‐
ized acceleration level, at which the acceleration of the axis is displayed.

DB31, ... DBX99.3 Axis accelerates

It is set if the acceleration of the following axis, reaches or exceeds the acceleration alarm
value, defined with MD37560 and MD32300.
Corresponds with MD37560 $MA_EG_ACC_TOL (threshold value for "Axis accelerates")
MD32300 $MA_MAX_AX_ACCEL (maximum axis acceleration)
5.6.186 DB31, ... DBX100.2 (oscillation reversal from external active)
DB31, ... DBX100.2 External oscillation reversal active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The braking phase after "oscillation reversal from external" is active.
Signal state 0 The braking phase after "oscillation reversal from external" is not active.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX28.0 (oscillation reversal from external)
5.6.187 DB31, ... DBX100.3 (oscillation cannot be started)
DB31, ... DBX100.3 Oscillation cannot be started

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The oscillation axis cannot be started.
Signal state 0 Oscillation motion cannot be started.
Additional information This signal is set if there is a programming error, for example.
Note
This state can also occur if axis was already traversed.
5.6.188 DB31, ... DBX100.4 (error during oscillation)
DB31, ... DBX100.4 Error during oscillation

Signal state 1 Oscillation motion was canceled as an error occurred while oscillating.
Signal state 0 Oscillation is error free.

5.6.189 DB31, …DBX100.5 (sparking-out active)
DB31, ... DBX100.5 Sparking-out active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The axis executes sparking-out strokes.
Signal state 0 The axis is presently not executing any sparking-out strokes.
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX100.7 (oscillation active)
5.6.190 DB31, ... DBX100.6 (oscillation active)
DB31, ... DBX100.6 Oscillation active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The axis performs an oscillation movement between two reversal points.
Signal state 0 The axis is not currently oscillating.
Additional information The signal is irrelevant:
DB31, ... DBX100.7 == 0
5.6.191 DB31, ... DBX100.7 (oscillation active)
DB31, ... DBX100.7 Oscillation active

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The axis is presently being traversed as oscillating axis.
Signal state 0 The axis is a positioning axis.
Corresponds with DB31, …DBX100.5 (sparking-out active)
DB31, ... DBX100.6 (oscillation active)
5.6.192 DB31, ... DBX102.5 (position measuring system 1 activated)
DB31, ... DBX102.5 Position measuring system 1 activated

Update Cyclic


Signal state 1 Position measuring system 1 is in the "active" or "passive" state. Monitoring and updating
the position measuring system is activated.
Signal state 0 Position measuring system 1 is in "Park" state. Monitoring and updating the position meas‐
uring system is deactivated.
● Chapter "A3: Axis monitoring functions" > "Parking a machine axis"
● Chapter "A3: Axis monitoring functions" > "Parking the passive position measuring
system"
5.6.193 DB31, ... DBX102.6 (position measuring system 2 activated)

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Position measuring system 2 is in the "active" or "passive" state. Monitoring and updating
the position measuring system is activated.
Signal state 0 Position measuring system 21 is in the "Park" state. Monitoring and updating the position
measuring system is deactivated.
● Chapter "A3: Axis monitoring functions" > "Parking a machine axis"
● Chapter "A3: Axis monitoring functions" > "Parking the passive position measuring
system"
5.6.194 DB31, ... DBX104.0 - 107.6 (active infeed axes)
DB31, ... DBX104.0 - 107.6: Active infeed axes

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 For the actual axis (oscillating axis), the corresponding axis is an infeed axis.
Signal state 0 For the actual axis (oscillating axis), the corresponding axis is not an infeed axis.
Additional information DBB Bit 7 Bit 6 ... Bit 1 Bit 0
104 Axis 8 Axis 7 ... Axis 2 Axis 1
107 --- Axis 31 ... Axis 26 Axis 25

5.6.195 DB31, ... DBX128.0 (suppress program test)

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Suppression of the program test (setpoint output locked) is requested by the HMI.
Signal state 0 Suppression of the program test (setpoint output locked) is not requested by the HMI.
Additional information If function "Program test" (PRT) is active in the channel to which the axis currently belongs,
the axis is traversed with internal axis disable. Setpoints are generated but they not output
to the machine axes. Actual value = Setpoint.
If the program test is suppressed for the axis, setpoints are output to the machine axis de‐
spite the function "program test" being active in the channel to which the axis currently be‐
longs.
user program.
5.6.196 DB31, ... DBX128.1 (activate program test)
DB31, ... DBX128.1 Activate program test

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Activation of the function "program test" (setpoint output locked) is requested by the HMI.
Signal state 0 Activation of the function "program test" (setpoint output locked) is not requested by the
HMI.
Additional information If the function "program test" is active, the axis is traversed with internal axis disable. Set‐
points are generated but they not output to the machine axes. Actual value = Setpoint.
user program.

5.6.197 DB31, ... DBX130.0 - 4 (motor/drive data set: formatting)
DB31, ... DBX130.0 - 4 Motor/drive data set: Formatting

Update Cyclic
Additional information Formatting interface for the currently active motor (MDS) / drive data set (DDS).
Corresponds with DB31, ... DBX21.0 - 4 (motor/drive data set: selection)
DB31, ... DBX93.0 - 4 (motor/drive data set: display)
5.6.198 DB31, ... DBX132.0 (sensors available)
DB31, ... DBX132.0 Sensors available

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The sensor required for spindles with SMI 24 is available.
Signal state 0 The sensor required for spindles with SMI 24 is not available.
Only relevant for spindles with SMI 24 (Weiss spindle)
Corresponds with DB31, … DBX132.1: Sensor S1 (clamped state) is available
DB31, … DBX132.4: Sensor S4 is available
DB31, … DBX132.5: Sensor S5 is available
5.6.199 DB31, ... DBX132.1 (sensor S1 available (clamped state))
DB31, ... DBX132.1 Sensor S1 available (clamped state)

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 Sensor S1 is available.
Signal state 0 Sensor S1 is not available.
Corresponds with DB31, … DBW134 (state of the clamping system)
DB31, … DBW136 (analog value: clamped state)

5.6.200 DB31, … DBX132.4 (sensor S4 available (piston end position))
DB31, ... DBX132.4 Sensor S4 available (piston end position)

Update Cyclic
Corresponds with DB31, … DBX138.4 (sensor S4: piston end position)
5.6.201 DB31, ... DBX132.5 (sensor S5 available (angular position of the motor shaft))
DB31, ... DBX132.5 Sensor S5 available (angular position of the motor shaft)
Update Cyclic
Corresponds with DB31, … DBX138.5 (sensor S5: angular position of the motor shaft)
5.6.202 DB31, ... DBX133.2 (state value is generated, speed limitation p5043 is active)
DB31, ... DBX133.2 State value is generated, speed limitation p5043 is active
Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The status value is generated and the speed limits from drive parameter p5043 are active.
Signal state 0 The status value is not generated and the speed limits from drive parameter p5043 are not
active.
● Only relevant for spindles with SMI 24 (Weiss spindle)
● When generating the status value, the analog voltage values of sensor S1 are
transformed into discrete status values of drive parameter r5001.

DB31, ... DBX133.2 State value is generated, speed limitation p5043 is active
Corresponds with DB31, … DBX134 (clamped state)
Drive parameters: r5001
System variable: $VA_MOT_CLAMPING_STATE[<axis>]
OPI variable: vaMotClampingState
5.6.203 DB31, … DBW134 (state of the clamping system (sensor S1))
DB31, ... DBW134 State of the clamping system (sensor S1)

Update Cyclic
Depending on the position of the clamping device, sensor S1 supplies an analog voltage
value. To simplify the evaluation of the clamped state, the analog voltage of sensor module
SMI 24 is converted into a state value.
The state values correspond to certain voltage ranges. The voltage ranges can be set via:
Drive parameter p5041[0...5].
State value Clamped state
0 Sensor S1 not available or state values inactive
1 State initialization running
2 Released with signal (error state)
3 Released
4 Clamping with tool
5 Releasing with tool
6 Releasing without tool
7 Clamped with tool AND S4 == 0
8 Clamped with tool AND S4 == 1
9 Clamping without tool
10 Clamped without tool
11 Clamped with signal (error state)
Corresponds with DB31, … DBW136 (analog value: clamped state)
Drive parameters: p5041[0...5], p5043[0...6]
5.6.204 DB31, ... DBW136 (analog measured value: of the clamping system)
DB31, ... DBW136 Analog measured value: of the clamping system

Update Cyclic

DB31, ... DBW136 Analog measured value: of the clamping system

Sensor S1 supplies an analog voltage value: 0 - 10 V. The analog value of the clamped
state is mapped to: 0 - 10000 increments, resolution 1 mV
Note
SIMATIC S7 input module: 0 - 27648 increments, resolution 0.36 mV
Adaptation factor if you change to a spindle with SMI 24: 2.7648
Corresponds with DB31, … DBW134 (clamped state)
Drive parameters: p5041[0...5], p5043[0...6]
5.6.205 DB31, … DBX138.4 (sensor S4, piston end position)
DB31, ... DBX138.4 Sensor S4, piston end position

Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The piston is in position, i.e. the piston is free to move
Signal state 0 The piston is not in position
Corresponds with DB31, … DBX132.4 (sensor S4 available)
5.6.206 DB31, ... DBX138.5 (sensor S5 angular position of the motor shaft)
DB31, ... DBX138.5 Sensor S5, angular position of the motor shaft
Update Cyclic
Signal state 1 The motor shaft is in position (requirement: the spindle is stationary)
Signal state 0 The motor shaft is not aligned
Corresponds with DB31, … DBX132.5 (sensor S5 available)

5.7 DB71. Tool management, loading/unloading points
5.7.1 DB71 DBX0.0 - 1.7 (active status of interfaces 1 - 16)
DB71 DBX0.0 - 1.7 Active status of interfaces 1- 16

Signal state 1 The interface is active.
Signal state 0 The interface is not active.
Additional information If an interface is active, then a valid data set exists for this interface.
Assignment of the interfaces:
DBB0 INT 8 INT 7 INT 6 INT 5 INT 4 INT 3 INT 2 INT 1
DBB1 INT 16 INT 15 INT 14 INT 13 INT 12 INT 11 INT 10 INT 9
5.7.2 DB71 DBX2.0 - 3.7 ("auto" acknowledgment of interfaces 1 - 16)
DB71 DBX2.0 - 3.7 "auto" acknowledgment of interfaces 1 - 16

Signal state 0 → 1 When setting (edge) the bit, the active command is acknowledged with status_1. Unless it
is a relocation operation from a real magazine to a buffer. Then acknowledgment is made
with status_6. This reserves the source location.
e. g.
U DB71 DBX0.0
U DB71 DBX4.1 (unload)
S DB71 DBX2.0
Signal state 1 → 0 Operation for this interface has ended. Is reset by the basic program.
5.7.3 DB71 DBX(n+0).0 (command: Loading)
DB71 DBX(n+0).0 Command: Loading

Signal state 1 Loading operation for a tool is initiated. The magazine location into which the tool is to be
loaded is defined in DBW(n+26). The loading point in question is the location number of
the loading point. It is also located in DBW(n+18)
Additional information The bits in DBB(n+0) (loading, unloading,....) are not updated by the basic program until a
new task exists for this interface. They are only current (up-to-date) if the corresponding
interface bit in DBB0 is set to "1''. If required, the user can reset bits DBB(n+0).

DB71 DBX(n+0).0 Command: Loading

Additional information Start addresses
The start addresses n of the loading/unloading points are 1 - 4:
● Loading/unloading point 1: n = 4
Corresponds with DB71 DBX(n+16) and (n+18) and (n+26)
5.7.4 DB71 DBX(n+0).1 (command: Unload)
DB71 DBX(n+0).1 Command: Unload

Signal state 1 Unloading operation is initiated for a tool; the magazine location from which it is to be un‐
loaded is in DBW (n+20) and DBW (n+22). The number of the unloading point is in DBW(n
+18).
Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Additional information The bits in DBB(n+0) (loading, unloading,....) are not updated by the basic program until a
Additional information Starting addresses of loading/unloading points:
Loading/unloading point 1: n = 4
Corresponds with DB71 DBX(n+16) and (n+18) or (n+20) and (n+22)
5.7.5 DB71 DBX(n+0).2 (command: Relocate)
DB71 DBX(n+0).2 Command: Relocate

Signal state 1 Relocation operation for a tool is initiated. From magazine/location (n+20, n+22=source) to
magazine/location (n+24, n+26=target)

DB71 DBX(n+0).2 Command: Relocate

Signal state 0 Relocation operation for a tool is not initiated.
The bits in DBB(n+0) (loading, unloading,....) are not updated by the basic program until a
5.7.6 DB71 DBX(n+0).3 (command: Position to load point)
DB71 DBX(n+0).3 Command: Position to the loading point

Signal state 1 A magazine location is to be positioned at the loading point (magazine No. 9999). The mag‐
azine location that is to be moved to the loading point is in DB71.DBW(n+20) and (n+22).
The loading location is in DB71.DBWn+18.
Signal state 0 A magazine location is not to be positioned at the loading point (magazine No. 9999).
5.7.7 DB71 DBX(n+0).4 (command: Job/task comes from the NC program)
DB71 DBX(n+0).4 Command: Task comes from the NC program

Signal state 1 The signal is set if the task is received from the part program or via a cycle.
1. Positioning task with the language command POSM
2. A relocation task or tool transport uses the language command MVTOOL
3. Positioning a multitool using the language command POSMT

DB71 DBX(n+0).4 Command: Task comes from the NC program

Signal state 0 The signal is not set.
5.7.8 DB71 DBX(n+0).5 (command: Position a multitool)
DB71 DBX(n+0).5 Command: Position a multitool

Signal state 1 Positioning a multitool has been initiated. This can be realized using a language command,
PI service or the HMI user interface.
5.7.9 DB71 DBX(n+1).0 ("auto" acknowledgment negative)
DB71 DBX(n+1).0 "auto" acknowledgment negative

Signal state 1 The bit is only evaluated in conjunction with "auto" ackn. If it is set, then the auto acknowl‐
edge is negative, i.e. with status_3.
Signal state 0 The bit is not set.

5.7.10 DB71 DBX(n+1).7 (command: data in the extended range)
DB71 DBX(n+1).7 Command: Data in the extended range

Signal state 1 The signal is set if a multitool is loaded, unloaded or positioned. The multitool data are then
available in DB1071.
5.7.11 DB71 DBB(n+2) (assigned channel)
DB71 DBB(n+2) Assigned channel

Signal state 1 Number of the channel for which the active interface is valid.
Signal state 0 No channel number
5.7.12 DB71 DBB(n+3) (tool management No.)
DB71 DBB(n+3) Tool management No.

Signal state 1 Associated tool management number; corresponds to the number of the TO unit within a
TO area.

5.7.13 DB71 DBW(n+16) (identifier for loading/unloading point (fixed value 9999))
DB71 DBW(n+16) Identifier for loading/unloading point (fixed value 9999)

Signal state 1 The identifier for the loading/unloading point is fixed to the value 9999.
Signal state 0 The identifier is not defined.
5.7.14 DB71 DBW(n+18) (location number of the loading/unloading point)
DB71 DBW(n+18) Location No. of the loading/unloading point

Signal state 1 The location No. of the loading/unloading point is displayed.
Signal state 0 The location No. of the loading/unloading point is not displayed.
5.7.15 DB71 DBW(n+20) (Magazine No. (Source) for unloading/relocating/positioning)
DB71 DBW(n+20) Magazine No. (Source) for unloading/relocating/positioning

Signal state 1 Unloading: Magazine from which the tool is to be unloaded
Relocating: Magazine from which the tool is received
Positioning: Magazine that is to be positioned
Signal state 0 No magazine is unloaded, relocated or positioned.

DB71 DBW(n+20) Magazine No. (Source) for unloading/relocating/positioning

Corresponds with DBW(n+22)
5.7.16 DB71 DBW(n+22) (Location No. (Source) for unloading/relocating/positioning)
DB71 DBW(n+22) Location No. (Source) for unloading/relocating/positioning

Signal state 1 Unloading: Location from which the tool is to be unloaded
Relocating: Location from where the tool is received
Positioning: Location that should be positioned
Signal state 0 No tool is unloaded, relocated, positioned from any location.
5.7.17 DB71 DBW(n+24) (Magazine No. (Target) for unloading/relocating/positioning)
DB71 DBW(n+24) Magazine No. (Target) for unloading/relocating/positioning

Signal state 1 Loading: Magazine into which the tool is to be loaded
Relocating: Magazine into which the tool is loaded:
Positioning: Magazine to be positioned to - tool remains in the original magazine
Only meaningful for interface 1. If values other than 0 are entered here, the data define the
magazine or location for positioning (language command POSM).
Signal state 0 No magazine number specified.

5.7.18 DB71 DBW(n+26) (location No. (Target) for unloading/relocating/positioning)
DB71 DBW(n+26) Location No. (Target) for unloading/relocating/positioning

Signal state 1 Loading: Location into which the tool is to be loaded
Relocating: Location into which the tool comes
Positioning: Location at which the tool must be positioned. Tool remains at original location
Only meaningful for interface 1. If values other than 0 are entered here, the data define the
magazine or location for positioning (language command POSM).
Signal state 0 No location number specified for loading, relocating, positioning.
5.7.19 DB71 DBX(n+28).0 (loading/unloading without any magazine movement)
DB71 DBX(n+28).0 Loading/unloading without magazine movement

Signal state 1 HMI / Jobshop sets this signal when requested by the operator.
If the bit is active, there must be no traversing motion of the magazine, only a mechanical
unlocking/locking of the location. The load/unload command must be acknowledged after
the action. For a positioning and relocating request, this signal is not valid for a traversing
motion.
Signal state 0 HMI / Jobshop delete this signal when requested by the operator.

5.8 DB72: Tool management, change in the spindle
5.8.1 DB72 DBX0.0-1.7 (active status of interfaces 1-16)
DB72 DBX0.0-1.7 Active status of interfaces 1-16

Signal state 1 Associated interface has a valid data set, a tool change request or tool preparation has
been initiated.
Signal state 0 Operation for this interface has ended. Is reset by FC8/FC6.
Additional information Start address of the spindle:
Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.8.2 DB72 DBX2.0-3.7 ("auto" acknowledgment of interfaces 1-16)
DB72 DBX2.0-3.7 "auto" acknowledgment of interfaces 1-16

Signal state 1 When setting (edge) the bit, the active command is acknowledged with status_1.
Signal state 0 Operation for this interface has ended. Is reset by the basic program.
Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.8.3 DB72 DBX(n+0).0 (command code: Obligatory change)
DB72 DBX(n+0).0 Command code: Obligatory change

Signal state 1 The new tool is fixed-location-coded.

DB72 DBX(n+0).0 Command code: Obligatory change

Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100
The bit in DBB (n+0).2 (prepare change) is not reset by the system with a change com‐
mand. The bits in DBB(n+0) ... are current only if the corresponding interface bit in DBB0 is
set to "1''. However, the bits can be reset by the user if necessary.
If DBX(n+0).1 and DBX(n+0).2 are present at the same time, it means that T and M06
were programmed in one block.
5.8.4 DB72 DBX(n+0).1 (command code: Perform change with M06)
DB72 DBX(n+0).1 Command code: Perform change with M06

Signal state 1 M06 command was programmed for tool change, the tool change can now take place
Signal state 0 M06 command for tool change was not programmed.
Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100
The bit in DBB(n+0).2 (prepare change) is not reset by the system with a change com‐
mand. The bits in DBB(n+0) are up to date only if the corresponding interface bit in DBB0
is set to "1''. However, the bits can be reset by the user if necessary.
5.8.5 DB72 DBX(n+0).2 (command code: Prepare change)
DB72 DBX(n+0).2 Command code: Prepare change

Signal state 1 Prepare new tool for change. If necessary, move location for old tool to spindle.

DB72 DBX(n+0).2 Command code: Prepare change

Signal state 0 No new tool is ready.
Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.8.6 DB72 DBX(n+0).3 (command code: T0)
DB72 DBX(n+0).3 Command code: T0

Signal state 1 Indicates that T0 has been programmed (no-load spindle traversing).
Signal state 0 Does not indicate that T0 has been programmed.
Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.8.7 DB72 DBX(n+0).4 (command code: Old tool in buffer)
DB72 DBX(n+0).4 Command code: Old tool in buffer

Signal state 1 The buffer number of the tool to be changed is in DB72.DBW (n+42)

DB72 DBX(n+0).4 Command code: Old tool in buffer

Signal state 0 The buffer number of the tool to be changed is not in DB72.DBW (n+42)
Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.8.8 DB72 DBX(n+0).5 (command code: Load manual tool)
DB72 DBX(n+0).5 Command code: Load manual tool

Signal state 1 A manual tool is to be loaded. The HMI displays the tool which is to be loaded.
Signal state 0 No new manual tool is loaded.
Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.8.9 DB72 DBX(n+0).6 (command code: Unload manual tool)
DB72 DBX(n+0).6: Command code: Unload manual tool

Signal state 1 The tool is to be changed via manual operation.
Signal state 0 The tool is not to be changed via manual operation.

DB72 DBX(n+0).6: Command code: Unload manual tool

Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.8.10 DB72 DBX(n+0).7 (command code: Tool remains in spindle)
DB72 DBX(n+0).7 Command code: Tool remains in spindle

Signal state 1 The bit is set at change from spindle to spindle. Initiated, e.g. by reset and start mode or
block search.
Signal state 0 The bit is not set at change from spindle to spindle.
Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100

Signal state 1 The bit is only evaluated in conjunction with "auto" ackn. If it is set, the auto acknowledge
is negative, i.e. with status_3.
Signal state 0 Bit is not evaluated.


Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100

Signal state 1 The signal is set if a tool is prepared in a multitool or is loaded into a multitool. DB72 con‐
tains the data of the multitool, the data of the selected tool is available in DB1072.
For T0 the signal is not set.

Signal state 1 Number of the channel for which the active interface applies.
Signal state 0 There is no assignment.
Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100

Signal state 1 Associated tool management No. (TO area).


Signal state 0 No associated tool management No.
Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.8.15 DB72 DBD(n+4) (user-definable parameter 0 (DInt))
DB72 DBD(n+4) User-definable parameter 0 (DInt)

Signal state 1 If a value has to be sent to the PLC via the part program, the transfer can be programmed
with $P_VDITCP[0]. Values are transferred with a T call.
Signal state 0 No value is transferred to the PLC via the part program.
Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100

Signal state 1 If you need to send a value to the PLC via the part program, the transfer can be program‐
med with $P_VDITCP[1].
Signal state 0 No value is transferred to the PLC via the part program
Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100



med with $P_VDITCP[2]
Signal state 0 No value is transferred to the PLC via the part program
Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.8.18 DB72 DBW(n+16) (buffer magazine number (fixed value 9998))
DB72 DBW(n+16) Buffer magazine no. (fixed value 9998); target position for new tool

Signal state 1 Magazine no. 9998 (buffer magazine); target magazine for new tool.
Signal state 0 There is no buffer magazine.
Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.8.19 DB72 DBW(n+18) (location in the buffer magazine (spindle))
DB72 DBW(n+18) Location in buffer magazine (spindle)

Signal state 1 Location no. of buffer magazine to which the new tool must be loaded. This is normally the
spindle. The location number defined for this particular buffer during commissioning is out‐
put.
Signal state 0 No location No. is output.
Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100

5.8.20 DB72 DBW(n+20) (magazine No. (source) for new tool to be loaded)
DB72 DBW(n+20) Magazine No. (source) for new tool to be loaded

Signal state 1 No. of magazine from which the new spindle tool comes.
Signal state 0 No magazine No. is output.
Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.8.21 DB72 DBW(n+22) (location No. (source) for new tool)
DB72 DBW(n+22) Location No. (source) for new tool

Signal state 1 Location no. of the magazine from which the new spindle tool comes.
Signal state 0 No location No. is output.
Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.8.22 DB72 DBW(n+24) (magazine No. (target) for old tool to be removed)
DB72 DBW(n+24) Magazine No. (target) for old tool to be removed

Signal state 1 Number of magazine in which the tool to be removed at change will be placed.
Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100

5.8.23 DB72 DBW(n+26) (location No. (target) for old tool)
DB72 DBW(n+26) Location No. (target) for old tool

Signal state 1 Magazine location for tool that is unloaded at change.
Signal state 1 No magazine location for tool that is unloaded at change.
Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.8.24 DB72 DBW(n+28) (new tool: Location type)
DB72 DBW(n+28): New tool: Location type

Signal state 1 The location type of the new spindle tool is entered here.
Signal state 0 No location type entered.
Corresponds with Tool size: Left, right, top, bottom.
Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.8.25 DB72 DBW(n+30) (new tool: Size left)
DB72 DBW(n+30) New tool: Size left

Signal state 1 Specification of the tool size left in half locations for the new spindle tool.
Signal state 0 No tool size is specified.
Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100

5.8.26 DB72 DBW(n+32) (new tool: Size right)
DB72 DBW(n+32): New tool: Size right

Signal state 1 Specification of the tool size right in half locations for the new spindle tool.
Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.8.27 DB72 DBW(n+34) (new tool: Size top)
DB72 DBW(n+34) New tool: Size top

Signal state 1 Specification of the tool size top in half locations for the new spindle tool.
Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.8.28 DB72 DBW(n+36) (new tool: Size bottom)
DB72 DBW(n+36) New tool: Size bottom

Signal state 1 Specification of the tool size bottom in half locations for the new spindle tool.
Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100

5.8.29 DB72 DBW(n+38) (tool status for new tool)
DB72 DBW(n+38) Tool status for new tool

Signal state 1 Bit 0: Tool in the buffer
Bit 1: disabled, but ignore
Bit 2: Tool to be unloaded
Bit 3: Tool to be loaded
Bit 4: Master tool
Bit 5: Reserved
Bit 6: 1:1 exchange
Bit 7: Manual tool
Bit 8: Active tool
Bit 9: Enable tool
Bit 10: Tool disabled
Bit 11: Measure tool
Bit 12: Prewarning limit reached
Bit 13: Tool is being changed
Bit 14: Tool is fixed-location-coded
Bit 15: Tool was in use
Signal state 0 No tool status specified.
Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.8.30 DB72 DBW(n+40) (new tool: internal T number of NC)
DB72 DBW(n+40) New tool: Internal T number of the NC

Signal state 1 Display of internal T number of NC for the new spindle tool.
Signal state 0 No internal T number displayed.
Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100

5.8.31 DB72 DBW(n+42) (buffer location of the old tool)
DB72 DBW(n+42) Buffer location of old tool

Signal state 1 If DB72 (n+0.4) = 1, the buffer location of the old tool must be entered here. This can be
any buffer magazine (also a gripper).
Signal state 0 No buffer magazine location specified.
Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.8.32 DB72 DBW(n+44) (original magazine of the new tool)
DB72 DBW(n+44) Original magazine of new tool

Signal state 1 Owner magazine of the new tool
Corresponds to NC variables $A_MYMN[T no.]
If the new tool is located in the magazine, then this value is identical with DB72 DBW(n
+20).
If the new tool is in the buffer magazine (e.g. gripper) then the magazine no. is entered
here from where the tool originally came.
Signal state 0 No original magazine specified.
Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.8.33 DB72 DBW(n+46) (original location of the new tool)
DB72 DBW(n+46) Original location of new tool

Signal state 1 Owner location of the new tool
Corresponds to NC variables $A_MYMLN[T no.]

5.9 DB73: Tool management, change in turret

Signal state 0 No original location specified.
Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.9.1 DB73 DBX0.0 - 1.7 (active status of interfaces 1 - 16)
DB73 DBX0.0 - 1.7 Active status of interfaces 1-16

Signal state 1 Associated interface has a valid data set.
Signal state 0 Operation for this interface has ended. Is reset by FC7.
Additional information Start address of the turret:
Turret, 1: n = 4
Turret 2: n = 48
Turret 3: n = 92
5.9.2 DB73 DBX2.0 - 3.7 ("auto" acknowledgment of interfaces 1 - 16)
DB73 DBX2.0 - 3.7 "auto" acknowledgment of interfaces 1-16

Signal state 1 When setting (edge) the bit, the active command is acknowledged with status_1.
Signal state 0 Operation for this interface has ended. Is reset by the basic program.
Turret, 1: n = 4
Turret 2: n = 48
Turret 3: n = 92

5.9.3 DB73 DBX(n+0).0 (command code: Obligatory change)
DB73 DBX(n+0).0 Command: Obligatory change

Signal state 0 The new tool is not fixed-location-coded.
Turret, 1: n = 4
Turret 2: n = 48
Turret 3: n = 92
The bits in DBB(n+0) (obligatory change, execute change, ...) are not reset by the system.
They are only current (up-to-date) if the corresponding interface bit in DBB0 is set to "1''.
However, the bits can be reset by the user if necessary.
Corresponds with Position of participating tools
5.9.4 DB73 DBX(n+0).1 (command code: Execute change)
DB73 DBX(n+0).1 Command: Perform change

Signal state 1 Execute tool change.
Signal state 0 Do not change tool.
Turret, 1: n = 4
Turret 2: n = 48
Turret 3: n = 92
5.9.5 DB73 DBX(n+0).3 (T0))
DB73 DBX(n+0).3 T0
Signal state 1 Indicates that T0 has been programmed.

DB73 DBX(n+0).3 T0
Signal state 0 Does not indicate that T0 has been programmed.
Turret, 1: n = 4
Turret 2: n = 48
Turret 3: n = 92

Signal state 1 The bit is only evaluated in conjunction with "auto" ackn. If it is set, then the auto acknowl‐
edge is negative, i.e. with status_3.
Signal state 0 The bit is not set.
Turret, 1: n = 4
Turret 2: n = 48
Turret 3: n = 92

Signal state 1 The signal is set if a tool is loaded into a multitool. DB73 contains the data of the multitool,
the data of the selected tool is available in DB1073.
For T0 the signal is not set.
Signal state 0 The signal is not set if no tool is loaded into a multitool.
Turret, 1: n = 4
Turret 2: n = 48
Turret 3: n = 92


Signal state 1 Number of channel from which the T word was programmed.
Signal state 0 Number of the channel is not assigned.
Turret, 1: n = 4
Turret 2: n = 48
Turret 3: n = 92
DB73 DBB(n+3) Tool management number

Signal state 1 Associated tool management number (TO area) of channel.
Signal state 0 Tool management is not assigned.
Turret, 1: n = 4
Turret 2: n = 48
Turret 3: n = 92

med with $P_VDITCP[0] = value. Parameters 0-2 are transferred with the T command.
Signal state 0 No value is transferred to the PLC.
Turret, 1: n = 4
Turret 2: n = 48
Turret 3: n = 92


med with $P_VDITCP[1] = value.
Signal state 0 No value is transferred to the PLC
Turret, 1: n = 4
Turret 2: n = 48
Turret 3: n = 92
DB73 DBD(n+12): User-definable parameter 2 (DInt)

med with $P_VDITCP[2] = value.
Signal state 0 No value is transferred to the PLC
Turret, 1: n = 4
Turret 2: n = 48
Turret 3: n = 92
5.9.13 DB73 DBW(n+20) (magazine number of the new tool)
DB73 DBD(n+20) Magazine no. of new tool

Signal state 1 Magazine no. of the new tool, which should be processed.
Signal state 0 There is no magazine number of the new tool.
Turret, 1: n = 4
Turret 2: n = 48
Turret 3: n = 92

5.9.14 DB73 DBW(n+22) (location number of the new tool to be loaded)
DB73 DBD(n+22) Location no. of new tool to be loaded at change

Signal state 1 Location no. of the new tool, which should be processed.
Signal state 0 There is no location number of the new tool.
Turret, 1: n = 4
Turret 2: n = 48
Turret 3: n = 92
5.9.15 DB73 DBW(n+24) (magazine No. (target) for old tool to be removed)
DB73 DBW(n+24) Magazine No. (target) for old tool to be removed

Signal state 1 Number of magazine in which the tool to be removed at change will be placed.
Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.9.16 DB73 DBW(n+26) (location number of the old tool to be removed)
DB73 DBD(n+26) Location no. of old tool to be unloaded

Signal state 1 Location no. of the old tool (used up to now for machining).
Signal state 0 No location number specified.
Turret, 1: n = 4
Turret 2: n = 48
Turret 3: n = 92

DB73 DBD(n+28) New tool: Location type

Signal state 1 The location type of the new tool is entered here.
Signal state 0 No location type of the new entry entered.
Corresponds with Tool size: Left, right, top, bottom
Turret, 1: n = 4
Turret 2: n = 48
Turret 3: n = 92
DB73 DBD(n+30) New tool: Size left

Signal state 1 Specification of the tool size left in half locations for the new tool.
Turret, 1: n = 4
Turret 2: n = 48
Turret 3: n = 92
DB73 DBD(n+32) New tool: Size right

Signal state 1 Specification of the tool size right in half locations for the new tool
Turret, 1: n = 4
Turret 2: n = 48
Turret 3: n = 92

DB73 DBD(n+34) New tool: Size top

Signal state 1 Specification of the tool size top in half locations for the new tool
Turret, 1: n = 4
Turret 2: n = 48
Turret 3: n = 92
DB73 DBD(n+36) New tool: Size bottom

Signal state 1 Specification of the tool size bottom in half locations for the new tool
Turret, 1: n = 4
Turret 2: n = 48
Turret 3: n = 92
5.9.22 DB73 DBW(n+38) (tool status for new tool)
DB73 DBD(n+38) Tool status for new tool


DB73 DBD(n+38) Tool status for new tool

Signal state 1 Bit 0: Tool in the buffer
Bit 1: Locked, but ignore
Bit 4: Master tool
Bit 5: Reserved
Bit 6: 1:1 exchange
Bit 7: Manual tool
Bit 8: Active tool
Bit 9: Enable tool
Bit 11: Measure tool
Signal state 0 No tool status displayed.
Turret, 1: n = 4
Turret 2: n = 48
Turret 3: n = 92
5.9.23 DB73 DBW(n+40) (new tool: Internal T no. of the NC)
DB73 DBD(n+40) New tool: Internal T no. of the NC

Signal state 1 Display internal T no. of the NC for the new tool. Tool management variables can be read/
written via FB2/FB3 using this T no.
Turret, 1: n = 4
Turret 2: n = 48
Turret 3: n = 92
5.9.24 DB73 DBW(n+42) (original location of the new tool in this turret magazine)
DB73 DBD(n+42) Original location of new tool in this turret magazine


5.10 DB1071: Tool management, load/unload magazine (multitool)
DB73 DBD(n+42) Original location of new tool in this turret magazine

Signal state 1
Signal state 0
Turret, 1: n = 4
Turret 2: n = 48
Turret 3: n = 92
5.10.1 DB1071 DBW(n+0) (distance coding)
DB1071 DBW(n+0) Distance coding

Signal state 1 Type of distance coding of the multitool (corresponds to $TC_MTP_KD
1 = location number
2 = distance
3 = angle
Signal state 0 No distance coding
Additional information Starting address of loading/unloading points:
5.10.2 DB1071 DBW(n+2) (multitool location number)
DB1071 DBW(n+2) Multitool location number

Signal state 1 Number of locations of the multitool
Signal state 0 No locations specified.

5.10.3 DB1071 DBD(n+4) (multitool location distance)
DB1071 DBW(n+4) Multitool location distance

Signal state 1 Distance of the MT location to be positioned from the reference location (real value), corre‐
sponding to the distance coding
Signal state 1 No distance specified.
5.10.4 DB1071 DBW(n+8) (multitool number)
DB1071 DBW(n+8) Multitool number

Signal state 1 Internal T number of the multitool.
Signal state 1 No internal T number specified.

Signal state 1 Location number within the multitool (which the system positions to)

5.11 DB1072: Tool management, spindle (multitool)
5.10.6 DB1071 DBW(n+12) (toolholder)
DB1071 DBW(n+12) Tool holder

Signal state 1 Spindle or tool holder number
Signal state 0 No spindle or toolholder number specified.

Signal state 1 Type of distance coding of the multitool (corresponds to $TC_MTP_KD)
1 = location number
2 = distance
3 = angle
Signal state 0 No distance coding specified.
Additional information Start addresses of the spindles:
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100



Signal state 0 No data regarding the number of locations.
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.11.3 DB1072 DBW(n+4) (multitool location distance)

Signal state 1 Distance of the MT location to be positioned from the reference location (real value), corre‐
sponding to the distance coding
Signal state 1 No data regarding the distance of the MT location to be positioned.
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.11.4 DB1072 DBW(n+8) (multitool number (new tool))
DB1072 DBW(n+8) Multitool number (new tool)

Signal state 1 Internal T number of the (new) multitool.
Signal state 0 No internal T number specified.
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.11.5 DB1072 DBW(n+10) (multitool location number (new tool))
DB1072 DBW(n+10) Multitool location number (new tool)

Signal state 1 Location number within the multitool (where the new tool is located).


Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.11.6 DB1072 DBW(n+12) (multitool number (old tool))
DB1072 DBW(n+12) Multitool number (old tool)

Signal state 1 Internal T number of the (old) multitool.
The T number is entered here if the preparation or the change to a tool is realized within
the same multitool (which, due to a previous change, is located on the tool holder). It is
identical with DB1072 DBW(n + 8)
Signal state 0 No internal T number of the multitool specified.
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.11.7 DB1072 DBW(n+14) (multitool location number (old tool))
DB1072 DBW(n+14) Multitool location number (old tool)

Signal state 1 Location number within the multitool (where the old tool is located).
The location number - where the old tool is located - is entered here if the preparation or
the change to a tool is realized within the same multitool (which, due to a previous change,
is located on the tool holder).
Signal state 0 No multitool location number specified.
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100

DB1072 DBW(n+16) New tool: Location type

Signal state 1 Location type of the new tool (of the programmed tool in the multitool).
Signal state 0 No location type specified.
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100

Signal state 1 Specification of the tool size to the left in half locations of the new tool (of the programmed
tool in the multitool)
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100
DB1072 DBW(n+20) New tool: Size right

Signal state 1 Specification of the tool size to the right in half locations of the new tool (of the program‐
med tool in the multitool)
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100


Signal state 1 Specification of the tool size to the top in half locations of the new tool (of the programmed
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100

Signal state 1 Specification of the tool size to the bottom in half locations of the new tool (of the program‐
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.11.13 DB1072 DBW(n+26) (new tool status)
DB1072 DBW(n+26) Tool status for new tool:



Signal state 1 Tool status of the programmed tool in the multitool.
Corresponds to parameter $TC_TP8[T_No]
Bit 0: Active tool
Bit 1: Enable tool
Bit 3: Measure tool
Bit 8: Tool in the buffer
Bit 9: Disabled, but ignore
Bit 12: Master tool
Bit 13: Reserved
Bit 14: 1:1 exchange
Bit 15: Manual tool
Signal state 0 No tool status displayed.
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.11.14 DB1072 DBW(n+28) (new tool: internal T number of the NC)

Signal state 1 Display the internal T number of the NC for the new spindle tool (of the programmed tool in
the multitool).
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100

5.11.15 DB1072 DBW(n+30) (tool holder)

Signal state 1 Spindle or toolholder number to which the change refers (the multitool that is to be
changed).
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100

Signal state 1 Magazine that owns the new tool.
+20).
If the new tool is in the buffer magazine (e.g. gripper) then the magazine No. is entered
The new tool has the same owner location as the multitool onto which it is loaded.
Signal state 0 No original magazine specified.
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100


5.12 DB1073: Tool management, turret (multitool)

Signal state 1 Location that owns the new tool.
Corresponds to NC variables $A_MYMLNT[T no.]
+20).
If the new tool is in the buffer magazine (e.g. gripper) then the magazine No. is entered
Signal state 0 No original location specified.
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100

Signal state 1 Type of distance coding of the multitool (corresponds to $TC_MTP_KD)
1 = location number
2 = distance
3 = angle
Signal state 0 No distance coding specified.
Additional information Start addresses of the turrets:
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100



Signal state 0 Number of locations of the multitool not displayed.
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.12.3 DB1073 DBW(n+4) (multitool location distance)

Signal state 1 Distance of the MT location to be positioned from the reference location (real value). In ac‐
cordance with the distance coding.
Signal state 0 No distance specified.
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.12.4 DB1073 DBW(n+8) (multitool number (new tool))
DB1073 DBW(n+8) Multitool number (new tool)

Signal state 1 Internal T number of the (new) multitool.
Signal state 0 No internal T number of the multitool is specified.
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.12.5 DB1073 DBW(n+10) (multitool location number (new tool))

Signal state 1 Location number within the multitool (where the new tool is located).


Signal state 1 No multitool location number specified.
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.12.6 DB1073 DBW(n+12) (multitool number (old tool))
DB1073 DBW(n+12) Multitool number (old tool)

Signal state 1 Internal T number of the (old) multitool.
The T number is entered here if the preparation or the change to a tool is realized within
the same multitool (which, due to a previous change, is located on the tool holder). It is
identical with DB1072 DBW(n + 8)
Signal state 0 No internal T number of the multitool specified.
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.12.7 DB1073 DBW(n+14) (multitool location number (old tool))
DB1073 DBW(n+14) Multitool location number (old tool)

Signal state 1 Location number within the multitool (where the old tool is located).
The location number - where the old tool is located - is entered here if the preparation or
the change to a tool is realized within the same multitool (which, due to a previous change,
is located on the tool holder).
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100

DB1073 DBW(n+16) New tool: Location type

Signal state 1 Location type of the new tool (of the programmed tool in the multitool).
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100

Signal state 1 Specification of the tool size to the left in half locations of the new tool (of the programmed
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100
DB1073 DBW(n+20) New tool: Size right

Signal state 1 Specification of the tool size to the right in half locations of the new tool (of the program‐
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100


Signal state 1 Specification of the tool size to the top in half locations of the new tool (of the programmed
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100

Signal state 1 Specification of the tool size to the bottom in half locations of the new tool (of the program‐
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.12.13 DB1073 DBW(n+26) (new tool status)



Signal state 1 Tool status of the programmed tool in the multitool
Corresponds to parameter $TC_TP8[T_No]
Bit 0: Active tool
Bit 1: Enable tool
Bit 3: Measure tool
Bit 8: Tool in the buffer
Bit 9: Disabled, but ignore
Bit 12: Master tool
Bit 13: Reserved
Bit 14: 1:1 exchange
Bit 15: Manual tool
Signal state 0 No tool status specified.
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100
5.12.14 DB1073 DBW(n+28) (new tool: internal T number of the NC)

Signal state 1 Display the internal T number of the NC for the new spindle tool (of the programmed tool in
the multitool).
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100

5.12.15 DB1073 DBW(n+30) (tool holder)

Signal state 1 Spindle or tool holder number to which the change refers (the multitool that is to be
changed)
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100

Signal state 1 Magazine that owns the new tool.
+20).
If the new tool is in the buffer (e.g. gripper), then the magazine No. is entered here from
where the tool originally came.
Signal state 0 Magazine that owns the new tool not specified.
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100



Signal state 1 Location that owns the new tool.
Corresponds to NC variables $A_MYMLNT[T no.]
+20).
If the new tool is in the buffer magazine (e.g. gripper), the number of the magazine from
which the tool originally came is entered here.
Signal state 0 Location that owns the new tool not specified.
Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100


Appendix A A
A.1 List of abbreviations
Abbreviation Derivation of the abbreviation Meaning

ADI4 Analog Drive Interface for 4 Axis
AC Adaptive Control
ALM Active Line Module Infeed module for drives
AP User program
AS Automation system
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Inter‐ American coding standard for the exchange of infor‐
change mation
ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit User switching circuit
ASUP Asynchronous subprogram
AUTO Operating mode "Automatic"
AUXFU Auxiliary Function Auxiliary functions
STL Statement list
BA Operating mode
Mode group Mode group
BERO Proximity limit switch with feedback oscillator
BI Binector Input
HHU Handheld unit
BICO Binector Connector Interconnection technology for the drive
BIN Binary Files Binary files
BIOS Basic Input Output System
BCS Basic coordinate system
BO Binector Output
OPI Operator Panel Interface
CAD Computer-Auded Design
CAM Computer-Aided Manufacturing
CC Compile Cycle Compile cycles
CI Connector Input
CF-Card Compact Flash-Card
CNC Computerized Numerical Control Computerized numerical control
CO Connector Output
COM Board Communication Board
CP Communication Processor
CPU Central Processing Unit Central processing unit
CR Carriage Return
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check Checksum test
CRT Cathode Ray Tube Picture tube

Appendix A

CSB Central Service Board PLC module
CTS Clear To Send Signals that data is ready to be sent for serial data
interfaces
CUTCOM Cutter Radius Compensation Tool radius compensation
DB Data block Data block in the PLC
DBB Data-block byte Data block-byte in the PLC
DBW Data-block word Data-block word in the PLC
DBX Data-block bit Data-block bit in the PLC
DDE Dynamic Data Exchange Dynamic data exchange
DDS Drive Data Set Drive data set
DIN Deutsche Industrie Norm (German Industry
Standard)
DIR Directory Directory
DLL Dynamic Link Library
DO Drive Object Drive object
DPM Dual Port Memory
DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory Dynamic memory block
DRF Differential Resolver Function Differential resolver function (handwheel)
DRIVE-CLiQ Drive Component Link with IQ
DRY Dry Run DRY run feedrate
DSB Decoding Single Block Decoding single block
DSC Dynamic Servo Control / Dynamic Stiffness
Control
DSR Data Send Ready Signals the availability of serial data interfaces
DW Data word
DWORD Double word (currently 32 bits)
I Input
I/O Input/Output
ENC Encoder Actual value encoder
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Erasable, electronically programmable read-only
memory
ePS Network Services for Internet-based remote machine mainte‐
Services nance
EQN Type designation for an absolute encoder with 2048
sine signals per revolution
ESR Extended stop and retract
ETC ETC key Expansion of the softkey bar in the same menu
FB Function block
FBS Flat screen
FC Function Call Function block in the PLC
FDD Feed Disable Feed disable
FdStop Feed Stop Feed stop
FEPROM Flash-EPROM Read and write memory
FIFO First In - First Out Method of storing and retrieving data in a memory

Appendix A

FIPO Fine interpolator
FM Function Module
FM-NC Function Module Numerical Control Numerical control
FPU Floating Point Unit Floating-point unit
FRA Frame block
FRAME Data set Coordinate conversion with the components work
offset, rotation, scaling, mirroring
CRC Cutter radius compensation
FST Feed Stop Feed stop
CSF Control system flowchart (PLC programming
method)
FW Firmware
GC Global Control PROFIBUS: Broadcast telegram
GD Global data
GEO Geometry, e.g. geometry axis
GP Basic program
GS Gear stage
GUD Global User Data Global user data
HD Hard Disk Hard disk
HEX Abbreviation for hexadecimal number
AuxF Auxiliary function
HMI Human Machine Interface SINUMERIK user interface
MSD Main spindle drive
HT Handheld Terminal Handheld unit
HW Hardware
COMM Commissioning
IF Drive module pulse enable
IK (GD) Implicit communication (global data)
IKA Interpolative Compensation Interpolatory compensation
IM Interface Modul Interface module
INC Increment Increment
INI Initializing Data Initializing data
IGBT Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor
IPO Interpolator
ISO International Organization for Standardization International Organization for Standardization
JOG "Jogging" operating mode
KD Coordinate rotation
KDV Crosswise data comparison Crosswise data comparison between the NC and
PLC
KV Servo-gain factor Gain factor of control loop
LAD Ladder diagram PLC programming method
LCD Liquid Crystal Display Liquid crystal display
LED Light Emitting Diode Light emitting diode

Appendix A

LF Line Feed
LMS Position measuring system
LSB Least Significant Bit Least significant bit
LUD Local User Data User data
MAC Media Access Control
MAIN Main program Main program (OB1, PLC)
MB Megabyte
MCI Motion Control Interface
MCIS Motion Control Information System
MCP Machine Control Panel Machine control panel
MD Machine data
MDI "Manual Data Automatic" operating mode Manual input
MCS Machine coordinate system
MPF Main Program File Main program (NC part program)
MPI Multi Point Interface Multi-point interface
NC Numerical Control Numerical control
NCK Numerical Control Kernel Numerical control kernel
NCSD NC Start Disable NC start disable
NCU Numerical Control Unit NC hardware unit
IF Interfaces Interface signal
WO Zero offset
NX Numerical Extension Axis expansion module
OB Organization block in the PLC
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer
OP Operation Panel Operator panel
OPI Operation Panel Interface Interface for connection to the operator panel
OSI Open Systems Interconnection Standard for computer communications
OPT Options Options
PIQ Process Image Output
PII Process Image Input
P bus Peripheral bus
PC Personal Computer
PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Standard for plug-in memory cards
Association
PCU Programmable Control Unit
PI Programm Instanz
PG Programming device
PLC Programmable Logic Control Programmable Logic Controller
PN PROFINET
PO POWER ON
POU Program organization unit Unit in the PLC user program
PPU Panel Processing Unit Panel-based control
PTP Point to Point Point-to-point

Appendix A

PZD Process data for drives
QEC Quadrant Error Compensation Quadrant error compensation
QEC Quadrant error compensation
RAM Random Access Memory Program memory that can be read and written to
REF POINT Function "Reference point approach" in JOG mode
REPOS Function "Repositioning" in JOG mode
RID Read In Disable Read-in disable
RPA R-Parameter Active Memory area on the NC for R parameter numbers
RPY Roll Pitch Yaw Rotation type of a coordinate system
RTC Real Time Clock Real-time clock
RTS Request To Send RTS, control signal of serial data interfaces
SBL Single Block Single block
SBR Subroutine Subroutine (PLC)
SBT Safe Brake Test Safe Brake Test
SCC Safety Control Channel
SD Setting-Datum
SDB System data block
SDI Safe Direction Safe Motion Direction
SBT Safe Brake Test Safe Brake Control
SEA Setting Data Active Identifier (file type) for setting data
SERUPRO Search–Run by Program Test Search run by program test
SFC System Function Call
SGE Safety-related input
SGA Safety-related output
SH Safe Stop
SIC Safety Info Channel
SK Softkey
SKP Skip Skip block
SLM Smart Line Module
SLP Safe Limited Position Safely-Limited Position
SLS Safely Limited Speed Safely-Limited Speed
SM Stepper Motor
SOS Safe Operating Stop Safe Operating Stop
SS1 Safe Stop 1 Safe Stop 1 (time-monitored, ramp-monitored)
SS2 Safe Stop 2 Safe Stop 2
SPF Subprogram file Subprogram (NC)
SPL Safe Programmable Logic
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
SRAM Static Random Access Memory Static memory block
TNRC Tool nose radius compensation
LEC Leadscrew error compensation
SSI Serial synchronous interface Serial synchronous interface
STO Safe Torque Off Safe Torque Off

Appendix A

STW Control word
GWPS Grinding wheel peripheral speed
SW Software
SYF System Files System files
SYNACT SYNACT Synchronized Action Synchronized action
TB Terminal Board (SINAMICS)
TEA Testing Data Aktive Identifier for machine data
TCP Tool Center Point Tool tip
TCU Thin Client Unit
TEA Testing Data Active Identifier for machine data
TM Terminal Module (SINAMICS)
TO Tool Offset Tool offset
TOA Tool Offset Active Identifier (file type) for tool offsets
TRANSMIT Transform Milling into Turning Coordinate conversion on turning machines for mill‐
ing operations
TTL Transistor–Transistor–Logik Interface type
UFR User Frame Zero offset
SR Subroutine
USB Universal Serial Bus
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply
VDI Internal communication interface between NC and
PLC
FDD Feed drive
VPM Voltage Protection Module
VSM Voltage Sensing Module
WAB Function "Smooth Approach and Retraction"
WCS Workpiece coordinate system
T Tool coordinate system:
TLC Tool length compensation
WPD Work Piece Directory Workpiece directory
T Tool
TM Tool management
TC Tool change
ZWS Buffer location
ZOA Zero Offset Active Identifier (file type) for zero offset data
ZSW Status word (of drive)

Appendix A
A.2 Documentation overview

*HQHUDOGRFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,.

'VO 'VO 'VO
'
$GYHUWLVLQJEURFKXUH &DWDORJ1& &DWDORJ30 6\VWHP0DQXDO 6\VWHP0DQXDO

&WUO(QHUJ\ 6PDUWPDFKLQHWRRO
RSHUDWLRQ
8VHUGRFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,.

'VO 'VO 'VO 'VO 'VO
' ' ' 6,1$0,&6
6
2SHUDWLQJ0DQXDO &UHDWH0\&RQILJ 3URJUDPPLQJ0DQXDO 3URJUDPPLQJ0DQXDO 'LDJQRVWLFV0DQXDO

ದ8QLYHUVDO 2SHUDWLQJ0DQXDO ದ)XQGDPHQWDOV ದ,627XUQLQJ $ODUPV
ದ7XUQLQJ ದ-RE3ODQQLQJ ದ,620LOOLQJ
ದ0LOOLQJ ದ0HDVXULQJ&\FOHV
ದ*ULQGLQJ
0DQXIDFWXUHU6HUYLFHGRFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,.

'VO 'VO 'VO 'VO
6,1$0,&6 6,1$0,&6
6 6
(TXLSPHQW0DQXDO 6\VWHP0DQXDO &RPPLVVLRQLQJ0DQXDO /LVWV0DQXDO

ದ1&8 *XLGHOLQHVIRU ದ&1&1&.3/& ದ0DFKLQHGDWD
ದ2SHUDWRUFRPSRQHQWV PDFKLQHFRQILJXUDWLRQ 'ULYH ದ,QWHUIDFHVLJQDOV
DQGQHWZRUNLQJ ದ%DVHVRIWZDUHDQG ದ9DULDEOHV
ದ$', RSHUDWLQJVRIWZDUH
0DQXIDFWXUHU6HUYLFHGRFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,.

'VO 'VO 'VO
' 6,1$0,&6
6
)XQFWLRQ0DQXDO )XQFWLRQ0DQXDO )XQFWLRQ0DQXDO &RQILJXUDWLRQ0DQXDO

ದ%DVLFIXQFWLRQV 7RROPDQDJHPHQW 6DIHW\,QWHJUDWHG ದ(0&LQVWDOODWLRQJXLGHOLQH
ದ([WHQGHG)XQFWLRQV ದ,QGXVWULDOVHFXULW\
ದ6SHFLDO)XQFWLRQV
ದ6\QFKURQL]HG$FWLRQV
ದ,62'LDOHFWV
,QIR7UDLQLQJ (OHFWURQLFGRFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,180(5,. 6,180(5,.
'2&RQ&' ,QGXVWU\2QOLQH ,QGXVWU\0DOO

6XSSRUW6,26
7UDLQLQJGRFXPHQWDWLRQ 7RRODQG0ROG
ದ6LPSOHPLOOLQJ 0DNLQJ0DQXDO
ZLWK6KRS0LOO
ದ6LPSOHWXUQLQJ
ZLWK6KRS7XUQ

Appendix A


Sample Document

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Sample Document

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Preface

Document order number: 6FC5397-3CP40-6BA2 Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 - 2018.

NC variables and interface signals

NC variables and interface signals

NC variables and interface signals

3.2.3.19 SE: Setting data............................................................................................................... ....374

NC variables and interface signals

3.2.7.1 AD: Adapter data................................................................................................................1131

NC variables and interface signals

4.1.3 Function blocks (FCs)...................................................................................................... ..1240

NC variables and interface signals

4.8.8 DB18, additional data areas: Extended data area........................................................... ..1297

NC variables and interface signals

4.19.2 DB1072, interface for the spindle: Multitool..................................................................... ..1363

NC variables and interface signals

NC variables and interface signals

5.2.7 DB11 DBX0.7 (mode group reset)................................................................................... ..1415

NC variables and interface signals

5.4.25 DB19 DBW24 (current screen number)........................................................................... ..1432

NC variables and interface signals

NC variables and interface signals

5.5.91 DB21, ... DBX35.3 (program state "interrupted")............................................................. ..1490

NC variables and interface signals

5.5.141 DB21, ... DBX278.0 – 279.1 (channel-specific protection zone 1 - 10 violated).................1513

NC variables and interface signals

5.5.192 DB21, … DBX378.0 (ASUB active)....................................................................................1534

NC variables and interface signals

NC variables and interface signals

5.6.96 DB31, ... DBX62.1 (handwheel override active).................................................................1598

NC variables and interface signals

5.6.148 DB31, ... DBW86 (M function for spindle)........................................................................ ..1622

NC variables and interface signals

5.6.200 DB31, … DBX132.4 (sensor S4 available (piston end position))..................................... ..1646

NC variables and interface signals

5.8.24 DB72 DBW(n+28) (new tool: Location type).................................................................... ..1666

NC variables and interface signals

5.11.9 DB1072 DBW(n+18) (new tool: Size left)...........................................................................1684

NC variables and interface signals

NC variables and interface signals

1.2 Warranty and liability for application examples

NC variables and interface signals

1.3 Industrial security

Further information is provided on the Internet:

NC variables and interface signals

NC variables and interface signals

NC variables and interface signals

2.2 Interface signals

NC variables and interface signals

W1 Function Manual, Basic Functions; submanual W1: Tool offset

Interface signals - overview

/FB2-K3/ Function Manual Expansion Functions; submanual K3: Compensations

NC variables and interface signals

Code Manual Submanuals (code)

NC variables and interface signals

NC variables and interface signals

Table 3-1 Assignment of the TO areas

3.1.2 Data blocks

Overview of the available data blocks

NC variables and interface signals

Data block Area

NC variables and interface signals

Data block Area

NC variables and interface signals

3.1.3 Variable types